

COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 





































































THE MAJESTIC 

HOME TRAINING COURSES 

OF 

THE RALSTON COMPANY 

EMBRACING 

ALL HUMAN POWERS 

1. PERSONAL MAGNETISM . . . Price $5 

In Seven Major Steps 

2. ADVANCED MAGNETISM . . . Price $7 

Control of Others Through the Feelings 

(Formerly $25.) 

3. MENTAL MAGNETISM .... Price $7 

Mastery in All the Conflicts of Life 

(Formerly $25.) 

4. SEX MAGNETISM . (Formerly $25.) Price $7 

Private Studies for Male and Female 

5. OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 

Gigantic Powers of the Human Brain Price $7 

(Formerly $25.) 

6. SOLUTION OF LIFE (Formerly $25.) Price $7 

Keys to the Deepest Mysteries of Existence 

7. UNIVERSAL MAGNETISM . . . Price $10 

Secret Lessons in Control of Self and Others 

(Formerly $50.) 

8. FUTURE SEEING AND DESTINY Price $10 

1000 Profound Lessons in Philosophy 
(Formerly $100.) 

Now offered in new and enlarged editions, for cash, 
at above reduced prices. Send for descriptive circulars. 
- f- 

THE RALSTON UNIVERSITY PRESS 
MERIDEN, CONN. 






OPERATIONS 

OF THE 

OTHER MIND 

>--• 

MAKING KNOWN THE UNSEEN POWERS 
OF THE 

UNIVERSE 

IN THEIR CONTROL OVER HUMAN LIFE 


+ 


TAUGHT BY 

EDMUND SHAFTESBURY 

V 



ISSUED BY THE 

RALSTON UNIVERSITY PRESS 
MERIDEN, CONN. 

1924 




-£>f w^\ 

' \c\?.^r 


COPYRIGHT, 1924 
BY 

RALSTON COMPANY 

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 


©Cl A808704 
Printed in U. S. A. 


NOV-8 *24 

/■ 


DEDICATION 


N THIS year 1924 we stand face to face with many new 
offerings of human knowledge, and we are recognizing those 
abler minds that have brought to light a whole world of facts 
generation ago would not have been regarded as real enough 
to win our belief. To the men and women whose studious efforts 
have achieved so much for the benefit of mankind, it is the earnest 
wish of the author of this system of study to render such appreciation 
as may lie in his power, which he seeks to do by this Dedication. 



EDMUND SHAFTESBURY. 










THE CYCLES OF KNOWLEDGE. 


+ 


N* ORDER to present the new lines of thought and study in 
a clearer and more systematic manner than is usual in 
works of this kind, cycles will be adopted, and each step 


of progress will be made in an ascending scale of importance. 


These should be reviewed one or more times so that the value of 
what comes ahead will be better appreciated by thorough familiarity 
with what has preceded. 







NOTICE AND WARNING 


Every copy of this system of instruction known as the “Operations 
of the Other Mind,” has been permitted to come into the hands of 
its new owners, of whom you are one, on the following terms and 
conditions of transfer, which have been fully announced in advance. 

“1. The contents of this volume shall not he made known to any 
person from whom you have a right to keep your private affairs. 

“2. No form of hypnotism taught herein shall be practiced wan¬ 
tonly, or for amusement, or for any other purpose than to cure 
physical or mental illness, or help those who have need of it. 

“3. The powerful system of suggestion shall never be used for 
immoral ends, but always to strengthen the weak in purpose, and to 
uplift those who are depressed or tempted. 

“The foregoing conditions are absolutely necessary; as the indis¬ 
criminate use of these powers would prove dangerous to the public. 
The number of copies that will be sent out is sure to be limited, as 
the price and character of the work will keep it in the hands of a 
select clientele.” 

Any student of this volume will readily understand why its teach¬ 
ings in careless hands will do great harm, besides making known 
many secret operations that are sure to set up too much competition 
in life if given freely to those who pay nothing for so much value. 

If you do not already possess it, you will some day wish to receive 
the much greater work, “Universal Magnetism,” than which there is 
nothing grander in the whole scope of earth and heaven within human 
ken. That immense giant has been brought to consummation; but, in 
case YOU are to claim the right to own a copy, it may be necessary for 
you to show in the most positive manner that you have kept in good 
faith every one of the foregoing conditions as to this present work. If 
you are honorable in these matters, you will be well repaid in the 
future. 



7 


FIRST CYCLE 




S /TROt/Tril the dim vistas 
Of Primeval forests 
The pilgrim stranger 
Hews his destined way 
And builds his home . 

E STAND on moving soil. The light of Asia no sooner 
shone on civilized man than it bade him pass on. 
Four thousand years ago he reached the Mediter¬ 
ranean; one thousand years ago he reached the isles 
of northwest Europe; four hundred years ago he found 
the Western World. To-day he lifts his eyes upward, for he has 
circled the earth. 

As in one bound, all intelligent forces are to-day bending their 
energies to the task of penetrating the veil that hides the realm of 
knowledge of all things from the realm of the physical brain. Civiliza¬ 
tion has reached its climax. An increase of mental acuteness can 
have no other outlet than the accumulation of unwieldy wealth, 
luxury and degeneracy. The true soul turns his gaze from these and 
looks in the direction of progress. There is hut one road ahead, and 
it leads us through the realm of psychic mind. 

We start with the proposition that this is the most important study 
in the whole range of human existence. 

There is more at stake, and greater results are obtainable herein 
than in any of the scores of works that we have put forth. 

This is a cycle of propositions. 

The fact stares us in the face that proofs are not to be relied upon 
if they lead the way to wrong conclusions. Many of the ablest 
physicians in the United States have voiced the opinions that have 
been openly expressed by a few of their greatest men, somewhat after 
the following line of argument: 







8 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


Many years ago a doctor wrote to ns his reasons for not believing 
in the existence of the soul; and several other doctors stated the same 
thing in about the same language. Here is a quotation from one of 
the letters: (( I have seen men and women unconscious in sleep, and 
at the mercy of any foe or natural force that might overwhelm them. 
All they possessed in life was wrapped in unconsciousness. A breath 
of gas, or a blow might end all. How then can so frail a being as 
man be more than a transient life on earth ? It is proof to me that 
there is nothing in the human body but its animal organism, and a 
collection of gray matter that thinks while it is conscious. Sleep, 
fainting and death are all alike, and only degrees of each other.” 

His argument, summed up in brief form, was that there was 
nothing imperishable in the body because it became unconscious in 
sleep, and sleep was a degree of death. Yet many able minds are 
satisfied with this argument. 

On the other hand, and at the other extreme, is the conclusion 
drawn by persons who witness the phenomena of gravity, as where a 
table rises from the floor. The logic proceeds in this way: The 
table is not lifted by human agency, and therefore it must be raised 
by spirits. What possible foundation is there for such a conclusion ? 

In the case where it was asserted that a pack of cards passed 
through a wall from one room to another, persons who were made 
to believe that the transaction did actually occur, drew the con¬ 
clusion that the cards must have been passed through the wall by 
spirits. What possible connection was there between spirits and 
the act itself? There are a hundred other explanations that may 
be suggested, all independent of the spirits. Is the rising of a table, 
or the movements of a pack of cards to be accepted as proof of a 
hereafter ? 

But there have been claims of the making of sounds, the writing 
of words and letters, the disclosures of secrets and other phenomena 
that, on being found true, have been regarded as conclusive proofs 
of the works of spirits. A famous society has said in substance: 
"If we can be satisfied that any person can, when blind-folded and 
at a distance, count a pile of oranges, we will believe in the exist¬ 
ence of spirits.” 

The fault is in the conclusion. There is not the slightest connec¬ 
tion between spirit life and counting oranges. 

People go to great pains and expense to secure proofs of facts, 
and then jump to deductions that are wholly disconnected from the 


IN THE CLEARING 


9 


proofs and facts. Societies for psychical research are spending great 
sums of money in ascertaining if some man by the name of Brown 
is able to keep his promise to communicate with them after his death. 
Now suppose Brown actually made the promise, as is likely, and 
that, after he is dead, a person in a trance receives the message, 
“I am Brown,” what does it prove ? There is yet an impassable gulf 
to be bridged before the conclusion can he drawn that it is the spirit 
of Brown who says, "I am Brown.” Suppose Brown actually tells 
of his life on earth, reveals secrets that no one knew, states his 
present place of abode, and adds everything that the seeker after 
light can desire, there is yet not one iota of actual proof that it is 
the spirit of Brown that is making the statement. Courts of justice 
are generally based on laws of evidence that are as fixed in their 
solidity as the foundations of a great temple; and there is not a 
court in the civilized world that would consider for a moment the 
right of a witness to draw the conclusion that the statements made 
by the supposed Brown were themselves evidence of their truth. 

If everything that the societies for psychic research are seeking 
to prove is offered them in absolute certainty, even then there is 
no connection between the spirit land and their evidence. It does 
not require a keen mind to see the lack of connection between phe¬ 
nomena and the spirits. There are no superhuman acts that carry 
with them the proof that they are caused by spirits. 

The timid mind, the fearful mind, the nervous mind, the willing 
mind may accept the deductions offered by other persons; but they 
do so without full thinking. There should always be “room to let” 
in your brain; places not filled by prejudices or beliefs incapable of 
being changed. In this age more than ever before in the history of 
the world, the mind should be free to accept the truth as it is, and 
not as it is wanted to be. 

In our own case we have no desire to force on another person any 
fixed belief; nor have we any intention of eluding facts. We do not 
care which way the facts tend, if they are really facts. We want the 
truth, and we will gladly go anywhere it carries us. Some teachers 
twist and contort facts to suit their theories. We have no theories, 
and let the facts speak for themselves. 

This much has been said for the purpose of cautioning our students 
against accepting the conclusions drawn by others who assume that 
a set of phenomena prove the truth of deductions that actually have 
no connection with them. 


10 OPERATIONS OF, TEE OTHER MIND 

SOME PROPOSITION'S. 

1. All life is physical or psychic. 

2. Physical life possesses intelligence and power. 

3. Psychic life possesses knowledge and magnetism. 

4. Every human being is a combination of physical and psychic life. 

5. Intelligence tells what to do and how to do it, and power executes 
the act as a part of existence. 

6. Knowledge includes what has been; what is; and what will be, 
when the purpose of the future is already settled. 

7. Magnetism is the power that puts knowledge into execution and 
thus makes it serve its destiny. 

8. As a human being is both physical and psychic, it follows that 
man is four-sided; his conscious mind, psychic mind, physical body, 
and psychic life making the four parts. 

9. The true names for these four parts are as follows: 

Human intelligence is the physical mind. 

The animal organism is the physical body. 

Knowledge is the Psychic Mind. 

Magnetism is the psychic life. 

10. The functions of these four parts are suggested as follows: 

The physical mind is consciousness. 

The physical body is power. 

The psychic mind is the “Other Mind.” 

The psychic life is ethereal existence. 

11. Telepathy is knowledge, and as knowledge is psychic, it must 
of necessity follow that telepathy originates in the psychic realm. 

12. There are two kinds of telepathy: 

a. Physical telepathy, which is able to break through into the 
conscious mind and there find interpretation in the physical channels 
of intelligence. 

b. Psychic telepathy, which never enters the conscious mind, 
and is interpreted solely by psychic laws. 

13. Physical telepathy is confined wholly to the thoughts, feelings, 
events and history of human life in the physical body. 

14. Psychic telepathy is confined wholly to the knowledge of the 
vast past in all its stages from near to far; and to the present as it 
exists in the psychic world; and to that much of the vast future that 
is now planned and fixed in the universal mind. 


IN THE CLEARING 


11 


15. Physical telepathy is the product of the “Other Mind” as 
far as it relates to the physical body. 

16. The physical body is part of the earth, is made of the earth, and 
returns to the earth; having come out of the material fund of the 
earth, and rejoining the same fund after it dies. 

17. The psychic body is part of the universal life that fills all the 
heavens, is made of such life, and returns to that life after the body 
dies. 

18. All existence, therefore, in which man may participate is com¬ 
posed of the four walls of the temple as follows: 


PSYCHIC LIFE. 


P 

Jzj 

£ 


P 

<1 

o 

(—I 

m 


W 


P 



MAGNETISM. 


gq 



m 



P 




o 

GQ 


p 

0 


m 

O 


g 

5 

GQ 

O 


o 

Jz; 

W 

o 

POWER. 



P 

J2J 


O 

t—i 

w 

o 

m 

P 


PHYSICAL LIFE. 


19. All consciousness and knowledge must have life in which to 
express itself, and must of necessity have preceded the life it employs. 
The physical body, therefore, is made. 

20. As the physical body is built around the physical mind and 
is limited to earth; so the psychic body is built around the psychic 
mind, and is free from all limitations. 

21. Man, as he understands himself, is his consciousness at work in 







12 


OPERATIONS OP, THE OTHER MIND 


a physical body; but if be were able to transfer the knowledge from 
his psychic mind into his conscious mind, he would be conscious pf 
all that exists throughout the universe. 

22. The psychic mind has been trying for countless ages to break 
through into the conscious mind; and, while the incidents in which 
it has succeeded are millions in the aggregate, the effect on any one 
human being has been exceedingly small. This is not due to the 
lack of power in the psychic mind, but to the inability of the con¬ 
scious mind to admit so great a guest; just as the hovel of the serf 
cannot house the retinue of a kingly court. 

23. The conscious mind is capable of being better prepared to re¬ 
ceive the knowledge that is ever-present in the psychic mind; and to 
this end a series of studies has been prepared whereby the power 
may be cultivated. This series is a world, or university, in itself, and 
is built of four grand divisions as follows: 

First Grand Division: Physical Magnetism. 

Second Grand Division: Psychic Magnetism. 

Third Grand Division: Physical Telepathy. 

Fourth Grand Division: Psychic Telepathy. 

Physical Telepathy is the knowledge of events, thoughts and pur¬ 
poses affecting the physical body and physical life. It originates in 
the psychic mind, which for convenience we will call the “Other 
Mind.” Being thus given its origin in a realm apart from that in 
which it operates, it shows the connection between both minds, and 
the intended union of their powers in man. 

Some investigators believe that physical telepathy is the successful 
breaking through of the knowledge that springs from the psychic 
mind, into the conscious or physical mind. This belief is founded on 
the fact that every person is conscious at times of receiving knowledge 
of the thoughts of other persons, as well as of events, that could 
not have been conveyed by the ordinary channels of communication. 
Assuming that the psychic mind knows everything, it must know 
all the thoughts of other persons, all the things they say and do, and 
all their motives and plans. It knows everything that is going on 
everywhere. Such knowledge is very comprehensive. But the con¬ 
scious intelligence of man, which is his working mind, has so many 
demands on it in the form of daily duties that it cannot act as an all- 
comprehensive organ. It has too much to do to keep the body pro¬ 
vided for. On the other hand, the psychic mind has very little to 


IN THE CLEARING 


13 


do with the body; and, being part of the universal mind, it is en¬ 
dowed with a power to know all and to understand all. 

The life in the physical body is a penalty. Flesh is the prison, 
and the duration of human existence is the term for which the victim 
is sentenced. No normal and fully developed person wants to live 
this life over again. It has too much suffering in it. The attain¬ 
ment of that condition where all failures and disappointments are 
at an end and all environments are serene and perfect, is the signal 
for the approach of some new calamity. Wealth brings more un¬ 
happiness than happiness, and power is a narrow precipice over 
which one may be the more easily thrown to destruction. On every 
hand there is some enemy of health and life at work. Gardens are 
choked with weeds. The rose, by its beauty, invites us to grasp its 
stem, and we are wounded by the hidden thorns. Into this prison of 
the flesh, the life of some being is cast and made to serve its alternate 
term. The physical mind has, then, to do with the prison body. 
There are senses that spring forth from that mind, and these are 
the channels of communication between one person and another, and 
in the acts of existence. 

If a distant friend wishes to say something to you, he may write it 
and your sense of sight will carry it to your conscious mind. If one 
who is close by has something to say, he will speak it; and your 
hearing is the channel through which it is conveyed to your con¬ 
scious mind. When it is dark and you are unable to see, some one 
may take you by the hand and lead you through the shadows to 
safety; and this is the channel of touch. 

Dishonesty is everywhere present in human life. It is the second 
evil. The first is selfishness. The latter is so universal on earth 
as to receive the rank of 999 to 1000; which means that, out of 1000 
acts in life, 999 of them are instigated by selfishness. But dishonesty 
is second in rank. 

In order to sustain selfishness, it is necessary to be dishonest in 
very large degree. There is no other way. The world is so built. 
There is every kind of dishonesty, and many things that are neither 
sins nor crimes are dishonest. In the minds of the hundreds of 
persons whom you know, there are purposes locked up that would 
do you an immense amount of good if you could know what they are 
and to what extent they might be useful to you or do you harm. 
Your freedom from the penalties of life is controlled by what you 
can learn of the plans, motives and purposes of your fellow beings. 


14 


OPERATIONS 0 £ THE OTHER MIND 


The psychic mind, therefore, holds the key to this freedom. It 
knows everything; but, as the physical mind is weighted down with 
the duties of providing for the physical body, the knowledge of the 
psychic mind does not enter the physical mind. The latter, being 
consciousness, has no means of grasping the knowledge with which the 
former teems, unless it prepares the way to receive so royal a visitor. 

But there are leaks, as we will call them. They let in the knowl¬ 
edge in very small pieces at times; and in great volume on some 
occasions; all depending on the condition of the physical mind to re¬ 
ceive the visitations. 

Physical Telepathy is nothing more or less than the passage of 
knowledge into the conscious mind, out of the “Other Mind.” It 
often brings many facts of tremendous weight; and still more often 
it brings mere thoughts, moods, feelings and the happenings of life. 
But what it does bring is wholly applicable to the needs or the asso¬ 
ciations of the physical body. 

This fact should be kept in mind at all times. 

Psychic Telepathy, on the other hand, while it originates in the 
psychic mind, includes knowledge that relates to ethereal life, or 
the existence of the psychic body. 

Such knowledge cannot be interpreted in the physical mind, and 
can be understood only by psychic laws. Reason, logic and the men¬ 
tal processes of the conscious mind are useful only in the latter 
mind. A man who declares that he will accept only what his reason 
tells him is true, will never know anything of the truth beyond 
his physical faculties. 

On the threshold of the grandest study ever undertaken, let the 
seeker after knowledge make sure of his footing. His acquaintance 
with his physical mind is wholly limited by his consciousness of the 
information which he obtains from it. He believes what he sees, 
what he hears, what he feels, smells and tastes, and has faith in the 
deductions drawn by his conscious mind; yet all these are parts of 
his physical existence, and have nothing to do with real knowledge. 
That must come from an other source and be interpreted by laws 
that are altogether different from those he has employed. 

Psychic Telepathy is the knowledge that comes to the psychic 
mind, called in the present work, the “Other Mind,” and having 
relation wholly to things, facts, events, plans, thoughts and purposes 
that are a part of the great universal life that fills all the sky, and all 
the heavens that are set in the sky. The scope of this tremendous 


IN THE CLEARING 


15 


work is easy to comprehend when it is remembered that the psychic 
mind is in the psychic life, and the psychic life is universal. 

How can Psychic Telepathy he brought to the understanding of 
humanity if it is far removed from it? has been asked many times. 
In the first place, it is not far removed from it, but is in and through 
all humanity at all times. 

But how can laws be made by which to interpret the knowledge 
of the psychic mind? The same question has been asked regarding 
physical telepathy. This hook is the answer to the latter. Until 
you have read and studied the pages of this work, you wilj/not real¬ 
ize how very easy it is to understand the science and even the practice 
of so great a process as physical telepathy. 

After you have mastered this book, think of the ease with which 
you have come to comprehend all that it teaches. There is nothing 
hard at any stage of the way. Yet it seemed impossible before you 
saw it. The system which is made clear to you herein, proves itself 
all along the course, and you KNOW that it is true. 

These statements are made at this place in order to give you cour¬ 
age. While Psychic Telepathy is a much deeper and a far more 
magnificent study, and its scope is so broad that it would seem 
impossible at first thought to ever master it, the simplicity and 
certainty of its laws will amaze you. Of course the laws are not like 
those that apply to physical telepathy; nor are they in any way akin 
to them. All is different. The very fact that every human being 
carries in the present life a constant and never ceasing association 
with the psychic life and mind, ought to account for the ease with 
which so far-reaching a subject may be mastered. But the work is 
as all-embracing as the heavens themselves; and, if it is ever put 
into type, it will engage the attention of the ambitious student for 
many years. Physical telepathy may be disposed of in a brief time; 
but Psychic Telepathy will fascinate as long as life shall endure. 

It is a wholesome and stimulating study, full of inspiring im¬ 
pulses in myriad realms of investigation through all phases of ex¬ 
istence not earthly. As the present work answers all questions about 
the phenomena which have puzzled the physical mind and led to false 
systems of belief, so psychic telepathy will clear away all clouds con¬ 
cerning the great worlds beyond. 

The relation of magnetism to telepathy will also be constantly 
referred to as the work progresses in the following pages. Magnetism 
is power, or the executive force of life in any form. It performs. To 


16 


OPERATIONS OF TIIE OTHER MIND 


know is not enough. There never has been any stage of intelligence 
that was of real value until it bore fruit. The useful man must do 
something useful; or he will be a great book on a dusty shelf that con¬ 
tains wisdom. It serves no purpose until its contents are put into 
some form of achievement. 

We can do nothing without magnetism. 

From the smallest act of life to the grandest, there is some mag¬ 
netism at work in the execution of the details of existence. But mag¬ 
netism is capable of growth like wisdom and knowledge. It may 
be cultivated or left to itself. 

As one illustration, given merely to show the usefulness of mag¬ 
netism, we will cite the fact that the “Other Mind” can be aroused 
only by hypnosis when magnetism is lacking; but the physical mind 
is fully awake, conscious and powerful when aided by magnetism, 
which makes hypnosis not merely unnecessary but in the way. This 
one advantage of itself leads to results that are almost unlimited when 
we seek to associate the operations of the “Other Mind” with the 
conscious brain. 

In full wakefulness, in ordinary sleep, and under thousands of cir¬ 
cumstances that are all the time arising, the power of magnetism 
is able to throw into the physical mind much of the knowledge that 
exists in the Other Mind that would otherwise never be available. 

Thus we see that the study of life is four-sided, like the walls of a 
mighty temple. 

1. The conscious mind may be wholly ignorant of the knowledge 
that is contained in the Other Mind. 

2. The conscious mind may be informed of all the knowledge con¬ 
tained in the Other Mind as far as it relates to the affairs of physical 
existence. 

3. The conscious mind can never become cognizant of any of the 
knowledge contained in the Other Mind as far as that knowledge 
relates to existence not physical. 

4. The Other Mind teems with knowledge beyond the physical, and 
it can be interpreted only by laws that apply to its own realm. In 
all the works, systems and teachings that have thus far been given 
to the world, there has been no hint or theory even as to what these 
laws are; but, nevertheless, they exist and can be made as plain as 
the laws of this present work. Some years ago, and in fact until 
very recent date, it was claimed that the laws of physical telepathy 
were not explainable. This book is the reply to that claim. 


17 


SECOND CYCLE 



B HE throbbing, 'pulsing mind 
Imprints its fleeting thoughts 
Upon the wireless air 
And every human brain 
That bears the message home . 
A transient station is 


0 a large majority of our students this cycle is unneces¬ 
sary. But there are many persons who have not yet 
made up their beliefs in the power of telepathy as it 
is so often manifested in daily life. Some actually 
deny such power, but they are not more than one per¬ 
son in a thousand. Among an almost countless host of correspond¬ 
ents and students, we sought to find fifty who had never had any 
experience in thought transference; and it required a long time to 
secure this number. The real fact is that they had never given at¬ 
tention to the operations of the mind that are known as telepathy; 
and their non-belief was due to lack of investigation. Many of the 
incidents cited in this cycle are derived from their reports made 
after having given the matter attention. Such cases are of greater 
value than if they had come from among persons who were over- 
zealous in their advocacy of thought transference. 

1. Two men were sitting on the bank of a river at night, while the 
full moon was rising in the east. These men were strangers to each 
other and had sought the place merely as a means of rest after the 
heat of the day. One of them addressed the other with the remark: 
“You are a lawyer, are you not?”—“I am. How did you know 
that? Do you live in my city?”—“Ho, I do not live in Chicago.” 

The only explanation he could offer was that the impulse of the 
idea came to him and he gave it expression. Later on in the evening 
he added the statement, “I believe that you are going to Boston to 
look up a land title.” This was true. 






18 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


2. A woman who had stopped at the house of another woman to 
inquire about a sick child, said that she was on her way to the market 
to buy her dinner for the next day. The other woman said, “You 
are fond of spring lamb, I believe.** She enumerated three other 
things that the caller had intended to purchase. When asked how 
she knew, all she could say was that the ideas sprang into her mind 
as she sat there, and she mentioned them as a matter of course, 
just as though she had been told them audibly. 

3. A minister who was listening to the claims being made by a 
man who was inclined to study for the profession of preaching, sud¬ 
denly turned to him and said, "How can you overcome the objection 
that will be raised by the church when it is known that you were 
arrested and tried in court ?”■—The man colored deeply and wished 
to know how the clergyman ascertained that fact.— 1 “Do you know 
what I was arrested for?”—“Yes. You cut a wire fence when you 
were hunting.”—The surprise of the man was unbounded.—“Few 
persons in this world know that. Even my wife and son have known 
nothing of it. How did you find it out?”—The minister could not 
tell him that it came through thought transference, as it would 
weaken the weight of the matter; so he said he did not care to let 
him know how he found out the facts. The man then admitted them 
to be true and explained them in a manner satisfactory to the clergy¬ 
man. The charge was a technical one, and at the trial he was ac¬ 
quitted; but the knowledge of it was vital to the future of the man 
in choosing a profession. 

4. A lawyer was cross-examining a witness in court in a civil case; 
and was in a losing position. His own client, although honest, had 
not been able to stand up under the rigid fire of the opposing coun¬ 
sel; and their best witnesses had likewise been torn asunder by the 
very skilful lawyer. The latter had said to his client and to him¬ 
self many times: “I hope the other side will not get hold of one 
fact; for, if they do, we are lost.” His thinking of that fact evi¬ 
dently worked upon the mind of the less able attorney who was 
floundering about with a rambling line of questions to which ob¬ 
jections were often made and sustained. While apparently in despair 
a single fact came into his brain. He saw it, and saw a big ques¬ 
tion mark at its end, as much as to invite him to ask about it. He 
began to do so, and secured at length some admissions which won 
his case. But he was as much amazed at the intrusion of the 
thought into his brain as if it had been put there by a surgical oper- 


THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE 


19 


ation. Later on he came to the conclusion that lawyers who could 
cultivate the power of telepathy would win many more cases thereby; 
and he took up the study systematically for that purpose. 

5. Two young ladies were walking along the street together and 
one stopped short and inquired: a Did you just say to me that you 
were twenty years old to-day?”—“No, indeed, I did not. I never 
mentioned it all. How did you know it?”—It was a clear case of 
thoughts leaping from one mind to another. 

6. A clerk in a mechanical house suddenly rushed into a private 
office of his employer and said: “You left your pocketbook on the 
table in your sitting room, and a servant will soon be in the room.” 
—The merchant found this to be true, and marveled at it.—Two 
weeks later the same employer called the young man into his office 
and said: “I believe that you have organized a baseball club and 
would like an afternoon off now and then. How about that?”—It 
was true, yet the merchant had no knowledge of the fact until the 
thought leaped into his brain. Here were two persons of different 
stations in life whose minds were reciprocal. In the next winter 
they both took up the study of thought transference in order to in¬ 
crease its efficiency. 

7. A teacher had been having trouble with an unruly boy and 
was unable to find out his name, as the other pupils professed ig¬ 
norance. She gave the matter up for a while. Later on she called 
out the name of the boy, and he came forward at once.—“Why did 
you not come to me when I first asked?”—The boy said: “I did 
not think you knew who was to blame, and I waited for you to find 
out.”—She often referred to the incident and said that she did not 
try to think out the name of the boy; but it came suddenly into her 
mind and she had asked him to come forward before she realized 
what she was doing. 

8. Another lawyer whose progress in a trial was blocked by his 
inability to touch the other side at a vulnerable point, had three ques¬ 
tions come into his mind, all of which were vital to the issue; and 
they led him to victory. These inquiries came to him when he was 
cross-examining opposing witnesses, and at three different times. 
They seemed to leap at him, and he was asking about them before 
he realized how the instigation came. One of them related to a 
transaction and private contract made by the attorney on the other 
side with his client. It was a matter that both had agreed to keep 
in the closest secrecy; and the lawyer at once charged his client with 


20 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


treachery on the theory that, as the two were the only persons familiar 
with the making of the contract, he, the client, must have told of it. 
There was no other way. On this point it is well to state that thou¬ 
sands of incidents have been found where similar charges of treachery 
and double-dealing have been made against innocent persons. 

9. A woman reports a case where a little girl was punished for 
disclosing a secret which her mother had confided in her, and made 
her promise not to tell her father. The latter, sitting with the girl 
by a table, reading the evening paper, suddenly turned to the child 
and said: “Your mother has gone to a card party. Why did you 
not tell me?”—It seems that the husband never suspected his wife 
of attending card parties, and the matter had not been the subject of 
any conversation between them. He did not even suppose she cared 
for cards. He gave no more thought of it, but went to bed. Later 
on he heard the cries of the child, who informed her mother on the 
latter’s return that her father knew all about the card party.— 
“Then you must have told him,” said the angry mother. But the 
little girl was innocent. 

10. A clergyman tells the following incident himself, and we will 
let his letter be printed as he wrote it: “I was walking along the 
crowded streets one morning and chanced upon a man whom I had 
not had the pleasure of seeing for more than a year. I knew him, 
but his name slipped from my mind and I could not call him by 
name and told him so. I asked him why he had not been to church 
for a year and he said he had tried to get around, but was so tired on 
Sundays that he had to stay at home and rest. I then said to him, 
‘You were on an excursion all day last Sunday.’—He seemed sur¬ 
prised at the statement, but confessed to its truth, and claimed that he 
needed the recreation. After a minute’s conversation on another 
subject I told him that I was sorry to learn of the death of his 
brother in Europe. He declared that his brother was living and that 
he had received a letter from him a short time before. But he was 
desirous of knowing how I got the information. I replied, “I do not 
know how I got it. I did not know you were on an excursion last 
Sunday. I spoke in both instances without deliberation.’—The man 
was bright enough to attribute the phenomena to the transference 
of thought; but the matter of his brother’s death could not have been 
taken from the man’s mind, as he knew nothing of it. I will not 
attempt to suggest explanations, as I know of none that will make 
it clear.” It was afterward learned that the brother in Europe had 


THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE 


21 


died two days before the conversation, and that no news of the fact 
had been wired across the ocean. Why it should have entered the 
mind of the minister and not the mind of the man he was speaking 
to, puzzled them both. The explanation is this: 

The brother in Europe, hoping to survive his illness and meet his 
brother in America, talked about him during his last sickness, and 
evidently thought of him. The knowledge of the death must have 
reached the mind of the brother in America; but the latter’s con¬ 
sciousness, not being able to receive knowledge from his Other Mind, 
gave him no information; while the clergyman, being of a more 
acute mind, caught the knowledge from the Other Mind of the man 
with whom he was talking. This is a common occurrence, and will 
explain the most troublous of all the problems with which the so¬ 
cieties have to deal. 

11. A similar case is a typical one, as between the living and the 
dead: 

A man who had promised that, if he were to die before other 
members of a psychic society, he would send back some message, was 
called up through a well-known and thoroughly trustworthy me¬ 
dium. She gave forth a writing that purported to have been dictated 
by the spirit of the dead man; and in it he disclosed a secret that 
had been known only to him and a friend who lived seven thousand 
miles away. To make the matter more sure, the friend was kept 
in total ignorance of the whole proceeding. In fact, it was not 
until this writing appeared that any of the survivors of the society 
knew either of the secret or the friend; the latter’s name being in¬ 
cluded in the writing. In all the lore of psychology, there never was 
any case so sure. Of all the learned men who took in this informa¬ 
tion, not one could find any explanation save that the dead man had 
kept his word and had furnished the most positive proof of his ex¬ 
istence in spirit form. But the true explanation is very simple: 

The woman possessed an active psychic mind, and was able to 
hypnotize herself into a trance, as thousands are able to do at the 
present day. In this trance state, her Other Mind was in evidence, 
and the writing was produced by it. The Other Mind of the dead 
man had, during his life, conveyed to his close friends the secret 
and the name of his distant friend who alone knew it; this knowledge 
finding lodgment in the Other Mind of one or more of those to 
whom he made the promise to reveal himself after he died. But he 
did not reveal himself through this secret and the name of his far- 


22 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


away friend while lie lived, and the secret and name were kept there 
until the Other Mind of the medium beheld them and called them 
forth. 

The process is plain and simple enough, as soon as it is under¬ 
stood. 

12. In another case a man who died with a most vital and im¬ 
portant secret, to which no other person had been admitted, said to 
some of his friends: “I have carried all my life, since a young man, 
a secret that is so deep that no suspicion of it has ever reached 
anyone. It is wholly mine, and will die with me. After I am dead, 
I propose to make the effort to send it back to you. If I succeed, you 
will know what it is from directions that will be sent from the spirit 
world. There can be no mistaking them. When once you have 
these directions, you will know how to discover the secret and it will 
surprise you all as you have never before been surprised in your 
lives.” 

After he had been dead a year or more, a medium secured connec¬ 
tion with his spirit, as she claimed, and some numbers were written 
down. These had no value at the time. At another sitting, she 
obtained two names, and a further number; while the first numbers 
were repeated. Still they were all at sea. The third meeting brought 
something more intelligible, and then the method of ascertaining the 
secret was fully explained. It led to the discovery of a box of papers 
of great value and importance. The following facts were clearly 
proven: 

No person living had any knowledge of the secret. 

No person could be found who had any suspicion of its existence. 

The information came through a genuine medium; not one of the 
common pretenders who are so numerous. 

The medium herself had no knowledge of the man during his life, 
and could not by any possibility have had any knowledge of the 
secret. 

The persons to whom the man, when living, made his promise to 
convey the message after death, were wholly ignorant of the secret, 
and had never had any interest in it, nor could they gain any ad¬ 
vantage by its discovery. 

These persons, however, were interested solely in the question 
whether the man could furnish proof of his ability to report to them 
from spirit land, as he called it. 

When he made the great promise to them, they were present and 


THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE 


23 


intensely interested in the problem. At that time, the Other Mind 
of each one of them was able to receive the secret, numbers and 
names from the conscious mind of the man; for he had it in both his 
conscious and his Other Mind. There cannot be the slightest doubt 
that he imparted it to the Other Mind of each person present. As 
the Other Mind is all-knowing and all-powerful, it could have easily 
carried it forever. 

When the medium was requested to sit in the affair a year or more 
after his death, she had her Other Mind openly receiving the one 
great secret that had lodged and been retained in the Other Mind 
of each person in her presence. 

13. A man who had also carried in his mind a secret that he 
would not have known for worlds, began to think too much about 
it. The result was that his sister caught the impression and began 
to think at times of the very same thing. At length she sought in¬ 
formation concerning it, and pursued the matter until she had ascer¬ 
tained the whole secret. 

14. A very peculiar case was thoroughly investigated by us and 
every detail of it found true. It involved three persons in order to 
complete the transfer of the thought. A woman whose husband w".s 
not as faithful to her as he had vowed to be, was always able to 
catch ideas from his mind when his brother was present. She could 
not do so when the two were alone; nor when any other person was 
present. The brother did not know of the power that his presence set 
in motion. Since the investigation of this case, our attention has 
been called to others that were founded on the same condition. In 
one case a child was the cause of the separation of her parents because 
she set up the channel of thought transference between them. 

15. Ordinary instances of this power are so common that it is 
almost unnecessary to recall them here. But as they have come into 
the experience of nearly every person, it may serve a purpose to 
make the most frequent of them known at this stage of the study.— 
Only a day or two ago a young man said to us: “Is it not strange 
that I should have the same thought come to me that my classmate 
has come to him? I was just asking him a question on a subject 
that neither of us had been thinking of for months, and he started in 
the same breath to ask me the same question. This happened once 
before on another subject.”—The experience is almost universal. 

16. Two women who were salesladies in a department store were 
often catching each other’s inquiries in advance of their utterance. 


24 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


One of them makes this statement: “Becently I was in a hurry to 
find a certain garment that had been laid away some weeks before 
on account of the lateness of the season. I knew of someone who 
was coming to look at it, and I had forgotten where it had been put. 
So I made haste to hunt it up. I was approaching Miss B. to ask 
her; but before I had opened my mouth, she told me where I would 
find it. I thought she had knowledge of what I wanted, but she said 
that as she saw me coming she believed I was to ask for the garment, 
and she answered me as naturally as she would have done if I had 
actually asked her for it.” 

17. Two partners in business had grown so much to know what 
each had in mind that one would anticipate almost any inquiry be¬ 
fore it was made and give the needed information. The power was 
the same with both partners. One told it in this way: “If I go 
into the front office with a look of inquiry on my face, Joe will 
answer my question before I ask it. I do the same. The other day, 
as he was coming into my room, I took from the second drawer of 
my desk a small pass book and was holding it in my hand waiting 
for him to take it as he entered. He gave me a glance, saw the booK, 
took it, and went out, and did not say a word. Before I saw or 
heard him coming I knew what he wanted, and I took it out at 
once. The pass book was not often referred to, not oftener than 
once in three months, so it could not have been due to my knowing 
that he sought the book. He came to my room a hundred times or 
more prior to this time, and always on a different errand; that is, 
not for the pass book.”—At our request the partners made a record 
of the number of incidents of thought transference that occurred 
in a month, where there could not be any doubt of the passing of 
thoughts by other channels than the ordinary senses; and they 
reported seventy-two such cases in that length of time. They also 
added the incidents, and these were of all varieties. It was an in¬ 
teresting list. The two men are keen in mind, shrewd in business, 
and have never been deceived in any transaction. They read their 
fellow beings like books, and with certainty. This habit has grown 
on them in the past ten years. 

18. A man who was being urged by his wife to attend church one 
Sunday morning, said: “The minister has a sermon on the rich 
man and the eye of the needle, and I do not care for it.”—The wife 
thought that her husband was making a bluff, as she termed it, and 
said she would assure him that the minister had no such sermon. 


THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE 


25 


This led to a debate in which both became very positive, and to see 
who was right, both went to church. The sermon was on the rich 
man and the eye of the needle. After it was over, they went to 
the minister, told the circumstances, and were informed that the ser¬ 
mon that had been intended for that morning was on a different 
subject, but that at the last moment he decided to preach the one 
they had heard.—“I do not know what impelled me to make the 
change at the last moment, hut the idea came strongly to me to sub¬ 
stitute one for the other for the morning, and use the other sermon 
for the evening.”—The wife was of the opinion that the clergyman 
had discussed the subject with her husband at some time previous; 
but this was shown not to be the fact. She then said: “My hus¬ 
band is not fond of going to church on Sunday mornings; and, as it is 
often the case that men of wealth are compelled to listen to sermons 
on riches, I am of the opinion that he made a bold guess when he 
stated that you were to preach on the rich man and the eye of the 
needle.”—In reply to this assumption the minister said: “In all 
my pastorate here of eight years I have never yet said a word on that 
subject. But during the past week I have for the first time taken 
it up, and have been diligent in preparing it. But I have not had 
any conversation with your husband for several weeks. Nor did I 
have any intention to deal with this subject until last Monday. 
There is no way in which he could have received information from me 
or any one else.”—The husband said: “I wanted to make some ex¬ 
cuse to my wife about going to church, and I uttered the first words 
that came to me. They sprang into my mind in a flash and that is 
the first I knew of them or had thought of them.” 

19. A boy not over eleven years of age was going home with his 
father and mother one evening about nine o’clock, when suddenly he 
exclaimed: “Oh, do not go in the house. I know some man is 
hiding in there.” The parents were not superstitious, nor believers in 
any of the dark arts or sciences; but they yielded to the entreaties of 
the boy, and summoned a policeman who was nearby, and told him of 
the fears of the boy. The officer in a good-natured way said he 
iwould go in, if they would give him the key. This he did, and as 
he entered the front hall a shot rang out. He fell wounded to 
the steps. Other officers came, and eventually captured a desperado 
who was hiding in the house. This case was investigated, and every 
detail shown to be true as stated above. There was nothing by which 
the boy could have been put on his guard; and, when interrogated as 


26 


OPERATIONS OF, TEE OTHER MIND 


to why he said what he did, the only answer he could make was that 
he believed some one was in the house who would kill his father. 

20. A woman was giving a reception to some friends, and all were 
on the second floor of the house. She soon excused herself and went 
to a rear room, calling down through the tube to the kitchen. She 
said: “Go to the basement and lock the door leading to the yard.” 
The butler did this. A man ran out just in front of him. The 
woman on the second floor again called down: “Go to the corner and 
call an officer, as I think there is a burglar hanging about the yard.” 
—This was done and the burglar was arrested. The woman said she 
did not hear nor did she see the man, but felt that he was there. 

21. A man who had never been involved in any wrong, but whose 
character was of the highest, was about to retire one evening about 
ten o’clock, when a strong feeling came over him that he was the 
subject of special hostility on the part of a gang of corrupt politicians 
who proposed to hide their crimes behind his good name. He told 
his wife that something was wrong down town, and he was going 
but he did not know where he was going. On leaving the house, he 
called at the home of a legal friend who was still up; and the two 
proceeded to a certain club of which they were members. As they 
entered, the chairman of the executive committee said: “I am glad 
you have come. Have you heard what is going on? We can head 
them off if we lose no time.”—That very hour a detective was em¬ 
ployed and put at work; and before morning dawned three of the 
gang were under arrest. The burden of the whole affair was shifted 
to the guilty parties with the result that the man’s name was not 
even mentioned, nor was there ever a suspicion that he might have 
been involved in the trouble. This was a case of useful transference 
of thought. 

22. Husbands and wives who are in thorough sympathy with each 
other, sooner or later come to look something alike, if not in features 
at least in the expression of their faces; and this is due to their 
mutual habits of thinking. In all such cases they are quick to know 
each other’s thoughts, as has been proved many times in individual 
instances. There are many medical cases, some reported in the 
books of specialists, and others generally known by doctors, where 
men have taken on the pain of their wives; sometimes carrying the 
identical symptoms; and often the same complications. This is due 
to the fact that the Other Mind influences the conscious mind, and 
the latter actually changes the brain tissue and mental habits that 


THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE 


27 


control the functions. The process is easy to understand and easy 
to prove. There are some maladies that are peculiar to women, yet 
husbands have had to go through with them all just as if they were 
women. Of course this is not common, as it then would be a nuisance; 
but the aggregate of cases is surprisingly large.—In the milder forms 
of thought transference husband and wife are very helpful to each 
other. The basis of this union of thought and feeling is close 
regard and close companionship. It is a sweet and blessed thing 
in after years, when age has made the old folks feeble and each 
leans upon the other like a staff. Nor is the same exchange of 
interest and affiliation lacking in friends. We know of two men 
who are widowers, who have spent their evenings together for many 
years, who have grown old together, and who finally moved into the 
same house in order that they might spend their remaining days 
in the society of each other. This change was beneficial, as they 
are now very helpful, one to the other. But they boast of the fact 
that they know each other’s minds and wants, and are proud of 
their ability to serve one another without being asked. 

23. There are some teachers who are always ahead of the minds 
of their pupils, knowing what to expect and what to prepare for in 
dealing with them. This saves much trouble and misunderstanding. 
One case that was recently reported was as follows: A teacher had 
several unruly boys in her class and they were disposed to falsify 
to her. One day she said: “Ned, where were you yesterday?”—> 
“I was at home sick.”—“No, you were not. You were down to 
Sager’s pond. This written excuse was made by your big brother, 
Henry.”—The statement took Ned so much by surprise that he 
never again attempted to deceive his teacher.—On another day she 
said: “James, why are you not prepared with your arithmetic?” 
“I had the toothache all last evening and went to bed early and 
could not do the sums.”—“That is not true. You were at the 
five-eent show in town and stayed out after it was over till most 
midnight, and then slipped into the house and went to bed.”—These 
statements were made suddenly and without any preparation or 
deliberation on the part of the teacher. She gained a great prestige 
over her school and has become one of the best disciplinarians in 
the public service. She does not deem it policy to let the pupils 
know by what means she gains her knowledge of their whereabouts, 
as it might offset some of her success in the management of them. 
They believe that she knows through others of their doings when 


28 OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 

not at school, and this convinces them that she is master of the 
situation. 

24, One of the distributors of the fund of charity states that he 
has learned in many cases to discern the genuine sufferer from the 
pretender, to know who are in earnest in the professed willingness 
to work, and who are shamming an intention to do so; and he 
makes fewer mistakes than others who treat all alike. He makes 
this statement: “After seventeen years as a distributor of funds and 
food to the needy, I have come to the conclusion that careless charity 
is doing great harm, for it is raising up an army of degenerates who 
will not work as long as they can get their living, or much of it, 
without labor. The nation will pay a severe penalty for this in¬ 
discriminate charity, and the danger is close at hand. Nine out 
of ten of those who are supported by charity will not work, although 
they pretend they will and seem anxious to be given work to do. 
They are bums, and are bringing others from the ranks of industry 
to become idlers and beggars. True charity should confine itself 
to those who cannot work, not to those who cannot find work. The 
latter should be given work, and made to do it, and receive the same 
help they now receive while idle. It will cost charity no more, and 
will save much of its fund for others more needy. To be able to 
ascertain the true subjects of charity from the pretenders, is of 
the utmost importance. I have acquired an insight into this differ¬ 
ence. But for fear I may be wrong I have many cases investigated 
and find that I do not err in my judgment. Somehow when an 
applicant comes to me I seem to grasp the truth in a flash, and 
many of my questions confirm this experience. I have many con¬ 
fessions from the false seekers for aid, and these help me still more. 
I never turn a genuine sufferer away.”—The main value of the 
case referred to is the service that telepathy is able to render to any 
useful cause. 


The foregoing incidents are all authentic. The word or belief 
of the individual has not been relied upon; but we have gone behind 
the first statements and ascertained the truth as it is sustained by 
indubitable facts. 

Moreover these are typical cases. There is no end to the lists 
that have been reported, and no end to human experience in this 
line. One question alone remains, and that is. Whence is this faculty? 



THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE 


29 


Is it a part of the operations of the conscious mind? If so, how 
is it that that mind must first be suspended in order for the thought 
to enter it by a channel not among those that are ordinary ? 
Thought transference is not what we hear, see, feel, touch, smell 
or taste; but what jumps into the mind from some other source. 
Of course it is admitted that the thought does get into the conscious 
mind; but it does get there by any of the ordinary channels of 
communication. That being true, it must employ some other channel, 
and that we call the Other Mind. It makes no difference what 
the Other Mind is, the fact remains that any other channel than an 
ordinary one is to be called for the present the Other Mind; and 
this will enable every one of our students to agree with us, and 
we with them. 

If these thoughts were not to come into the conscious mind, then 
there would he no transference; nor would they be known. Before 
we go much farther we will show that they are always at hand, and 
that millions of other thoughts, ideas, events, and revelations are 
just as much present in the very self of every person, but that they 
are not known because they are not transferred into the conscious 
mind. They cannot he known until they get into the conscious 
mind. 

The purpose then of this course of study and practice is to so 
prepare the conscious mind that it will be able to receive and to 
recognize the knowledge that comes from the Other Mind. 

On the other hand, in order to know and understand and interpret 
the facts that fill the Other Mind, and to do so without the aid of 
the conscious mind, there must be laws that apply solely to that 
realm, as they alone can deal with the psychic processes. Such 
laws, while plain and easy to understand and to apply, are numerous 
and require an immense field of development, which can be com¬ 
passed only by such a system as that of psychic telepathy. 

The work before us now is that of physical telepathy, which is 
the interpretation in the conscious mind of the knowledge that is 
transferred out of the Other Mind and that relates to the events, 
the thoughts, the motives and purposes of physical existence on 
earth. 

Enough has been shown in this cycle to present the new power 
as a means of the highest usefulness in every branch of human 
conduct. 

Suppose the judge of a court of justice were able to know what 


30 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


is in the mind of every litigant and defendant at the bar, how 
easily and speedily cases could be ended, and with right always 
triumphant. To-day there is not much respect for the judge, even 
of the greatest tribunals; and this is due to the slow and stupid 
methods employed in the name of the supreme law. Surely these 
judges, and chief justices even, with all their supposed astuteness, 
would make sorry figures in the practical business world, where 
giants of intellect outshine their talents a hundred to one. Suppose 
a matter that involved millions of dollars were to be passed upon 
in all its complications by qualified business men, how much time 
would they take and how many technicalities would they employ 
in disposing of it; and yet a Supreme Court can enmesh a simple 
transaction that is not worth a hundred dollars in fifty times the 
delay and technicalities that the business men permit in a stupendous 
affair. On top of all this we hear the judges finding fault because 
they are severely criticized for their legal stupidity. 

A gifted justice is one who can read men like open books. There 
have been such in the past, and we hope they may not have dis¬ 
appeared altogether. 

The lawyers who have won just cases against heavy odds have 
been endowed with some of this faculty of telepathy. To them the 
plans and purposes of opposing witnesses are quickly laid open to 
public view. 

Teachers are successful only in proportion as they are able to 
read the minds of their pupils, and have magnetism to control them. 
Without the latter quality it would be useless to enter the profession 
of teaching. But, added to magnetism, should be some degree of 
telepathy by which the thoughts and motives of pupils may be dis¬ 
cerned and guided. In an advanced stage of this art, it has been 
found that instructors are able to suggest needed help to their pupils 
when the latter are at a standstill with some difficult study. 

The clergyman has still greater need of the power that comes 
from telepathy. The church is burdened to-day, as it always has 
been, with men and women who seek its name and society for selfish 
and often for dishonest purposes. The minister is the man who is 
made the agent for deciding the merits of every applicant for 
admission. In a few instances the minister has been able to deter¬ 
mine aright by reason of his power to read human motives. But 
where this power is lacking the church has suffered. Small con¬ 
gregations whose private lives shine before the world in full sin- 


THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE 


31 


cerity are pillars of strength to the general church, whereas large 
congregations in which there are many insincere members are a 
menace to religion. Success is not to be measured by the amount 
of money a church can collect every year, but by the good it does 
in its own fold and among the community. 

Above all other classes of life the doctor who is able to learn 
with certainty the exact nature of the malady he is called upon to 
treat, is most valuable to his fellow beings. He has a twofold 
opportunity like the teacher; for he can ascertain the nature of the 
trouble and is also able to aid the patient by suggestion. It is now 
coming to be an accepted truth that the Other Mind of an invalid 
holds the key to the recovery where all other methods may fail; and 
it is to open this Other Mind to the power of suggestion that the 
doctor can achieve what may be regarded almost as miracles. 

Before this book is closed it will be seen that the Other Mind 
has power to change the organic tissue of the body, something that 
diet, treatment and medicine will not do in many cases. Herein 
is found the greatest promise of the immediate future in the cure 
of disease; for it makes clear the methods that have mystified the 
public in the several cults now in use. 

In social relations, in business, in fellowship everywhere, the 
mind that will be sure to sway others must have its power originate 
in the psychic realm, and must employ its influence through that 
realm in all persons whom it seeks to control, to lead, to guide, or 
to make use of or useful in any proper way. 

Having paved the way by well-known and accepted facts we will 
now move on to deeper studies. 


32 


THIRD CYCLE 

THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS § 


HE art of all the arts 
Is that which conjures sleep 
From which the mind comes forth 
In new-born wonderment 
With deeds that bring surprise 
To startle gazing eyes . 

NDER various names and in a multitude of uses the 
art of hypnotism has been employed for thousands of 
years on earth. But it has remained for this age, 
and this very generation, to develop it to a position 
where it is now becoming an exact science. The pres¬ 
ent cycle will be devoted to the consideration of facts and cases that 
have been testified by scientific men of such standing that their 
statements are everywhere accepted as conclusive. 

The purpose of this stage of the study of physical telepathy is 
to make clear the operation of two minds. Some persons who make 
up their opinions on meagre investigation may claim that there 
are not two minds; but that one mind alone has two stages or 
degrees of knowledge. This is immaterial, as it is the processes 
and phenomena that are attracting our attention, and the name of 
the department of action is one of convenience only. What we refer 
to as the Other Mind has been called and is being called to-day 
by many leading scientific men the subconscious faculty, which is a 
longer term and one not so easily assimilated as the name, the Other 
Mind. 

The purpose of this cycle is to show the existence of two minds, 
or two faculties, or whatever else they may be called. The value 
of the lesson is in proving they are two; and no one will dispute 
that fact. 

1. The first report is that made in the year 1907 by Sir Francis 
R. Cruise, M. D., one of the physicians of King Edward, and a 








THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS 


33 


man of the highest attainments. He speaks of his visit to the 
city of Nancy in France in the following language: "It would be 
impossible in the short space at my disposal to describe even a 
fraction of the cases I saw and noted in Bernheim/’s wards during 
my stay at Nancy. I shall only give some details of a few. The 
first I shall select exemplifies the power of relieving distressing 
symptoms in a case of organic disease. The patient was a man 
aged forty-two, a soldier discharged from the army owing to disease 
of the aortic valves. The malady was not far advanced, the patients* 
trouble being chiefly insomnia. Hypnotism, with suggestion of sleep 
and facility of respiration, gave marked relief. One day M. Bernheim 
said to me that he would suggest to him in sleep a duty to be 
performed when he awoke. After the patient had been put into 
a hypnotic sleep, he was told to remain so for ten minutes, then 
awake, get up, walk across the ward to No. 15, take the nightcap 
of the patient there, place it under his own pillow, then open the 
window, and listen to music. The man was put into the hypnotic 
sleep. In just ten minutes he awoke, crossed the ward slowly and 
carefully, took the nightcap from bed No. 15, brought it over and 
placed it under his own pillow. He then went to the window, threw 
it open, and leant out. His face at once expressed keen delight.** 

2. The same physician relates the following as another case he 
personally witnessed: "I shall now recount the cure of a fixed 
neuralgia of long duration accomplished by suggestion under hypno¬ 
tism. One morning while on his rounds M. Bernheim found a new 
patient just received into the hospital. He was a bronzed, weather¬ 
beaten man about fifty years of age. He complained of a fixed pain 
in the region of the right false ribs, just over the liver, caused by 
heavy lifting a year before. It was constant and undermined his 
health. He had undergone much treatment, and the affected region 
bore evidence of severe counter-irritation, and the whole side was 
so tender that he could hardly allow us to examine it. M. Bernheim 
hypnotized the patient, and then said to him that on awakening the 
pain would be better, and at the same time rubbed strongly over 
the affected parts. In ten minutes he returned and awakened the 
patient. The pain was gone! The side was so much better that 
vigorous rubbing elicited no complaint. I had the opportunity of 
watching the case. In the evening the pain returned but was greatly 
mitigated. A daily repetition of the same treatment gradually ex¬ 
tinguished it, and in nine days it was completely gone. All this 


34 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


sounds like a fairy tale. However, I was myself able not long after 
to relieve by hypnotism and suggestion an almost identical case of 
neuralgia of long duration in a young girl, which had resisted all 
other treatment. This patient was in the Mater Misericordiae Hos¬ 
pital under the care of my colleague, Dr. Joseph Redmond, now 
President of the Royal College of Physicians. The cure was perma¬ 
nent. Dr. Charles Fitzgerald, Dr. Richard Hayes, Dr. McCullagh, 
and Dr. J. J. Murphy tell me they have all had similar results from 
the use of hypnotism and suggestion/” 

It will be noticed that in the foregoing line of cases the sugges¬ 
tion was m'ade during hypnotic sleep and related to a condition that 
would be developed after awaking into a natural state of wakefulness. 
This distinction is important, as much of the phenomena of hyp¬ 
notism will generally be found occurring when the subject is in 
hypnotic wakefulness, which is far different from the natural wake¬ 
fulness that follows such sleep. 

The student of this subject should not forget the following classifica¬ 
tion of conditions during which suggestion may be made with effect. 

a. The deep hypnotic sleep that is so sound that the patients are 
totally oblivious of everything that occurs therein. 

b. The ordinary hypnotic sleep that seems like a dream on coming 
into natural wakefulness; and which permits many of the things 
said and done to be recalled as though from a dream. 

c. The natural sleep, in which suggestions may be made and acted 
on after coming into natural wakefulness. 

(L Hypnotic wakefulness which occurs during the period of con¬ 
trol in which the person is made to wake up and obey a large variety 
of commands and suggestions. This is very common. 

e. Natural wakefulness which follows natural sleep, hypnotic sleep 
and hypnotic wakefulness. 

The first condition is called somnambulistic because the subject is 
in the state of mind and body that is found in those who awake 
from a sound sleep into a similar condition. 

3. Having made clear the different kinds of mental activity and 
inactivity, we will now present other cases that are reported by men 
of science and practice along these lines. C. Lloyd Tuckey, M. D., 
President of the Medical Society of Therapeutic Suggestion, says: 
“I once hypnotized Mrs. S. and told her that her favourite cat, a 
tabby, had a black tail, and that it would continue so for three days. 


THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS 


35 


On awaking, she no sooner saw' the animal than she described the 
change which she had noticed had come over it, and she expressed a 
fear that it was ill; when at the end of the three days it assumed 
its natural color to her eyes, she expressed her relief at seeing it 
recovered.” 

4. Dr. Liebeault, of international fame in this line and one of 
the most respected and revered physicians, says that one of his 
patients while in a hypnotic sleep was told that on a certain day 
in two month’s time, at ten o’clock a. m., he would come to Liebeault’s 
consulting room, and would there see the President of the Republic 
and would make a profound obeisance. He was then awakened into 
a natural state of mind. He was not under hypnotic influence when 
the two months expired, but in his ordinary condition of mind. 
Promptly at the time appointed, without any further reference to 
the matter, he appeared at the place stated and made a deep bow 
to the bookcase which he seemed to regard as the President. This 
case is also quoted by Binet and Fere, page 245, in their work. 

5. Beaunis, a high authority of recognized standing among the 
medical profession, tells of the case of a young woman to whom he 
made the statement in one July that, on the following New Year’s 
Day, she would enter her room, and would hear him bid her good 
morning. On the following first of January she wrote to Dr. Beaunis 
saying that she could not understand how it was that he had entered 
her room that morning, had greeted her, and then had walked out 
immediately. He had on the same clothes that he had worn last 
July. At the time of the supposed call, he was a long distance 
from her and could not possibly have been in the same city. 

6. Dr. Bramwell states the following remarkable case which he 
vouches for as absolutely true and occurring in his practice. A 
young woman was put into a hypnotic sleep by him; and while in 
that state he told her that at the expiration of 12,500 minutes she 
was to address an envelope to him. He did not stop to figure out 
the day or hour when the time would elapse, and did not wish to 
have his mind on the time. The 12,500 minutes were to be counted 
from the moment when she woke up. On being awakened she re¬ 
membered nothing about the suggestion, and all that occurred was 
a blank to her. She went about her usual work, but did not at any 
time refer to the matter. As far as any conscious operation of her 
mind was concerned, it was as though she had never been given 
the suggestion. At the appointed time she addressed the envelope 


36 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


to Dr. Bramwell, all the while in her natural state of wakefulness 
and without any semblance of hypnosis. 

This is but one of an unlimited number of similar cases which 
prove, if they show anything at all, that the mind that received the 
order during sound hypnotic sleep, could not be the conscious mind; 
but that, as the Other Mind had been commanded to do a certain 
thing at a certain time, it executed the order through the conscious 
mind. 

More than a thousand cases have been made known that involve 
exactly the same law of the two minds. It seems to be a settled 
fact that the conscious mind will obey the commands of the Other 
Mind. On this principle may be explained the countless incidents 
and phenomena of life that have heretofore baffled all explanation 
except on the theory that they come from supernatural influences 
and that the latter indicate the existence of spirits at work in human 
life. 

Even in the absence of recent proofs to the contrary, such explana¬ 
tions are wrong because there is no warrant for charging everything 
to spirits when no other solution is available. 

The existance of two minds, one physical and the other psychic 
is certainly not proof of the work of spirits. Mind at its common es¬ 
timate is mysterious and wonderful, even the mind of the animal, or 
the intelligence of the cell in protoplasm. The latter is assigned 
the work of reproducing the whole body, organs, attributes, heredity 
and character of generations of ancestry; all in a nucleolus so small 
that only a powerful microscope can look upon it; and this power 
is far more wonderful that the processes of the Other Mind in man. 

7. Dr. Moll, the well-known investigator and author, says that 
deferred action following suggestion is like the working of an un¬ 
conscious mind springing into action by invoking the will of the 
conscious mind; thus showing the opinion that there are two minds. 
In all cases of deferred action, the subject when awake naturally 
has no recollection of the suggestions that have been given during 
hypnotic sleep; hut when the moment for action comes he all at 
once acts, and cannot account for the impulse except to say that 
he could not withstand the purpose to do it. “Such phenomena 
throw a strong light on many stories of supernatural apparitions, 
and show how useful hypnotism may prove in the hands of com¬ 
petent observers as a key to all such problems. Here we find an 
idea impressed on the ‘unconscious mind 5 and lying dormant for 


THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS 


37 


months, brought into action by the simple lapse of time, as certainly 
as a piece of clockwork can be set to run down at a fixed hour.”— 
A servant girl who many years before had lived in a home where 
a clergyman read passages from a Greek Testament, which her ears 
had unconsciously taken in, was able in the delirium of fever to 
repeat accurately long passages in perfect Greek. In her years of 
consciousness she could not have done this had the prize been a 
million dollars a line for such reading. But her Other Mind, having 
absorbed the words, gave evidence of its all-powerful nature by reciting 
the verses freely and correctly.—The numerous cases of wonderful 
memory may be explained on the same principle. The Other Mind 
is all-powerful. 

8. Dr. Bussell Sturges of Boston has reported an interesting series 
of cases which he has treated by hypnotic suggestion. He cites 
that of a young lady who was a chronic invalid, suffering greatly 
from internal neuralgia. Her ill health was caused by a mental 
shock which she sustained by an accident to her brother, brought 
on, as she thought, through her fault. She had urged him to ride 
on a horse that was not thoroughly controllable, and the horse threw 
him and broke his arm. He recovered perfect health, suffering no 
inconvenience from the accident afterwards, yet she could not relieve 
herself from the belief that she was to blame. Dr. Sturges found 
that she was the victim of this morbid idea. Her friends had often 
argued with her and endeavored to induce her to get rid of the 
anxiety and remorse which she suffered at all times; but to no effect. 
Dr. Sturges put her into hypnotic sleep, and while in this state she 
was told that she would awake and be free from the false idea that 
she was guilty of causing the accident to her brother. Three treat¬ 
ments, brief and of decided nature, served to completely cure her, 
and her body was free from the pain. 

In the foregoing case it can be plainly seen that the friends of 
the girl appealed to her conscious mind, and without result; while 
the doctor put her conscious mind to sleep, appealed to her Other 
Mind, and this swayed her belief and wrought the cure. Ho surer 
proof of the existence of the two minds could be asked. 

9. The same physician reports a case of a woman who quarreled 
with her father immediately before his sudden death. She accused 
herself of being accessory to his fatal attack by reason of this quarrel. 
After a few weeks it was observed that she had become the victim 
of chronic melancholia on that account. By the use of hypnotism 


38 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


he put her to sleep, told her that on waking she would not believe 
that she was in any way guilty of her father’s death, and this idea 
finally prevailed, and she was completely cured. 

10. Dr. Woods, Superintendent of the Hoxon House Asylum, 
London, has treated by hypnotic suggestion many cases of illusional 
insanity, completely restoring normal minds. This is done on the 
same principle as that stated in the cases just cited. 

11. Professor Forel in his Zurich address to the Congress of 
Neurologists, gave it as his opinion that hypnotic suggestion could 
cure drunkenness, as it enabled the drunkard to take the decisive step 
in the remedy. He stated specific cases in which he had secured 
complete cures; and in referring to the opium habit said he had 
removed the desire for that drug in from eight to twelve days, and 
always without the acute mental suffering common to the denial of 
its use. Dr. Van Eeden of Amsterdam likewise cured both drunken¬ 
ness and the opium habit by hypnotic suggestion. Dr. Liebeault, 
acting on the same method, was able to save a man who had become 
a nervous wreck by over-indulgence in tobacco, as he smoked and 
chewed it constantly. “He was a railway porter, a big, strongly 
built fellow, but was weak and shaky through his excesses. His 
digestion was faulty, his tongue thickly furred, and his appetite gone. 
His pulse was slow and intermittent, he felt giddiness on movement, 
and his sight frequently vanished. Persons whose nervous systems 
are broken down are very easily hypnotized, and this man was soon 
in a profound sleep. He was then told that, on awaking, he was 
going to give up the use of tobacco, that he would not smoke any 
more, that a pipe was to be hated every time he saw one, and a quid 
of tobacco even more offensive; also that, if he did smoke or chew, 
he would be made very sick and suffer from severe pains, and to 
prevent this he must not even feel a desire for tobacco in any form. 
Prior to this hypnotic suggestion he wholly lacked the power to 
throw off the habits. On awaking he could not remember anything 
that had been said to him; but he had a dislike for tobacco, for a 
pipe, and for the use of it. This dislike wore off after a few hours; 
but in a week it became permanent and he was cured not only of 
his bad habits, but also in health.” Had he been forced to dis¬ 
continue the use of tobacco in a hospital, he would have suffered and 
it is likely that he would have died of nervous prostratioii. But the 
suggestion, having been given to the Other Mind, controlled his 
conscious mind and became his own desire. 


THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS 


39 


Had the man been subjected to the entreaties of his friends or 
the advice of doctors, only his conscious mind would have been 
reached, and this is the weak part of humanity. Control for reforma¬ 
tion of any kind must first he secured in the Other Mind; and, 
once this has been aroused, it will pass the authority on the conscious 
mind and that will be fixed in the new idea of improvement. It 
seems that the conscious mind has no alternative but to obey the 
mandates from the Other Mind. The last ten years of investigation 
and practice are filled with reports of this power of the Other Mind 
over the ordinary mind. 

12. Mr. F. W. H. Myers, quoting from Dr. E. Dufour, chief physi¬ 
cian of the asylum at Isere, France, says: “From this time our opinion 
is settled, and we have no fear of being deceived when we affirm that 
hypnotism can render service in the treatment of mental diseases/’ 
One of his subjects was a depraved young man who, after many 
convictions for crimes, including attempted murder, became insane. 
Dr. Defour states positively that this young man has, under hypnotic 
suggestion, not only become cured of his insanity, but also has been 
thoroughly reformed. 

13. Dr. For el gives a case of reformation in a confirmed drunkard 
who, after twice attempting to commit suicide, was placed under his 
care. He had spent nine years in the asylum, during which time he 
gave an infinite amount of trouble, drinking himself into a state of 
insanity whenever an opportunity offered, and inciting the other 
inmates to rebellion. This apparently incorrigible subject was hyp¬ 
notized by Dr. Forel, and then treated by suggestion. He was told 
that on awaking he would not like the taste or looks of liquor in 
any form, and that even the smell of alcoholic beverages would be 
very offensive to him. He was, at one sitting, told that on awaking 
he would destroy any liquor that he possessed or could get at. On 
awaking he carried into execution all the suggestions, and proved 
the genuineness of the reform by giving up the small quantity of 
wine that the authorities allowed him in the asylum. He had no 
knowledge of what had been said to him when in the hypnotic 
sleep; and, on being asked why he had changed, said he did not 
know. He joined the Temperance Society, which hitherto he had 
vilified and opposed. He was allowed his liberty and given freedom 
to make the rounds of the wine shops, but he could not be induced 
to drink. 

In considering the foregoing case, it must be remembered that 


40 


OPERATIONS OF i THE OTHER MIND 


an appeal to the conscious mind of the man would have been met 
with scoffs and insult. Is it true that the conscious mind carries 
all the impulses of crime and wrong doing, and that the Other Mind 
is the bearer of all that is good and helpful ? 

14. Dr. Auguste Voisin, of the institution at Salpetriere, France, 
gave accounts of the efficacy of hypnotic suggestion in the treatment 
of moral obliquity; and at the Congress of the French Association 
for the Advancement of Science, papers dealing with this subject 
were read by several physicians of prominence. Voisin gives in¬ 
stances of female prisoners, formerly considered incorrigible, who, 
after a course of suggestive treatment, became modest, cleanly and 
industrious. He says that, prior to such treatment they had had 
full advantage of religious and moral instruction without avail; 
hut that after the treatment by hypnotic suggestion they eagerly 
gave heed to the helps from both religious and moral advice and 
guidance. Many cases along this same line have been investigated 
and found authentic, and it is now regarded as certain that hypnotic 
suggestion will open the way to the good work of the church and 
moral instruction. Herein rests one of the greatest powers for 
reform ever offered to humanity. 

15. There are two ways of dealing by suggestion with the fixed 
habits of drunkenness. The first way is to have the patient go 
through with the pretense of attempting to drink his favorite bev¬ 
erages, and to have him form a hatred for them while in the 
hypnotic sleep. This has been the course generally adopted; and 
progress toward reform has been slower than when the second plan 
is adopted. This is to inform the hypnotic, subject that, on awak¬ 
ing, he will hate the sight and the smell of alcoholic beverages in 
every form. Specify the different kinds of drinks he will actually 
have offered him by his friends, or that he will seek to buy when 
out on the streets; and give him an account of how he will regard 
each one. Tell him that when he attempts to swallow beer or 
wine or liquor he will be deathly sick. Tell him that he will have 
severe pains when a lifts a mug or glass to his mouth. And so on. 
This method makes use of the Other Mind much more effectively 
than the old plan of having the subject, while in the hypnotic sleep, 
perform the dislikes. It is now a generally acknowledged principle 
that what the subject is told will happen when he is awake, will 
control him then; and what he experiences when in the sleep will 
not follow him when awake unless it is so commanded. 


THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS 


41 


As these laws have been worked out time and again and are being 
employed with remarkable effect to-day in a number of institutions, 
there can be no doubt of the recognition of the two minds by men 
who are qualified to understand the facts. 

16. Dr. M. Goldson of California, who studied in London, says 
of a case occurring in America: “I recently hypnotized Mrs. E. 
who has been lately married. Her happiness was greatly marred 
by the conduct of her husband, who took the greatest delight in 
teasing her; the more she showed her annoyance, the worse he be¬ 
came. She took this so much to heart that she became profoundly 
depressed, and was continually in tears when alone. I hypnotized 
her and suggested that she should no longer feel grieved or annoyed 
at his conduct, but should enter into his jokes with amusement, 
and should enjoy his merriment and be completely happy. The 
treatment was entirely successful, and after the fifth sitting Mrs. E. 
reported that a complete change had come over her life, and that 
her husband was astonished to find that she no longer resented 
his jokes, but seemed rather to enjoy them.'” It is quite certain 
that had the attempt been made to convince Mrs. E. of her error 
by an appeal to her conscious mind, it would have failed. There 
are innumerable cases where explanation, entreaty, argument and 
all kinds of appeal prove just the wrong course to take when they 
are directed to the conscious mind, for they seem to set that mind 
against the advice or suggestion so made, and to induce obstinacy. 
The only success possible is by an appeal to the Other Mind, and 
then the task is an easy one. 

17. Mr. F. W. H. Myers, the well-known authority on hypnotic 
phenomena, whose writings and opinions have been regarded as 
wholly reliable, says: “Hypnotism taps the subliminal consciousness 
and thus gets into touch with a far wider field of experience than 
our everyday consciousness supplies.” He practically sets up the 
fact that the conscious mind is our everyday consciousness, and 
our psychic mind is our subliminal consciousness. Perhaps it is better 
to call the latter the Other Mind, as that is what it is in fact. 

18. Morton Prince, M. D., Physician for Diseases of the Nervous 
System, Boston City Hospital, reported a case that attracted the 
attention of Professor James of Harvard University, and of the 
well-known Dr. Hodgson. This case has been made use of in so 
many publications that it may seem superfluous for us to publish 
it here; but we are not pretending to absolute exclusiveness in this 


42 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


cycle; as all we desire is to furnish proof of the laws set forth in 
the present work. Dr. Prince’s experience is told in the following 
language: 

A young lady called Miss X had three personalities: 

As a normal woman she was called plain Miss X, or X — 1, and 
was shy, serious, sensitive, self-contained and conscientious, although 
morbidly so. 

As X—2, she was sad, and gave the impression of suffering and 
weariness. 

As X — 3, she was flippant, jovial, free from all physical infirm¬ 
ities, full of fun, recklessness, and scorn for her normal self. 

One morning she came to Dr. Prince in a greatly disturbed state 
of mind. She had lost money she had set apart for her stay in 
Boston, and she was almost penniless. She was put into the pro¬ 
found state of hypnosis, and herein she became X — 3, and as that 
character she described how stupid X — 1 was, that she had felt 
nervous about her money the night before, and had got up from 
her bed and hidden it under the table-cloth, and X — 3 was greatly 
amused at the embarrassment caused to X — 1 by the loss of the 
money. Dr. Prince awoke her and without telling her anything, 
asked her to look at a crystal. She did so and described the scene 
which presented itself; she saw herself in bed in her room; then 
she saw herself get up, her eyes being closed, and walk up and 
down the room, go to the bureau, take the money from the drawer, 
and hide it under the table-cloth. This proved to be the correct 
explanation of the loss, and the money was found as indicated. 

It seems that these personalities had been at work in her for 
some time, but were not recognized as such. She was almost hys¬ 
terical because of her nervous malady. Dr. Prince cured her com¬ 
pletely, and succeeded in suppressing X — 2 and X — 3, substituting 
a better normal condition. 

A large number of dual personalities have been discovered, and 
have been referred to in the many recent books and writings on 
the subject. On case in point came to the attention of a physician 
who wished to be unknown in the matter, but the facts were placed 
at our disposal for verification. 

19. A man in Philadelphia had grown morose from the time 
he was in his teens. He had few friends, save as his wealth brought 
the usual following of individuals who thought to benefit themselves 
through his favors. One day he received an anonymous letter setting 


THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS 


43 


forth his career of ill nature and the fact that he had no genuine 
friends because of his bad disposition. A photograph of his face 
was enclosed. It had been snapped on the street one day to serve 
this purpose and was used to aid in driving home the criticism in 
the letter. He studied himself in the mirror and came to the 
conclusion that the writer of the anonymous letter had done him 
a real service. 

He consulted a physician in another city who was an expert in 
psycho-therapeutics, and was subjected to a series of hypnotic treat¬ 
ments. The physician had the good judgment to proceed along the 
line of future wakefulness, which is the only method that achieves 
genuine results. The fault of the man was that, with his wealth, 
he had been mean, close, selfish, niggardly, pessimistic and egotistic. 
The doctor spoke to him in the hypnotic state somewhat as follows: 

“You are to wake up and find yourself a changed man. You 
are to wake up and find yourself generous, pleasant, full of good 
cheer, charitable, and desirous of helping your fellow beings. When 
you go out on the street to-morrow you will have a smile and kind 
word for all persons, and be willing to listen to the appeals of 
others and to help them.” 

After each treatment the man, on waking up, could not recall 
anything that had been said to him. It was all a blank. But 
he noticed that his ill nature had been subdued, as he was inclined 
to be cheerful and regardful of the feelings of others. This im¬ 
provement grew from day to day as the suggestions increased, and 
at length the man said that he had two personalities; one was his 
former self, and the other was a much better individual. He learned 
in time to adopt the latter and to entirely suppress the former; 
but it was only by hypnotic suggestion that this was accomplished. 

In his own words the power of this appeal to his Other Mind is 
described: 

“I had been talked to by friends and relatives for years about my 
bad disposition, but their entreaties had no effect. The more they 
talked to me, the worse I became. They tried other methods, some¬ 
times holding me up to ridicule, at other times snubbing and slight¬ 
ing me, and often acting as if I had no sense of decency. But I 
could not be moved by argument, by entreaty, by abuse or any other 
agency, until I was hypnotized. After I awoke from each sleep I 
found something working in me that I could not understand. It 
was something that controlled me and compelled me to do as it 


44 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


wanted, and I tried to obey all the time. I am mentally better 
and stronger than ever before in my life, and I am capable of being 
more useful in every way.” 


Many facts and laws may be gathered from the foregoing cases, 
and we will summarize them as follows: 

1. Suggestions made during hypnotic sleep are stronger than 
those made in wakefulness. 

2. Suggestions made during hypnotic sleep are stronger when they 
relate to commands or statements to be executed during wakefulness; 
for they serve to change the habits of the individual. 

3. Suggestions made in hypnotic sleep that relate to transactions 
and conditions within the period of sleep may change physical tissue 
and processes in the body, but do not bear after-fruit in the mind 
and morals of the subject. They are like a vague dream, or else 
are almost wholly lost. 

4. Hypnotism is based on the process of temporarily suppressing 
the conscious mind, and making it a blank by putting it into sleep. 

5. There are all grades of hypnotism from partial drowsiness to 
the somnabulistic stage of profoundest slumber of the conscious 
mind. 

6. Hypnotic wakefulness occurs during hypnotic control, and is 
wholly unlike natural wakefulness, which occurs when all hypnotic 
control has ceased. 

7. In hypnotic wakefulness the Other Mind is alert and receives 
the suggestions; but in natural wakefulness the conscious mind is 
alert and generally resists all suggestions not in accord with the 
wishes and habits of the individual. 

8. In hypnotic wakefulness the conscious mind receives no sug¬ 
gestion in direct form, but is reached in the after wakefulness that 
follows into a natural realm, provided the Other Mind is charged 
with the duty of so reaching it. 

9. It would seem, then, as if the conscious mind were the agency 
of the physical habits, wishes and tendencies; while the Other Mind 
were the agent of a higher nature. 

It is to prove this claim, or else to disprove it, that many ex¬ 
periments are being made to-day. There is already some reason to 
believe that the Other Mind includes a large range of action, from 
the commonplace to the grandest along ethical lines. It is well 



THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS 


45 


settled that it acts for the physical body and thereby gives rise to 
physical telepathy; and it is more than likely that experiments will 
prove that it is the agent for the psychic forces in the purest forms 
of existence and only as such can it disassociate itself from the 
baser habits of physical life. 

Many cases are recorded of the attempt to influence by hypnotic 
suggestion the commission of a crime. One man was told in the 
hypnotic state that, when he awoke, he would go up to a man at a 
certain time and place and give him five dollars. This he did. 
He was then told in another sitting that, when he awoke, he would 
go up to a man and take his umbrella from him, accosting the first 
man whom he saw carrying an umbrella. At the time and place 
he approached a man and, instead of committing larceny, he asked 
for the loan of the umbrella, and was refused it; whereby he aban¬ 
doned the matter. He was told in another sitting that, when he 
awoke he would at a given time and place present a book to a lady 
whom he would meet on the street. This he did. Afterwards he 
was told that he would at a public corner at the hour of noon, kiss 
the first very tall lady whom he would meet there. He went to 
the place as stated, approached a woman who was quite tall, and, 
seeing that she was not receptive, he went home and kissed his wife. 

These incidents show that the subject hesitates when there is 
some wrong likely to be committed; but that he always obeys when 
the act is right. 

Even the morally weak are slow to do an act that may lead to 
arrest, when the command is to do it in public. One man who 
had a bad record as a petty thief, was told to go into a department 
store at a certain time and place, and take some handkerchiefs 
from one counter and carry them to another. He was on hand 
at the time appointed and went to the handkerchief counter; but 
he did not touch the goods. After waiting for several minutes, he 
asked the floor-walker to assist him in the task; and, under the 
supervision of this man, he performed the duty. 

The same subject was directed to move about some articles in 
his own home, and did so, to the great convenience of his wife. In 
the following hypnotic sleep he recalled the transaction and enjoyed 
it; but when awake he seemed to do the act like one who had been 
assigned a duty that must be performed if possible to do it. 

In the cycles to follow, the processes will be classified so that 
they may be better understood. 


46 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


In the present cycle, we find a certain group of conditions main¬ 
tained : 

a. In all the cases cited, the subject has been given suggestions in 
the hypnotic sleep to be performed when he awoke. 

b. The hypnotic sleep included the hypnotic awakening, during 
which the suggestions were made. 

c. All the duties to be performed were to be executed wholly in 
the state of natural wakefulness. 

d. The suggestions were made after the conscious mind had been 
suppressed, and they were executed after the conscious mind had 
come again into full control. It was a span from the realm of 
the Other Mind to the realm of the working mind. 

e. The conscious mind seems to be the seat of all the bad habits 
and inclinations, and especially of obstinacy. In many cases there 
is nothing that can master it. Hypnosis therefore confers a great 
blessing on the individual and the public by being able to suppress 
for the time being the refractory conscious mind, and calling into 
aid the all-powerful Other Mind. 

/. The latter certainly has shown itself the complete master of 
the conscious mind. 

One great step in our study has been taken when we find these 
facts established. Not only has the Other Mind been shown to be 
a separate realm, but it has been amply proved to be the better mind 
of the two. 

Other steps are to follow in the next cycles that are of still greater 
importance in this work. 

The operations of the Other Mind do not depend on hypnotic 
sleep. That is one only of several methods by which its power 
can be called into use. The control that is secured by hypnosis 
is necessarily limited, as most persons do not care to be put into 
such sleep; and not every one can control them unless there is first 
a course of training in that direction. 

Any good rule of life that is intended for usefulness ought to be 
free from the limitations that are placed upon hypnosis; and we 
find this view maintained by the other methods of arousing the 
activity of the Other Mind. 


47 


FOURTH CYCLE 




N hours of slumber sweet 
The fading, conscious mind 
Gives way to noble thoughts 
That catch some potent theme 
From out the outer world 
And brings it into life . 



TEP BY STEP we move onward and yet deeper into 
this great study. The facts that have been so con¬ 
clusively proved in the preceding cycle are the basis 
for what is now to be set forth in this; and they should 
be carefully reviewed in order that the coming pages 
may be better understood. The term suggestion means a state¬ 
ment, command, order, or assertion of any kind, made with the 
purpose of fixing it in the mind of another person who is to be 
led, guided or controlled by it. 

Hypnotic suggestion is that which is made during hypnotic sleep; 
but, to be useful, it should be given some duty to be performed in 
after natural wakefulness. 

Natural sleep suggestion is that which is made when a person is 
in natural slumber and not under hypnotic control. It is only in 
very recent years that natural sleep suggestion has been tried to any 
extent, and the success already attained gives promise of placing 
this branch of control in the front rank of methods of cure and 
reform. 

For thousands of years it has been supposed that hypnotism, or 
that art under whatever name it has been called, was the gift of the 
devil, or the power of spirits, or some part of supernatural phe¬ 
nomena. To-day it is known only as one of the functions of the 
mind; and something wholly separated from spiritism. 

After all these centuries, the investigator discovered, and as much 
to his surprise as that of the world, that hypnosis depended on the 






48 


OPERATIONS OP TI1E OTHER MIND 


suppression of the conscious mind for the time being. This was a 
large step forward, and one that at once took the art out of the 
category of the supernatural. But, having found out this much, the 
next step was to ask the question, If hypnosis must be preceded 
by the blanking of the conscious mind, why cannot a person who 
is sound asleep naturally and not induced, be made to respond to 
the suggestions proffered at such a time? 

It seemed plausible. Then it was tried and was reported to be 
a hopeless task. The conclusion was too hastily reached. 

A person who is put into a hypnotic sleep is able to rouse out 
of it at command, and come into hypnotic wakefulness. This fol¬ 
lows profound slumber. Natural sleep is never as sound as that; 
and it has been discovered that a person who is in the same degree 
of natural sleep as the deepest degree of hypnotism, is a somnam¬ 
bulist. 

But it is useless to compare the degrees of natural slumber with 
those of hypnotic slumber. They are distinctly different and always 
will be. 

Some strange effects were produced by experiments with natural 
sleep. In the first place it was discovered that the sleeper was hardly 
ever really asleep, unless exhausted. A call would be generally an¬ 
swered, but no further attention given to it; although in some cases 
the sleeper might be fully aroused. There are many persons who 
never sleep so soundly but they will awaken in the instant when 
they hear the least noise. We have in mind some persons who will 
wake up if a hand is placed lightly on the door knob and no actual 
sound made; yet they find refreshing slumber every night. 

It was also discovered that a magnetic person who addressed a 
person in natural sleep, would be able to secure control of that 
person’s attention through the Other Mind. Then came the new 
system whereby the operator is able to sway a person who can be 
reached when in natural slumber. A typical case is that of a woman 
who had a husband who was addicted to the horse-race-gambling 
evil, and whose losses had brought ruin to a once happy and pros¬ 
perous home. She had pleaded with him, but he was unable to 
control his own passion for that kind of gambling. She did every¬ 
thing that a good wife could think of, and yet there was the 
steady downgrade into poverty and distress. She finally induced 
him to move into another locality far from the race track; and 
here he was free from temptation, and their prospects brightened. 


NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTION 


49 


The husband ceased gambling altogether. But in three years a new 
track was built not far from the place where he lived, and the 
distress began once more. He was succeeding so nicely in business 
that she felt as if a curse had followed them by this building of 
the new race track. All was black despair. 

She had studied magnetism to some extent, hut did not succeed 
in mastering him. Then she took up the study and practice of 
hypnotism; but she found it impossible to exert any influence over 
him. She could not put him into a hypnotic slumber. As she was 
on our roll of students, her case became well known to us. At 
this time many of our followers were testing the power of natural 
sleep suggestion, and she was given full directions for that purpose. 
The laws are these: 

1. There must be a recognition of the stage of natural sleep into 
which the subject has fallen. 

2. These stages are: 

a. Sleep just coming on. 

&. Light slumber. 

c. Middle slumber. 

d. Heavy slumber. 

3. Persons who are ill or very young, or very easily swayed, are 
best controlled in sleep just coming on. 

4. Where the resistance of the will is strong, heavy slumber is 
necessary to control. 

5. The actual speaking voice must be used. Silent influence has 
not won the success that follows the tones of the voice. 

6. The suggestion must not be a wish, nor a hope, nor an entreaty, 
but an absolute statement as if there could not be any doubt about 
the matter. 

7. The voice must be soft, low, very distinct, and exceedingly 
firm. It must carry certainty and assurance in every tone. It 
must not awaken the subject; for discovery will set the conscious 
mind against the operator. 

8. The voice must be sympathetic and pleasant. Sympathy is 
the mood that connects control in every form. It is the key to 
the great reform movement awaiting humanity throughout the civ¬ 
ilized world at this very moment. 

These laws were made known to the woman, and to a large 
number of special students and investigators. We will give the 
results in the case of the gambling husband to start with; as they 


50 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


are typical of almost all the other cases. She prepared herself 
carefully and had some magnetism to help her. Had she been 
without magnetism her work would have been in vain, as has been 
shown in many cases. Her first experiment was made when her 
husband was wearied by the day’s worries, and he had fallen into 
a sound sleep. She then came softly into the bedroom, and sat 
beside the bed. She did not touch him, nor did she dare to speak 
very distinctly. In fact, she seemed afraid of her own voice. These 
are some of the remarks she made at intervals, allowing half a 
minute or more to elapse between them: 

“You will not awake to-night.” 

“You will permit me to talk to you.” 

“You love your wife. You love her more than you think. You 
cannot bear to see her suffer.” 

“Once your home was full of plenty, and your family was happy. 
You have made them suffer very much. But you have made up 
your mind that you will not do so any more.” 

“There is to be a horse race to-morrow. You are not going. 
You will not want to go. When to-morrow comes, you will say 
to yourself that the horse race robs you and your family of the 
means of support, and you will hate it. Yes, you will hate it, and 
hate it with all your heart and soul.” 

This conversation she pursued over and over again for an hour, 
and during that time she grew eloquent in the use of voice and 
magnetism. It was command, and she made it intense, after a few 
repetitions. Then she retired and soon fell into a sound slumber. 
The next day her husband was making his usual preparations for 
going to the horse race; but he hesitated, and said to his wife at 
noon: “Jennie, I do not know what has come over me, but I almost 
feel as if I could resist the desire to go to the races.” 

She said: “Let me go with you.” 

“Ho, I will not go. It costs money and we need money now 
more than ever. I want to go, and yet I feel that I can resist it. 
To make sure, I am going to remain here this afternoon.” 

The next night she repeated the suggestions after he had fallen 
asleep; and this she did for the term during which the races were 
held. The second day of temptation was not severe for him; after 
that he said that he hated the races, and this proved to be a fact. 
The cure was permanent. This is one of a large number of cases 
conducted under our instructions. 


NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTION 


51 


A mother wished to cure her boy of the habit of fighting his 
playmates. She went to his bedside when he was falling asleep; 
and her efforts were not a success. About two months later she 
renewed the experiment, but waited till he was sound asleep; and 
then spoke to him somewhat as follows, observing the eight laws: 

“Freddie, you love your mother. You want to please her.” 

“She is very much displeased when you fight your boy friends.” 

“To-morrow, when you meet the little boys, you will not fight 
them.. You will say to yourself that it is very wrong, and, besides, 
your mother does not want you to fight, and you will never fight 
again.” 

“The little hoys will not be able to make you fight. You have 
made up your mind that it is wrong, and you will not fight again, 
no matter how much they annoy you.” 

This did not prove effective at first; but it was persisted in for 
eight nights, and the habit was completely cured. And, incidentally, 
some other faults disappeared with it. 

Another mother had a son fourteen years of age who had learned 
in secret to smoke cigarettes. She tried every known method to 
cure him, but without avail. Finally she took up this course and 
experiment with natural sleep suggestion. Her suggestions were as 
follows: 

“Jack, you love your mother. You would not hurt her feelings. 
You know that cigarette smoking is sure to ruin your mind and 
make a weak man of you. You know this.” 

“You will not smoke to-morrow ” 

“When you see a cigarette to-morrow, you will hate it. You will 
know that it is bad and hurtful.” 

“You are going to make up your mind to-morrow to be a man, 
and you will be strong enough in mind to give up smoking. You 
will throw the cigarette away.” 

The woman was weak in magnetism, and the boy did not show 
that he had been influenced. She tried it for four more nights, 
but without result. Then she began to review her books on magnet¬ 
ism, and saw the need of greater power within herself. This she 
developed in a few weeks, and then renewed the suggestions. Some 
good had been done, however; for one of the boys reported that 
Jack did not smoke as much as he did. After three nights of 
further suggestion the boy had been influenced. Here is the way 
he states the change that had come over him: 


52 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


“All at once, when Jimmy Knowles rolled me a cigarette and 
handed it to me, I took it and pnt it in my month. But I did not 
light it. Jimmy offered me a light, but I did not care for it. He 
then chaffed me and I lighted it. But I did not draw. I let it go 
out and threw it away. Then I told Jimmy that I had got through, 
and it was a had habit and I was going to be a man. I never care 
for the things now.” 

The cure was complete. 

A tough hoy of nineteen was a terribly profane lad and seemed 
to take pride in his cursing. Nothing could be done to change the 
habit. Some church people got after him and tried to bring him 
into Sunday school a few weeks before Christmas in the prospect 
of being helped in many ways. A chance to work in a store was 
also offered him. But he would not give up his profanity. He 
lived in a garret where mice and rats had free scope, and his attire 
was not attractive; but he was capable of making a man if he could 
be brought under control. A man who wanted a difficult case was 
assigned to this lad. Access was furnished to the garret, and the 
boy was reached when sound asleep nights. Here are the statements 
made to him in sound slumber: 

“You are a tough boy and nobody likes you. But all good people 
help the bad boys who want to be helped.” 

“You want to be helped. To-morrow you will say that you want 
good people to help you.” 

“To-morrow you will think every time you swear how wrong it is. 
You will not say curse words.” These were repeated several times. 

“All those curse words are wicked. You will know to-morrow 
that they are wicked. You will hate them. You will dread to speak 
them.” 

“You will to-morrow talk so nicely that everybody will say you 
are a young gentleman, and they will be glad, and you will be proud, 
for it is a great thing to be a man and be thought well of by every¬ 
body.” 

Five nights of this suggestion began to be followed by results. 
The man was very magnetic, and drove home his assertions with 
power. On the day after the fifth night, the lad was observed to 
be very cautious when he used bad language, and he was hardly 
caught speaking it aloud. The next few days he ceased all pro¬ 
fanity. A month later he was heard scolding in good, honest Eng¬ 
lish a m’an who was cursing in his presence. But he never was 


NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTION 


53 


heard to utter a profane word again. The reform was complete. 
He was brought into the church and is to-day a useful and honored 
citizen. If one individual can be saved from wrong-doing in this 
way, what a power is it that can bring about the change! 

A boy of seventeen years had formed the habit usual with many 
boys in their teens. Doctors, diet, treatment and all known means 
were exhausted in the effort to overcome the fault. Then the father, 
who had become interested in magnetism and telepathy, made use 
of natural sleep suggestion as a last resort. The boy did not want 
to be hypnotized and resisted every attempt in that direction. The 
father had a room adjoining his, and was able to come into the boy’s 
bedroom after he had fallen asleep. He made use-of the following 
suggestions for a period of seven alternate nights; and, at the end 
of two weeks, the cure was permanent. The fault never came back. 
The statements made to the son in sleep were: 

“You love your father and mother. You will do anything for 
them that they ask you.” 

“You know you are doing wrong, and you think you cannot help 
it, but to-morrow you will find that you can help it.” 

“To-morrow you will know that it is wrong. You will see that 
it is wrong, and you will say to yourself that it is wrong.” 

“You will not do anything wrong, because you will hurt your 
father’s feelings and make your mother suffer for you.” 

“You do not want the doctor to know how weak you are, and 
you will show to him and to all the world that you are able to be 
a man and to never do this wrong again.” 

Another case that has furnished much light on the operations of 
the two minds, is that of a young lady about eighteen years of age, 
who was wilful, disobedient, and rapidly falling into evil ways. Her 
mother was very much worried over the fact that she had become 
the boon companion of another young lady whose reputation was 
not good. When the daughter was argued with, she would fly into 
a fit of rage and threatened to kill herself; and would then stay away 
for a day or two. Kindness, entreaty, threats and other means of 
changing her habits had no effect on her. A physician suggested 
hypnotism, but there was no way by which the daughter could be 
controlled. She was of that high-strung, emotional temperament 
that could not be placed into the hypnotic slumber without her full 
consent. So this treatment was out of the question. Later on, the 
mother, in her studies of magnetism, concluded that she could em- 


54 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


ploy telepathy in natural sleep, as this was easily possible. She pro¬ 
ceeded with great care. 

In order to avoid mistake and failure by clumsy attempts, the 
mother went into her own preparation with great care. It was two 
nights before a proposed trip to the camping ground of a party of 
young persons which had been the cause of much scandal; and the 
mother was almost desperate in her desire to prevent the girl from 
becoming one of the party. Making sure the daughter was in sound 
slumber, the mother made use of the following suggestions at in¬ 
tervals, following the rules laid down in this cycle, and being ever 
watchful not to waken the girl: 

“You love your mother .” 

It will be noticed that the attempt is made in every instance to 
suggest love or affection as one of the motives for reform. 

“You know you love your mother. You want to please her.” 

“To-morrow all day long you will say to yourself that you want 
to do what will most please your mother. You will try hard to find 
some way to please her.” 

“All day long to-morrow, you will hunt for some useful work 
which will please your mother, and you will think of all the ways 
by which you can please your mother.” 

“All day to-morrow you will think of everything that will please 
your mother, and you will surprise her by saying that you will not 
go to the camping party.” 

“You will he sure to-morrow that your mother does not want 
you to go to the camping party, and you will tell your mother that 
you have decided not to go.” 

“To-morrow you will make up your mind that you hate Mary 
Hillton, and will not want to see her again. Mary Hillton is not 
your friend, but uses you to enable her to have her own way, and 
she is not going to use you any more. You will make up your mind 
to this to-morrow and every day. You will dislike even to see 
Mary Hillton, for you know she is a bad girl, and you want to be 
good.” 

“You know that Mary Hillton is doing wrong, and you know the 
people are aware of it too, and to-morrow you will be so impressed 
with the fact that you will tell Mary Hillton not to come around to 
see you any more.” 

These suggestions were repeated for nearly two hours; which will 
indicate the deep purpose of the mother to reach the Other Mind 


NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTION 


55 

of her daughter and control her. Persistence is necessary for success. 
Remember this fact. 

When morning came, the girl was up bright and early, and actually 
went to her mother and asked in what way she could help her. 
The mother planned to keep her in sight or near to her all day, 
if possible, but she did not make any reference to the camping party. 
In the middle of the forenoon, Mary Hillton called, and the daughter 
sent word to her that she was busy and would come over and see her 
later in the day. 

Turning to her mother she said: “Mother, I do not think Mary 
Hillton is the best kind of a girl for me to go around with. I am 
not going to be so thick with her in the future. After the camping 
party is over with, I am going to cut Mary to some extent. She 
is a good-hearted girl, but is not discreet enough for me. What 
do you think of me for that ?” 

“You know Mary better than I do. You are the better judge. 
If she is not what you desire for a companion, you can find some 
very nice young ladies in another set. But you know best, Emma.” 

The day wore on, and the daughter kept her agreement to call on 
the Hillton girl. She did not stay very long, and the mother thought 
it wisest not to ask her any questions. 

That night she repeated the suggestions for over two hours, and 
the victory was won the next day. The daughter is now a model 
young woman, sweet and refined, and in every way a credit to the 
best of her sex. But she had gone dangerously close to ruin, as 
the after history of the Hillton girl proved, who is now an inmate 
of a house. 

This case has been under our knowledge for several years, and 
the facts are not only well established but have been the cause of 
much intercourse between us and two clergymen who are now making 
preparations for the deeper study of this law of the two minds. 
One writes as follows: “If a mother’s love cannot save her only 
daughter from ruin by an appeal to the conscious mind, but can 
reach her moral nature by access to the Other Mind, then the world 
has just begun; and I believe it has. This case is as familiar to 
me as my own life, and the truth of it in every part is what has 
aroused my eternal interest in the power of the second mind. We 
are surely at the beginning of the world and have much to do before 
true progress can be claimed, and the work ahead is in the culture 
of the new-found power.” 


56 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


The remarkable thing about the last case is, as possibly it is 
also in the other cases, that the conscious mind is the meaner mind 
of the human being. It may be frightened; but in this age of free¬ 
dom, there is almost no method by which it can be controlled against 
the will of the owner; and the only hope of better things lies in the 
reform of the individual through the Other Mind. 

A very practical case has recently been reported back to us from 
a woman student, who sought to influence her husband to remain 
at home evenings. He had joined about everything in town that he 
could use as means of being out nights, and the family suffered 
from the lack of sympathy and attention from the man. He was 
large and strong in body, and of imperious will; while his wife was 
a small woman who rarely ever asserted herself except in a small 
way. But she had faith in the power of suggestion during natural 
sleep, and put it to good use, after the most careful preparation. 
Owing to the habits of the knight-errant, she was compelled to ad¬ 
minister the suggestion at his bedside in the early hours of the 
morning. He always slept soundly. Here are the suggestions she 
made to him: 

“You love your wife, and you love your children.” 

“When you wake up you will say to yourself all day long that 
you love your wife and you love your children.” 

“You will say to yourself all day long that it is very selfish for 
you to be away from your wife and your children so many nights.” 

“You will not be able to shake off the thought that it is very 
selfish to be out nights and leave your wife and children alone in 
the house, and take no interest in them.” 

“You will say to yourself all day long that you will stay at home 
at least one or two nights in every week.” 

“When you begin to make plans to be out nights, you will think 
of your wife and children at home, and you will think how mean 
and selfish it is to leave them there, lonely, while you are having a 
good time with your men friends.” 

These suggestions she made for a full hour, but they did not seem 
to bear fruit at first. She was told to keep up the work, no matter 
if it took weeks, as results would come in time. 

At the end of the ninth trial, the husband seemed to be slow about 
dressing for his lodge one Friday night. He went, but he came 
back in half an hour. On being asked why he had returned, he 
replied, “There is nothing doing for me, and I want to look over 


NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTION 


57 


the magazines at home. They have accumulated.” It was a moment 
of great triumph for the wife. 

He stayed at home and seemed pleased at the change. 

The next night he went out to a lodge supper which kept him till 
three in the morning. On his return the wife renewed the sugges¬ 
tions, and on the following Monday she heard him say to a friend 
who had called to take him to a meeting: “Hang it, no, man: I 
can’t get a minute at home. What do you think my family is doing 
all the time I am away nights ? They just go to bed and sleep while 
I carouse.” 

He stayed at home for three nights; but a very important meeting 
called him out on the next evening; and, to the surprise of his wife, 
he was back again by nine o’clock. She did not say anything, but 
looked immensely pleased. That ended the nights away. 

The cure has been complete. 

The knight-errant is now a much happier man, the family are 
refreshed by his presence, he helps the boys with their problems, 
and the girl with her algebra, and at times takes part in their 
games. Then they have time for evening engagements away from 
home in which the family can participate. It is indeed the begin¬ 
ning of the world with them, and all because the little, puny, in¬ 
significant wife made up her mind that, if there was anything in 
telepathy in natural sleep, she would find it out, and she did. 

This branch of telepathy is comparatively young; much younger 
than the others; but it is sure to open up a larger field of labor and 
results than any other because of the ease with which people can be 
reached and influenced. 

The Journal of Mental Pathology, in its June issue, mentions 
the same law as having been used. The Revue de VHypnotisme , 
November, also has a similar claim. 

Farez, a most successful investigator, refers to this branch of telep¬ 
athy as suggestion somnique, and says it is most useful in many 
cases of insanity where actual hypnotism is impossible; and that it 
has been effective in neurasthenia, and especially in correcting bad 
habits in young people. 

Berillon states that Hansen, the well-known Danish hypnotist, 
when in school, used to amuse himself by making suggestions to his 
sleeping comrades, which they carried out the following days. 

A high authority thinks that the adoption of the universal prac¬ 
tice of natural sleep suggestion might lead to all kinds of complica- 


58 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


tions in life for which reason it is a dangerous method. The answer 
to this claim is that any person who chooses is able to sleep alone 
and to lock the door of the bedroom securely and thus keep out all 
who might seek to make use of this power. This exemption does 
not apply to younger members of a family; but, with them, the 
question of being properly brought up rests with the parents or 
guardians, so that the new influence would simply become a greater 
aid to the same ends. 

But the operator must be a man or woman of magnetism; and only 
a few persons are magnetic, or would decide to take up the study 
of magnetism from reliable courses of training in book form, which 
is the only way in which it can be thoroughly taught. There is 
to-day no other method of cultivating personal magnetism than by 
reliable books, and but few of those are really helpful. 

Young children are usually controllable by wakeful suggestions, 
but not always. If life or mind can be saved by natural sleep sug¬ 
gestion, it should by all means be resorted to for that purpose. 

A mother found her little boy of five years in convulsions, and 
she learned upon inquiry that he had been badly frightened by some 
vicious playmates. The shock was such that the doctor feared that 
he would become insane or would die. The mother had already 
become proficient in magnetism through a course of books, but she 
had never thought it would prove useful to her. She at once made 
use of the power of sleeping suggestion, and did not cease night and 
day until she brought the boy back to his normal mental condition. 
Her suggestions were of her own invention and not those of the 
usual routine that are generally employed. 

She at first told the boy when he fell asleep that on waking he 
would laugh at the pranks of the other boys, as they would not 
hurt him, but would seem funny and he would enjoy them. She 
went through with the very pranks that had frightened him; describ¬ 
ing them in detail and telling him that, when he awoke, he would 
find them nice and just what he would like to do to the other boys. 
She told him that he would play the same pranks on his mother 
when he awoke and that they would not harm anyone. 

After the first trial, the boy was somewhat calmer. After the 
second he was nearer to a normal condition. In a week he had re¬ 
gained his own mind and had lost all fear of the events that had 
sent him into convulsive fright. The cure has been permanent. 
To prove it the very same boys have repeated the frightful scene 


NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTION 


59 


several times, and the boy has entered into the enjoyment of it with 
a genuine relish. 

Now it is certain that the conscious mind could never have been 
convinced of the truth of the mother’s assertion; but the Other 
Mind, having power of life and health, was able to master the boy 
and convince his conscious mind. 

Many times you have found men, women and children over whom 
you have utterly failed to exert the least control in matters vital to 
their welfare. You have appealed in many ways to their conscious 
mind, but you could not move it. Their Other Mind was the only 
agency by which their conscious mind could be moved, convinced and 
controlled. It seems to be proved that there are two laws at work 
in human life, and they may be stated as follows: 

1. The conscious mind will not yield to the efforts of other persons 
when it chooses not to be so moved. 

2. The conscious mind, no matter how much it desires to resist, is 
not able to set itself against the Other Mind, as the latter has easy, 
absolute and permanent control over the former. 

A very useful employment of the natural sleep suggestion has 
come to mind in a jury trial. The case was a plain one, and eleven 
men on the jury found it so; but there was a twelfth man who had 
for some reason made up his mind in advance; and, being very ob¬ 
stinate, he said he would stay in the jury room until a certain 
classical region froze over, before he would find a verdict for the 
plaintiff. He kept the jury out two days. They then reported a 
disagreement; but the judge sent them back. Being pretty tired, 
the obstinate juror fell asleep. One magnetic man on the jury 
employed the following suggestion: 

“You are one man on the jury. You think the defendant ought 
to have a verdict. But when you wake up you will see your error. 
Then you will say to yourself that the plaintiff ought to have the 
verdict, and you will be very anxious to find for the plaintiff.” 

By this line of suggestion the man was talked to for hours, and 
when he awoke he asked for a ballot and voted with the majority. 
The verdict was a just one. After the court had adjourned the 
jurors had a meeting and discussed the facts as stated. The obstinate 
juror said that when he awoke he thought it was all wrong for one 
man to try to rule eleven others, and he was now satisfied that they 
were right. He said: “I had a half dream that I ought to vote 
with you fellows.” 


60 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


The speed with which the change was effected may be accounted 
for by the fact that the man was tired out and wanted to go home, 
but had it in his mind to show the majority that one man could 
rule eleven. This determination was overcome in that sleep, and he 
admitted it. 

Little children believe for the most part in the parents, especially 
if the latter have never deceived them; and when the trust is perfect 
it is easy to control them by suggestion during full wakefulness. 
But the results are never as marked and as satisfying as when nat¬ 
ural sleep suggestion is employed. 

The eight laws given in the early part of this cycle must be thor¬ 
oughly observed. 

The suggestion must relate to some waking period. 

Hanson took advantage of the sleeping period of his comrades or 
schoolmates, and made suggestions to them to be carried out during 
waking hours on some subsequent day. The suggestions were made 
when in natural sleep; and they were executed during their usual 
wakefulness. If the precaution is not taken to refer all statements 
to a time of execution when in natural wakefulness, then the efforts 
will fail. We have had occasion to note this as the cause of several 
failures that were afterwards pronounced successes when this step 
was properly taken. 

There is not the slightest doubt that the execution of the sugges¬ 
tions occurs in the periods of natural wakefulness. 

There is not the slightest doubt that the Other Mind is the func¬ 
tion that takes in the suggestion during natural sleep. 

There is not the slightest doubt that the Other Mind carries the 
purpose to execute the suggestion during wakefulness. 

There is not the slightest doubt that the Other Mind during wake¬ 
fulness compels the conscious mind to perform the duty. 

Finally, there is not the slightest doubt that the conscious mind 
is the weak mind, no matter how strong it is in some things. 

We do not believe that the Other Mind ever sleeps, or ever is 
inactive; but the satisfying part of the matter is that it is able 
to connect itself with the conscious mind at times, and thus to show 
its magnificent power. Its ability to master human life is nearly 
always held in abeyance. It is to bring it into activity that every 
man and woman should study the Other Mind and the processes 
by which it may be brought into the conscious mind, in part at least 
of its work. 


NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTION 


61 


It is like the man who was locked in a room made of strong 
masonry. He could not receive help because he could not break 
down the walls that held him in. But he could hear the message 
from the next room telling him that help was at hand; that there 
were men who could save him as soon as they could get into the 
place where he was so securely held. He could not admit them, and 
they did not come to him. 

A man who was caught under a falling mass of dirt and held down 
in a deep well, with only a chink to let in some air, heard his 
rescuers endeavoring to remove the debris that separated him from 
them. It was a question whether he would perish before they could 
get to him, or could survive the efforts to reach him. 

The conscious mind is the slave of the moods, wants, feelings, 
demands and tendencies of the body, and its faculties. It is a drudge 
that does their bidding. Appetite, desire, cravings all sway that 
mind. The evils done in life, the bad habits some of which are 
made fashionable by their frequency and universality, the yielding 
to desires that alone can account for the tolerance of the “first pro¬ 
fession,” are master-influences that rule the conscious mind and 
judgment of humanity. The use of tobacco, the increasing us? of 
alcoholic drinks, the spread of horse-race-gambling, the practice of 
prostitution among millions of women, and their support by many 
more millions of men who pretend to respectability in their public, 
domestic and church life: these are some of the weaknesses of 
the body that sway the conscious mind. Under the name of 
personal liberty they ask the right to bring all their fellow beings 
to the same low level as themselves. Against such wrongs there is 
no army yet marshaled that can hold successful combat, except the 
interference of the Other Mind, and this is yet in its beginnings. 

But it has come up from over the horizon out of the darkness of 
degeneracy that has been lowering of late on mankind, and it has 
come to stay. 

It is the hope of the immediate future and the only hope. 


FIFTH CYCLE 




F teach ourselves by thoughts 
That climb the hidden wall 
Of waning consciousness 
And peer within the realm 
Beyond our human hen 
For wisdom's higher guide . 


EEORE proceeding further in the direct line of our 
studies we will digress for one cycle for the pur¬ 
pose of connecting the consideration of self-suggestion 
with that just described. By reference to the last 
cycle it will he seen that the Other Mind can be 
brought into activity during natural sleep. In the cycle before the 
last, it was shown that hypnotic sleep projected the Other Mind 
into action. Thus there are three methods of influence before us 
at this time. 

1. Hypnotic sleep is induced by the operator. 

2. Suggestion in natural sleep requires no operator, but is done 
to take advantage of the absence of active consciousness in the 
working mind. 

3. Self-suggestion occurs when any person seeks to exert an influ¬ 
ence on himself or herself by reaching the Other Mind. 

One principle runs through all these methods, and they have their 
advantages and disadvantages. It is found that induced hypnotic 
sleep opens the other mind wider than any other form of control; 
and this is an advantage in the value of the results secured. 

By the use of natural sleep suggestion is brought about in the 
cases of persons who cannot or do not wish to be hypnotized; and, 
includes many who would not like to know that control over them 
was sought by any person. Its work and its fruits can be obtained 
without the consent or the knowledge of those who are thus influ- 








SELF SUGGESTIONS 


63 


enced. A person may have some course of life wholly changed and 
not know the cause of it, by this method. 

In self-suggestion the great advantage is the privacy of the whole 
affair, as the subject requires no aid from others. The disadvantage 
is found in the slowness of the process. 

The disadvantage of hypnotism is the danger that attends it in 
the weakening of the mental powers of the person so treated; al¬ 
though this danger is very slight in the first few trials. Yet it should 
never be wantonly employed. 

The disadvantage of natural sleep suggestion is in the fact that 
it is not as pronounced as that which comes during hypnotic sleep, 
and is limited to that class of persons who can be approached when in 
the embrace of slumber. The old song, “Come where my love lies 
dreaming/’ seemed to Artemus Ward to be based on a wrong assump¬ 
tion, as such a visit was not proper from the standpoint of his 
training. 

Self-suggestion is a slow process, but a sure one. It is slow in 
the majority of instances. It is speedy in a few cases. Its power 
depends wholly on the magnetism of the individual who employs it. 
Thus it becomes known that magnetism is a self-power as well as 
an influence that goes out to others. 

Scientific books have had much to say on the subject of self- 
suggestion; but refer to it as auto-suggestion. There are many 
explanations of the power, and it has always been associated with 
telepathy and hypnotism. The experiments of Dr. Coste de La- 
grave, surgeon-major of the French army, related almost wholly to 
himself. By the same kind of suggestion that is made in natural 
sleep, as stated in the pages just preceding, he could order himself 
to do something at a certain time and place. He also was able to 
command himself to sleep at any hour of the day, and to wake up 
at a given minute. He went so far as to get five distinct sleeps, 
and as many distinct awakenings, all in the space of an hour, and 
all arranged before any of the sleeps began. He then learned to 
apply auto-suggestion to curative processes in himself. When in 
pain from a severe attack of colic he removed the distress in fifteen 
minutes. His method was to shut his eyes, make his mind a blank, 
and then order the suggested idea to be executed. On one occa¬ 
sion when riding with troops he was greatly troubled with cold feet, 
and tried the effect of auto-suggestion. The account taken from a 
scientific work on the affair is given as follows: 


64 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


“He closed his eyes and induced a state of drowsiness, in which 
he directed his suggestions to the condition of his feet, and com¬ 
manded them to become warm. In less than half-an-hour he was 
conscious of a feeling of warmth in them. In subsequent experi¬ 
ments he produced the desired results in a shorter time, and he found 
that the sensation of warmth was not subjective, as on removing 
his boots his feet that had been previously cold to the touch were 
now quite warm. 

A French magazine in March, and May, contains articles on self- 
suggestion. The periodical is known as the Revue de VHypnotisme. 

An American author, C. G. Leland, in his book, states the fol¬ 
lowing results in himself by suggestion made to himself on going 
to sleep nights: 

1. He greatly strengthened his memory. 

2. He improved his temper which had been bad and a hindrance 
to him in all his undertakings. 

3. He increased his capacity for work. 

His method was to make formulas for suggestions and repeat 
them in a very slight tone while becoming drowsy, and he would 
often be cut short by actual sleep while in the midst of some 
formula. 

Hudson, the author of “Law of Psychic Phenomena,” lays down the 
same law and recommends the same procedure, although not having 
any apparent knowledge of the plan as set forth by Leland. Another 
author, Wood, in his work on “Ideal Suggestion,” covers the same 
ground. 

A well-known work says: “This practice throws light on a num¬ 
ber of mental phenomena connected with directed self-consciousness, 
which are at present surrounded with a degree of mysticism. The 
yogis of India obtain remarkable control over their bodies and 
functions by auto-suggestion.” 

In this cycle we will discuss the law under the name of self-sug¬ 
gestion, as that is a plainer term for the same thing. It exists in 
many phases. 

The law is a simple and a practical one; and, if the yogis of 
India obtain results that are remarkable it is due to their long and 
patient practice which is not possible in a land where time is of 
greater value than in that country. However, to those who have 
the time and inclination, it is full of possibilities and also of 


SELF SUGGESTIONS 


65 


wonders. As employed in this work the following characteristics are 
noteworthy: 

1. It is simple. 

2. It is practical. 

3. It can be undertaken by any person. 

4. While it is a slow process in the absence of magnetism, it can 
be made very quick in its results to one who has acquired magnetism 
by special attention to a scientific course on the subject. 

5. It is based on the same principle as all suggestion, as it seeks 
to obtain audience with the Other Mind. 

6. In hypnotism the Other Mind is reached by the hypnotic sup¬ 
pression of the conscious mind, for that is what hypnotism is for. 
In natural-sleep-suggestion the Other Mind is reached when the 
conscious mind is suppressed, for that is what natural sleep is for. 
In self-suggestion the Other Mind is reached at that time when sleep 
is coming on, for it is at such time that the conscious mind gives 
way, and leaves the Other Mind free to act. 

7. It will be noticed that the two minds are not in control at the 
same time, just as two houses do not stand on the same spot at the 
same time. The conscious mind is the working mind, and the body 
needs it during its activities. The other Mind seems to hold greater 
power, but is not designed to do the work of physical life. A loco¬ 
motive may pull the train, and the engineer may control the loco¬ 
motive, but the engineer cannot pull the train. The locomotive 
does the work, but it generally goes where the people in the train 
want it to go, so that the working power is the agent of the train 
which it pulls, altogether the latter could not move without it. The 
train includes its occupants. 

8. In self-suggestion the person speaks to himself. He is like 
two persons; one who speaks, and the other spoken to. This indi¬ 
cates that the Other Mind responds to direct orders from the con¬ 
scious mind. 

9. The reason why magnetism is necessary is this: The conscious 
mind, acting merely as a physical intelligence, has nothing that 
comes from the realm of the Other Mind. As magnetism originates 
in the same realm as the Other Mind, it is necessary to employ mag¬ 
netism whenever we wish to secure audience with the Other Mind. 
Almost every man and woman may be taught magnetism even in 
greater degree than is found in what is supposed to be a natural 
condition. 


66 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


10. While the soft, intense tones of the audible voice are better 
in self-suggestion, they are not necessary. But it is necessary that 
there should be a clear-cut articulation at least in pantomime in 
order to drive the command or suggestion home to the Other Mind. 
The reason for this is because thoughts do not take definite shape 
in language unless expressed and made to live in perfectly formed 
words. When one is falling asleep there is apt to be a misty state 
of the ideas which have no power at all. 

11. The suggestions should be repeated until sleep cuts them off. 
It is important that sleep shall come on while the suggestions are 
being put into definite shape. No other thought should be allowed 
within the mind. 

In some of our works published twenty years ago, and since, this 
law will be found stated in a general way, but not as an exact science. 
But the power of self-suggestion has been known for a long time. 
The conclusions set forth in this cycle are based on what has been 
actually brought to our attention and shown to be both accurate and 
authentic. Failures under the conditions stated herein are impossible. 
There have been hundreds of marked successes, and a few typical 
cases will be included in this department. 

1.—A man who wanted to cure himself of the habit of smoking in 
order to please his wife, and who found himself a slave to the use 
of tobacco, resorted to self-suggestion, and the cure came in three 
months. He did not practice the method nightly, but as often as 
he could think of it. Some of the suggestions were as follows: 

“Look here, you are a man, and you know it. You will wake 

up to-morrow and find yourself very strong in will power, for you 

will be able to refuse the cigar which some friend will offer you.” 

“You will not buy any cigars to-morrow. You will go right 
past the store and look in, but will not go in.” 

“You will not feel like smoking to-morrow.” 

The man, writing of his experience, says: “I did not feel any 
less inclination to smoke for several weeks. I then began to lose 
interest in it. But if a good cigar was offered me I did not refuse 
it. It was too good to let go by. But I kept on with the night 
talks to myself, as you directed, and in a month or so, I was almost 

cured. Occasionally I renewed the talks, and in three months I 

was able to refuse good cigars, and stopped the smoking altogether. 
I say this for the benefit of many men whom I know who are slaves 
to the habit, but who think they are not. They all say they can 


SELF SUGGESTIONS 


67 


stop when they like to; but this is not true. Some want to stop, and 
they can do so by this method/ 5 

2. —A woman who was very nervous and who could not control her¬ 
self at home, found that the disease was growing on her with marked 
progress. Doctors could do nothing, and other means failed. So 
she took up the study of magnetism and self-suggestion; the two 
being started together. In a short time she had acquired enough 
vitality to base the suggestions upon. Some of her talk was as 
follows: 

“You are not really nervous. You think you are; but to-morrow 
you will wake up and find yourself free from much of your trouble.” 

“You can save yourself from nervous prostration by a little effort 
and this effort you will make to-morrow and every day/ 5 

“You will not give way to your nerves to-morrow. You will be 
a strong woman, and you will be proud of your power over your 
nerves.” 

She continued the practice for three months and conquered it. 
At the present time she writes: “The cure has been complete. 
My nerves are all right. I have no fear of further nervousness.” 

She made a long, hard fight and won. 

3. —A physician had acquired the opium habit, and it had secured 
absolute control over him. He gave up his practice and was on 
the road to ruin and death when his attention was called to the 
power of hypnotism. He relied on what he called self-hypnotism, 
but did not make any progress until he adopted the simple and prac¬ 
tical method as set forth in this cycle. He adhered to the method 
with exactness all the way. It was very difficult to begin. His 
wife encouraged him. At that time, the practice of natural sleep 
suggestion was not known to her or to him, and so was not employed. 
Had it been the results would have come sooner. But they came in 
this case solely by self-suggestion. His suggestions to himself 
were somewhat as follows: 

“You are pretty far gone, but there is hope and you are yet all 
right/ 5 

“To-morrow you will have strength to fight your habit, but it will 
not be much. 55 

“Every day you will have more strength and it will grow more 
and more every morning when you awaken. 55 

This was the formula for a week. He practiced daily. After that 
it ran as follows: 


68 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


“You certainly have gained. To-morrow, when yon wake up, 
you will note with pleasure the progress that you have made.” 

“You will make more and more progress every day.” 

“Each day you will be stronger than the day before.” 

In a month it was a fact, seen and known by other physicians, 
that he had made considerable progress toward mastery of the habit. 
In one more month he was regarded as on the road to ultimate 
recovery from the dread slavery. To-day he is practicing his pro¬ 
fession with success. He says that the habit was formed by smoking 
cigarettes which were made the agent for fastening the opium slavery 
upon him in order that he would smoke more cigarettes and thus 
patronize the business of the makers of such goods. He has made 
a study of the problem of cigarette smoking as he believes that the 
manufacturers intend to make slaves of all who start to use them; 
just as some brewers of beer drug their product to fasten the craving 
for it on the public and thus increase their sales. 

4.—A woman was unable to curb her temper when at home. Her 
husband had found it impossible to endure it, and was on the point 
of making his home elsewhere. The woman could not understand 
her condition, which had come on since her youngest child had 
been weaned. It seemed to take possession of her like some evil 
spirit. Had she lived in the olden times, she would have been 
regarded as possessed of a devil. Yet she had sense enough to want 
to cure herself, and she wanted to do it in privacy. By accident 
she met a lady who had been using self-suggestion with success; 
and, combining that practice with magnetism, she went at work 
with her temper to see if she would be able to master it. The 
progress she made is interesting as, apart from this infirmity, the 
woman was very well educated and of high intelligence. Her talks 
to herself were finally made, after some failures, in the manner set 
forth in this cycle which has been in private use for a number of 
years. The successful suggestions were: 

“Your bad temper is just a trifling affair which you can control 
if you make up your mind to do so.” 

“To-morrow all day long you will guard yourself so that you will 
not be angry once. Nothing will vex you. At times the bad temper 
will start, but you will be able to put it down.” 

“You will say to-morrow that you are able to hold your temper. 
There will come times when you will start to speak, then you will 
change it into a laugh, and the bad nature will all be gone.” 


SELF SUGGESTIONS 


69 


“To-morrow all day you will be. pleasant. You will be especially 
pleasant when your bad temper tries to show itself. At every time 
it does, you will just laugh at it. It will never come back. There 
is nothing that bad temper hates so much as to be laughed at.” 

“You will all day long to-morrow and every day be pleasant and 
will not say anything that is unkind.” 

The woman tells in her report the way in which the change came 
over her: “For some weeks I could not conquer my temper; but I 
made a patched-up peace with my husband by telling him that I 
was sorry I had a bad temper and that if he would be patient with me 
the paroxysms would in time pass away never to come on again. 
When at last I understood why I could not succeed with self-sug¬ 
gestion, I began it all over again and aright. In four days I was 
able to hold back an avalanche of abuse that was rising on my tongue. 
In two days more I held back two outbursts of temper. In another 
four days I was almost calm during the whole day. After that I 
began to be good-natured nearly all the time. I was now bent on 
acquiring a jolly disposition as an offset to the long period of 
ugliness that I had to live through; and I did really and truly become 
of a jovial disposition.” 

The husband was let into the secret later on and said: “My 
wife returned to her normal self gradually; so slight were the 
changes each day that I did not realize what was going on. But 
she is now quite different from her original self. In the first years 
of our marriage she was sedate. Now she is actually a rollicking 
good-natured woman.” 

The woman said later on: “Perhaps you will be interested to 
know that the new nature is permanent. I taught it to myself by 
suggestion in the manner taught. I believe that I could have 
made myself in time any kind of a woman I wanted to be, and 
could really alter my temperament, so powerful is self-suggestion.” 

5.—A young man was employed in an office where difficult prob¬ 
lems in engineering arose, and he was in fear of losing his position 
because of his inability to work them out correctly. He took home 
the papers for the evening and still could not work them out. Then 
he went to bed and laid the papers under his pillow; his only pur¬ 
pose being to have them handy in case he awoke in the night, so that 
he might utilize his hours of wakefulness on the problems. 

As he fell asleep his mind was on the troubles that faced him. 
In an hour he awoke and found the solution very easy. After 


'70 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


that for a year he made it a practice to go to bed every night with the 
difficult problems under his pillow, whenever he had any, and he 
found the solution always easy to obtain on awaking. 

A schoolmaster, having a class in the deeper problems of mathe¬ 
matics, advised every one who could not work them out to take the 
book and place it under the pillow and dream on it, as he expressed 
it. He said that an old master told him that years ago and that he 
got it from another older master, who claimed that the practice 
had been handed down from the centuries. 

In a private meeting of teachers during a summer session, the 
question was put to them as to the efficacy of this practice; and 
seven of the teachers stated that they had been told of it when they 
were pupils, and that they had tried it with great success. From 
other sources we have learned of the same thing as being an old 
idea, yet valuable. One master said in a letter on the subject: 
“When a schoolboy I was once in a while unable to see into a 
problem. I could not understand what it meant, or the way to do 
it was obscure. I had been told to take it to bed with me and 
go to sleep thinking of it, and put the book under my head. This 
I did and I never once failed to find the answer in my head the 
next morning.” 

One of the greatest of modern actors used to take his part in a 
new play to bed with him, read it over once after he got in bed, and 
then put the part under his pillow and fall asleep. He said in a 
public address that he was enabled to memorize the whole part in 
one night in that way. The remarkable power of actors and 
actresses to learn long parts in a few hours has been noted in many 
writings, and is easily proved. We were personally acquainted with 
many of them, and have investigated their methods. They say they 
“go to sleep nights reading their lines.” And this means often 
that they will memorize in one night more lines than an ordinary 
person might be able to memorize in two months. 

In the life of Daniel Webster it is stated that the latter had 
memorized the whole Bible, Old Testament and Hew, as well as 
Milton’s works, and all of Shakespeare. This is a stupendous task, 
as there are not many persons who have even read these works. 
But Webster when a lad was in the habit of taking the book to 
bed with him, with a lighted candle on the table nearby, and read¬ 
ing himself to sleep. On one occasion he awoke to find that some 
papers had fallen from a shelf on the lighted candle and caught 


SELF SUGGESTIONS 


n 


fire, from which he escaped with difficulty. His father, after ex¬ 
tinguishing the flames, asked why he had allowed the room to catch 
fire, and he replied that he wanted “more light” on what he had 
been reading. 

Those who are familiar with the great painters will recall the 
story of one who had been for a long time at work on a face which 
did not have the expression that he desired. In his worry over the 
work he fell asleep, brush in hand. Soon he awoke to find the face 
complete, and the expression marvelous. The brush in his hand 
was still moist with freshly used paint, having a color or shade that 
he had not consciously mixed. Whether this story is true or not, 
the principle held in its charm is correct. 

Thomas A. Edison, the inventor, shuts himself in his room for 
hours, days, weeks at a time; and falls asleep with his deepest won¬ 
ders still unborn on the threshold of his brain. And he says he 
has awakened many times with some part of each problem solved 
or made clearer to him. The fact is, if his own statements made 
from time to time to intimate friends and to his family are true, that 
he has worked out all his great inventions through the power of 
telepathy in self-suggestion; for the man who falls asleep thinking 
of his work, is using this power to a greater or less extent. 

It is a common experience. 

The most beautiful products of the human mind have been bom 
in the sleep that has followed intense thinking of them. The 
greatest poets have testified to the necessity of such methods. Long¬ 
fellow always took a pad of blank paper to bed with him, and a 
pencil; he could not wait to find them if he awoke with a line or a 
thought. They must be noted at once, for if they fled it would 
be impossible to secure them again. What else could have pro¬ 
duced such gems in such a way except the Other Mind? Waking 
into the conscious mind, they would take flight, become evanescent, 
then all oblivion. Here is seen the fading away out of the conscious 
mind of the presence of the Other Mind. “It goes from me like a 
rare dream,” said Tennyson, referring to this presence. Pope jotted 
down on his cuff any worthy idea that sprang into his mind; for, 
he said, “it would not stay if I did not put it in pound at once.” 

These accounts are lost on those of our students who have never 
known the visitations of great ideas, how easily they come and go, 
and the importance of chaining them by pencil and paper. But 
there are many who understand just what is meant, and they will 


n OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 

recall the evidence of the presence of the Other Mind, eluding them 
as the conscious mind comes to its own. 

Authors at times pass out of the realm of the conscious mind and 
come under the sway of the Other Mind. Then only truth and power 
are the fruit; and this fact, being well established, shows to some 
degree the higher level of the Other Mind. 

One of the most learned men that England has produced, and 
one who was deeply respected by educators and scientists every¬ 
where, Mr. F. W. H. Myers, of the English Society for Psychical 
Research, became satisfied that every human being possessed a 
second mind; and his own discoveries are embodied in the Pro¬ 
ceeding of that organization which is composed of the leading men 
of that country, including the best scientists, university professors 
and investigators of Great Britain. While his language is rather 
technical and profound, it carries on its face its meaning; so we 
will reproduce it as he wrote it: “Ordinary consciousness makes 
up but a small part of man’s personality. Beneath the threshold of 
this working consciousness there lies, not merely an unconscious 
complex of organic processes, but an intelligent vital control. The 
subliminal consciousness is evoked by suggestion, which is able to 
tap the deeper stratum of being, which is more independent of pass¬ 
ing impressions and environment than the ordinary stratum of con¬ 
sciousness.” 

The account is unusually full of good things, but it is clothed in 
such terms as only a deep student can fathom. Yet whole books 
are written in such vein, and the wonder is that more of the com¬ 
mon people are not drawn toward them. Let us indulge in a transla¬ 
tion to see what Mr. Myers actually did say: 

On the one hand he brings in such terms as “Ordinary conscious¬ 
ness,” “working consciousness,” “passing impressions and environ¬ 
ment,” and “ordinary stratum of consciousness.” 

The translation is as follows: 

“Ordinary consciousness” means the conscious mind. 

“Working consciousness” means the conscious mind. 

“Passing impressions and environment,” means the conscious 
mind. 

“Ordinary stratum of consciousness” means the conscious mind. 

On the other hand he brings in such terms as:— 

“Unconscious complex of organic processes,” which is a synonym 
for the Other Mind. 


SELF SUGGESTIONS 


73 


“Intelligent vital control,” which is a synonym for the Other 
Mind. 

“The subliminal consciousness,” which is a synonym for the Other 
Mind. 

“The deeper stratum of being,” which is a synonym for the Other 
Mind. 

A free translation of this series of deeply framed ideas is to say 
that the Other Mind is not conscious in the sense that the working 
mind is conscious, but that it includes all there is of life, has deep 
vital control of everything, is a supreme intelligence, and is loftier 
than the physical being. 

The main point is that the greatest organization of educated men 
in the world has accepted the foregoing claim as the true presenta¬ 
tion of the two minds. 

Instead of calling the deeper intelligence the “subliminal con¬ 
sciousness” we like the more potent term, the Other Mind, better. 
There is a tendency for men who have discovered the existence of 
this Other Mind to take balloon flights from the earth, and pass into 
mysticism. In our opinion all necessity for mysticism is gone when 
we realize the fact that the Other Mind is simply an all-knowing in¬ 
telligence. Where is there any mysticism in that? 

The conscious mind is a working, physical intelligence. That is 
its scope of duty and it does it subject to the cravings and cries 
of the physical body. It has its limitations. Because it does not 
know what is in the cell of protoplasm that makes life, or what is 
beyond the earth that makes the universe, it sets up mystic explana¬ 
tions and leaps into abysses of guesswork that warp the intelligence 
in time. Why not accept the fact that the conscious mind does not 
know anything at all beyond the physical life, and let it go at that? 
Such an ending of the problems of existence as far as that realm of 
intelligence is concerned is most sensible. 

But if it in time learns that there is another intelligence known 
as the Other Mind, and that this is all-seeing, then why not accept 
that fact for its face value? 

What can an all-seeing mind perceive ? 

There are events transpiring all over the world to-day. There 
are events happening in the homes and secret places of earth. 
There are thoughts in the minds of all people. There are plans, 
purposes, motives, and destinies being bom and worked out in all 
humanity. There are somewhere in this world answers to every 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


74 

question that the anxious mind can ask. Ignorance of anything is 
unnatural. 

These are the things that an all-seeing mind can perceive. 

In other words to such an intelligence there is no veil, no curtain, 
no darkness, no obscurity, no denial, no hiding, no surprise, no won¬ 
derment, no strange facts, no doubts, nothing that is not plain and 
sure. 

Now does it imply mysticism, or spiritism, or anything supernat¬ 
ural to merely possess a mind that is all-seeing and from which 
nothing can be hidden? Such a mind is not the gift of a few per¬ 
sons; but every boy and girl has it, and every man and woman has 
it. Such a mind does not go insane; and this is proved by the fact 
that through the operations of the Other Mind, insanity has been 
driven out of the working mind. This has been done hundreds of 
times to our knowledge, and perhaps thousands of times altogether; 
but it will be done many thousands of times in the near future, for 
a great movement is now on foot among those physicians who are 
using psycho-therapeutics in the cure of maladies of all lands. It 
has been amply proved that insanity and all forms of mental troubles 
are confined wholly to the conscious or working mind; and the 
world has taken a great leap forward since that discovery has been 
made. 

The Other Mind knows all, and never falters, never loses itself, 
never breaks down, never goes insane, and never misleads. 

On the contrary, what do you suppose happens to those investi¬ 
gators who explain mental phenomena on the theory of the super¬ 
natural ? They believe it is the work of spirits when some knowledge 
breaks through into the working mind from the Other Mind. They 
seem to think it necessary to ascribe such work to spirits. They are 
duped by wrong and wholly illogical conclusions which cannot be 
connected with the facts by any link discernible to a calm and fair 
mind. 

The all-knowing Other Mind sees what is; and that is the whole 
story. Why should it not see the things that are, know the thoughts 
that people think, look with perfect eyes upon their plans, and have 
a clear knowledge of all the events and conditions that transpire 
anywhere and everywhere? Is it unfair that such a mind should 
have been created? 

But its all-seeing attribute is only the beginning of its powers. 
It is able to do things. It can control every function of the physical 


SELF SUGGESTIONS 


75 


body, master every faculty, change every fault into a virtue, and 
lift the physical and moral nature up to the highest standard. This 
is not hearsay or theory; but a series of facts that have been proved, 
and are being proved over and over again all the time. When there 
is anywhere lurking in the make-up of a man a power that can lift 
him out of vices that have chained him down to the dregs of earth 
by a cruel bondage, and place him on the pedestal of true honor, 
then we must bow in homage to it; and that is what the Other Mind 
has done in a large number of cases where all other agencies have 
been proved futile. 

You may talk about your religion. We respect religion and shall 
always respect it. But it has not done for man what the Other 
Mind is doing to-day. Prior to two thousand years ago, religion 
had come up out of the fury of wars and contest that left it bat¬ 
tered and bleeding. Then the sweetest, purest, noblest, most sublime 
creed that ever fell on human ears was taught by Christ, and sent 
forth into the world on its mission of salvation. 

It did good and carried on its banner the advance cry of a better 
civilization. But the world to-day, with its millions upon millions 
of believers, is not able to lessen the number of drunkards, the num¬ 
ber of gamblers, the number of prostitutes, and patrons of prosti¬ 
tutes, the number of grafters, the number of corrupt pretenders of 
virtue and morality, the number of hypocrites and dishonest men 
in places of trust, the number of thieves and wrongdoers, or the 
number of violators of the law that says “thou shalt not kill.” Mur¬ 
der and crime are on the increase under the very shadow of the 
church. That young woman whose honor was hanging in the balance 
could not have been saved by any influence that the church put forth; 
for it tried, and only hardened her resolution to go down into the 
valley of shame. Her Other Mind was reached, and its all-power 
commanded her to turn about and be good; and now nothing can 
tempt her into the wrong from which she has been spared. 

This is only a typical case. 

All over the civilized world at this very time there are men who 
are pushing this new law into effect, and it will prevail. 

But it turns its saved souls into the church. This proves that 
the Other Mind is but the sister force of good and of the sweet im¬ 
pulses that the true church puts forth. Some kind of instinct or 
inspiration is now at work in the church. The Emmanuel Move¬ 
ment is based on the power of the Other Mind. Psycho-therapeutics 


76 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


is likewise founded on the same force. The Episcopal church, think¬ 
ing to save the stampede of its members into one of the cults of to¬ 
day, is adopting the same course, making use of the operations of the 
Other Mind, not only in psycho-therapeutics, but also in the many 
forms of suggestion stated herein. And all denominations will soon 
follow. What is right and truth will come to the surface in very 
short time. 

The age is in need of a calm period in which to drop all the 
fantastic creeds and beliefs that have sprung up out of superstition 
and mysticism, and come into the simple and practical facts of 
human life. Two views are all that are necessary to cover the whole 
story of earthly existence: 

First View:—The physical body is struggling with its vital 
burden, and employs the ordinary mind to do its intelligent labor 
for it. This is the working consciousness that is fed by the five 
senses. 

Second View:—There are countless things, events, conditions and 
purposes that the conscious mind is unable to take in, because they 
cannot come in by the channels of the ordinary senses; but they 
are calmly seen and known by the Other Mind, just as though it were 
the intention of the Creator not to hide anything. 

It is to this stage that all persons must come in order to be 
abreast of the times. Having once learned of the existence of the 
Other Mind, the rest of the work is easy. There are methods by 
which it may be possible to “tap this deeper, stratum of our being” 
and secure some of its freight of knowledge; but it must be done in 
simple and practical ways, and not under the name of mysticism, 
spiritualism, Christian science, theosophy, or other claim to the 
supernatural. When the time comes that people will accept the facts 
as they are, as wholly natural, plain, and free from all occult dress¬ 
ing, then the world will be born anew, for the night that has hung 
over it since the beginning of time will pass into the golden dawn 
of a clear morning. 

Sensible men and women are needed to foster this new birth. 

Nothing need be hidden. 

Why not help along the change by preaching the simple truth that 
all human beings have these two minds: the conscious mind, and 
the Other Mind? Proofs are abundant everywhere, and can be 
added day after day. Every new turn that this study takes, leads 
to stronger evidence of the same facts. 


SELF SUGGESTIONS 


77 


The sooner the world is made to know these truths, the sooner 
will the downhill course of the age be checked. Everywhere we find 
an increase of beliefs in fads, in cults, and in mysticism; and at the 
same time minds are giving way, asylums are overflowing, suicides 
are increasing at a fearful rate, crime is spreading, and disease is 
reaping its awful harvest. 

There is but one agency of the Creator under the sun that can put 
a stop to this holocaust of disaster, and that is the all-powerful 
Other Mind. 


78 


SIXTH CYCLE 




HE power that rules the flesh 
Is lodged within the nerves 
Whose vital centers sway 
Our being to its core 
And melt away our ills 
Like sun upon the snow . 


HILE it has been claimed that the Other Mind is all 
seeing, it is not clairvoyant in the common accepta¬ 
tion of that term. Nor would it become the plaything 
and tool of the monger of notions. To see where some 
stolen object is hidden is a trifle compared with the 
wide knowledge of all men’s motives and the great arena of events 
transpiring wherever there is created life or matter. There can be 
no doubt that Christ could see all things and know all things; yet it 
has never been said that His power was merely clairvoyant. 

In this cycle we shall show what power means. To see all that is 
being enacted everywhere is a grand function; but to be able to 
change the tissue and structure of matter is even as marvelous. In 
the Third Cycle the power of hypnosis is shown though the various 
methods of suggestion made during induced sleep and enacted in 
after periods of natural wakefulness. Then, in the next cycle, the 
suggestions are made in natural sleep to be performed in after 
periods of natural wakefulness. This distinction is of the utmost 
importance, as it clears away the former belief that hypnotism had 
something to do with the power of the Other Mind. On the contrary, 
hypnotism is merely the agency by which the conscious mind is 
taken out of the way so as to prepare for “tapping” the Other 
Mind. A very good illustration of the difference is seen in the 
case of the class at school which is being taught by the regular working 
teacher. The principal wishes to address the class, but cannot 







POWER OVER THE BODE 




do so intelligently until the teacher stops talking, or ceases to 
occupy the attention of the pupils. Both cannot do effective work 
at the same time. When the principal gets the right of way, the 
teacher is not active; but resumes work after the former has ceased 
and withdrawn. Or these minds may be compared to a single track 
on a railroad; the freight train takes a siding while the express uses 
the tracks. 

The Fifth Cycle goes still further and shows the fact that the 
Other Mind does not even depend on the control of any person apart 
from the one being operated upon, and this removes the last possi¬ 
bility of claiming a dark art in the process. Let these stages of de¬ 
velopment of the study be fully understood: 

1. In the Third Cycle is given the proof that hypnosis side-tracks 
the conscious mind and merely opens the way for the approach of 
the Other Mind. 

2. In the Fourth Cycle is given proof that natural sleep side¬ 
tracks the conscious mind and opens the way for the approach of the 
Other Mind. 

3. In the Fifth Cycle is given proof that any person on falling 
into natural slumber may side-track the conscious mind and open 
the way for the approach of the Other Mind. 

But a supreme law rises above all these facts and tells us that the 
body being physical, must he controlled through its physical proc¬ 
esses. Even the Other Mind does its work of reform and healing 
through the conscious mind or by the aid of some physical function. 
It does not make a clear leap out of the infinite and perform miracles. 
All things are done by laws that are as fixed as the foundations of 
life. 

In such way the Other Mind does in fact work wonders in the body 
of man; yet it performs no miracles. We may look for marvels but 
not for a fracture of nature. 

The cases set forth in this cycle are produced for the purpose of 
sustaining the great fact that the Other Mind, by making use of 
regular laws, is able to change the physical body. All the cases are 
typical. All have been repeated many times, and some thousands 
of times, and all are recognized as accepted facts by the educated 
leaders of the world. 

1. Chronic complaints such as rheumatism, nervous prostration, 
gout, anaemia, dyspepsia, hysterics, hallucinations, melancholia, func¬ 
tional disorders especially of women, diarrhoea, constipation, neuralgia. 


so 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


headaches, organic troubles and intestinal pains are most generally 
cured or relieved by this power. 

2. Dr. Myers relates a case which he personally witnessed where 
a patient who was suffering from pneumonia accompanied by de¬ 
lirium and insomnia, was hypnotized. The man slept for two hours 
very quietly, and awoke refreshed, fairly comfortable and relieved 
from delirium. 

3. Sir Lauder Brunton says that he personally saw a patient hyp¬ 
notized who was suffering from bronchitis. In the hypnotic sleep 
the suggestions made were: “You will have no more pain when 
you awake.” “You will not cough when you wake up.” And other 
remarks. When the man awoke he had less pain, less cough and less 
of the accompanying suffering attendant on the malady. 

4. Dr. C. Lloyd Tuckey says: “The power of hypnotism over 
organic processes has been clearly shown by many experiments, made 
either on students of the system, or on patients, with their own 
previous consent. A patient in the hypnotic sleep is told that he 
has burnt his hand or some other part of his body; he not only feels 
heat and pain in the place indicated, but it frequently happens that 
the spot becomes red and inflamed, exhibiting all the objective signs 
of congestion, and even of inflammation and vesication.” 

5. Dr. Delboeuf, desiring to ascertain the positive effect of hyp¬ 
notic suggestion in the treatment of a burn, used the ingenious device 
of producing two exactly similar burns on the same person, one on 
each arm, and of treating one wound by hypnotic suggestion, and the 
other with the usual remedies. Having induced hypnotic sleep, he 
suggested to the patient that one arm should be cured without feel¬ 
ing pain and without any suppuration; and it did in fact heal by 
simple separation of the slough and healthy granulation, ten days 
earlier than the other, which went through the suppurating process, 
accompanied by inflammation and pain. This case has attracted 
considerable attention and a well-known physician says of it: “Were 
this case not reported by a well-known savant , I confess I should feel 
some hesitation in recording it; as it is, its accuracy is beyond 
doubt.” 

6. Dr. Beaunis, in his work, notes a case in which, by suggestion, 
he regulated the pulse of a patient. Before sleep there were 96 pulsa¬ 
tions to the minute, which during sleep increased to over 98. During 
sleep he suggested a reduction, and it fell to 92. The pulse after 
this, being at 100, he suggested a further increase and it went to 


POWER OVER THE BODY 


81 


115. The slackening and quickening in each instance followed at 
once on the suggestion. The tracings were taken by Marey’s sphyg- 
mograph, and of these facsimile productions are given in Dr. 
Beaunis’ book. He also succeeded in raising the temperature of 
patients by suggestion during hypnotic sleep. 

7. Dr. Dumontpallier participated in a case where his name was 
written by Burot with the blunt end of a probe on both arms of a 
patient; the right arm being paralyzed. This was done during 
hypnotic sleep, and the suggestion was made as follows: “This 
afternoon, at four o’clock, you will go to sleep again, and blood 
will then exude from your arms in the lines which have been 
traced.” The patient fell into a natural sleep at the appointed 
hour, and the letters appeared on his left arm, marked in relief or 
raised, and of a bright red color, with here and there small drops of 
blood showing. The right arm, which was paralyzed, was not affected 
in the least. 

8. Dr. Bernheim uses hypnotic suggestion in conjunction with 
chloroform, and finds that his patients take the anaesthetic better 
and require a much smaller quantity, than when it is administered 
in the usual way. A physician says: “Some months ago I hyp¬ 
notized a woman for a dentist instead of giving her gas, and a very 
bad tooth was painlessly extracted. The woman felt no pain at the 
time, and was not troubled afterward with any degree of discomfort. 
This dentist tells me that he now uses hypnotism as an anaesthetic 
in his practice, and finds it extremely useful, as not only does the 
patient feel no pain, but is able to assist the dentist by holding the 
mouth open without a gag, and will spit when told to.” 

9. The stigmata of the mediaeval saints are matters of history. 
They followed the original idea of red spots on the skin of the 
holiest followers of religion, indicating wounds in token of those 
received by Christ in the passion and crucifixion; and said to have 
been miraculously impressed on certain persons as marks of divine 
favor. The best modern example of this claim is that of the Bel¬ 
gian nun, Louise Lateau. Her case was very fully investigated by 
the famous Dr. Lefebvre, Professor of Louvain University, assisted 
by other physicians, all of whom came to the conclusion that the 
phenomenon ^ss a genuine result of hypnotic suggestion. Profes¬ 
sors Bourru and Burot, of Rochefort, succeeded in causing hemor¬ 
rhage from the nose by suggesting that it would take place, in a 
young soldier of hysterical temperament, and the hour was even 


82 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


stated. Dr. Mabille, of the asylum at Lafond, produced instantane¬ 
ously, by hypnotic suggestion, bleeding from different parts of the 
body, exactly similar in character to the stigmata of some of the 
mediaeval saints. Professor Krafft-Ebing, in his remarkable trea¬ 
tise, referring to the case of the Hungarian girl, lima Szandor, gives 
an account of many experiments made upon her in which, by sug¬ 
gestion, he produced hemorrhages, changes of temperature, pulse and 
breathing. 

10. Dr. Wetter strand raised blisters on the hand of a woman 
who was hypnotized, by simply touching the places with the tip of 
his finger and suggesting that it was a red hot iron. He sent photo¬ 
graphs of these blisters to several physicians. The opposite of this 
experiment proved true also. An actual blister was applied to a 
patient who was hypnotized, and the suggestion was made that it was 
a soothing liniment, the result being that no vesication was pro¬ 
duced. This case is reported by Dr. Alfred Fouillee. 

11. Dr. A. Pitres gives an interesting account of a hysterical 
patient who had frequent attacks of loss of memory who could not 
recall anything in the present or in the immediate past; but seemed 
to be living in the days of youth again. She did not recognize her 
friends of the present. She spoke and acted as she had done in 
youth, and it was evident that her mind was working exactly in 
the same way as it did then. Dr. Pitres, in the periods when she 
was free from these attacks, found that he could bring back the 
feeling and conditions of youth by having her fix her mind on some 
event in the past, and then hypnotize her while she was thinking 
of it. Later on he obtained the same results by pressing on differ¬ 
ent parts of the body, and suggesting some incident of her youth. 
In a series of cases bearing on the same subject, several experiments 
in hypnotism have obtained control of the mind by first hypnotiz¬ 
ing the subjects, and in that state the suggestions have been made 
that, on waking up, there would come back some incident of youth 
which would take possession of the mind even in wakefulness. In 
a majority of such cases the results have been partly satisfactory; 
but the effect on the mind is not beneficial and the experiments 
were abandoned. The nearest to a pronounced success was that of 
an old man in Chicago who was first told to relate in a state of 
normal wakefulness the most impressive scene that he could recall 
when he was under seven years of age; and to be sure to think of 
nothing unpleasant. He found a water trip the one event of that 


POWER OVER THE BODY 


83 


period which suited him best to recall. In the hypnotic sleep that 
followed he gave an accurate account of it; and referred to an acci¬ 
dent that he had never heard of before. He was told that, when 
he awoke, he would remember the accident and would speak of it at a 
certain hour. On being awakened, when the time arrived, he re¬ 
ferred in a most ordinary way to the ride on the water, and to many 
things that he had forgotten; and then went on to say that there 
was no accident, and any person who said there was, did not know 
what he was talking about. This disclosure ran along the usual 
trend of suggestions that are executed in wakefulness. But the 
operator felt that there was an accident which could be ascertained 
by hypnotic sleep. In a few days the old man was again hypnotized 
and asked about the accident; and replied that there was a collision 
of boats at another part of the lake that had occurred while he was 
on the trip, but that he had never heard of it till now. It required 
three more sittings to secure the details of the collision; and it was 
shown by investigation that there had been an accident at the time, 
but at such a distance that the boy could not possibly have heard 
of it. The deeper fact is shown that the brain’s storehouse may 
contain millions of facts that never become a part of the working 
consciousness. This lad never in fact knew of the accident. But 
some part of his mind had received the knowledge, and there it had 
lain until the Day of Judgment might call it forth. This must be 
the Other Mind, for there is no function of life that can collect and 
retain all the knowledge of existence. This particular detail was 
called forth because the subject of the early trip on the water served 
to excite that exact portion of the Other Mind that held the secret. 
Life is full of just such incidents, but they are not often impressed 
on the attention. On the same lines, the work of Dr. Auguste Voi- 
son is important, as he was able to shift some of his patients from 
one personality to another. It shows the power of the Other Mind 
over the conscious mind. In one case a woman who could not be 
given freedom from suffering in any way except by such transfer, 
was put back into a time of her life when she was perfectly well, 
and thus obtained the relief that she desired. In a case that was 
treated by Dr. Bourru and Dr. Burot, a man in whom paralysis 
was brought on by suggestion as far as the symptoms are concerned, 
had also the induced mental condition that goes with this malady. 

12. Dr. Hugh Wingfield relates the effect of hypnotism in con¬ 
trolling the mind of one of his Cambridge subjects. The young man 


84 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


was clever and well-meaning, but an inveterate idler, and could not 
settle down to work. In a profound sleep when hypnotized. Dr. 
Wingfield pursued the method that has been described in a previous 
cycle of this course, and told him that he should retire to his rooms 
every evening after dinner and settle down to steady work until after 
midnight, and deny himself to his friends, by which plan he would 
pass all his coming examinations. The suggestions succeeded per¬ 
fectly and in six weeks the young man passed the examinations, much 
to his own delight and to the surprise of his friends. 

13. Dr. Liebeault tells of a school-boy who was hypnotized as 
an encouragement to his brother, the real patient. He proved such 
a good subject that it seemed a pity to waste the opportunity, and 
the doctor, therefore, suggested that he would be very industrious 
in his studies and do a great deal of hard work, so that he might rise 
to the head of his class. The suggestion had such good effect 
that for three weeks the boy worked hard and reached the top of 
his class instead of his usual place at the bottom. Gradually he fell 
back, and his mother wanted him to go again to Dr. Liebeault, but 
the lad refused because, as he said, that doctor made him work too 
hard. 

14. Dr. Vincent tells of the effect of hypnotism on the mind 
in the case of a history student to whom he suggested that the battle 
of Hastings was fought in 1067; and for several days afterward, if 
asked for the date when in his normal wakefulness, he would give that 
one; but that at length he came to be in doubt about it.—A French 
accountant when profoundly hypnotized, was told that two and three 
made six and that he would so add them when he was awake. His 
books all went wrong, until the effect of the suggestion had worn 
off; as the mental pendulum will swing back to its normal place 
like the process of learning the thing anew. 

15. The famous Dr. Weir-Mitchell has had a large experience in 
cases that show the power of the mind over the body in hypnotism. 
The same laws seem at all times to be at work. In one of his cases 
a clergyman, after an attack of influenza, became the victim of 
nervpus prostration, losing most of his flesh, and becoming bed-ridden. 
His wife fed him in bed every four hours. A curious apathy came 
over him. All kinds of treatment were employed, but he gradually 
got worse. At length hypnotism was tried. In place of the apathy, 
there came activity and usefulness into his life. In place of the 
loss of flesh, the body took on bulk and came into a normal condition. 


POWER OVER THE BODY 


85 


Instead of the nervousness, a calm control followed. The necessity 
for being fed in bed was gone. Surely there was a power somewhere 
at work in the man that brought about these changes.—In another 
case of the same doctor’s, a woman became bed-ridden, took to ex¬ 
cessive eating and at length to drinking. As hypnotism did not 
advance far enough in her case, she died of fatty liver. Had it been 
possible to have placed her in a hypnotic sleep, she might have been 
brought back into health. 

The value of the last two cases is in showing the power of sugges¬ 
tion during hypnosis, and the lack of such power when it is not 
possible to take away the conscious mind. The latter cannot be 
allowed supremacy, as it interferes with the better control that comes 
from the Other Mind. This distinction is of the highest importance 
in view of the disclosures that will be made later on in this work. 

16. We are now dealing with all the varieties of power that are 
made known in the use of hypnotism. Later on we will reach the 
uses of a similar power in the absence of actual hypnotism. The 
control of the physical body by any method apart from what is 
followed in the usual practice of medicine, is the most prominent 
subject to-day before all doctors and investigators of the phenomena 
of human life. 

The mind is the agency or power, but is also an organ itself, and 
may be subjected to the same higher agency of control as other parts 
of the body. One of the best proved cases, and one that admits a new 
phase, is the remarkable history of shifting mastery over the mind. 
Dr. Bernheim and Dr. Liebeault are the recognized leaders of the 
accurate science of hypnotism. They had a patient who was hypno¬ 
tized, and while in that state she was told that she must not permit 
Liebeaut to hypnotize her. When she awoke she had no memory 
of this suggestion. Soon after, meeting Liebeault, who was ignorant 
of what had taken place, she requested hypnotic treatment from him, 
as usual. To the surprise of both patient and doctor, all his efforts 
were futile, and it was only on communicating the fact to Dr. Bem- 
heim, that his colleague found the explanation. 

Being a point of such importance, Dr. Outterson Wood, Secretary 
of the British Medical Association Committee, was asked to put the 
matter to the test, and he kindly consented. Another physician 
writes of the experience in the following language: “I had not hyp¬ 
notized Mrs. M. for several weeks, and had not made any suggestion 
as to her not being hypnotized by others for at least months. I 


86 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


told her that Dr. Outterson Wood desired to hypnotize her, and I left 
her alone with him. When I returned in half an hour I found her 
asleep, and Dr. Wood told me that, after trying the method of fascina¬ 
tion for about twenty minutes, he had succeeded in hypnotizing 
her. He had an appointment which he wished to keep, and was 
obliged to leave the house. I then found that Mrs. M. would not 
reply to any of my questions, and was apparently in a deep hypnotic 
sleep, and subject only to the influence of Dr. Wood. Adopting 
Leigeois’ plan of awaking a difficult case of somnambulism, I said in 
a loud voice to a patient standing near by, ‘Mrs. M. is fast asleep 
now, but she will awake in exactly five minutes/—Though apparently 
unconscious her ears evidently took in the suggestion, and her mind 
acted upon it, for she awoke to the moment. This experiment affords 
a hint as to the course to adopt if called in a case of trance suspected 
to be of hypnotic origin. 

“We repeated the experiment in the following June, but I pre¬ 
viously hypnotized her daily for three days, and each time suggested 
that on no account was she to allow herself to be hypnotized by 
anyone else, and I got her promise that this would be so. I again 
left Dr. Wood with her alone and told her that he wished to hypnotize 
her. She did not remember having promised that she would not 
allow anyone else to influence her, but she expressed disinclination 
for the operation. However, a little persuasion made her give her 
consent, and Dr. Wood again sought to hypnotize her by fascination. 
When I returned I found her very nervous and feeling faint and ill; 
but she was not hypnotized though the process had lasted twenty 
minutes. 

“I hypnotized her at once by stroking the forehead, and the 
disturbance of breathing and circulation soon disappeared. She 
awoke feeling quite refreshed, but told me that she would never allow 
anyone else to try to hypnotize her, as the suffering she experienced 
was quite acute, and she would have given anything to have escaped 
it by closing her eyes and falling into a sleep, but this she was unable 
to do. She had been hypnotized by me in two minutes; and her 
yielding to Dr. Wood the first time after twenty minutes’ trial, and 
the second time not at all, seems to prove conclusively that a person’s 
subsequent susceptibility may be decreased.” 

But the greater importance arising from this case is the proof 
of the passing over from one condition to another of a control that 
has for its channel the abeyance or sleep of the conscious mind, 


POWER OVER THE BODY 


87 


and the opening up of the Other Mind. In the midst of conflict 
the latter is always supreme. It will not yield to the former, but 
compels that function to give way to its higher nature. 

There are many cases in which the Other Mind has no power to 
effect a complete change. These are generally known as organic 
cases. But the limitation is not so decided as one may suppose. 
Let us look at some of the organic influences: 

The HEART is an organ. By hypnotism, it may be controlled 
in the following particulars by the Other Mind: 

It may be made to beat faster. 

It may be made to beat slower. 

It may be made to beat with alarming rapidity. 

It may be made to almost stop. 

It may be made to actually stop, as far as any evidence of life is 
concerned. Death is thus simulated. We have seen this done sev¬ 
eral times, and there are reports in books and magazines of the highest 
rank in the medical profession discussing this power. Some notable 
instances are cited. 

Some persons die from heart failure, because of the low state of 
vitality in the body. Stimulants have been effective from time to 
time; but if hypnotism can be employed, suggestion will afford a 
natural increase of vitality, and a cure is much more likely. 

There are diseases of the heart that are incurable, and these cannot 
he overcome by any method, no matter on what it is founded. This 
is not the age of miracles. But there are many forms of relief that 
can be administered even to incurable maladies of the heart. Pain 
may be lessened, pressure may be changed, vitality may be increased, 
circulation inay be aided, and suggestive stimulants given, all of 
these helping to reduce suffering and prolong life; and hypnotism 
can do more in these directions than any other branch of treatment. 

The LUNGS are organs. They are subject to aid from this source. 

It is not pretended that tuberculosis can be driven out, as fresh 
air and new protoplasm are the only real cures for that disease. 

But the power to better assimilate both air and protoplasm is 
lodged in hypnotic suggestion. 

A higher degree of vitality can also be imparted to the lungs; 
and it is well known that where vitality is increased, tuberculosis 
can be more readily fought. 

Pneumonia may or may not be overcome by hypnotic suggestion. 
We do not believe that the solidification of the lungs has ever been 


88 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


reduced in this way; but the other symptoms have been partly over¬ 
come and much relief afforded. All acute forms of sickness should 
have the best attention from physicians, aided with the medicines 
that are known to be helpful. It is a crime to set up a defiance of 
the doctor and his remedies, if he is a qualified practitioner. But 
he should be up to date; and up to the very latest date in the calendar 
of progress. 

In the early stages of pneumonia hypnotic suggestion can do much 
to lessen that attack, and should be able to prevent the serious crisis 
that is so much dreaded. 

The action of the diaphragm may be increased and given greater 
vitality in the same way; and this has much to do with the health of 
the lungs. When the range of respiration is deep and full, it is not 
possible to have either pneumonia or consumption; and this depth 
and fullness are secured by hypnotic suggestion. 

The rate of breathing may be raised or lowered. 

The vigor of respiration, which denotes the highest state of vitality, 
is also increased in the same way. 

Under hypnotic suggestion all breathing may be made to cease and 
it is likely that the danger point may be passed and death ensue. 

The STOMACH is an organ. 

If its inner surface has been ruined by abuse, and is beyond all 
cure, there is nothing in the present treatment that can save it. But 
the tone of the stomach may be greatly benefited in almost all other 
cases. 

Many persons die suddenly from acute indigestion; others are ill 
a few hours or days and die from the same cause. Hypnotic sug¬ 
gestion has been of help in such cases, although organic in one sense 
of the term. 

The appetite may be helped or hindered by all kinds of influences, 
as it responds to everything. There is no function of the body that 
is so often prey to the moods and feelings, to the ups and downs 
of the mind, and to a hundred trifles that are all the time occuring. 
Sight, sound, smell, taste, good news and bad news, hints, and 
suggestions in every form, change the flow of gastric juices and make 
the stomach act in every sort of way. Much, of course, depends on 
the sensitiveness of the person; and this is also true in hypnotic sug¬ 
gestion, except that the latter has complete control of the subject 
at all times. 

The latter has done wonders in proving that the whole general 


POWER OVER THE BODY 


89 


trend of the health, when it follows the lead of this organ, can be 
shifted at will. In fact, there are but few of the maladies of the 
stomach that cannot be controlled by hypnotic suggestion. 

The BRAIN is an organ. 

What are called lesions, and all forms of breakdown of the physical 
structure of the brain, must remain incurable. A system that would 
claim to cure them would be fraudulent on its face; no matter what 
source its power was supposed to come from. If the Creator wishes 
to change the laws of nature, He can do so by miracles; but this is 
not an age of such things, and none have been forthcoming. 

But many forms of insanity as well as crime depend on the physical 
interference with the operations of this organ; and surgery has opened 
a field of relief for some of them. 

Other forms of mental disease are reached by hypnotic suggestion, 
when no other remedy can be applied with success. We have at this 
writing the most positive proof right at hand of a woman being saved 
from the asylum but a few weeks ago, by this method. She was 
hypnotized by a clergyman who is not a practitioner, but who ha3 
studied the art from books and has acquired skill in this line. He 
has charge of a very large church in a very large city. 

The INTESTINES are an organ, and they yield to this treatment 
in almost every instance. 

Constipation is readily cured. 

Stoppage that has been fatal in so many cases, is quickly relieved 
by hypnotic suggestion. 

Chronic diarrhoea is, on the other hand, controlled by the same 
method. 

The foregoing portions of the body are all organic. They are 
responsible for the health or disease of the liver, the kidneys and the 
bladder. 

In women the maladies that are peculiar to that sex are especially 
influenced by hypnotic suggestion. 

Many girls and adults have been regulated in their functions by 
such suggestion. When these are diminished, increased, excessive, 
absent, painful, delayed, too frequent, or otherwise abnormal, the 
employment of hypnotic suggestion has been most gratifying by 
reason of the ready response to such influence. 

To show something of the power of the Other Mind over the body, 
we will include a few reports from leading physicians who have made 
use of this method. 


90 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


Dr. Domingos Yaguaribe, after a course of study in this line, 
established at San Paulo, Brazil, a practice which began in 1901. 
His reports are accompanied by photographs of his hospital and dis¬ 
pensary, which point to rare success within a comparatively short 
time. In the first two years of his practice he had 8,247 consulta¬ 
tions. He cured 296 cases of alcoholism by hypnotic suggestions; 
30 cases of nervous prostration; 22 cases of chronic diarrhoea; 29 
cases of dysmenorrhoea; 7 cases of stammering; 22 cases of incon¬ 
tinence of urine; 95 cases of hysteria; 469 cases of headaches and 
neuralgia; 26 cases of rheumatism; 12 cases of deafness; 52 cases 
of paralysis; 8 cases where the patients were dumb; and others, all 
by hypnotic suggestion. Of the large number of consultations, many 
were not accepted as patients for this kind of treatment; and others 
were afflicted with maladies that could not be so treated. 

Dr. C. Lloyd Tuckey reports the following kinds of disease as 
having been cured by him through the use of hypnotic suggestion: 

Chronic alcoholism. 

Tobacco habit. 

Morbid delusions. 

Hypochondriasis. 

Bad habits. 

Nervous prostration. 

Sleeplessness. 

Headache. 

Chronic neuralgias. 

Functional paralysis. 

Hystero-epilepsy. 

Writers cramp. 

Dyspepsia of various kinds. 

Irregularities of the bowels. 

N ight-urinating. 

Menstrual irregularities. 

Chronic rheumatism. 

And other maladies that have been benefited, although not per¬ 
manently cured. But those stated above have been made to yield a 
complete cure by hypnotic suggestion. 

All classes of society are represented in the foregoing list. 

Dr. Forel was able, by hypnotic suggestion, to paralyze the nerves 
of feeling at the surface of the body, so that no pain could be felt 
even if subjected to flames. Of course this is a common result of 


POWER OVER THE BODY 


91 


the thorough use of the art. But Forel reports the following list 
of cases that he has been able to completely cure by hypnosis: 

Pains of all kinds were quickly made to disappear by his method. 
He permanently cured headache, sciatica, neuralgia and toothache, 
unless they were the result of abcesses. 

Sleeplessness was readily cured by him. 

Functional paralysis and contractures. 

He could relieve the suffering and symptoms to some extent in 
chronic paralysis and contractures. 

Chlorosis was one of the most readily yielding maladies, and a 
failure was rare. 

All disturbances of menstruation. 

Loss of appetite. 

All stomach disturbances. 

Constipation. 

Diarrhoea when it is not attended by catarrh or fermentation. 
Gastric dyspepsia. 

Intestinal dyspepsia. 

Psychical impotence, pollutions, onanism, perverted sexual desires, 
and similar trouble. 

Alcoholism. 

The morphine habit. 

Lumbago. 

Chronic rheumatism. 

Stammering. 

Nervous prostration. 

Nervous disorders. 

Certain spasms. 

Night-fear in children. 

Night-urinating in children. 

Sickness at the stomach, also sea-sickness, and pregnancy vomiting. 
Chorea. 

Attacks of coughing. 

Hysterical disturbances of all kinds, covering a large field. 

Bad habits of all kinds. 

These are the maladies and troubles that were actually cured and 
remained cured by hypnotic suggestion at the institute of Dr. Forel 
at Zurich, Switzerland. 

The names of ether leading practitioners of the world, the physicians 
whose names are a sufficient guaranty of the accuracy and reliability 


92 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


of the work done would fill some space; but a few of the acknowledged 
masters of this line of treatment are Dr. Ladame at Geneva, Dr. 
Notzing at Munich, Dr. Moll at Berlin, Dr. Eeden and Dr. Renter- 
ghem at Amsterdam, Dr. Wetterstrand at Stockholm, Dr. Tolarsky 
at Moscow, Dr. Osgood Hamilton of Boston, and many others. In 
Italy alone a group of physicians of the highest professional rank 
have appeared, and their names are known all over the civilized world: 
Lombroso, Bianchi, Yizioli, Tamburini, Sepelli, Tanzi and Morselli. 

In this country there are some advanced practitioners in hypnotic 
suggestion; but the most striking fact is the general study and grow¬ 
ing use of this mode of cure among thousands of doctors of all 
schools of practice. It is predicted that in a very short time, psycho¬ 
therapeutics will be added to all medical methods, and will be as much 
employed as medicine itself. 

This cycle has taught some facts of the greatest importance: 

1. That the Other Mind does have great power over the physical 
body, and in every respect where a miracle is not to be required. 

2. That through hypnotism it gains the obedience of the patient 
and compels execution of the suggestion. 

3. Such off-shoots of telepathy as Christian science, while being 
limited in the range of cures by the same big wall that places the 
limit this side of miracles, are dangerous in the fact that they follow 
hypnotic suggestion, either as shown in this or the next cycle, and 
yet are powerless the moment they fail to retain the grip on the 
faith or belief of the patient. Christian science, therefore, may have 
many similar cures to its credit; but it cannot go further than 
hypnotic suggestion goes, nor as far in a majority of cases. Hypnotic 
suggestion is sure at all times, never a source of danger, and never 
loses its grip on the mind of the patient. But the moment the 
invalid who is being treated by Christian science begins to find 
weakness in the operator, or in his or her own mind, then all is at 
an end. Nothing remains to work upon. Likewise in a large number 
of cases among those who are too feeble to give faith or consent, 
and among children generally, the whole attempt to cure by Christian 
science becomes futile. 

4. The very essential of success in a cure by any form of psycho¬ 
therapeutics, as in hypnotic suggestion, is the willingness of the 
patient to be cured, when in natural wakefulness; or else the capture 
of the conscious mind and its suppression, so as to make way for the 
Other Mind. 


93 


SEVENTH CYCLE 



HEBE is a power untrained 
That masquerades at will 
When feebly understood; 

But in the leash of skill 
It proves a master strong 
And bends us to its call. 

EAYING- the stages of our progress as we pass onward 
step by step, a glance backward may be of advantage. 
In order to go forward more intelligently we should 
frequently look over the ground we have already cov¬ 
ered. This course of study requires constant review, 
and we advise that, as soon as one cycle is finished, all those in the 
rear should be re-read and fixed in the thoughts of every one. 

The First Cycle laid down the leading propositions. 

The Second Cycle set forth the common instances of thought trans¬ 
ference. 

The Third Cycle proved the control of the Other Mind through 
hypnotic sleep, relating to the conduct of a person. 

The Fourth Cycle proved the same thing in natural sleep. 

The Fifth Cycle proved the same thing by the individual unaided 
either by hypnotism or another person. 

The Sixth Cycle proved the power of the Other Mind over the 
body and its construction and functions, aided by hypnotic sugges¬ 
tions. 

The Third, Fourth and Fifth Cycles related to conduct only; while 
the Sixth Cycle related to power over the material character of the 
body of flesh and life. 

The Third, Fourth and Fifth Cycles related to the steps or realms 
of action through which the Other Mind is reached; the first step 
being by hypnotic sleep; the next step by natural sleep; and the last 
step by self-suggestion in the twilight of sleep. 







94 


OPERATIONS OP TEE OTHER MINE 


In the process of repeating these steps in their relation to the 
body itself and not its conduct, we have, in the Sixth Cycle, shown 
the tremendous power of the Other Mind arising from hypnotic 
unconsciousness of the working mind. 

This distinction is of some importance and should not be for¬ 
gotten. 

A person’s conduct is what he does ; and three cycles were devoted 
to that consideration. 

The power of mind over the body itself, is another matter. 

The last cycle was confined to such power as shown by the use of 
hypnotism. The present cycle will take up the cases and proofs 
of the same power when used during the wakeful moments of the 
person who is thus influenced. 

The one underlying principle affecting the whole thing is very 
simple, and is this: 

The conscious mind must be made to step aside long enough 
to set in motion the operation of the Other Mind. 

That is the first law of telepathy and the first law of every so-called 
phenomenon in life. You can think it over and apply it as you will, 
it will answer every doubt and explain every problem. 

The conscious mind must learn how to recognize the action of 
the Other Mind. 

The effects produced are in two divisions: First, those that 
relate to the things a person will do; second, those that relate to 
the changes that can be worked in the human body. 

In the cycle just preceding the changes have been worked by 
hypnotism under the control of another; but in the present cycle 
the changes will be worked during wakefulness. 

These various statements of the same things will serve to fix 
them better in the attention of the student. 

Any person familiar with the writings of Dr. Gunn, one of the 
best known physicians of some decades ago, will recall the many 
startling cases which he cited of the control of mind over the body. 
Other books had contained earlier accounts of the same phenom¬ 
ena ; and there had hardly been an age in which there is not much said 
and written on the same subject. It is general knowledge among 
all physicians. These well proved cases have accumulated to such 
an extent that they would fill volumes. No one who is intelligent 


MIND OVER MATTER 


95 


is willing to deny the fact that the mind controls the body, in part 
at least. The latter is divided into two great classes of operations: 

1. The functions. 

2. The faculties. 

The functions are those operations that are almost always involun¬ 
tary. All the organs have functions, or duties, or operations, or 
processes. When these are out of order and disease sets up, it is 
called functional. But when the organs themselves are injured, the 
disease is called organic. This is a free explanation suited to the 
popular understanding of the difference between the two classes of 
maladies. 

The faculties are those operations of the body and its parts and 
attributes that are most always voluntary, even though automatic. 

Among the powers known to be exercised by the Other Mind are 
the relief of the organic disturbances, the cure and change of the 
functions, and the direction of the faculties. The latter will be 
found to include human conduct, of which so much has been said 
in the review in the first pages of this cycle. That is, human conduct 
is the directing of the faculties, or their use. 

In controlling the functions and the organs themselves, the body 
is said to be influenced, changed and ruled. That this can all be 
done under hypnotic suggestion, is amply proved and has become 
an accepted fact to-day. In the present cycle we will show what can 
be done without hypnotic suggestion; although it is necessary to 
set aside the conscious mind for a short space of time, in order to 
open the way for the control of the Other Mind. 

1. One of the most pronounced cases bearing on this point is that 
reported by Dr. Laycock in which a ventriloquist, as a joke, predicted 
the death of a man who was present at a dinner party where this 
form of entertainment was introduced. It was supposed to be a 
harmless pleasantry by all present at the table, except the man him¬ 
self. In the ventriloqual talk the place and time were both stated: 
and it so happened that the man, thinking of these details, brought 
his vitality into that low degree that death actually ensued. 

2. The users of the telepathic power of the Other Mind are not 
of the high order usually expected of that agency; and it has been 
stated by some writers that, when the influences are bad, it is the 
conscious mind at work, as the suggestions are made in open wake¬ 
fulness. But the Other Mind is not a moral force in its relation 
to human life. It is the agency of that body to which it is affixed; 


96 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


and tends to obey orders as given it. But left to itself, its tendency 
is always upward, as will be seen later. The older case reported by 
Dr. Hack Tuke is one of history. A criminal who was sentenced 
to death was experimented on by physicians who told him that he 
was to be bled to death. He was strapped on a table, his eyes ban¬ 
daged, and then scratches made on his arm, but not deep enough 
to cause blood to flow. A small stream of running water was allowed 
to trickle down over his arm into a bowl below, and this he felt and 
heard distinctly. All the while the attendant physicians were mak¬ 
ing remarks on the progress of the bleeding, and his growing weak¬ 
ness and approaching death. In a short time the man died and 
he had all the symptoms of cardiac syncope from loss of blood. 

3. A robust countryman was made the butt of a joke, the purpose 
of which was to alarm him. He had no malady of any kind, but 
was unusually healthy. His neighbors agreed to meet him on the 
road, one by one, and to comment on his bad appearance. This they 
did. One told him he was not looking well. Another said he was 
surprised to see such a change in him over night. The third took 
him aside and asked him if he had recently had a faint spell as he 
was so white. And so they continued until the man was so weak 
that he could not walk. He was carried to his house and had an 
attack of sickness from which he did not fully recover for some 
time. There are no less than six hundred similar cases that have 
come to the attention of medical men. 

4. Another well known case, is that of a man who was ill and in 
the crisis of the attack, with not more than one chance in a hundred 
of living. Much depended on the ability of the patient to set in 
motion his own will; but he was too ill to do that. By agreement 
with the physicians and nurse, the patient was to hear their appar¬ 
ently secret conference in which they stated that he was now past all 
danger, that he had gone through the crisis safely, but must not be 
talked to about it. Had he been told directly that he was all right, 
he might have been shrewd enough to know the reason why; but 
when he heard them endeavoring to keep their remarks from him, 
his eagerness to hear made the comments more distinct; and he 
seemed at once to take on new power. To the surprise of everybody 
he got well.—The arguments against this method are confined chiefly 
to the fact that the patient might in fact die and would be deprived 
of the opportunity to make his peace with heaven, and his farewells 
with his friends.—Some persons are given a long period of time in 


MIND OVER MATTER 


97 


which to die; they are told their case is hopeless; and so they take 
the event as a matter that cannot be prevented. If, in fact, it is 
sure, then it is better to notify the patient nnder some circumstances, 
if not all. But if there is any chance at all, even one in a million, 
it would seem the wiser thing to do to uplift the vitality through 
hope in the invalid so that, if the one chance is to prevail, it may 
be encouraged. Unless you are certain that death is at hand, take 
on the other view. Physicians state very emphatically that this 
course has been the means of saving life.—On the same principle, 
the use of hopeful suggestions is to-day an important part of the 
medical practice. 

5. The reason for his last statement may be seen in the fact that 
many medicines do their work on the body through the mind instead 
of affecting the body itself. Dr. J. W. White, Professor of Clinical 
Surgery in the University of Pennsylvania, has collected a large 
number of instances showing the beneficial effects of surgical opera¬ 
tions in which, although nothing was really accomplished by the 
operations on the body itself, the knowledge of the fact that an 
operation had been performed did the work sought. Cures have thus 
attended surgery by reason of the mind believing something real 
had been accomplished. Dr. White records fifty-six cases of opera¬ 
tions for epilepsy in which nothing abnormal was found to account 
for the symptoms, and yet twenty-five of these cases were cured, and 
eighteen more improved; making a total of forty-three out of fifty- 
six that were reached by the power of the mind. He states many 
other cases, and concludes: “There are large numbers of cases of 
different grades of severity and varying character which seem to be 
benefited by operation alone, some of them by almost any operation.” 

6. In a Hew York hospital Dr. Rockwell and Dr. Beard report 
their experiments on a large scale with pretended drugs. On one 
occasion, to see what imagination would do, they suddenly had the 
patients in a ward informed that a mistake had been made by the 
dispenser, and that an emetic had been given instead of the medicines 
that had been ordered. Almost immediately a large proportion of 
the patients were seized with fits of vomiting, and brought up the 
harmless dose that had been given to them. Among a portion who 
knew nothing of the pretended mistake, there was no vomiting. 

7. All physicians at times give a substitute in place of the narcotic 
mixture that is demanded by patients, and sleep follows. There 
is a Tecent case where a man had been unable to sleep at night 


98 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


for two weeks, and who could not get relief from narcotics such as 
the physician deemed safe to administer, was at length told that he 
would be given something that was always sure to produce sleep 
in a few seconds. A very harmless mixture was given him consisting 
of nothing stronger than colored water. He took it eagerly and slept 
at once. 

8. The frequent use of electric belts, soles, pads and other appliances 
that are said by their advertisers to contain life-giving electricity, 
supposes the public to be ignorant of the fact that such things 
contain nothing that can produce any effect on the body, and their 
curative qualities are wholly a part of the influence of the mind over 
the material parts of the body. While some of them may have a 
small electrical force, that is not curative in that form; and, in the 
absence of the imagination, that would not in a year exert the slight¬ 
est influence over the health. Yet many persons have used the 
electrical appliances with splendid results. Some have actually been 
cured. The testimonials that appear in the circulars are sometimes 
genuine and express the honest belief of the patient. The question 
arises whether it is better to let these false claims take their own 
course, or expose the pretenders as frauds. If actual cures can be 
effected by the power of the imagination, perhaps it is as well to 
let the people pay high prices for their credulity and benefits. The 
relief is as genuine when secured by the action of the mind as when 
it comes by the force of natural change through medicine. Both 
methods often go to the same goal.—Charms are often means of 
bringing the very results they are promised to effect. Given the 
following combination, and why should not there be a complete 
victory for such agency? 

1. The charm, or other thing that is supposed to possess magic 
power. 

2. The individual who is ignorant of the fraud. 

3. The mind that actually has full faith and belief in the thing. 

As the Other Mind controls the body when the working mind is 

suppressed there is no reason why its power should be denied even 
in the use of the old charms that now are relegated to the lowest 
classes of ignorance. Why they no longer sway the intelligent people 
is because their uselessness has long ago been exposed. If the electric 
belts and other electic appliances were fully exposed before all who 
are likely to become users of them, they would be no more effective 
on the health of the people generally than charms are to-day. 


MIND OVER MATTER 


99 


9. What is called absent treatment in some of the modem methods 
of cure is wholly dependent on the belief of the patient. While such 
practice is more of a fraud than the selling of charms, it is neverthe¬ 
less true that cures have been obtained, not by the absent treatment 
itself, but by the belief in the mind of the patient that such treatment 
has been administered. Many cases of benefit are now in the hands 
of investigators. The fraud does not consist so much in the practice, 
as it has its better side, but in taking fees for such pretences. A 
man who had suffered from neuralgia and had tried drugs until 
they had ruined his blood and almost made him insane, as a last 
resort sent for absent treatment to some concern that offered it; 
and an immediate and complete cure followed. There was not the 
slightest doubt about the cure and the justification of the act on 
the part of the patient; but it was wrong for the concern to accept 
fees that were based on a mere state of the mind of the sufferer.—In 
the same line of cases, a man in Boston who had a physician in 
New York City who had given him absent treatment under the cult 
that employs such method, was feeling ill and was unable to get to 
New York; so he wired his doctor there to give him absent treatment 
at a fixed hour. When the hour came, the patient got well as if 
by magic. It was afterward learned that the doctor had not been 
that day in New York City and had not received the telegram. The 
patient, in testifying about this incident, was asked what part he 
took in trying to cure himself through the doctrines of the cult; and 
he said that he did nothing when the hour came for the absent 
treatment, but had tried hard to follow the rules of procedure the 
day before, and always without success. At the time set for the 
treatment to arrive, he simply waited for it to come, and felt sure 
he was receiving it, for a change came over his health. At the 
very stroke of the hour there was a brightening of the room all 
about him, as if a different presence was entering. He would have 
sworn it was the New York doctor. The Boston man was a success¬ 
ful merchant and of perfectly sound mind and normal temperament. 
In a business deal it would have been hard to have taken advantage 
of him. But business is managed by the working mind, and beliefs 
extraordinary that affect the body are managed by the Other Mind. 

10. In the olden times the kings healed by touch. The patients 
were informed weeks ahead of the arrival of the royal procession 
and were in a high state of expectancy when the ruler did in fact 
arrive. Added to this was the then prevailing belief in the divine 


100 


OPERATIONS OP THE OTHER MIND 


right of kings; and we do not wonder that there were many cures 
that seemed marvelous. In the life of Victor Emmanuel, King of 
Italy, it is recorded that in 1865, when the cholera was raging in 
Naples, and the panic-stricken inhabitants were migrating by thou¬ 
sands from the city, the king, wishing to give his people courage, 
went the round of the hospitals. He stood beside the sick-beds and 
spoke encouragingly to the patients. Before one of these already 
marked for death, the king stopped, and taking the damp, frozen 
hand, he pressed it, saying, “Take courage, poor man, and recover 
soon.” The warm grasp of the hand, the strong cheerful words, the 
recognition of the king’s face, had an agitating effect on the man 
who was given up for death. That evening the king was visited 
by the chief magistrate of the commune who said, “Your majesty’s 
coming is a joyful omen. The doctors report a diminution of the 
disease in the course of the day, and your Majesty has unawares 
worked miracles. The man you saw this morning stretched for death 
is out of danger this evening. The doctors say the excitement of 
your presence caused the salutary crisis.”—Here we see a case where 
the Other Mind absolutely drove death out of the presence of the 
patient; but there was one chance there, even if only one in a myriad, 
for the body to be brought out of danger. Death was arrested by 
the change that held the progress of the disease in check. 

11. People who wear relics and amulets are made better in health 
by wearing them if they are fixed in their belief that they will be 
cured or benefited by so doing. When such belief is lacking, the 
conscious mind is all there is to help; and its aid is always of very 
poor quality. But when the belief is strong enough to side-track 
the conscious mind, then the Other Mind comes into control and 
the power is exerted. Among the sufferers who worshiped the Holy 
Coat at Treves, those who were fully convinced of the efficacy of the 
power professed and whose maladies were such that they might be 
benefited under hypnotic suggestion, went back home rewarded; 
for they had all that was required to be cured; namely, a curable 
malady and the absorption of unbelief of the conscious mind by 
the Other Mind.—There are some kinds of lameness that are curable 
under hypnotic suggestion, and the latter agency has achieved some 
wonderful results. Let such cases come under any other agency 
than hypnotism that will side-track their conscious mind, and open 
the way to the Other Mind, and crutches may be thrown away. The 
same principle is at work in the so-called miraculous cures at Lourdes. 


MIND OVER MATTER 


101 


The main thing is to capture the belief, and to get absolute mastery 
over it; and the result is merely along the same line as hypnotic 
suggestion. If you put a patient into an induced slumber, and 
suggest a cure when he awakes, it will come if it is of the curable 
class of maladies. It is exactly the same thing if he is told by 
the multitude, or by some person, or by himself, and he is thoroughly 
controlled by that belief, that he will be cured of a malady or con¬ 
dition; for the suggestion has the same power to master his body 
in that way as in hypnotism, only the process is much more speedy 
and decisive under hypnotic control, as there is no chance for the 
conscious mind to inject its doubts. The conscious mind is always 
the doubting mind, for it actually knows nothing to a certainty; 
while the Other Mind has access to all of the knowledge of earth and 
cannot be mistaken. It is the seat of perfect faith and perfect belief. 
It is an impossibility for it to entertain a doubt. 

12. Dr. Charles Mercier in his well-known book cites the case of a 
young man who was arrested on a charge that was most humiliating. 
He was examined in a public hearing. The danger and horror of 
the situation so impressed him that his hair actually changed color 
in the presence of the astonished spectators, and in half an hour was 
a white-gray, although perfectly black thirty minutes before. This 
case has been verified and reported by others. It shows the power 
of the mind over the body. Every person has heard of the hair turn¬ 
ing gray in a single night; but this is the first recorded instance of 
it changing before the eyes of others.—The teeth have been known 
to decay under depressing emotions, and anaemia has followed severe 
disappointment. 

13. A man who suffered from chills and fever every second day 
at a fixed hour, was brought to give his attention so completely to a 
certain subject at the hour of the expected attack, that it passed and 
did not return. But the attention was absorbed totally by the sub¬ 
ject. The diverting power must be sufficient to entirely side-track 
the conscious mind; and this leads to the conclusion that thorough 
abstraction of mind means what it says, the mind is abstracted in 
fact. In Kansas City there are two men who are subject to chills 
and fever who likewise find cures when they are able to adopt the 
same method. Ordinary shifting of the attention will not suffice. 
In one case the means used was a highly exciting report of success in 
the investment which had been made, and in the other case the man 
was made to receive news from Alaska that pointed to the inherit- 


102 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


ance of a great fortune from a relative who had gone there to seek 
gold. These were repeated on the day of the expected return of the 
chills, and served to wholly distract the mind. There are further 
reports of the same kind from other localities in the United States 
where the malady prevails. 

14. A Philadelphia physician tells us of the manner in which a 
prominent clergyman of that city was cured of headaches which 
would not yield to treatment or medicine. Drugs reacted badly and 
made the patient worse. Hypnotism was not used; but a very harm¬ 
less and inert pill was given and described as one that had been 
recently discovered. It was said to have marvelous power. The 
real purpose of the doctor was to avoid introducing further medicines 
into the system, as they invariably set up poisons. The clergyman 
took the pills as prescribed. But before he was given them a very 
suggestive account was furnished him of what might be expected in 
their use. Great warmth of the parts affected by the pains would 
be experienced. The feet would also be visited by a tingling sen¬ 
sation caused by the better distribution of nutrition throughout the 
body. 

To the surprise of the physician all these effects were produced, 
and the clergyman phoned his gratification, saying that in all his life 
he had never met with anything so marvelous. The doctor did not 
dare to tell the truth about the pills, even after a complete cure 
was obtained, as he wished to hold them in readiness for future 
attacks of the same malady. The excessive warmth in the place in¬ 
dicated, and the tingling sensation in the feet were realities; not 
imagination. It is often true that hallucinations will possess the 
mind of a person, but a physical effect is a fact, even if it is the 
result of imagination. 

15. It is a well-known use of the power of the mind over the body 
to suggest either warmth or cold. A man who had a house full of 
company during the coal strike, and whose house was too cold for 
comfort because of lack of fuel, overcame the difficulty by going to 
the radiators, turning on the air valves, imitating with his breath the 
escape of air, then seeming to withdraw his hand quickly as if being 
burned by the pipes, and saying: “The house was rather cold a few 
minutes ago. We have a big fire in the furnace, and steam is coming 
in fast now. It is quite hot, and if you are uncomfortable I will 
open the windows and let in some cold air.” While the thermometer 
registered sixty degrees, some of the visitors began to perspire with 


MIND OYER MATTER 


103 


the supposed heat.—Experiments with such suggestion have been 
tried systematically for the purpose of easily testing the effect of 
supposed heat when it is really quite cool. 

16. Dr. Woodhouse Braine, the well-known anesthetist, reports a 
case that has become historical. Many proofs of the instances cited 
were shown, so that there is not the slightest doubt of its accuracy. 
A girl who was hysterical was prescribed ether preceding the oper¬ 
ation that was to remove two tumors from the scalp. But the 
bottle of ether was empty, and there was nothing in the inhaling bag 
in the way of odor to use to excite the suggestion of an anesthetic. 
He sent for a fresh supply, and while it was being obtained, he 
employed the time by making the girl familiar with the process of 
putting the bag over her mouth and nose, and telling her to breathe 
quietly and deeply. After a few respirations she exclaimed, “Oh, 
I am going off; I feel it; I am going off.” She had not been told 
that there was no ether at hand, but supposed that it was actually 
being administered. In a moment she turned up her eyes and was 
unconscious. The ether had not come, but as the young woman was 
found to be wholly insensible, the operation was proceeded with, and 
one tumor was removed without awakening her. But to test her 
condition a bystander said that she was coming to. She at once be¬ 
gan to show signs of waking up. In a short time she was given the 
empty bag again, and once more she fell into unconsciousness and 
the second tumor was cut out. These operations were both painless 
and successful. The young woman had taken ether three years be¬ 
fore, and her mind was expectant when the bag was applied after 
the same manner employed three years previous.—The memory of 
the past experience was not necessary, as another physician speaks of 
the fact that he often makes pretence of giving anesthetics, and finds 
that a certain proportion of all patients can be induced to believe 
they are receiving them; and this wholly without the aid of hypno¬ 
tism. It is called waking suggestion. Sometimes the use of words 
may be omitted, as where the usual actions are gone through with in 
pantomime. Seeing a thing done will frequently appeal to the belief 
that it is the genuine thing that is being performed. History cites 
quite a number of such experiences all through the ages.—Anemic 
girls are easily made to believe they are being given sleep-producing 
drugs by this method. 

17. About nineteen years ago we sent out to four thousand of our 
students a request that they find persons who were troubled with 


104 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


a bad cough that seemed incurable, asking them to induce the coughers 
to omit every alternate cough. In ninety per cent, of these cases 
the request was complied with, and in every one of those cases the 
cough was wholly cured. When it was found that every other cough 
could be omitted, it was at the same time discovered that coughing 
was largely a mental affair. Dr. Goodhart reports the case of a 
woman who consulted him in regard to her chest. He examined it 
and thought he detected signs of phthisis; but he expressed great 
surprise that she had not been troubled with any coughing. This 
fact she confirmed in advance of his statement that phthisis was 
accompanied by a bad cough. TJp to that time she had been free 
from any symptom of the kind; but soon after she was afflicted with 
an obstinate and most persistent cough which he found very difficult 
to remove. Dr. Goodhart cites this case as showing the practitioner 
the better course to pursue, which is to avoid asking questions or 
making suggestions that may lead the mind of the patient into a 
belief that some of the symptoms are lacking.—One of the most 
wicked methods allowed by the postal authorities in the use of in¬ 
quiries sent by mail by fraudulent patent medicine concerns, whose 
purpose is to incite sickness by stimulating the belief that some of 
the indicated symptoms are really present. There are millions of 
men and women to-day who, on reading of certain symptoms, im¬ 
mediately have them. A question may start them in operation and 
actually sickness follows. It is the purpose of the patent medicine 
concerns to increase sickness instead of curing it. There is not one 
of them who would decrease disease even by their own concoctions. 
What would be the use? They seek to make well people sick, and 
why should they want sick people to get well? It is true that any 
grade of intellect from the highest to the lowest, but generally the 
latter, can be induced to believe in the efficacy of advertised drugs, 
and thorough belief is all that is required to effect a cure, if the 
malady is curable.—But the medicines actually put out by these 
patent concerns are charged with alcohol to make victims of alcoholism 
and thus confirmed sufferers who must mortgage house and every¬ 
thing to pay for a lifetime of such medicines; and in them also 
are all the drugs that fix the slavery of the most criminal habits on 
men and women who, prior to taking patent medicines, were in 
nearly normal health. It is a safe rule never to huy or use a medi¬ 
cine or other cure that is advertised. The day. is not far distant 
when the law will send these advertisers to jail; the only delay now' 


MIND OYER MATTER 


103 


being the aid furnished the concerns by the newspapers whose in¬ 
come is derived from their advertisements. But some papers and 
quite a number of magazines to-day refuse to accept such matter 
even at a high financial return. It seems strange that the press 
that is capable of doing so much good for humanity, should until 
recently have been compelled to receive its income largely from the 
advertisements of beer, wine, liquor, tobacco, patent medicines, horse¬ 
race gambling and similar evils; all producers of money to the press; 
and all the enemies of the best health of mind and body in human¬ 
ity.—We personally know of drunkards being made by the following 
news item that appeared at regular intervals in the newspapers and 
was paid for by the tobacco and liquor interests: The name is changed 

but the item otherwise is the same at all times.—“Mr. -, who 

recently died at the age of one hundred and four years, always said 
that his longevity was due to the constant use of whiskey and to¬ 
bacco.—” People by the millions read this statement, which is changed 
to suit each new case, and they are naturally influenced by it. The 
reading notice was a clever piece of advertising carried on by the 
tobacco trust and the whiskey syndicates, many of whose owners 
were the controlling powers or actual holders of stock behind the 
newspapers themselves. The fact was now so common that no person 
could live long who does not smoke and use whiskey, if these news¬ 
papers were to be believed, that life itself would seem to depend on 
such vices. The physiological fact is that the use of alcohol and of 
tobacco shortens life; and any one case that is an exception is merely 
the accident that happens in all groups of instances. 

In concluding this cycle we will say that it has been believed that 
the ill effects of the power of mind over the body are due to the hal¬ 
lucinations of the conscious mind, rather than to the control of the 
Other Mind. This claim is based upon the desire to believe that 
the latter is always the agency of good and so a messenger of heaven. 
But sentiment has no place in science. There are some reasons for 
believing that the conscious mind in the mind of evil tendencies, and 
the Other Mind of the better tendencies, and they are these: 

1. Left to self any person soon drifts to the darker side of things 
when the mind has full sway. Thus sickness and the symptoms of 
coming danger are natural to that mind. There is no doubt about 
this. 

2. When under the sway of the Other Mind, all other counter 





OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


106 

influences being subdued, the tendency is always toward purity of 
thought and of conduct. There is no doubt about this fact. It has 
been well proved in thousands of cases. 

3. Idleness is the devil’s workshop; and this is due to the fact that 
the mind then has its opportunity to lead the person astray. When 
boys and girls have nothing to do, they always drift to the bad in 
some form. This seems a rule of human conduct. 

4. The influences that set in motion the Other Mind always are 
good, never bad in a moral sense; and the goal is always high and 
grand where full sway is given to it. All the blessings of life spring 
out of such impulses. Thus the evil that boys fall into when in 
their teens comes from the conscious mind, and we believe that there 
is no power able to cure it except that which is exerted by the Other 
Mind, and by telepathic action. So drinking, smoking, and many 
other ills are born of the conscious mind, and are cured almost 
wholly by the Other Mind. 

5. Suggestion made in wakefulness, of course lacks the aid of 
hypnotism, and the conscious mind is never fully suppressed except 
by hypnotism. Therefore complete cures and reforms are not pos¬ 
sible from wakeful suggestions. For this reason the power to make 
the body change in its structure through wakeful influences is lim¬ 
ited and always more or less mixed with the conscious mind and its 
evil tendencies. We do not think that moral reforms are within the 
range of execution by wakeful suggestions, while they are secured 
easily through hypnotism because the latter entirely suppresses the 
conscious mind, and opens the way for the ascendency of the Other 
Mind. 

6. Some of the distinctive features between control when un¬ 
mixed are seen in the fact that the individual is made to see things 
in any way that is ordered. Thus the most intelligent college pro¬ 
fessor will see red as green, or black as white, or blue as any color, 
or something different from what it is when ordered to do so in 
the hypnotic sleep; and the strange fact is that such changes will be 
recognized in the periods of wakefulness following hypnotic sugges¬ 
tion in sleep. But no person, under the sway of suggestion when 
awake, will call red any other color, nor believe that black is white. 
The very woman who was operated on without ether because she 
fell into an unconscious state when she believed that ether was being 
administered to her, would not have believed that blue was yellow, 
or one color another, unless she had been hypnotized. The clergyman 


MIND OVER MATTER 


107 


of Philadelphia who believed that a harmless pill was a powerful 
medicine, would not have believed that two and three made six; 
although had he been hypnotized he would not only have believed 
it, but would have added two and three as six for several days after¬ 
ward in his normal wakeful periods. 

7. This makes it seem clear that the muddy and ill effects of the 
conscious mind when that function has sway over the body, are 
partly mixed with the power of the Other Mind, when the suggestion 
is made in wakeful periods. In the preceding cycle it has been 
shown conclusively that the Other Mind has almost absolute power 
over the body, limited only by the laws of nature; while in this cycle 
it is shown the Other Mind has a less active and decisive power 
over the body, although it would be foolish to deny that the mind 
does in fact influence the physical condition of the body. 

8. This limitation of the wakeful agency of suggestion is a con¬ 
stant source of danger. You can make people believe many things, 
and if faith were strong enough, then there would be marvels of 
cure. But the sick man cannot summon the faith that is requisite, 
nor can the collapsed mind think at all of what faith would have, 
and so the whole fabric of cures by faith must fail. The patient 
must be the active party in all such treatment. It is like giving a 
magic wand to a man and telling him that, if he can hold that high 
over his head all the time he is sick, he will get well. But when his 
strength fails, when his arm gets weary, when he is in a state of col¬ 
lapse, then the whole system is a sad farce. The helpless patient must 
receive all benefits from others; from medicines, or applied treat¬ 
ment; and there is no other way. If the mind is the agency that 
rules health, then it is necessary to keep the mind from falling ill, 
and this is impossible. 

Many systems of cure are in vogue to-day, called mental healing 
in name, or akin to it in fact. The books and lectures that are sent 
out to the public to convince them of the potency of the mind as the 
master of the body, all make use of reports of cases similar to those 
that appear in this cycle, thinking that the public will be converted 
to some new cult by these living proofs. The cases themselves are 
true, and the proved power of the mind over the body is also well 
known, and no longer doubted; but the use that is made of such a 
basis is altogether wrong. When a person sets about trying to mus¬ 
ter up a high grade of belief, if something breaks, then he falls 
down and it is a long fall. Relief to be effective must be lighted 


108 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


up by eternal sunlight and sustained by unceasing encouragement; 
and this is not human nature. 

The only safe way is to cultivate the acquaintance of the Other 
Mind and learn how to employ its influences at all times; for it can 
make no mistake, and never works against the highest degree of 
health and efficiency of the body and all its faculties, when its sway 
is absolute. 

In answer to the claims of some investigators that the conscious 
mind is always exerting a bad influence over the body unless held 
in check or controlled by the Other Mind, and that the latter does 
good all the time, it is a fixed law of telepathy that there are two 
conditions that control this matter: 

1. In the absence of acquired magnetism the conscious mind runs 
downgrade and tends in the wrong direction. 

2. When any man or woman has acquired magnetism the Other 
Mind holds sure sway under the propositions set forth in the First 
Cycle of this book. 


109 


EIGHTH CYCLE 




Y what dark art you cast 
The spell that makes the mind 
A serf, a sieve, a glass, 

Is hard to understand 
Unless somewhere there he 
A deeper consciousness . 



ANY ways of inducing sleep in a person have been, 
taught and are being employed to-day. Miich de¬ 
pends on the individual who is to become the sub¬ 
ject. If one has been previously hypnotized, it may 
be easier to induce sleep again. The stroking of the 
forehead is often successful. Some doctors merely tell the patient to 
look steadily at some object, and the eyes may be raised to weary 
them, or kept on a level, or lowered; the result being the same. But 
these are not the usual experiences. There are several classes of 
people as far as susceptibility is concerned. 

1. The first class are those who have been hypnotized before. 

2. The second class are those who are of an emotional nature and 
are very susceptible. Thus a man who felt insulted and who re¬ 
sented the offense by a blow of the fist, would be much more readily 
hypnotized than the other man who chose rather to take the case into 
court in a suit for damages. People of high temper, and those who 
are easily irritated by anything that goes wrong are the most sus¬ 
ceptible subjects next to those who have already been hypnotized. 
Likewise the class of men that make up mobs to wreak vengeance on 
some evil-doer, or who execute summary sentence on some suspect, 
are all prey to the hypnotic influence. People who believe whac they 
hear, who are aroused to frenzy at political meetings, who spring 
into action on impulse from hearing some charge against another, 
who are followers of and believe in claims made by advertisements 









110 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


especially with reference to the curative qualities of patent medi¬ 
cines, and all classes who are moved readily by gossip, by sensational 
news articles, by the yellow press and by pretenders generally; these 
are very susceptible to the power of hypnotism. At a political ha¬ 
rangue a physician who was an expert in this practice, said he could 
select, by a glance at the men who were wildly cheering the demagogue 
who was speaking, every man who would be the first to be put to sleep 
by hypnotism. He afterwards had twenty-four men of his selection 
brought to his office from the assemblage, and everyone of them 
went into induced sleep in less than four minutes after the first 
attempt. It is said that the yellow press, the saloon, the house of 
prostitution, the patent medicines, and the race track are supported 
by men and women who would be the first to fall asleep under 
hypnotic influence. 

3. The third class are those who are considered only susceptible 
after strong influences have been employed to induce sleep. It is a 
question of time only when they will be controlled, although much 
depends on the operator and the method employed. 

4. The fourth class are those who are not susceptible at all to 
this kind of influence. They constitute about five per cent, of all 
persons of normal minds. In other words, fully ninety-five per cent, 
of all persons are susceptible and may be hypnotized provided the 
method and the operator are the best and most skilful. 

5. Persons who are afflicted with incurable forms of insanity can 
never be hypnotized. Of all the insane about twenty per cent, are 
capable of being hypnotized. Forms of emotional insanity are gen¬ 
erally cured by hypnotic suggestion. 

Sick people, those weak in health, and those weak in mind are 
often more susceptible than they would be if such troubles were 
removed. 

Some operators claim that dull men of large bones make better 
subjects than the emotional types. But those who are deliberative 
and coldly intellectual make the most difficult of all subjects; and 
men and women who, under great stress of excitement or provoca¬ 
tion, would remain calm and not lose their heads, cannot be hypno¬ 
tized at all. 

A beginner in the use of this art would have more success in hyp¬ 
notizing those who had been before subjected to the influence. “Once 
a subject, always a subject,” is an axiom of the practitioners, but it 
is not as often true to-day as formerly. 


HOW TO HYPNOTIZE 


111 


FIRST STEPS IN HYPNOTIZING 

Putting a person into a state of induced sleep is a serious matter, 
despite the fact that it is sometimes employed for the purpose of pub¬ 
lic entertainment. It is always a serious matter, as it involves the 
mental and physical health of the subject. Therefore if any one of 
the students of this work is intending to acquire the power to hyp¬ 
notize, take time enough to ascertain a few things about the rights 
of the other party. 

1. In the first place ask yourself the question. What good will it 
do to acquire such a power? 

2. Who are the individuals to be hypnotized? 

3. What will be the results in case of success in mastering the 
minds and wills of others ? 

If after answering the foregoing inquiries you are still of the opin¬ 
ion that you ought to practice this art or at least to learn how to 
use it, then fix in your mind the following requisites:— 

1. Hypnotizing a person is a species of tampering with the mind 
and health of that person unless done for justifiable ends. Before 
an attempt is made it should be actually necessary. The time is not 
far distant when it will be made a crime to use this power for amuse¬ 
ment. Having found that there is justification of the practice, espe¬ 
cially in alleviating suffering, ill-health, or immorality, then make 
the preparation as complete as possible before the first case is sought. 

2. A person who is deficient in magnetism will have but feeble 
chance of progressing in this art. Magnetism, as set forth in the 
eighteenth proposition of the First Cycle, is the twin energy of the 
Other Mind. What is called natural magnetism is that power that 
is supposed to be native bom in the individual; but it is then much 
less understood than if acquired. When it is acquired, all its laws 
and processes are made familiar and then it is used with greater 
effect than when left to itself as a bom gift. As all persons who 
possess this power of magnetism naturally, are compelled to study 
its laws and processes from books* in order to be able to use it, the 
only proper course to pursue is to master such laws and processes in 
advance of undertaking the practice of hypnotism or the uses of 
telepathy. 

* For full information as to the courses of training in Magnetism in com¬ 
plete book form, apply to Ralston University Press, Meriden, Conn. 


112 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


3. While it is true that all persons possess some magnetism and 
are therefore able to mesmerize to a slight extent, it is better to 
start with the full power, as one failure or part failure will destroy 
that confidence which is so essential to success. Presuming that you 
have both the justification for the practice, and the magnetism to 
carry it on, the next step is to make up your mind that you are to 
succeed. 

You must have faith in yourself. 

Look to the end to be attained. 

If you purpose to relieve sickness, keep that great fact in 
mind. 

Believe in the noble character of the effort. 

Believe that it is worth your best labor. 

Your confidence in yourself must be deep and fixed. 

4. Before your first trial prepare yourself mentally for it by tak¬ 
ing to bed with you at night, under the laws stated in the Fifth 
Cycle, the self-suggestion that, on the following day, and on all other 
days, when you are awake, you will be able to gain hypnotic control 
of all persons over whom you try to obtain mastery. This use of 
self-suggestion has proved a turning point in many persons who were 
unable to proceed. They were fully equipped, but when the moment 
arrived there was something of awe about it, and the thought that 
they were about to enchain some other human being in their bondage 
half-frightened them. Self-suggestion takes away all this fear and 
timidity, and starts the action half automatically. This is a great 
advantage as the possibility of failure is dimished. Self-sugges¬ 
tions, made as sleep is coming on, take hold of the whole being and 
become facts in time, if persisted in. They are the most marvelous 
influences in all human life. In the cases of hypnotists who have 
partly succeeded or who gain control over a limited proportion of 
persons, self-suggestion rapidly increases this power. Added to mag¬ 
netism it takes a commanding lead in bringing results that will be 
far greater than at first sought. 

5. The next step by way of preparation is to memorize the follow¬ 
ing rules of human nature in the use of hypnotism: 

a. The operator, yourself, should be sympathetic at all times. 

b. Any attempt to frighten the proposed patient will work harm 
in nine cases out of ten. One of the old methods was to make the 
art seem hideous, awe-inspiring, or compelling. To say, “I will 
hypnotize you whether you want me to or not,” is not wise. Fright 


HOW TO HYPNOTIZE 


113 


at the thought of being controlled may sway some minds, but not 
those that you should deal with. 

c. Nothing should occur to make the patient dislike the process 
or effects. One operator by accident placed his hand on the side 
of the mouth of a patient who was thereby struck dumb before 
full control was secured, and the patient on being released from this 
accidental control left the operator and would never again submit to 
the trial. In a number of other cases the patients have been made 
to do or say things that were ridiculous and never would permit the 
operation again, and their friends were likewise driven out of the 
notion of becoming subjects. 

d. Circumstances do more to bring the subject into a state of sus¬ 
ceptibility than talking will do. Some of the physicians who prac¬ 
tice this art for curative means allow their new patients to be pres¬ 
ent and witness the hypnotizing of others. In some institutions, 
there are several waiting for their turn who, by the time they are 
reached, will have fallen almost if not quite into hypnotic slumber 
or who are so near it that a few passes on the forehead will send 
them to the state of induced sleep. In places where no others are to 
be operated upon and the opportunity of seeing the process in ad¬ 
vance is lacking, the best surroundings are quietude and a low tone 
in voice and light. The room should not be over-bright, nor should 
there be noise and distracting conditions. Whatever will tend to 
bring on ordinary sleep will also aid in hypnotism. 

e. The voice is depended upon by many operators, and used to be 
the main agency next to the direct manipulation; but it is now known 
to be an uncertain quantity; for there have been many failures that 
are due to the talking that has kept the patient awake. One physician 
says he never speaks unless he thinks it necessary. Another phy¬ 
sician says he speaks at the beginning, but during the first steps of 
manipulation he keeps quiet. Another says he talks in a very low 
voice, making a remark occasionally in which he conveys the informa¬ 
tion that sleep is coming on gradually, or something to that effect. 
Still another claims that the suggestions in the voice have much to 
do with inviting sleep. The fact is that whatever will conduce to 
bring on sleep will be the best course to pursue. 

/. It is generally understood that no person can he hypnotized un¬ 
less he or she is willing to be and really wants to be. Consent seems 
to be the first part of the work to he done by the patient. While 
this claim is true in most instances, it is nevertheless the fact that 


114 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


many persons do not give consent, but are dulled into the preliminary 
susceptibility by circumstances. But, on the other hand, the fear 
that they cannot resist the supposed charm of the operator is hurt¬ 
ful in the long run. Fear should be avoided. It should be made a 
pleasing affair. In order to assist in this method, it is well to in¬ 
form the patient that consent is necessary only when the question is 
raised; otherwise do not approach the matter in conversation. Pro¬ 
ceed as if there was to be no doubt about the result. 

g. It is well to make known the fact that hypnotic sleep is in¬ 
duced sleep and that persons whose minds are erratic cannot be 
brought into such sleep. State that those of normal and strong 
minds can be best put to sleep; that the better the mental state the 
more readily will such sleep follow, and that ninety-five per cent, 
of all such persons can be so put to sleep. There should be nothing 
argumentative. Agree with the patient in all things, when the mind 
of such person is set in some notion or belief. To set up conflict 
will invite wakefulness and combativeness. 

h. The most successful of all hypnotizers are those who have culti¬ 
vated and know how to use a simple but very sympathetic agreeable¬ 
ness. It must not be affected, as that will end the matter. It must 
be seemingly serious, but above all things natural and simple, yet 
most pleasing and agreeable. Be manifestly in earnest. Be sincere. 
Have the patient think that your whole attention, mind and all, are 
fixed on his or her welfare; but this must be done in such a way as 
not to seem superficial. Be pleasant, be agreeable, be sympathetic, 
be courteous and natural. 

FASCINATION. 

One of the older methods of inducing hypnotic sleep is by fascina¬ 
tion. This results in deeper sleep than any other known method, 
but is both inconvenient and taxing on the strength of the operator. 

It consists in looking fixedly and persistently into the subject’s eyes 
at a distance of a few inches, and at the same time having hold of 
his hands. Your eyes should be tensed and the pupils should show 
the brilliancy of magnetism. This will attract his gaze. If he is 
to be controlled the expression will go out of his face and he will see 
nothing but your eyes. This method is fatiguing. The one who 
becomes tired first will be hypnotized; but magnetism generally de¬ 
termines the question of weariness. As long as there is active mag¬ 
netism there will be no weariness. 


HOW TO HYPNOTIZE 


115 


Many of the leading practitioners of the world have made use of 
fascination with great success; but, when some of them have at¬ 
tempted it after having become tired with many consultations in a 
day, they have been themselves hypnotized by the subject. This has 
happened to every great hypnotizer in the past twenty years; and 
it shows the fact that a person who can control another is not thereby 
proof against being controlled by the same power. 

THE ROTATING MIRROR. 

This is known as Luy’s Rotating Mirror, and the instrument is 
for sale in Paris, and perhaps in this country. It was invented by 
Dr. Luys of La Charite Hospital, and was intended to take the 
place of fascination, and also to assist in hypnotizing a large num¬ 
ber of persons in a brief space of time. The method is to have the 
patient look into a rapidly revolving mirror mounted on a stand. 
He soon becomes sleepy because of his eyes being dazzled by the 
swiftly changing light. A whole roomful of people may be hypnotized 
at once, and suggestions applied at leisure. There is some danger in 
its use by unskilful operators or those who may not have had much 
experience, as the sleep produced is profound, and hard to awake 
from. If a person should become hypnotized by the revolving 
mirror and you were unable to take advantage of this help by pur¬ 
suing the operation with suggestions and then of leading the sleeper 
into full consciousness, harm would follow. 

The mirror is not used in private practice, and is not recommended 
because it does not generally place the subject en rapport with the 
operator, which is essential when full advantage is to be taken of 
the condition. 

CRYSTAL-GAZING. 

This is a common method of self-magnetizing, and must not be 
confounded with self-suggestion, as one is as different from the other 
as day is from night. 

In crystal-gazing, the object is to make the eyes rest on some bright 
point, small in size, and raised slightly above the level of the eyes, 
about a foot or more away. In some cases the point of light may be 
a few inches from the eyes, and in others it may be several feet away; 
but the average of twelve to eighteen inches is best. 

The effect of the strain is to cause dilation of the pupils of the 
eyes and consequent dimness of vision. There comes a feeling of 


116 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


great heaviness in the eyeballs due to the fatigue of keeping them 
fixed on a bright point in an elevated position. When they are quite 
tired it is necessary to close them in order to give them the needed 
relief and rest. This act calls up a previous association of ideas con¬ 
nected with fatigued or confused sight. That association points to 
sleep, towards which the whole physical being is rapidly tending. 

The bright point employed in this method may be the small bit of 
light reflected from the round surface of a silver ball about half an 
inch in diameter or larger; or else a piece of crystal glass; or any¬ 
thing bright. The gaze should not be diverted into a large area. 
While the small point of light should be bright, it is better to have 
the room as dark as it can otherwise be made. Some subjects go 
into sleep in a full light, others are better controlled when the light 
is not diffused, but is concentrated. 

Crystal-gazing may be followed by suggestions made by an opera¬ 
tor, or by a waking into an ecstatic condition. Some writers make 
great claims for the results that attend this latter condition; but the 
majority of cases are followed by a low order of hallucinations which 
are not healthful to the mind or beneficial in any way. 

Yet if there is an operator to direct the results by suggestions, the 
same ends are attained as in ordinary hypnotism. 

A magnetic person cannot be brought into a hypnotic sleep by crys¬ 
tal-gazing; except that a person, who looks long enough, will lose 
some degree of magnetism, and when that power is exhausted, then 
the sleep will follow. But we have had a class of thirty men and 
wtfmen who had acquired magnetism try crystal-gazing for two 
hours and not one of them lost enough magnetism to enter the sleep. 
Yet there are cases where the gazing has actually depleted all mag¬ 
netism when the latter is weak. 

The results from crystal-gazing seem to sustain the claim that 
the Other Mind is merely a channel through which every grade of 
knowledge and power may come; the muddy and the low as well 
as the high and the sublime; just as the same person may be wicked 
part of the time, and may reform and become sublime in thought 
and deed. 

Contrasted with the depressing results from crystal-gazing when 
left to self with no operator to guide the m ind, are the grander effects 
of self-suggestion when combined with magnetism as described in the 
Fifth Cycle. The latter leads the way to the loftiest heights in the 
operations of the Other Mind. 


HOW TO HYPNOTIZE 


117 


THE FINGEB METHOD. 

Have the patient recline on a conch or lean back in an easy chair. 
Baise the first two fingers of your right hand at a distance of twelve 
inches from his eyes in such a position that his gaze will be directed 
upward and in a strained manner. Tell him to look steadily at 
those two finger-tips. As soon as the eyes become weary, which may 
take a minute or more, his expression will undergo a change, and a 
far-away look will come into his eyes. His pupils will contract and 
his eyelids will twitch spasmodically. These are sure signs of the 
coming hypnotic sleep. If by this time the lids do not close, aid 
them by gently shutting them and begin to make suggestions such 
as these: “Your eyes are becoming very heavy. They are getting 
heavier and heavier. You cannot see my fingers distinctly. They 
are getting dim to you.” The latter suggestions should be made 
when the pupils begin to dilate or contract. Then go on: “A 
numbness is coming over your legs; you will be fast asleep in a few 
minutes. How sleep soundly. Sleep.” 

The two first fingers of the right hand are best to use. Then the 
left hand n*ay gently but firmly rest on his forehead if he does 
not fall asleep readily. If there is still further delay, take his left 
hand in your left hand by placing your thumb on the back of his 
hand, about two inches from the knuckles, and your second finger 
in the palm underneath, and then press firmly but gently on the 
nerve there. The ball of your thumb and ball of the finger should be 
held flat, so as not to present a point of pressure. 

When the sight of the finger-tips will not produce the sleep then 
a bright metal disc or new coin may be substituted; or the skin of 
the forehead may be gently stroked while the gaze is fixed on some 
object at a distance in the room. Be careful to note if the voice 
tends to keep him awake, as is sometimes the case. 

YEBBAL SUGGESTIONS. 

A person of a high degree of magnetism is able by the use of the 
voice alone in a dim room to induce hypnotic sleep without any 
other aid. As the magnetism is still further increased this sleep may 
be brought on in any room or place, if the patient is susceptible. 
There are claims that judges and jurymen have been hypnotized by 
lawyers who were able to exert this power; but, as the judges and 
jurors did not go into a state of sleep, it could not have been hypno- 



118 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


tism as usually understood. But a certain control known as wakeful 
hypnotism is often secured. 


THE PSYCHIC METHOD. 

This is the best, the newest, the most advanced, and the most 
speedy of all methods of hypnotizing. It may seem slightly com¬ 
plicated at first; but is not so in fact. As its use becomes familiar 
it will be found to be a most natural process. We will state its va¬ 
rious points at this stage, and explain them as we proceed. If this 
method makes use in part of any of the older methods, it is so in 
part only, and is the more valuable on that account. 

1. The patient must be shown how to empty the mind. This is 
so extensively taught in another cycle of this book that it need not 
be repeated here. 

2. The patient must next be shown how to devitalize the whole 
body, or as much of it as may be free. This is also taught in an¬ 
other cycle. The instruction is so important that a separate space 
is set apart for it in this book. 

3. The next thing to do is to bring the patient to “the boundary/* 
By this is meant to reach the very last vestige of support while be¬ 
lieving he is strong in his standing position. “The boundary’* is 
the position farthest to the front or farthest to the back that can 
be attained without bending the body or leaning. It is secured by 
allowing the weight to gradually swing forward or backward and 
there remain fixed. 

The principle involved is the attempt to capture the belief of 
the patient. He is not readily convinced if he is a beginner; and 
any show of his own inability will do more to convince him of the 
approaching power than anything else that can occur at the first stage 
of the proceedings. 

Tell him to stand facing you. All your remarks must be made 
in a one-pitch voice, using one tone only on the musical scale, but 
in speaking, tell him to look you steadily in the eyes and not move. 

Make a pass down his left side with your hand, beginning over 
his shoulder and running the hand lightly over his clothing down 
to the thigh, hardly touching the clothing. 

How ask him to stand perfectly straight, not to lean any, but to 
have his body as erect as he can put it, with the weight forward in 
position so that he is supported from the balls of the feet. Hot 



HOW TO HYPNOTIZE 


119 


much importance should seemingly be placed on this request, as his 
attention must not be called too much to the “boundary.” Having 
made sure he is standing straight but with the weight well forward, 
make another pass down his left side with your right hand as before. 

The next step is to ask him to think of nothing, and to devitalize 
in the manner as taught in this book. This he is to do while stand¬ 
ing to the front “boundary,” and while you make a third pass down 
his left side as before. If he follows the motion of your arm as it 
descends, or takes an interest in it, he will become a ready subject 
under proper manipulation. 

The foregoing steps are progressive; beginning with the patient in 
a normal standing position; then changing to the forward weight; 
then taking the latter with the empty mind and the devitalized body 
from the hips up; accompanied by the passes. They are to be done 
so easily and naturally that it will seem as if you were placing him 
in position and not yet ready to begin. 

4. The fourth step is to “throw the boundary.” 

This is done by asking him to raise his right arm, and telling 
him that if he is to be a ready subject he will find it difficult to do. 
As the valuable patient wants to be hypnotized as quickly as possible, 
he will hope that he cannot easily raise his arm. Use these words: 
“You will be drawn slightly toward me when you raise your arm.” 
“It will be very slightly but you will sway toward me as you raise 
your arm.”—When the weight is forward to the front boundary, it 
will be impossible for any person to raise the arm in a forward di¬ 
rection as the center of gravity will at once be lost and there must 
be not only swaying but actual falling. This is a physical fact. It 
is of course a trick, and so are nearly all the first steps in h}q>no- 
tism; being used for the purpose of convincing the subject. To fail 
in this process will indicate a very clumsy operator. To inform the 
subject of the purpose of the “boundary” would be unbusiness¬ 
like and certain to defeat your plans. 

To those who do not wish to be hypnotized, this purpose of caus¬ 
ing the patient to lose his balance will be the means of safeguard¬ 
ing the mind against such influence. It is important to know these 
things. Whatever will capture the mind or the belief, which is the 
same thing, will start hypnotic tendencies. All the safeguards are 
taught in another cycle of this book. 

5. Easier and more certain is the attempt to “throw the back 
boundary.” This is an outgrowth of a well-known and up-to-date 


120 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


method of testing the susceptibility of the individual. It is surpris¬ 
ingly accurate. 

Ask the patient to stand with his back to you and to raise both 
arms so that the tips of his longest fingers will rest very lightly 
against, but not on, a mantel in front of him. But he must be 
placed at the exact distance that will allow him to have his weight 
on his heels, while the feet rest fully on the floor. The weight must 
be as far back as can be attained while the body stands straight. 
There is no apparent leaning and no bending. 

If this position is not right there is not much use of proceeding 
further unless the patient is to be very easily influenced. But if the 
weight is at the back “boundary” then you must rub your hands 
together until they are hot, and place them with the palms upright 
toward the back of the patient. ThLl him that if he is susceptible 
he will sway toward you. Some do sway at this stage. The more 
difficult subject requires the next stage, which is to ask him to 
close his eyes and roll them easily upward while closed. Tell him 
to put his heels together; and to raise his chin rather high, with 
closed eyes rolled upward. 

Then again rub your hands and tell him that he is being drawn to 
you. If he is still uninfluenced, again rub your hands, and tell him 
to empty his mind and think of nothing; also to devitalize all his 
body above the thighs. Then say that he is now becoming influenced 
and that he is swaying slightly towards you. Make several passes 
down his back with the tips of your fingers from the neck to the 
end of the spine. 

The final stage is now reached, and this is to ask him to very 
gently drop his arms to the side, while you rub your hands and place 
them near his back. If he has his weight at the “boundary” he 
cannot help swaying towards you. It is a necessity. To do this 
there must be smoothness of the manipulation and all parts must go 
with a careless ease as if it were merely a matter of course. Any 
unsuccessful part of the proceedings must be accounted for as a mere 
matter of preparation. It will not do to admit failure or inability. 

The foregoing method will hypnotize ninety-five per cent, of all men 
and women of intelligent minds; and it has achieved that proportion 
when performed by skillful operators. It may not have any success 
in clumsy hands. Therefore if you are experimenting, go some¬ 
where to practice on small boys until you acquire some skill and 
smoothness of motion. But the boys should not be wantonly used. 


HOW TO HYPNOTIZE 


121 


If you are a physician and are justified in taking up this practice, 
as all doctors are sure to do in the near future, you must secure 
your success without loss of prestige, as that would hurt your use¬ 
fulness in your own practice. There are to-day many hundreds of 
doctors, some in the highest rank in their profession, who use hyp¬ 
notism in their treatments and secure results that are absolutely 
impossible by the use of medicines alone. Lives are saved and men¬ 
tal derangements are cured by its aid when all other means have 
proved futile. 

THE HYPNOTIC AWAKENING. 

What to do after finding that your patient is to become a hypnotic 
subject is the most important part of the affair. He is now yours, if 
you have cast a deep sleep over him. When he shows evidence of 
swaying and becomes sleepy, lead him; to a sofa or reclining chair, 
and have him lean backward. Then use the Finger Method or Ver¬ 
bal Suggestion to cause the eyes to close tightly. You may say, 
“Your eyes are shut and you will find them heavy. You are very 
sleepy.”—If he does not fall asleep, then pass the tips of the fingers 
down the side of the face near the mouth and say, “You cannot speak 
very distinctly. Try it. See, you are not able to talk.”—If he is 
disposed to speak and seems about to do so, do not allow him time to 
say anything, but close his eyes and repeat the process. He will soon 
be fast asleep. When this is certain, then take the next step: 

6. Press gently on the eyeballs and say: “Your eyelids are down 
tight. You cannot open your eyes.” When he is unable to open 
the eyes, then while he is lying down, rub the body directly 
over the stomach, and say that the flesh is becoming very warm. In 
case it gets actually warm, then awaken the patient by saying: 
“That is all; wake up now.” If he hesitates and seems unable to 
wake up, blow cool air on the eyeballs, or fan them, saying: “That 
will do. Wake. You are all right. Wake up. All right.” 

7. He should be dismissed for the day, and told to return at a 
time agreeable to both. On his return, try to put him to sleep by the 
Finger Method. If he will not fall quickly to sleep, then repeat the 
psychic method. After he is sound, asleep, again bring warmth to 
the flesh over the stomach, and then proceed as follows: 

8. Gently pass the tips of your fingers down the outside of his 
arms; then raise one arm and tell him to hold it out straight, and 
say that he cannot lower the arm. Eepeat with the other arm. Then 


122 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


have him begin to rotate his thumbs over each other and say that he 
cannot stop moving them, and at the same time maintain a rotary 
motion with your finger in front of the hands. Then have him 
open his mouth and tell him he cannot close it. Reverse by having 
him close his mouth and tell him he cannot open it. Always say, 
“All right,” when he is released from each task that he cannot per¬ 
form. 

9. Now gently rub your hands on the top of his head until his 
cataleptic condition vanishes, and he becomes responsive to sugges¬ 
tion. This is the stage of obedience, and in it he will do what he is 
told. The readiness with which he adopts all suggestions is remark¬ 
able. 

THE SIX DEGREES. 

There are six degrees of the hypnotic condition, and they are as 
follows: 

First Degree .—This is the state of drowsiness. The patient 
is fully conscious. Many persons are abandoned by amateur opera¬ 
tors at this degree because the patient claims not to be hypnotized; 
and herein both are deceived. The heavy condition of the eyelids is 
the test. 

Second Degree. —This is called the cataleptic state because the 
patient is unable to control the muscles of the arm, the mouth or 
other parts of the body. He is conscious all the time, and will deny 
that he has been hypnotized. But when his arm is raised and he 
is told that it is to remain there, he cannot lower it. It will re¬ 
main rigid for a long time and he has no power to bring it down 
until the operator permits him to do so. The second degree is the 
limit of power in a large number of cases; but great good can be 
accomplished even in this state, both in reforming bad habits and 
in cures. Do not forget that the patient is fully conscious at the 
time, but is compelled to receive your directions. 

Third Degree. —The patient hears all that is said to him by you 
and others who may be in the room, and he is conscious to some ex¬ 
tent, but not as much so as in the preceding degree. He feels very 
sleepy. If you tell him to move any muscle and that he cannot stop, 
he will continue it indefinitely or until the sleep passes away of it¬ 
self. This is the stage of muscular activity. 

Fourth Degree. —Here the sleepy condition is such that all sense of 
hearing in the conscious mind is closed out. Proof of this fact 


HOW TO HYPNOTIZE 


123 


is had when any person other than the operator attempts to speak 
to the patient. The Other Mind hears, and hears only what is in¬ 
tended to be spoken by the operator. All sounds of every kind from 
others, or from any cause are not heard, or at least are not acted 
upon. This is the reverse of the condition existing in the first three 
degrees. Here is the crossing line between the two minds; but the 
conscious mind is not altogether lost in the change, as the patient is 
conscious of what has occurred, and can recall it after he wakes to a 
natural state. 

Fifth Degree .—This is the dream state, for all the occurrences 
and statements are recalled as in a vague and indistinct dream. 

Sixth Degree .—This is the somnambulistic state, and here all 
things are wholly shut out. There are no dreams to follow. The 
Other Mind is in full control. In this state all suggestions relating 
to what is to be done in a state of natural wakefulness are implicitly 
obeyed then. This is an important distinction. To be obeyed dur¬ 
ing the hypnotic state is one thing, for then the obedience is au¬ 
tomatic ; and to be obeyed when the patient comes into natural wake¬ 
fulness, in other places and away from the influence of the operator, 
is another matter entirely. The Sixth Degree “taps the subliminal 
mind,” as it is called and often referred to in books and writings 
on the subject. And as a famous physician says, “It presents fea¬ 
tures of extraordinary interest to the psychologist.” The conscious 
mind is no longer mixed with the Other Mind. 

If for no other reason than to see these two steps in the progres¬ 
sive changes from one mind to the other, these cycles on hypnotism 
were introduced in this course of study, the trouble taken to so state 
them is met by a rich reward, for they bring us to that exact situ¬ 
ation in life’s phenomena where we can see and can touch, as it were, 
the very minds at work. There are two crossings: 

In the Fourth Degree the outer world is closed and only the inner 
world is recognized. The two minds are shown at work when the 
sounds of the outer world and its voices are all unknown to the sub¬ 
ject, while the voice of the operator is understood and remembered 
after the patient is fully awake. 

In the Sixth Degree the dream state of the conscious mind has 
vanished, and only the Other Mind is awake. As there is a barrier 
between the two minds, it is not surprising that the difficulty of 
connecting the two will appear even in hypnotism. For the clear 
opening of the Other Mind there must be the total suppression of the 


124 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


conscious mind, and this occurs only at the Sixth Degree. But the 
rewards are great under certain conditions. 

A person of great magnetism is able in some cases to hypnotize 
one who is sleeping naturally. This is done by the suggestion, 
made to the accompaniment of a few passes over the sleeper, that 
he is not to wake up. He is ordered not to wake, and this is re¬ 
peated. Some persons have passed into their first hypnosis in this 
way, and it shows that there is a mind that can be talked to and 
made to obey during sleep, when the person is unconscious; for the 
more soundly he sleeps the better subject he becomes in hypnotism. 
This fact also indicates the genuineness of the process of natural 
sleep suggestion and self-suggestion as taught in preceding cycles. 

It is all wonderful. 

On every hand do we find proofs of the existence of the Other 
Mind. 


NINTH CYCLE 


iMBSBBBsaBBB WemaaasBaM aaeaB 

I DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM | 


LL power a blessing proves 
When used for human good; 

But in the hands of knaves 
Becomes a wanton tool 
For endless ill and harm, 

Destroying where it falls. 

E LIVE in an age of hypnotism. A few hundred years 
ago this art was confined to the mysterious people of 
the dark. Before that it appeared in rites and cruel 
scenes held in all parts of the world, both civilized 
and barbaric. That it was a power able to dull the 
make even pain unfelt is amply proved. The man who, 
in the claws of the fierce lion who was tearing him to pieces and 
who was rescued in the melodramatic nick of time, suffered no pain 
because he was not in his natural consciousness. It is a kind pro¬ 
vision of nature that, while animal must eat animal to carry on the 
processes of existence, the one that is eaten is in a hypnotic state and 
suffers nothing. 

The martyrs who were burned at the stake were in a hypnotic con¬ 
dition, even if in the third degree only, and they were as comforta¬ 
ble in the flames as their tormentors were on the field witnessing 
the affair. 

The Italian poet who, on becoming absorbed in his reveries, did 
not notice that his hand was being burned by flames near by, fur¬ 
nishes an example of the lack of sensation when the conscious mind 
is side-tracked as it is by absolute absorption. All geniuses work 
by the aid of the Other Mind, and during the active presence of 
that mind there is no consciousness at work. The victim of bar¬ 
baric rites were free from pain in most instances. Young women 
who were selected for the fagots, whose bodies were laid on a high 










120 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


pyre from which they could be seen by thousands of spectators, were 
willing subjects. Even when the knife was put to the flesh and the 
heart cut out, they smiled and died in ecstasy. 

While a dim light is helpful to bringing on hypnotic sleep, and 
a single ray of very bright light in a dark room is more effective, 
there are cases where a sudden flash of dazzling light, or the quick 
crash of an awful sound, induces hypnotic sleep on the principle that 
the whole nervous system is shocked and thus deprived of its electri¬ 
cal life for the brief space of time. The operator can then take ad¬ 
vantage of this and protract the condition. Some physicians use a 
flare of bright light for this purpose. 

Great fright, as well as an awful situation, brings on the same 
effect. Thus we find many ways of inducing the absence of the con¬ 
scious mind; ranging from natural slumber to the intense excitement 
of some calamity. Nature is kind in a world that must have so 
much pain and suffering. 

Any careful student of the preceding cycle must by this time real¬ 
ize that hypnotism in its mixed stages, like the state that follows 
crystal-gazing, is not a desirable condition in which to be placed. 
The Sixth Degree is the only one that wholly closes out the con¬ 
scious mind, and opens up the Other Mind with its marvelous pos¬ 
sibilities. The first degrees are mixed, and therefore impure; and 
it is in some form of those degrees, even in the most wakeful form 
as described in the Seventh Cycle, that the evil is brought upon the 
body. Left alone, a person will, in nine cases out of ten, where the 
mind exercises control over the body, becomes depressed and some of 
the functions will be interfered with. The Seventh Cycle should be 
reviewed in order that the effects that follow the mixing of the two 
minds may be the better understood. Natural wakefulness passes 
into some slight degree of hypnotism in those cases and the mind 
rules the body very badly. It is in natural wakefulness that all the 
crimes are planned and all sins committed. All along the line we 
see evidences of the wrongs and evils that are wrought by the con¬ 
scious mind. 

The nearer we keep to that mind, the more ill comes to the body. 
The farther we get from that mind, the less evil comes to the body. 
It is in the natural consciousness that fever arouses delirium and 
brings on hallucinations. These cannot be charged to hypnotism in 
an advanced degree, for it is hypnotism that cures such mental states 
when all other means will fail. We believe that, as many proofs are 


DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM 


127 


already at hand, all delirium and fevered hallucinations can be over¬ 
come by hypnotism in its complete stage. These results are being 
obtained every day now by expert physicians. 

In the Sixth Degree there is none of the conscious mind, and the 
only realm now opened up is that which is perfect in knowledge, per¬ 
fect in power, perfect in sight and perfect in its tendencies. The 
study of that state is left to the higher works mentioned in the First 
Cycle. And it is certain that no person, for unjustifiable ends, wants 
to be willingly made the subject of any haphazard operator in the 
opening of that realm. 

This is an age of hypnotism. 

In time nearly every man and woman will try to master it. Many 
say now that they have no such intention, and look upon it as an 
uncanny thing. So much the better. But for self-protection it 
will be necessary for every man and woman to study it and they 
will then be led to try it on others. The knowledge and the art 
of hypnotism are spreading this every year with great rapidity. Next 
year it will be still more rapidly on the increase. The request will 
be made by the thousands of experimenters for subjects on whom 
they can practice to get experience, and they will be disposed to take 
the word of some one high in the art that it is not harmful. 

The most familiar reason given for their views will be the fact 
that an insane person cannot be hypnotized, and they will infer that 
the stronger the brain the better will be the subject. The fact is 
that only about twenty per cent, of insane people can be hypnotized; 
but the other eighty per cent, suffer from some brain lesion. It is 
true that there are twenty persons in every hundred in the insane 
asylums who could be completely cured and brought back to their 
homes and to happiness by the aid of hypnotism, and this is the only 
means of relief they have. Some have been so cured, and some have 
been saved by this art while on their way to the asylums. Here is 
one of the noblest uses of the power. But it is fully justified and 
more than justified; and its efficacy opens up the inquiry, What is the 
public going to do to help that twenty per cent, that still remain 
in their wards ? 

On the other hand why should some person, just for the novelty 
of the experience, be induced to allow the power to be used where it 
is not needed? 

Are the results neutral and harmless ? 

Perhaps once being hypnotized may do no harm. Physicians and 


128 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


experts who are themselves very successful hypnotizers, have almost 
all of them been hypnotized by others, but not often. They know 
how to empty the mind, to relax, and to be willing to go into the 
sleep. They know how not to do these things, and they are safe. 
With the stock of magnetism that they must necessarily possess, they 
can fortify themselves against the influences of all others. 

It is not true that the brightest and most intellectual minds are 
most easily hypnotized. On the other hand, the minds that can be 
most readily emptied are the best subjects. Children stand in this 
category; and who wants to be responsible for taking away from 
children unnecessarily the power of the will? Once put into this 
kind of sleep, a boy or girl is easy prey to the same influence from 
others. Where habits are vicious and the future depends on present 
control, then there is justification; and a physician, in the presence 
of the parents, may take such a step; but not until after the parents 
themselves have used natural sleep suggestions as described in the 
Fourth Cycle. Properly employed and aided by magnetism, there is 
not one young person in a million who cannot be corrected of any 
evil, or vice, or bad habit. 

It is worth trying. But the parent must be in deadly earnest, 
and not go about it in a half-way fashion. 

A boy who was so wicked and so much of a rowdy that nothing 
could be done with him, was completely changed into a mild man¬ 
nered and fine dispositioned boy. Was it worth while? Certainly. 
Such a case is a type of countless others. 

But laying aside all such exceptions, let us look into the cases of 
those who are normal. 

A girl who has been hypnotized is too young to be assaulted. But 
her susceptibility is present, and when she is in her teens or has 
grown to young womanhood, she will be the easy prey of men if she 
does not know how to fortify herself against them. There are some 
young women who have been hypnotized who can withstand the 
hypnotic powers of most experts, but they come into rapport with 
certain ones very easily and soon lose power of resistance. Women 
have been assaulted in this way, and the courts have such cases to 
deal with at times; but the guilty parties seek to shield themselves 
behind the Sixth Degree. In that stage the victim has no memory 
whatever of what occurred, and in the Fifth Degree she has only a 
vague dream. But in the earlier degrees she is subject to the will 
of the operator and will obey him, even if she does in fact remember 


DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM 


129 


what has occurred. Then many women do not care to expose their 
assailants as they thereby bring themselves into disrepute. This 
fact is often a shield to the guilty party. 

It is not the safe and careful treatment that the girl or woman 
gets when her parents and her physician are present; but it is the 
condition that she is left in after the first control. She is easier the 
next time and still easier each subsequent time. Once does not do 
much harm; not enough to have the benefits refused; but then the 
patient should learn to fortify against any future attempt by others. 
If she is hypnotized only once, she is nevertheless made susceptible, 
and not only to the same operator but to all others who may place 
her mind in rapport. 

Any expert who has a subject who has once been hypnotized and 
who knows it, will not make the elaborate effort to secure control that 
is customary with newcomers. After a while, he will only make 
a few passes. Later on he will merely use the voice; and, finally, he 
will not make any attempt at all; but a glance of the eye, or a men¬ 
tal command unheard will be sufficient. This shows the growing 
power over the person. If ten times will make a person very easy 
to subjugate, nine times will be almost as effective as ten, eight 
almost as nine, and so on down to the first time. Once is not much, 
but it is something. 

There should be a law everywhere against the use of this power 
for public entertainment. Performers have scattered among their 
audiences a number of persons who have been previously hypnotized, 
and when there is a request from the platform for volunteers to 
experiment on, there is a rush from these, and a very few others 
who may be genuine strangers to the practice. The lecturer gives to 
each person a bright disc, which he must look steadily upon. In a 
few minutes the lecturer makes the round of the stage, closes each 
person’s eyes, and makes the positive statement that such person 
cannot open them. If they can be opened by the subject, he is not 
considered worth the time it will take to develop into a condition 
of control; and he is at once told to go back to the audience. But 
if his eyes stick and cannot be opened at will, then he is told to 
remain and be called upon for use in the evening’s program. 

One of the first things to be done is to have the subjects open 
their mouths wide, then be turned around to face the audience, and 
be told that they cannot shut their mouths. This experiment is the 
easiest to make, because the muscles of the mouth are the first to 


130 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


become fixed when under hypnotic control. Many persons who are 
thought well of in the community are thus made laughing-stocks of, 
and the incident is never forgotten. Then comes a series of catalep¬ 
tic conditions in which the subjects are unable to move their arms or 
legs, and will remain fixed and rigid. After this stage, the next 
work is to compel motions which cannot be stopped by the subjects. 
After this come the hallucinations in which the subjects are told they 
are all sorts of persons, animals and things, and carry out the ideas 
as though they were real. In order to make these things amusing, 
the actions are of the most outrageous character at times. 

The subjects are generally men between the ages of eighteen and 
thirty; a few women, but not many, and often none; and some older 
men at times. A study of the private after lives of those who have 
been subjects several times in these performances, reveals the fact 
that they are all weak-minded at last, or else sickly and diseased in 
the nervous system. 

Hypnotism acts by increasing the normal impressionability to sug¬ 
gestion; and as a moral person of unstable character may be cor¬ 
rupted in time by vicious surroundings and evil influences, so the 
same person may be the more easily corrupted when in the lighter 
degrees of hypnotism, and should not be thus used. Many of the 
subjects taken about by traveling showmen have entirely lost all 
individuality, and have become passive instruments in the hands of 
those who have charge of them. To reduce a fellow being to such a 
condition is a crime of itself, whether the law makes it so or not. 
The performers are degrading and make the public look with horror 
on the present spread of the knowledge of hypnotism. 

Under special conditions and in rare instances, subjects may be 
controlled at great distances when they have been hypnotized. More 
claims are made of this power than are actually true; many are fan¬ 
tastic accounts; but there is a scientific basis for some truth in them; 
and the experiments made by Pierre Janet of Havre, and Liegeois, 
of the city of Haney in France, as well as the books of such high 
authorities as Liegeois, Liebeault, Bourru and Burot, as well as 
others, confirm the facts as alleged, that the distant control has been 
proved beyond doubt. The English Society for Physical Research 
has established beyond all doubt the operations of telepathic influ¬ 
ences over hundreds and even thousands of miles of separation. But 
it is not a real danger that any person need fear being made the 
tool and slave of a hypnotist when out of the actual presence of such 


DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM 


131 


operator, unless it is in carrying into execution the orders issued 
during the sleep preceding. 

The theory prevails among the experts at Nancy that post-hypnotic 
suggestions are all-powerful, and will be carried out at all hazards. 
This belief is founded on the experience that has followed in a num¬ 
ber of strong cases; but it is not a general belief as yet, and may 
never be justified. It is claimed that any suggestions made in the 
Fourth or the Fifth Degree that are to be executed during wakeful¬ 
ness, no matter how long afterwards, will be carried out as ordered. 
It is true that immorality, forgery, extortion of money, fraudulent 
contracts, and other wrongs have been committed by reason of such 
suggestions; but they rose only to the high-water mark of the 
subjects in their moral tendencies. A person will be no worse under 
such suggestions than before, or when in the state of natural wake¬ 
fulness ; and most of these cases where the outgrowth of an evil nature 
already active in the individuals. But money has been extorted from 
honest people in this way. 

Amateur hypnotists sometimes are unable to awaken their subjects 
after they have succeeded far enough to get them under control. The 
result has been the fright and nervous breakdown of some of them. 
Ordinarily a subject will wake up as from natural sleep, in three 
or more hours; and in some cases they do not wake for eighteen 
or twenty hours. If a subject is not awake, let the statement be 
made that he will wake up at a fixed time, and repeat this to some 
other person who is called in to hear it: “Mr. Smith is now asleep, 
but in just one minute he will be wide awake.” This always works, 
and is not necessary unless there is difficulty in arousing him in 
the usual way which is to say: “Wake up now. All right. You 
are all right. Now wake up.” Cool air blown on the eyeballs, or 
the use of a fan, or the snapping of the fingers in front of the eyes 
will generally serve to wake him up. 

In almost every case for medical treatment, the First Degree is 
sufficient, and does practically no harm. It is a gentle lethargy. 
The real danger is in establishing the susceptibility of the patient 
who may never before have been hypnotized. 

Foolish experiments are sometimes made for mere deviltry, as 
when two young men went into a cafe, and one of them who had 
some power in this direction suggested that he would mesmerize the 
barmaid. She consented as a means of play, not knowing that she 
was an unusually susceptible subject. After a few passes she fell 


132 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


into a profound slumber and then entered a trance state from which 
neither of the young men was able to extricate her. The police were 
sent for, the young woman was taken to a hospital and the smart 
operator was locked up. 

In another case a young man who had studied the art of hypno¬ 
tism went to stay in a country house where, among other guests, was 
a young lady of highly nervous temperament. To make a display 
of his recently acquired power, which he really had not tried before, 
he undertook to hypnotize this young woman. He employed the 
method known as fascination. In a short time she fell asleep. He 
aroused her only partly and never again was in her presence. Ever 
since she had frequently recurring fits of catalepsy, which are 
always begun by outbursts of screaming, in which she cries: “He 
is trying now! He is trying now!” She is under the impression 
that the young man is constantly exercising a power over her, though 
he is hundreds of miles away. Her nerves are so badly shattered that 
her family is alarmed for her. 

Professor Christison of Edinburgh one day hypnotized a woman, 
and when he awoke her he informed her that on the following day, 
at noon, he would repeat the operation from a distance. At that 
hour the professor was lecturing at the University, and had forgotten 
the matter. But the woman, expecting the operation, was so swayed 
by her belief that she actually fell at noon into a profound hypnotic 
sleep. This is in line with sleep caused by crystal-gazing, which is 
self-instituted, hut not self-suggested. 

Dr. A. T. Myers stated that the subjects that he had seen hypno¬ 
tized many scores of times for the English Society for Psychical 
Research, were none the worse for their experience. Liebault says 
that where any evil result has followed the treatment, it has been 
due to want of skill or judgment on the part of the operator. He 
was the most skilful in France, as many physicians are ready to 
testify, and it is due to that fact that he has seen no ill results. The 
English Society employed only the greatest experts when the same 
subjects were hypnotized many scores of times. That is one side 
of the case. What about the other side? A medical man who 
stood high in his profession was hypnotizing a woman who was 
suffering from bronchitis, accompanied by asthma and a weak and 
fatty heart. He tried to quiet her spasms by suggesting that she 
was breathing easier all the time, and was pleased to see how the 
patient responded in condition and how her breathing became more 


DANGERS OF, HYPNOTISM 


:133 


and more tranquil. He had not hypnotized many people, and looked 
upon the process as being unattended by risk of any kind, until the 
breathing, having become more and more feeble, suddenly stopped 
altogether, and the action of the heart became imperceptible. He 
thought she was about to die, but was relieved when the spasmodic 
breathing was again heard. Heidenhain refers to experiments of this 
kind as being extremely dangerous, and states that he nearly stopped 
the action of his brother’s heart by continued suggestion. 

There has been stated in a recent case that a physician who was 
to inherit a large and valuable estate in the event of his cousin’s 
death, was called upon to act as his physician, and that he employed 
hypnotism. The cousin died from heart failure, and the doctor 
has come into possession of the estate. It is acknowledged that 
hypnotism was used. Two attendant circumstances point to the 
improper use of the power; but, as there are no other heirs, there 
is no one willing to bring the case before the courts. The informa¬ 
tion has come through medical friends, and is believed; but, whether 
true or not, it serves the purpose of warning the public to guard 
closely the use of such an influence. 

Dr. M. J. Kolan relates in an issue of the Journal of Mental Science 
a case of stuperose insanity which he says was due to the ignorant 
employment of hypnotism. The patient was a man who had been 
hypnotized by a traveling showman. 

Dr. Van Eeden recites a case of hystero-epilepsy which was brought 
on in the same way.—Dr. Charcot reports the case of a woman who 
was hypnotized at a fair, and who became aphasic for several months, 
and suffered in health in other ways.—Dr. Tourette read a paper 
dealing with this subject before the Paris Society of Legal Medi¬ 
cine, in which he referred to the case of a woman who had been 
thrown into hysteria in the same way; and also stated that the 
towns of France through which hypnotizers had traveled and mes¬ 
merized the people had been followed by a serious epidemic of hys¬ 
teria and other nervous troubles. Public performances are now for¬ 
bidden by law in Paris, and in other municipalities of France; also 
in several of the countries of Europe. 

Sir Francis E. Cruise, M. D. mentions a case in which, as he says, 
‘‘an attack of brain fever followed the induction of hypnosis by an 
ignorant and irresponsible operator,” and deduces from this and 
other cases to which he calls attention that "it is highly improper 
and possibly dangerous for any one who is not an educated physician. 


134 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


and familiar with the practice, to attempt hypnotism, and that it 
should never be induced without due reason and precaution/ 5 

Dr. Dejerine says that he is convinced that the continual making 
of injurious and absurd suggestions is fraught with evil conse¬ 
quences to the subject, and especially so if the hallucinations are 
allowed to persist for a considerable length of time. He says that 
after a while the operator himself may not be able to remove the 
morbid ideas which he has instilled in the minds of his subjects. 

Dr. Jules Solow in the New York Medical Journal reports a case 
where an amateur hypnotist put a friend to sleep by making him 
look fixedly at a diamond ring. The subject had severe convulsions 
and lost the power of speech. Subsequently, whenever he looked at 
any bright object he became violently excited. The British Medical 
Journal says: “It ought to be understood that hypnotism, recklessly 
played with, is capable of doing very serious mischief, and it is the 
duty of the medical profession to warn the public of the serious risks 
which are being run/ 5 

Several Italian observers have recorded cases of grave mental 
troubles following the abuse of hypnotism by inexperienced operators. 
Diegerio describes a case where the subject, a young woman, after 
being experimented on by Donato, became affected with spontaneous 
somnambulism accompanied by impulsive tendencies to strike and 
destroy. 

The practice of hypnotism is accompanied by pitfalls which only 
the operator with a medical training can avoid. Some persons, 
especially some young women, are so susceptible that one has only 
to get their consent and to bid them to go to sleep to induce a con¬ 
dition of profound somnambulism. They are the subjects of un¬ 
stable mental equilibrium who are most liable to danger from the 
abuse of hypnotism, and they should be especially protected. A 
physician says: “Those who a few years ago witnessed the public 
performances in London must remember how fatigued and languid, 
or excited and hysterical, were many of the subjects who had been 
hypnotized/ 5 

It is in evidence that when the same persons have been many 
times hypnotized there arises the craving for its repetition, just as 
one craves a drug or sedative after having had it several times. 
It is well known that women go to the hospitals and places where 
they are accustomed to this treatment, and seek it even when not in 
need of it. 


DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM 


135 


A physician of New York, speaking recently of this trait in hyp¬ 
notic subjects, says that it is not confined to women alone, but that 
men are desirous of renewing their relations with the operator, as 
the sleep is sure to quiet their nerves when overstrung. But the 
real reason is they learn to like it and soon crave it. He said of 
certain ladies in the social set that they came regularly to him in 
his office at appointed times, and asked to be put into a lethargy so 
that they might throw off a heavy feeling of nervous weariness; 
they were all tired out, but the more weary they became the harder 
it was for them to go to sleep naturally. It was their custom to 
fall into an induced slumber in an easy chair in a private office. 
The same statement, similar at least in import, has been made by 
several English physicians of ladies of rank who could not get along 
without the lethargy that is induced through hypnotism. They were 
not able to put themselves into sleep, even by crystal-gazing; and 
those who might have done so, feared the results of self-induced 
hypnotism. 

One doctor in a western city of the United States says that he 
has twenty-seven women on his list, all wealthy, who form a steady 
clientele for hypnotic treatment, but whose chief motive undoubtedly 
is to be put into the lethargy, as they are the better for it. On 
being told that he could cure them of this habit by hypnotic sug¬ 
gestion in which they must be informed that they will, on waking 
up, hate the treatment and not come again for it, he replied that in 
such case they might be cutting themselves off from some future 
advantage when they in fact would need the treatment. But he 
spoke of one woman who was too nervous for his services, and he 
made such suggestions which, after three sittings, she fully adopted 
and was cured completely of the hypnotic craving. There are several 
reports of the same results in other places and it is a well-known 
fact that such suggestions are always acted upon and executed when 
so given. 

At one time France was given over to the use of traveling show¬ 
men who made their living by hypnotic entertainments. The law 
stepped in too late in many cases; but this kind of amusement 
has seen its last days there. As has been stated before, the laws 
of other countries have put a stop to this abuse. In London, where 
there are hundreds of men and women who have been used as 
subjects for such shows in the past, there was a recent canvassing 
of them under the advice of a physician who desired to know what 


130 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


were their mental, nervous and physical conditions; and the results 
justify the assertion that this power should not be used for such 
purposes. There is hardly a woman who is not in bad nervous 
condition; and the men are harassed by a constant irritability, low 
nervous vitality and poor blood. Many of them have haggard faces 
and hollow eyes. Of course they may have been inclined to these 
conditions before they became hypnotic subjects. 

We personally know of several young men, exceptions as a rule, who 
were in good health in all respects before they entered this field of 
novel amusement as subjects; all of whom joined the haggard class 
in the wake of their experiences. One of them, the son of a very 
rich man, has lost his mind as a consequence. 

It is well to keep attention on the main facts, and these will be 
summed up here: 

1. It is not the deep somnambulistic sleep that does the harm, 
for that is the Sixth Degree. Of all the cases that we can get in¬ 
formation about, not one of the Sixth Degree has resulted in any 
way harmful if under the control of an expert. 

2. It is not the First Degree that does the harm, as that is only 
a light lethargy. The danger is chiefly in the fact that it is a first 
step that may lead to the same influence being increased by other 
manipulators for ill ends. The best physicians try to keep their 
patients in this First Degree except in rare instances. 

3. It is the mixed degrees between the First and the Sixth where 
the harm is done. At the Fourth the subject is used by showmen for 
the amusement of the audience, and some are used before that degree 
is reached. In the Fifth Degree the sleep is very profound, but it 
is a dreamy state, although very vague and indistinct. 

4. All the mixed degrees are to be avoided unless there is a 
necessity for them, as where the health or the habits require such 
treatment. The First Degree, being the beginning of a wrong direc¬ 
tion that is harmless in itself, it is to be avoided unless for medical 
or moral purposes. 

5. Where children are vicious and cannot be corrected in any 
other way, then hypnotic suggestion is permissible, provided the 
same results are not obtainable in natural sleep suggestions. The 
latter require the presence at night in the house of the operator 
who ought to be the parent; but so few parents are magnetic that 
suggestion would not have effect, and for this reason the doctor is 
consulted. Ordinary badness in children, the kind that is sup- 


DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM 


137 


posed to wear itself out as age and discretion are gained, should 
never be the cause of hypnotic experiments; but natural sleep sug¬ 
gestions are good at all time if done properly and with right motives. 
A boy of ten years to whom arithmetic is almost an unknown quan¬ 
tity, has recently been brought to understand it and to take the 
place at the head of his class by natural sleep suggestions made 
by his mother, who has been a recent student of magnetism. An¬ 
other woman says: “I shape each day in advance the work and 
the character of my two children by having a heart to heart talk 
with them each evening just as they are falling asleep. They 
go into slumberland hearing my voice. The effect on their lives is 
wonderful. They are healthier and nobler for it.”—This kind of 
influence is not only safe and grand, but it even schools the young 
lives against all evil tendencies, and makes them proof from tempta¬ 
tion. Do you know that mothers have been exerting such a wholesome 
influence for thousands of years? They may not have become ac¬ 
quainted with the physiological law and the psychic power of evening 
talks with their little ones; but to catch them as they are entering 
slumberland is the secret, and, while mothers do not know why, 
some of them know how they have shaped the lives of their children 
for becoming great and good men and women. We believe that the 
whole history of mankind could be changed by this one method, 
begun at any age with the boys and girls, even when they are a year 
or two years, or at any time after that, and continued as long as 
mothers and fathers have access to the bedrooms of their children. 
In that period of special temptation, in the years between thirteen 
and eighteen, then a tremendous amount of practical good may be 
accomplished. The conclusion is therefore made that natural sleep 
suggestions are. always wholesome, and are a step in the right 
direction. 

6. Suggestions made in the First Degree, which is lethargy, are 
adopted afterwards if they coincide with the easy drift of the desires 
of the patient. They could not lead to absolute obedience as in 
the high degree of hypnotism, but there is a finely strung network 
or influence that hangs over the individual for some time afterwards. 
All hypnotism ought to be confined to that degree. 

7. Inasmuch as the First Degree is one of full consciousness, and 
as it is also a well proved fact that continual suggestion pressed 
home with magnetism behind it is sure to batter down all opposi¬ 
tion, this stage of mildly active hypnotism is most dangerous when 


138 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


many persons have acquired tlie art, as they are now doing all 
over the world. We know of lawyers who study both magnetism and 
hypnotism for the remarkable powers they have acquired in using the 
two agencies; and yet they have never yet attempted to put anyone 
into an unconscious hypnotic sleep. “It would not do,” is the 
reason assigned by one of them.—The safety from suspicion rests 
in the fact that the First Degree does not interfere with the con¬ 
sciousness of the individual. He is willing to swear that he was 
not under hypnotic control. No man or woman believes that any 
hypnotism has been used when the stage does not proceed beyond 
the lethargy. This makes it safe for those who use it and danger¬ 
ous for those on whom it is used. In his experiments to test these 
powers a certain man studied and practiced several professions at 
one time; and tried jury cases. In a case before a high court with a 
jury of twelve average men, he succeeded in bringing every one of 
the twelve men into the First Degree, and would have had two 
of them more deeply hypnotized had he not made special efforts 
to avoid that result. In another case in a court miles away, he 
again had twelve men in the First Degree, and proved the fact after 
the adjournment of the term, when he met all twelve men with two 
experts in medical treatment, at a social dinner held to celebrate 
their acquaintance which had begun only a few weeks before. Trav¬ 
eling to the West he tried scores of cases with a victory in each one, 
as in the East, and had some wild and uncouth jurymen to address 
in one of the courts where he appeared. He was also a prosecutor 
and succeeded in convicting liquor dealers in a county where the 
sentiment was in favor of selling alcoholic drinks, and it was the 
first conviction of the kind ever obtained there. 

We have seen juries that were in the state of lethargy from the 
power of lawyers who were both magnetic and hypnotic experts. 
In the progress of a trial lasting one or more days, it is not to be 
wondered at that this influence is successfully wielded, and decisions 
are won unjustly. Those of our students who wish to study this 
phase of the danger from this art, should spend a whole term at 
some great court where a variety of cases will be tried; not one or 
two very long ones; but a number of average length. The mag¬ 
netic lawyer will sooner or later be found, and you will not mistake 
who he is. Some courts have a number of magnetic attorneys who 
try cases. But magnetism in the open and in the fair trial depends 
more on the force of great ideas and proved facts than on the 


DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM 


139 


hallucinations of theory and argument that the hypnotic-magnetic 
lawyers make use of. Rufus Choate was one of the latter. So was 
Patrick Henry, except that he was nine-tenths magnetic and one- 
tenth hypnotic. 

The danger of miscarriage of justice may be averted by the power 
of judges to set aside the verdicts; but judges themselves should 
study how to protect themselves against the influence of lawyers in 
this line. In nearly all the cities, and in most towns, the petty 
magistrates who sit as judges in trials are easily made the prey 
of the magnetic-hypnotic lawyer; and they assert themselves over the 
fledglings whom they can impress with the due awe and dignity of 
the “bench.” 

Women come under the same double influence when wielded by 
men who please them, and by other women who command them. 
A nervous woman of any age, but generally between fourteen and 
twenty, will become the easy victim of men who have this double 
power. There have been cases where women have been fascinated 
by the man or his position or his money. What is called auto¬ 
suggestion, which is so common now-a-days, is only the lethargy that 
has been inspired by superior individuals in the use of this power. 
If a man makes a statement to such a person it may be received 
and acted upon, and the effect is attributed to auto-suggestion, or 
self-convincing; but in fact it is aroused and put in motion by the 
superior influence. There is ample authority for the historical view 
of Aaron Burr whicih makes him a man of such fascinating manner 
that women fell before him as he approached. He knew no failure in 
his ceaseless conquests over the sex. But he was brilliant, he was 
of fine ways, he had been elected to the office of Vice-president of 
the United States, and had been tied in the vote for President; 
and his fame preceded him in exaggerated measure wherever he went. 
No wonder then that women, awaiting his coming, should be dazed 
into lethargy when he showed them some special attention. It is 
not a mere joke, but a fact, that the uniform of a soldier placed on 
a rowdy whom no one would admit willingly into the kitchen, or back 
yard even, has turned the heads of servant girls. These are undue 
influences that prey on the will of a person. 

The fault is more in the weakness of people who are put into the 
lethargy, than in those who seek to sway them; and the cure is to 
fortify the miind against all such influences by the method to be 
taught in the next cycle. 


140 


TENTH CYCLE 


PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 



GAINST the fixed design 
And evil purpose planned 
To reap unworthy gain 
Or wrong advantage take 
There is a wall of steel 
That every mind may build. 


INCE this is an age of hypnotism, it is important that 
every person should learn how to avoid the hypnotic 
influences of others. It has been seen that the power 
may be exerted in several degrees, the first of which 
does not make itself manifest to those who are thus 
controlled. The sound of the voice of another person, aided by 
magnetic energy, often too subtle to be recognized, may induce 
sleep; and the juror or the church-goer who sits slumbering before 
the address of the speaker, may or may not be in one of the early 
stages of hypnotism. 

There are several methods by which this power may be warded 
off, and they will be described in the order of their importance. 
It will be noticed by one who has carefully studied the preceding 
cycles, that all these methods fall into the better habits of life; and 
they are thus worth cultivating for themselves alone. They make 
a man and a woman better in every way, inculcate character, build 
up a good presence, and give many advantages. It is also to be noted 
that these methods are such as will materially aid the person who 
seeks to become a successful and expert operator either in magnetism 
or hypnotism. 

PHYSICAL DEFENSES. 

The body itself is a help to the operator. 

In the methods of inducing sleep as set forth in the preceding 
cycles, advantage was taken of the lack of poise in the subject. Here 
is a good general rule: 








PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 


141 


When the body is so nearly out of poise that the least tendency 
to become drowsy, no matter how slight, will throw it forward or 
back, then the belief is quickly captured, or the loss of support is 
gained, which are the starting points with hypnotists. 

In the Psychic in the Eighth Cycle, the subject is placed so that 
the “boundary” will be lost either forward or backward. If the 
former, then the weight is on the front of the feet; if the latter, then 
the weight is on the heels. When the weight is far forward, the 
attempt to raise the arms will cause a loss of balance and it will be 
necessary for the operator to catch the falling subject. When the 
weight is on the heels and the arms are raised to the mantel, and 
lowered, the weight is sure to be carried back of the base of support 
and the operator will be obliged to catch the falling subject. 

In verbal suggestion and other methods, the subject lies down 
on a lounge or reclines; both positions being favorable to sleep, and 
a sleepy condition is all that is sought. 

It would naturally follow that the opposite of these positions is 
necessary to defend against the hypnotic power; and this is always 
true. The firmer one stands, and the better poise is maintained both 
in standing and sitting, the less influence can be exerted over the 
individual. It has been truly said that no person has received either 
self-suggestion, auto-suggestion, or the induction of sleep through 
crystal-gazing, or in any other way, when the poise is maintained. 
The mind is alert with the body. 

A well-known and very successful jury lawyer says that he watches 
every move made by each juror at all times when he is speaking to 
them; and if one falls backward to rest, it indicates either lethargy, 
as in the First Degree of hypnotism, or else natural sleep from 
being tired. He seeks to prevent the latter condition. “But,” says 
he, “when a juror leans the least forward, he is mine. From that 
moment he is favorable to my cause and never deserts it.” 

This may be taken as a very safe rule, unless the man is deaf. A 
full bench, listening to the arguments on legal points in a case on 
appeal, all leaned forward when a great lawyer was arguing. But 
one was a trifle hard of hearing. The others were all won over by 
the presentation of the case. The other judge was opposed. The 
rule seems therefore to be that, when a listener leans forward, not to 
get better advantage in hearing, but because of interest, victory is at 
hand. It is not even the First Degree of hypnotism, but it is a lean¬ 
ing in that direction. 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


143 

You will never hypnotize a man or woman who does not lean out of 
poise. 

The muscles of the mouth are also indicators of the creeping 
on of the influence. When left to themselves, these muscles begin to 
relax if there is hypnotic slumber or drowsiness at hand. Of course 
they can be made to shut tightly and remain so. But they fall 
slightly apart under the approach of drowsiness. This you have 
noticed in natural sleep; and all kinds are founded on the same phys¬ 
ical traits. No person goes to sleep with the teeth shut tightly to¬ 
gether. There are degrees of relaxation in the mouth muscles: 

1. The teeth separate a little, but the lips remain together. 

3. The teeth separate, but the lips are almost together; the mouth 
inside being wider open than at the outside. This is a sure sign of 
the creeping on of drowsiness. 

3. The teeth and lips open about the same space together. There 
is greater drowsiness. 

4. The whole mouth opens quite wide. 

5. The lower jaw drops, through sheer relaxation. This is only 
a degree beyond the last. 

In seeking to produce the state of hypnotic lethargy, which is the 
slightest of all, the separation of the teeth is the sign of success. 
This may be discerned by studying the muscles of the face. The 
fact that the lips still touch each other is evidence of the struggle 
on the part of the subject to keep out of reach of the approaching 
drowsiness. 

The third indication of the coming on of such influence is in the 
fact that the vital organs lose their tenseness. The contents of the 
chest are held with power in an upward position when the individual 
is highly vitalized; and one who is highly vitalized can never be 
hypnotized. 

Before trying to understand what is meant here, take a standing 
position and note the placement of the contents of the chest as 
shown by the shape of the body. Then acquire the following grada¬ 
tions of change: 

1. Keep the mind on the contents of the chest and raise them 
with the chest frame without raising the shoulders. The latter 
should never be elevated. 

3. Now note that, if properly done, the raising of the chest and its 
contents will cause the abdomen to come inward and thus remove its 
bulging attitude. 


PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 


143 


3. Slightly lower the chest and contents. 

4. Lower them still more, bnt not quite down. 

5. Lower them still more, but not quite down. 

6. Let them drop as low as they will, and note the fact that the 
abdomen is bulging forward, dumpy and squatty in shape. 

The first position is that which is employed by magnetic and highly 
vitalized persons; the last by those who are easy subjects to hypno¬ 
tism. In fact, a raised and well-shaped chest, with vital organs 
held up tensed, is a complete barrier to hypnotic sleep, and we chal¬ 
lenge any operator to carry on his degrees while this state is main¬ 
tained. He cannot even produce lethargy, which is the starting 
point. 

We sum up the Physical Defense as follows: 

a. Maintain poise. 

I. Keep the jaws firmly together. 

c. Carry the vital organs and the chest high, with the shoulders 
low, or solidly down. 

The latter position brings the vital organs together in the firmest 
possible condition, and makes that part of the body compact, which 
is not the state when one is subject to the influence of hypnotism. 

Languid habits make the mind drowsy. 

Poise must at all times seek to escape the leaning or reclining 
positions in the presence of other persons. 

Do not lie down. 

Do not lean back in an easy chair. 

Do not sit or stand so that the body may sway sideways, or for¬ 
ward, or backward. 

Poise is perfect when the center of the head is directly over the 
center of the neck; when the center of the neck is directly over the 
center of the chest; when the center of the chest is directly over 
the center of the waist; and when the center of the waist is directly 
over the middle of the foot that sustains the weight, which should 
not be placed on both feet. Practice will enable you to recognize 
these several centers of the body. Try them frequently. 

Do not be in a hurry. 

The above rules apply only to those who wish to be on the defen¬ 
sive; others may break them if they so desire. But the true woman 
or man of good bearing, good presence, and fine culture will not break 
them very frequently. A smoothness and naturalness will soon fol¬ 
low their adoption, so that they become an easy habit. 


144 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


NERVOUS DEFENSES. 

Having presented the Physical Defenses, we will not describe 
those that relate to the condition of the nervous system. A languid, 
nervous person is very easily hypnotized. A smart, bright, active 
and well-poised nervous person is the hardest of all subjects to hyp¬ 
notize. Both may be emotional; and this accounts for the fact 
that some experts claim that emotional people do not readily suc¬ 
cumb, while others find them the most susceptible of all classes. It 
depends on the physical conditions that accompany the nervous state. 

The successful men and women of this world are those who are 
high strung nervously and yet cool and calm under great stress and 
excitement. In order to acquire the best nervous defense, it is neces¬ 
sary to study the effect of excitement on the nerves. Do you jump 
at sounds you hear? If so, you will be classed with the weak. 

Do you turn pale under disappointment ? 

Do you tremble when frightened, and what degree of power does 
any alarm have over you? 

When you are pleased, do you show it excessively? 

When you are sad, do you become gloomy ? 

Do you laugh immoderately, and weep on slight provocation? 

When you laugh or call, does your voice run high in pitch? 

Are you afraid to be alone in the dark? 

Are you afraid to remain alone in a house at night even with the 
lights turned on? 

Does bad news depress you very easily? 

Are you demonstrative? 

Are you afraid of a mouse, snake, or spider except when in actual 
danger from them? Would the sight of such things tend to lower 
your vitality or alarm you? 

If you were to hear the cry of fire in a crowded theater or hall, 
would you try to run out on mere impulse? Would you be able to 
hold your judgment above your fright, and prevent a stampede by 
seeking to allay others who might lose their heads at the same 
time? 

If some person had done a terrible wrong, and you were vexed 
by the outrage committed by the courts in delays over technical 
points, would you nevertheless be able to resist the influence of the 
mobs, and instead of helping to take the law in your own hands, 
would you allow it to take its course? 


PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 


145 


If a criminal were caught red-handed and yon knew that he de¬ 
served summary justice, instead of being held in custody at the 
expense of the public, would you nevertheless be able to restrain 
your feelings and let law and order prevail ? 

If a demagogue were to make a speech or otherwise seek to set 
your prejudices afire by exciting tales of wrongs, appealing to your 
most sacred impulses, such as love of home and of ties of blood, 
could you calmly subdue any emotions of hatred that he had aroused ? 

Are you proof against the passions of prejudice of all kinds, or 
does it make your blood boil to hear of certain things that you know 
are not right? 

Are your appetites and cravings stronger than your will power? 
Or are you one who thinks that temptations may be held in check 
at any time, only you do not wish to so hold them ? 

What is the strongest habit you have that is injurious to you 
either physically or morally? And what power have you recently 
exercised over that habit? 

When night comes and you have nothing special to do, are you 
bored by the dullness of things, and do you fret or squirm under the 
difficulty of keeping yourself busy or entertained? And do you 
wander out to find some companions to amuse you or in whose 
society you can find more attractions than at home? Or have you 
the inherent power to spend the evening usefully either by yourself 
or with your family ? 

These are some of the questions that will determine to what ex¬ 
tent you are swayed by restless nerves. Weariness, fatigue, in¬ 
ability to adapt yourself to the calmer conditions of life, all indicate 
the emotional person, and that is the one who is the first subject of 
the hypnotic power. 

We have known of men and women who have actually had the 
ability to throw off all these weaknesses, and to fight down the types 
of emotional nervousness. They have trained themselves to remain 
calm under great stress. They have sought the things that will 
alarm and excite them, and have remained unperturbed by them. 

Little things show the emotional nature. A business man who 
had made a fortune by his shrewdness, fell in a faint at the sight 
of the blood caused by the vaccination of his arm. We were with 
him at the time, and we declared that this keen man who seemed so 
much stronger than most of his fellow beings, was a natural subject 
of hypnotism. And so he was, as he fell into a deep sleep on the 


146 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


first trial. We afterwards learned at his home that he had been 
very emotional for years. 

If you belong to such class, the first thing to do is to practice 
the physical defenses of this cycle, in connection with a thorough 
study of magnetism, both physical and ethereal. 

The next thing is to he constantly exposing yourself to excite¬ 
ment and disturbing causes, and to remain calm and cool-headed all 
through them. But some of the fault is in your proneness to give 
way to your temper or your irritability. 

All emotional persons have two traits that are very pronounced: 

a. Temper. 

b. Irritability. 

Temper is getting mad when somleone is around, or else flying 
into a rage under great or slight provocation when you are alone. 

Irritability is giving way to small causes. Are you irritable? 

When you try to dress in the morning and some slight thing goes 
wrong, do you use language or throw things ? 

If you are a man, and in a hurry to get dressed, and every minute 
is valuable, what do you say or do when your collar button, a small 
affair, jumps out of your fingers, drops to the floor, rolls under the 
small place beneath a piece of heavy furniture and cannot be got 
under control again until you move the furniture, get down on your 
knees on the hard floor or rough carpet and feel for it while the 
blood rushes to your head? 

What do you say when something is missing from an important 
garment which you have just put on; possibly an undershirt that was 
tight while you were moist with perspiration, and which would not 
go on until you had used more force than persuasion; but which, 
after being on, was found to be useless for lack of buttons ? 

If you have an invitation to a wedding where your presence is 
to give others as well as yourself some satisfaction, and for which 
you have planned for some time, what do you say when, with not a 
minute to waste, you find that your bosom shirts have not come 
in from the wash and that you have none to wear ? 

When you are dressing in the morning, and some little thing is 
lacking, or something buttons hard or there is a hitch in this, that 
or the other matter, you generality talk aloud about it, and sometimes 
have been known to throw things about in a spell of irritability. 
Do you know that such habits grow on you and make you weak in 
nerves. 


PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 


147 


The cure for this evil, called irritability, is to study it, to be able 
to recognize it at all times, never to give way to it, and at length to 
be able to invite the very causes that have held you in slavery for 
years. Let things happen wrong. Let every bad influence that 
ordinarily has wrought you up to a mean state of temper, come 
freely, and then snap your fingers at it. 

The way to conquer temper and irritability is to face them often 
and to smile calmly at them. Be tempted. Be tested. Conquer. 


MENTAL DEFENSES. 

People who are to become easy prey to the hypnotist are those 
who are quick to believe. It is to capture belief that the operator 
will put his subject in a position from which he will soon lose his 
balance and therefore be assured that there is a real power at work 
over him. It is by some kind of trickery that smart minds are 
caught. Then they believe in the influence and are mastered. 

One operator, a doctor who had been successful in many cases, 
had a slight trembling of his hand when a business man came to him; 
and the latter, although desirous of being hypnotized, was not 
carried even into lethargy. The slight tremble of the hand in mak¬ 
ing the passes caught his attention, and the subject said, “You have 
no power to put me to sleep. I will go to another. You may be 
successful with others but I am not susceptible to you.” All this 
was a mistake. The doctor made another appointment, and, after 
a long trial, conquered this doubting patient. 

The disbelief had been overcome, but it took a struggle. The 
physician, in relating this experience, said that he made up his 
mind that he would convince the man, and he showed considerable 
resentment at the suggestion that, because his hand was not steady, 
he had no power over him. His earnestness served to reclaim the 
belief. 

But there must be belief on the part of all new patients, except 
the few that are controlled against their wills. The refusal to be¬ 
lieve must be overcome. Many are frightened into hypnotism be¬ 
cause they believe the operator can control them, and they are afraid 
he will in fact put them to sleep without their consent. This 
belief is sometimes captured by seeing others controlled before 
hand. 



148 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


It may be willing, or may be forced, or may be the result of 
fear after evidence. 

Belief does the whole work sometimes. 

An expert said to a woman, “To-morrow evening at seven o’clock 
I will hypnotize you.” He forgot all about it, but the woman could 
not think of anything else; and, when the time arrived, she fell into 
the hypnotic sleep and so remained until it passed off naturally. Her 
belief did all the work. There are thousands of known cases where 
some form of belief has led to what is called auto-suggestion, one 
of the most common experiences in human life. 

Belief is a habit. 

It is also a temperament. It can be cultivated at will, reduced 
at will, or wholly overcome. A business man who had inherited 
wealth and who had lost much of it by placing too much con¬ 
fidence in his fellow beings, adopted at length the motto: “Never 
regard any person as honest until he has been proved honest.” This 
rule reversed his fortune, and after that he made money instead of 
losing it. 

Do not believe anything you hear in gossip or in possibly biased 
statements. 

Do not believe anything you read in papers or in any channel of 
gossip, news or biased literature. 

These are the two precepts that will train your mind against its 
faulty habit. They seem on their face to be harsh rules; but they 
are relative only. Start with non-belief. Before you accept any 
statement, put your mind through the process of examination; and, 
when you find something that you are ready to accept, then act; 
but let every process of your thinking start with unbelief and the 
exercise of judgment. You see that it is necessary, in order to 
become of the judicial temperament, to start by refusing to believe 
anything you hear or read. 

These rules are exemplified by judges of courts before whom 
many great cases, civil and criminal, come to be tried. The judges 
have of course read all about them; but, if the trials are jury waived, 
then they must be heard and decided by the judges alone. What 
would you think of a judge who, in reply to a query, said that he 
believed one side or the other was in the right, that he had read the 
papers and had believed what he read? He certainly would be both 
biased and unfit for the work of deciding the case on its merits as 
developed in the trial itself, rather than in the papers or by gossip. 


PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 


149 


Men who are drawn to sit as jurors have for the most part read 
all about the case in the papers and have discussed its merits. If 
they have expressed or formed an opinion, they are not allowed to 
sit in the trial, for justice demands that only the sworn testimony 
of honest witnesses shall govern the decision. There are always a 
few men who have heard, talked and read about the case, but who 
have never come to a conclusion which side was in the right; and 
they, if honest, are qualified to sit in judgment. They have not be¬ 
lieved what they have read. A well-known judge says that he 
never makes up his mind from what he hears or what he reads in 
papers, as they are the two sources of gossip. 

What you need is a judicial mind, and this is the mind that is 
open to proof, to judgment, to decision after hearing both sides, 
and that is free to come to a conclusion by its own processes. This 
is the kind of mind that will make you a very good judge of court. 

There are clever and great geniuses sitting as judges to-day; some, 
not all of them. The hypnotized judge is the one who will allow 
lawyers to drag out a trial, and who sees technicalities on every 
hand. The genius is able to make a case move fast and to strip it 
of its technicalities. 

One of the greatest geniuses on the bench to-day, in a trial where 
a patent medicine advertisement was introduced, said: “ Here are 

claims set forth in this advertisement that some people believe. It 
seems to me that the mind must be warped to credit any part of 
such claims. But there is no accounting for the credulity of hu¬ 
manity .” This is true; there is no accounting for the credulity of 
humanity. 

A professor of the highest attainment in one of the greatest uni¬ 
versities in this country, recently said to his class: “Young gentle¬ 
men, you read the papers. But do you believe them? Some news 
articles are, on the face, believable, and notably those where the 
papers have no opportunity for making them readable, by which 
I mean entertaining. It is an excellent rule to adopt, to sit in 
judgment on everything you see in the papers, and on all you hear. 
Come to such matter with an open mind, and yet made up, and so 
leave it. You will be better for it, and your minds will not have 
trailed in the dirt of sensation and gossip.” 

This was another way of saying, do not believe what you hear and 
read until you have tried the statements, heard both sides, and come 
to a verdict one way or the other. 


150 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


The short of it is, do not carry around with you the belief habit. 

Simply learn not to believe anything you read, unless you can pass 
judgment on it after hearing both sides. 

Acquire the judicial mind and temperament. It will become a fixed 
habit in time if you adopt it daily. 

All sorts of statements are made to you every day, many intended 
to warp your mind, appeal to your prejudices, and lead you at the 
will of the speaker or writer. As it is rarely ever necessary to 
believe what is said against another person, either in the papers or 
by gossip, it is the best of all rules, NEVER TO BELIEVE ANY 
PAPER OR PERSON THAT SPEAKS ILL OF ANOTHER. 

As all papers make their living in part by speaking ill of others, 
especially public men who are untried by courts, and as almost 
every human being gets his or her chief means of delight by speak¬ 
ing ill of somebody, you see that you now have here the greatest 
test of your power to not believe; but to cultivate a judicial mind. 

When you wish to steel your mind against the influence of an¬ 
other person, say: “I do not believe you.” 

When any person claims to be able to hypnotize you say: “l 
do not believe you.” 

Acquire the “do not believe” habit. 

Speak your disbelief mentally, not openly. Say it only to yourself. 

When a person is to be made a subject of control for the first 
time, something is done to make him believe in the power. He is 
also told to relax his body as much as possible. If he remains un¬ 
relaxed, and it is worth while, then steps are taken to have him 
learn how to relax. At the same time he is made to relax his mind, 
or empty it, at the suggestion of the operator. The two processes 
go together. This emptying of the mind is called abstraction by 
some, and concentration by others. If you think of only one thing 
at a time, you empty your mind of everything else at the same time. 
This is nearly the whole victory. 

In believing what you hear or read in the papers, you concentrate 
your mind on the one-sided statement that is made there; and this is 
belief. To accept the truth of one thing, is to close out the mind. 
For this reason the hypnotist seeks to have you think either of nothing 
or of the fact that he is to control you. If he can make you think 
of nothing, it will open the way to believe in him. The reason, 
therefore, why you should empty your mind is to get it in condi- 



PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 


151 


tion to the more readily believe in his power or his suggestions. 
The latter comes from the realm of the Other Mind, and the only 
purpose is to side-track the conscious mind for the purpose. 

There are several ways in which you can be induced to empty 
your mind, and these will be made the basis of another very im¬ 
portant cycle. Abstraction is not only a habit, but a power, and 
can be assumed at will; for it is only during the few seconds or 
moments of abstraction of mind that telepathy can enter. This 
is a whole science and art in itself. 

But when you fear the influence of another person, never allow 
your mind to become abstracted unless you have it under rein 
and are sure of that fact. And never allow any part of your body 
to become devitalized, except for the definite motive of making 
practical use of that condition. 

AVOID FADS AND CULTS. 

This is an age of hypnotism, and it is also an age of fads and 
cults. Show us a man or woman who can be led outside the usual 
normal beliefs, and we will show you the most ready subject for 
the power of the hypnotist. It cannot be doubted that fads and cults 
collect together people from all classes, from the richest to the 
poorest, and include some persons of high intellectual standing, 
although the latter are extremely rare in proportion to the greater 
numbers that are of the opposite class. William McKinley, Presi¬ 
dent of the United States, was a man of the highest intellectual 
endowments and great powers in every department of his being; 
yet he was normal in his religious habits, and stands as a type of 
the best in everything. A fad or a cult would not have claimed 
him. He was normal in all his beliefs. 

The fact that fads and cults draw in a few rich men with the 
general rabble is due to the agency of hypnotism. We recently saw 
one thousand followers of a religious cult in a hall. Their faces 
and eyes were conclusive proof of the reason why they were in that 
following. Every one of them could have been hypnotized in a short 
time. There was not one in the collection who would have been 
able to resist the power. That cult sweeps through city and town 
and will keep on adding numbers until every person who is an easy 
subject to hypnotic suggestion is drawn into the belief. 

The same has been true of all the abnormal uprisings. 

There are so many susceptible men and women at large in every 
community, and they are destined to join the fads and cults. In- 


152 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


asmuch as this is an age of increasing hypnotism, it is more than 
likely that there will he greater additions to all the fixed fads and 
cults, and the coming into existence of other isms, nntil the end 
is reached. There will not be an end nntil people are trained to 
resist beliefs, and to join the “I DON’T BELIEVE” class. 

In the waiting rooms and large consulting rooms of institutions 
devoted to the practice of hypnotism for curative purposes, the 
newcomers are made to sit where they can see others being hypno¬ 
tized, and this so convinces them that they, too, are ready to fall into 
the same influence on the mere suggestion. It is in exactly this 
same way that followers are added to cults. They are shown what 
the power is over others. They see what they are told are proofs. 
There is no fad or cult that cannot effect cures in some cases; and 
remarkable cures in a few; but they must be of the class of cases 
that can be cured by hypnotism as has been shown in the earlier 
cycles of this book. What hypnotism cannot cure, cannot be cured 
by any form of faith, mental healing, science or other thing. 

The whole matter is locked up in that one statement. 

There are men who will pay a million dollars for any case that 
can be given quicker relief, better relief, or more permanent cure 
by any faith, science, mental healing, or other thing, than can be 
got through hypnotism. No matter under what name it is done, it 
is always accomplished through hypnotic suggestion and hypnotic 
belief. There is no other way. 

Think it over. Study cases and human nature. Analyze every 
thing that comes before your mind in this line of investigation; 
and you will see where the truth is, and you will agree that there 
is in this world a power to do great things, but it is lodged in hyp¬ 
notism, from the non-conscious stage to the deepest form of control. 
While it is true that every person who follows a fad or a cult, can 
foe hypnotized, it is not always true that every person who can be 
hypnotized becomes a follower of a fad or a cult. 

Be normal. 

Do not allow yourself to be drawn out of the direct line of truth 
and right. 

NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTIONS. 

These have been taught in the Eourth Cycle. They are useful now 
under the present theme in two ways: 

1. If you are not yet a subject, but feel inclined toward the power 
of another person. 


PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 


153 


2. If you are already a subject and wish to be relieved of the in¬ 
fluence that is being exerted toward you. 

The following practice has never failed to bring sure, speedy and 
permanent relief. 

Secure the friendship of some person who is magnetic, in case 
you do not possess the power of magnetism yourself. 

Arrange for that person, always one of the same sex, to be with 
you at night when you are falling asleep. Arrange also to arise two 
hours earlier in the day than that person; as you should be at least 
two hours sleepier than your helper. 

When you have taken these precautions, then go to bed for the 
night and fall asleep. Your helper is to make any of the following 
suggestions, and repeat them for one or two hours, with the in¬ 
tensity of a low, but monotonous, voice; assuming that you have not 
yet been hypnotized: 

“You will awake to-morrow and be stronger than any person 
who seeks to hypnotize you.” 

“When you awake to-m,orrow you will not be under the in¬ 
fluence of any person.” 

“You will awake to-morrow and know that no person is able 
to exert any influence over you.” 

“You will awake to-morrow full of life and power and strength.” 

These and kindred suggestions will so change the mental make-up 
that you will marvel at it. The same trial should be made for 
several nights, as the process is not by any means as fast as under 
direct hypnotic control. But it is sure and will repay all the trouble 
it causes. 

If you have already been hypnotized, and wish to be made proof 
against further control by the same person or others, then an ap¬ 
peal must be made to the Other Wind as in the case just cited. It 
is always an appeal to the Other Mind. The same arrangements 
for night suggestions are to be made, but the suggestions them¬ 
selves are to change in their wording, and should be somewhat as 
follows: 

“You have been under hypnotic control of Mr. -■, but when 

you meet him again you will find that he has no further power 
over you.” 

“You will m'eet Mr. -and will be able to resist his efforts to 

put you to sleep.” 




154 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


“When you wake up to-morrow and every day, you will be stronger 
than any other person who seeks to put you to sleep.” 

“Mr.-has no longer any power over you. This you will know 

when you wake up to-morrow and every day as long as you live.” 

In the case of one who has been under the influence of another 
and who wishes to be relieved by hypnotic suggestion, as has been 
done many times by all the experts, the process is to be put to sleep 
by any physician in whom you have confidence, and let him sug¬ 
gest to you that when you wake up you will never he hypnotized 
again by that person, naming him. It is not an uncommon practice 
for one hypnotist to make his subject proof against the power of any 
other operator, no matter how skillful the latter. Some claim is made 
that a hypnotist can make his own patient immune against himself, 
and there have been published accounts to this effect; but we do not 
think the proof is complete yet. A doctor told us that he had done 
this twice with success. Others have written of the same thing. 
The future will decide the question better than it has been settled so 
far. 

All the foregoing defenses assume that you are not a student 
of magnetism. If you are such a student, you will have occasion only 
to employ self-suggestion as taught in the Fifth Cycle of this book. 
The statements are to he made as therein directed, but to refer 
always to the period of wakefulness on each coming day and every 
future day. A few repetitions for four or five nights will complete 
the practice in this line, and will be absolutely effective. 



155 


ELEVENTH CYCLE 



TETH HEN steeds run wild at will 
egffiBI Uncurbed from day to day 
They should be put to rest 
And taught the wholesome truth 
That errant force is lost 
Unless it be controlled . 

NE of the most important acquisitions in any form 
of culture is the ability at will to take all affirmative 
life out of the body. This does not include the lower¬ 
ing of the respiration or the lessening of the heart¬ 
beats, or any similar exercises and practices, which are 
decidedly dangerous. [Natural devitalization is both wholesome and 
necessary in the life of every man and woman. On the other hand 
the cultivation of the appearances of death are silly and serve no 
useful purpose. 

The true definition of devitalization is the taking of the waking 
vitality out of the body. 

There is the vitality of wakefulness. 

And there is the vitality of sleep. 

In sleep the conscious mind is supposed to be absent. 

Telepathy and hypnotism are related at every step of the way; 
not because one is necessary for the other, but because both put 
the conscious mind aside and both appeal to the Other Mind in 
whole or in part according to the degree of change effected. 

Whatever puts aside the conscious mind is opening the way for 
the advent of the Other Mind if there is activity of any kind pres¬ 
ent. 

If you have ever been where people were being hypnotized, you 
will always recall the request, “Relax, please.” Then there is the 
other request, “Try to think of nothing.” The meaning of the 







156 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


requests are to devitalize both body and mind. These are the con¬ 
ditions which yon will find present in hypnotism in its first steps, and 
in sleep also. A very good illustration of what is occurring in the 
muscles of the body under devitalization, is seen when a man becomes 
sleepy. His head is held up in position that is almost vertical 
during the time he is awake; but just as soon as he begins to fall 
into a slight drowse, the muscles of the neck relax, then a semi-con¬ 
sciousness calls them 1 into place again, the head becomes erect, then 
sleepy feelings follow a little more deeply, the muscles of the neck 
relax, the head pitches forward, and sometimes is jerked down on 
the chest so hard that the sleeper wakes up, looks ashamed, and 
stays awake, especially if he is in church. 

This is the devitalization of sleep. 

The muscles of the mouth cause the teeth to separate so that there 
is a space between them, while in the early stages of sleep the lips 
remain together. Here again we have the same conditions as in 
hypnosis. If the person is sitting, the arms and upper part of 
the body will relax and lose the affirmative life that is necessary 
for activity during wakefulness. If in a lying position the whole 
body will relax. 

A person who is fainting will lose the affirmative life, first at 
the neck muscles, at the mouth, at the arms, at the waist, at the 
hips, at the knees, and at the ankles. When lost at the neck, the 
head falls forward. When lost at the waist, the torso is allowed 
to pitch to one side. When lost at the knees the body staggers. 
When lost at the ankles, there is a fall. These degrees follow each 
other in quick succession in case of a dead faint; otherwise they come 
and are arrested at some part of the change. The feeling of the 
knees giving way will take the courage out of a person who is trying 
to stand, but if there is enough strength left for an effort at resist¬ 
ance, the body will stagger and not fall. 

Ho person who is standing and who wishes to devitalize for any 
definite purpose, need take the affirmative life out of the whole 
body. For the uses of telepathy, all that is required is that the 
body lose its affirmative life in the region of the mind and the 
vital organs; and this distinction is important. 

Telepathy deals with both thought and feeling. 

What your friend or companion thinks, is what you often want 
to know. But you would at times like to be aware of what he 
feels also. The seat of the mind is in the head; but not exclusively 


DEVITALIZING THE BODY 


157 


so, for where there is a ganglionic cell, there is mind, and the 
ganglionic cells are scattered where the nerves have their centers. 
They are most abundant in the head; but prevail in other parts 
of the body, notably in the torso, or that part above the waist and 
below the head. In these regions then will be found the mental 
zones. 

In the torso are found also the vital organs. Magnetism is a 
power that has its greatest mass in the torso in the region of the 
vital organs. Telepathy has its greatest zone in the head, when 
confined to thought; and in head and torso when related to feeling. 

Hypnotism opens the way to telepathy. 

Out of every hundred of the trance mediums, one may be genuine 
in part; and perhaps out of every thousand there may be one 
who is actually endowed with true telepathy; which is the ability 
to transfer from the Other Mind to the conscious mind of a listener, 
some of the knowledge that the former contains. Everybody would 
be a trance medium if they could enter the hypnotic state at will, 
open up the Other Mind and connect it with the human voice or 
the writing hand. 

The Other Mind in every human being has the knowledge. Of 
this there is no doubt. But it stays where it is. There is a big 
wall between the two minds, and the knowledge that is ever-present 
in one is hardly ever brought through the wall into the other. It 
seems that the two minds cannot get into the open at the same time. 
When one train comes along on the same track, the other has to 
go to one side. 

The trance medium is evidence of these facts. 

We do not know how many there are in the world who are 
genuine and powerful in their gifts. It is only guess work to say 
what the proportion is between the latter and those who are frauds. 
Some who are fakes are yet partly endowed with a feeble power, 
and the rest of their work is imagination and pretense, accompanied 
by some shrewd guessing. So they make their living. 

But assuming that one or two are to be found in a large number 
who are both genuine and able, we find that they have no con¬ 
sciousness of what is going on. They go in the trance, make some 
reports in voice or writing, wake up, and not even the trace of 
a dream remains. Some regrettable facts have to be faced: 

1. In the trance they are subject to the very imperfect workings 
of the" Other Mind. 


158 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


2. The conscious mind is wholly suppressed, gone away, side¬ 
tracked, and abstracted. 

3. The Other Mind has all the knowledge, but of what use is it 
to a working mind that has been side-tracked ? 

4. The Other Mind gives up little or nothing of its real knowledge, 
because it has no proper stimulant or exciting cause for revealing 
one-millionth of one per cent, of what it knows. 

In passing into the trance the medium is self-hypnotized. She 
discovered this power many years before, we will assume, and it 
came to her by accident. She thought she was especially gifted 
and so she has nursed and cared for it in order to gain a living 
by its use. That some of the frauds are in part sincere may be 
seen from a recent instance where such a medium, fearing to lose 
her power, refused to change her diet. Yet she did not have any 
actual ability beyond a flash here and there of telepathic power 
which she did not know how to develop. 

The trance medium is merely a self-hypnotized person who, if 
genuine, is unable to transfer knowledge from the Other Mind 
to the conscious mind, but who can impart bits of stray sights or 
shadows of facts to others who are present, or to paper in writing. 
The same is true of the clairvoyant. It has been claimed that 
hypnotism develops clairvoyancy in subjects who are in the Sixth 
Degree. The only instances we have any reliable proof of, are 
those that arise when a magnetic person willingly becomes a subject 
and is carried into the Sixth Degree, and then used by others 
who know how to tap the great fund of knowledge that is so close 
at hand. But it is not true that all or even many persons can 
be made clairvoyant by being hypnotized. Some can be so developed 
who never possess the power otherwise, and who did not dream 
of having it at all until hypnotized. 

The point at hand is the fact that steps into hypnotism may be 
steps at the same time into telepathy; and that telepathy is allied 
to hypnotism all along the course of development. 

It is important, as we now plunge into deeper waters, not to lose 
sight of the fact that there are four functions and conditions that 
are all connected in methods of induction and use: 

1. Hypnotism, with its trance and clairvoyance. 

2. Telepathy, in trance, clairvoyance, sleep, or waking. 

3. Hatural sleep. 

4. Devitalized wakefulness. 


DEVITALIZING TEE BODY 


159 


These are allied in one way or another, and all may be employed 
for the same ends when the conditions favor such use. 

It will be seen that devitalization must be the forerunner of 
the first three; and the question is now to be asked, Will not 
devitalized wakefulness invite all three? 

In the beginning of this investigation, let us see if devitalized 
wakefulness will or can be used to invite sleep. It is well known 
that all persons, before they fall asleep either by day or night, 
must have devitalized the body and mind; that is, the body must 
relax thoroughly, and the mind must become empty. These con¬ 
ditions come on as the approach of slumber is felt, and nature does 
the work in most instances. But you will not sleep if you think 
too much or too hard or too fast; for ideas in the mind that are 
active enough to keep that organ from devitalizing, will stand in 
the way of slumber. Nor will you fall asleep if you hold the 
muscles of the neck rigid. Set these neck muscles hard and they 
will stop all approach of slumber. It is here that the first step in 
devitalizing begins and it is here that it may be cut off or en¬ 
couraged. 

Almost every doctor knows that sleep can be induced at any 
time of the day or night, right in the midst of the most active 
thinking, if the neck, chest and waist muscles, as well as the arms 
and hands, can be devitalized, and the mind emptied by concentra¬ 
tion on one idea that has no importance, but that is interesting 
enough to hold the attention away from the main line of thought. 

Herein lies the greatest physiological fact associated with human 
life. 

Many hard-worked men are able to take sleep when they wish, 
either day or night, by adopting this double-devitalization. It has 
been done countless times by professional men. One of the greatest 
of all the physicians in America trained himself to devitalize both 
the mind and body, and thus to catch a few minutes of sleep 
between cases. A number of others have done the same thing 
after learning of his case which has been described before in our 
works. The man who works with his brain is not able to sleep 
at a fixed time at night, and the tendency is for him to lie awake 
many hours. Clerks who have much to do with figures in business, 
often have this same trouble, known as insomnia. Clergymen, 
lawyers, bankers, and all classes of sedentary people lose valuable 
sleep at night, and many suicides have followed such troubles. 


160 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


Women who are inclined to be emotional, or who worry much, will 
lie awake through the whole night, and suffer a nervous breakdown 
in time. 

The worst remedy for such a condition is to drug the mind to 
sleep. It does fearful harms, and makes suicide all the more probable 
in the long run. 

The ability to devitalize mind and body, as will be taught in this 
and the next cycle, is the only sure remedy for the evil of insomnia. 
More than that, it enables any person to take sleep and get refresh¬ 
ing rest at any time of the day or night. Thus we see that there 
is an affirmative answer for the question, Will devitalized wakeful¬ 
ness invite natural sleep? It not only will, but is actually used 
wherever it can be taught as a remedial agent. 

For this reason, if for no other, every man and woman should 
learn the value of devitalization, and how to acquire it for use at 
any time and under any circumstances. Some of the benefits and 
results from this practice will be stated here. 

IMMENSE VALUE OF DEVITALIZATION. 

1. It brings sleep of a natural and refreshing kind at any time 
of the day or night. 

2. It puts a stop to worry, no matter what the cause. 

3. It is a cure and a prevention also of hysteria. 

4. It stops all nervousness, restlessness and disorders associated 
with those conditions. 

5. It is the only natural remedy for neurasthenia, or prostration 
of nervous vitality; and it permits nature to have a chance to 
rebuild the broken nerves. 

6. In such maladies as the grip, neuralgia, colds and the like, it 
assists in the most important aid to a cure, which is sleep, by 
making sleep easy to obtain. 

7. It throws back upon the vital centers of the mind and body, 
all the wasting forces, and thus brings, in the reaction, the greatest 
fund of energy and power, both physical and mental. 

8. It takes away the awkward, jerky action of the muscles of the 
body, and especially of the arms and legs. 

9. It is the basis of all grace, ease of movement, self-control and 
polished manners; and has been taught for that purpose for centuries 
in the courts of all the civilized world. 


DEVITALIZING THE BODY 


161 


Do you know of any other thing that carries so many good 
qualities as devitalization? You can readily prove them to be true, 
for it is not difficult to learn the practice. Every effort of the 
mind and body needs a period of reaction; the reaction for mental 
work is mental devitalization; and for physical work is physical 
devitalization. 

By the law of nature, everything can be turned around and a 
reverse proof will be found. Here are some reverses: 

1. As the reaction for effort is naturally devitalization, so the 
latter practice reacts into better and greater effort of mind and 
body. 

2. As natural sleep brings on devitalization, so the latter will 
brings on natural sleep. 

3. As the passing aside of the consicious mind brings on devitali¬ 
zation, so the latter will cause the conscious mind to pass aside, 
and thus open the way for the presence of the Other Mind. 

4. As natural flashes of telepathy, which are so common to-day, 
are attended by abstraction of mind, so the latter, when practiced 
as an art, will increase the habits of telepathy. 


The foregoing explanations and laws are considered necessary 
in order to make clear the importance of the present cycle and that 
which will follow. The specific exercises which will develop the 
devitalization of the body will now be given: 

FIRST EXERCISE. 

This is not to be performed regularly, but only at the beginning 
and whenever the muscles seem to be stiff. 

Take a standing position. 

Lean forward so that the arms may hang free from the body, and 
slightly in front. 

Rub the hands together until they are quite warm. 

'Then go through the process of imaginary washing of the hands, 
twisting and plying them together, each palm pressing over and 
around each of the forward part of the hands, forcing the fingers 
into all sorts of shapes. 

Then squeeze the fingers in every way; pinch the hands at the 
palms and at the backs, and treat the wrists in the same way. The 
purpose is to make the flesh and muscles pliable and springy. 



162 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


Follow up the arms with opposite hands as far as the shoulders, 
pounding and squeezing the flesh the whole length, so that all the 
stiffness may be changed to pliability. 

Bub the neck with both hands, and pull at the flesh, then press 
it in and knead it, until there is no stiffness there. Follow all 
around the neck in these movements. 

Bend the head forward, then backward, then to the right side, 
then to the left, until it is very flexible. This is done by tipping 
the head in the various directions. 

Project the chin forward and in to the neck; then to the right 
oblique forward and in to the neck; then to the left oblique forward 
and in to the neck; repeating many times. 

The result of these exercises will be to make good flesh, easy 
moving muscles, and freedom from stiffness in every part. 

Then press the palms of the hands on the chest at the upper 
parts, forcing the ribs downward and inwards; and repeat many 
times. Then treat the right and left sides of the chest in the same 
way; and also the lower parts of the ribs. Follow around to the 
back with this exercise until there is not a stiff muscle anywhere. 

Now bend the body forward, using the waist as a hinge; then 
backward; then to the right and to the left; repeating many times 
until all the waist muscles are pliable and flexible. 

You will note that, beginning with the fingers and proceeding 
up the arms to the shoulders, the neck, the chest and the waist, 
you have been at work on the two great zones of the body that 
contain the mind and the vital organs, the seats of both realms of 
devitalization. In order to be in a condition to properly proceed 
with those movements, you should be willing to make the foregoing 
movements very thorough. Once done they are all done, and need 
little or no repeating hereafter; therefore you should take pride 
in doing them now to the best of your ability. Make the flesh and 
the muscles as pliable and as flexible as you know how; that is 
the whole story. Spend hours with each part and you will never 
regret it. Your future success will be measured largely by your 
thoroughness at this stage. 

SECOND EXEBCISE. 

Having produced the desired results in the preceding movements 
you may now begin work with the fingers, which are the nerve 
terminals. In the hands are nerves that control the third and 


DEVITALIZING TEE BODY 


163 


fourth, fingers and at the same time are connected with the sleep 
producing functions of the brain. But the whole hand, arm, neck, 
and torso play valuable parts in the same direction. 

Begin with the fingers. Stand as before. Hold the hands down 
and slightly to the front. Begin slowly to shake the fingers and 
make them jump about as if they were strings. They must become 
strings before you are done with them. For some time they will 
remain stiff and not dangle and swing about when shaken; and 
it will require time to subdue them. 

Shake them forward and back. 

Shake them to the right and left. 

Shake them in circles to the right and then to the left. 

When you have them! as limp as shoestrings they will snap against 
each other on being shaken sidewise. 

When the fingers have been conquered, pay similar attention to 
the whole hand, from the wrists down to the tips; and shake them 
in the four directions already stated. 

Bepeat this in connection with the fingers, so that the hands will 
be flexible and limp. 

Then treat the lower arms the same way from the elbow down. 

Finally treat the whole arm likewise from the shoulder to the 
tips of the fingers. The purpose is to make them perfectly limp 
and flexible. 

After the arms have been finished, give attention to shaking the 
head in a manner as near like it as possible. There will not be 
much pliability there, but some will be developed. 

The next and last of the shaking exercises will be that which is 
devoted to the torso, or upper half of the body. Think of its being 
hinged at the waist, and try to shake it as a dog shakes himself 
when he comes from the pond. 

These movements are not to be done in a day. Let time be given 
to them until you perceive a decided change come over the parts that 
have been thus treated. You will recognize it without fail, and it 
is sure to come in time. Be patient and persevere. 

There have been so far two sets of exercises along this line: 

1. The first set related to pounding and mashing the flesh and 
muscles to knock all stiffness out. 

2. The second set related to making the parts limp and pliable 
like wet strings. 

3. The next set will relate to the local devitalizing of each section. 


164 OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 

THIRD EXERCISE. 

Begin with the little finger of the left hand. Raise that finger, 
while the palm of the hand faces downward. Let the finger fall 
of its own weight. It will be very difficult to do this at first. When 
you have partly succeeded, do the same with the little finger of 
the right hand. The finger must always be lifted with the aid of 
the other hand. 

The exercise will he incorrect and useless if the finger falls by 
its own assistance. To devitalize a part of the body it is necessary 
to take all self-action out of that part, and this indicates that it 
is apparently lifeless. The results are so important that these first 
steps should be mastered as you go along. 

The way to help it is to imagine that all life has gone out of 
the finger and that it must fall by action of gravity. There may 
be some lapse of time before the muscles are taught to withdraw 
their hold on so small a member as the little finger; but it will 
come sooner or later and you will be pleased with what you accom¬ 
plish. Each trial should be made with the fingers of one hand 
lifting the little finger of the other, and letting it go suddenly, and 
allowing it to drop of its own weight. 

When you recognize some action of gravity at work in the little 
finger of each hand, then proceed to the next finger, which will be 
somewhat easier after the smallest has been conquered. Persist 
until both hands have been tried many times. Hundreds of repeti¬ 
tions may be made at a sitting, and several weeks may pass before 
there is complete victory. But keep it going. You may take 
advantage of many a minute in each day without losing time in other 
duties, as where you are riding in a car to or from your place of 
business, or in some conveyance, or waiting anywhere, or in con¬ 
versation where formal conduct is not required, as it will hardly 
attract attention. In case it should be seen by others you could 
allow the fingers to fall of their own weight, one at a time, without 
the aid of the other hand. This you can learn to do after a few brief 
trials. The only thing desired is to make the finger know it has 
weight, and that it can fall without the aid of its muscles. 

The long finger comes next, and each hand should receive due 
attention in the manner described for the little finger. 

After that comes the index, or first, finger, of each hand. 

Then finally comes the thumb, which should be lifted by the oppo¬ 
site hand in such a way that it will fall toward the palm of the 


DEVITALIZING TEE BODY 


165 


left hand while descending. It is heavier than the fingers and will 
be trained more readily. We began with the most difficult of all 
the digits, the little finger. When the thumb of the left hand has 
been brought into subjection, the thumb of the right hand is to 
receive attention. 

Before each trial in the exercises just given, be sure to mash 
and pound and knead the hands and fingers as called for in the 
first exercise; then shake them like wet strings under the require¬ 
ments of the second exercise; and you will find they will respond 
to the devitalizing power of the third exercise. 

The next step is to lift all four fingers of the left hand with 
the right, and have them all fall at once as though dead. This 
will be easy with most people, but must be made perfect. The 
right hand fingers are now to be lifted by the left hand and allowed 
to fall of their own weight. 

The next step is the most distinct, as it deals with a larger section 
of the body, the whole hand. The point of loss is at the wrist, 
and where the loss is supposed to occur, there the hinge action 
takes place. Therefore the wrist will be the hinge. 

The whole hand is lifted at the tips of the fingers, by the aid 
of the other hand, and then let go suddenly, and allowed to fall. 
The hand comes down like a thing of lead, as if it had been deprived 
of power to hold it up. It must be so limp that it will vibrate 
slightly after it has reached its fall. 

To do this successfully, all the exercises must be taken in turn 
and mastered, as you cannot go to the last rung of the ladder on 
the first step. You may try to do so, and the after failure will 
come to penalize you. Failure then will be ascribed to some other 
cause than your own fault. Start right, make the flesh and muscles 
flexible, and the fingers like limp strings, before you undertake to 
deal with each section by itself. 

You want to succeed and you will succeed if you are faithful in 
the little things at the beginning. 

Lift each hand many times, and note that the fingers seem to be 
separate like so many strings that fall out of place when they are 
dropped. From time to time go back to the other sections of the 
^hand, the fingers, thumb and whole group of digits, so that the 
earlier training may not be lost. 

The following terms should be understood: 

1. To devitalize is to take the affirmative life out of a part. 


166 


OPERATIONS OP TEE OTHER MIND 


2. The affirmative life is that action or strength that resists a 
falling down. 

3. To vitalize is to bring back the affirmative life. 

4. The hinge is the place where the fall begins. 

5. The loss is the point where the affirmative life is supposed to 
be cut off, and is always the place of the hinge. It determines where 
the hinging, or the bending, is to occur. 

The first loss was made at the end of the little finger where it 
joins the palm, and there the first hinging took place. Some men 
and women, especially the latter, are so graceful that they can devi¬ 
talize every joint of every finger. This would require a most supple 
hand, one such as a magician must have for the dexterity employed 
in his profession. It comes in part in the experiments of ordinary 
devitalization, but is too hard to acquire to pay for the work and time 
expended. 

Of course the more flexible and the more readily devitalized all 
parts of the hand and arm, are, the more graceful, refined and 
polished a man or woman will become. It pays to acquire these 
good qualities for they show the line between the awkward fellow 
and the gentle individual. A gentleman is supposed to be refined, 
graceful and easy, and that is why he is called a gentle- man. 

The next loss is to be at the elbow, and the exercises are now to 
grow easier all along the training. With the fingers of the right hand 
lift the tips of the fingers of the left hand, carrying upward to the 
highest possible position the forearm, making the hinge at the 
elbow. Then suddenly let the arm' fall. The elbow should be kept 
close to the side of the waist. As you let the tips of the fingers 
go out of your hand, imagine that the affirmative life of the whole 
arm has been cut off at the elbow, and let the lower half of the arm 
fall of its own weight. 

The hinging action has been transferred by steps to this point, 
having begun at the ends of the fingers, then to the wrist and now 
to the elbow; and the work has been easier to perform as the sections 
have become greater in bulk. The hardest to do are the fingers 
separately, and still harder would be the refined action of each 
joint of each finger. 

The falling forearm is most perfect in its devitalization when, 
on its dropping, it breaks or crumbles the hands, wrists and fingers 
like so many limp parts of some wet cloth that was torn to tatters. 
This is art. It is the art of the actor in simulating fainting or 


DEVITALIZING THE BODY 


167 


death. It is the art of nature in sending away for the time being 
the conscious mind. It is the art of the painter in making many 
of his scenes look real, where life is pictured in abeyance. It is the 
art of the honest medium or clairvoyant, if such there be, in inviting 
a departure of the conscious mind in order to make way for the 
Other Mind. It is the art of the hypnotist on his first attempts to 
bring a patient into subjection. It is the art of the physician in 
bringing the boon of sleep to himself or those of his patients who 
are able to adopt such advice. It is the art of the lady of the 
highest culture, and of the gentleman of polish and refinement; 
which does not mean that they are to put themselves into devitaliza¬ 
tion in the presence of others, but that the habit and practice will 
make them flexible, easy and refined in the fingers, hands, arms 
and body; and will save many an awkward blunder and coarse 
movement in the companionship of others. It is a process always 
and never an end. 

Try to make the forearm crumble the fingers, hand and wrist 
into shreds, every time it falls. Do not merely hinge the arm at 
the elbow and let it fall as one lump. ITse watchfulness and in¬ 
telligence in the practice. 

The next step is to cause the loss at the shoulders, which will 
make the hinge there. It is presumed that you have mastered both 
forearms by many hundreds of repetitions before attempting this 
stage of the practice. 

With the right hand lift the left hand on high, the full arm 
being hinged at the shoulder. Now suddenly imagine that all life 
has gone out of the whole arm from the shoulder to the tips of 
the fingers. 

Let it fall. 

Be sure that its weight brings it down. 

Be sure that it crumbles all to pieces as it falls, like a dead, limp 
thing, having no life of its own. This is the devitalization that 
brings sleep. But the whole arm must feel the loss along its length, 
and the fingers must fall apart just as decidedly in their loss of life 
as any part of the arm. If you do it right, it will become a pro¬ 
found sensation all through your mind and body. You will never 
forget it when first you come to recognize what it is accomplishing 
in your whole being. It is worth more than money can buy to those 
who need just such an aid to their shattered nerves or unstrung 
powers that run to waste because of the lack of refreshing reaction. 


168 


OPERATIONS OF TITE OTHER MIND 


Some persons who do not think carefully may raise the objection 
that devitalization will hurt the mind and body like any drug; 
but this is just the opposite of the truth. If you are in absolutely 
perfect health of body, mind and nerves, you will fall asleep every 
night through the process of perfect devitalization. Then it is 
involuntary. In practice it is voluntary, and can be chosen as a 
matter of deliberation, and is therefore under your control. The 
greatest physicians of the regular schools that America and England 
have ever produced, have practiced voluntary devitalization as their 
only channels for healing their overworked nerves in their profes¬ 
sions. It is the grandest blessing that any man or woman can 
obtain by self-effort. 

If people could learn to devitalize at will, they could also learn 
to vitalize at will; and this is a natural result from the first part 
of the practice. It comes of itself. But those who do in fact 
become masters of the habit of devitalizing at will, cease to have 
fatigue or a low state of vitality. It reacts into a higher state of 
vital energy. As in natural sleep every act of devitalization by 
nature is followed by a healing of the nerves, a refreshing newness 
of the mind, and a rebuilding of the body’s waste, so every act 
of practiced devitalization is followed by a reaction in the same 
directions. It is the only practice known to all science that is 
wholly a reproduction of nature herself with all her attendant 
blessings. 

For these reasons, practice it. 

The other objection is that, as it must precede hypnotism, so it 
may render the patient subject to that power. The opposite is the 
fact. It is involuntary devitalization that takes your control from 
you against your will. To be able to devitalize at will, is the 
means of making you stronger; for the more control you have over 
your own power to devitalize, the more control you will have over 
your power to vitalize; and you will vitalize with greater energy 
and resistance by the law of reaction. Can you not see that a person 
who is sleepy is sure to be more easily hypnotized than one who is 
wide awake; and that the devitalization that brings on natural sleep 
is sure to give you the sleep that will rest you and allow you to 
wake up widely and with power? The less sleep you have the more 
sleepy you will be in all normal conditions. The more you devitalize 
the more of needed sleep you will secure, and the more wide awake 
you will be because of the fact that you have had sleep enough. 


DEVITALIZING THE BODY 


169 


The same law holds true in practiced or voluntary devitalization. 
You can go to sleep when you will, and awake when you choose, even 
to the second of time. 

If you are nervous, you can put your nerves to sleep naturally. 

You can secure refreshing rest and reaction at any time at will. 
These advantages alone are worth thousands of dollars to you, and 
to the multi-millionaire who could not sleep at all at night, it was 
worth all his millions to be able to invite sweet, refreshing and 
healthful slumber whenever he wished to do so. In all the science 
and art of human life, there is nothing so valuable as voluntary 
devitalization. It has been stated from time to time in books; 
but this is the first time it has been fully and completely taught. 
The way to master it has never been given to the world before in 
a thorough manner. Many teachers have described and taught in 
writings the outside facts; but have reserved its secrets for their 
personal and private classes, on the ground of being a professional 
secret of instructors. We have, in this book, enlarged on any pre¬ 
vious method ever before taught in public or in private; because we 
believe the world has a right to know its value and how to get it in the 
best and briefest system of exercises. 

The neck is the next point of loss. The head must be taught to 
fall in all directions as if in sleep. This action alone will in many 
cases bring on natural slumber if the neck muscles are thoroughly 
devitalized. It is one of the great parts of the practice to acquire 
this perfect loss of affirmative life. 

The shoulders are next to be devitalized. This consists of a 
crumbling motion, and falling forward like the position of one who 
is round-shouldered. The benefit is in the reaction. 

Finally the chest and torso are to crumble, which will allow the 
ribs to drop and the torso to roll about like a man asleep in church. 
If the center of gravity is slightly forward of the line of support 
there will be many opportunities for exhibiting a good imitation 
of one falling into slumber. 

The real work in this whole line of practice is found at the 
beginning, and in order to make use of what is to be taught in 
the next cycle, you should become a perfect master of the fingers, 
especially of the third and fourth fingers of both hands. 

Our instruction in this cycle has been mingled with full expla¬ 
nations of the meaning and purpose of this culture; because we 
think it right that students should know the reasons for everything. 


170 


TWELFTH CYCLE 



And from the palace go 
Into the outer world 
When they are ordered so. 


LL thoughts are visitors 
Sjfefjl That to the palace come 
^ When hidden by the Icing , 


OT until the exercises of the Eleventh Cycle have 
been perfectly mastered should the work now ahead 
be given thought and practice. We descend into deep 
waters as we progress. It has been our wish and 
purpose to make this course of training the most im¬ 
portant and the most valuable ever put forth by us, and we feel 
sure that the magnitude of the undertaking has been fully appreci¬ 
ated and realized as each cycle has been unfolded. If we were 
lacking in our feelings of awe and weight of grandeur which im¬ 
press us when in the presence of nature’s sublime laws, we would 
be unable to impart the true worth of these lessons to our students. 

Devitalization has two great divisions: 

1. Eemoving affirmative life from the body. 

2. Eemoving consciousness from the physical mind. 

All the statements that are included in the last cycle should be 
read and re-read at least ten times in order to fill your thoughts 
with the great importance of these two steps. Do not try to seek 
entertainment by their perusal. Study and go deeply into the matter. 
There are things that will escape you on the first reading, and 
other things which the second reading will, even if thorough, not 
disclose; and so on for many reviews. The philosophy is so deep 
and so full of weight that it has been very difficult to present it 
in a readable form. It is intended for study, for contemplation 
and for long periods of working out in the trains of thought that 
should arise. 






BOW TO EMPTY THE MIND 


m 


When yon are perfectly familiar with the instruction of that cycle, 
then turn to the pages now ahead and make up your mind that you 
will become their master as well. 

These exercises do not require continual performance or practice 
after they have once been acquired. 

The exercises of the last cycle need not be pursued when they have 
been learned; they are stepping stones; and you do not take stepping 
stones with you on your journey. But they must be mastered to 
begin with, and must not be left behind as long as they are imperfect. 

The same rule holds true in this cycle. When you are able to 
send the consciousness of the working mind away for a definite 
period, always to be determined by you in advance, then you will 
have no need of the stepping stones of practice in this cycle. 

If a person who worries were able to empty the mind, the worrying 
would cease at once. But, not knowing how to do this, they go on 
and suffer. 

If a person who keeps up all sorts of useless mental ac¬ 
tion, although not in the way of worry, were able to empty the mind 
he would not lie awake hours at a time in the night and lose 
valuable sleep, causing a weakness of health, mind and nervous 
system. 

If a person who wished to concentrate his thoughts upon some 
enterprise when in fact they scattered in all directions and pre¬ 
vented him from making progress in his work, knew how to empty 
his mind, he could secure the attention at will on any subject or 
line of thought and thus avert the trouble. 

If a person who wished to do the work of a genius and knew 
that he must side-track his everyday, conscious mind and tap the 
Other Mind for inspiring help, was familiar with a way to empty 
the former, he could easily pass into the realm of the latter. Every 
man and womjan of intelligence has thoughts and ideas that at times 
almost knock for admission, but that stay outside for want of a 
way to enter. 

As in the case of physical devitalization, so in mental devitalization, 
there are other uses for the results of the practice than those specif¬ 
ically sought in this study. There are times in the life of every 
person when it is absolutely necessary to empty the mind; and the 
inability to do so leads to disaster or a great deal of trouble, which 
might have been averted. 

The emptying of the mind is the taking out of it the thinking 


172 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


processes that are going on there; in other words, it is the ability 
to stop thinking. 

How is this to be done ? 

And what relation has it to the study of telepathy ? 

The preceding cycles will answer the latter question; and this 
cycle will answer the former. How is the mind to be made to stop 
thinking? The hypnotist tells his subject to relax the body and to 
think of nothing. He means to not think of anything. It is 
quite probable that, in trying to think of nothing, the subject gets 
to wondering what that mental condition is, and so his mind is 
abstracted. 

But this would happen by mere accident. A sure and accurate 
method is needed, and the following is presented as such; there 
being two parts to the process. 

first part: learning how. 
second part: habitual uses. 

In learning how to abstract the mind the most favorable times 
and conditions should be sought in the beginning. When once there 
has been success, it is easier to repeat it; and each repetition makes 
every subsequent step still easier. Therefore, as the steps become 
easier, the conditions should he made harder; and as the steps 
are harder as at the beginning, the conditions should be easier. 
By and by, when the most difficult conditions can be overcome, then 
abstraction of mind will be employed by you in delving into the 
minds of others and taking their thoughts from them; or in catching 
knowledge of events and purposes at any distance. These are the 
definite goals of this work. 

The easiest conditions are as follows: 

1. When going to sleep at night. 

2. When the body is devitalized. 

3. When there is fresh, outdoor air in the room. 

All three of these conditions should be united at the same time 
in the early experiments. The object is to make the first steps easy 
and to win victory. 

As there must be purpose in everything, the first purpose to have 
in this trial is to fall quickly into a profound, natural slumber. 
You will say, perhaps, that you do that at all times. Then so much 
the better; for the second stage of the trials will be brought to 
you that much sooner. But ninety-five out of every hundred of the 


HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND 


173 


intelligent, thinking people, do not fall asleep as soon as they go 
to bed. 

One of the favoring conditions is the admission of pnre outdoor 
air. This simply serves to bring good oxygen to the lungs. Some 
persons are hypnotized by close, warm, bad air, which serves to 
make them drowsy; but it is the purpose of this method to abandon 
the impure agencies that prey on the mind and nerves, and adopt 
the conditions that build up a clear mind and wholesome nervous 
state. 

The air must not blow on you. Let it be admitted from some 
other room, if possible. Otherwise, let it come in at the top of 
some distant window. Avoid draughts. In case your room is small 
and the night is cold, shut up the room and open the window at 
top and bottom, for a half-hour before you retire. Have the tem¬ 
perature below sixty-five, unless the room is damp; then seventy 
is right. Just as you come into the room to undress, close the 
window; and, as you get into bed, open it one inch at the top. 
This presumes that your sleeping room is quite small. A chilling 
draught will cause neuralgia. If the room is larger, have it quite 
cool when you retire; but not under sixty, nor over sixty-five degrees 
in winter; and the best temperature you can find in summer. A 
south room is the best every night of the year in which to sleep; 
it is more moderate in winter and the best aired in summer, for 
all the heat-producing winds come from the south, and they should 
have free sweep in order to carry ofi the irritating warmth, like 
a fan on a hot afternoon. 

As soon as you get into bed, arrange your thoughts so that you 
can place your whole mind on the one subject of devitalizing your 
whole body. Think of it as being deprived for the time of all 
affirmative life, under the process of the preceding cycle. 

Then take all affirmative life out of the neck, the shoulders, the 
arms, wrists, hands and fingers, by special attention to them. If 
you have been faithful in the last cycle, all you need do in this to 
devitalize is to think of the fact. 

There will not be the slightest trouble in controlling every part 
of the body by the mind if you have once mastered the exercises 
that have been given. 

The next and last step in these easy conditions is to empty the 
mind. This is an intricate process and will be given full description 
at this place, as it stands as one of the greatest achievements of 


174 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


the human mind in the present era. It is possible for every man 
and woman to learn how to do it. 

There are three parts to this practice, and they are as follows: 

1. Sedative breathing. 

2. Controlling the sleep-nerves. 

3. Thought-Placement. 

Sedative breathing is not hard to learn; but may have to be 
preceded by development of the range of respiration. The require¬ 
ments are as follows: 

1. An in-going breath that must reach deep down into the lungs. 

2. An out-going breath must empty the lungs. 

3. Breathing must be silent. 

4. Breathing must he smooth. 

5. Breathing must be gentle. 

6. Breathing must be very slow. 

Here are six requirements for sedative breathing. This kind of 
respiration used to be employed generations ago in the art of induc¬ 
ing sleep; but alone it is not enough in this age of hurry and 
nerve-racking effort. 

The mind will help you wonderfully to send every in-going breath 
to the very lowest depths of the lungs. It is one of the most bene¬ 
ficial of all exercises, and will well repay any trouble and time that 
may be required to develop it. 

You may learn how to empty the lungs, which are in the vital 
zone, by chest contraction, which is to crush in the chest frame from 
side to side and from the top to the lower part, with the aid of the 
hands, during an out-going breath. Squeeze the air out of all parts 
of the lungs by pressure on the outside; but while the breath is on 
the way out. 

The next precaution is to cultivate silent respiration. Do not 
allow the slightest sound to be heard in the nose or throat; for it 
would mean friction and lack of smoothness. This must not he 
forgotten, nor must the habits he careless after the lapse of time. 
Some persons learn a thing, adopt it for a while, then gradually 
slip backward and are not conscious of the fact that they are in the 
old ruts again. Silent respiration is a good habit for all purposes, 
regardless of this study. 

The breathing must be smooth. 

This means that the flow of air should not be jerky, nor halting 
in its course in or out of the lungs. One of the best ways of making 


HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND 


175 


smooth respiration is to lift the hand to a height with the month, 
point the index finger outward, then begin to inhale while describing 
a straight horizontal line in front of the body, passing from one 
side to the other. The flow of air will be just as smooth as the 
movement of the finger if the breathing occurs with the action of 
the hand. Both must go together. 

In passing across the front of the body from its starting point to 
its end, the finger must not tremble, nor the hand or arm be jerky 
or halting. Several trials at a time may be necessary to accomplish 
this. Repeat for the in-going breath as well as for the out-going 
breath, until the smoothness is a habit. 

The breathing must be gentle. 

This is not difficult if the preceding requirements have been 
mastered. 

The breathing must be very slow. 

This is controlled by the movement of the index finger as just 
described; for each breath should be continued without halting as 
long as the finger moves. The latter has about four or five feet 
of distance to traverse in one direction, providing it begins far out 
to one side of the body, and it could be a minute in reaching the 
end of that direction if so desired. It will control the breath in 
any event. If it is slow, the latter will be slow also. 

To sum up in one sentence every in-going and out-going breath 
must be silent, smooth, gentle and slow. 

This part of the work should be learned at odd intervals during 
the day; and it need not intrude on other duties, as it may be done 
while many other things are being accomplished, except as to the 
motion of the hand. 

The development of these special powers will depend on the time 
devoted to practice, and the faithfulness with which the exercises are 
put into execution. But when they are fully developed, then much 
has been gained for the health of the mind, the body and the nerves, 
as well as for telepathy. 

All the foregoing is called sedative breathing, because it tends 
to so tax the nervous system that the flow of erratic currents is 
drawn away from the brain; just as a light lunch of the plainest 
food will, at bedtime, by calling the nervous activities from the 
brain to the stomach, release the mind from its acute thoughts and 
bring on sleep. 

This bedtime lunch is recommended to those of our students who 


176 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


are troubled with sleeplessness. The best light lunch is a bowl of 
very hot clear beef soup, called bouillon. 

The next step is called controlling the sleep-nerves. 

The sleep-nerves come to the terminals in the lower half of each 
hand, and are guides to the third and fourth fingers. When you 
devitalize the little finger, in case you are able to do it perfectly, 
the nerves that close down the thought centers of the brain are 
connected with; and when the third finger, next to the little finger, 
is also devitalized, this effect is increased. Therefore the double 
devitalization is of great importance in this work. The method 
of doing this is as follows: 

While lying down, as in bed or on a couch, lift both arms a few 
inches from the side, just so they will be free from all support 
from the shoulders to the fingers. The purpose of this is to put 
the vital life in the arm, and make the contrast all the more decided 
by taking it out of the two fingers. 

Raise the third and fourth fingers on each hand, as high as it can 
be done without moving the arms from their position; but do not 
raise the hands. Let there be no hinging action at the wrist, the 
elbow or the shoulders. Merely raise the two fingers on each hand, 
and then cut off the vitality at the ends of those two fingers and 
allow them to fall of their own weight like two limp strings, the 
life all gone out. 

While doing this, devitalize all the body, except the arms. 

When the latter are thoroughly wearied by remaining slightly 
elevated, devitalize them a few times. 

Then let them remain lying at the side of the body, and continue 
devitalizing the third and fourth fingers of the two hands, the 
fingers being raised so as to clear the clothing. 

The last step in this part is to put the two hands over the stomach 
and take the two fingers of the left hand, the little finger and that 
next to it, on the tips of the fingers of the Tight hand, raise them 
and let them fall of their own weight devitalized, and so continue 
at this until sleep comes. 

It is easy to learn to devitalize these two fingers if you go at 
it properly. Any child can do it, and we have seen hundreds of 
children practice it perfectly. But grown people, who think that 
any downward motion of the finger is devitalization, will not make 
much progress until they are able to know when the finger is falling 
by its own weight, and when it is being sent down by its muscles. 


HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND 


177 


We have seen hundreds of men and women claim they have mastered 
this art, and yet use the muscles to drop the finger. They simply 
raise and lower it, which does no earthly good. It is a pure waste 
of time. 

Failure then must be traced back to this inability to recognize the 
difference between the falling of the finger by its own weight and 
the sending it down by aid of the muscles. 

Are you able to see the difference? 

If you are, you will then be able to recognize the action of devitali¬ 
zation when once you have acquired it. 

In adopting this practice on falling asleep at night, you are to 
be sure that the whole body is devitalized and is very limp. Let it 
lie on the bed as flabby as you can. 

The final and greatest step in emptying the mind is a mental 
process known as 

Thought-Placement. 

This is seemingly an intricate study; but its difficulties are in 
the first division. The second is merely a habit. These two divi¬ 
sions are: 

1. The Science of Thought-Placement. 

2. The Art of Thought-Placement. 

As it is purely a mental process it is based upon an imaginary 
arrangement of the conscious mind. In order to assist in building 
the sections of the mind, the accompanying diagram must be referred 
to and its parts memorized so that it will be seen with the eyes 
shut. 

PLOT OF THOUGHT-PLACEMENTS. 


DAY’S 

YEAR’S 

PAST 

EVENTS 

EVENTS 

EVENTS 


A DEEP, DAEK, BLACK 

CAVERN 

OF ABSOLUTE NOTHINGNESS 






178 


OPERATIONS OP TEE OTHER MIND 


There are four sections to the thinking brain, and they are to 
be used in their order as shown on the plot. The first section is 
that which holds the thoughts closest at hand, and they are naturally 
the ones that will cause worry and wakefulness; for the mind does 
not trouble itself much with the dead past. It is the living ideas 
that bother. 

The second section includes the year’s events; and they are to be 
those happenings that have occurred in the far part of the year, 
not nearest at hand. 

The third section excludes to-day and this year of twelve full 
months, and has to do with the past. 

In making use of the three top sections, go backward from the 
nearest end to the farthest end of each part. 

Thus, in thinking of the day’s events, take the five principal 
matters that have occurred on the day preceding the evening when 
you are placing your thoughts. In placing the year’s events take the 
five principal events of the past twelve months, getting as far away 
from to-day as possible. In placing the past events, think of the 
five principal events of your younger years, going as far back as 
you can. 

Select the pleasantest transactions which you can recall. 

Strike out all matters that cause sadness or regret. 

Compel the mind to go backward through the events in the order 
of their happening. If you shift the order it will defeat this 
practice. 

It is not necessary to repeat the same events every time you put 
this mental action into practice. But each evening you must not 
introduce more than the required number of events and they should 
be the same five in each period, or section; making fifteen events 
every evening. The principal events may be groped for in the 
mind, and this method is helpful. Groping is done by not knowing 
what five events you will take up for the day, but letting them 
flow into the mind as they will, and then taking the leading five 
of the day. This may be done also for the year’s events which come 
next; and then for the past events. 

Do not begin with the past events first, or you will set the mind 
going in the wrong direction. By this time you will discern what 
is intended by the mental exercise called Thought-Placement. It 
is to cause the thoughts to vanish. They are going backward to 
the evanescent period of life, from which point the mind will leap 


HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND 


179 


into oblivion. The sensation soon becomes like that of a fall in a 
dream. 

They start with the day that has just closed, when the mind is 
most distinct, and the activities of the brain more intensified. They 
start even that way with the nearest event, the transaction closest 
to evening, and go back to those farthest from evening in the day’s 
history. Be sure of the order of action. Do not skip about. Go 
back steadily towards morning in the order of time. Then do the 
same in the years’ events; preserving the chronological order from 
the nearest to the farthest; but excluding those of the same day. 
Then in the past events, exclude those of the year, and go back 
in the exact order of happenings clear to youth, taking in the 
first love affair if it is not attended with sadness. 

The day’s events will vanish toward’s morning; the year’s events 
will vanish towards the twelfth month back; and the past events 
will vanish towards the dawn of life. 

By this time you must drop the mind into oblivion. 

Close your eyes and think of the three upper sections of your 
mind. Think of them as being in the front of your head, and 
located in three parts in the upper portion of your skull. Keep 
your eyes closed and let the thought fix itself that there are two 
stories of your mind, as in a house; and that the upper story has 
three compartments; while, underneath, the cellar includes the win¬ 
dowless, darkened chamber that extends from right to left and from 
near to far, throughout the whole domain of your brain. 

This under-vault is a 

DEEP—DARK—BLACK 
CAVERN 

OF ABSOLUTE NOTHINGNESS 

Keep the eyes closed, and see this dark, empty vault in the under 
story of your mind. See it as in front of your thoughts, and make 
yourself believe that when your thoughts enter that cavern they 
are at once swamped by the blackness of utter oblivion. See the 
four upper sections, while yet your eyes are closed. See the running 
action of your thoughts from the first section of the day’s events 
back through the middle section of the year’s events to the past era 
from which everything vanishes into total darkness. This is a 
steady step backwards. 

The exercise is wholesome for the mind and the nerves. 


180 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


By this practice we have recently saved several persons, three 
women and two men, from, the insane asylum. They were subject 
to hallucinations which would become violent in character when 
night approached and especially when they went to bed. They said 
their minds were full of devils and bad thoughts and evil designs. 
One man, who had been in business and had made his fortune, asked 
to be sent to a place of detainment where he could not get out 
as he felt the mania for homicide coming on. He, as well as the 
others, found a complete cure in the practice of this cycle. 

The hallucinations were all driven out of the mind by the power 
of devitalization of both mind and body, and especially by the 
culture of Thought-Placement. It is the opinion of experts to-day 
that they are permanently cured. 

Others have tried this method, who needed it for the cure of 
insomnia, and all report that the results were the most marvelous 
they ever conceived. 

The way to use Thought-Placement is to take up the review of 
events at the time when the devitalizing of the fingers has almost 
ceased. 

The mind is to select its events for the day and review them 
backward; then for the year and review them backward; then for 
the past life and review them backward; and as the last event, the 
fifteenth, is reached and reviewed, the mind is to look into the lower 
cavern, deep, dark, black, and full of absolute nothingness. It is 
to look there and stay looking there, hunting for something to see 
and finding nothing but total blackness. 

There it must stay. 

This is called the full round of thinking. Out of one hundred 
persons who tried this, after they had mastered all the preliminary 
details, ninety-eight succeeded on the first trial. The other two had 
been careless in learning to devitalize, and did not succeed until 
they had made amends for their neglect. 

One woman says in her report: “I have tried for years to find 
some way of putting myself to sleep. I think a lot and have a 
large property that keeps me fussed. I took your private course 
in Thought-Placement in connection with devitalization; and I 
have now the most perfect control of my mind day and night. This 
to me is worth no end of money. I would not take a hundred 
thousand dollars for what I have learned from this one method 
alone.” 


HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND 


131 


Six years ago, following a plan that we have always nsed of 
testing our exercises and methods for a long time before we place 
them before the public, the work of this and the preceding cycle 
was given to three hundred of our private students, of whom more 
than half were men of success in the world, and over a hundred 
were women of high social rank. These classes were selected as 
being the most difficult to cure of their nervous troubles. Every 
one of the three hundred succeeded in securing all the results they 
sought. 

Two years ago this work was given to seventy-two men, all of 
them well educated, several being professors in well-known univer¬ 
sities, and twenty-six of them physicians. They were directed to 
employ this practice for the purpose of training the mind to take 
on unconsciousness at will; in other words, to side-track the working 
mind and open up the Other Mind. They persisted and never lost 
their interest. The more they practiced the work, the more they 
desired to continue it. 

Having proved their ability to do this much, which is the first 
step in the work ahead, they were given the further test of employ¬ 
ing the method for the purpose of making their minds susceptible to 
the thoughts of other persons. 

The ultimate end of this study and practice is to acquire the 
ability to receive and to translate the thoughts of others, and the 
transactions of life of which we can know nothing by the usual 
channels of communication. 

This is called telepathy. 

In order to accomplish so great an end, it is necessary to show 
the character and nature of telepathy by tracing it to its hypnotic 
relationship, from which only can a clear knowledge of this power 
be gathered. Both processes are the same, but take different turns 
in coming to their usefulness. The great objection to hypnotism 
is the control which it puts in the care of one person over others; 
and the inability of the subject to participate in the knowledge that 
is acquired of thoughts and events. 

For purposes of telepathy, what is the good of being hypnotized, 
if you are to know nothing of what your mind receives in that 
state ? It is true that many persons who have been put into induced 
sleep are able to receive and to transmit to others the facts, events 
and plans of other places and persons; and sometimes they are made 
to write them down, as well as speak them; but this is only a very 


182 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


poor form of telepathy, and it has no practical uses. It is also 
true that there are a few genuine trance mediums who have exactly 
the same powers, but no good is brought to the world or to any 
practical line of usefulness by these so-called gifts. It is also true 
that there are persons who, in sleep or otherwise, receive informa¬ 
tion of things that come through channels not ordinary; but no 
good is derived from such methods. 

Before this work is closed we shall show that telepathy has a 
common, everyday, practical side, and can be made very useful as 
it has been for centuries when in the employ of persons who know 
how to direct its activities. 

The trouble with hypnotism is that it puts the conscious mind 
to sleep, and then there is no knowledge of the information that is 
brought in by the Other Mind. In the other phases of the same 
principle, the same trouble exists. 

The question has been asked by the ablest investigators of the 
world. Is it possible to have the conscious mind and the Other Mind 
both present at the same time ? If this can be done, then the flood 
gates of knowledge will be opened and there would be no opportunity 
for the conscious mind to do its work with relation to the physical 
body. It is, as you know, the working mind, and it must do the 
work of thinking for, planning for, and providing for the body and 
all its wants. If it were to be bothered eternally with the knowledge 
that is held shut up in the Other Mind, it would not he able to de¬ 
vote one minute’s attention to the duties of life. It would know so 
much that there would be no desire to attend to those duties; for 
every man and woman not held in leash by the power of self- 
restraint would want to depart this life in order to enter upon the 
things that are now close at hand. Too much knowledge is hurtful; 
and it is a wise Providence that has built a wall between the two 
minds, so that the duties of earth may be given due thought and 
attention. The ability to bring both minds upon the same arena 
at the same time would change the almost impassable barrier that 
separates them, and instead of a solid wall there would be only a 
sieve through which all knowledge would leak all the time. This 
would be a most disastrous state of affairs for life on earth. 

Is it possible to have the conscious mind and the Other Mind 
both present at the same time ? 

No. 

But it is possible to have them present in quick succession, and 


HOW TO EMPTY THE MIND 


183 


by this means to secure some of the knowledge that is always crowd¬ 
ing the Other Mind. This has been done countless millions of 
times, ever since humanity came upon this orb. It has been done 
with you, and with every one of your friends; for there is no living 
human being who has not had flashes of the thoughts from other 
people, and flashes of events, not only near at hand, but from great 
distances. It is a common experience. Everybody knows of it; 
but, until very recently, no one ever knew in what way it occurred. 

Starting with the general proposition, which is a proved fact, 
that the two minds cannot be present at the same time; and then 
passing on to the next proved fact that thoughts and events are 
flashed into your mind from your Other Mind; the task was set before 
investigators to ascertain in what way these seemingly contradictory 
things could actually happen. 

The way has been discovered, and the secret is out. 

By the never-failing analysis of life, we discovered more than 
twenty years before it was invented, the action of the x-ray; and 
our works, copyrighted and on file for years in advance, are proof of 
that fact. By the same analysis, we discovered long years in ad¬ 
vance, the principle of wireless telegraphy, which fact may be proved 
by reference to copyrighted and filed books. It is important to 
know that there is a way of securing the great secrets locked up 
in the bosom of nature. 

Now for the first time we present to the world a new secret, and 
it is to be called the “TURNING POINTS” in the action of think¬ 
ing, because no better name is at hand. 

The next cycle will be devoted to this new process; new, not in 
nature, but in the discussion of life, and the teachings of great 
principles. As a means at this time of preparing for it, the student 
should review this and the two preceding cycles, and should then 
seek to make himself familiar with the dark, black cavern of the 
working mind. Look at the diagram already referred to herein. 
Then, closing the eyes, look into your own dome of thought, and 
there make yourself see the presence of the three upper sections on 
the higher tier and the lower section beneath those three. You 
must SEE that dark section mentally and see it quickly at will. 

In attempting to do this, always throw the mind quickly through 
the three ideas of to-day, last year, and the past; and then bring 
it into the cavern of nothingness. This action may require five 
seconds for a beginner; but it is done in one-tenth of a second by 


184 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


any person who has practiced it often. It is known as the fading 
mind; touching to-day, passing into the last year, skimming over the 
surface of long ago, and bringing up in the abyss of no-thought. It 
is all a natural process, and is easily learned. But it must follow 
the night practice in order to be adopted readily in this form. 

The science of Thought-Placement has been taught in this cycle 
and some of the art. It properly is the attendant of a devitalizing 
body; but, as this cannot be done in the activities of life with other 
people about you, the only devitalization that is useful is a gentle 
relaxing of the body, such as is asked by the hypnotist when he 
stands you up with your arms outstretched. Some relaxing is al¬ 
ways possible while standing; but it should be slight and never 
enough to attract attention from others. 

The eyeballs themselves, when rolled up under closed lids, are 
always relaxed. This can be done when you close your eyes, for 
then no one can see the eyeballs. A slight lessening of the muscles 
of the neck, of the shoulders, of the arms and especially of the 
fingers will not be noticed. It must all be done so quickly that it 
is over with before one can think what to do; therefore a fixed habit 
should be acquired by much previous practice. The best funda¬ 
mental preparation is to be had in the cycle that teaches the de¬ 
vitalization of the body. 

Let that be thoroughly reviewed. 

In the coming pages, where this study goes into greater depths, 
the term, “empty the mind,” will be used in place of Thought- 
Placement, as the latter is a developing practice, which cannot be 
carried along through the practical application of the principles in¬ 
volved. 

The hypnotic side of the study will not be dropped, as that too 
has served as a stepping stone for the understanding and culture 
of the art of telepathy. Hypnotism contains the best form of illus¬ 
tration for this science of telepathy; and now we seek the practice 
of this power. The desirable thing to accomplish is the close com¬ 
ing together of the two minds. As it is agreed that one must give 
way to the other, the only course left is to bring the two as closely 
together as possible, and that is the work of the coming cycles. 

To empty the mind, it is necessary to send the thoughts to no- 
manVland, which is the cavern at the base of the mental dome. 

The foundation of success in this effort must be laid in the last 
cycle and in this cycle, combining the instruction of the two. 


THIRTEENTH CYCLE 



DEAS proceed in train. 

Belayed from point to point. 

Or else like broken streams 
They leap from place to place 
And passage give to all 
Who venture at their banks . 

EEPER AND DEEPER we plunge into the profound 
principles of nature, seeking light in the darkness 
where discovery has never before taken its way. By 
many thousands of experiments, all brought close home 
to the central life of man, the truth at last was 
found. Two great facts, and well substantiated facts, stared us in 
the face all the while, and it seemed more than tantalizing to be 
able to recognize the facts and not ascertain the crucial cause of 
the difficulty. 

1. It was everywhere apparent that the conscious mind was re¬ 
ceiving knowledge from the Other Mind. 

2. It was clearly proved that both these minds could be present 
at the same time. 

How could it happen that thoughts could come into the con¬ 
scious mind, when there was a wall between the two that seemed 
impenetrable ? 

It was to discover the cause of this phenomenon that countless 
thousands of experiments have been made for years. Ordinary sleep 
side-tracks the conscious mind, and then there come sometimes, 
though not often, wonderful revelations, wonderful warnings, wonder¬ 
ful floods of knowledge, wonderful discoveries; all in dreams that 
have no value except as they can be remembered. 

So deep are these dreams that the most reliable of them are born 
in the Sixth Degree, corresponding somewhat to the same degree 
in' hypnotic sleep. But that degree is so vague, so evanescent, that 





186 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


its freight cannot be carried over into the conscious mind unless the 
dreamer is able to wake up and note down in writing the details. 
Let him wait till morning and the vague memory has all vanished. 
The dreams that can be most daily recalled are worthless, as they 
are born in the conscious mind or in some of the mixed degrees. 

The commonest of all experiences are the introductions of ideas that 
are coming into the conscious mind, and are recognized, but that are 
not known to have come from the Other Mind. You may have a 
large number of thoughts enter your mind and not realize that many 
of them are transfers from the minds of other persons. There is no 
way that you can know that fact until someone mentions the very 
idea that has just come into your mind and you say, “I believe I 
got that idea from you.” It is of course surprising that some other 
person should speak aloud the very thought that has been for a minute 
or more filling your mind. Yet this thing is happening every day 
and countless times. There is no doubt about it, and every living 
being knows it is a common experience. 

Then we come back to the old inquiry. How can the Other Mind 
transfer its knowledge to the conscious mind when the two cannot 
come on the arena together? 

By a long line of proofs secured through many years, we have 
found the following great laws everywhere sustained: 

1. The conscious mind is the working mind charged to manage 
and perform the duties that arise from physical existence; and it is 
active only when the body is awake. When the body sleeps the physi¬ 
cal mind, otherwise called the conscious mind, is asleep also. 

2. The Other Mind never sleeps when the conscious mind sleeps. 
As the inflow of knowledge of all that other people think and do 
would prevent the conscious mind from performing its physical duties, 
a wise Creator has ordained that such knowledge shall not be in¬ 
truded on the working intelligence of physical life. 

3. But as some men and women are given greater work to do in 
this world than others about them, and as help from the general 
source of all-knowledge is needed at times to enable them to per¬ 
form the greater tasks that are imposed upon them, an all-wise 
Creator has made it possible for every person of earnest ambition and 
willingness to do the greater work of life, to obtain glimpses of the 
fund of all-knowledge. 

4. These glimpses cannot come when the conscious mind is alert; 
and if they come when the conscious mind is asleep they will be 


TEE TURNING POINTS 


187 


lost for lack of means to transfer them to the fields of human use¬ 
fulness; therefore the power to abstract the conscious mind for a 
brief period of time is given to every person. 

5. This power to abstract the conscious mind can be employed 
only at one phase of thought; and that is what is known as the 
turning point, which is the space in which the mind passes from one 
idea to another or from one state, to another. 

This is the discovery. 

The turning point is the only opportunity for the mind to be 
empty and it occurs naturally and without study or effort when the 
thought is being shifted from one idea to another. Nothing is more 
important than this discovery. The interval of time between the 
ending of one thought and the beginning of another is often so 
short that it has no appreciable part of a second; yet it can be 
measured. 

In the interval the thought ceases altogether because the subject 
about which it has busied itself has ended; and another idea is 
then taken up, or else the mind goes to sleep, or is held in a lapse. 
The latter is a dangerous condition and is treated in the most ad¬ 
vanced training of magnetism, known as Universal Magnetism. A 
lapse is a continued no-manVland of the mind. 

This interval occurs when a person is going to sleep at night, 
but it is of much shorter duration than is supposed. All dream 
processes are exceedingly short. As an example of this fact, a 
man dreamed that he had gone to a city to meet another man on a 
certain corner, and that he waited there for six hours by the clock, 
all the while seeing many people pass and many incidents occur, 
after which he awoke and ascertained that he had been asleep just 
two minutes. There are thousands of similar cases of dreams occupy¬ 
ing a seemingly long space of time that in fact are enacted in a 
minute or less. 

From this and other facts it is probable that the Other Mind 
knows no passing of time, and that an eternity might be reeled off 
in a brief period if measured by physical time. 

There is a special value attaching to this law of absence of time 
when the Other Mind is in control; for it will explain some of the 
long episodes of knowledge that have been transferred to the con¬ 
scious mind in the briefest possible interval. 

The space of time in which the mind is empty occurs at the exact 
instant when the thoughts shift; but will not occur in a train of 


188 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


thought. The latter carries the mind along without break. It often 
ends in strange reminiscences. 

The interval is encouraged when there is an end of thinking of 
one idea and the passing to some idea that is not connected. The 
train of thought follows from one idea to another that is the out¬ 
growth of the first. The few examples below will explain what is 
meant by the train of thought: 

1. My tooth aches. 

2. This means that I must go to the dentist. 

3. The dentist has his office next door to the theatre. 

4. I have not been to the theatre this year and I want to go when 
a good play comes along. 

5. The last play I saw was a good one and Mansfield was the star. 

6. Poor Mansfield is dead now; he died of hardening of the liver. 

7. They say that the liver hardens when one eats too much, or 
drinks too much alcohol. But there may be other causes. 

8. Mansfield was not a heavy eater, but I never heard about his 
habits of drinking. 

9. This moral awakening about drinking is the surprise of the pres¬ 
ent age. No one seems to account for it, except that a new genera¬ 
tion is growing up, whose predecessors left too long a trail of murders 
from the liquor habit to be forgotten by the children. 

10. This shows what great results might be obtained if all the 
children were given proper training on the moral questions of the 
day. 

It is a far cry from the toothache to the philosophy of training 
the rising generation; but the train is connected all along the way, 
and there is not an interval. Consequently the mind has no oppor¬ 
tunity to go to “no-man’s-land” during this series of ideas. 

The following is an example of a run of thoughts not one of 
which has any relationship to the other before or after it: 

1. The heat is very uncomfortable to-day. 

2. I wonder what time they will have dinner. 

3. Here is a button off my coat. 

4. I saw Jones yesterday and he was pretty well tanned by his 
summer vacation. 

These ideas could go on indefinitely in this way. But most people 
think along trains of connected thoughts; sometimes starting with 
an occurrence just at hand and following through many changes by 
coherence until they arrive at surprisingly distant themes. This is 


THE TURNING POINTS 


189 


called a wandering of the mind in a normal way. The disconnected 
line of thinking is known as “scattered thoughts/’ and is still nor¬ 
mal. You can force the mind to adopt either process at will. 

It is only by the scattered thoughts that you make intervals. In 
the exercises of the preceding cycle the five events of the day, the 
five of the year and the five of the long past were fifteen scattered 
thoughts, the purpose plainly being to make fourteen intervals, 
although no use was made of these; but the dumping of the mind 
into “no-man’s-land” was making it enter an interval after it had 
traveled a highway of intervals. It was building up a process that 
would tend to make the mind easy to send to a blank condition. 
This was aided by devitalization. 

A person who is fainting will devitalize, and here an interval oc¬ 
curs in the mind. 

A person who is falling asleep will devitalize, and here an interval 
takes place. 

A person who devitalizes at the time his mind enters the emptied 
condition, is in the same state as those just referred to. 

It is in the interval that hypnotic suggestions are made, for the 
hypnotic sleep is one long interval in which the mind is empty, or in 
“no-man’s-land.” 

Natural sleep is an interval in which suggestions may be made; 
and where they will not awaken the patient, to catch him just as the 
mind is entering the interval will make the strongest impression. 
Children are given many suggestions at such a time, and the results 
are remarkable. 

It is in the interval during full consciousness that the telepathic 
communication flashes into the mind. There is no hypnosis, no 
falling asleep, no loss of memory or thought, but just the interstice 
in which the telepathy occurs. 

One of the first proofs of this wonderful fact came about after 
hard searching, and as follows: 

In a house of ten rooms there were twenty people sitting in a half 
light, two in a room, and all doors open. They were close together, 
and talked in subdued tones. They had all mastered the art of 
devitalizing in the finest degree. They leaned back in their chairs 
and were resting, so as not to accidently vitalize any part of the body. 
While sitting in this way, it was agreed that they should speak to 
each other with pauses of about a minute and remarks of less than 
a minute, and on any subject they chose. If any one had in mind 


190 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


prior to utterance by another of an idea that was spoken, it was to be 
put down as the work of telepathy. 

This was one of our telepathic clubs organized for purposes of 
experimenting. The club met two evenings in each week. At the 
stage of the investigation when the foregoing trials were being made, 
the purpose that was being kept in mind was to ascertain, if possible, 
under what circumstances thoughts passed from one mind to an¬ 
other. As soon as there was such a transfer, the remarks just pre¬ 
ceding and at the time were written down for future examination. 
The members were not told to confine their talks to trains of thoughts, 
or to scattered thoughts, but to go on talking as they pleased at this 
stage. 

Here are some of the transfers made by the several couples, as far 
as they had such results to report: 

1. Mr. A. was speaking of an article on a message to Congress 
that had appeared in the evening paper. Mr. B. suddenly asked, 
“By the way, has the President sent any further message to Con¬ 
gress?” This was regarded as a case of transfer of thought, despite 
the fact that such messages were common at the time. 

Later on in the same evening Mr. B., in the room with A., was 
thinking of Peary and his pending trip to the far North, when B. 
asked, “I wonder where Peary is at this very moment, and if he is all 
right?” Owing to the circumstances, there could be no doubt that 
it was a clear case of telepathy. 

In another room Mr. C. was thinking of some friends in Chicago, 
Mr. H. said, “I have not been to Chicago for two years.” This also 
was a clear case of telepathy. 

In a month this club had reported fifty-nine cases of this power 
of thought transference; some of them rather intricate in that there 
were groups of ideas and in one instance a problem of some difficulty 
was taken up as in a flash and solved. 

But the main purpose was not to merely find instances of telepathy, 
but to ascertain at what junctures in the conversation they occurred; 
and there was a remarkable similarity of experiences in which a com¬ 
plete shifting of the thought brought the transfer by the wireless 
route, which is a popular name for telepathy. 

Here we received the first inkling of the existence of the interval 
in which the conscious mind empties itself long enough to receive 
the knowledge that is flashed into it from some other person by 
the channel of the Other Mind. Over and over again the tests were 


THE TURNING POINTS 


191 


made, and many other meetings held until no longer any doubt 
existed. 

The law was found. 

It was a great discovery; and, in the light of many thousands of 
experiments now in vogue, it will lead to a new philosophy, for it is 
the key that unlocks the universe. 

The interval occurs at the turning point in one’s thoughts. 

The turning point is the shifting from one idea to another that 
has no connection with it. It is turning between two different 
thoughts. 

In order to make your mind receptive, you must find the interval; 
and in order to find the interval you must make a turning point in 
your thoughts. In so doing you are coinciding with every natural 
process in life that brings on the phenomenon of telepathy. You 
are coinciding with all the work of the past in the realms of this 
science, and in all the habits of humanity from the beginning of 
time. 

Before we go deeper, let the definitions be fixed in your mind: 
DEFINITIONS. 

First .—The interval is the empty condition of the mind. 

Second .—The turning point is the change from one thought to 
another thought in no way like it. 

The turning point makes the interval. 

In the interval there is no thinking at all; and it is then that 
the unconscious mind is out of the way, even if for only a short 
time. To the Other Mind time is as nothing and as eternity com¬ 
bined. Years of the past are lived over again by the drowning man 
in two or three seconds. Hours are made to drag slowly along in 
a dream that lasts for less than two minutes. 

It makes no difference how long or how short may be the interval; 
for in it the Other Mind is supreme. The shorter the interval, the 
more power the conscious mind has over the presence of the Other 
Mind, and the easier it will be to catch the knowledge that comes 
at such a space. In this way we see the same absence of the con¬ 
scious mind as in telepathy through hypnotism, and suggestion under 
all conditions. 

There are only two things to do to be able to know all there is 
to know in earth and heaven: 

l t To side-track the conscious mind. 


192 


OPERATIONS OF TIIE OTHER MIND 


2. To bring the Other Mind upon the arena in such a manner 
that its presence will be recognized by the conscious mind. 

It is like the serf and the king. The serf had a parlor in his 
house, and the king wanted to use it but wished to be alone. As 
both serf and king could not use the parlor at the same time, the 
serf withdrew until the king had come and gone. Then the serf 
came back and said to himlself: “The king has been here. He was 
talking to himself. If I could translate the silences of this room I 
could know the secrets of State.” 

Had the serf been present at the same time with the king and 
could have heard him talking to himself of the mighty matters of 
State, he would have received the knowledge direct. But he was 
compelled to remain outside while the king was inside. So with 
the two minds. Nature, for the reasons described in previous pages, 
cannot have the working mind weighted down with the knowledge of 
the universe, and she deprives it of the boundless sweep of fact and 
thought all about it; except that, when the king has been in and is 
making his exit still talking, it may be possible for the serf to 
hear a few of the last words. 

And this is enough. 

It explains why one mind catches glimpses of another mind. And 
it is in the interval when the king is allowed to enter, that the flash 
of a thought comes in. Yet there are many cases where longer in¬ 
tervals have brought longer deliveries of knowledge as we shall see 
as we proceed. Here we are discussing the simple flashes of ideas 
from one mind to another. 

Having discovered the interval and found that it occurs as the 
result of an empty mind in the turning point of thought, the next 
step was to confirm the discovery in all the episodes of life where 
such phenomenon may arise. Many other experiments were made 
and the same law held true. There was the interval always appear¬ 
ing at the turning point. 

It was so in general life. It was so when some man suddenly made 
a mistake that cost him loss. It was so when consent was given that 
should have been withheld. It was so when a subtle influence was 
exerted over one who was thought capable of taking care of herself. 

In the turning point there come every day the many suggestions 
from the minds and wills of others; and, as in everything else, he who 
is strongest, wins the most. It is human nature. It is the law of 
life. 


TEE TURNING POINTS 


193 


All the mistakes of earthly ventures have been made in that turning 
point. All the victories of magnetism are so made. He who has the 
greater magnetic power has always the greatest advantage to give 
or to receive. Magnetism is a double action. It has both the posi¬ 
tive and the negative currents. One drives away, the other brings in. 

Thus we see that the turning point may have two processes: 

1. In that interval the thoughts and purposes of others and the 
knowledge of events may be taken in. 

2. In that interval the commands and demands of others may be 
forced in. 

Whoever has the interval is sure to have the in-coming current; 
and what that in-coming current shall be is the matter to be left 
to the magnetism of the possessor or of others. 

These facts, although of recent discovery, coincide with all that is 
known of magnetism and with the thousand varied vicissitudes of 
hypnotism and all its attendant train of circumstances. Being im¬ 
bued with the importance of this discovery over and above all other 
laws of human life, we have pushed with the utmost vigor all the 
tests and experiments that are possible, and many new and startling 
coincidences have been ascertained. 

It has been found that all the visions, the apparitions, the so- 
called ghosts, and other phenomena occur in the interval alluded to, 
and last no longer. When the conditions are favorable the mind is in 
the interval, and will take in the message from the Other Mind. Be¬ 
ing only an interval, the conscious mind is able to grasp it as there 
is the closest possible connection between the two minds at that 
time. Books could be written of the many experiences that have 
been based on this one little, apparently insignificant fact. 

The deep dreams, as has been said, are those that occur in deep 
sleep. Sometimes the ideas that come then are grand and worthy 
of full attention on waking; but many such a dream has never been 
remembered on awakening. In a few instances in a person’s life, 
dreams of vast moment come, and they are followed by wakefulness. 
You have had such, but not many. You have waked up in the night 
and realized the greatness of the dream, then fallen asleep again. 
When morning came you have recalled the fact that you have.dreamed, 
and there lingers a half memory of what it was about; but its details 
and chief point have vanished. By the time you have dressed and 
gone down stairs, all parts of the dream have gone forever; and you 
retain the memory of the fact that you did dream, but no more. 


194 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


This is the experience of countless thousands of people. 

One of the foremost inventors, seeking to secure the salient point 
in the working of a new machine, fell asleep all worn out. In his 
dream the solution of his invention came to him, and in the joy of 
his discovery he awoke. He saw every detail perfectly; and resolved 
to put it in writing on getting up the next morning, as he was so 
tired that he could not attend to it at the moment. So off he went 
to sleep again, and woke up refreshed the next morning. On going 
to his desk to record the discovery he found his memory of it so faded 
that he could not give a definite account of any part of it. In an¬ 
other hour the faded portion had all vanished, and nothing lived 
in his mind except the knowledge that he had dreamed and made 
the discovery of which he had been robbed by his conscious mind. 

In the case of another inventor who fell asleep in the middle of 
the forenoon at his desk, and who had a dream in which a most 
important fact came to him to assist in completing an invention 
which would have been worth millions to him, he was awakened by 
the entrance to his room of a woman who was begging. He at¬ 
tended to her wants and then went to his paper to note down what he 
had learned in his dream; hut, to his horror, he found the idea was 
fast fading. He jotted down a few words, and all had gone. It was 
too late. 

There is no inventor of any success in the world who does not 
have paper and pencil with him night and day. If an idea comes to 
him, no matter where he is, he writes it down then and there. One 
man was at dinner in the White House, and surprised the other guests 
by this same act; and made the explanation that, if he did not 
note down the idea then, it would be gone and lost. The affair was 
looked upon as a good bit of pleasantry, and was excused by the 
President. 

The geniuses of the world are those who have been quick to take 
advantage of this closeness of the two minds. It seems that the 
coming of the Other Mind is like the coming of an echo; we catch the 
fading of the fact rather than the fact itself. 

You have many times when busy had a remark addressed to you 
which you have not heard, although its sound has reached your ears. 
But if some one says that you did not hear because you were inatten¬ 
tive, you may be able to retrace from out the echo-land of your 
mind the last few words that were spoken, and so make reply to 
the charge of not hearing. 


THE TURNING POINTS 


195 


A teacher was explaining some rather dull matters to the class, 
and one of the boys spent the time in drawing pictures on a piece of 
paper which he held under his desk, out of sight. The teacher, sus¬ 
pecting that something was distracting his attention, said: “Brown, 
you are not listening. What did I say last?” The boy, at the 
sound of his name, knew what was coming, and his mind caught the 
echo of the very last statement the teacher had made, and he re¬ 
peated it to her. Had she made some intervening remark of no 
consequence, and then asked what she had just been saying before 
that, the inattentive boy would have been caught. Or had she 
asked him to repeat what she had said prior to her last remark, 
he could not have done it. She had very little knowledge of human 
nature, and so could not rise to a high rank as a teacher. 

The case will serve as an example of the echo in the mind of the 
last words a person speaks, when absolutely no attention has been 
paid to what was being said. It is not half-attention, or part- 
attention, but an echo in the mind. This is proved by many tests 
where men were given hard problems in mathematics that required 
their whole attention even to exhausting all extraneous thoughts; and 
they were occasionally asked what some one said who was talking 
in a low voice some distance away. They could always repeat the 
last words, and some of them could recall the last fifteen or more 
words, although not one could tell what had preceded the last part 
of the remarks. Had they divided their attention they could have 
told what had been said throughout the whole time, or from point to 
point in it. When, after a delay long enough to let the echo fade 
from the mind, they were asked what was said, not one could re¬ 
call a thing. 

We have seen school girls talking in groups in an undertone while 
some subject was being discussed; and on being charged with in¬ 
attention, they could recall the last few words of the instructor. 
They knew this fact, as they made a boast of it. One of them said, 
“I can talk all the time the lecturer is talking, and I will not hear 
a word or know what he is saying, but if anyone asks me what was last 
said I can always tell, as the words seem to be in my mind then. 
They soon go, though, and I have to be asked soon or they fade away.” 

This is a common experience and is cited here to show what is 
meant by the lingering echo in the mind. You may be intensely 
interested in what you are doing while someone is talking; and, two 
minutes after the last remark just before an interruption, you 


196 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


could not recall a single word uttered; but, if asked at once, you 
could repeat half a dozen or more of the words. 

The conscious mind holds the echo of the words from another 
mind, and it will fix them only when an attempt is made to do 
so without delay. 

In a dream the Other Mind may impart something of the greatest 
value; and the deeper the sleep is, the more valuable is the sugges¬ 
tion that comes from the Other Mind, but the more speedily it will 
vanish. In order to secure it, you must write down the details as soon 
as you first awaken, for the fading echo is slipping out of the con¬ 
scious mind. 

The quickness with which the impression fades is the remarkable 
part of it. 

These two tests are open to every student of this work. 

If you dream, note the character of the dream. If it has value 
to you, not as a warning or other emotional affair, but as an inspira¬ 
tion to some duty, some discovery, some invention, some idea for 
business, or in your profession, or otherwise, you can measure the 
depth of the sleep out of which it was born by that value. And this 
will show you how speedily it will fade when you awake unless you 
hold to it by writing it down. These three characteristics should not 
be forgotten: 

1. The sleep is profound. 

2. The dream will hold matters of value. 

3. The dream will vanish on awakening. 

In another combination we have these three characteristics: 

1. The sleep is ordinary. 

2. The dream will be ordinary. 

3. The dream will not vanish immediately on awakening. 

Then there are these three characteristics: 

1. The sleep is very light. 

2. The dream is valueless and generally fantastic, or rough, or 
of the nightmare order. 

3. The dream will not vanish at all, but will stay with you longer 
than you have any use for its memory. 

In this latter combination come the many things that frighten 
people and make them study dream books for interpretations or 
what may be ascribed to a bad diet. 

Then there is the final combination of characteristics: 

1. The sleep is very deep and profound. 


TEE TURNING POINTS 


197 


2. The Other Mind is in full control all the time, and its knowl¬ 
edge is so valuable that, if it could be obtained, it would open the 
doors to the whole universe. 

3. The dream will not be echoed in the conscious mind at all, and 
so will not involve the question of fading, for the Other Mind has 
such complete and absolute possession that there is no opportunity 
for the conscious mind to enter the arena. But, as has happened 
in some cases, if a sudden alarm should awaken the sleeper, there 
would be some echo in the wakened conscious mind of the presence 
of the Other Mind. This would begin to vanish at once. A case 
has come to our positive knowledge of a man who, after working for 
twenty-two consecutive hours on hard mental labors, fell asleep in 
his chair, and the sleep was so sound that shaking would not 
awaken him. He was let alone for three more hours, and it was 
now full daylight. A man being close by noticed the movement 
of his hand towards his pen. A half glass of very cold water was 
thrown into his face over the eyes, and he awoke in less than a 
second. He grasped the pen and wrote down a series of discon¬ 
nected words; then added more words to these as he repeated them, 
until he had secured the idea. 

“I have struggled ten years for that one idea,” he said, “and it 
is worth more to me than all the rest of my life.” After events proved 
the truth of the remark. 

These grades of sleep are important in their relation to the grades 
of presence of the Other Mind. The latter is probably always fully 
present when the conscious mind is fully away. 

By referring back to the degrees of hypnotism it will be seen that 
the Sixth Degree is unmixed, the patient having no memory of what 
occurred in it; while the Fifth Degree was like a dream that was 
hazy and vague. The other degrees were more mixed as they came 
to the First which was a grade of control where there was full con¬ 
sciousness. This mixing is not to imply the presence at the same 
time of both minds, but the exchange of intervals. 

In the First Degree of hypnotism, the conscious mind is always 
there, but as the suggestions and ideas change, the Other Mind 
enters at the intervals, and always at the turning points in the use of 
ideas. 

In the Second Degree the intervals are more frequent, and this 
kind of mixing ocdurs up to the final degree, when the depths of the 
control is like a deep sleep such as we have just described. 


198 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


In the Sixth Degree it is proved that the Other Mind is always 
and fully present and in complete control; and this has led to a 
higher line of study as is stated in the First Cycle. There is positive 
proof of the full presence of the Other Mind in that degree; and there 
are many reasons for believing, and some for knowing, that the Other 
Mind is likewise fully present in the deepest natural sleep. 

The Sixth Degree has been tapped and the Other Mind found 
there. 

The deepest natural sleep has been tapped and the Other Mind 
found there. 

The Sixth Degree and natural sleep are both prolonged intervals. 

It will later on he seen that intervals are of all lengths in the 
duration of time; and yet, on the other hand, they may furnish 
an immense outpouring of knowledge from the Other Mind in a very 
brief second. 

The shortest and the most important for practical everyday pur¬ 
poses are those intervals that occur in a run of scattered thoughts 
whether spoken or merely allowed to range through the mind. 

It must not be forgotten that the length of the interval may be of 
no consequence, as the Other Mind knows nothing of time. If 
years of one’s past life can be reviewed in a few seconds, and long 
transactions be experienced over again in minute detail in that 
brief span, it would make no difference how short the interval is as 
far as its usefulness may he concerned. 

In a train of thought one idea leads to the other and an interval 
is not possible there. But in scattered thoughts, one idea must come 
to an end, and another idea be taken up, and it is a physical im¬ 
possibility for this to he done without some interval in which the 
mind is in “no-man’s-land,” or the deep, dark cavern shown in 
our diagram in the cycle preceding this. 

It is like putting something out of your hand and taking up 
something different in the same hand. One must be dropped before 
the other can be grasped. No matter how quickly you drop one and 
take up the next one, there is some space of time between. But if a 
stream of water, or sand, or separate articles in succession are run¬ 
ning through the hand, that is a train of thought in comparison, and 
no interval need occur. 

Most of our students will put into actual practice all the teach¬ 
ings set forth in this work, and to those who decide to do this we 
wish to urge the necessity of thoroughly mastering each cycle as you 


THE TURNING POINTS 


199 


proceed. There is much in every one of them to do, and they should 
be studied long enough for the science laid down to be understood 
and then the art taken up. 

In this line of practice, no progress will be possible if the full de¬ 
velopment of devitalization is not insisted upon. 

After that, the mind should be trained by self-practice to recog¬ 
nize the following activities: 

1. You must learn to know in a flash when your own mind is 
thinking in a train of thought. 

2. Also when your mind is thinking in scattered thoughts. 

3. When you are speaking to other persons in a train of thought. 

4. When you are speaking to other persons in scattered thoughts. 

5. When others are speaking in a train of thought. 

6. When others are speaking in scattered thoughts. 

There is not one step in this work that is difficult. It is all easy 
and even fascinating. It soon becomes satisfying, and you will 
enjoy following out these details. You will analyze men and women 
by a habit. It is vastly to your advantage to not make these facts 
known, as they place other people in the rank of unnecessary compe¬ 
tition to yourself, and to your loss. 

The most gratifying thing about this procedure is the readiness 
with which the mind will take up the habit of analyzing your own 
thoughts and those of others. It will be like the errors of grammar. 
If you are acquainted with the rules of speech and break them, then 
learn that you must watch your conversation and detect your own 
errors: you will in an incredibly short time acquire the habit, and 
you will know in the instant when you make an error of speech; and 
a little later you will know when you are going to make an error. 

This same law of the mind holds true, even with greater force, in 
recognizing how you are thinking, how you are speaking, and how 
other persons are speaking; whether in trains of ideas or in scattered 
thoughts. 

In a short time you will involuntarily, which means by sheer force 
of habit, take in this recognition like a flash, and then you will be 
the master of others about you. No man or woman can shape your 
thoughts or exert an influence over them. On the contrary you will 
be in a position to achieve two great ends: 

1. You will direct the minds of others. 

2. You will be able to know the minds of others even when they 
are seeking to keep them from you. 


FOURTEENTH CYCLE 


PITFALLS OF THE MIND 



OT ONLY in the fields 
And on the highways hide 
The pitfalls for our feet, 

But in the mind as well 
They lurlc and bide their time 
To catch us unawares. 



AVING- conclusive proofs of the occurrence of the in¬ 
terval in the operations of thinking, and that the inter¬ 
val happens when there comes a turning point in the 
line of thought, due to scattered thinking, it would 
seem that the wise man and woman will look out for the 
pitfalls known as wandering ideas, for these lead to an abundance of 
other pitfalls. Yet there are two sides to this question: 

1. By using the intervals under control it is possible to seize the 
thoughts of other persons. 

2. By permitting the intervals to come involuntarily, the mind is 
always approaching pitfalls that cause the many troubles of life. 

It will now be supposed that you have carefully studied and prac¬ 
ticed all that has gone before in the course of training, and that 
you are able to recognize by habit, rather than by attention, every 
series of ideas that come to your mind. 

Are they trains of thought? 

Or are they scattered ideas ? 

The latter are usually wandering and serve no useful purpose 
unless you are making intervals voluntarily. Scattered thoughts 
are in three classes: 

1. Those that come to you by your own aimlessness. 

2. Those that other persons thrust upon you either by design or 
by accident. 

3. Those that you yourself make in order to receive the thoughts 








PITFALLS OF TEE MIND 


201 


of others. These are always held in leash and may easily be swung 
back into trains. 

The first class leads to all sorts of ends. As a rule the train is 
made weaker, and the power of reasoning is lessened. The law of 
cause and effect is laid aside. Yet it must be said that, in the mo¬ 
ments and often the wasted hours of dreamers, inventions, dis¬ 
coveries and inspiration have flashed into the mind. But it does so 
in about one case in a million. The boy or girl who is allowed to 
entertain wandering thoughts will follow the bent of almost any 
influence, be it good or bad. Let us look into some of these 
instances. 

A mother is at work. In the next room her daughter is doing 
nothing. The mother suspects that this is the case and asks: 

“What are you doing?” 

“Nothing.” 

“Why do you not play?” 

“I am tired of play.” 

“Why do you not do your lessons ?” 

“I am tired of lessons.” 

“Then why do you not sleep for awhile?” 

“I did. I am tired of sleep.” 

It was at this point that the mother’s care was needed, for the child 
was sure to take a wrong turn in the activities of the mind. The 
world is so constituted that evil is far more attractive than good. 
It is possible to be good, but, as the old saying goes, you cannot 
have such a nice time. Vice is below, and goodness above the aver¬ 
age walks of life; and the mind, like anything else, left to itself, 
follows the law of gravity. 

1. Scattered thoughts tend downward. 

2. Trains of thought tend upward. 

3. It is when trains of thought become partly scattered that they 
tend backward. 

4. To guard against the dangers of wandering thoughts every 
boy and girl, every man and woman in middle or adult life, and 
every old person should have a fixed daily goal and a fixed life goal. 
It is quite true that these things are not adopted even to a slight 
extent by the average people; but a very few have done so, and with 
the most remarkable results. 

Where there is a goal ahead, the thoughts, when left free, always 
turn toward it. This is a most wonderful law. It has been taught 


202 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


in some of our earlier works, but not as a system; and, where it has 
been adopted, it has seemed to bear out the very ancient saying that 
what a person resolves to do in this world, no matter how difficult, will 
come to pass. OSToted cases were cited of such successes against all 
odds; and they served to inspire some of our students to make the 
trial. But they did not have the anchorage to persist, and this is 
the way one, whose views seemed to stand for all those who failed, 
put the matter: “It is all right to say that a person will accomplish 
in life whatever the mind is made up to do; but a person cannot go 
about all day resolving to do some particular thing, for he would have 
his attention distracted from his daily duties.” 

Such a course would be the supplanting of the required attention 
of each day with a mere dream. The lad who made up his mind 
to become a great banker, but did not let the thought of it interfere 
with his studies; yet, whenever his time was free or he had nothing 
else to ponder over, he reverted to that subject, and it kept him from 
wandering thoughts. It is like an elastic band which, no matter how 
far it may be stretched, returns to its base when free. 

There is nothing so dreary, and so dangerous at the same time, 
as the empty mind, whether it comes empty in brief intervals of scat¬ 
tered thinking, or in lapses which are prolonged. If you have a 
goal for the day, there will be the constant rebound to that goal; or if 
for life, then in the deeper trend of the mind, hovering over you as a 
lifted guide to light the way. If you have no goal of any kind, then 
each interval is a restless void in which you long for something 
to do to pass away the hours. You are dull and all about you is 
dull, and you seek diversion. The monotony of it is awful. The 
cry of the nerves is for something to do, to be going on, or a means 
of entertainment and excitement. The busy mind is never alone. It 
knows nothing of the dragging hours. Look out on the street at 
night and see the thousands of people filing in the theatre to be 
given some diversion that will help to kill time. To the gallery 
are going a stream of young men earning eight dollars a week and 
more, who will never be worth more than they are paid, and who 
find the day dull and the night a bore unless they can be amused 
and excited. They would scorn a book and an hour a day of read¬ 
ing and study^ because it is tiresome and they do not need it 
to get along in the world. In the main body of the house are many 
persons who have been bored by the monotony of life and who fly out 
to be amused. They have funds for one night a week, which they 


PITFALLS OF TEE MIND 


203 


really cannot spare; and the other six nights the man is at home 
reading the penny paper through and through, and his wife lolls over 
her novel which she secured in a library. Both these humans need 
more knowledge than they possess. If the woman were to prepare 
herself for a high salaried position in case she is suddenly thrown on 
her resources, she would he a nobler type of life and have an invest¬ 
ment that could not be stolen from her possession. If the man were 
to get some real, genuine grammar in his head, and a knowledge 
of rhetoric which he regards as slush, and a more accurate idea of 
English, as well as other accomplishments, he might rise in his 
position. As it is he is paid more than he is worth no matter what 
his wages are. He may be in the employment of the government or 
in some office where he is vastly overpaid; and there he will decay. 

The world is full of such people. Ho goal for the day. Ho goal for 
life. A dream of something wholly out of their atmosphere. A 
circle of cigar smoke, and that’s comfort, while the feet are being 
toasted by the fire which they owe the coal dealer for. The world is 
filled to the brim with young men, young women, grown-up, and 
mature folks, who sneer at progress, at better brains, at getting ready 
for a higher rank in the world; and who will waste their golden 
hours when opportunity is rich in promise and lounge away their 
prospects. You cannot change them. Their minds run in down¬ 
grade thoughts, and will so run until they ask aid from the public 
charities or end their lives as thousand like them are doing every 
year. 

But there are some men and women who have ambitions to get 
on in the world, and who grasp at suggestions that will help them. 
They are quick to see the power of a natural law and to take advan¬ 
tage of it. It is to them we are speaking. If you should be one of 
the common run of people and have the self-force to rise out of your¬ 
self, you may avoid this pitfall. 

Your life should have its one great goal toward which you stead¬ 
fastly steer; and your day should have its smaller goal. Then you 
cannot be unhappy, and you will not be restless. Time will not have 
to be killed. And, better than all, your thoughts, when they cease 
to run in trains, will always rebound to the light of something that 
is waiting to receive their attention. It is just as if a man had a 
home and in the home a wife and with the wife a child; and when 
duty released him from its daily chains, he looked over to that home 
and hastened to be greeted there. How lonely is that other kind of 


204 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


man who has no magnet in a home to attract him to its doors! And 
how lonely is that individual whose thoughts, when they come to 
waiting places, find only the vacancy of “no-manVland!” 

Great men walk by pitfalls and not a few of them drop in. 

When a man has the mental acumen to build up a colossal fortune, 
it would seem that he ought to have enough good sense to look after 
himself in other ways. But as soon as his goal, wealth, has been 
reached, he has exhausted his ambition, and the intervals then are 
filled not by a rebounding hope of higher ends in life, but by tempta¬ 
tions from the weaker sex. One of the merchant princes of the west, 
after amassing a giant fortune, having had the blessings of a wife and 
being, not alone but merely wifeless, thought it a wise move to wed 
again. No old man has the vitality to endure late wedlock. Physi¬ 
cians who knew of this case, said it was suicide; and the result was 
that a man who ought to have had twenty years before him, died in a 
few months. His case is only one of thousands just like it. 

The woman is always the active party when a millionaire old man 
is led into marriage. She has laid her plans well. She knows how to 
take advantage of his friendship. When once, in that fatal interval of 
the mind that comes to all who are not on their guard, she has caused 
him to commit himself, then he, as a man of honor, a gallant, cannot 
take a backward step. It is all over so far as his independence is 
concerned. 

“I have committed myself, and cannot now withdraw,” is the 
constant excuse. 

Yes, but it was in the mind’s interval that you committed your¬ 
self. That interval was a pitfall and you entered it. It is far better 
to turn back dishonorably than to go on dishonorably. Many a man 
has been caught in an interval and will not hedge. He lets a bad 
beginning make a worse end. He promised, to get rid of a man, to 
endorse his note; and, as he promised, he cannot now back out; and 
so he puts his name to a piece of paper that causes him later on 
to pay five thousand dollars, and the home that he had built about the 
heads of his wife and children has to go. Why? Because this man, 
in an interval of thought, was caught and gave his word which he did 
not wish to break; so he broke up his home. 

This is the most common pitfall that awaits the steps of well- 
meaning men and women. 

Here is how it works. 

A man who was really an accomplished and a very magnetic beg- 


PITFALLS OF THE MIND 


205 


gar, approached a man of wealth, and tried to interest him in some 
enterprise that he himself had no interest in; and, when he had 
aroused a vivid degree of attention in what seemed a grand oppor¬ 
tunity to make money, the beggar suddenly swung into the fact that 
he himself was trying to do something else which needed a few 
dollars, and in order to get the few dollars he would dispose of some 
small property of value which he had with him. But for the cleverness 
of the beggar, the man of wealth would not have been caught, as such 
preliminaries now are very common, and the swing about of the 
conversation is expected in this era of sharp dealings. But this 
man’s mind entered the interval; and, before it had emerged, he 
had merely said he would certainly help the matter along by a small 
contribution of ten dollars. In less than five seconds afterward he 
regretted saying it; but, as he had committed himself, he stood 
by his word. 

An aged Senator worth many millions in money, and presumably 
an able man, had been kind to a young lady who was poor but ambi¬ 
tious. The friendship ripened, not into love, but into confidence; 
and each step from the very first was taken by the pitfall of an 
interval, in which he committed himself, and made it so difficult to 
retrace his steps that he went on into deeper entanglements. It is 
even claimed that a marriage took place on sudden impulse, but the 
facts are now known to very few persons. The beginning of this 
romance was the merest trifle; it might have been a small act, 
entirely without sincerity as an intended offer of personal regard; 
yet it made retracing very hard. 

A Senator who had been married and raised a family, had mil¬ 
lions of dollars to spend in honoring his station; but in an idle 
moment of the mind committed himself to a young girl who had 
never seen society and whose ambition is not in the same direction 
as that of the husband; thus handicapping him and his first family, 
and sending them into social seclusion. He was altogether too old 
to marry his latest wife, and would not have done so if his mind had 
been deliberate. 

A man who had piled up millions and who had built palaces all 
over the civilized world, spending money with a hand most lavish, 
having a good wife and family, thought it a simple thing to chuck 
a little girl under the chin. Had he stopped to think, he would not 
have done it. But having done it, and the litle girl having been in 
the world long enough to know the value of the friendship of a man 


206 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


who had more millions than he could ever spend, asked him one day 
for a small favor. She was pretty, exceedingly pretty, and he knew 
it. When she asked him for this favor, his thoughts flew to the 
four winds and did not come back to him until he had promised. He 
was a man of the world, keen and deep in all business affairs when 
his thoughts ran in regular channels; but when the pretty miss asked 
him for the favor he was beside himself with delight. It was a 
mere nothing, and she made it so. Then he came to himself and 
asked his own judgment, “Is not this little beauty a designing young 
girl who is after my millions, or some of them? I will see.”—He 
saw her the next day and asked her age, and found it was seventeen. 
What had she learned about the world? Very little. She was a pure- 
minded, innocent angel. Then he wanted to know if she had learned 
much of his financial condition, and so she was asked about that.— 
“You are the kind gentleman who sells papers at the stand, are you 
not; very poor, but very honest and trustworthy.”—It seems that 
one morning he had gone behind the news counter and helped him¬ 
self to the papers that he wanted, as the vendor was away for a 
moment, and the little girl had seen him there. She, as events after¬ 
ward proved, had known him to be a millionaire, and long before the 
newspaper episode, she had known this. Her woman’s wit, active in 
one so young, had told her that if he suspected that she was after 
his money, he would spurn her; so she pretended that she thought he 
was poor and that she liked him despite that fact. The idea of 
being a newspaper seller, suited him and he thought he would keep up 
the disguise. He was deceiving her. She was deceiving him; but she 
knew of his deception, and he did not know of hers. One day she 
asked him for some little favor, never money, and as she was ill her 
request was written. The messenger, an older sister, had but a half 
a minute to spare, and the millionaire, in another interval of mind, 
sent a note, not signed, but clearly in his handwriting. Matters went 
on until something else happened, and it cost him an enormous sum 
of money to settle with the petite maiden. In the business world 
such a victory over him would have been impossible. 

Another man, having been for a moment captivated by the charms 
of a fair young lady, wrote a brief line, and she got away with it. 
In five seconds after she had gone, he would have given a hundred 
thousand dollars to have had it back. It cost him more than that, a 
broken home, ill health and shortened life; for he never stood as well 
before the public after that. It was the pitfall of the interval. 


PITFALLS OF THE MIND 


207 


A young man, having a mother whom he loved and for whom he 
would have sacrificed all his property and his existence too, in an 
interval—during which a practical joke had angered him, struck 
her and felled her to the floor. The horror of it never left his mind. 

Clergymen who go wrong, and many do and always will, are more 
or less emotional and trusting. To them the hypnotic interval works 
the greatest michief. They are bound to believe in humanity. That 
is what their religion teaches them. So when the maiden or the 
grown woman comes for advice and is emotional also, the one slight 
act that sets the world aflame, is committed. A kiss of the hand or 
brow, an arm around the waist in tender sympathy, or some familiarity 
that undoes the man’s nature. Then it is too late to turn back. 
He is lost if the facts ever leak out. He must carry the secret alone, 
except when she is with him sub rosa, his wife and family may know 
of it after his death, and his church work is all a mockery. One small 
interval does the damage. We were personally acquainted with 
Henry Ward Beecher, and knew him in his great trial. Hfe had been 
indiscreet. In an interval he had written a sentence that was to out¬ 
live him. In an interval he had kissed the lips of a woman not his 
wife. But that he had done more, we do not believe, as the man’s 
character was a living denial of that allegation. He was full of sym¬ 
pathy, full of emotion, and capable of arousing the emotional nature 
of his hearers through the deepest power. Among those who knew 
him as he really was, Beecher was a mere child in his mental sympathy 
for others; but if you tell this to people who cannot understand the 
man, you get back a derisive chuckle of derision. The great are mis¬ 
judged by the minds of wasps. 

In court trials the effect of the interval is often seen. The best 
means of studying mental processes is to be present in a big trial 
where able lawyers clash with themselves and with able witnesses. 
Beecher was cross-examined by Judge Fullerton, the most skilful 
attorney in his day in this work. He laid many traps for Beecher 
of the same kind that thousands of the keenest minds had fallen into; 
but the divine did not walk into one of them. Fullerton said that 
Beecher’s mind traveled ahead of his in all the questioning. The 
lawyer shifted his inquiries often, as the reports will show; but the 
famous pastor injected his own ideas and never lost track of one 
idea, and that was the intention of the lawyer to entangle him. 

In another famous case Judge Fullerton found a very capable 
witness who could not be lead into any of the traps of cross-examina- 


208 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


tion, and lie was about to give up in despair when the idea suddenly 
dawned on him to ask a variety of assorted questions. No two were 
on the same subject and not in train. This was too much for the 
witness. The shifting of the line of thought broke up the power of 
resistance in the mind of the witness. The man spoke of the matter 
somewhat as follows: “I knew before the trial began that the Judge 
was to be feared. So I braced myself for his questions. I was 
on the lookout all the time. As soon as he had been answered one 
question I felt sure what was coming next, and I was ready for it. 
But when he put one for me to answer, and got his reply, and went 
around a mile for another piece of information that had nothing to 
do with what had been asked just before, and kept this thing going, I 
was in profuse perspiration in three minutes. I could not think. 
All I could realize was that he was talking and I was talking in 
return. This broke me up.” 

In a conflict that took place in the last year between a man who was 
a sharp financier and a lawyer, the battle was with the witness as 
long as the questions ran as follows: 

“You saw the man enter?” 

“I did.” 

“Did you see him at any time with a paper in his hand?” 

“I did.” 

“What was the paper?” 

“It was a morning newspaper.” 

This reply angered the lawyer; but good advocates know that when 
they lose their tempers their cool judgment is gone. So he went on: 

“Did he have any document, or other paper, legal or otherwise, 
that might have contained figures or writing or tabulated accounts, 
or anything similar?” 

“If he did, I saw nothing of the sort.” 

“Where were you when he entered?” 

“I sat in the room used for the Directors’ meetings, in the farther 
corner of the room.” 

“Where was the door, at what part of the room ?” 

“Bight opposite me but diagonally.” 

“Were you in a position to have seen what he carried in his hands 
such as documents or reports or accounts?” 

“Yes, I could have seen.” 

“What did he have in his right hand?” 

“A morning newspaper.” 


FITFALLS OF THE MIND. 


209 


“What did he have in his left hand?” 

“A cane or walking-stick.” 

“And yon will swear that he carried no papers in his hands?” 

“I will.” 

If the student will notice the various subjects touched upon in 
this cross-examination, he will find that every idea was in train. 
The witness had a natural stimulus to his own mind by the connected 
run of ideas. He was not compelled to take care of himself, as 
these ideas led from one to another, and left him no gulfs to leap. 
The first inquiry related to seeing the man; the second to a paper 
in the man’s hand, and this called up the mental vision of the man 
and what he had with him. The third inquiry related to other kinds 
of papers than the morning newspaper, which had produced laughter 
at the expense of the attorney, who was thirsting for revenge. The 
next inquiry still related to the man’s entrance, as it wanted an 
answer as to where the witness sat when the man entered. Then 
there was the idea of the room into which the man came, the corner of 
the room, the door, and the one hand, then the other hand of the 
man, and finally the walking-stick. Still no documentary papers. 

The lawyer knew there was something being held back that the 
witness was not willing to tell unless the exact question was put to 
him. Many a lawyer knows the same thing too. As Andrew Car¬ 
negie said from the witness box, “There is one question that will 
reach the point, if you know what it is.” This is very often 
true. 

The lawyer adopted the scattered thought process and went on as 
follows, after seeing that the witness was toying with him: 

“What papers have you now in your pocket containing informa¬ 
tion on these schedules?” 

It was almost all the witness could do to recover his thinking 
cap, as he was looking for a further inquiry in the train. The 
reply was of such a nature that it held the witness in subjection for 
a while. After having made an extended answer, the witness next 
had this question put to him: 

“What parties did you meet yesterday afternoon with reference 
to this case?’ 

This also required an extensive reply and confused the witness. 

Then came the next question: 

“When did you last see the book that is now said to be lost?” 

Here was a third leap in the mind of the witness. From the 


210 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


room of the Directors’ meeting, to the present day, and then to 
the gathering of yesterday, and anon to the time when he last saw the 
missing book, was a journey that kept him thinking. He was pur¬ 
sued in this way until he let fall a remark that pinned the fact 
that the lawyer was seeking; and, having opened the way, he made 
full progress very soon. 

There was a pitfall and the witness was in it. 

While we do not suppose the lawyers who use the scattered thought 
method, know the philosophy of the process, they have an instinctive 
knowledge of the degrees of success that follow their many ways of 
putting questions. 

Some of the most skilful cross-examiners use the trains of thought 
as a means of making witnesses contradict themselves, whether honest 
or not. The plan is simple enough in itself, hut must be handled 
by a very shrewd mind. It consists in leading the witness by a 
connected series of ideas to a given point; then going back to 
another series and bringing up at another point, the two points 
being exactly opposite to each other and a palpable contradiction. 
This has won many a case. But the cause is not in the thinking 
interval, and is rather a trick than a fair process. In some of our 
meetings we have had the same thing tried as an experiment and 
it can be made to work in many instances where the witness is not 
informed in advance of what is being done. If he has information, 
he will begin to compare his answers some ways this side of the end, 
and so save himself or effect a compromise. 

The use of the interval has been very effective in unfair demon¬ 
strations, as where a lawyer was addressing the jury, and had reached 
a place in his argument when the lawyer on the other side very 
kindly said, 

“Excuse me, please, but a paper of some importance fell from 
your pocket.” 

It was a paper that belonged to the opposing counsel, that had 
been picked up some time before and held for this purpose. While 
the use of the interruption was a trick, the actual cause that closed 
the mind of the speaker was the interval that the paper episode set 
up in his mind. He could not help thanking the lawyer who in¬ 
terrupted him, nor could he scold him for the intrusion. But it 
broke up the most effective part of his speech. This is a very old 
method, and is usually employed by merely objecting to something 
that is being said. However, when this is done in the midst of a 


PITFALLS OF THE MIND 


211 


very strong appeal to the jury, the purpose is so plain that it reacts; 
while the kindness in handing the speaker an important paper is 
looked upon as an act of courtesy. 

Another lawyer who felt that his case was being argued away by 
the intensely powerful climax being made by an opposing advocate, 
could not find an opening whereby he could interrupt the speaker; 
so he accidentally upset the ink, causing a big commotion about 
the table, which ended in laughter. The address to the jury had 
reached a most solemn and pathetic state. There was a suspicion 
that this accident was due to design; and the judge said to a friend: 

“If I had proof that the ink was spilled to break in upon the 
argument of the counsel, I would urge the disbarment of the lawyer 
who did it.” 

In order to cause an interval the interruption must be serious 
enough to drive the pending thought out of mind, and put the whole 
attention on the new idea. 

There is some danger in a false train of thought. If its connect¬ 
ing links are untrue connections, then it leads to almost any end 
that may be designed. Such false trains are forced upon the minds 
of others when the latter are in the interval. They then become 
pitfalls that should be avoided. The remedy for this error is in 
the “I don't believe” status of the mind, as has been so thoroughly 
taught in a previous cycle of this book. A familiar example is 
the faulty conclusions referred to at the beginning; where a person 
who seemed to have proof of the moving of a table without any 
apparent cause, or knocks, or other phenomena in physics, imme¬ 
diately concluded that the cause was a spirit. Here is the usual 
formula: 

I am sure that I heard knocks on this table. 

The knocks could not have been made by any human being. 

Therefore they must have been made by spirits. 

The train is faulty for two reasons; first the statement that they 
could not have been made by any human beings is easily challenged 
and disproved. But if it were true that the knocks could not have 
been made by any human being, there is no reason to connect the 
final statement, that they must therefore have been made by spirits. 
There are a hundred ways in which knocks can be made by agencies 
not human, and yet not be the work of spirits. And there are laws 
that are not fully understood. 

Then here is another faulty formula: 


212 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


I am sure I saw the ghost of my brother standing before me here 
a second or more ago. 

I know it was my brother because I knew him all my life. 

As he has been dead for several years, it could not be his living 
form. 

As it was a form, it must be the spirit of my brother. 

Here the conclusion is faulty because the train breaks into an 
erroneous connection. It is not necessarily true that it was a form. 
It might have been a picture, or any one of a score or more of things. 
Nor is it true, supposing it to be a form, that it is a spirit. Forms 
may live in the mind. All ghosts so dwell. A drop of fluid from 
the blood, lodging in the fine brain-nerves where sight is created, 
may stand forth in the outer air as a fully fledged individual or 
anything else that the mind sees through the veil of its many halluci¬ 
nations. As ideas live in the other mind in the form of worded 
thoughts, so they may exist there in the form of pictures, or sounds 
or smells, or other methods of recording. What has been in the long 
past, may have found its way into the Other Mind and there re¬ 
mained until something called it forth or it chose to come of itself. 

A man says: “Do I believe in ghosts ? Of course I believe in what 
I see. And I have seen ghosts.” 

This train is faulty because he says he has seen ghosts. He 
thinks he has. More than this, he thinks he ought to know what 
he has seen. On the face of the assumption his contention seems 
correct; but when he thinks he knows what he has seen, someone 
else must be called in to tell him. The ghosts he has seen are the 
records of the Other Mind that break in on him during some interval 
in his own conscious mind. Then is the time they select for making 
themselves manifest. 

But the interval plays havoc in some cases. A real estate agent 
was quite tired, and fell asleep at his desk. His partner and two 
clerks in the same office heard him snore. While he slept he 
dreamed that he was asleep, that he woke up, and wrote down on 
a piece of paper his promissory note in favor of a certain party, gave 
it to his partner to deliver, and then went to sleep again. Soon 
he awoke, and did not even know that he had slept. He made the 
assertion that he had executed the note, and told his partner to 
deliver it that morning. On being denied the fact, he told what 
he had done, and the very paper on which he wrote the note, being 
taken from a book, and that he made the entry on the stub. The 


PITFALLS OF THE MIND 


213 


latter was still empty. When they told him he had slept and dreamed, 
he said, “I wonder how many men have gone into court and made 
oath to what they have done, and been contradicted by other men, 
leaving the court in doubt as to which side was telling the truth.” 

It is true that sleep comes over the mind very suddenly and leaves 
it very suddenly, with no trace of what has occurred. In a banker’s 
private office, one of a firm of private bankers fell asleep, dreamed 
that he had signed a check, and when he woke up he raised a fuss 
in his determination to find out what had become of it. He said, 
“I have been right here all the morning and I know what I have 
done.” Again the blank stub saved some clerk from discharge. 

“I have not been asleep,” is heard often from the lips of people 
who have just awakened from a five-minute nap. 

“Were you drunk on that day?” was asked of a witness. 

“I object,” said the lawyer on the other side; “on the ground 
that a drunken man is not able to say whether he was drunk or not.” 

Likewise when a man has been snoring loud enough to make the 
windows of the office tremble while he sat in his chair pen in hand, 
as has occurred numberless times, he is not qualified to tell whether 
he was asleep or not. 

In court trials there have been thousand upon thousands of men 
and women on the stand under oath who have sworn to a negative 
by saying that something did not occur because they were in the 
room all the time and would have seen it had it taken place. Not 
four weeks ago a young lady whose word could not be impeached, 
swore on the stand that a certain transaction did not occur in the 
sitting room of her house, because she was there in her easy chair 
reading a book, and had not arisen from two to four o’clock. The 
transaction had been alleged as occurring at about three. Several 
witnesses were required to show that this selfsame young lady always 
read herself to sound sleep when she had been reading for an hour or 
so. She indignantly denied it, but her mother, at the risk of losing an 
important case, admitted the fact. 

A certain woman, who was charged by her husband with going 
to sleep every Sunday when he was at home to be entertained by 
her companionship, denied the allegation most hotly. So he took 
several camera views of her, one of which, by being in a favored 
position with references to her wide-open mouth, made that organ 
look all-inclusive and the ears fade away into a distant perspective. 
This was a work of art; but the wife, on seeing it, arranged with her 


214 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


husband to have it destroyed on the promise that he was to wake 
her up at any time in the future that he wished to be entertained. 
“I did not think I was in the habit of going to sleep in the day¬ 
time/’ she said. She was honest, and so are others, for dishonesty 
is an intended wrong, and the man or woman who sleeps a few 
minutes in daylight is wholly oblivious of the fact. 

Here is another pitfall. 

Its danger is in the wrong that might be charged against some 
person who plays a part in one’s dreams. 

A great trial has just ended in Virginia, in which a most estimable 
young lady had a wealthy dentist arrested on the charge of criminal 
assault. There is no doubt that she was honest and sincere in the 
belief that she had been assaulted. The defence was that, as she 
had taken an anesthetic prior to having a tooth extracted, she awoke 
in a state of hallucination. Eminent experts bore out that theory, 
and the dentist was acquitted. 

Human testimony is not the safest guide whereby to judge one 
another. So much depends on the vicissitudes of the mental processes 
that pitfalls abound everywhere. It is hard to say that a thing is so or 
is not so, under many circumstances. 

An emotional mind, like the average female’s, is guided by what 
it wants to believe; and belief in a short time becomes the most 
certain knowledge. It is to wish; to believe; to know; and then 
the oath on which some one is pinioned in court. Judges are aware 
of this peculiar phase of the feminine mental nature; and they have 
recommended that all women who have the slightest emotional nature, 
should depend wholly on what they write in ink and never change. 
One judge recently said: “The testimony of women is always to 
be taken with care. Many make themselves believe things they, 
at the beginning, know are not true, but which they come in a short 
time to believe must be true.” 

So there are pitfalls all around the human mind that should be 
studied in order to be avoided. 

It is better to suffer than to make others suffer who are blameless. 


215 


FIFTEENTH CYCLE 



0 DARKER land exists 
In all the universe 
Than the deep cavern sunk 
Beneath the empty vault 
Of nothingness profound 
In black oblivion. 

S THERE are two sides to every operation of the Other 
Mind, it follows that, in reverse of the influences that 
make pitfalls for yon by the intervals through which 
your own mind passes, you yourself can make intervals 
by which you may draw in the thoughts of other 
minds. This is close to mind reading, and is direct physical 
telepathy. 

In order to understand the steps by which this process is reached 
and proved, you should re-read every word of the several cycles that 
precede this part of the work. It might serve some purpose to go 
over the explanation again here; hut we have repeated it enough 
in the past cycles, and the review of the philosophy is now in your 
own charge. 

There are two kinds of mind reading: 

1. The kind that is employed in public exhibitions, when it is 
honest and based upon optical telepathy. 

2. The kind that is common in the life of every individual. 

Hypnotism is also used for public exhibitions and for private 

healing. As a public show it is a natural crime, and is so made by 
law in most countries to-day. Mind reading of the kind known as 
optical telepathy is an accident only, and is found in about one 
person in a million. It is often faked in shows, and is then based 
upon some sign system. If it is genuine, it is merely the magnetic 
power of a person to see the scenes about him when he is blindfolded. 









216 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


Several of these cases have been investigated and found true. One 
was the ability to drive through the streets of Chicago, while so 
completely blindfolded that there was no possibility of seeing any¬ 
thing. The man directed the horses amid the crowded streets at 
high noon when there were thousands of wagons to be passed and 
many turns to be made. He drove as accurately as if he had not 
been blindfolded. The case was a genuine one. 

Recently in another city, but many years after, another man did 
the same thing under greater difficulties, and without accident. The 
officials took care that he could not have been faking. In both these 
instances, we took an experimental interest for the sake of testing 
the truth of the affairs; and there is no doubt that each was a 
genuine case of optical telepathy. 

A large sum of money has recently been offered if any person 
can count the number of oranges in a pile without seeing the pile 
with the eyes. The latter must be covered, and the oranges counted 
correctly. It is not assumed that in optical telepathy the sight is 
improved by being covered. It all comes to the brain cells where 
the optic nerve transmits its knowledge. With the opened eyes, no 
person can count a pile of oranges, unless he is permitted to take 
them away and count them as they are shifted. The outer oranges 
hide those in the heap that are not visible until the former are moved 
away. What cannot be done by the uncovered eyes cannot be done 
by optical telepathy. 

These facts prove that this kind of reading is merely an accident 
of the conscious brain, and is aided by magnetism. We have met 
four genuine readers of optical telepathy. There are not many more 
in this land at a time. They are very scarce. All these could read 
when blindfolded the same things they could see with uncovered 
eyes. The ether, or inner atmosphere, carried the sight through 
solids and transferred it to the brain cells, where all sight is inter¬ 
preted to the mind. They could read print, and tell all that was 
before them, as easily as they could do under ordinary circumstances. 
But much depended on their magnetic condition. When this was 
low they lacked the power of optical telepathy. 

Their work showed the operation of the inner ether that plays so 
important a part in the development and practice of magnetic powers, 
as will be seen by reference to the various works on magnetism 
in the series of studies in the Psychic Society. All through the 
world to-day where investigations are being carried on by experts, 


IN NO-MAN 8-LAND 


217 


and learned men in varions ways, there is ever coming an increasing 
volume of proofs of the power of the inner ether. Wireless telegraphy 
is one example of its usefulness, and the x-ray is another. 

Leaving optical telepathy as the mere accident of the conscious 
mind we come to genuine telepathy as a function of the Other Mind. 

Much has been said about the steps necessary for emptying the 
conscious mind, and these are found in the last three cycles. They 
should all be mastered before the work of this cycle is attempted. 

There has never been a case where one who was gifted with the 
accident known as optical telepathy, could take thoughts out of the 
minds of other people. Yet this feat has been accomplished many 
thousands of times by the operation of the Other Mind by making 
the proper effort to accomplish it. Of course it is one of those 
common things that life is full of when done automatically, or in 
flashes. But to do it as a science and an art, is quite a different 
thing. That the right method has been evolved is now certain. 
It consists, whether as an accident of nature, or an automatic process, 
or a flash or a studied operation, in the following essentials: 

1. The mind of the person receiving telepathic knowledge must 
be emptied, or be made totally inactive in conscious thinking. 

2. There must be a devitalized state of the general body. 

3. The degree of success to be attained after the two foregoing 
essentials have been met, will depend wholly on the drawing power 
of magnetism. As some persons have magnetism naturally, they 
have the power of drawing thoughts from other minds when they 
meet the two first essentials, which are emptying the mind and 
general devitalization. The way to do these things and the relation 
they have to the activity of the Other Mind in telepathy, are fully 
stated over and over again in the preceding cycles. Do not try to 
begin at this stage of the work. It is uphill effort and conscientious 
practice that will bring results. 

If it is an accident of nature that you draw thoughts from the 
minds of other people, all these three essentials are present; and in 
hundreds of cases of the same kind this fact has been proved by 
close observation. 

If it is as an automatic process or by the flash of a thought that 
you can draw knowledge from the minds of others, then all three 
essentials are present. 

So as a studied operation the three essentials must be met. It 
makes no difference whether you are gifted or work for your achieve- 


218 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


ments, the same essentials must be present as conditions precedent. 
Nature and art both meet on common ground when the laws of 
life are observed. 

People have long had an idea that mind reading, in the showman’s 
use of it, was all there was to telepathy. On the other hand, those 
who know the latter power deem optical telepathy or show reading 
of the mind as a mere nothing. It is the surface only and very 
little of that. Coming from an accident of the conscious mind, it 
has no depth and no penetrating force; whereas genuine telepathy 
springs from the all-wise power lodged in the Other Mind and in¬ 
cludes all the knowledge in the universe. 

The trouble we have to contend with is the fact that only an echo 
now and then can be caught of the great mind. While this is a 
serious handicap, it could hardly be otherwise; for if you were 
to have all the knowledge of the universe in your mind you would 
not be able to give attention to the duties of life. This physical 
body is not able to carry so great a responsibility as the duties and 
cares of a psychic existence, as it is no more adapted for that than 
a fish is adapted for the intricate and comprehensive labors of a 
government clerk. 

The conscious mind is a channel for the passing in of the facts 
that are conveyed to it through the ordinary senses. The Other 
Mind is a sieve through which passes all that is, was, or will be. It 
allows about everything in the earth and above the earth to find 
transportation. But it is by flashes, by gleams, and by echoes from 
that outer realm that the conscious mind gets hold of anything 
unusual. This has been going on from the beginning of time; and 
our duty here is to see to what extent this process can be cultivated 
and made practical. Before this book is ended we hope to show both 
these results. 

The three essentials must not be forgotten. Let them be mastered 
and kept always in mind. Make them habits to be used when needed. 

There are also three occasions when the practical uses are to be 
made of this power: 

1. When alone in ordinary thought, or with other persons who are 
not the ones you seek to reach. The meaning of this is that you are 
considered alone if other persons about you are not being drawn to 
your mind. The connection is from other minds, generally out of 
the room or locality, and often at a great distance. There must be 
some bond of interest. 


IN NO-MANS-LAND 


219 


2. When you seek to draw knowledge from the minds of those 
who are engaged in conversation with you. 

3. When you are in reverie. 

The first and the last of these occasions are degrees of each other. 
But the intervals are different, and hence the separation of the 
occasions. 

In the first instance, when you are alone and seek to draw some 
knowledge from the mind of another person not present, you must 
have the three essentials under mastery: 

1. Devitalization. 

2. The emptied mind. 

3. Magnetism. 

The latter is the power, as was so carefully and thoroughly ex¬ 
plained in the First Cycle. Power is required in everything. The 
object of devitalization is to assist in relaxing the flow of nervous 
energy to the brain. All vitalized bodies have great brain activity. 
All devitalized bodies have little or none. These are common phases 
of human nature. A lazy body, a lazy mind. A sleepy body, a 
sleepy mind. A sluggish body, a sluggish mind. A tense body, a 
tense mind. A wide-awake body, a wide-awake mind. These are 
axioms of everyday existence, and they explain an immense amount 
of human conduct. They show why some persons cannot sleep at 
night and others can sleep at any time, night or day. 

They show why some persons are dull in mind, stupid in thought, 
or active and keen in execution. They stand close to all the phe¬ 
nomena of the so-called occult, hypnotic, trance, and a dozen other 
states. 

Can there be power of magnetism and devitalization of the body? 

Yes, it is a wonderful thing, but it has been done thousands of 
times and can be done millions more. Magnetism by devitalization 
is not lost, but saved. It is stored. It is sent back into the gangli¬ 
onic cells and there held in great force. When a wide-awake man or 
woman devitalizes the body, the magnetism is like a great head of 
steam in a mighty locomotive; it is all there, but the wheels are idle. 

The study and development of magnetism in its various classes for 
human use, is very simple and easy; although the uses are as broad 
in their scope as life itself. It is life, and therefore cannot be made 
a small and contracted thing. This is the reason why it is contained 
in several volumes of great size and still greater cost. 

The study of telepathy is intricate, but is not hopelessly hard. 


220 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


Any man or woman who has average intelligence can read and master 
these cycles. They are both plain and practical. Yet telepathy 
is vastly more complicated than magnetism, and the two extend 
together through great breadths and into profound depths, as com¬ 
panions in the two most useful studies of life. 

We say this because people think that magnetism must be born in 
a person and cannot be developed. While the power is born, it 
is dormant in nearly all cases, and experience shows that the de¬ 
veloped magnetism is more powerful because it is founded on practical 
laws that must be understood before great progress can be made. 

The grandest conception of a human being is when the power of 
magnetism has been called to the ganglionic cells or nerve centers 
by devitalization. Then the mind is ready to be emptied, and the 
condition is complete. 

The process of emptying the mind is fully taught in the Twelfth 
Cycle. It has been thoroughly tested and found to be effective at 
all times. The thoughts are lost by vanishing backward. They pass 
backward through to-day, then backward through the last twelve 
months, and still backward through the years of life, and finally are 
emptied in the deep, dark, black cavern of absolute nothingness, 
called “no-man J s land.” Review the Twelfth Cycle for this line of 
instruction. 

The process xs double-backward 

It is backward through the five chief events of the day, then back¬ 
ward through five chief events of the year of twelve months, then 
backward through the five chief events of the life of years; thus 
being three series of thoughts, each backward in the series, and the 
latter themselves backward; thus making the double-backward process 
of the mind until it tumbles into oblivion. 

Careful experience proves this to be a wonderful procedure, when 
it is made automatic. 

You cannot realize its value until you have mastered it. At first 
the mind will work in a dull manner because of lack of flexibility 
in thinking. It may require days or weeks of steady practice to 
make your mind flexible; but when it is accomplished this flexibility 
will serve in hundreds of other ways; as you can throw your thoughts 
at will, invite sleep at will, and control all conditions of the mind 
and nerves by its use. 

You may have been trained for some physical effort, as for foot¬ 
ball at college. If so, you will recall how stiff the muscles were at 


IN NO-MANS-LAND 


221 


first, and what a slow process it was to make them flexible. But 
time and persistent practice won at length. The pugilist, Dempsey, 
who has won the world’s championship, and has rested on his laurels, 
if he shall come out of his retirement to enter the arena again, must 
go to his training camp and begin his practice all over again. His 
muscles are stiff, and lack flexibility. It will take weeks to bring 
them into condition. So the human mind is a very stiff thing and 
may stalk awkwardly through those backward thoughts for some 
weeks, but in time it will become flexible, and once so it will remain 
so for a lifetime if the practice of the art as shown in the present 
cycle is maintained as a habit, which is very easy to do. 

When the mind is at length trained to go into “no-man’s-land” 
in the flash of a second, and you are able to devitalize your body while 
concentrating your great fund of magnetism in the nerve centers, 
you will find yourself possessed of a tremendous power. It will 
surprise you by what it can accomplish. 

This process opens up the Other Mind, and it can he done in a 
flash or in a reverie. T'o be able to catch what is at hand, the 
conscious mind must come back. This is a matter of habit also. 
But as it comes back, it catches only the echo of the departing mind. 
The two minds are not present together, each in full sway, for this 
is contrary to the purpose of nature. 

Three things are to be recognized: 

1. The Other Mind does not speak in words. It uses all the 
means of conveying knowledge that the conscious mind employs, 
but has no words, no figures, no signs. If words are ever transferred 
they are the interpretation of the conscious mind, not the message 
from the Other Mind. If you seek to get from the mind of some 
person who is not ’ present, the knowledge therein contained, and 
if you expect sentences to walk into your mind, you will be mistaken. 
They may come, and do come quite often, but only as secondary. 
Knowledge existed before letters or words were known. Nothing 
can be more transitory in history than the language of people. 
Words vary as you travel over the earth. If you were in Japan 
you might be told many things in that language and not understand 
one of them; yet the things would exist just the same. 

2. The feelings are generally the first kind of knowledge that 
will come to you if you succeed in drawing from the mind of another. 
They are stronger than mere ideas, and are caught by magnetism 
in a more ready manner than mere information. Magnetism is 


222 


OPERATIONS OP THE OTHER MIND 


based on the power that is naturally lodged in the feelings, which 
are the offspring of the nerves, just as magnetism is. 

3. After you have succeeded in drawing knowledge from another 
at a distance, you must learn to interpret it in the language of the 
conscious mind. This is often a very beautiful experience, and one 
that has proved fascinating to many students in our experimental 
class. 

The three occasions require three different uses of the interval. 

1. When you seek to draw knowledge from a person with whom 
you are talking, the interval must be a flash. 

2 . When you seek to draw knowledge from one not present, the 
interval must be longer than a flash, but shorter than one would 
think necessary, as will soon be explained. 

3. When you seek help while in a reverie, the interval is prolonged. 

If you can see the difference between the presence of the conscious 

mind in ordinary thought, and the part-presence of the Other Mind, 
as in a reverie, or sometimes the complete presence of that giant 
function, you will then be better prepared to understand the passing 
in and out of the arena of thought of the two minds. 

Your avocation will determine whether or not you have ever used 
the reverie. If you have you will recognize the following account 
of it: 

You go to your desk or table, and it is evening. You wish to be 
left alone as weighty matters are pending and you must cope with 
them. 

Through a process of thinking, known to every man or woman 
who has ever accomplished anything in this world, the conscious 
mind gradually drifts away and on comes the reverie. The line of 
crossing is very distinct. Here the interval is prolonged. 

The flash interval is one that skill and long experience is able to 
invite with accuracy. The Other Mind delivers a general fund of 
knowledge by the echo principle, which is worth studying. It has 
been referred to, and is seemingly complex for the reason that it 
deals with a set of laws not applicable to physical thinking. This 
proves that the Other Mind is the agency of another life that is 
not physical, and that is immortal, or at least that survives the 
wreck of the physical. The two points of difference between the 
physical and the psychic existences, are: 

1. Language. 

2. Interpretation. 


IN NO-MAN S-L AND 


223 


If you were to die and go to another world, as most people expect 
to do, what language would you speak there? In this world we find 
a language for every nation, and in each nation a dialect for each 
section unless, as in the United States, there is no exclusive part 
of the country shut off much of the time from other parts. In 
such a country as England, there is almost a separate form of English 
for each country. 

But would you speak English in heaven? 

If not, what language ? 

It has been guessed that music is the universal means of communi¬ 
cation, because in this world the only thing that does tiot change is 
the scale. Every whole-note has a relationship to each whole-note 
above and below it that no nationality can affect; and the same is 
true of every half-note. This is due to the law of fixed vibrations 
which make a sound in music. In spoken sounds, as in words, the 
act of speech causes a slide off every note, either up or down; but 
the slides are controlled by the law of the musical scale, and cannot 
be changed. What makes a word is its composition of vowels and 
consonants. iVowels are shapes of sound made by positions of the 
lips, mouth and throat, and consonants are interruptions of the flow 
of sound; a wonderful economy of nature. There are very nearly 
the same alphabets all over the world, for the reason that there are 
three basic vowels, ee, ah, and oo, which must appear in every tongue 
on earth. Then there are three basic consonants, b, d, and hard g. 
From these six bases all else is built and every language shows this 
fact. 

The different languages of this planet are due to some slight 
variations in the secondary vowels and consonants, and to the acci¬ 
dental building up of words. If there shall ever be a general language 
in this world, the basis must be the three vowels and three consonants 
referred to. Try to see how many words you can build from these 
six. Then the vowels open gradually to shades of sounds, which 
seem different as the ear learns to distinguish them; and the con¬ 
sonants give rise to all kinds of variations. Did you ever stop to 
think that d is easily changed to t, 1, s, th, dh, as in the word then; 
z, sh, tsh, as in the word chin; zh as in the word azure, all being 
on the forward part of the tongue? It is in these variations that 
the difficulties of foreign speech arise as far as utterance is concerned. 
But words that mean one thing in one tongue, mean something 
else in another. Look at any page you please of a book of French, 


224: 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


German, Spanish, Italian, Bussian, Greek, Japanese, Chinese, or other 
tongue that you are not able to speak, and you will see why there 
is no one preferred language in heaven. 

The Other Mind is free from all earthly language. 

But ideas are the same, no matter how they may be expressed in 
writing or in tones. If you burn yourself, it is a burn even in 
Portuguese, whether you can utter the word that will make it known 
or not. If you slip on the ice, it is a slip in all the tongues of earth. 
Pacts are facts. Ideas are ideas. Peelings are feelings. These 
pass through the wall of the two minds, but words do not. Words 
are often, found in the conscious mind, as interpretations of the 
echo from the Other Mind, after the latter has been in and out; but 
they are creations of the former, which is often referred to as the 
language-mind, because it is the only one of the two that carries a 
language. 

Music is founded on the number of vibrations per second of the 
molecular waves of the air. It is a fixed language, as it cannot 
vary. The shape of a consonant or vowel may be shifted by the 
way the muscles are worked; but any musical note is the same the 
world over and in all other worlds where they have atmosphere. 
If it is sharped or flatted, the note passes into another one of fixed 
vibrations. Song and instrument are agencies of beauty and ideal 
enjoyment, such as we might expect in a better world. But they 
are active only in an air that can be vibrated, and have their limita¬ 
tions on that account. The solution of the problem, is in another 
direction entirely, and we will leave that part of the subject. 

What concerns us here is the fact that words are not the language 
of the Other Mind. 

Many persons refer to the visitations of that mind as impressions, 
others as inspirations, others as intuition, of which woman is the 
master-force, and others as revelations. All these are part of the 
great study of magnetism, and it is not wise here to intrude on a 
work so much larger than this, as it would defeat the present line 
of instruction. These visitations cover an immense ground, as will 
be seen in other works in the Psychic Society. 

But what is called an impression is a leap out of the Other Mind 
into the conscious mind. It comes in the interval, and is at hand 
when a turning point occurs in a line of thought. It will help 
us to understand two things: 

1. What telepathy in its simplest stage is like. 


IN NO-MAN 8-LAND 


225 


2. The way the Other Mind acts in the first development. 

On the physical side, and without intruding on the magnetic 
side of impressions, let us see how they happen and to whom. 

The impression is a common, everyday occurrence. We know 
many thousands of women, and have never yet seen one that we 
broached this subject to, who had not had many impressions. Some 
women have them daily. All men have had impressions at times, 
but not as frequently as women. 

An impression is the simplest form of telepathy. It happens, as 
has been said, in the interval which attends a change of thought 
from one subject to another. If a woman is talking along on one 
line of ideas she will not receive an impression until there is a sharp 
break in the run of thoughts. Then it may come or not, depending 
on several contingencies; the most important of which is her ability 
to know it when it comes. Even men of stolid, phlegmatic tempera- 
ment, all lacking in emotions, have the knowledge frequently from 
the realm of the Other Mind, but do not know it, and have rarely 
ever recognized it. The presence is there, and not different enough 
to attract attention. There is no loud knocking, but the echo only 
of the recent visitation of the Other Mind. 

It is well known that women whose emotional nature is keenly 
developed, are the constant receivers of impressions. There must 
be a finely strung nervous organization. This is developed in such 
a study as Advanced Magnetism, and can be carried to any limit, all 
the while increasing the health, the power of the mind, and the 
usefulness of all the faculties for the grand work of life in every 
way. 

The impression is never a message in words. 

It uses no language, and so is clean cut from the Other Mind. It 
leaps into the conscious mind, as has been often said, and yet enough 
is now known to enable us to state with absolute certainty that it 
is merely an echo, not a direct communication. Look back to a 
preceding cycle on the subject of echoes, and note how they act. 
The example was given of the hearing of the remark made by 
another person when you were not paying attention; yet if you are 
asked what was said, and the delay has not been more than two or three 
seconds, you can repeat the last words exactly. As high as fifteen 
to twenty words have, by fixed experiments, been repeated from the 
echo of the mind. 

This is what impressions are; just echoes. 


226 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


The Other Mind has come and gone, and in the brief second or 
two that follows the visitation, yon catch the echo and a feeling of 
something out of the ordinary comes over you. “I have just had 
an impression that I am going to hear bad news/* may be your 
remark. There are no words, no message, nothing but the feeling. 
If it has come from the other mind, it will be followed by the bad 
news. If it is a form of hallucination of the conscious mind, it 
will be nothing at all. Only careful experience will be able to dis¬ 
tinguish the difference. 

The impression must be translated. It is not in words. 

If it presages bad news, it will produce a heavy feeling akin to gloom 
and disappointment. If good news, it will make you bright and 
elated. The experiences are very common. And they prove true. 
Sometimes there is an impression that a person is calling, and is 
on the way, or is preparing to call; and this is verified by the actual 
visit. If on some unpleasant errand, there will be the double im¬ 
pression of the two phases. We heard a woman say, “I have an 
impression that Mr. H. is to call this evening and that he intends 
to make trouble.” The man came and did try to make trouble; but 
the wife and her husband had talked the matter over and decided 
how to attend to it, and the trouble was averted. The name of the 
man came by telepathy, and it reached the mind, not as a word 
or name, but as a feeling that such a person would call. The feeling, 
or impression, may include the picture of the man, but as a matter of 
fact it is the idea of the man himself, not anything that can be 
written down or spoken. The conscious mind makes the interpreta¬ 
tion, after having an idea on which to base it. 

Here we see how the Other Mind brings knowledge and how the 
information is converted into words. 

When throwing the mind into “no-manVland” for the purpose 
of making it receptive, the first sensations are impressions, and the 
next are direct influences which it seems are being experienced by 
persons who have some aggressive feeling or purpose towards you. 
An example of what reached a man of some wealth who had moved 
into a town, and whose attention had been called to the methods 
herein employed by some of our members, is told below. This man, 
after learning what our experimenters were doing, asked to be in¬ 
cluded in the local party. He had therefore been a student of the 
process and had put it into practice. 


IN NO-MAN 8-LAND 


m 


One evening, before he had settled in a new boarding place, he was 
reading the paper first for the news, and second for some advertise¬ 
ments concerning real estate. The room about him was in confusion, 
and his wife was helping to straighten out some of the things. The 
man looked up from his paper, and said, 

“When did you say Hackett was to call?” 

“I did not say he was to call at any time. Who is he ?” 

“Why, you just told me Hackett would call and you named the 
time, but it slipped my mind.” 

The woman thought her husband was in a dream and so told him. 
He had really heard, as he believed, her say that Hackett would 
call. Having dropped the matter as a sort of hallucination, he 
took up his paper again and soon after turned sharply to his wife 
and said: 

“I thought you did not know Hackett.” 

“I do not.” 

“Then how could you advise me to not have any dealings with 
him as he was a land shark?” 

The woman suggested that her husband go to bed and sleep off 
the effects of his supposed dream. But in five minutes more the 
card of Hackett was at the door and a conference followed. It 
turned out that the man was unreliable and his methods were soon 
laid bare by one who knew the world. The telepathic message served 
a good purpose. It was often talked over afterwards; but still 
greater results from the practice followed to the advantage at all 
times of the man. How the name Hackett came to his mind he 
did not know; but it is probable that the name was seen by him 
in the paper, and as it was that of a real estate dealer, it may have 
entered his mind and there been left until the occurrence of the 
interval, when it was connected with the purpose of the man himself 
to call. 

This is one of the cases where the message is made to convey a 
word. Many others have occurred, but they are exceptions to the 
general rule, and there is some way of accounting for the introduction 
of words in telepathy outside of the process itself. 

From these simpler acts called impressions the next step is some¬ 
what more intricate, and applies to the use of the emptied mind 
when in the presence of others to whom you are talking. It is 
frequently the case that some representations are made to you that 
you would like to have verified, or that there are things held back 


228 


OPERATIONS OP TEE OTHER MIND 


in the minds of others which you would like to get at, or purposes 
not apparent, or silences that should be brought forth. 

In the midst of the conversation, if you shift the line of thought 
by a direct break, so as to cause an interval, the mind can be thrown 
into emptiness, and a magnetic impulse will draw the thought 
from the mind of another. It is impossible to draw the thought 
when you have an idea in your mind. Sometimes we have heard 
experimenters say, “Now concentrate your mind on the one thing 
you wish to know/* This is the reverse of nature. The English 
Society for Psychical Eesearch long ago came to the conclusion that 
only an empty mind can receive telepathic communications. It spent 
many years and much money in getting this far and dropped the 
subject as too deep for its further investigation. 

The idea of concentrating the mind is correct if it is properly 
understood. Sometimes the term excentered is employed to mean 
the outward action of an idea, and concentric to mean the inward 
action. 

A person of great ability will have both actions going on at about 
the same time. He will throw out ideas and often try to make them 
find lodgment in the intervals of other minds; and this is excentric 
thinking, or outward sending of thoughts, as excentric means only 
outward in a technical sense and not peculiar. He will in rapid 
succession shift to the concentric or concentrated mind, which is 
making his own mind empty, and thus invite ideas from others. 
This is not concentrating his mind on the thought that he wishes 
to obtain from others. It is turning his own mind inward, and 
emptying it. 

There are many persons of both sexes who have learned to do this. 
The more frequently it is done and the more rapidly the mind shifts 
from one action to the other, the easier it will be to interpret the 
knowledge that comes into the conscious mind from the Other Mind. 
The quick interchanges are important, for when the visitor has 
come and gone and what he said is to be gained only by an echo 
memory, speed of change is necessary. 

The English Society has had many cases of the reception of ideas 
of considerable accuracy from the minds of others, and they were 
the result of tests of every conceivable variety. They served only 
one purpose, and that was to confirm what was well known before, 
that thought transference was a genuine process. They went so far 
as to obtain even words, or descriptions that were easily translated 


IN NO-MAN 8-LAND 


229 


into words; but the conscious mind does this very often. We do not 
think words actually originate in the Other Mind, as that has 
no language like ours in which to clothe its knowledge. 

In a common transaction where a prospective buyer seeks to 
pay much less than property is worth, and the owner is compelled 
to sell at any price, it is very important for the latter to know how 
far it is safe for him to refuse the offers of the buyer. We recall 
the case that occurred not four months ago where real estate was 
offered for $32,000, but the owner had to sell at the best price he could 
get, for his creditors were close upon him. If he sold for less than 
$26,000, he would lose money; all above that being profit. Along 
came a man who wanted the property, but was determined to get it 
at the very lowest possible price. He had several talks with the 
owner, and repeatedly asked him what he would take and make a 
gale, saying, “If you name a price too high, I shall not give the 
matter further attention, but will accept an offer now pending else¬ 
where.” This frightened the owner; but he caught from the mind 
pf the other man the one thought, not in words, but in a strange 
feeling. “I will take it at your price if I cannot do better.” The 
owner, by a sudden impulse, replied, “I cannot tell you that someone 
has offered me my price, for that would be a falsehood, and it would 
not deceive you. Men in your position know the tricks of trade. 
But I will be honest with you and say that I have not yet had any 
offer near my asking price. Nor do I know that I will have. But I 
am going to stick to my asking price for awhile; then, if I cannot 
sell the property, I will make a reduction of five hundred dollars, 
and take $31,500.” 

This was too much for the buyer, as so slight a reduction was of 
no consequence when he had hoped to get at least ten thousand 
dollars off. The result of that meeting was that the price of $32,000 
was paid, giving the owner a handsome profit of six thousand dollars, 
not one cent of which he expected. Had he tried to bluff by saying 
that he had been offered certain sums for it, the buyer would have 
looked upon it as a falsehood. 

Hundreds of similar cases, showing the value of drawing thoughts 
from the minds of other persons, have been called to our attention, 
and confirm the fact that study and practice will slowly and surely 
increase this faculty. 

The one basic fact should not be forgotten, that thoughts are all 
the time coming into the mind, but are not recognized. 


SIXTEENTH CYCLE 



OME, gentle harmony, 

And blend our waiting minds 
Into one train of thought 
From which spring higher hopes 
And loftier character 
Than we have ever fcnoum. 

ROLOMjtED intervals are always reveries. They are 
quite distinct from the dangerous lapses that are treated 
of in the higher works on magnetism. A lapse is a 
mind devoid of magnetism that has been emptied by 
some other control, while the person is in full conscious- 
not even waking hypnotism. It is a lapse, full of pitfalls 
and extreme dangers. 

On the other hand the reverie is an interval. By this is meant 
that a train of thought has come to an end, or an idea has been 
exhausted and you find yourself alone with your Other Mind. This 
visitor is not in full possession, but stands as a guest at the outer 
portals, while you in full wakefulness sit and let veiled dreams float 
by at their will. 

In the reverie the conscious mind is present, but seems to have 
gone to its portal of exit and there to be held in abeyance at the very 
threshold, while the Other Mind is at its portal of entrance and 
seems to be held there because it cannot come upon the scene while 
the conscious mind is attentive. This is merely a fancy, but it serves 
to represent the fact. 

The true reverie is meant. 

The roaming, half waking, half sleeping thoughts, idle, wandering, 
and incoherent, are not reverie. They are stupidity. Reverie is 
full of life, of magnetism, of action, of deep thought, and is wholly 
a supreme experience. If it comes to you, it will not be mistaken. 



ness. It is 







THE REVERIE 


231 


The idea of an open grate fire, with Ted colors fading into fantastic 
shadows, is good enough for the stage, and would be very pleasing 
were they realistic in life. The man who planted a garden, and in 
the shade of trees, around winding paths girt with flowers and 
grasses of beautiful effect, deemed that the spirit of his genius would 
move him to great thoughts, found that the good goddess cannot be 
coaxed into hidden byways merely because they are nicely suited to 
her visits. The other man, a poet, who wanted the architect to make 
him a great fireplace in his study, where dim red lights could throw 
their glow on his fevered brow, got what he sought; but the charm 
of the place was so great that it brought the whole family there every 
evening to participate in the enjoyment; and where the whole family 
is, there can be no reverie. 

Better still was the old, worn, cheap standing desk used by Long¬ 
fellow, who found it placed against the wall of his room, and there 
he got his inspiration and had his reveries, looking out on the 
distant River Charles, which he saw not when his eyes were fixed 
on the beyond. One afternoon a friend from Harvard University 
dropped in to see him by appointment. He entered the house and 
was shown the room where the great poet was sitting looking at a 
piece of paper on which were five lines in pencil. The caller ad¬ 
dressed him by name; but Longfellow seemed not to hear him. His 
eyes were fixed, and seemed to look miles beyond the paper. His 
face was lighted by a sweetness and glory that would beggar words. 
Hot a muscle moved. The visitor took a seat and waited. Ten 
minutes passed, and then the pencil wrote more lines with rapidity, 
and the work was over. An immortal thought had gone down on 
paper where it could not be lost. The poet turned slowly to the 
visitor, saw him, rose and took him by the hand and said, “Have 
you just come?” 

The poet, Marini, when absorbed in a reverie that produced great 
thoughts for his admiring countrymen and the world at large, was 
severely burned by a fire and seemed to have no consciousness of it 
until he was dragged away. 

One day Napoleon before the battle that made him stand out as 
the greatest general of all times, was alone in his tent. Officers passed 
and paused, and did not enter. The warrior’s head was bowed, and 
his chin seemed to rest on his coat, while his big eyes were glaring 
at a chart that he had drawn. “Here the Austrians will advance. 
They will he broken in halves here.” And he went on through a maze 


232 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MINE 


of complications that were understood only by himself. So the 
battle went. So the enemy lost. Every detail occurred as he had 
planned it. This was not the prediction of some transaction that 
would suit the fortune teller, but it was based on the following 
process: 

There were many movements offered the Austrians. Their general 
would look over the field and decide what seemed to be the best, and 
that he would adopt. In such case the French would meet the 
-action in a certain way. Then the new choice would arise, and 
the enemy would make it by a certain movement. This would invite 
a check from the French by a shifting of their position; and so the 
formations were seen in advance, not as they would be, but as they 
would most likely be; and the reverie proved correct. 

To foresee a fact and to foresee a probability are not the same 
thing. What a man will do in nine chances out of ten, is not fortune 
telling; it is an inspired guess, or the fruit of careful judgment, or 
the drawing of an almost certain probability. 

It is said of Angelo, the greatest architect, poet, painter and 
philosopher, all in one, that ever lived, that he conceived all his 
achievements in reveries. His biography, and that of every genius 
who has trod the earth, is the story of a life-long reverie. 

But history is full of such episodes. 

It is the practical, everyday side of the subject that is most im¬ 
portant to the students of this work. 

A trance, in one case in a hundred or so, may be genuine; but it 
is not a reverie. It is hypnotism, either self-induced or brought on 
by an operator. The conscious mind is all gone, and cannot connect 
with the Other Mind. The same is true of all hypnotic sleeps that 
are deep, and those that are not deep are dead lapses, which are 
the opposite of reveries. 

One of the most remarkable instances of genuine reverie occurred 
on December 31, 1917. A man who two years before had returned 
from India under an assumed name, stated that he had been com¬ 
pelled to separate from his father and mother, and his wife and boy, 
following a shipwreck. He would not give his true name nor the 
reason for concealing his identity. But he was a man of education, 
of culture and some wealth. He wanted to find his father and 
mother, and his wife and boy. In a letter he wrote as follows: 
“There is no sentiment in my nature. I am a practical man. I 
do not believe in the occult sciences, and do not want to. Telepathy 


TEE REVERIE 


233 


is undoubtedly a fact. I know nothing one way or the other about 
it. I want to find my family, and cannot locate them. I have tried 
every means at my disposal. What can be done further?” 

He became one of the experimenters, starting with no experience 
whatever, and having little faith in the results. But he enjoyed the 
tests. In a few months he learned to devitalize so that he could 
drive all his nervous currents to their centers and thus release the 
mind from its own thoughts in a second of time when following the 
plan to produce the interval. After further experiments he was able 
to enter a reverie. At first, in this branch of the work, he was 
afraid of going into a trance, but one reverie proved to him that it 
was the opposite of a trance. He was never sleepy in the reverie, 
nor in any mood like the trance. He said he was never before so 
wide awake. 

In the night of December 31, 1917, he was alone in a lonely house, 
where there were comforts, but no companions. He had fitted up 
a room for his own use, which adjoined his sleeping room. This 
was on the second floor of the building, and it was facing to the 
Dortheast. In a square tower there was a fireplace which gave out 
warmth sufficient to keep the temperature mild, while the winds out 
of doors blew a gale and a heavy fall of snow was in progress. He 
always loved to watch the snow coming down, especially as he had 
spent so much of his life in India, where such storms are found only 
in the high mountains. 

With all lights out and with his back to the dim flames that were 
flickering on the hearth, he turned his chair to the big northeast 
window against which the snow was being driven in fierce gusts. 
There was light enough in the fireplace to illumine the scene out of 
doors. This seemed to grow fainter within, but to be more and 
more visible without. His mind was opened to a reverie. With 
pencil he noted the thoughts that came to him. There was the old 
scene of the shipwreck, the cries of all on board, the struggle for 
safety, and the wide separating of all the members of his family. 
From the waters he saw them picked up by a great ship, the view 
of which was so clear that he drew a picture of it. This brought 
the reverie to an end for a while. But he had the satisfaction of 
having a drawing of a ship that he had known and could probably 
have traced, without revealing his identity. He again fell into a 
reverie. In this he visited the great cities of Europe, one after 
another, and reached one where the signs told the nationality; but 


234 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


it was unknown to him. He wrote down the names of the signs 
and the name of a street there. This was all. The excitement of 
the experience kept him out of further reverie for several hours. At 
the point of falling asleep in his chair, he heard the chimes of distant 
bells announcing the birth of a new year. In the interval that 
followed he saw his son, now grown almost beyond recognition, 
standing by the side of a newly-made bride. 

During the weeks that followed he set in motion a series of 
inquiries concerning the city the signs of which he had seen so 
clearly. He Was informed at last that it was of a certain name. To 
this he traveled, hired a conveyance, and asked to be driven to the 
street. He walked along the buildings, after alighting from the 
carriage, until he came upon the very scene that he had witnessed 
in his reverie. In the course of the afternoon he found his son 
and the bride, and from them he learned of the place of residence 
of his father and mother, who were now quite aged. 

He is sure that these results were ascribable to telepathy, not as 
a gift, but as an acquired power. 

A woman who was among the experimenters for two years and 
who had never had any experience in this work prior to her own 
cultivation of the habit of emptying the mind, was accustomed to sit 
in the twilight every evening. She would not allow the lights to 
be brought into the room as long as she could see the figures on 
the carpet, as she stated. The result of this love of the twilight 
was the habit of reverie. On one occasion, she saw nothing, heard 
nothing, and felt nothing, but a sense of chilliness came over her 
as soon as she entered the reverie. This she spoke of to her family. 
The next evening she again had the same sense of chilliness, and 
something seemed to denote the idea of snow and ice. This was more 
fixed the third night. On the fourth, she thought she heard the 
sound of gold, and that it was still colder; all chill and snow. 
Later on she left the reverie, as it seemed to be of no value to her; 
and as soon as she found herself approaching the state, she had 
the lights brought in. 

About a week after that, one evening the moon was rising in its 
fullness in the east over the tops of low trees, and the scene was so 
entrancing that she sat long after the twilight had departed. In a 
deep reverie she began to think of a man who was playing as a boy 
with her mother, and who suddenly became a full-grown old man. 
In his hand he held out gold, and he stood in the deep snow. Tnese 


TEE REVERIE 


235 


incidents fixed in her mind the fact that she had, on previous even¬ 
ings, had suggestions of gold and snow; and she placed all these 
incidents before her family. They soon agreed that, unless it was 
all a mere fancy, there was some relative in the far North who 
had gold for her if she could find him. Her parents were dead, 
and she had never known of an uncle; yet this reverie seemed to 
point to the fact that the boy playing with her mother, and then his 
sudden change to an old man, indicated an uncle who had never 
been known to her. The mother had died when this daughter was 
quite young, and the family had been separated ever since. This 
would account for the possibility of there being an uncle. 

The next day her husband began a searching inquiry; looked up 
the record of birth; and in the course of a few weeks found that 
there had been a brother, and his name. The inquiry was then 
carried on in a very simple manner. Letters were addressed to 
every town in the gold mining regions where there was a snowy 
climate; and in the course of time communication was opened with 
the lost uncle. He had his side of the story to tell, which was that 
he had acquired a fortune in gold hunting and wanted to leave it to 
the child of his sister, the only relative he knew of, and she had been 
lost to him for most of his lifetime. He used to think of her every 
night. To repeat his words: “I would think, and think, and think, 
night after night, would I ever see my sister’s child? I wanted to 
make her happy. I did not know that she lived. It had been many 
years since I had heard of her, and I would think if she lived I might 
find her. Then the letter came and my wish was answered. When 
the letter came I was afraid it was a dream or ghost, it seemed such 
a strange message. My thinking won out for me. It was that.” 

He was right. 

If you go into a reverie, you will pick up out of the infinite knowl¬ 
edge of everywhere, some intense thought that is seeking you. Time 
and distance are not always barriers. Such intense thoughts have 
been picked up by a reverie from over the other side of the world; 
and some have come up out of a long past. 

It is all wonderful. Every reverie has its experience. We have 
never known of one that was a mere blank. If it were, it would be 
classed merely as a drowsy affair, and lacking that central intensity 
that is so needed to its life. 

In a true reverie there is no sleepiness. All is wide awake. The 
mind starts with excessive activity and the seeming impossibility 


236 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


of sleeping. Then comes the deliberate attempt to break in upon 
the thought by a sharp change of subject that is in no way connected 
with what has been in the mind. The devitalizing of the body drives 
the magnetism in upon the nerve centers, where it is greatly intensi¬ 
fied; and the mind at this juncture is thrown quickly into “no- 
manVland.” It is all a work of purpose, with no drifting or lagging. 

We have always taught the importance of having an object in view 
at all stages of the day or year. The lack of a definite purpose in 
what you do or think is exactly as disastrous as the lack of a port 
to a sailing vessel, or the lack of aim in a war. The useless army 
goes forth to the field, without general, or organization, or design. 
It drifts. If life is carried on in such a way, there is bound to be 
failure. In the use of the reverie, which is capable of being made 
the best friend a man or woman ever had, there is the opportunity 
of winning wonderful success if there is any point in doing so. 
Heaven helps those who help themselves, which means that it does 
not help the aimless individual. 

Every blessing should be turned into fruitage. 

The reverie, in which the two minds stand on the threshold of the 
same realm, brings knowledge of the best ways to proceed in every 
phase of existence. Nothing is too small or trifling for its attention. 
But there must be a power to draw it, and that power is purpose. 
In the absence of such a magnet as purpose, the reverie is receptive 
only of the intensity of others towards you. It is to show these 
opposites that the two cases were included in this cycle. Let us 
compare them. 

In the first case of reverie, the man who had not seen his family 
for many years, had in mind the deliberate and intense purpose 
of finding them. He thus drew the facts to himself. 

In the second case the woman in reverie had no wish or purpose; 
and this left her mind open to the intense wishing of someone of 
whom she had never heard, and of whose existence she could not 
have given a thought. 

These are directly opposite types of reverie. 

The second draws the intense mental activity from another person, 
no matter how far away. There are abundant proofs of this kind 
of action to establish the law under which it works. It is seemingly 
a haphazard process, but obeys fixed laws of life. 

The first is by far the more valuable type of process in the long 
run; for it need never fail, and is a constant agency; while the 


TEE REVERIE 


237 


second must have a counterpart, and this is not always available. 
It is not a probability that some one is seeking to send an intense 
thought to you every time you sit down to a reverie. 

We believe in the practical side of everything that pertains to 
this life. Sentiment has its place, and may serve a fine purpose, 
but living is a real thing that must make the first demands on 
one’s efforts. It is the most practical thing in this world to have 
tangible answers to the following questions: 

1. Why are you in the world? 

2. Do you want to be a living being, or is life of little use to you ? 

3. If it is of genuine use to you, in what way is it useful? 

4. Is your life of genuine use to anyone else than yourself? 

5. Is your living on earth of any good to the world outside of 
those who are connected with you? 

6. What occupation have you now that is of a high value to you? 

7. What do you have each year over and above what you earn? 
That is, what is your net gain at each years’ end? 

8. How long will your present occupation and earning capacity 
remain with you, in your opinion ? 

9. If you were to be stricken with a long period of sickness what 
have you to fall back upon for the support of yourself and those 
who are dependent on your help? 

10. If you were to lose your present earning opportunities, either 
in business or employment, to what could you turn for other earning 
opportunities ? 

11. At the present rate you are saving each year, what amount of 
money or property will you have when the time comes for you to 
retire or suffer a breakdown that will throw you upon your savings? 

12. Do you believe in hiding your talents and letting them rust 
with non-use ? 

13. Do you believe that if you advance into the years that are 
weighty with age, and have your lamps not trimmed, and no readi¬ 
ness for that era, you can spend the declining period of your life 
in peace and comfort? 

14. Are you one of those persons who, by a wrong interpretation 
of the precept, “take no thought of the morrow,” let things go 
as they will, and believe in not crossing bridges until you get to 
them? And do you know that these two monstrous misinterpreta¬ 
tions have led to more deaths in the poorhouse, in misery and abject 
suffering, in suicide and the horrors of self-debasement at that time 


238 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


in human existence when the call will be: Bring forth the talents 
entrusted to you and show what you have done with them; or, in 
other words, how have you spent the days and years as they passed 
by with fleeting feet? 

15. Do you know that to-day is all that is yours ? That to-morrow 
is the accumulation of all the to-days that have been yours to 
improve? That to-morrow is the sum total of to-days? That your 
to-days make the new opportunities for other to-days? Do you 
know that it is NOW, and no other time, that you are endowed with 
privilege, opportunity, and help? That the person who lets NOW 
go by in uselessness will pay for the default sooner or later; and 
that there is never a chance for the inevitable future to wipe out the 
neglect. 

16. In what way has to-day been of use to you or to anyone else ? 

17. In what way will to-morrow be of use to you or to anyone else ? 

18. What is the goal or purpose of the coming year in your life ? 

19. What is the goal or purpose of your existence on earth? 

20. When your career will have ended, what have you gained by 
it in definite purpose ? 

21. Do you think that you can atone for days and years of wasted 
existence by religious inclination later on, or by charity? 

22. Do you know that indiscriminate charity, of which more than 
eighty per cent is to-day, is making a people of degenerates from 
whom is being taken the self-dependence necessary for true life, and 
to whom is being given all the free scope of criminal tendencies that 
vice could want? 

23. Do you know that true charity consists in taking care of the 
needy in fact, not the self-made-needy; and in opening the way for 
all other classes to earn what they receive, and that the opposite 
method is in vogue to-day, for which the next few years will yield 
a reward in blood and anarchy? Do you know that thousands of 
wealthy men and women think that all they have to do to be useful 
citizens is to give when asked, and not to know something of the 
uses made with their gifts? 

24. Do you know what is meant by wasting time? 

25. Do you know that minutes and hours are actual property 
belonging to the universal fund of wealth, out of which a share is 
given to every individual to use, and that such time has both a 
money value and a personal value? 

26. Do you know that you can rob this fund of much value by 


THE REVERIE 


239 


idle waste of minutes and hours, in which nothing is gained for 
yourself or for others; and that you will be held chargeable with 
this deficit? 

27. Do you know that, while money and property are parts of 
the same physical earth out of which you were born and should be 
won in order to improve part of the talents committed to your care, 
there are other gains more important, one of which is an enriched 
mind ? 

28. Do you know that there are many studies and many lines of 
work that enrich the mind? 

29. Do you know that the passing of minutes and hours in cheap 
amusements, in idle reading, in flashy excitement, and in an in¬ 
difference to the good influences that attend all useful lives, is a 
robbery of the values that are entrusted to your keeping? That 
there are wholesome amusements, noble reading, and splendid ambi¬ 
tions that furnish the higher forms of pleasure? 

30. Do you know that, in proportion as you ignore these bettor 
things, you come into a spirit of discontent, blame your unlucky 
star, even curse or want to curse your environments, and grow mean in 
every way; and that the devotees of all bad habits take their down¬ 
ward course through this indifference to the good things of life? 

31. Do you know that there can be no success and no happiness 
in this world unless you have a fixed goal for which you live, and a 
daily purpose to gain; and that the rewards of heaven in another 
world are not the fixed goal of this? Three goals are necessary: 

1. One for the day, to change from day to day if need be. 

2. One for the general battle of physical life. 

3. One for that which follows. 

If the first two are maintained, the third will take care of itself. 

32. What is your goal for to-morrow ? 

33. What is your fixed goal for this life? 

Here are questions for you to take to your reverie. They are 
made to suit every condition, from poverty to wealth, from ignorance 
to wisdom, and from crime to religion. They will therefore come 
into your life in one department or another. You are probably not 
a criminal, and certainly not afflicted with abject poverty. But 
whoever you are, take these thirty-three inquiries into your reveries 
and see where you will emerge. The first result will be to awaken 
into your mind the necessity of an ambition for each day and a 
general ambition for life. 


no 


OPERATIONS OF TIIF OTHER MIND 


Now it is a fact that you have no such ambition, and you do 
not know what kind of goal you could summon up for to-morrow or 
for a lifetime. But if you are interested in that subject, take these 
questions to a reverie; and he sure that you have worked your way 
through the several cycles preceding this in order to he able to 
empty your mind and find access to the overtures of the Other Mind. 

The first thing that will result is the knowledge of what is best for 
you. In the reverie, the Other Mind that always tends upward when 
left to its own impulses, will speak in no uncertain terms of the 
work for you to set about accomplishing. It will not be the work 
of giving something; but perhaps the task of shaping things so that 
you, if wealthy, will be able to aid others in finding opportunities to 
do manly and womanly duties in a spirit of independence which is 
the noblest end of all labor. Show someone how to become independ¬ 
ent, is the grandest of all charities. But you may be poor yourself. 
If so, you need to see the way to store up a fund that will ward off 
the dependence of old age. 

The highest goal in life is thorough independence. 

It is not the discarding of the sympathy and fellowship of others, 
but it is discarding their outstretched hand in an unequal exchange. 
If you are not now independent financially for life, let that be a goal 
that shall lead you on. It is always noble. It tries the best temper 
of the soul to shake off the shackles of dependence. 

This is physical, but you are physical, and your body and all it 
contains is the product of the physical earth. Money, house, cloth¬ 
ing, food, jewels, inventions, comforts, all come from the physical 
earth. Art, colors, sound, music, beauty, happiness, all are bom 
of the same physical earth. Everything is good that is well used. 

But the mind is more than physical. If there is a soul it is a 
part of the Other Mind, or else is revealed by that great realm; and 
the mental world demands daily attention. A grand ambition is to 
learn more of the mind through its use. 

Here are two ambitions that overtop in importance all else: 

1. To be independent of the charity of others, even down through 
the years of fading life. 

2. To learn more of the mind. 

Take these thirty-three questions with you to your reveries, for 
they have been written for the purpose of stimulating the habit. 
Bead them again and again and think of their answers, as far as they 
relate to you. They will set you to thinking deeply. Light will 


TEE REVERIE 


241 


come to you, and it will be a great flood of light, measured wholly 
by your keen desire for its help. Learn to be consistent, to be con¬ 
servative, to be careful, to use judgment, to calm all your unrest, 
to be steady, to be strong, to better your environment, and to rise 
all the time in the world. This does not mean to gain power, but 
to gain character. Then you will be happy, prosperous and royal. 

These are the nobler themes of a reverie. 

A man and woman should set apart some minutes each day for this 
purpose. If no other time is at hand, select the last period of wake¬ 
fulness just before falling asleep at night. But keep the thirty- 
three questions in mind always. 

A man told us that he had acquired a daily ambition or goal which 
was very simple in itself; and it contained a very few words: “Waste 
five minutes less each day.” In his reverie that was based on this 
ambition he found information that gave him something that would 
improve the time that had been sacrificed upon the altar of the 
daily paper, and the superabundant magazine, or in cards, gossip 
and fault-finding. He took the measure of himself and the world 
about him, and saw where he could prepare for something higher 
than had been his lot hitherto. And he rose out of himself day by 
day until he became a surprise to himself and his friends. There 
can be no failure in such a course. 

It would require a very low mind to fail to see the advantages of 
cultivating the habit of reverie. There has been nothing accom¬ 
plished in the world except through this channel. Try to think 
how many things in the past five thousand years have happened 
to give impetus to the progress of mankind. What deed has won 
more for the world than any other ? That was born in reverie. What 
battle has been fought for freedom that was not the product of rev¬ 
erie? What act of heroism, of great achievement, of invention, of 
art, of architecture, of literature, of poetry, of discovery, that was 
not the offspring of this habit? Imagine Columbus setting sail for 
the new hemisphere without having been given light to believe that 
the world was round. Other adventurers had thought it possible; 
but this one man gave himself up to the study of the problem until 
the Other Mind, standing on the threshold of the brain, told him 
to go on. 

The right thing, the great thing, is flashed into the working in¬ 
telligence by this power. 

The first architecture of the ages was a mound; the next was a 


242 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


modification of that simple pile of dirt, and so through the centuries 
new ideas crept into the mind of man until the dome of St. PetePs 
rose to kiss the sky. In that sublime structure may be found the 
living thoughts that were conceived one by one in the years through 
which it was planned; for nothing was left to accident. 

The first boat was a raft; the next had sides; the third was curved; 
and out of the elements of simplicity the elaborate craft of com¬ 
merce came to grace the seas; until at last the floating palace glided 
in majesty over the waters to unite awaiting continents. 

In every improvement may be seen some thought that came to the 
light of life during the reverie of the mind; and it could come in 
no other way. "I want a new idea in this piece of machinery,” 
says the president of a great company. “Give me till morning and 
I will have it,” said the man to whom was entrusted the solving 
of the problem. He went to his study; he locked the doors; he 
drew the shades; he shut out all distracting thoughts; then he took 
up the matter with all the eagerness and intensity of the hunter 
whose life depended on being guided into the right direction for his 
game. He studied and thought and delved; and nothing came. 
Then he took up a comic magazine and looked through its pages for 
five minutes. Then he looked again at the model, and he studied 
some more. He now began to think and ponder, and to let his mind 
have wide range. Then he shifted the run of the mind and looked 
into his home. What was his family doing at that hour? Hid 
they want him there? Were they lonely? Once more his mind 
came to the model, and at last he stopped. He let it empty itself 
and he looked at nothing. In that second of time that brings great 
discoveries into being, there flashed into his brain the needed idea, 
and the battle was won. This is the story that the man tells of one 
of the most important improvements in modern machinery. 

The interval may be prolonged for minutes and even hours. 

The meditation that attends the deeper studies of difficult things 
is often a night in length. Writings that have done more for human¬ 
ity than many other agencies, are the work of the night, when all 
is still and the reveries may be extended into the coming day. Dick¬ 
ens speaks of the conception of his Christmas Carol as the gift of a 
night of such thought; and, had he written nothing else, that little 
gem would have made him famous. It will live centuries hence after 
all his larger productions have been forgotten. It was the one sub¬ 
lime inspiration of the last century. It stands as proof of the ex- 


THE REVERIE 


243 


istence of two minds, for Dickens himself in his working thoughts 
was a man quite the opposite from this remarkable creation. He 
was as much surprised at its coming into being as was the rest 
of the world. 

The grander themes of life have been the inviting lures to reveries, 
through the mazes of which have been brought forth the advance 
armies of progress. Women have had a large share in these achieve¬ 
ments. All grades of greatness are represented in this line of march. 
Some are the leaders whose names will go down to the end of the 
centuries. Others will be forgotten in less than a hundred years; 
and some will perish when they die in earth. In times of a great 
onward movement for the betterment of the nation, all the people 
are alive to the call of the hour, and they sit and think of the 
duties that await them until, like a single mass moving to one goal, 
they proceed to their work of un-making and re-making. 

But there is a common realm in all eras where every man and 
every woman may do good work and great work. Life consists of 
duties and complex problems which cannot be solved by the working 
mind. The more it is argued, the more obscure becomes the way 
of procedure. Men are shirking marriage because of its expense 
and demands on their freedom. Women, married or single, are 
seeking places of employment many of which are in the legitimate 
sphere of the stronger sex. The home, where it exists at all, is 
drifting toward the apartment buildings, with all the glory of the 
homestead gone, and the magnetic force of the family extinguished. 
Simplicity is impossible and there is only a frantic struggle to keep 
alive. 

On this account we find from the many sources of information 
at hand that ninety per cent, of the men are in a mental state of 
chaos, for there can be no ambition of mind or life where there is 
no prospect of escaping the entanglements of this age. Men are 
asking the one question. What shall I do? Women are still more 
deeply interested in the same problem on their own side of the 
case. Once they asked, When shall I marry? How they ask, Shall 
I ever marry? Or, if married, how long shall I be compelled to put 
up with this state? 

Once when there were few grinding influences weighing down 
the race, men had time to think, and women had time to contem¬ 
plate. How they have hardly time to read; and he who reads much, 
and thinks little, learns nothing. In the olden times, when women 


244 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


were largely guided by intuition of which they were the master¬ 
minds, they were more safely led into their destinies. Now they 
are going in the opposite direction. 

The papers you read, the books you read, the magazines you read, 
the works you study, all have been produced by people who think; 
and you, who devote all your spare time to reading what others have 
been thinking, are sacrificed to the most useless waste of time ever 
known since first the history of life began. 

There are insurmountable difficulties awaiting every man and 
woman who cannot find time to think, to contemplate, to dwell in 
the reverie. The physical mind is the slave of events. It cannot 
show the way out of any difficulty. The Other Mind is the true 
guide. In the days when men and women had time to think, to 
contemplate, and to enter the reverie, they were masters of them¬ 
selves in larger measure than to-day; they conceived the better things 
for the world, and they participated in every good movement. 

You may search through the past from the day when the first line 
of human records was inscribed, down to this very minute, and you 
will not find a step that has been taken onward that was not born 
in the reverie. You may hunt through the toil that is being enacted 
at this very hour, and if you could lift the veil that closes out the 
toilers from view of men, you would see them alone, secluded, think¬ 
ing, contemplating and in reverie. Some in their offices, some in 
their studies, some in their homes, and some in their little rooms 
hidden from all intrusion, are thinking out the problems for the 
next era of advancement. If you break in upon them, you will ruin 
their work, for they must be alone. 

Yet these real people are comparatively few. How many of them 
do you know? If all that makes this era more civilized than the 
age of stone, is due to the power of new ideas evolved in the reverie; 
if whatever of human honesty and tenderness has come up out of the 
barbarous past is the fruit of the reverie; if all of the hope and the 
promise of a coming era of peace and splendor is being shaped to¬ 
day in the reveries of men and women,—what, then, is the value 
that you place on this realm where two minds almost meet, where 
the error-laden consciousness is swept by the free airs of an immacu¬ 
late zone that knows no mistake and admits no failure? 

Think of it. 

Learn how to enter it. 


245 


SEVENTEENTH CYCLE 



OUR FRIENDS are measured oft 
By spoken word and tone 
While in the heart no smile 
Exists, nor gracious thought 
Inspires the kind address 
Of outward courtesy. 

UCEE has been written of thought transference, and very 
little about the transference of feeling. Yet thought 
is supposed to exist in words, and is called thought 
because there are words by which it can be expressed, 
while feeling is wholly a wordless and thoughtless 
experience. The first, last and the most conspicuous ideas of life 
are those that embody feelings, of which there are every variety 
and grade. 

If there were no human beings in existence, and all else remained, 
there would be ideas without limit as there are now. If humanity 
were all deaf, dumb and blind, so that no one could read, write, 
speak or see words, there would be ideas in abundance, and trans¬ 
actions as numerous possibly as now. There could be art and archi¬ 
tecture, machinery and the complicated details of existence. By 
this view we see how small a part in the transactions of the world is 
played by that class of ideas that cannot be expressed except by 
words. 

A feeling is stronger than a thought. The latter is the result of 
something that has occurred in the past, even where it looks to 
future action. A feeling is the individual himself. It is the living 
of the thing or condition that makes the thought at times. If 
a drama were to be constructed with nothing but thoughts, it could 
not be acted. The play that the manager most dreads is the kind 
that he calls “talky.” He says the public pay to see life enacted. 











246 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


not to hear what some folks have to say on the subject. Talk is 
necessary, unless a pantomime is on the boards; but the less talk 
and the more action, the better is the play. Bernhardt, in her 
greatest scene in La Tosca, says hardly a dozen words, and there 
are many minutes when she is silent, but the drama is full of in¬ 
tense action. This is true in greater or less degree of all great plays. 
The actor is the medium through which human feelings are por¬ 
trayed. 

Telepathy is a transfer of knowledge from the outer world through 
the Other Mind into the realm of consciousness where it is caught 
by the principle of the echo which has been fully described in the 
preceding cycles. The composition of the word telepathy indicates 
the communication of feeling rather than thought. 

It thus coincides with the first, last and deepest experiences of 
existence; for it deals with a vast realm of facts for which there 
are no words and almost no thoughts. As has been many times 
said by one author or another, there are countless experiences that 
are all the time filling our minds which we either do not recognize 
or are unable to understand. If the whole truth could be known, 
human intelligence is a mass of knowledge that wastes from lack of 
use; like the courts of a mysterious realm whose outer grounds are 
barren and give little promise of the flowers, the fruits, the cooling 
shades and musical groves within. We do not know what we are, for 
we remain untaught of what we hold within our minds. 

There is no development so important and so useful as that which 
shows the way to recognize these powers and so interpret their 
meaning. 

The first step in all communications between persons present with 
each other, and between those who are absent, is to know what are 
the genuine feelings they entertain. To the student who says that 
he understands that telepathy is the transference of words from one 
mind to another, there is the answer that words often lie, and 
feelings cannot. 

1. Feelings are the facts themselves. 

2. Words are what is said of facts. 

Your friend is unusally pleasing in his morning salute, and 
you are charmed; but is he acting a part, or is the kind expression 
the true inward feeling? Long before telepathy was ever written 
upon as a science, its art had been in use by those who are skilled 
in reading human nature. It is said that the ability to know how 


TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING 


247 


much truth there is in the spoken or written words, is an educa¬ 
tion in itself. But the fact is, it is a slow development and success 
is attained as the result of many bitter experiences. 

“Who is to be believed ?” is a frequent inquiry. “What is to 
be believed ?” is fully as important. 

The Other Mind is never deceived. It knows for the reason that 
everything that exists is an open book to it. The child who has 
never been forced to tell a lie, speaks what it means, as far as it is 
communicative. Adults are diplomatic, which means that the truth 
is better not told in most cases. Some do not lie, but they refrain 
from telling what they know and all they know. Diplomacy in 
national interchange is skillful evasion. 

An intent or purpose is a feeling. If a child or adult has already 
formed the design not to obey, or not to tell the truth, or otherwise 
do wrong, that intent is a fact, and exists as a feeling or refusal 
or deception in the mind of the child or adult. If some one meets 
you and professes friendship, the words used are words, and the 
real intent is the fact; and if such person hates you while, for a 
purpose, he seeks to gain your good will by a pretense of kindness, 
the hate is the fact. 

Now telepathy does not transfer the words, for they are not fact, 
in a case like that. When the words and the intent are alike, telep¬ 
athy will transfer the intent, and often the words, in case they are 
uttered to another person out of your hearing. But when the in¬ 
tent is one thing and the words another, then only the intent is 
conveyed. Experience has shown this to be the process, and it is 
based on the actual transmission of the fact rather than what is said. 
Knowledge exists and is carried from mind to mind; but words that 
are lies do not stand for an existing fact. 

Dishonesty is a feeling. 

It is common, and perhaps is the most common feeling in exist¬ 
ence, next to selfishness. The latter is also a feeling. So are re¬ 
gard, generosity, happiness, trust, confidence, love, faith, forgiveness 
and scores of good traits of human nature. On the other hand, 
all the evil moods of the heart and mind are feelings. A man who 
has made a special study of the practice of this branch of telepathy 
reports many surprising successes, and others have joined him in 
similar results, all attributable to the development of the power to 
throw the conscious mind into “no-man ? s-land” at will. Many of 
the cases stated here are from his reports; but some are from men 


248 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


and women who are in no way connected with him. Before the 
practice of this part of the work was undertaken by a systematic 
plan, the results were of no consequence. 

1.—A man had four acquaintances among the women of his circle, 
all of whom were alike fascinating to him. He did not experience 
what is called love, for if he had there would have been one of the 
four who would have been his choice. They were all in love with 
him, as events afterwards proved. When in the presence of each, 
he thought her superior to the other three. Still he was unable to 
make up his mind. To a friend he made the statement that he had 
a profound respect and admiration for them all. From their seem¬ 
ing interest in him and from other sources he made up his mind 
that he could have as his wife any one of the four he might select. 
In this belief he avoided them all for fear of committing himself and 
misleading them, or of becoming involved in obligations that would 
put him on his honor. All the parties belonged to very wealthy 
families. 

In his quandary he went away for a long time, hoping that, on his 
arrival, he would find three of them engaged and one remaining; 
and in this way settle the problem. In his absence he devoted him¬ 
self to the study and practice of telepathy. In the course of time 
he made preparations for return. Before doing so, while four thou¬ 
sands miles from the ladies, he undertook to draw their minds by 
fixing the purpose to do so in his own thought; then emptying his 
mind by devitalization and shifting the flow of ideas as described 
in this work. He conceived the idea of placing the form and features 
of one of the ladies in a picture that he made mentally, and creating 
the determination to locate her in a reverie; then carry on the general 
plan of drawing knowledge from that source. The first evening 
he had some success, for there followed every attempt to empty his 
mind, a clear feeling of coldness and indifference that made him 
uncomfortable, as if some one had told him to go away and keep 
away. This was repeated four times that evening. On the next 
night, the same experience came to him. 

The third evening he made a mental picture of another of the 
ladies, and attempted to draw knowledge of her. Nothing distinct 
came of it during the reverie; but, when he arose and looked at 
himself in the mirror, his eyes were moist. It was a slight matter, 
and he did not think it worthy of attention, or in any way con¬ 
nected with the effort to obtain information. The next evening he 


TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING 


249 


repeated the attempt and the result was a heavy feeling of sadness 
to which he could not attribute any meaning. But the next evening 
he had a distinct feeling come over him that tears had been shed 
for his absence; perhaps once only and perhaps at the time of his 
going; or perhaps at this time. 

As the experiments were interesting he resolved to compare the 
two cases, and threw his mind and mental picture hack upon the 
first woman. In the reverie that followed he was in coldness and 
chill, with a feeling that all the world was indifferent to him, and 
cared nothing for him. He was glad to leave this part of the work, 
and seek the next mental picture. Again came over him the feel¬ 
ing of sadness and the moistening of the eyes. By this time he had 
great faith in his progress. 

The next night he threw his whole rnind on the third woman, 
and was only partly successful, when he made the shift to the 
empty mind. The feeling was too vague to be interpreted. He 
repeated the process the next three nights, but could not keep 
from reverting to the first two of the ladies, and this was largely 
the result of careless work. Yet there was a something vague that 
came over him. After another trial he felt a feeling of a rasping, 
irritating nature. Subsequent trials confirmed this. The fourth 
lady received attention, and in the course of his experiments he 
succeeded in drawing a bright, cheerful feeling. These four re¬ 
sults were recorded, and the names of the women placed against 
each. There was indifference, sadness, temper, cheerfulness. 

He wrote to his mother and, for the first time since his absence, 
mentioned the names of these friends, and asked her in the strictest 
secrecy to ascertain by indirect inquiry the status of his friendship 
with all four of them; what, if anything, they had to say of him, and 
which one of the four seemed to be most kindly in feeling to him. 
To make these inquiries required something more than ordinary skill, 
as it was not policy to have his interest in the matter made known to 
them. The only reply that bore on the subject was that the first 
of the ladies had become engaged to another man. This explained, 
possibly, why she was indifferent to him. 

The date of the letter had something to do with the proof of 
the after history; for it was written before there was any possibility 
of his being informed of the way matters stood at his home city. 

On returning he found that the second lady, the sad one, was of a 
gloomy disposition, and that this habit had been growing on her 


250 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


of late. The third was soured by her failure to succeed in her am¬ 
bition. The fourth and last was of a bright and cheerful nature, 
as he found when he made her several frequent visits; and, on pro¬ 
posing and being accepted, he confirmed his estimate of her by the 
subsequent marriage. The four accounts in his records when abroad 
were accurate, and they fitted the identical women of which they 
were made. 

The value of this complicated case is in the fact that there 
cannot be a charge of accident or coincidence in the tests. There 
are two explanations of the manner in which the knowledge was 
transferred: 

1. Either the feelings were taken from the character of each of 
the women at the time he made the tests. 

2. Or the feelings were transmitted to his Other Mind many 
months before, and came forth at the time of the tests. This 
latter view may be correct, as the next case will seem to indicate. 

2 .—A man who had known a woman ten years before, and who 
had been dead eight years, threw his mind upon her with an intense 
power in a desire to know something of her existence, as he did not 
then have information of her death. He had loved her, and had 
refused to marry any other woman. She declined his offer then 
because he had not the means to support a home; but she said when 
he had got on in the world that he might hunt her up, and she 
would then know her mind better. They were separated, and his 
letters to her were returned, having marks on them indicating that 
she had moved away. He had since grown wealthy, and had been 
attracted to the study of telepathy, by which he was enabled to con¬ 
centrate his thoughts, then end them by emptying the mind, and 
draw something interesting out of the Other Mind. 

His experience in the trials resulted in the transmission of a 
feeling of poverty, the lack of money as well as the necessities of 
life, and a sinking sensation. This he found repeated on three suc¬ 
cessive evenings as he made the trials. On the last evening there 
flashed across his mind the name of a distant town on a sign at a 
railway station, and not far in the rear the shape of a small house. 
He had faith enough in the matter to make the journey, which was 
done under the name of a relative of hers, as he thought he might 
secure evidence more readily. He found that such a house had 
stood there but had been tom down five years before; and that the 
woman had died single in the house eight years before the time of 


TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING 


251 


his visit. As a large building was standing in place of the cottage 
which he had seen, he was not able to have the presence of the 
latter verified until he had made a sketch from his vision. As soon as 
he had done this, a real estate agent recalled it, and some family 
near-by gave the information of the fact that the woman had lived 
there. She had died in poverty, after a long illness. The address of 
a woman who had taken care of her, but who had moved away, was 
secured, and the man made another journey to find her. He was 
then told that this woman, in her last illness, had spoken the name 
of a lover who would gladly have come to her, and might have saved 
her life had he come in time. The old woman could not tell the 
exact name of the man, but she gave a name that was close to the 
real one; and this man knew that he was in the mind of his old 
sweetheart prior to her death in poverty. 

How the feeling of poverty and suffering should have come to 
him eight years after it was being endured by the woman, he could 
not tell. It seemed to him like positive proof of the spirit of the 
woman trying to tell him from another sphere of what she had 
suffered in this life. He could not see any other solution. 

But there are many clear proofs of the fact that knowledge will 
reach the Other Mind during the life of a person, and will there 
stay until it is called out by some exciting cause. 

In this case the woman was thinking of him when she was in 
dire poverty and in her last illness. Thoughts then are most in¬ 
tense. That feeling was transmitted to his Other Mind, and there it 
remained. Of this there is not the slightest doubt. It was not 
known to him because he had no way of recognizing it; and so 
the conscious mind did not connect with it. Had he, at that time 
eight years before, been in a reverie, it would have caught his 
attention in a flash. Had his nerves been unstrung so as to empty 
his mind, as is often the case, he might have seen the woman’s form 
in her bed of sickness; or, at the moment of her death, her ghost 
might have sped past him. No doubt it did in fact; as such things 
occur every minute and second of time; but they are known only 
to the Other Mind, and fail for lack of recognition in the conscious 
mind. Had he been walking by a graveyard at dusk, and in a timid 
state of the nerves, he might have actually witnessed her body float¬ 
ing along the road ahead of him, or coming to him, with open eyes 
and extended hand, and all would have vanished in the twinkling 
of an eye. 


252 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


Enough is now known of the operations of the Other Mind to 
establish the fact that it has full consciousness of all that happens, 
and that the reason why its knowledge is not apparent is because 
of the inability of the ordinary mind to connect with it in time to 
catch the echo of the experience. 

Many persons have promised while living to send messages from 
the spirit world if they are in it and have the power to do so. Some 
messages come back. They almost always relate to some secret 
that could have been known to no one else even in life. One man 
said, “I have a secret that will die with me, and if you learn of that, 
you may know to a certainty that I am in the spirit world. I 
will not leave a word spoken or written to indicate what this secret 
is; and any information leading to its discovery will, if it comes 
after I am dead, be certain proof of my being alive in the spirit 
world and trying to communicate with you.” 

But was his argument correct and sound? 

At the very moment when he made that statement he transferred 
to the mind of every person present the secret; and had any one 
of them held a reverie that night or any time thereafter, the secret 
would have been out, even before he died, as we shall see in another 
case. He did die, and a medium startled the little world by reveal¬ 
ing the secret in less than a year; and men of science hunted it 
down and found it to be just as as he had described it. So they 
concluded that he was in the spirit world. 

STORED TELEPATHY. 

3.—In an interesting case like the foregoing, a man who held a 
very important secret made the same assertion that he would not 
reveal it until after he died. A society offered a reward of some 
size if it could have positive proof of the genuineness of the trans¬ 
mission of the secret after his death. An outside party said: 
‘Tet me send you a man who has never seen this man and who 
has not been in this country since he was born. Let them come 
together but a minute and then separate, and not speak while to¬ 
gether or know of each other afterwards. He will unearth the 
secret.” 

This was done. A series of reveries followed in the land from 
which the other party had come. The first of the trials produced 
nothing, nor the next three; but the fourth showed a forest and a 
line of trees so carefully and slightly marked that it would have 


TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING 


253 


been impossible for a stranger to have found the way to it. Then 
on three more reveries on succeeding evenings, the same thing was 
repeated, and nothing added. A year went by, and nothing was 
added. Several lengthy letters had been written in that time; but 
the matter came to a standstill. The slight progress that had been 
made was kept a profound secret, and every way guarded to prevent 
assistance reaching the experimenter. 

One evening when he was alone and more or less depressed, a 
sensation of great caution came over him; a very strange feeling. 

He seemed to be hiding something or had the feeling that he had 
something that must be hidden. It was a box made of iron and 
containing some papers under seal. He could not see it, but had the 
sensation of that fact. Then the forest came up in his mind. Then 
an old man going along stealthily and placing the iron box in a deep 
hole in the ground. The trees of the forest were so close together 
that they seemed to be solid in view, and the path very frail. 

The path led out into a stony field, and this extended to the dark 
edge of a town that seemed very black in its streets which were 
scarcely visible. In the roadway, there was a pole and three low 
houses stood close by; then there were no houses for fifty rods or 
more; and then the town appeared sparsely built. After having 
the view of this place in his mind for a while it began to grow 
light on the right hand side of the cluster of buildings. Here he 
assumed the east to he; and his construction of the vision was that 
the old man went out in the early hours of the morning before the 
dawn, and while it was yet dark, and hid his box in the forest, which 
was in a northerly direction. The scene whirled, and he felt 
the presence of an old stone house on a hill far from the town. 
This he took to be the home of the man. The style of architecture 
disclosed the nationality. A series of letters to parties in all the 
towns of that country of the approximate size of the one he had 
the presence of in his reveries, brought a response in a short time. 
He had asked if on the north side of the town there was a pole in 
the road, and three low houses by themselves, separated from the 
main town; also if there was a stone house built in a certain way, 
which he described, in some other place near the town. With in¬ 
credible accuracy he found all he sought; but he concealed the forest 
incident. 

Then he wrote that he was ready to report. 

Being a man of wealth and an investigator, he delved into the 


254 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


test for the gain it might bring to science. The society abroad 
asked him to retain his reports, to seal them, and place them in the 
custody of some safe deposit company where he could not get them 
without an order from the agent of the organization. The old man 
was not expected to live long. 

Before he died he said: “I still aver that my secret shall die with 
me. Then I do not care who knows it.” 

About seven months after his death, a medium was at work giving 
out the information of the hidden box in the dark forest; but she 
never got further. The sealed report has just been opened, and 
the box has been found. It involves the inheritance of a great estate 
and the legal disputes arising will either be settled by compromise 
or be brought to trial in court. 

Here is a case where the secret, as the old man stated, was his 
alone. But when he met the other man, all the details went into 
the mind and there remained until, a long time afterward, they 
were drawn out by reveries. 

There is a series of cases where the facts that die with people 
have been lodged before death in the Other Mind of some person 
and then extracted in some way. 

4. — A young woman who was in love with a man, a few nights 
before the wedding, which was to occur on short notice, had a deep 
reverie, and in it she felt strongly that this man was deceiving her. 
The fact that he was already married could not be shaken off. She 
had known of him for three years, and had known him personally 
several months, during which time he seemed to be better than the 
average men, and to have an excellent position of employment. 
There was every reason why they should be happy; but this feeling 
of his being married was too strong to be resisted. She arranged 
an interview at once and told him that she had received a positive 
knowledge of his marriage with another woman, but would not tell 
him more. He finally admitted it and said: 

“I did marry, but it was a very miserable marriage. She was 
untrue to me, and I left her. I have been told by friends that she 
has died.” 

As the man seemed to be as much in love with the young woman 
as she was with him, and as it would hurt him in his employment 
to have the wedding postponed, she consented to it, and they became 
man and wife. The former wife lived in England, more than 
three thousand miles away. The second wife instituted proceedings 


TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING 


255 


of inquiry without the knowledge of her husband, and found that 
the. first wife had died shortly before the second wedding. She 
also learned that she had been discarded by her family, who reported 
her dead. Thus the second wife had no cause to believe that her 
husband intended to deceive her. She took a desperate chance and 
won. 

5. — A woman thirty years of age was called by 'phone to her 
husband's office. She started to go; but on her way a dozen different 
thoughts came into her mind, as the message had been sent by a 
young woman clerk who merely said Hurry, and shut off the 'phone. 
Coming from the woman clerk, there was no reason to keep her from 
going. In the midst of her thoughts, she suddenly had a strong feel¬ 
ing that she was wanted at home. This feeling was so great that she 
obeyed it, and on turning the comer where a policeman stood asked 
him to keep his eye on her house, as she feared there was trouble 
there. She had gone but a few rods more when a closed carriage 
drew up to the house, and a man got out while the other remained 
in the front seat. The woman turned, beckoned to the officer, and 
began to run to the house. It seemed that it had been her custom 
to leave the back door unlocked, as there was someone in or near the 
kitchen all the time to guard it. The man who had alighted from 
the carriage went to the door, entered the house, went upstairs to a 
room that he seemed to know all about, took a child in his arms, 
threw a potato bag over it, and was emerging with the bag when 
the woman stood in front of him and the officer coming rapidly. 
The man in the carriage drove away in haste, and escaped. The 
man with the bag was captured. 

The appearance of a man with a bag would hardly attract atten¬ 
tion. It is not an uncommon sight. The child within could not 
make an outcry. It is very easy for kidnappers to seize children, put 
them in bags, and get away in the midst of thousands of people. 
In this case the maid in the kitchen, who had been recently en¬ 
gaged, was a confederate; and the woman clerk was in another 
place instead of the man's office, that female also being a confederate, 
and not the clerk. 

6. — A man who was talking politics with a candidate was told 
that, for his support, he would be given a certain office. In this 
conversation he had the feeling come over him that the office 
had been likewise promised to several other men; as he seemed 
to see them relying on the assurance that they would be rewarded 


256 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


in that way for his support. In this flash of feeling, he saw a portly 
man whom he recognized as another politician. He turned to the 
candidate and said, “May I mention something to you in confidence 
without offending you?” He was told that he could with perfect 
safety. “Well, I have been told this evening that you have prom¬ 
ised the same office to Mr. Corbin.”—“Tut, tut, man, that was only 
a bluff. I had to promise that to keep him at work. But you are 
the man for the office, and you will get it just as sure as I am 
elected.”—The support was withdrawn, and the candidate was not 
elected. 

7.—A man who liked to spend a half hour occasionally in the 
reverie, made the following experiment with regard to eight of 
his friends, all men: 

He drew from friend number one the feeling of anger, and the 
cause was in his place of business. Nothing more definite was 
obtained. 

He drew from his friend number two the feeling that he was 
short of funds and would be after help very soon; also that the 
house of that friend, which was heavily mortgaged, would soon be 
sold out and the contents lost. 

He drew from friend number three the feeling that he was ill 
from indigestion and was in great pain. The feeling was sympa¬ 
thetic, and took hold of the experimenter in somewhat the same 
way as the victim, only modified. It was real, and happily ceased 
When he shifted his mind to others. 

He drew from friend number four the feeling that he was sleepy, 
having been up late the night before, and that he had fallen asleep 
in his chair, paper in hand. 

He drew from friend number five the feeling of great good luck 
in a deal that had involved friend number two, very much to the 
disadvantage of the latter. Number five was in high spirits over it. 

He drew from friend number six the feeling that he had a hard 
task before him in the solution of a matter that was engrossing 
his whole attention. Nothing more definite came of it. 

From the others he got no impressions of any kind; the feeling 
being neutral and not marked. 

He had written down on paper the results as he went along. 
He sent word at once to number five and had him call. He did so, 
as this experimenter was a leading man in the place and had both 
influence and wealth. He opened fire as follows: 


TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING 


257 


“You have had dealings with Frazer to-day ?” 

“No, not at all. I have nothing to do with Frazer for some 
time.” 

“But you have had dealings that affected some of Frazer’s hold¬ 
ings.” 

“How did you know that? Frazer has just got wind of it, I am 
informed. Have you seen him?” 

“No, but I know about it. The profits which you are getting 
will be big enough if you let Frazer out. He is ruined, and must 
lose his house and all his property. He trusted you. You thought 
you were to be kept out of sight, in the background, and not be 
known in the deal. It is known only to me. Frazer does not know 
you are in it. If you straighten out his part of it, you can have the 
rest, and that is the big end. Now fix it up here, as he may come 
to see me at any moment.” 

“I do not want him to see me here. I will fix it to-morrow.” 

“No, here. He will not see you, if you are quick about it.” 

The papers were drawn up in brief, sufficiently to hold the man 
to his agreement, and he was about to go, when Frazer arrived; and 
as the latter was ushered in the front of the house, number five went 
out at the side door. 

“I am in a hole,” said Frazer. 

He then told the whole story of his ventures and final crash which 
was to occur the next day; and he asked for help. 

“What good will help do you?” 

“It will save my house, and my property in it. If this thing 
breaks I have no home, and nothing to furnish a place with in which 
to live. My wife is ignorant of what has happened. You know 
her to be a very estimable woman for whom you professed great 
friendship before our marriage and her distress ought to appeal 
to you. I wish to avert it. She must not know about this.” 

“But if I help you now, you will be as badly off again by your 
senseless speculation. If you will promise not to speculate again, 
I will fix this trouble up for you.” 

The promise was made, and the experimenter said: 

“Now go, and keep your word.” 

“But what about the deal that is squeezing me? The men that 
have me on the hip are sharpers, and they must have their pound of 
blood.” 

“Ho as I tell you and go. There is all there is to it. If you 


258 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


ever speculate again, the crash will come. As long as you keep 
your promise there will be nothing doing to hurt you.” 

So the affair was left that way, and number two is still wonder¬ 
ing what was done to avert the disaster. 

Number one had got mad at the error of a clerk in his office and 
was in a very bad humor all evening. His wife and three chil¬ 
dren kept away from the room where he was indulging in language 
that was not the best for the domestic circle. 

Number three was in considerable pain all the evening; and a 
’phone call from the experimenter asking how he was, drew the in¬ 
quiry: 

“Joe ate some fried oysters and is taking the consequences. How 
did you know about it-” 

Number four was sound asleep when he ’phoned up his house, 
and it was true that he had been up late the night before. Number 
six was at work on the solution of a business proposition that in¬ 
volved so many details that he did not see the end in view at that 
time, as was learned by ’phone. 

Thus the feelings that had been transmitted were true as far as 
they were drawn in the circle of the influence exerted. They are 
convincing proofs that such transmissions are not accidental; and 
that they can be increased by practice. 

Many cases might be cited of the dishonesty that had been un¬ 
veiled by this process. They are published in books and have been 
known for many years. It is not pretended here that this is a new 
art; for there has never been a person who has not to some extent, 
slight or great, caught accidental feelings from others. But they 
are accidental in all such instances as where no attempt is made 
to draw them. 

8.—A woman of the age of twenty—two was very beautiful but so 
exceedingly bashful that she could not be made congenial to any 
of her male acquaintances. Parties were given in which a number 
of people of her age were present, and young men of the best 
standing were invited. She could not be led into any spirited or 
free conversation, despite all efforts in that direction. One even¬ 
ing there were ten young gentlemen and about that number of 
young ladies at a dinner where she was present and one of the 
young men was her partner. She was nice to him, but so quiet 
that he was in a frigid state all the evening. Another gentleman 
who was some distance away and who caught the young woman’s 


TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING 


259 


eye but once, had a strange feeling come over him. He had met 
her several times before, but at this time he perceived something 
in the glance of the eye that meant more than he could under¬ 
stand. He did not care for her; in fact he thought she was a cold 
beauty and very tiresome. That night he went to his room very soon 
after getting to the house where he lived, and sat on the edge of the 
bed, still in his evening dress, and the feeling came over him that the 
woman was in love with him. He hoped it could not be true, as 
he would never marry her. To his mind beauty was only skin deep, 
and it would soon fade. There must be something more than 
wealth, as he had all he needed. So marriage was very unattractive 
with her. 

The next afternoon there came an invitation from her mother for 
him to call, which he did. While left alone with the young lady, 
he told her that he had been the victim of a very peculiar experience. 
He then related part of it, not venturing to speak of love. He said 
that a certain lady whose name he could not tell, had exercised a 
spell over him which he found was making him a slave. 

“I think very highly of her, but she is so different from me in 
temperament that I could never care for her except as an acquaint¬ 
ance,” he said in explaining the matter. 

“Do you think this spell she is exercising over you is intentional 
or accidental?” 

“It could not be intentional. I think she has taken an interest 
in me, and perhaps thinks of me, and that makes the spell. She 
is such a quiet young lady that I could not believe she could ever fall 
in love.” 

He went home, and found himself anxious to call again in a few 
evenings. He was in love with her, and told her so, and proposed. 
She refused him on the ground that she did not love him. He 
asked if he might call as often as he wished, and she consented. 
For three months they were the closest friends. Then, in a reverie 
one evening alone, he found that a feeling was drawn to him for her 
in which she showed the most decided jealousy mixed with love. To 
test the matter, he told her at the next visit that he was thinking of 
taking a certain young lady to the theatre the coming week. She 
at once arose and said: 

“You certainly will not do that.” 

“But why not? She is a very nice girl. Hot as nice as you, 
but she will learn to love me, and that you can never do.” 


260 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


The quiet maiden awoke at last from her long lethargy and real¬ 
ized that she loved him. When he said that his proposition to 
escort another lady to the theatre was only a test of her feeling for 
him, peace followed; and they are married. He says that she is not 
so quiet now. 

The marriage is a most happy one. It is not possible, as they 
think, that they could ever fall apart. Yet she repelled with her 
conscious mind the love she did not know, but that her Other Mind 
had found for her. He repelled with his conscious mind the same 
love, which his Other Mind had found for him. Such a love is im¬ 
mortal, for nothing transitory is born in that higher realm of be¬ 
ing. 

The friendship that endures, the love that knows no faltering, 
the faith in human ideals, the inspiration of our better nature,— 
these are the fruits of the Other Mind. 


261 


EIGHTEENTH CYCLE 




HE STREAM that outward flows 
And never checks its course, 

But forward takes its way 
Through fields of rich domain, 
Goes forth adventurous 
And yet brings nothing back . 


Y glancing backward over the course we have thus 
far traveled, it will be seen that there has been a 
steady advancement through a logical sequence of 
strength in the acquisition of a better understanding 
of the nature and powers of the Other Mind. Be¬ 
fore we can take new steps to advantage it is wise to look back over 
the paths we have already trod. Some decisive points have been 
gained, and these are briefly stated in this place as follows: 

The First Cycle, which is possibly the most important of all, 
presents the laws and propositions that lay the foundation of this 
system, after clearing the forest of its undergrowth and entangling 
brush. 

The Second Cycle deals with the ordinary proofs of the continual 
passing from mind to mind of the thoughts, purposes and facts 
that are everywhere casting their influences for the good or ill of each 
human being. That is more a history of everyday experiences than 
an attempt to maintain a scientific line of demonstration; but it is 
absolutely necessary in the work at hand. 

The Third Cycle deals with the now rapidly growing practice of 
hypnotism for all purposes and in all uses; with abundant proofs 
in a scientific way of the mode of procedure and the results ob¬ 
tained. Hypnotism is a compulsory form of telepathy. The sub¬ 
ject is put into a sleep that sets aside the conscious mind and opens 
up the opportunity for the in-coming of the Other Mind. Several 
great facts are shown in a clearly proved light: 






262 


OPERATIONS. OF THE OTHER MIND 


There is always the necessity of side-tracking the conscious mind 
in order to secure true knowledge. 

The First Degree of hypnotism is wakefulness, yet it is a power¬ 
ful stage of influence; and, at the same time, the most dangerous; 
for it is easily trained to accept the suggestions of any magnetic 
mind and adopt them as facts and thorough beliefs. 

The knowledge that comes from the Other Mind is not brought 
into direct contact with the conscious mind, but is caught by the 
latter just as a remark, not listened to, is seized after it has been 
uttered, but before its echo has vanished. 

The Fourth Cycle establishes the power of suggestions made in 
natural sleep, thus proving that the Other Mind is present and 
awake when the ordinary mind is unconscious. This discovery is 
leading to a new line of practice and experiments. 

The Fifth Cycle takes up the next step, which is self-suggestion. 
It will be seen that there has been a steady progress of investiga¬ 
tion as we have proceeded. Thirty years ago, when hypnotism was 
well proved, it was supposed that suggestion had its chief field in 
hypnotism, and this was deplored because of the distaste for the 
practice of that art that reduced the will of the subject. Later on 
it was seen that suggestion did not require hypnotism, for it was 
possible in natural sleep, although much slower. Still later on it 
has been shown that suggestion can be made by the individual, 
and that the services of the hypnotist can be dispensed with when 
time is not an object. 

The next step in this line of progress is naturally found in the 
Sixth Cycle, where the power of suggestion over the body is clearly 
defined and its many uses related. Then the self-induced control of 
inind over matter is proved in the Seventh Cycle. After passing 
through three of the most important of the divisions of this work 
pertaining to hypnotism, the Eleventh Cycle takes up the process 
whereby telepathy, emerging from all forms of suggestion, comes into 
a higher plane through a series of the most wholesome and helpful 
habits, all entirely disassociated from other influences. This brings 
the study home to the common experiences of life. 

The closeness of hypnotic methods to the first steps in the ordinary 
uses, is seen in the emptying of the mind, a condition that is the 
basis of hypnotism. Yet this is done by a special practice that is a 
habit with the great men and women of the world, and has been 
used for centuries. Another advance is found in the reverie, like- 


PRACTICE IN PAUSES 


263 


wise akin to self-suggestion, and almost on the verge of the trance 
state; yet a custom that has grown with the progress of humanity. 
These facts are stated here because the resemblance and actual 
characteristics of hypnotism appear in all those greater habits that 
have made men and women great, useful in the loftier work of the 
world, and inspired in their motives and achievements. 

The reverie is not a trance state; but is quite different from it. 
The distinction is marked by two facts: 

1. The trance state is purely hypnotic and the patient is in a 
state of complete unconsciousness. 

2. The reverie is a state of wakefulness in which the two minds 
are on the threshold of consciousness, opposite to each other. 

The shorter intervals are simply brief reveries. 

The reverie is useful only when the user of it is alone and un¬ 
disturbed. The minister who is preparing his sermon wants to 
be wholly alone in his study; whoever breaks in upon his reverie, 
out of which the best sermons are produced, will make it difficult 
for him to return to the thread of his ideas. Likewise the poet, 
the author, the inventor, the artist, the architect, and every one who 
creates something must be left to their use of the reverie. To dis¬ 
tract their attention brings them into the ordinary mind, for the 
interference drives the Other Mind out and bars the gateway. 

As we began with the hypnotic uses of telepathy, then proceeded 
by successive steps to approach the everyday uses, we find our¬ 
selves now leaving the reverie, and entering upon the practice of 
commonplace experiences. In order to understand the succession 
of steps that have been taken from the beginning of this work, the 
following table should be memorized: 

The way led into 

hypnotism, which is a controlled and induced state of subjection. 

It led out through 

natural sleep-suggestion, which is a wholesome and helpful influence. 
The way led into 

the trance state, which is self-induced hypnotism and at all times 
harmful. 

It led out through 

the reverie, which is the noblest and most useful mood of the hu¬ 
man mind. 

The way led into 

hypnotic telepathy, which is always a blind process of limited use. 


264 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


It led out through 

natural telepathy, which is capable of being developed in the highest 
degree. 

As has been said, the reverie is for personal use when undis¬ 
turbed. It has always been employed since humanity dwelt on the 
earth. And it has been treated in the following manner: 

1. No attempt has been made to recognize its operations. 

2. No way of translating its messages has been employed. 

3. No method of increasing its power and usefulness has been 
sought. 

The results are: 

1. There is a constant stream of knowledge available through 
the Other Mind that is not even recognized. 

2. When its influence is felt, few persons know what it is or 
what it means. 

3. This power, which takes on rapid growth under culture, grows 
dead or stagnant under neglect. 

When the reverie is shortened, it becomes a pause in conversa¬ 
tion. You have seen an active mind suddenly shut off all com¬ 
munication and shut itself in for a second, or two seconds, or more; 
not a reverie, but a mere pause. That mind has appealed to the 
aid of the Other Mind. It is a frequent habit with the men and 
women who make no mistakes in life. 

You are in the office of a great banker. You state your facts to 
him. A problem arises. While yet you are talking his eyes have a 
far-away look, and yet he does not miss what you say. He has been 
away for a second or two. He decides what to do, and it is for the 
interest of his institution, as well as yours, that he must know what 
is best. 

A great leader in the affairs of the nation, the President, sat 
in his office some years ago, when an important caller arrived to ask 
for his aid in the Ohio situation. The caller said: 

“Charles P. Taft, brother of the President-elect, is in a posi¬ 
tion to make a three-sided fight for the Senatorship. He has 
wealth, plenty of influence, the prestige of his relation to the next 
President, and many followers. He can either win, or prevent any 
opponent from winning. But he wants your advice and will follow 
it.” 

The President sat in a mental pause for a few seconds, which 
seemed minutes, and then said: 


PRACTICE IN PAUSES 


265 


“Personally I should be pleased to see Charles P. Taft in the 
Senate. For the good of the party, Mr. Burton must be elected. 
He is an honest and able statesman. Mr. Taft’s election under the 
circumstances would hurt the next President, and the reasons are 
obvious. His wealth would be blamed for a victory in the legis¬ 
lature. His relation to the coming President would be charged 
with the use of favoritism, and his presence in the Senate under the 
circumstances would be distasteful to the general public.” 

The President saw that wealth was a bad weapon with which 
to win official position and public confidence; and that being the 
brother of a President was a disadvantage in a quarrel. The re¬ 
sult was the selection of a man under circumstances that would 
command the respect of the best elements in the party. 

Had the conscious mind done the thinking, it would have said: 
“Charles P. Taft has money enough to carry on the fight. His 
relationship to the President-elect is a great aid, for it will compel 
the members of the legislature to vote for him in order that they 
may expect favors from the next administration. Offices in great 
numbers are open to them, and they will keep that fact in mind. 
He cannot fail.” 

But the Other Mind said: 

“Let us assume that Charles P. Taft can finance the election, and 
bring his political prestige to bear on the legislature, and so win 
a stubborn fight without even the sign of a deadlock, what will be 
the political usefulness of that man in the Senate or in his party? 
Will he or the party in Ohio live down the suspicions and asper¬ 
sions in the next six years? Assuming that both candidates are 
equally qualified for the position, would it not be much better for 
Mr. Burton to win the election? It certainly would; and, at the 
same time, Charles P. Taft will be credited with an act of self- 
sacrifice for the good of his party.” 

It is only in the pause that the Other Mind can take charge of an 
important matter and give accurate advice. The man who thinks 
intensely does most mental work; but he must not permit his con¬ 
scious mind to sway his judgment. Impetuous haste in making de¬ 
cisions is disastrous. 

A man who claimed a large share in the inheritance of property 
that had fallen mostly to his cousin, consulted his lawyer and was 
told that he had a good case. The cousin went to his lawyer, after 
demand was made on him for a certain sum, and was told that he 


266 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MINE 


had a good case. He then took the matter under advisement. At 
his suggestion he arranged for both lawyers and both clients to meet 
and discuss the case. The two lawyers had citations in number, 
proving the correctness of the position of each; and the cousin was 
in doubt. He believed that his own lawyer knew what he was 
advising to be correct; and he believed that the other client had the 
same faith in his lawyer. In the midst of this conference the 
cousin suddenly grew very serious and shut up his mind for a few 
seconds of thought deeper than that which he had given to the 
matter before. Then he entered again into the conversation. 

His two minds were at work. 

The meeting adjourned with the promise that they would reach 
an amicable agreement if possible. 

On the way out, the cousin said to the other cousin: 

“Come, let us take a walk and talk it over. You want what is 
right do you not?” 

“That is all I want.” 

“If you could now see how the case would result in the Court of 
Appeals, after a small fortune had been spent in fighting it, would 
you be guided by that decision ?” 

‘Yes, if I could be made to see it that way.” 

It was arranged that they go to the best lawyers in the State, 
to any that were known to be very reliable, the would-be-plaintiff 
making the choice. This they did. The cousin was to pay all 
bills for advice, and the latter was to be given to the other party, 
so that he could know that there was no underhand method to be 
employed. After the lapse of a few weeks the advice and references 
to authorities reached the claimant by mail, and it was in his favor. 

The cousin, without the knowledge of the claimant, made another 
trip to the great city and paid a large fee for the advice of another 
lawyer, who had been a judge of the Supreme Court of the State; 
and he was told that the claimant had the right of the matter. 
He hunted him up and made a settlement in compromise that was 
fair to both under all of the circumstances. 

How here were two minds at work: 

At the start the conscious mind said, 

“Go, get a lawyer. Find out what he thinks. Get the best 
lawyer in the county where the case, if brought, will have to be 
tried.” 

After the lawyer had weighed the facts and looked up the law. 


PRACTICE IN PAUSES 


267 


lie told the cousin that he could win; there was not the shadow 
of a doubt about it; he would pledge his professional honor that 
he could take the case to victory. Then the cousin went home and 
his conscious mind said: 

“See? You can win. Of course you are in the right. Besides, 
you have the property and possession is nine points of the law. 
Go ahead and fight it. You may have to pay large counsel fees, 
but what of that? Is every person who claims something that you 
own, to get what he asks for, just because he wants it? Ho. Go 
ahead and show him and the public that you are able to take care 
of yourself. They will all respect you if they learn that you are 
a good fighter.” 

But in that brief pause in the lawyer’s office when his Other 
Mind broke in on the scene, he was told something like this: 

“Here you see two leading lawyers of this county having views 
exactly opposite each other, after both know all the facts. Assum¬ 
ing they are both honest, is not the prospect of good fees and 
prolonged litigation a temptation to them? Why not go to some 
lawyer who does not know you; tell him you do not want to disclose 
which side of the case you are on; and tell him that he will not 
be employed to try it; and that all he will get from it will be the 
fee for his advice. See what a counselor of great ability will tell 
you under circumstances where he cannot have any motive to mis¬ 
lead you. Take the claimant along and let him put the case in 
his own way, but observe that he does not misstate the facts.” 

Then when he found that the law was against him, he had an¬ 
other brief pause in his mental operations, and his Other Mind said 
in substance to him: 

“You are being strongly urged by your local lawyer to defend 
the claim, to go to court and let a jury pass on the merits of the 
facts, and the higher courts to give their judgment as last. You 
are sure to lose the case. The costs will be on you, and the charges 
of your counsel. The claimant will not forget as long as he lives 
the fight in which he defeated you, and your friends will point 
you out as the man who lost the big case. Better compromise now 
for half what it will cost you to win, even if that chance falls to 
you. There is a possibility that you will win, as all cases are not 
decided on their strict justice; but you know you ought not to win. 
Your lawyer may be sincere and may really succeed for you. But 
you will gain nothing by a victory.” 


268 OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 

All his life he was glad he listened to the wisdom of his Other 
Mind. 

In another case a man so shaped his business at a store that he 
could easily make several thousand dollars without the knowledge 
of his partner, and he proceeded to this end. One morning when 
alone, his partner noticed him standing at a desk with a pencil in 
his hand which he held against his chin, and seemed lost in thought. 
He said, 

“What’s weighing on your mind, Henry?” 

During -the brief pause his Other Mind had been saying to him 
something like this: 

“You can make a large sum of money and never he detected. All 
through your life you will have a slightly dishonest look in your 
face that your partner will see, your business acquaintances will 
see, and you will see. To you that expression will be magnified, 
and you will hate yourself. Some day a man of greater ability 
than you in reading human nature may interpret the lines and 
know what they mean. That man may be your partner.” 

All these things were uttered like a voice in a clear sky talking 
words of wisdom to him. He obeyed. A load fell from his soul 
and his affairs prospered. 

Conscience is knowledge of the truth. Its derivation as a word 
is the same as knowledge. There is an old brief that training 
makes the kind of conscience a person possesses; as where a child 
who had been a thief all its life, who came home at night with 
nothing stolen during the day, would be stricken by a guilty con¬ 
science. While the sense of guilt or unrest is present, it is derived 
from the fear of punishment that is to follow its failure. The 
same child, given a chance to see both sides of life, would either 
be guided wholly by its conscious mind and run to the bad unless 
it found that honesty was the best policy; or it would occasionally 
receive suggestions of wisdom from its Other Mind and be led into 
a right way of living. 

But it is not on moral grounds that the Other Mind proceeds. 
In fact it knows no need of the moral or the criminal law. Its 
function is to know facts, and knowledge of the actual facts of 
existence is all that is needed to wipe out the moral and the criminal 
code and substitute wisdom and truth in its place. 

The cravings of the body are the masters of the working mind; 
but they are quickly subdued by the force of the Other Mind. Take 


PRACTICE IN PAUSES 


269 


so familiar a matter as love. It is the combined testimony of the 
true men and women everywhere that the lover who possesses this 
quality in its genuineness has no thought of passion until the rites 
of marriage have been performed, and even then he will subject 
such thoughts to the higher attribute of true love. It is the same 
with the woman. On the other hand, let the conscious mind have 
sway and it will see the form, the beauty, the contour, the color 
of eyes, of hair, of complexion, and all the physical attractions of 
the woman, and will weigh them for their value in the market of 
gratification, letting love follow if it is worth the while. 

A man who had married a woman two years younger than himself 
had to humor her desire for the presence of her mother in his home. 
The mother had the idea that she was the head of the family, and 
proceeded to make the son-in-law feel very little. In fact, she 
thought to humiliate him whenever she could do so. His relatives 
gave him a lot of fighting advice, and his conscious mind began to 
reason like this: 

“The old woman is making your married life a veritable gehenna. 
She is an old fool who is taking advantage of the fact that she has 
given her daughter to you, and therefore you owe her homage and 
all the rights of the house that naturally belong to the husband. 
Just show her who is boss. If she does not like it, tell her to go 
and never come back again. Make everything unpleasant for her. 
Make the house so uncomfortable that she will gladly leave.” 

This is the old story, and the general public will applaud the 
sentiment to the echo. But as he was making plans to carry into 
execution the just command of retribution, a pause in his thoughts 
took place and his Other Mind said something like these words: 

“It is true that the world would justify you, and your relatives 
would applaud you in making things hot for what they call a she- 
devil. But the woman is the mother of your wife, whom you love. 
She was once a wife and brought up the girl you married and made 
her worthy of your home. Her antipathy to you is very thin. It 
has no depth. Try it. Be the gallant and the chevalier to the 
woman. Let her know gently and without ostentation that you 
admire her for the care and faithfulness with which she brought 
up her daughter, who is now your wife. Assert your independence 
by acts, not ugly phrases; and every time you oppose her wishes, 
accompany your opposition with some kind reference to her value 
as your adviser and the protector of your wife. Ask her advice at 


270 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


all times. Tell her yon want her to help yon solve the many little 
problems that arise in married life. She has a tender spot and a 
nobler character somewhere down deep in her nature, or she could 
not have brought into the world so sweet and beautiful a girl as 
your wife. Do not overdo your kind expressions, for she may 
think that you are not sincere. Be sincere. Be truthful to her. 
But go on in the way that you know is right, when it differs from 
her way; otherwise let her have her own way, if it will not do 
harm.” 

The young husband listened to the wisdom of his Other Mind 
and put it to the test. The old woman was made into a very kind- 
hearted mother-in-law, and in time the man actually refused to let 
her stay away from his home, as he enjoyed her assistance very much. 

Most persons listen to the advice of the conscious mind and are 
led into trouble by it, for that mind is full of fight, of the desire 
to square wrongs, and make itself felt as the master of the meaner 
phases of the body and its evil tendencies. The Other Mind never 
advised a wrong course. 

It is through chinks of consciousness that the Other Mind speaks 
to you. If you never pause to reflect, you cannot secure this golden 
counsel. This doctrine is not new. It has lived on earth for cen¬ 
turies, and is known in many precepts, one of which is, “Think 
twice before you speak,” meaning before you speak on a matter of 
importance. 

We recall the case of a man who always had a fighting temper. 
He lived in Texas, where men carry six-shooters. This man threw 
his away, for he declared that his temper was such that he could 
not safely take the weapon with him. A thought like that never 
comes out of the conscious mind. It is too noble. 

One day he was accosted by a lawyer, smaller than he, and an 
altercation ensued. The lawyer called him a liar, and drew a 
weapon for self-defense, thus providing the means of getting rid 
of the man he had insulted. He knew that, when he was tried for 
murder, he could set up the successful plea that he fired in self- 
defense. But it turned out that he knew the larger man was un¬ 
armed, and hence the freedom of remark. 

It was a trying situation for the latter. 

His conscious mind said: 

“This lawyer has insulted you with a remark that is always a 
gross assault on character. If you attempt to fight him, he will 


PRACTICE IN PAUSES 


271 


kill you. If you do not fight him, he will taunt you and make it 
known to all your acquaintances that you are a coward, and that 
will be more miserable than death. If you go away and arm your¬ 
self he will be on the lookout for you and may shoot first some day 
when you are not on your guard. You should summon your friends 
and have them help you down the man at once.” 

But in the pause that came to his thoughts, his Other Mind said 
something like this: 

"It is true that you have been insulted and most grossly so. 
But the affair was started by your temper in the first part of the 
altercation. If you succeed in killing the lawyer, you will be tried 
and possibly acquitted. But your family will suffer. His family 
will suffer also, for he has a wife and five children, all dependent 
on him for support. After he is gone, his friends will remember 
you and your life may be taken. Your bad temper has already 
gained for you the reputation of being a bully, and this will make 
you seem a sort of outlaw and public enemy. The thing to do now 
is to start back at the beginning of the altercation and find the 
turning point where the real temper began, and there take a sensible 
turn in the conversation.” 

It was hard advice to follow. He said to the lawyer. 

“Quarreling is bad business. You have a wife and five children. 
If we fight, you may be killed. If you kill me, it will crush your 
wife’s heart to know that she is married to a murderer, and the stain 
of the murder will not be wiped out of the children’s memory 
for a lifetime. Let us start the talk over again and see who is 
to blame. If you are, then be man enough to take back what 
you have said. If I am to blame I will acknowledge it like a man.” 

This was done, and they found a way to avoid all further hos¬ 
tilities. 

Temper is the centrifugal action of the conscious mind. 

It is probably the cause of much of the trouble in the world. It 
separates husband and wife; for these two beings are seemingly free 
to call each other names that would be instantly resented by violence 
among men. The husband often hurls an epithet at his wife that 
he knows very well he would not dare to even hint at if he were 
addressing the wife of another man. All quarrelers are abject 
cowards. 

Exaggeration is rife everywhere, even where it is not done with 
intention. The child sees the fact of occurrence in a larger picture 


272 


OPERATIONS OP TEE OTHER MIND 


than it really was. If it has been abnsed or brushed by another 
person old enough to be held responsible, the child reports the 
affair in such terms as to excite the anger of the parent. Bad blood 
between families is sure to result; but the pause for reflection comes, 
and the Other Mind has its say: 

“Go to the parents of the other child, and have a talk so as to 
ascertain both sides of the story. Remember that exaggeration is 
the most common of all human characteristics, and your own in¬ 
flamed mind is an example of it now.” 

This is done. The two children are brought together, and each 
tones down the matter until it is quite harmless. 

Woman, with all her sweetness and angelic qualities, is by nature 
and temperament a creature that exaggerates all things that attract 
her vivid attention. If she tries to tell you how large an absent 
apple is, she pantomimes a pumpkin. If it is length, she sees a 
yard for a foot. If she is telling what impressed her at a play, 
she describes it in superlatives that are outsuperlatived by negative 
terms; as, for instance, when the leading man is more than perfectly 
lovely, he is terribly nice. An ice cream that is more than exquisitely 
delicious is awfully good. A man who is beyond her phrase of de¬ 
lightfully superb is just killing. 

This characteristic of womanhood has led to much injustice and 
wrong in the world. On the witness stand she carries the same 
spirit of exaggeration into all she says, although she charmingly 
believes in the truth of it all. The brain after all is only the 
camera of events; and it matters very little whether they occurred 
in the outer world, or were impressed there by her imaginings. 

A cautious woman will pause to reflect when she is being incited 
on to some action or belief by the colorings of statements made 
to her by one of her own sex. Still more should a man be over¬ 
cautious when he is subjected to the urgings of a woman who may 
have been offended by some other man or woman. He should be 
slow to seek revenge. There is the other side. Too much fighting 
exists now in the world, and every person should at least be fair 
enough and calm enough to get down to the solid facts, free from 
all prejudice. Each step in this direction lessens the great fund 
of ill nature and brings humanity that much nearer the era of 
peace on earth and good will to men. 

If every man and woman would pause to reflect in the midst 
of their bickerings, and let the Other Mind have gentle sway, there 


PRACTICE IN PAUSES 


273 


would be very little trouble in tbe world. It would be impossible to 
make a mistake. 

There are many instances occurring every day that require the 
pause. You may call it thinking twice before you speak or act; 
or counting five before you let your tongue say something that you 
may regret; it is all the same thing. This pause is as old as the 
name of man. But it is not often indulged in, and when it is 
given its opportunity, the conscious mind fails often to interpret 
it. These lessons are taught here to enable you to make the pause, 
and to recognize the influence of the Other Mind as it steps into 
that interval. 

It is only by long practice of all the exercises and the adoption 
of the habits that are described in the preceding cycles that will 
enable you to quickly make the interval called the pause. The 
reverie is sometimes five or ten minutes coming. Authors who 
have written the works that have moved the world onward have 
found it necessary to devote fully fifteen minutes to the process 
of getting into the writing reverie. The old claims of Homer and 
Yirgil in the immortal creations, that the muse must be invited in 
before the thoughts will flow, is nearer right than has been supposed 
by the general reader. 

It is also a saying that poetry which is worthy of the name cannot 
be created at will. When a person can sit down, hunt words in 
the rhyming dictionary, and count out metrical feet as a regular 
occupation, he produces nothing but machine poetry, which bears 
its value on its face, no matter how many flowers, or sky colors, or 
shades of perfume are imbedded in the composition. A flowery 
style is not inspired. 

But for the purposes of quick action in conversation it requires 
training in making the intervals as already taught. The experience 
of a man who succeeded in doing this after he had been totally 
unable to make an effective pause, is told in the following account 
which best explains the process: 

“I was troubled all my life with bad judgment. I made mis¬ 
takes in everything. How I learned to throw my mind into a 
quick pause is not important here, except as it will help to encourage 
others. But I will say that I learned how to enter a reverie. It 
took me a long time for a while, but they came instantly in the 
course of some months. When I found I could enter the reverie 
in a second, I then applied the same method in conversation with 


274 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


people. I learned to decide slowly and correctly. I thought care¬ 
fully. I did nothing important hastily. Folks soon began to re¬ 
gard me as a man of good judgment, conservative and painstaking. 
On one occasion when I had to make up my mind what to do in a 
serious affair, and had hardly a minute to decide in, I made the 
pause and for a few seconds I realized that I was getting a clearer 
light on the point than I would have obtained otherwise. My first 
view of the business was wrong. My second proved to be right. 
Had I decided as my first opinion led me to believe was right, I 
would have made a big blunder.” 

In prior letters he stated that he was unable to make the pause 
and clear his mind. Later on he found that he could do so in a 
flash of time, and other persons with whom he was talking sup¬ 
posed he was merely thinking it over or taking a short time for 
careful reflection, which is almost a universal habit among success¬ 
ful men. 

Thus old habits are given new uses. 

Some Women, on being informed that their sex is blessed with 
the faculty of intuition, take pride in showing how quickly they 
can decide matters, some of which are important. “I never take 
time to think,” said one of them. “I decide on the very first 
impression that comes to me,” and she was in the wrong much of 
the time. Careful thought is needed, but it should be attended 
by aid from the more accurate judgment that comes from reflection. 
Ho person can decide on impulse, for the Other Mind has had no 
opportunity for making itself manifest. It must be given sway. 

One man, who has had uniform success in his professional life 
of late years, has this to say: 

“In my talks with others many questions come up that are of a 
serious nature and require accurate thinking. The more I try to 
reason them out, the less satisfactory are the results, unless I am 
able to throw the clearer wisdom from my deeper mind into the 
discussion. I pause for a few seconds, often saying aloud, ‘Let 
me think/ and I can send my working mind away and get light 
from the other source, and it is always right.” 

How many times have you heard people say, “Let mb think,” 
or some such remark as “Let me see,” or otherwise noticed them 
pause, seemed lost for a few seconds, and then come back into the 
conscious mind with a decision? It is a matter of everyday occur¬ 
rence, and was so long before this work was ever thought of. 


PRACTICE IN PAUSES 


275 


We saw a receiving teller in a bank, whom we have known for 
years, take a bill in his hand, lose himself in reflection for a moment, 
and then pass it back for inspection. It was one of the cleverest 
counterfeits of recent years, and had deceived many bankers. We 
asked the teller why he stopped and reflected for a moment, instead of 
giving the bill a close scrutiny, and he said: 

“Before my eyes rested on the bill I had a feeling come over me 
that there was something wrong going to turn up right away. I 
stopped this thought when I reached the bill, as it seemed to me that 
it was WTong. When I was deep in the idea, I did not look at the 
bill, but went at once to have a certain part of it examined. I am 
sure I had not looked upon that part, but the thought of what it 
was, came clearly to me. I have not had a counterfeit get by me 
for ten years/’ 

A detective said of this habit of pausing: 

“I have employed something like it for many years. In talking 
with a suspect I try to let him do all the talking. Every once in 
a while I close my mind against what he is saying, and a new idea 
walks right in, and tells me what to ask next. In one case I had 
nothing to go on, and the talk came to a standstill. I found an 
idea and sprung it on the fellow, and he almost fell over. It had 
made a bull’s eye, and he gave up the resistance. I had his story 
in half an hour in writing and signed by him.” 

Pinkerton was a great detective because he had the power of 
telepathy in the highest degree. He often said that a man who 
lacked such power could never make a detective. “He must be a 
good guesser and guess right,” was a familiar remark of his. One 
afternoon in a crowded city he was strolling along aimlessly, think¬ 
ing of the hundred or more cases that he would like to solve, when 
all at once there came over him the feeling that in the thousands 
of people passing along the street, there was one man that he could 
not see, and who was not easy to reach, who was wanted badly by 
him. He plunged rather wildly forward and came upon the man. 
Afterwards it was proved that this suspect was the identical criminal 
for whom he had hunted for years. Yet when he arrested him, 
Pinkerton did not recognize his face as one that was wanted, and 
did not know what he wanted him for. It was only by an accident 
in the conversation that took place that evening that a good guess 
set him right, and led to the connection needed to identify him. 
The man had completely changed his appearance and was so different 


276 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


that his own wife passed him several times and did not give him 
more than a mere glance each time. 

On another occasion when Pinkerton passed a man on the street 
and noticed what seemed like a false beard on his face, he stepped 
up to him, tore the beard off, and told him to go with him. The 
man went, but Pinkerton did not know what he was wanted for. 
He 'phoned to several heads of police, and located the suspect as a 
burglar who was wanted for a crime attended by murder. 

There are endless examples of the activity of a power that has 
been successfully employed by capable men and women time without 
memory. Our study here is to develop that power, to increase it 
where it exists and to enlarge its usefulness. 

Most persons can think easily with the conscious mind. The 
plan of this work is to enable them to think as easily with the aid 
of the Other Mind. 


277 


NINETEENTH CYCLE 



EOUGETS fly about lilce birds 
Whose coming may be fenown 
By rustling leaves above 
The gently swaying branch, 

!And presently the song 
Is heard upon the air . 

HE of the most pleasing and useful habits is that which 
fills in the pauses made by other persons, and antici¬ 
pates what they are about to say. It opens up a 
broad field of the highest mental exercise in ways that 
are most practical. 

In the cycle just closed you have been taught to make use of 
the pause in your own mind. How you are to seek to make use 
of the pause in the mind of another person. This is part of the 
work of this cycle. The rest will be an enlargement of it. 

Many years ago it was discovered by accident that, if a person 
pauses in the course of remarks, and some listener attempts to 
supply the needed word, this practice, carried on until it becomes 
a habit, will set up the power of telepathy of the most useful kind. 
Since the first experiments in this work, there have been many 
persons who have found the truth of the claim. It is based solely 
on the potency of the interval, which has been discussed in the two 
preceding cycles. This space in the thinking activity of the mind 
tends to close out the conscious mind; and, when that is out, the 
Other Mind springs in as if brought forward by an elastic action. 
It is a wonderful fact. 

The following sentences were taken down by stenographers at 
different times, and represent a large number of trials. The sup¬ 
plied words have all been put in by telepathy, or at least without 
the aid of any spoken or written communication: 






278 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


1. A minister preaching. “Now we see the power of a . . 

The supplied words were divine providence. While the pause 

may not have been the length of a second of time, it was sufficient 
to enable the reporter to take down the undertones of the person 
sitting next to him in the gallery of a church. Hardly had they 
been recorded when the preacher uttered the supplied words, “divine 
providence.” It may be argued that this was a good guess. If so 
it was all the better, as the mind that can guess ahead, is the most 
successful kind of an intelligence in this world. 

2. A minister preaching. “It is true that the guilty sometimes 

go free, and that the innocent are punished; but these miscarriages 
of justice are not . . .” 

The supplied words were the rule. There was no time for think¬ 
ing out the end of the statement. The pause was very brief. The 
words must have jumped into the mind of the person supplying 
them, just as telepathic thoughts will flash into the brain in the 
most unexpected manner. Again it may be argued that this was 
a good guess. Yet how could the mind guess so speedily? If it 
was a guess it was excellent practice for the mind. 

3. A minister preaching: “Some critics insist that there were 

no miracles in the days of the Israelites. They say nature has never 
broken.” 

The supplied words were her established laws. As soon as these 
words were secured by the reporter, and before they were actually 
written, the minister finished the statement. There could not be 
guesswork here. It is of course plain to be seen that the word laws 
must be a part of the sentence; but the other part of it, “estab¬ 
lished,” was not to be expected. In pure guessing, ninety-nine 
persons in a hundred would have seen the sentence as follows: “They 
say nature has never broken her laws.” The idea of established 
laws was wholly telepathic. 

4. A minister preaching. “That little group of brave men set 

out in the dimness of the rising day. They did not know what the 
day and the hour.” 

The supplied words were would bring forth. These, like the 
others, were correct. Here is a possibility of guesswork. Just how 
else the statement could be finished in the most natural manner, is 
not easy to see; but the guessing was done so very quickly that it 
could not have occurred without much practice and some help from 
telepathy. 



PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS 


279 


5. An orator speaking. “This shall not be. iSTot as long as 

American manhood is still left to assert itself, will the people bend 
beneath this yoke. If I am wrong then liberty is.” 

The supplied words were a meaningless name . There was no 
way in which these words could have been guessed. The sentence 
ends rather weak. A better orator would have rounded out his 
period with a stronger thought. The person who supplied these 
words had been a successful public speaker and knew several better 
terms for ending the statement, but he took what was in the mind 
of iiie speaker and the reporter noted them down in a flash before 
the orator had actually uttered them. 

6. An orator speaking. “Let us look at this crisis with a spirit 

of judicial calmness. Let us not rush blindly to the fray, not 
knowing what kind of an enemy we shall encounter. We can arm 
ourselves by preparing ourselves with the necessary facts; and with 
these there can be no enemy.” 

The supplied words were strong enough to resist us. It is hardly 
possible for any mind, no matter how acute, to guess these words. 
They were spoken in a flash, and the reporter had them down while 
the orator was “hemming” his throat to get freedom for the climax. 

All clergymen, except those few who have studied themselves, 
are guilty of this “hemming” habit. It is tiresome. It shuts 
off the flow of oratory and makes the hearers weary. The orator 
who indulges in such fault has a very limited field of usefulness. 
Yet it is a fact that, at a church where a supposedly famous preacher 
was delivering his sermon, he made 248 pauses either for the loss 
of a word, or in order to “hem” his throat. 

Some of these pauses were followed by a long flow of words where 
there was not time enough for the experimenter to take out of his 
mind the rest of the statement. One of the long ones, however, 
was caught, and is given here: 

7. A famous preacher speaking. “He looked for it in the Far 

East and found it not. He traversed Europe and it was not there. 
Over the sands of Africa with iron wings he sped and it did not 
appear. Out on the broad ocean, across the stormy seas, into the 
newer world he came, and there.” 

The supplied words were “it was waiting for the coming of his 
adventurous spirit.” As there was nothing in the lines preceding 
this ending that would suggest the ideas found in the supplied 
words, the charge of guessing will not hold. The speaker had the 





280 


OPERATIONS OF. THE OTHER MIND 


habit at times of pausing for effect, and at other times of allowing 
a long space to intervene before he would connect his thoughts. 
The church was one of ultra fashion, and the congregation were 
bound to remain and listen, and to come again. But it was noticed 
that they were indifferent to the subject in hand on this particular 
day. 

Another clergyman, who was held in high esteem for the valued 
thoughts he expressed, had the same delinquencies of delivery; and 
in one sermon we found 197 pauses, mostly for the right word to come 
into place. In nearly all of these breaks, a telepathist could readily 
fill in the words needed. In fact it was not very difficult for any 
one with a little experience to do so. 

8. A college professor in literature speaking from notes. “It 

was more than two centuries before another era that could be called 
rich in product came to light. Darkness was everywhere. The 
sleeping genius was not to be disturbed. The dawn was not notable, 
not a distinct awakening, but. ” 

The supplied words were “it was surely approaching.” This 
might have been a mere guess. It was correct, however. 

9. An auctioneer in the heat of exaggeration. “The Emperor 

of that isle is not a man of weak taste. He will have nothing that 
is not the best and the most beautiful. When he selected an artist 
he had agents run from one end of the isle to the other, and bring 
to him the names of those who are most skilful, and from these 
he selects the one that is most worthy of the honor conferred by 
royalty. But his palaces will not hold all the fine things that are 
made for him. Some never get into the presence of his majesty 
that are better examples of the highest art than the best he owns. 
This that we offer to-day. ” 

The supplied words were “is imported directly from the royal 
stock.” There was nothing to suggest the words to be used, although 
the idea was apparent to every mind in the room. Ho one supposed 
for a moment that the article offered for sale, after that introduc¬ 
tion, would be anything but an import from the crowds of good things 
that were too numerous for the palaces of the Emperor of Japan. 
But the use of the word imported, and the word directly, and the 
word stock, could not be surmised; nor the arrangement by which 
they fell into place in the sentence. We challenge any student of 
this cycle to read this sentence up to the break, or pause, to some 
friends, and ask them to supply the words lacking, and they will 




PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS 


281 


fail to do so. Many of them might furnish the exact ideas. We 
will say, however, that an experimenter, who had listened for a 
half hour to the auctioneer, would have gathered his pet phrases, 
and he was accustomed to say “imported directly” quite often, as it 
had a big sound. He also had a liking for the term “royal stock.” 
Here may be the key to the guess if it could be called such. Even 
so, it was most creditable to the experimenter, as it led the way 
to a development of the mind for very practical uses, as we shall 
see later on. 

10. A business man explaining a deal, as he called it. “I had 

inside information and knew how to act. I knew that I could take 
my time and the other side.” 

The supplied words were “would come to me.” 

11. The same man talking. “I had the cash, so they need have 

no fear of getting their money. Nor would they have to wait a 
minute after the agreement was reached. But they haggled a long 
time about the price, and I told them..” 

The supplied words were “that they must decide at once or let 
me out.” This could not be a clear guess. The first part of it 
might be expected, but the entire supply could not be anticipated. 
The man in question was an exceedingly easy one to make his 
thoughts apparent. 

12. Another man talking business. “The terms are easy and 

you will not have any fault to find with the treatment you will receive 
if you decide to buy this tract of land. The price stated is very low 
and I am instructed by the owner to say that he will not make any 
further concession. If you knew what it cost him you.” 

The agent never finished the sentence. He did as many business 
men have a fault of doing, start to say something which they do 
not take the trouble to finish. But this agent did in fact make the 
end of the statement in his own mind, and it was as follows: “would 
not pay his price.” This proved to be true, for the would-be pur¬ 
chaser acted on his own telepathic knowledge and insisted on a 
lower price and he secured it. 

In a case like the last the ability to fill in the breaks made in 
business conversation may often bring advantages. 

In business, more than in public speaking or teaching, the pauses 
are far from being few. In half an hour’s talk not long ago a 
merchant made 124 such pauses, and some of them were unfinished 
statements. He thus afforded an opportunity to his listener to 





282 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


catch his ideas ahead of him, and in the sentences that were left 
unfinished he kept back thoughts that he found would not be best 
to utter. These could be caught out of his mind by a good ex¬ 
perimenter. The most successful business man is one who avoids 
formulating his thoughts in such a way that they can be taken 
from him; 

Here we seem to have the antagonism of two kinds of pauses. In 
the last cycle we showed the value of making a pause in which to 
reflect or take time to think well before speaking. In this cycle 
we have the pauses that arc so common in every kind of use. But 
the man in the last cycle who makes the pauses is the experimenter; 
and the man in this cycle who does not make the pauses is also 
the experimenter. He has now changed to a listener. Before he 
was trying to secure good advice by taking plenty of time in which 
to think out the subject. Here is the same person trying to fill 
in the pauses for the other party who makes them not for reflection, 
but as a fault. It is very likely that he has no consciousness of 
the operations of his Other Mind when he stumbles in speech. Con¬ 
sciousness will sometimes flee and stay away so long that it cannot 
recognize even itself. There must be life to secure advantage in this 
pause, no matter who makes it. 

The dead mind is common among children and dull talkers. 

The boy in school who tries to recite a poem from memory and 
whose mind fails him in the midst of a line, has no consciousness 
of any Other Mind. He may be aware of his predicament and 
laugh or cry at it. He starts at the beginning and tries to connect 
the missing thought by acquired momentum. Some can do this. 
They have said the poem over at home to themselves so many times 
that all they have now to do in public is to get a good start, avoid 
interruption and distracting causes, and slide through it by acquired 
motion; just as a hoop will stand up as long as it can be kept going. 
This is not an interval in the mind, but a dead brain. It is of 
the same grade of value as the drowsiness is when compared to the 
reverie. In the latter the mind is tense, and full of magnetism; 
while the drowsy brain is simply dull and without energy enough 
to keep awake. To the sleepy person the fading consciousness is 
the way to temporary oblivion. In the reverie the brain is wide 
awake, and sleep is ten thousand miles off. 

To the forgetful mind the same experience holds true. 

So in the many breaks and unfinished sentences that occur in 


PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS 


283 


conversation, there is a dullness and stupidity of mind, or the lack 
of habit in a good style of extempore delivery. Some persons never 
finish the majority of their sentences. Some see the end of them all 
in the beginning. One of the rules of good address is never to 
start a sentence that you cannot see the end of before you utter 
the first words. This is also one of the secrets of an easy flow of 
speech in oratory. 

Men and women who are unusually keen in mind are able to 
fill out most, if not all, of the unfinished sentences and remarks 
they hear in conversation. One man who is compelled to meet 
scores of people every day, says that, if he did not have the gift 
of knowing what they wanted better than they know themselves, he 
could never get through his day’s work. There is an immense 
amount of truth in this statement; more, in fact, than the ordinary 
mind can understand. There are many men and some women so 
placed in life that they must accomplish much in the period of time 
allotted them each day, and it is as much a part of their habits 
to read the minds of others very quickly, as it is to do their other 
work. They do not pretend that they can take the thoughts out of 
a silent mind, although most of them do this in many instances; 
but, when a caller has begun to speak on a subject, the whole line 
of thought is quickly presented to the keener mind and every idea 
is plain in a flash. Business is done speedily under such circum¬ 
stances. 

One woman said of her duties as the head of a great organization: 

“If I had to wait for people to tell me their stories, I would 
have no time to do them good. I let them begin, and the rest is 
plain to me and I proceed to results without delay.” 

A man said of a great financier to whom he made a visit on 
business: 

“He heard me for about five seconds, then he finished for me 
what I had to say. All the way through he seemed to know what I 
wanted and all I had in my mind.” 

This ability has three stages: 

1. The habit of filling in the pauses and breaks made by others. 

2. The habit of anticipating the remarks and thoughts of others. 

3. The habit of guessing what is in the minds of others. 

This cycle has been thus far devoted to the first of these three 
habits. It has been shown to be merely a form of experimenting in 
part, and then a most important trait in actual use. In fact there 


284 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


is no mental equipment so worthy of acquisition as this. You 
have a right to all the knowledge you can get; and much of the 
knowledge of life is lodged in the many other minds that you come 
in contact with. They would conceal it from you, and often to 
their gain at your expense. If a man pays five thousand dollars 
for a piece of land and is willing to sell it to you for seven thousand 
dollars, but insists that ten thousand dollars is his very lowest 
figure; and you have means of ascertaining that he is trying to 
hold you up for that extra three thousand dollars, you have a right 
to know it. 

If a man has a machine that seems to be as good as new, and he 
tells you that it is new, but conceals the fact that he bought it as 
second-hand, and that it has an inherent defect that cannot be 
discovered by the ordinary methods of examination, and you are 
able to draw these facts from his mind, you have a right to do so. 

If a woman tells you that she is your friend and that she has 
no ill feeling whatever against you, even after some slight misunder¬ 
standing; while, as a matter of fact, she is trying to undermine you 
in a certain matter, you have a right to know all about it if you 
can find out through any legitimate means. 

If any person seeks to take any advantage of you, and pretends 
to your face that nothing but the purest friendship exists between 
you, the real facts ought to be ascertained by you. In times past 
it was useless to try to get at the truth. To-day there are keen- 
minded men and women who can delve down into other minds and 
bring up the naked truth. 

As may be expected, this power has its dangers. In a recent case 
an inventor who had reached a most valuable discovery, one that 
would make him rich, fell in with a man who was skilled in telepathy 
and who extracted this secret from his mind. There had been no 
attempt to secure a patent. The meeting was wholly without de¬ 
sign. The inventor lived in a town of about twenty thousand 
inhabitants, and boarded at a hotel. One Saturday evening just 
before dark, a man came along in an automobile, and put up until 
Monday at the hotel. It rained all day Sunday. This man hap¬ 
pened to sit next to the inventor at the dining table, and so they 
became acquainted the same night of the arrival; and, as they were 
both interested in the same line of subjects, they talked matters over 
on the next day. As was his invariable custom, the inventor 
did not even refer to his patent and the great discovery he had 


PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS 


285 


made; but once in bis remarks he made a pause, then stopped short, 
as he found that it was not wise to finish what he had started to say. 
This break was quickly filled in by the traveler, and he caught the 
idea that was so carefully guarded. On his return to his home, he 
perfected the patent, and when the inventor made application, he 
found that this very man had anticipated him and secured it. He 
recalled the occasion when he met him, and seemed to think that 
something he had said and was unconscious of having said, was the 
cause of his downfall. 

But we do not have to go to the ranks of greatness to find men 
and women who are endowed with the faculty of anticipating the 
needs and wants of others. Such gifted people are present in 
numbers all over the civilized world. It may seem like a faint 
degree of telepathy when they exercise this power, but it is mighty 
potent in its usefulness. It works a double advantage all the time. 

We know a woman in the early fifties, which means that she is 
perhaps nearer fifty than sixty, who has a beautiful home and the 
means of entertaining her friends and guests; but who lacks in 
the most abject degree this power of anticipation. Those who come 
to visit at her urgent request, rarely return, although they are in¬ 
vited. The woman is refined, educated, polished in her manners, and 
in every way prepared to make things pleasant for those who 
are in her house. But she does not seem to realize that there are 
hundreds of small things that make a visit pleasant or unpleasant. 
Tor instance, it is quite annoying to have no towels in the bath 
room during a week’s stay. Of course the maid is supposed to look 
after that matter, but who looks after the maid; and if the maid is 
not in evidence, what is to be done ? On a certain visit of a clergy¬ 
man for three days and nights at this home with his wife, who 
were assigned a fine bedroom, there was but one chair in the room 
and that too weak to hold up either guest. It was a gold-leafed 
chair that was expensive, but had been off its legs, and was tempo¬ 
rarily on again; yet dangerous to sit down upon. 

At the table there was a continual lack of anticipation of the 
needs and comforts of guests. The things were trifling but were 
potent. So small a matter as would seem of no consequence would 
mar the whole dinner. The clergyman, in repeating the case for 
report, and without any intention of criticizing the lady, said that 
he counted twenty bits of neglect that he had not found in other 
homes, all due to the fact that the woman had left things to her 


286 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


servants, they had left them to her, and neither had the magnetism 
or life to know or care. The result is that this woman has few or 
no guests now visiting her. 

On the other hand, there is a bright woman, not quite as wealthy, 
hut far more qualified to meet friends under her own roof, who antici¬ 
pates every want, need and comfort, and adds many extra details 
of pleasure in advance of their visits. She inspects everything in 
the rooms, and knows every detail of the house and of the dining 
table; *so that her guests say of her that it is a pleasure to go there. 

Here is a reception at which there are many persons present. 
The hostess does not let matters drift, nor does she leave the man¬ 
agement wholly to her servants. She KNOWS what is to be done 
even in the slightest details, and sees that these are executed by 
those in her employ. The latter imbibe her spirit of care and antic¬ 
ipation and give the matter their full watchfulness. The result 
is that everything passes off smoothly and all are pleased. In after 
days there are genuine words of approval for her methods. But 
in the party itself, while it is in progress, she anticipates the needs 
and wants of all who come under her roof. On one occasion, when 
only six young couples were invited to meet her own sons and 
daughters, she was alert to make them agreeable, companionable, 
comfortable and quick to fall into the pleasures of the evening. 
There are many little things that can be thought out in advance. 

Not alone in receptions and parties, but in the common routine 
of household duties, members of the family may develop the habit 
of anticipating the needs, wants and wishes of each other. Old 
people are entitled to this fore-watchfulness. Some persons cultivate 
and never lose this habit, while others are clumsy and neglectful. 

In a large city there lived a man who was exceedingly popular. 
Some said it was due to his pleasant smile, with which he greeted 
people. Others said it was due to his wonderful tact, whereby he 
could maintain his own control over others without appearing to 
antagonize them. He was a sort of self-appointed leader of society, 
and soon every hostess in the city was glad to have his advice and 
services, although he came up from the humbler ranks. 

No affair was ever stale or stagnant where he was present, for 
he saw to it that all were enjoying themselves. In many little 
things he could read ahead, and thereby made each occasion one of 
real pleasure. 

Business men have cultivated the habit of anticipating the wants 


PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS 


287 


of their patrons. Did you ever step into a store where a woman 
wanted to buy something for a present and had not the slightest 
idea what to buy? The clumsy clerk of which there are legion, 
either will take no interest in her, or let her go to another store; 
but the proprietor, or some head clerk who has the power of antici¬ 
pating the wants of others, will quickly bring out the desired article. 

In law trials the lawyer who, prior to the actual hearing court, 
is able to anticipate the moves to be made in the progress of the 
trial, will stand a better chance to win than the one who lets things 
drift. 

One attorney says: “I shall leave no stone unturned to have a 
perfect preparation for the trial. I will be ready for every move 
that the other side may make.” 

Another lawyer says: “It is useless to try to find out how the 
case will proceed when in court. It may go one way or it may 
go another. All time spent in advance of the hearing is wasted, for 
we cannot shape our plan of battle until we know what we have to 
meet.” This seems like good common sense; but the Other Mind 
says it is the way of the sluggard. Cases are won by the first kind 
of attorney who makes ready for every move that may be made. 

One of the greatest generals of the Civil War had the same habit. 
He anticipated all the turns and phases of a coming battle, and 
knew there were so many moves possible. Some of these were highly 
probable; some were possible only; and others were remotely possible 
or very improbable. Yet he thought out what he must do in each 
of the circumstances. On one occasion the enemy made a move 
that perplexed all the other generals and it proved to be one of 
those combinations that had been considered remotely possible or 
very improbable; on the principle that the unexpected happens some¬ 
times. But as this very move had been anticipated by the general 
in command, he knew in a flash what to do, and so ordered. Any 
person who is familiar with the life and battles of Napoleon, will 
find this habit of anticipation one of the secrets of his successes. 

Nothing in ordinary life is more practical and useful than the 
developed habit of anticipating the wants and needs of others, and 
even the plans and purposes. The latter part of the transactions 
of life make up the ground where all the conflicts are lost and won, 
whether in important or in trifling matters. 

The employer who seems to realize what his employees have in 
mind, or what their real usefulness is, has an advantage. By antici- 


288 


OPERATIONS OF TIIE OTHER MIND 


pation he is enabled to prevent disagreements. The employees have 
also the opportunity to make themselves more useful to him directly, 
and through their efforts to know his wishes and the needs of the 
business. 

In the home every member of the family who will study ahead 
all the contingencies that are about to demand attention, will find 
the duties easier and their execution lighter. Then there is the 
pleasant side of the home. A wife says, “My husband is so thought¬ 
ful of me.” A mother says, “My son seems to know all my needs 
and is ever thinking of my comfort.” 

To look into the cause of this remark, we find that the husband 
in the morning, before he has left the house, says to himself: “My 
wife will be alone so much of the day. What will she have to 
amuse her, to busy her, to make married life worth while? It is 
only one day, but days are long when there is a drag in existence.” 
He will think out the whole period, and think of himself as a 
woman in her place, and ask how he would like her routine life. 
What would he most desire under the circumstances? And the 
answers he makes to himself, he will apply to her. A non-fertile 
brain will not cover much ground; but we are dealing with acute 
and fruitful minds. 

These qualities are developed by the practice that is laid out in 
the cycles that precede this. If you belong to the class that is not 
able to anticipate the many small, as well as some of the greater 
details and emergencies that are always arising in the day and 
the week of every life, you may so train your habits that you will 
acquire the power. It is for this purpose that the present book is 
written. Men and women who are said to possess this power as a 
gift, have in fact come to it as the result of a regime that has 
grown up of itself. The same is true of magnetism. Some are 
naturally magnetic, others have developed the power; but the latter 
merely adopt the same traits that are present in those who are 
believed to be naturally endowed. The cultivated form is much 
more effective. The natural form is useful only after it has been 
trained. In its primitive form it is a power, like steam; but 
every power requires direction and control as well as shaping for 
detailed uses. 

There are three stages in the work of the present cycle: 

1. The first stage is that which sets up the habit of filling in 
the pauses and breaks made by others. While this may have a slow 


PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS 


289 


and discouraging beginning, it soon begins to show growth and 
becomes in time one of the most nseful of all habits. It is a very 
simple proposition. The thoughts to be supplied are words that 
are already created in the minds of others, and your work is to 
speak them just ahead of the men and women who are about to 
utter them. This line of experimenting is often used in play. The 
difficulty is that it can generally be worked only after you acquire 
the ability to throw the mind into emptiness, which can be done 
in one-tenth of a second. Until you have such ability, there would 
be little use in playing with the art. Yet it will succeed sometimes 
by force of the natural gift of telepathy, and without study or 
preparation. These instances are neither frequent nor consistent, as 
the power is very uncertain; sometimes manifesting itself and at 
other times being delinquent. 

2. The second stage is that which sets up the habit of anticipating 
the remarks and thoughts of others. This is close to the first stage, 
but the distinction is clear. In the first stage the thoughts are already 
shaped into words and the words are coming from the minds of 
others; in fact, are on the way. In the second stage, the remarks 
and thoughts have not taken shape, but are intentions and purposes, 
as well as wants and needs. This is more difficult, but can be 
acquired; and, when once made a habit, the results are most pleasing 
and surprising. Our claim is that such habits may be developed 
by every man and woman. We have known of so much success 
along these lines by those who have carried on the experiments that 
there is no reason to believe that any human being of sound mind 
is denied the power to develop these habits. 

3. The third stage is that which sets up the habit of guessing 
what is in the minds of others. It is guesswork, but is an art 
that has been increased to a remarkable degree by practice. It 
seems closely allied to the first two stages, but is a step beyond 
the second. In fact many persons have acquired a natural power 
of telepathy by practicing guessing. In supplying words in the 
pause under the first stage, the immediate presence of the speaker 
and his own thoughts are helpful, and true telepathy is the result. 
In anticipations there are close thoughts to impel the action of the 
mind. In guesses the connection is somewhat removed. Yet, on 
the other hand, the practice of guessing is a good one that is very 
easy to put into use. 

It is made a business by professional fortune-tellers of the highest 


290 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


grade; and some of them become adept in the art after years of 
practice. We had in our employ at one time a man who afterwards 
entered the ministry, who had been a fortune-teller. His conscience 
had troubled him and he gave up the business. He had been looked 
upon as a remarkably successful predieter of coming events in the 
lives of those who patronized him. He had a nicely furnished suite 
of rooms in a large city, where he maintained an Oriental mystery 
about himself and the place itself; and in this place we met him. 

Having been desirous of testing by certain rules and laws the 
genuineness of members of such profession, we found this man hold¬ 
ing the confidence of hundreds of people of wealth who consulted 
him with great regularity for advice on business and social affairs, 
and paid him high retainers. One of his customers had said to us: 

“There is a man who is honest and whose predictions are genuine. 
In a certain case he told facts that he could not have known in 
any other way except the occult. The next week he made a most 
remarkable prediction which had never been in the minds of any 
of us, and it came true just as he said. I have never known him 
to make a mistake on a point of any importance.” 

On this advice, coming from a person standing very high in 
every way, we went to his studio. There was an attendant making 
appointments and we had to wait several days before our turn came. 
Then we went in and were led to a very beautiful room, especially 
furnished, and dimly lighted. This man had a high forehead, deep 
eyes with heavy brows; and a peculiar head-dress, patterned after 
some bygone age of the priesthood, made him very impressive. He 
thus began with the eager expectancy of his patron. Belief in him 
was also invited, not only by his reputation but by his methods and 
environments. There was a sort of self-hypnotism about the whole 
proceeding. 

“What would you have?” he asked very solemnly. 

“Knowledge of the past, the present, and the future,” was the 
reply. 

“What have you of the past that troubles you ?” 

“Nothing, except a desire to test your powers.” 

The age was then stated as being between three years, and it was 
correct. That was a guess, and we know it. The fact of marriage 
was then stated, and this was accurate, but it was also a guess. 
The loss of a dear relative proved to be a grandfather, but was not 
definitely announced at first. There was a feeling about for facts 


PRACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS 


291 


and the hope that some remark would be dropped that would lead 
the way. In the pretense of making a direct statement, a question 
would be launched forth under disguise, trusting that a reply would 
help to make matters easier. But we led on and on, until there 
was only the grandfather’s death to fill in the fact of the loss of a 
dear relative. Had all four grandparents been living, then the 
generation preceding must have been called on for this deficiency. 

A serious quarrel in the past, a very sad accident, and other events 
were announced, hut could not be substantiated. 

“Why do you wish to test my powers ?” he asked at length. 

“If you are gifted with extraordinary powers there is a position 
open for you where you may make an honest living at high salary.” 

The present was gone over, with the same results. The future 
then loomed up in brilliant opportunity for flights of the imagination 
unchallenged. “You are to meet an enemy, cross the water, and 
inherit a large property,” were some of the stock guesses; but they 
were of no value as accurate predictions. 

Ill health, attended by the voice of conscience, as well as the 
fear of a new law against such professions, drove him out of business 
and we had an opening for him where he was enabled to earn an 
honest living. During this term of close acquaintance, he explained 
his art and his remarkable successes by calling them shrewd guesses. 
As most of his patrons came to him for advice, he was always 
allowed to question them very closely, and between the lines he 
made careful guesses and so often hit the mark that he was half 
inclined to have faith in himself as possessing great powers. 

He had made his mind so sensitive to impressions that he really 
could probe into a person’s life with wonderful accuracy; and he 
used this skill in ordinary affairs when there was nothing to gain 
by it in the shape of financial reward. This was after he had 
given up the practice of fortune-telling. We found him a very 
wonderful man. 

Several others, who were driven out of business by fear of the 
law, were hunted up and their methods obtained. The rule seemed 
to have been that each of them had started as pretenders, and had 
come to a degree of telepathic power by the habit of guessing. 

In the case of a woman, now very old, it appears that when she 
was in her twenties her husband was hurt in his body so that he 
became helpless and the support of the family fell on her. Being 
in a city, she changed her name, moved to a new house, opened 


292 


OPERATIONS. OF THE OTHER MIND 


parlors, kept her face veiled, and started in the business at low 
prices. She had never even claimed to possess any degree of clair¬ 
voyant powers; but the habit of guessing, which she had acquired 
as a means of entertainment for herself and friends, made her mind 
sensitive, and in some details she became an accurate guesser of 
facts, and surprised her clients, who spread the news to their friends. 
In this way she made more than a living. The wonder of the case 
was that some men and women of high standing in the city, had 
faith in her as a most gifted seer. 

But guessing is employed in every profession, in every line of 
business and in the social world as an agency of success. It is 
akin to anticipation, and this is the most useful trait in human 
character. 


293 


TWENTIETH CYCLE 



B ACH SENSE is rightly prized 
And all conjoined are used 
Regardless of the law 
That each may throw its power 
Into a common whole 
For the support of one . 

SE.FUL AND PKAOTICAL employment of this power 
is taught in this work. Had it been thought a mere 
plaything, or some wild agency of occult character, 
no page of this hook would have been written. As 
has already been amply shown, the Other Mind is 
all-powerful and all-knowing, and these attributes mean something 
more than any physical quality can convey. They ought, at least, 
to serve humanity in hundreds of ways. 

To know what cannot otherwise be known at all, or too late to be 
of use, is a valuable acquisition; and any practice that will develop 
this power is worth the trying. 

In planning to develop a system of practice, the fact was not 
overlooked that many persons possessed this faculty in keen degree 
who made no use of it except in the performance of the duties of 
life; while others had it in less degree and were practically uncon¬ 
scious of it. On the other hand the great doers of things in this 
world were compelled to depend largely on the same power which, 
by necessity, they had increased in the very act of using it. We 
found that nothing worthy of note had ever been accomplished 
unless this power had been the right-hand helper in the achievement. 
These plain facts were the foundation of the present undertaking. 
Then came the determination to adhere at all time to the practical 
and useful side of the art. All through the pages that have pre¬ 
ceded may be seen the instances of the manner in which advantage 







294 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


after advantage has been gained, which would have been totally 
lost in the absence of this aid. 

The cycle just preceding this is made the means of showing the 
plainest and most commonplace uses of a power that has no limita¬ 
tion. A casual reader of that cycle will say: 

“These things are not new. They are as old as the hills. The 
idea of saying that the man who pauses to reflect is cultivating a 
power. Why, every day we see scores of persons stop and reflect. 
They think twice, and so avoid mistakes. That is nothing new.” 

So much the better. 

How would it have looked for a person in the midst of a weighty 
consideration, to have struck an attitude of severe deliberation and 
thereby have created amusement ? Even now how does it look for any 
one to stop to think over a proposition? An inexperienced teacher 
was giving instruction in the use of the telepathic pause, which 
need not be more than a second of time, when a woman in the class 
said: 

“Do you not think people will regard it as absurd to see us stop 
all at once to do our thinking by ourselves ?” 

The teacher had forgotten the more common fact of human nature, 
and could not reply. But had that class been taken into any office 
where matters of serious importance are discussed, they would have 
seen every party to the conference stop frequently, give a far-a-way 
look, and then resume the details of the discussion. In a meeting 
of a Board of Directors of a National Bank we had one day a most 
serious problem to consider. There were eleven members present 
and the cashier; and the conference lasted three hours. We recall 
distinctly hearing the president say to one of the members: 

“Come down out of the clouds and let us know what you have 
in mind.” The director addressed had his face uplifted, his hand 
to his chin, and he did in fact seem to be roaming in the clouds. 

Later on in the meeting, another member was addressed by the 
president somewhat as follow: 

“Come back in the room. You are too far away.” This created 
a general laugh. But every man was thinking. There would be a 
running fire of suggestions, then when some knotty proposition arose, 
they would get into the deeper thinking, and were far away. If these 
moods could have been reported by accurate count, we are sure that 
a total of more than a thousand instances of the pause occurred that 
afternoon. They were not due to any attempt to practice telep- 


ONE SENSE TELEPATHY 


295 


athy, but simply were natural pauses such as all careful men and 
women adopt when they reflect. 

They are as old as the hills. 

But the practice of utilizing them in connection with the effort 
to empty the mind, so as to bring a consciousness of the echo of 
the Other Mind into use, is both new and practical. That it is a 
valuable practice has been attested by the remarkable results that 
have been attained after thorough development. 

Into this same pause there is now to be introduced a new stage 
known as one-sense telepathy. Let us see if you understand all 
three steps in this progress: 

1. There is the pause which is as old as the hills. 

2. Then there is the introduction into the pause of the habit of 
emptying the conscious mind to admit the power of the Other Mind. 
This combination is new. But the habit of emptying the mind is 
old. 

3. Now we come to the employment of the same pause for the 
purpose of emerging into one sense, and the exclusion of the others. 
This combination is new; but the use of one sense at a time is as old 
as the habit of pausing to reflect. 

Here are combinations that are new, while the parts put to¬ 
gether are old and natural habits. There has never lived on earth 
a man or woman of intelligence or good judgment who has not 
paused to throw the mind into a deeper process of thinking. Nor 
has there ever lived a man or woman who has not emptied the mind 
in reverie, unless such person was of the animal nature. Reverie 
is an emptying of the mind to a greater or less degree, and the cor¬ 
responding admission of the Other Mind. In emptying the con¬ 
sciousness to the last degree, there is a total absence of the mind, 
which is called “no-manVland.” This can be done completely in 
a reverie, and the result is some product of the highest genius if 
there is any way by which to connect with the consciousness, so as 
to know something about it. If genius is to be used on earth, it must 
be available to earthly intelligence. 

When the reverie is shortened, as it can be by the practice to that 
end, it becomes the pause; and this is the combination referred to 
as the second step. As all persons can go readily into reverie after 
practice, as prescribed, and as they can easily learn to shorten their 
reveries, the pause is soon developed; and this can be used in the 
midst of any conversation with other persons. Thus, while the 


296 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


reverie is intended for privacy, the pause is possible in conversation 
or in any transaction with other persons. 

This shows that the second step, or the emptying of the mind com¬ 
bined in the natural and customary pause, is one of the most practical 
of habits, and useful at all times. It cannot be laid open to the 
charge of being likely to attract attention; for the ordinary pause 
is so common that it does not even receive notice unless very long. 
You yourself have often remarked on the seeming dream-state of 
some friend who is lost in thought, and you may have jokingly 
brought the conscious mind back again. 

The third step of itself is as old as the hills, to use a frequent 
criticism or something that has come up out of the dim past as a 
phase of human nature. 

One-sense thinking is one thing. 

One-sense telepathy is another. 

Thinking done with the conscious mind is of matters that are 
brought there through the sense of sight, or of hearing, or of smell, 
or of taste, or of touch. This is the full scope of that mind; unless 
it reasons or draws conclusions; and all reasoning and all deduc¬ 
tions are based on something that started in the physical part of ex¬ 
istence ; and nothing can be physical and be known except through the 
five ordinary senses. 

Telepathy has always been referred to as the passing of knowledge 
through channels other than the ordinary senses. This is the defi¬ 
nition given of it everywhere, and for the past hundreds of years. 

Therefore one-sense thinking is one thing, and one-sense telepathy 
is quite another. 

The former is the use of the conscious mind, and relates to infor¬ 
mation or knowledge coming in through the five senses, or one or 
more of them; or reasoning based on past experience with them. 
The latter is the use of the Other Mind, and the return of one sense 
only to catch the echo. 

By this time it is well understood that the knowledge that comes 
from the Other Mind is caught, not directly, but by the quick re¬ 
turn of the conscious mind in time to hear the echo of its presence. 

As a rule two or more senses are active in every return of con¬ 
sciousness; sometimes three, and often four. It is rare in any act 
of life that all five senses are at work in the conscious mind. What 
you read comes to you from the sense of sight, and is attended by * 
the sense of touch, as where you hold a letter, or a book, or paper. 


ONE SENSE TELEPATHY, 


297 


The sense of touch does not convey the facts that are read, but the 
brain is conscious of that sense. It makes no difference how the 
senses are used, if they are affirmatively or negatively active. 

The person who listens is conscious of the various senses that 
are active at the time; although automatically so much of the time. 

Hearing conveys what is transferred to the brain as knowledge; but 
sight often accompanies the transmission; as where you hear a 
person sing and see the person at the same time. 

Three senses are directly employed when a singer stands in a room 
or hall perfumed with flowers. The flowers may be beautiful, their 
fragrance may be exquisite, and the voice of the singer may be cul¬ 
tured. 

Four senses might be at work if you were eating at a banquet or 
dinner when there was music and the tables were laden with flowers; 
and all five senses are directly involved when the hands or other part 
of the body are engaged in the duties of eating. Mastication is a 
sense of taste and touch. It is difficult to separate the sense of touch 
from any conscious act. 

The scattering of the senses by employing two or more of them 
in the usual acts of life, is common and serves the ordinary purposes 
of working and thinking. But when an extra degree of thought is 
desired, it is customary to limit the senses, and often one only is 
employed. The oft-quoted instances of the blind need not be repeated 
here, nor the custom of the Indians to develop the sense of hearing 
at the expense of all others when on the hunt or the warpath. 

An interesting instance is that of a party of white hunters in recent 
times who, by closing the eyes and standing perfectly still, were able 
to hear the flow of a distant brook; but who could not hear it as 
soon as they opened their eyes. As they were sadly in need of water 
they proceeded to locate the brook, but the direction was most un¬ 
certain. By agreement they went for about two hundred yards, each 
in a different direction; then closed the eyes and listened. One alone 
could hear the flowing water, and he called to the other two to 
come up. This they did, and all heard the brook quite plainly 
now, but still in the depth of the woods the direction was not cer¬ 
tain; so again they separated, this time about fifty yards each, and 
one heard the flow of running water very distinctly. They then 
found it quite easily. 

In a person who is blind the sense of touch is very sensitive. This 
has been proved in so many instances that it is unnecessary to re- 


298 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


peat any of them; but the ease with which the fingers of a blind 
person can detect letters on a printed page, when the letters are not 
raised as is the usual custom, is surprising to those who cannot do 
it. 

A person who is deaf has better eyesight, all things being equal, 
than one who is not deaf. 

One who is blind can hear more keenly. 

People who are not blind but who withdraw mentally the sense of 
sight, have greater acuteness of hearing. The brain is affected by 
either sense. While the eyes are generally taxed to produce hypnotic 
sleep, the ears may be so used, as in the case of the physician who 
secures control of his patients by having them listen to the ticking of 
a watch or some monotonous sound. The same brain-centers are 
reached by either one sense or another. 

River pilots, directing great boats through narrow streams for 
many miles in a fog, steer by the sound reflected from the banks. 
We recall coming up a river for nearly one hundred miles in a fog 
so dense nothing could be seen. Soundings for depth were constant, 
but the boat maintained a good speed in spite of them, as it was ap¬ 
parent that a sudden shoal could not be avoided by such precaution. 
Each turn in the river, and the dangerous narrows were known by 
the sound from the banks. Of course it was necessary for the pilot 
to know the whole river. A stranger could not do it, nor would a 
stranger be allowed to steer a boat. If a bank was low, the reflected 
sound would be entirely different from that coming from a high 
bank. So if the river was wider at one place than another, the sound 
would change to suit the distance. The fog served to lessen the sense 
of sight, and the watchfulness ahead was not necessary. 

On the other hand the pilot, on a bright day, would listen to very 
little, and apparently be lost to the talk and noise about him, while 
he scrutinized the waters ahead of him with sharp gaze. His acute 
sense of hearing had gone for the time being, and his acute sense 
of sight came into play; while, on foggy days, the reverse was true. 

A blind person can walk in and out of rooms, even in strange 
houses by the sense of hearing. An open door is readily detected 
before it is reached. So an object near at hand is heard by the fine 
reflection of the sound, or the change in the closeness of the air, 
or some action on the drum of the ear or the general body through 
the pressure of the air, as when a wall or other obstruction is ap¬ 
proached. This susceptibility is due to experience. A person who is 


ONE SENSE TELEPATHY 


299 


blindfolded and who tries to detect the presence of objects by the 
change in the pressure of the air on the body or on the ear, would 
not succeed in doing so until after practice; and the more the sense 
is concentrated by the withdrawal of the other senses for the time 
being, the speedier will be the results. 

In a reverie all senses are nullified. The eyes are either closed; 
or, if open, they have a far-away look, known as the parallel gaze. 
Remarks and sounds are not heard, unless they prove distracting, 
in which case they break the reverie. Taste and smell are not active; 
as may be seen in the case of the inventor who was fond of confection¬ 
ery, whose mind could work better under the stimulus of that agency, 
and who put by mistake a piece of putty in his mouth which he 
picked up abstractedly for a cream drop. This he chewed with all 
the satisfaction usual in that enjoyment. Or the lack of smell is 
experienced as in the case of the authoress who, in the midst of 
deep reflection, allowed her cake to bum to a crisp, and the smoke to 
fill the room, without more notice than an attempt to brush the 
smoke away from her paper. The sense of touch is often absent in 
the reverie, and many instances have been published in various 
works covering this point. 

Thus it is seen that every one of the senses is put away by the 
reverie. ISTo wonder they are vacated by hypnotism. 

As the reverie may be shortened to the space of a second of time, 
or less, it is possible to concentrate all the conscious thought on 
one alone; for, if all five senses may be set aside by the reverie or 
by the interval, four of them may be set aside just as easily after 
the process is known. 

It often happens that a man or woman, desiring to hear some re¬ 
mark or sound that is not distinct, will place the hand to the listen¬ 
ing ear, and turn the gaze away. The eyes are occasionally closed in 
this action. It is all done as a mere habit; and every person adopts 
it at times. Closing the eyes alone will increase the sense of hearing, 
after a certain amount of practice. The difference is so slight at first 
that it is not appreciable; but each repetition adds to the keenness 
of the single sense effort. 

What is therefore a common habit of the conscious mind be¬ 
comes the basis of one-sense telepathy. 

This use, while comparatively rare, is not unknown in telepathy. 

In that form known as hypnotism, it is most frequent when the 
senses are played upon. The following are some of the deceptions 


300 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


that suggestion will produce in that state if properly brought to the 
minds of the subjects: 

1. A young woman was asked to name what she would most prefer 
to receive, and she said she would like a bunch of roses. A news¬ 
paper was folded to resemble somewhat, but rather clumsily, the 
shape of a bouquet. This was handed to her, and she took it with 
great pleasure. Soon her face lighted up with a satisfied smile. 
She seemed to see one kind from another. With her fingers she ar¬ 
ranged them into a more symmetrical form, and turned them about 
in one way and another several times, in order to find which particu¬ 
lar rose she liked the best. She did not seem to tire of them for 
some minutes; then she laid them on a table. After a while she 
happened to see them and again took them in her hands; then 
lifted the bouquet to her nose and enjoyed the fragrance. It was 
plain to see that the odor of the roses had attracted her sense of 
smell. The point of this experience is to establish the fact that this 
sense may be aroused in the brain; and it is therefore a telepathic 
sense corresponding to the physical sense. 

2. A man who was hypnotized was told that a piece of wood was 
mild cheese. He did not offer to eat it; but merely smelled it, then 
laid it down without showing interest. Later he was told that the 
thing was very strong cheese. He now took it to his nose and his 
facial expression confirmed the sense of smell. It was no longer a 
matter of indifference. Hext the thing was said to be decayed 
cheese. He brought it to his nose, but not closely; and as soon as he 
caught the imaginary odor, his face was contorted in a most dis¬ 
gusted expression. His brain actually caught the stench of rotten 
cheese. He dropped it very quickly. When told later on that it 
was a beautiful carnation, he did not take at once to the belief, but 
lingered in the supposition that it was the decayed cheese. This 
gradually faded in his mind, and he slowly came to recognize the 
dainty flower. How the fragrance was exquisite, although in fact 
it was nothing but a piece of board. He had the full sensations as 
naturally and realistic as if he were in the presence of the things 
themselves which he imagined this thing to be. 

3. A woman in the hypnotic state was told that a book was a 
block of pure gold and that she could not lift it. She tried again 
and again but without success. She was imbued with the one idea 
that it was the weight rather than the value or beauty of the object 
that she had to deal with. Here the sense of touch was magnified 


ONE SENSE TELEPATHY 


301 


in the brain, and a new experience created there. It became a con¬ 
scious fact 

4. To test the same law, a man of great strength was put into the 
hypnotic sleep, and was told that a newspaper, which was folded 
into a square, was nailed to the floor and that he could not lift it, 
as it was securely fastened. He tried, and strained at it until he 
was red in the face, but it would not stir. The paper was then 
kicked away by the foot of the operator, and the subject still gave 
it his attention, not seeming to note the ease with which it had 
been moved. 

5. The sense of touch is so largely worked on in all hypnotic cases 
that, to repeat typical examples, would be reviewing almost the 
whole scope of that practice. In the early degree of this state, the 
arm of the person is raised and he is told that he cannot lower it; 
which proves true. Then he is told that he cannot raise it, and 
this is still true. A peculiar case is cited in the books of a postman 
who was never hypnotized, but who, on a particular occasion, was 
cancelling stamps on letters; when an expert operator happening 
along told him that he could not stop the motion of his arms and 
hands; that he would keep on the canceling until the operator 
wished him to stop. The men had never met before. The postman 
was not in the hypnotic state, but kept on with the motion and was 
not able to cease it until permitted to do so. 

6. The sense of pain has been produced out of nothing many 
thousands of times. In ordinary wakefulness a person may, by 
imagining things to be the matter, bring on the conditions of ill¬ 
ness; but not the actual injury to the skin and body that can be pro¬ 
duced by hypnotic suggestion. Some instances of this kind are 
already stated in the earlier stages of this book. The suggestion 
that a piece of paper is a severe blister, will actually cause the blister 
to appear. A suggestion that a piece of wood is a red hot iron 
will produce all the suffering of an actual burn. These things are 
well known to all operators, and are enacted daily somewhere in 
the experiments. Any physician will tell you of them. On the other 
hand the cure of pain has been effected by this appeal to the sense 
of touch under hypnotic suggestion. It is wholly on this principle 
that psycho-therapeutics will soon take the place of the medical 
profession’s practice. But doctors are coming into use of the new 
method very fast at this time. It is all an appeal to the sense 
of touch. 


302 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


7. A woman, was told that a piece of bread was a delicious morsel 
of confectionery of which she was fond. She put it in her mouth 
and enjoyed it for some space of time and swallowed it. Another 
piece of the same bread was given her, and she was told that it was 
a pickle, and she dealt more slowly with it, nibbling small corners 
from it, and then seemed to have had enough. A third piece of 
the same bread was given her, and she was told that it was a lump 
of ice. It chilled her hands, was very cold for her mouth, and 
she finally discarded it. The fourth piece of bread was given to her 
as a hot'pepper. It was observed by her with great interest; but as 
soon as she put it to her mouth the heat of it became very severe, 
and she showed signs of being distressed by it; yet wanted to keep 
it. 

8. A man was given some sawdust and told that it was ice cream, 
but that it must melt in his mouth and not be swallowed. He 
took some and put it in his mouth, then removed it with disfavor. 
He seemed to have no faith in it. He was then told very emphati¬ 
cally that it was a most delightful kind of ice cream, and that it 
was just what he had been wanting. How he took some more, 
turned it over a few times in his mouth, then with a smile pro¬ 
ceeded to masticate the sawdust. He chewed it more with his tongue 
than his teeth. After a while he discarded it. He then looked 
at the dish of sawdust with indifference, but soon began to eat it 
with such enjoyment that the operator had to stop the proceed¬ 
ings. 

9. The hearing of beautiful music is very common in this state 
when suggested. A girl of twenty was told that the running of a 
sewing machine was the pealing forth of the rich tones of a church 
organ, and that the music was grand beyond all description. She 
was enraptured and sat for half an hour enjoying it, with occasional 
lapses of interest. 

10. A woman was made to believe that an ordinary table was a 
piano which she could play. She actually did play on it; and 
during the performance she made a few false touches which she 
corrected; while at times there were runs that needed fine execution. 
She seemed to have an ear for music, and relished the tones of the 
instrument. 

11. Many books have been published in which the statements were 
made that persons dying had, just before death, heard rich music 
and sometimes the spoken words of relatives who were waiting for 


ONE SENSE TELEPATHY 


303 


them from the great beyond. These instances have been backed 
up by full accounts and often with details that make them seem 
plausible on their face. In the past thirty years we have offered 
every encouragement to persons to send us proofs of such cases; and 
especially of recent happenings of the kind; and our works have re¬ 
ferred to some of them. At this place we append a few that have 
occurred in the past twelve months, and they seem to be of the same 
character as those previously reported. Three cases are known to 
be absolutely correct and are published here: 

a. A young woman about thirty years of age was dying. She had 
been talking of the hope that she would soon meet her father and 
mother in heaven. Her malady was such that she retained con¬ 
sciousness almost to the end. In fact as she died her words were 
distinctly rational. For hours before the departure of her spirit, 
she seemed to hear music faintly. “It is so different from earthly 
music,” she said. There were the notes of far-away musical in¬ 
struments so sweet and so ineffably fine that they pained the ear with 
pleasure. Her face was bright and beautiful; something not her 
custom when in the full tide of life. About an hour before she died, 
the music grew louder. But it was a few minutes prior to the end 
that she said that she heard the voices of her mother and father 
speaking to her in half song and half-spoken words. 

Z>. A woman thirty-six years old who had lost <a little boy a year 
before, was subjected to hypnotic suggestion in order to restore her 
nervous condition. Her sister attended the sittings as a companion 
only. During the sleep which became deeper than was at first at¬ 
tempted, she suddenly grew radiant with smiles and even laughter, 
crying out: 

“Why, there is my boy again, my little darling!” 

In order to enhance the belief, a small child w 1 as brought in and 
she embraced it, kissed it, and talked to it as of old. Then she 
insisted on having the playthings brought to it for play again. 
There came shades of sadness at times over her face as she said: 

“You have been away. Where have you been so long and so far?” 

When she was brought out of the sleep, she seemed to recall the 
meeting as in a dream. Then on succeeding visits, the further 
suggestion was made of the presence of the child in a lighter slumber. 
Little by little the power of the idea was carried into the lightest 
possible hypnotic state, wherein the subject was conscious. The visits 
of the child seem to have faded into indistinctness, and the substi- 


304 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


tuted boy did not fill the craving of the mother for the absent one. 
It was deemed best not to continue these hallucinations too long, 
as the waking caused intense suffering. But the fact that is es¬ 
tablished is the power of the hypnotic state to reproduce the belief, 
at least, that those that have died are alive again. Many similar 
cases are known to be true. 

c. A woman who was ill, but who recovered very soon, was in a 
slight delirium, and heard the voice of her dead sister in heaven 
as she thought. This Was repeated to her scores of times, the 
words being different each time, and not prolonged into sentences. 
They were more like salutations and the exclamation of surprise 
and joy. 

d. A little boy who was in a fever, but who had recovered full health 
and is probably living to-day, saw the face of his little sister and 
then it went from him. He called for it many times. Later on he 
heard sweet music, and angels were about him. His sister had died 
a few months before. Soon her voice was distinctly heard singing 
with the others, and he exclaimed with joy as he heard it: 

“How I hear her! It is so pretty!” 

When he got well he recalled the sounds he had heard and seemed 
to believe that he had actually listened to his sister singing; and 
the belief has never been disturbed. 

e. A woman in a reverie which she claimed to have occurred in 
full consciousness, but which is not probable, as no one can be sure of 
being fully conscious, heard music over her head which she declared 
was wholly new to her, although she had been for years an ardent 
lover of the best music. “What I heard,” she said, “was nothing 
like earthly music. It was played on instruments such as never 
have been used on this globe. It was very fine, very beautiful and 
had a swing to it in time unlike the time of music in this world.” 

In all these cases the fact stands out that the brain is able to 
receive sounds where there are none at hand in the physical world. 

The woman who was dying may or may not have heard the music in 
heaven. Her own wishes were her suggestion; as the intense hopes 
and wishes of all humanity are agents of suggestion to those who 
are in full health. Strong belief is auto-suggestion. A great healer 
in the Orient who had his coming announced by advance heralds, 
found the people expecting him. They believed in him, and thou¬ 
sands begged for the privilege of touching his garment. This is 
not the old story, but one that has occurred in every century. It 


ONE SENSE TELEPATHY 


305 


is being enacted to-day. If the people can be made to believe in 
the efficacy of a healer, then all he need do is to nse one of the de¬ 
grees of hypnotism, in which the suggestion is made and adopted, 
and the cure is readily explained when it takes place. Any pre¬ 
tender could have the same success as is had in this era, if the same 
means to create belief were adopted. This was shown to be true on 
one occasion when the real healer was not able to come, and sent 
another in his place. The people, not knowing one from the other, 
were healed. It was auto-suggestion. 

So when a person is dying in a strong belief that angels, music, 
or the voice of one who has gone before, will be heard, the same 
law may hold true. 

The woman who had lost the little boy may have had the wish 
or the thought of him uppermost in her mind when she passed into 
induced sleep and so awoke to this sight of him. That was still 
auto-suggestion breaking into the subjected state. 

The other cases are ascribable to the same process. 

We have thus far in this cycle shown: 

1. That one sense receiving concentrated attention becomes more 
powerful in waking consciousness. 

2. That under the usual methods of suggestion in hypnotism the 
sensation of any sense may be created out of nothing, and may set 
up in the brain the actual realization of that sense. This shows 
that the brain holds the sense; and that outward excitement is only 
the conscious cause of the sense. 

3. That, instead of requiring the aid of a person to make the 
suggestion, it can be set up by the self-belief, or expectancy. 

This leads to the fourth fact. 

4. That, as auto-suggestion occurs during a reverie, or in an in¬ 
terval of the conscious mind, it can be utilized at will in telepathy. 

The advantage is this: When the reverie or interval is used as 
taught in the preceding cycles, the mind is thrown into nothingness 
for a few minutes or for a few seconds as the case may be, and then 
is brought back to the full consciousness of all the senses. This is 
the main work in the preceding cycles. 

Now the mind after the reverie or the interval, or pause, instead 
of being thrown back into all the senses, is to be thrown into one 
sense alone. 

By coming into one sense, the law of the intensified power of a 
single sense, under concentration, makes the consciousness greater 


306 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


and the telepathic strength superior. In confirmation of what is to 
the world a new method, a man who actually was one in ten thou¬ 
sand and had true clairvoyant powers made this statement to us 
after we had subjected his work to a full analysis: 

“I believe that any man or woman can become a true clairvoyant 
if the right way is sought to cultivate the gift. What you call a 
reverie, I call the blank mind. I can make the blank mind at any 
time. One time I could not. I learned how, and all I did was to 
mix up my mind by a confusion of subjects to think about and 
then rest by not thinking of any of them. That was the blank mind. 
It was your reverie. I found I was often in reverie, or thinking far 
away. Then I made my mind blank. That was no trouble. Any 
one can do so. I knew the exact step back to consciousness. In 
coming back I brought in ideas that were not in me. They came 
to me through the step of coming back. I think the mind goes away 
and brings the new ideas back. I do not know. But I found later 
that when I could come back, not to all my consciousness, but to one 
part only, as something to see, or something to hear, and so forth, as 
you say, I got much greater power. That is the secret. Everybody 
can learn it.” 

But although this man had shown a gift of true clairvoyance and 
had employed by chance the very laws which are in vogue only in 
the latest of -all methods, he seems to stand alone in his profession. 
We have not been told the same secret by any other person; nor 
have we any information leading to the belief that it is in use by any¬ 
one else. 

Before we met him this same law had been worked out by our 
experimenters, and found to be true. The results were most re¬ 
markable, and the method is sure to come into use very quickly. 
It is likely to be the only system whereby the art of clairvoyance, 
if it can be acquired at all, is to be reached. This comes closest to 
it of any method extant. It is summed up as follows:— 

1. Every person can learn to empty the mind. 

2. Every person uses the reverie. 

3. Every person pauses to reflect. 

4. As the reverie and the pause are natural and everyday methods 
in use, the emptying of the mind is only a complete act of what is a 
most common occurrence. It simply goes farther and finishes what 
instinct begins. 

5. As every person comes out of the reverie and the pause into 


ONE SENSE TELEPATHY 


307 


the full senses; and, as those who have learned to empty the mind, 
come also into the full senses; and, still further, as those who act 
by natural habit only, often concentrate the attention on one sense; 
so every person who has learned to empty the mind, can train it to 
return to one sense only. 

6. Since it is true that the concentration of attention on one sense, 
increases the power of that sense; so also it is true that the return to 
one sense only from the interval of the empty mind, will intensify 
the power of telepathy in that direction. 

Practice soon confirms these laws. 

Care and persistent practice is what is required. Others are 
devoting a few minutes a day to this one part of the work; and 
you can readily do as much. It is not an artificial culture. Every 
step of it is instinctive, natural and a part of the habits of every 
life. 

The results are most gratifying to one who wishes to test the 
marvels of the Other Mind. 

Any one sense may be given first attention, and it should be 
followed until success comes to that before passing on to the next. 
The sense of hearing is the most susceptible of all. As it can be 
most readily deceived in the ordinary details of life, and as it is 
most often preyed on by the phenomena of existence, so it may be 
best trained in this work. 

One of the most convincing of experiments is that of leading the 
music of the Other Mind into consciousness. It is done, of course, 
by the only possible route, the echo. But the process is simple: 

1. Before emptying the mind, decide that you wish to know some¬ 
thing of the music that is not like what you have heard. 

2. Then empty the mind, and bring it back to the single sense of 
hearing. 

3. Repeat this many times and do not give up because it takes time. 
When you have mastered one sense, or made a beginning only, the 
road will become easy and swift. It is the start that you need, as 
the consciousness of possessing this power will become a tremendous 
impetus to you in all other trials. 

Another sense that is readily trained in this direction is that of 
smell. Make the same preparations as just given, and resolve in 
advance to return to the one sense of smell, seeking the fragrance 
of flowers. A man who did not have much time for practice, owing 
to his business, found this very fascinating. He was an old bachelor. 


308 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


as he termed himself. In his many efforts to concentrate his mind 
on this one sense, after the plunge into utter darkness, he became 
discouraged; but persisted because he had the few minutes to spare 
each day. At length he found the intense odor of marigolds present. 
Of these he had not been thinking for years. But in the long ago, 
when his sweetheart was living, he used to pluck marigolds for her 
because she loved them above all the country, old-fashioned flowers. 
Lost in a long reverie, he lived again the years of dreams and castle¬ 
building, and was well repaid for his efforts. 

The wonders of the sense of sight, when used in this form of 
cultivated telepathy, are too many to be even referred to. The sub¬ 
ject opens too much for a work of this size, or of much greater 
scope. It is in the power of every person to take these journeys; 
and, unlike the travels of the conscious mind in its imaginings, 
these ventures into the marvelous realm of the Other Mind strengthen 
all the faculties and produce the greatest benefit in every department 
of being. 


TWENTY-FIRST CYCLE 



0 SMALL a thing as thought 
Living in memory 
Becomes the guardian knot 
Of all eternity. 

For what we think, we are. 

As sure as certainty. 

ENOThTE ability is always a true background for a 
high order of development. The system of study and 
practice that has been slowly unfolded throughout the 
pages of this work, relates to the operations of the two 
minds. It is mental; yet touches every act of life and 
every branch of the reasoning powers and faculties. 

We live in the present because of the mind. We live in the past 
because of the memory. We live in the future because of the antic¬ 
ipation. We go to sleep every night, and forget. We awake every 
day; and, because we recall ourselves, we are the same. If we were 
to awake beginning anew each day, we would not connect our past 
self, and the result would be as if we were another person. Mem¬ 
ory tides us over every period of unconsciousness, whether of sleep or 
otherwise. 

The mere slipping of this faculty would make life undesirable 
to those who wished to be the same individual; and desirable to 
those who wished to get free from past identity. If you were not 
to have a knowledge of yourself as you were prior to last night’s 
sleep, then you might to-day as well be John Smith, Henry Jones, 
or any other individual, as to he yourself. The failure of this one 
faculty, even if you were to awake each day in the full possession of 
all your powers, would be equivalent to annihilation of that person 
which you were yesterday. 

Memory is the connecting link in every human chain of immor¬ 
tality. 








310 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


If what you are on earth is to be forgotten to-morrow, or next 
year, or after death, then you might as well wake up as an entirely 
different personality. You might die and go to nothingness; and 
some other person be born to take your place. Last generation might 
have been totally exterminated, soul and body, and this generation 
come up anew, as far as continuity of existence is concerned. 

It seems a very slender thread. 

Memory must be depended on for the preservation of what we 
are and what we will be. 

Which would you prefer, to be yourself to-morrow, with a knowl¬ 
edge of what you have been; or be yourself to-morrow and start with 
the day, knowing all that happens after you then awake, but nothing 
that has ever happened before? To be full of the same ambition, 
purposes, and ability as before; identical in every respect; but as 
new an individual as if your existence were to begin to-morrow? 

Most people do not like the idea that death ends all. They want 
to be convinced that they will live again. For this one goal all the 
religions of the world have been established, and churches have 
fought and maintained their great machinery of government. All 
to save the frail connecting link of memory that will awake with 
us in another world if such a place exists for us. For all the cen¬ 
turies of teachings, of struggle, of faith, of sacrifice, of martyrdom, 
of devotion, of prayer, of rites, of creeds, of cost, of labor, of magnifi¬ 
cent structures, of ceremony and proclamation, of multitudinous writ¬ 
ings and endless acres of libraries, all are brought down to this 
narrow strip of passage between the two worlds, the memory. If that 
fails to connect this life with the next, then the gulf between the 
two is equivalent to annihilation. 

It all depends on memory. 

Victor Hugo taught the doctrine that every human being had 
lived before on earth, and many times; but that the memory was 
so defective it could not recall any experience back of this life; it 
being difficult to remember even the incidents of youth. This was 
not proof, as it served to cite only a case of defective memory, due 
to the limitations of childhood. 

If we have lived before in this world, we do not have the satisfac¬ 
tion of remembering the fact; and it would be a most delightful ex¬ 
perience to lift the veil and discuss old affairs; perhaps a burning 
or two at the stake in the name of religion; or a going off on the 


MEMORY IN TELEPATHY 


311 


gallows because of the larceny of a loaf of bread; or the sharp edge 
of the guillotine when our prejudices were cast for royalty; or a 
look in at the Spanish Inquisition, where the tortures for false think¬ 
ing were relieved by the exit of life; or a period of seventy years 
spent in the catacombs of Italy to avoid the persecutions of the 
Eomans for devotion to the cause of Christianity; or an afternoon 
with the lions who devoured us alive in the presence of the over¬ 
joyed maidens who loved such a matinee; or the crucifixion which was 
the penalty of millions in those early centuries; or the struggles 
through Arabia out of the wilderness after the misunderstanding 
with Pharaoh in Egypt; or the wars on the plains of Asia which en¬ 
grossed one of our lives; or the simplicity of the dawn of civilization 
when the fields were sweet with virgin flowers and the newborn 
sun brought only delights and glories over the landscape to fill 
the heart of man with reverence for the divinity that had made earth 
so beautiful; these are a few of the episodes that might be called 
back from the dim past to allure us into their embrace; but it is a 
dream of belief. 

If we have lived before, it is well that memory does not connect 
us with that fact; for we would be engrossed with too much history. 
This life has vicissitudes enough to keep us thinking. 

Memory is a wonderful thing. 

It is either brief or prolonged. 

It is not very strong except where a shock is produced in the brain, 
as by a terrible accident or some vivid experience. A hundred 
things slip away every day. A man who had a private secretary 
told him to make a note of every act that the latter saw him per¬ 
form or was engaged in during one day; and the record showed 
twenty-eight important items, and sixty-eight of lesser nature. On 
being placed aside these details were kept for a month, at the end of 
which time the man could recall of his own effort only three, and but 
six more when reminded of them by the secretary. 

In looking over the past year, everything is blank except about 
one per cent, of the important events. In looking over one’s youth 
it will take great effort to bring to mind more than fifty episodes; 
while four times that number might be recalled when the details 
were laid bare by records or other agencies. 

A man who was interested in this study had a son whom he 
brought up to remember the great events of the child’s life by the fol¬ 
lowing process: 


312 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


When the boy was two years old, he was asked what one thing he 
could remember and how far back he could go in his mind. The 
boy mentioned one event that was very striking to him; and an¬ 
other than had occurred farther back but that was not of so much 
importance to him. The former was carried in the boy’s memory 
until he was three years old, then his mind was made to recall the 
chief incident of the year preceding. 

This method was carried along until he had grown up, and it was 
found that he could then see in his mind the very earliest events, 
and they were as vivid as the later ones. In his young manhood 
he had as perfectly clear conception of his mental operations at the 
age of two as he had at any time later on. Three additional facts 
were also shown: 

1. He recalled many of the less important impressions all along 
the years of his young life, which would otherwise have been forgotten 
and lost. 

2. He found himself with a prodigious memory for all uses when 
he had grown up. 

3. He had, without culture or effort, developed a natural keenness 
of insight into the minds and motives of others. 

The two last faculties were worth more to him than all other 
means of education combined. There is not the slightest doubt that 
all children should be trained in the same way. It does not require 
work or time, and the only effort is to keep constantly in review the 
one chief event in each year, beginning at the end of the second. 
By this means the mind of the child is carried up to the mind of 
the adult, and found to be closer in power than is generally sup¬ 
posed. 

Among men and women who have found themselves possessed of a 
love of retaining great quantities of ideas in the memory, there has 
always been an attendant trait of telepathy. Prodigious memories 
have been built up along with the same trait, if the histories of men 
can be relied upon for proof. Ho person who has accomplished much 
in the world has been free from both memory and telepathy in the 
common and useful forms. 

It is not claimed here that memory is necessary to this art, but 
it is true that memory is necessary to a strong recognition of the 
operations of the Other Mind. People have the telepathic power 
in great degree and do not know it because their brains are not 
built on the one essential that connects the past with the present 


MEMORY IN TELEPATHY 


313 


and the present with the future; and that is a powerful memory. 
Genuine ability is always a true background for a high order of 
development. Nothing denotes genuine ability so readily as a strong 
memory if it is a useful one at the same time. 

Mere feats of memory are of no value. 

What is stored away is put there for use, not for accumulation. 
The man who put all he earned in the bank and never drew out 
interest, gained nothing. His account was rich and he was poor. 

What is meant by a strong memory is that kind of a deposit in the 
mind that is not only brought in abundantly, but is also coming 
forth to make itself known. With the little boy we have referred 
to, the habit was formed of telling once a week what events he 
could remember distinctly in the past year. When he told them, 
he was bringing out what he had put away. Had he not told them, 
the details would soon have faded like a vague dream, and have 
been lost. 

A memory of great strength therefore consists of what can be 
taken out, or what the mind gives up. 

This is the reverse of what is generally deemed the meaning and 
purpose of memory. A book in which events are recorded is not of 
this order, for what goes in is not able to come out; it can be 
searched for and again read; but it has none of the inherent value 
of memory. 

If a man takes a book and reads ten pages to-day; and to-morrow 
in the absence of the book he is able to bring forth what he read, he 
has this quality. But if he must go to the pages of the book again 
to be refreshed, then he lacks the power. 

We go to the library and find one hundred biographies of men 
and women who have accomplished something in life; whose energies 
of mind have directed achievements of either mind or body that will 
live for some generations to come. Without exception we find that 
all hundred were gifted with strong memories. The latter may not 
have made them great; but without that quality their greatness would 
have been impossible. It is claimed by some authorities that the 
development of memory will develop greatness; but this is not easy 
to prove. We have, during the past thirty years, taught the art 
of memory as the chief secret to success; and wherever it has been 
cultivated, even in cases where it did not exist at the start of the 
study, it has been attended by improvement in all the faculties; but 
only in case it is of the kind that gives forth its value. 


314 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


A merely retentive memory is of no special importance. 

The kind that does good is that which is coming out all day to 
help the possessor. 

Here is a Senator whose life has been filled with deeds that will live 
after him. He meets men whom he has not seen for ten years or 
more; he calls them by name, and tells them of the incidents of 
their meeting a long while before. His memory was breaking out all 
the time. 

We saw a man of international fame greet a poor fellow by his 
full name, state where and when he saw him before, and ask some 
questions about his welfare, including the names of his family and 
references to property. After the interview, the poor man said: 

“1 saw him once twenty years ago, and never since.” 

A lawyer tried a case that was finished in two days. Thirty-six 
years afterwards he met the client, and recalled the details of the 
trial, the scenes, some of the points of the argument, and other 
matters such as the gallon of sweet cider they bought at the mill on 
the way home from the country courthouse. The client was amazed, 
especially as the lawyer had since attained great fame in the world by 
reason of his herculean abilities. 

The remarkable memory of Senator Knox of Pennsylvania, would 
not be credited were it not for the many evidences of it. In the trial 
of a case he was always known to have every detail in mind, and never 
to forget anything, whether of great or slight importance. This 
faculty made it difficult to take him unawares. Opposing counsel 
were always afraid of what “Knox could carry in his mind for instant 
use at any moment.” He is a man of small stature, and not of 
large head; but brain-size does not indicate mind-size. Prom the 
beginning of his public career his memory has never been of the 
ordinary kind; it was great at the start, and probably great when he 
first began to practice law. 

It might be natural or cultivated. 

Without it he would have been held back in the ranks of the 
plodders. 

In our own line of investigation, dating back over thirty years, we 
find many of our students then who suffered from lack of memory, 
who began a course of culture in that direction, and who have since 
made successful men and women. A typical report from one of 
them reads: 


MEMORY IN TELEPATHY 


315 


“I surely lacked memory. I was handicapped by the troubles I 
had to meet on account of this deficiency. I was driven by despera¬ 
tion to find some cure, and I found that my memory needed building 
up; that was the real gist of it. I went to work and did build it 
up. The advantages were coextensive with the growing memory all 
through my life.” 

At the time this man wrote, he was without ability and had 
nothing to look forward to. His funds were less than one hundred 
dollars. To-day he is the president of a great institution, having 
funds of more than two million dollars to direct. 

While memory does not create great ability it is the channel through 
which such an attribute may come into contact with the world. It 
excites the gifts we hold in a dormant state, and they grow under 
the direction of that stimulus. 

What is meant by telepathic ability is the power to discern what 
to do, what is right as between two courses that may be pursued, 
what are the motives of our fellow beings towards us, what knowledge 
do they hold back that we ought to possess, and many of the thousand 
details that make up a successful career. More than this, it draws 
from the invisible fund of invention, of discovery, of genius, much 
of the wonderful knowledge that comes to men by leaps out of the 
unknown. 

Where there is genuine power of memory there is always a force 
that works in the higher light of the Other Mind and comes forth 
through the conscious intelligence. This is the fact, whether the 
memory is a habit that has grown through its inherent strength, or 
has been cultivated by practice. In teaching it as a means of self¬ 
development, we have always begun with the practice and blended 
that into a habit; thus producing the natural gift of memory, which, 
after all, is nothing but a love of the process. People always do 
the things they love to do. 

Mechanical memorizing is not agreeable to any person. 

But that kind of memory that seeks to catch and to reproduce 
an idea is always beneficial to the mind. It should also include 
thoughts of value that are worth keeping. In order to carry on this 
work as a means of imparting greater strength to the present work, 
the following method is suggested: 

1. Turn to the First Cycle and read the propositions there stated. 
Go over them once rather rapidly; then close the book and try to 
repeat aloud one of the most prominent of the ideas stated there. 


316 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


2. Now open the same pages and again read the propositions and, 
after closing the book, make an effort to state any two of the ideas, 
not the propositions that seem most important. Yon may repeat 
the one first stated if you happen to think of it. 

3. Once more open to the propositions in the First Cycle, and read 
them all; then close the book, and repeat aloud the three ideas that 
seem the most important. You may repeat, if you wish, those stated 
in the first and second trials. 

4. Open again and read the propositions; close the book and repeat 
aloud the four ideas that seem the most important. Repetition is 
always allowed, so that there are different ideas in the same trial. 
For instance, in the fourth trial there must be four different ideas, 
but three of them may be those stated in the third trial. 

5. This plan of adding one idea on each trial is to be carried 
along until you have made twenty trials, and in the last there will 
be twenty different ideas. 

6. The practice must be cumulative. If you start with more than 
one idea at the beginning, you will simply indulge in mechanical 
memory. The mind is not stimulated thereby. Nothing but cumula¬ 
tive repetition will make the progress sure and solid, and keep the 
mental faculties alive with attention and interest. Some ambitious 
students might try to name twenty ideas at the very first trial. 
They would make no real progress and would tire of the work very 
soon. But the plan of cumulative ideas is a natural stimulant and 
excitant of the mind in a most healthy way, and the increase of 
power is surprising after the first few days of patient practice. 

7. You should go to twenty trials each day. 

8. It is a very curious process to note the manner in which you 
will treat this exercise after the fifth day. We will assume that, for 
the first five days, you will make all twenty of the trials; that on each 
day the first trial will state aloud one idea taken from the proposi¬ 
tion, the second trial will take two ideas, the third trial will take 
three ideas, the fourth will take four, and so on, increasing one 
each time, until you reach twenty; then you can rest and let the 
practice go until the next day, and repeat the whole twenty in like 
manner; or you can go back over the work the first day, running 
from one to twenty in the manner stated. Some of the brightest 
students have found this practice so fascinating after it got started 
that they have gone over it as many as five times each day. They 
progress that much faster. But, no matter how many times you 


MEMORY IN TELEPATHY 


317 


repeat the twenty trials the first, or any day, you must repeat them 
at least once for five days. Increased work one day is not to release 
you from the necessity of the five days’ practice. The principle 
involved will be seen in the next few lines, after the following re¬ 
quirement has been stated. 

9. The propositions must be read silently, but the ideas must be 
stated aloud; and all the propositions of the First Cycle must be 
read each time. 

The principle involved is this: When the conscious mind has 
done a certain amount of work, the Other Mind takes it up and 
adopts it. The force of the working mind is increased by cumulative 
practice; like the momentum of a great body that moves on after 
the motive power has ceased to act upon it. 

The work of the Other Mind is seen in all the finer actions of life. 
If you play the piano, the first weeks of practice will be very slow 
and tedious, for you must have fingers for many notes, and it is all 
you can do to think of one finger on one note for a while; then 
two fingers on two notes will absorb all your mental powers; then 
three fingers on three notes; until at length you can attend to all 
the used keys of the instrument with your ten digits, hit ten at a 
time, or eight, or six, or follow one group after another with your 
eyes shut. The practice has passed over beyond the working mind 
into another sphere. 

Here is an exercise that has been put to use in our work during 
many years: In Ralston University there was a class of young 
men who had been practicing exercises for extending the range of 
the speaking voice. This requires two years, as nature will not 
favor a revolution in voice development in less time. This class 
had practiced continuously for the whole period of the school year. 
At the beginning of the summer term of vacation, one-half of the 
students were told to do no practicing until they returned in the 
fall. The other half were assigned hard work in constant daily 
practice; but it was wholly along the lines that had been pursued 
during the school year. 

In the fall when they came together, it was noticed that the half 
that had not practiced at all, had made remarkable progress, which 
they failed to understand; but, by actual tests, the voices had al] 
developed in a most striking manner. The others who had practiced 
all the time had also made progress, but not one-half that of the 
students who had not given a minute of work to their voices. This 


318 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


led to the explanation of the reasons why we divided the class. Ail 
important law was involved. 

It had been suspected that the Other Mind, having had enough 
stimulus to set in motion its power, would take charge of a work 
that had already proceeded to some length, and would carry it on. 
This law was proved in a most emphatic manner. 

Other tests were made for daily use, and were as follows: 

Classes in voice culture were divided into two parts; one was 
given three hours a day of hard practice; the other was given one 
hour a day of the same practice. The latter half made the greater 
progress. The impulses set in motion were maintained by some 
mysterious power during the interval. 

The next experiment was as follows: 

The class was again divided, but into three parts. One part was 
given two hours’ practice in the forenoons, the next third was given 
one hour’s practice in the afternoon, and the other third was given 
thirty minutes’ practice in the evenings. The last named gained 
in progress over the two other divisions; while the afternoon hour 
was more valuable than the morning two hours. This was confirmed 
after three months of tests. The exercises were steady and solid 
all through, and were of the most thorough character. 

A man who had a difficult problem to unravel worked at it for a 
day; then, when he could not get it, threw it aside. Under advice 
he took it to his room, spent a half hour with it, and laid it away. 
The next evening he did the same thing; and light began to be seen. 
On the third evening he had made some progress. In the next trial 
he had the whole problem mastered. It was the half hours, and the 
intervening sleep, when the Other Mind comes to take charge while 
the working mind is resting, that solved the difficulty. 

This law of the psychic mind helping out the work of the conscious 
mind is very often found in use; although it is not recognized unless 
studied for that purpose. 

The effort to state aloud as many as twenty of the ideas taken 
from the propositions of the First Cycle, may not be easy on the 
first day; but at the end of the fifth day, it will be found to come 
as a new nature. Memory will then seem to start as a gift and 
will apply itself to other things. 

People do what they love to do. Webster loved to memorize the 
Bible, Shakespeare, Milton and other grand works; and he knew 
them all from end to end. His mind was correspondingly grand 


MEMORY IN TELEPATHY 


319 


and massive in its achievements. To him the grasping of a giant’s 
memory was a pleasant pastime. 

When it was said of any successful person who has got on in the 
world because of the aid given by a great memory, that such a 
gift is born in the individual, you may set that claim down as not 
true. It is a habit that has been started either by accident or design; 
and, once well started, it will proceed under the care of the Other 
Mind, and thereby become prodigious. 

The cumulative methods taught in this work will effect the same 
end. As soon as the fifth trial, on five successive days, is over, you 
will have unmistakable evidence that the Other Mind is working 
within you. More than this you will have started the habit of 
memorizing under the charge of that function, and that habit will 
attend you in all the duties of life. You will be able to remember 
every detail quite readily. 

One of the great results will be the enormous strength that will 
come to your mind in recalling the events of the day, the year and 
the distant past, and then dumping itself into nothingness; for, the 
stronger the mind, the more easily you can control it. The weak 
minds cannot take the leap into nothingness. 

You will be able to empty the conscious mind in a flash. 

You will be able to cast it into the reverie. 

You will be able to make the pause, no matter how interested you 
may have become in a conversation; your mind will be controlled 
because it is strong and under your energetic will. 

But above all you will be able to bring it back to consciousness 
so close to the visitation of the Other Mind that you will catch more 
of the knowledge from the latter than by any other method. 

The results are surprising. 

In order to help bring about this result the trials should be re¬ 
peated day after day for several weeks. The first decided change 
will occur at the end of the fifth day, or preceding the beginning 
of the practice of the sixth day; but the progress will be just as 
marked for several weeks. It is better to include full thirty days, 
omitting Sundays; that is, thirty week days, or five weeks. 

The method proceeds as follows: 

You read the propositions in the First Cycle, and study the dia¬ 
gram. Then you close the hook and recall one idea that seems 
important to you. This may be the first. All life is physical or 
psychic. Do not try to repeat the words in their order. Pay no 


320 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


attention to the arrangement. If yon chose that idea yon may 
state it aloud somewhat like this: 

Life is divided into two parts; one part is the physical and the 
other part is the psychic. 

Out of the whole number of propositions which must be read in 
full each time, and there are twenty-three in all, your mind will be 
struck with one or more that will arrest your attention. It may 
not be the first or the last. It is often a matter of surprise what 
idea will lodge in the mind of a reader and throw the attention into 
a reverie or pause. If this condition results, it will be all the more 
valuable. Every proposition is a key to a reverie, and stands on 
the threshold of the Other Mind. When you read that all life is 
physical or psychic, you may not know what is meant by psychic, 
but sooner or later you will know, especially after you have read 
this work to the present pages. Then you will wonder if there is 
any other kind of life than the physical or the psychic. If there is, 
what can it be? There at the very first step you will be on the 
threshold of the Other Mind, and the great good that is to follow 
will have begun. You cannot expect to make progress in any line 
of development without the aid of the mental faculties. 

Genuine ability is always a true background for a high order of 
development. 

To be something, your mind must be something. 

The first idea of the two kinds of life is the most comprehensive 
of all thoughts. The next idea is almost as strong. It states that 
physical life possesses intelligence and power. This will set you to 
thinking. Intelligence, you say, is a recognition of facts, and power 
is the ability to make use of that recognition; and this is all there 
is to physical existence. But is it? If there is anything else, what 
can it be ? Again you are lost in the reverie, which is most whole¬ 
some and beneficial to your mind and to all your faculties. 

Now comes the next proposition, telling us that psychic life pos¬ 
sesses both knowledge and magnetism. How, then, does it differ 
from physical life? Does intelligence differ from knowledge? Per¬ 
haps. But what is magnetism? 

Before these inquiries are answered, the make-up of the human 
type calls for a proposition and it tells us that both physical and 
psychic life are the composition of humanity. Here the first and the 
fourth propositions are brought together. That of itself furnishes 
an idea that is not actually set forth in so many words in the First 


MEMORY IN TELEPATHY 


321 


Cycle. Every human being possesses intelligence, power, knowl¬ 
edge and magnetism. 

This calls for a proposition to determine the difference between in¬ 
telligence and knowledge, and between power and magnetism. It 
seems that intelligence is a directing force, while knowledge is an 
all embracing sweep of the past, the present and the future as far 
as the latter is knowable. 

Power is the executive of the working mind, which is the seat 
of intelligence; while magnetism is the executive of the psychic mind 
in which there is knowledge of all that has existed, all that does 
exist, and some part of the future. 

The next propositions indulge in certain translations. It is seen 
that the physical and the psychic are again brought together in 
the human being; the physical body being the power of the physical 
mind, and the psychic life being the power of the psychic mind. 
By this process it is discovered that magnetism is the psychic life, 
or that the latter is expressed in magnetism. 

Then the two minds are made to stand forth in clear ground. 

There is the physical intelligence which is the conscious mind; 
and the psychic knowledge which is the psychic mind. 

An interesting definition of telepathy is found in the next proposi¬ 
tion. It is knowledge, for it knows the things that are in the past 
and the present and some of the future; all of which are denied 
the working intelligence except when the psychic mind imparts 
such knowledge or it has come through the ordinary channels. Telep¬ 
athy is the condition of the psychic mind coming into the conscious 
mind, is a very succinct, if not a strictly technical, definition. 

It seems strange that there should be two kinds of telepathy, 
one known as physical and the other known as psychic. If telepathy 
is psychic, how can it be given a physical division ? But the proposi¬ 
tion makes this clear when it says that physical is that form of 
telepathy which is able to break through into the conscious mind 
and there find interpretation in the physical channels of intelligence. 
It is an aid to earthly existence. 

Here is the basis of the present work; for it has dealt with the 
operations of the Other Mind when confined to the physical activities 
of life. This one phase alone will open up the vista of thousands of 
ideas; and the student must remember that the mere statements 
of the propositions themselves are not the ideas which are to be 
brought to light, except where they are brief and of single import. 


322 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


The mind should be taught to step outside and grasp the thoughts 
that are born of these propositions. 

The fourteenth proposition will furnish an unlimited fund of sug¬ 
gestions with which to sustain a long era of mental development 
under the present system. All the remaining propositions grow in 
importance as they proceed to their statements. The diagram of 
the four walls should be kept constantly in the thoughts, and its 
arrangement should live in a mental picture. 

In building natural memory by the cumulative plan, any series 
of potent ideas will suffice; but they should be potent in the highest 
degree, and should have the power of leading out into endless 
branches and secondary lines of growing importance. If you will 
look into the propositions and especially into the greater majority 
of them, you will find that they contain the following potency: 

1. They are in the first place statements of the greatest facts 
that exist within range of human intellect. 

2. They contain suggestions of still greater thoughts beyond them¬ 
selves, of which the conscious mind can only surmise in its search 
for more light. 

3. They lead, through the portals of the Other Mind, to the very 
threshold of the highest realms in the universe. 

4. By being used as food for the reverie, and fuel for the journey, 
they send the Other Mind out into undiscovered worlds. 

Try it and see. 

As we have said, any system of ideas that will furnish the mind 
with something to think about, will build up a wonderful memory 
through the cumulative plan. But the greater the potency of the 
ideas, the more marvelous will be the achievement. And there are 
not anywhere, in all the world, thoughts so potent as those set forth 
in the propositions of the First Cycle. 

One of the practical, everyday results of this method of building 
up the memory, is the hold it will have on the details of life. You 
will retain and be able to use and to bring forth almost every fact 
that is of importance to you. Forgetfulness will be gone. Hot only 
scores of facts will live and be springing out of your mind as they 
are needed, but hundreds and thousands of such facts will, in an 
incredibly short time, be thus within your control. 

It will be seen that this method takes in and gives out. Some 
systems take in only. Some give out mechanically. Some reten¬ 
tions of fact are surface, and not depth. The only true plan of 


MEMORY IN TELEPATHY 


323 


developing this great gift is to give out by oral statements what 
the mind takes in silently. There is a physiological reason for this 
way of proceeding. The sound of the voice adds to the mental 
picture, joining two senses to one; and the words are thus molded 
into coins, making clear impressions on the mind. 

But a stronger reason exists as follows: 

Silent thinking with the conscious mind is very likely to take 
wide steps aside; and the mind is prone to wander, even a small 
fraction from the path of statement, which is prevented by an even, 
unbroken oral delivery, no matter how quietly it may be done. It 
is not the noise that is needed, but the actual coinage of thoughts 
into articulated words. Man is the only species of creation that is 
given this power of articulate speech, and it means much more than 
the sounds that are created. It compels the mind to take definite 
shape, which is lacking in mere thinking. 

This peculiar power is seen in the ease with which extempore 
address and a free diction are acquired. You may think your thoughts 
as often and as long as you please, but the more you thus practice, 
the less ability you will have in diction, extempore address and 
fluency of delivery. These great gifts are the result of the right 
kind of practice that is based on two operations of the mind: 

1. The thoughts expressed must be put into spoken words framed 
into careful sentences. 

2. The thoughts must also be of a character to bring up secondary 
ideas that are thus to be put into similar words and sentences. 
That is, there must be so much meat in the thoughts that they give 
birth to further ideas besides those contained in themselves. 

With such a basis, the mental growth is quick and decisive. 

As geniuses are the best types of useful telepathy; as they are 
always blessed with a strong memory; and as they possess genuine 
ability; this trinity should be given the full study that it demands 
by reason of the fruits obtainable; for each part is helpful of the 
others. 

After all, development is the result of habits that are the result 
of practice; and this is true whether the practice is fixed by exercises 
or brought about by the character of one’s duties. When exercises 
are employed for the purpose of producing a line of development, 
they should be led as soon as possible into habits. Skilled teachers 
or correct systems of practice will always do this. Habits become 
second nature. 


324 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


Believing that there is nothing so helpful in all the range of 
human training as the plan set forth in this cycle, we leave it to 
you to master by your faithfulness and interest. It is not difficult 
after the first few trials. The mind will not readily begin the habit 
of stating ideas orally in well-worded and arranged sentences; but 
this is sure to be developed very quickly; and, as soon as you get a 
good start, the progress will be most gratifying. 

Apart from the great good it will accomplish in other departments 
of life, outside of this direct study, it has the merit of making the 
mind strong and fertile, rich in thought and prolific in fruitage. 
A person who had no time for the thorough mastery of this entire 
work, would he able to connect the First Cycle with the present one, 
and thus set up a separate and complete system of training by itself, 
which would be worth fortunes in the value it would bring to the 
student. 


TWENTY-SECOND CYCLE 


325 



N ALL the world around 
And through the space above 
The silences prevail 
Like resting places where 
The work of progress stops 
To let the builder think . 

EOPLE often mistake a qniet person ioi a wise one. 
There are numerous sides to this much mooted question, 
and opinions are divided now as they were three thou¬ 
sand years ago on the merits of being quiet. If a man 
is a fool, it is wise to say nothing. If a man is not 
a fool but knows very little, it is also wise to say nothing. If a man 
knows a great deal, and he talks too much he will lower the estimate 
that may be placed on the worth of his wisdom. Eeally great people 
have little to say, and they say that little in all kinds of ways. 

A man who has made himself famous over all the globe by some 
grand achievement, may not know how to use words to advantage; 
and the public who hear him talk may judge his real ability by 
what he says rather than by what he has done. 

Another man who has done nothing but talk all his life, and 
who knows how to talk much and well, may create the impression 
that he is greater than one whose deeds have been of immense help 
to the race. While great men are working upward in their careers 
they have no time to be wasted in talk, unless they belong to the 
professions that require the use of the voice in well-chosen sentences. 
The lawyer is of necessity a man of speech, for that is the chief tool 
whereby he wins his cases. A preacher is endowed with the same 
tool in order that he may send forth the truths with which he has 
been commissioned. The physician requires the same gift but in 
different method. 








326 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


For these men to be silent would be against nature. 

A woman is told in the good book that silence is golden. She is 
not, as a rule, in a profession that requires fluency of speech; but, 
nevertheless, she has come into that inheritance and is often aware 
of the fact. When she is in the unmarried state, she has to choose 
between being known as vivacious, quiet, or a blend of the two. If 
she is vivacious she talks much and rapidly. If she is quiet, she 
talks very little, and is a good listener. In the blend, she talks some, 
never very much, and is not often silent unless her feelings have 
been hurt. Then she may fly to either extreme. 

Vivacity is attractive when a woman is pretty, unmarried, and 
has fascinating methods; otherwise it is ceaseless talk. In the absence 
of these conditions, the less a woman talks the more power she can 
wield over both men and women. Yet the extreme of absolute 
silence is not a virtue. To say very little and to say it pleasantly 
and not like one in a morose state, is always an alluring force in 
favor of all ladies, young, middle-aged and old. 

Silence has a double value: 

1. It commands respect for many reasons, if it is not carried to 
an offensive extreme; and, by commanding respect, it impresses 
others with a more weighty regard. 

2, It brings the mental powers into that arrangement where they 
can take advantage of the agency known as telepathy. 

There never was an instance where knowledge by the telepathic 
route ever came to a person who was not silent at the time; unless 
as in the case of inspired orators, they had entered into the realm 
controlled by the Other Mind; or in similar situations, as in teaching 
and conversation of an extraordinary character. In all oratory that 
is of a high order of value there are moments when the speaker is 
lifted out of himself into another realm. The change is by a grada¬ 
tion that seems to be logically connected, and the effect on the hearer 
is not abrupt or sudden, but in harmony with the preceding trend 
of thought. 

The same change to the realm of the Other Mind may occur in 
conversation, but it is a rare occurrence in these days. There is not 
the stimulus for it. Yet it is possible, where two persons may be 
closely bound together by some tie that is beyond the ordinary friend¬ 
ships, and the theme under discussion is serious to an excessive 
degree. The few cases we have evidence of have been of too sacred 
a nature to be subject to this line of explanation. 


IN THE SILENCES 


327 


Outside of the uses stated, it may he set down as a fixed rule that 
silence is essential to the invasion of the Other Mind. 

That function does not come if there is any thought pending in 
the conscious mind. The latter must be emptied. Its voice, as well 
as its ideas, must be all sent to the land of silence. 

If such a combination could be found where the voice talks and 
the mind ceases to think during a sane state, then we might imagine 
a talking man or woman having an empty mind in which the Other 
Mind might enter. In that event the silence of the voice would be 
unnecessary, as the brain would be silent. Many persons do in fact 
talk with very little knowledge of what they are talking about. Still 
it cannot be said that the mind is wholly separated from the voice. 
The old claim that when a certain lawyer began to speak to the jury 
his brain stopped working, was made by an opposing attorney more 
in ridicule than as a physiological assertion. 

The one disadvantageous method of talking is when the mind 
empties itself as fast as the words come from the mouth. This is 
the sieve operation of the mind. Thoughts come in the latter, and 
run out just as they come in. If you pour water in a sieve, it will 
not remain there for any length of time. Hardly will the wires or 
mesh be wet. The thoughts will pass out of the mind in the same 
way. They will not make the slightest impression on the brain 
surface. The finer convolutions will not be indented or marked, and 
the mental activity will be no greater than that made on a child’s 
brain by its chatter. The babe that sits in the high chair, or the 
prattling infant that crawls along the floor on all fours, or the 
monkey in the cage that scolds and gibbers, or the parrot that 
wants a cracker, although he really does not know that he wants it, 
are types of the mind emptying itself as fast as ideas come into it. 

Such a mind can furnish no thoughts worthy of the speaking 
voice, and silence is the best for all parties concerned. 

If you belong to this sieve family, the sooner you ascertain the 
fact, the better. The first step toward a remedy is to learn the 
grand art of silence. 

Have you not many times seen the man who talks right along, 
and to whom you can say nothing that will be heard? His ears 
may catch what you say, but his brain will not, and he will keep 
on talking. He is not what is known as a fool, as these talking 
spells are merely the sieve habit, and there are times when he will 
connect his mind with what he says with his mouth, as when he wants 


328 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


something to drink or eat> or other thing that appeals to his animal 
nature. He is purely the animal type. If he is a carpenter he may 
make a hundred blunders and not know it until he finds the cut 
lumber is too short and will not fit in place; then he will hunt 
around in his cranium for some excuse that will relieve him of the 
blame. Some men spend all their wits searching for excuses for 
their mistakes. That is because their hands think, and are sieves, 
letting out all that goes in the mind as fast as it goes in. 

A person succeeds in life in proportion as he is able to bring into 
his service employees who are not sieves; whose work is not done 
by the process of the outgo as fast as it comes in; but who have a 
saving fund for all they say and do. 

The talking employee is the least valuable of all. He gives no 
thought to his work; is the first to make mistakes; is the first to 
find excuses for his continual blunders; and, having made the excuse 
to his employer, he goes on with his work in the firm belief that 
the excuse has relieved him of all blame. He should be sent away 
as soon as possible. There is nothing in his mind to read, as his 
conduct is all the mind he has, and it speaks for itself. 

Success depends more on this art of getting rid of this class of 
employees, both men and women, than on any other single method 
in the execution of affairs. You cannot do all your work alone. 
There must be assistants. It may seem uncharitable to advise this 
course, but it pays for all concerned. It pays for you and for the 
employee. The statement made by a man who began poor at the 
age of twenty-five, and who has made a great success of his business, 
is to the point: 

“As my business began to grow I saw I needed some one to help 
me. I hired a young man who took hold at first with a vim. He 
was inclined to talk while he worked. I do not object to the usual 
and necessary amount of talk, but he talked most of the time if 
there was some one to speak to. I told him he talked too much. 
He was glum for a day, then did not say much for two days more, 
but got talking again and he made up for lost time. So I quietly 
brought into his place another young man. The first day this one 
came, I said to the two of them: e I am sorry to have to let James 
go. But he makes mistakes because his mind is not enough on his 
work to know what he is doing all the time. As soon as you learn 
his work, he will find a place somewhere else/ James was on his 
good behavior for three weeks. I did not let him go, so he told the 


IN THE SILENCES 


329 


new boy that he thought I was just joking. As soon as he took courage 
in the belief that it was all a joke, he got back slowly into his old 
habits of talking. Then I let him go. Now I think that the new 
boy was as much of a talker as the other one; but this was a 
lesson to him. James did not suffer, as he got a place somewhere 
else in a few months, and took real advantage of his experience 
with me. He stopped his talking, got to thinking, took up the 
study of books evenings and spare moments, and improved his mind 
until he is now in a good position.” 

It is evident that, had the employer not taught James this severe 
lesson, he would have been of little use to himself or others in life. 

Another report on the same subject is as follows: 

“When a young man I was an ordinary laborer. I studied every 
minute, day and night, that I had to spare. I found an opportunity 
to better myself. I kept on studying and improving and bettering 
myself. Now I have over two hundred men in my employ. I selected 
them because of their apparent ability. I sifted them out one by one, 
letting in others that I deemed more capable. I did the surprising 
thing many times of letting good, skilled men go, for no other reason 
than their inclination to talk too much when they were at work. 
Men less skilled took their places and were judged by this test. I 
might have been juster to those I sent away; for it is often true that 
a talking man will reform if he thinks he is to lose his place. But 
I had no time to do this. My business increased, and the quality of 
the work in all departments was much better in consequence of 
my methods.” 

One more instance will be furnished, coming from a man who 
has seventy clerks and others in his employ: 

“I have many competitors. To win success against competition, 
it is necessary to have the best skill and the best thought in every 
branch of my business. For twenty years I have made it a point 
to discharge every talkative employee, no matter what other merit 
he may possess. I call a man or woman talkative, who talks unnec¬ 
essarily during work being done for me. It detracts from the thought 
and attention that my work needs, and it leads to blunders as 
well as inferior results. I do not love my competitors, for they 
have done all they could to rob me of success; therefore it is with 
some satisfaction that I have seen my discharged employees find 
gdod places in the employment of my competitors. It has been a 
good thing for the men and women who needed the work, and good 


330 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


for me. With the more efficient corps of assistants I have pro¬ 
duced quality that counts, while my competitors have gone steadily 
backward.” 

This is genuine philosophy. 

On the other hand there is a class of people who are ultra silent 
who produce nothing. Those who talk while they work, if mind 
is required at all in the duties are sure to make mistakes and bring 
inferior results. But those who do not talk, if they have no mind, 
will not give any better account of their efforts. It is to distinguish 
between these two classes and to bring to light the middle class, that 
denotes the skill of the successful employer, whether in the home, 
in business, or in the professional world. 

This middle class becomes the foundation of the better grade of 
workmen, clerks, managers and future partners. Carnegie, in a 
hearing where he was a witness, said that more than forty poor 
men who had come to him in their youth were now millionaires, and 
some of them were worth many millions of dollars. How many of 
those would have made a hundred thousand dollars if they had been 
left to their own business opportunities to gain that humbler fortune ? 
Probably not one. Yet the fact that they rose to become millionaires 
was much dependent on their fitness to do the work for which the;? 
were employed. Had they been sieves, or talkers, they would not 
have held any position under Carnegie. 

We thus find a certain list of silences that will not bear analysis: 

1. There is the silence of the voice in the case of the man or 
woman who says nothing or very little, because there is nothing 
coming into the mind to be said. Such a person is an easy subject 
of hypnotism, but is, hardly worth the experiments that are made, 
as nothing from nothing leaves nothing; and something cannot be 
taken from nothing. Such a person cannot read the minds of others, 
nor catch the knowledge that drips at times out of the Other Mind 
into the working mind, because the latter is not working. This 
distinction is very important. 

2. There is the silence of the mind during the voluble speech of 
the man or woman whose voice runs almost on its own initiative. 
This is the nearest to perpetual motion yet discovered in this world. 
Such a person is easily subjected to hypnotism; for the voice, being 
apart from the mind, cannot hold that function in a state of resist¬ 
ance. Any active thinking brain, if the thought is alive in the 
conscious division, is sure to resist the influence of the controller. 


IN THE SILENCES 


331 


Therefore the mind that is silent when the voice is silent, and the 
mind that is silent when the voice is speaking, will always be the 
mind that is controlled by the hypnotist, and the magnetic individual. 

3. The third silence is that of the mind that has been thrown into 
“no-man’s-land.” This, if done by an act of the will, is not the 
mind of a person who is to be mastered by others; but who is at 
the time master of his own will. It is in such a pause that the well- 
known telepathic interval is created, enabling the mind to catch the 
knowledge that comes from psychic sources. This silence of the 
mind is accompanied by the silence of the voice, in case the latter 
is speaking; but that is treated as another silence in a class by itself. 

4. The fourth silence is that of the pause. This is the outgrowth 
of the third silence. It occurs during conversation, the purpose 
being to throw the mind into emptiness in a second or two of time, 
so as to catch the thoughts of another person. The third silence is 
used when alone, and in a second or two of time, to gauge the feelings 
of others towards yourself, or ascertain something of their intentions 
and purposes. 

5. The fifth silence is that of the reverie. It is useful for the 
purpose of taking in knowledge of wide scope without aim, or to 
make some special fact clear. It also serves genius in ferreting out 
the secrets of nature. There is no inventor, artist, creator of ideas 
or new movements, deep scholar, or genius of any kind, who has not 
used the reverie; and the cultivation of this power is one of the 
most important methods of advancing the interests of the individual 
man or woman along any of the highways of existence. 

6. The sixth silence is that of drowsiness. It blanks the mind 
and takes thought away. It differs from the other silences because 
it alone tends toward natural sleep. But as the conscious mind is 
withdrawn, this silence opens the way to hypnotism, suggestion that 
is not hypnotic, and physical depression. 

7. The seventh silence is that of the lapse. It is a dangerous 
condition of the mind, and needs immediate attention. As it does 
not belong to this line of investigation, but is treated in Universal 
Magnetism, it needs only be mentioned here as one of the silences. 

8. The eighth silence is that of abstraction. All are somewhat alike, 
although there are points of difference between those that are allied. 
Abstraction closely resembles the first and second silences. It occurs 
in its beginning as the loss of a word such as the name of a person, 
or some term or date or other thing with which the mind has been 


332 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


quite familiar. Thus it differs from other silences, as it takes 
place in the midst of conscious thinking, whether one is writing, or 
talking, or merely contemplating. It is a loss, or hole, in a sentence. 

Abstraction is a very dangerous condition, and indicates in many 
cases the coming on of mental breakdown. Unlike the first and 
second silences, it does not lead to hypnotic control. 

The beginning of the trouble should be met if possible; otherwise 
it may be combated at any stage. If it has progressed far, the best 
method is to make use of self-suggestion, as stated in an earlier cycle 
of this book* But this work will find you, if the fault has already 
set in, with the loss occurring only as the escape of some familiar 
word. It is not the same as memory failure; but leads to an ad¬ 
vanced stage of that trouble if not corrected. 

The natural preventive of abstraction and one of the best cures 
in case it has advanced only a short distance on the road to mental 
weakness, is to have a string on every thought you write or utter. 

This means that there is an idea back of each idea you write or 

speak. A better term is that of the root and tree of thought. The 
latter part of the name is used to describe the spoken or written 
idea; while the root is made to apply to the source from which it 
sprang. 

In case there is known no source of an idea that has come to 

your mind, then attach the inquiry. What is the use of it? 

This will bring the mind to see itself, and herein is the cure of 
both abstraction and failing memory. 

When the step has been taken successfully, the next is to change 
the inquiry to the following, Can it he proved? 

These are simple questions, but they set the mind going, and that 
is what is wanted. When the mind, like a worn-out clock, does not 
run smoothly, and skips ideas, it needs attention, and the purpose 
is to get it running properly. 

If you are addressing some friend on a subject with which you 
are perfectly familiar, and a word fails you that you have recently 
uttered many times, apply the first inquiry, and endeavor to answer 
it in your mental workshop. The following are examples: 

“1 was over to see my old friend to-day . . You find that 

the name has slipped from your mind. It is not the case of loss 
of memory, for that applies to names and terms that have not been 
used recently; whereas the abstraction is of something that you know 
well, and generally involves only one word. 


IN TEE SILENCES 


333 


The name of your old friend is Horton. Yon started to say, 
“I was over to see Horton to-day ” bnt when yon saw that your mind 
was to jump the name, you shifted your statement so that it covered 
up the defect. This is all the time going on in the world; and few 
persons are free from such loss. In applying the method of pre¬ 
vention and cure, you should force the mind to become alert by 
fighting it out then and there in the following manner: 

“I was over to see . . . my old friend to-day.” And in your 

mind you carry on the inquiry, What is the use of telling about 
that man? Does this party want to know? What is he anyway 
to him, and why should he care to be told? Then the mind, having 
in this variety of ways asked what is the use of it, will tell you 
what is the use of it by saying that this old friend of yours was 
in the war, and he fought in such a battle and has been honored 
for it by his fellowmen, and everybody has a good word to say for 
Horton. There is his name, and so you will say aloud to your 
visitor, “You know my old friend Horton, do you not?” There 
is a sort of triumph in your tones as you make this last inquiry. 
The failure to remember has not been noticed, and this pleases you 
all the more. 

If you again have an abstraction, fight it out in the same way, 
until you have mastered the loss. Soon you will find that your mind 
does not skip ideas. Then you should take the next step, which is 
to ask the question, Can it be proved? The way it works is some¬ 
thing like this: 

“The trouble with the automobile was due to the flooding of the 
part through which the gasoline flows.” Here is a word lost; and 
it should be argued with under the first step by the inquiry. What 
is the use of it? Of what? Of telling about the flooding of the 
part that carries the gasoline through something? Is it important? 
It stopped the automobile long enough to make us lose the train. 
But does your friend care to know it? Would he know any more 
about it if you told him that the carburetor was flooding because the 
gasoline level was too high, and was caused primarily by a grain 
of sand in the needle valve, or a float that had partly become filled 
with gasoline? Anyway, the name of the part is carburetor, and 
that is enough. 

Assuming that the skip has been overcome, and that you wish to 
strengthen your mind against further losses, then learn to think 
the inquiry, Can it be proved? Think this without stopping the 


334 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


flow of general thought. The claim that a horse can think of but 
one thing at a time and that man can think of many, is not altogether 
true; but it is a fact that man is able to carry two currents of 
ideas in his conscious mind, side by side, without the aid of the 
Other Mind. Here are some of the statements that may be made 
and questions asked about them at the same time. They are taken at 
random, and merely serve to illustrate how the mind works when 
trained. Millions of other statements could be taken as well; or 
any remark that you make during your conversation with others. 

“The world is growing better.” Can it be proved? Who knows? 
Who has a right to say the world is growing better ? If it is a 
known fact, why has not someone made it more prominent as a 
means of encouraging workers for reform? Most people are finding 
fault with the idea that things are looking up, and charge the late 
spasmodic efforts as a mere wave that will soon pass. It is an im¬ 
portant question, and should be proved. But how can it be sub¬ 
stantiated ? 

You see the replies are not made. The proof is not actually 
offered; nor need it be, so that the mind is set to thinking. All 
these thoughts hover around the one statement. The world is grow¬ 
ing better. 

Here is another. 

“Honesty is the best policy.” 

Can that be proved? Is not a thing that is a policy a matter of 
deceit? If a man is honest for the mere purpose of policy, would 
he be honest if there were nothing to be gained by integrity? How 
many persons would be honest if it were not policy ? 

Here is another: 

‘“The man who hesitates is lost.” Can that be proved ? ? Is it not 
better to hesitate and be sure you are right before going ahead? 
Does not the statement mean that the man, under a narrow and 
peculiar drift of circumstances, who stops to consider the conditions, 
will lose by it, as when he is on the track and an express train is 
coming ? 

“Jones is a thief.” 

Can that be proved? Did someone see him steal? If he did, then 
is there not some explanation of the reason why he took the money ? 
Did he need it enough to have to pilfer it? Is he the victim of the 
nervous disease known as kleptomania? If no one saw Jones take 
the money, how can it be proved that he stole it? 


IN THE SILENCES 


335 


“They say that Smith, who was engaged to Miss Brown, has 
jilted her and is going to marry Miss White.” 

Can that be proved? Did Smith tell yon, or did Miss Brown tell 
you, or did Miss White tell you? If not, who did? If you heard 
it on the street the other day, did you follow the matter up and 
ascertain if Smith or Brown or White knows anything about it ? 

Here is another: 

“They say that Miss Winton has colored blood in her veins.” 

Can this be proved? Does it mean red blood, or African blood? 
If the latter, who knows that it is true? She is a very pretty girl, 
has bright ways, is of fine intellect, and enjoys a splendid reputation. 
Still if she has a drop or more of African blood in her veins, she 
must he ostracized, despite her beauty, her charms of manner, her 
brilliant mind and high moral status. Therefore it is well to obtain 
the proof before she is subjected to harsh treatment. 

The purpose of this double working of the mind is to draw atten¬ 
tion to something more than the remark. Talking is to a large 
extent an automatic habit, in which there is very little mind; and 
it is the person who is troubled with the first two silences, or either 
of them, who is the victim later on of abstraction. 

This fault is due to the automatic process by which a person can 
keep on talking while the mind does less and less thinking. The 
double process compels the mind to think more than the voice talks. 
Then there can be no such habit as automatic speech. 

Make the experiments. 

Any question will do; but those we have selected are easy to use 
in setting the mind to a running fire of ideas, and they have been 
employed in several cases with perfect results. It does not take 
long to start the double action. Nor is it a new plan. In some 
of our earlier works it is treated more extensively than here. One 
of the quickest ways to adopt this plan is to memorize some selection 
of dramatic power, which means that it is a story of human nature 
or some episode in life. After you have mastered the words, acquire 
the correct action for the proper delivery of the whole piece. You 
can make up the gestures and attitudes and the pantomime of the 
body; for it does not matter how crude all this may be if it seems 
to you to be the way of expressing the matter. Then repeat this 
selection many times. At length begin to recite it with the mind 
talking over the details all the while, and not in spoken words; just 
thoughts. 


336 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


While to you in the beginning this may seem impossible, it is 
the simplest form of double-mind action. It has been done many 
times. We have seen actors in the midst of the deepest tragedy 
play in the most comic manner, and use undertone remarks all 
the way through the delivery, interposing these secondary statements 
along with the heavier words. They seemed to enjoy the business, 
and it has been said of some, like Booth, that it was necessary in 
order to throw off the burdens of too severe tragedy. It is a relief. 

We once heard Mary Anderson, in the midst of her greatest scene 
on the stage, in which she was in the arms of her lover, say to him, 
“Get off my foot,” without stopping the flow of the great thoughts, 
as far as the audience was concerned. These four words can be 
spoken while the voice is at the ordinary stop in the usual groups 
that are made in the delivery of the lines, and need scarce a second. 

To any person who wishes to test the power of this double process 
in restoring the energy of the mind to maintain its hold on all that 
enters it, there is nothing in the whole range of training to equal 
it in fruitful results. 

It is not difficult, except to start. It is within the possibility of 
every person of intelligence. 

The peculiar fact connected with abstraction is the loss of one 
word, while the rest of the statement is fully in the mind. The 
latter may be active and even strong, and yet the word will drop out. 
Later on, two words will slip away; then three; and finally the 
disease will be known as failing memory. 

But the failing of the memory refers always to some idea of old, 
that has faded off; it is not the dropping out of a strong statement 
of one word; but the hazy or faded fact that was once known but 
is now gone. The common case of the man who is told by his wife 
in the morning to mail a letter, and he brings it back with him at 
night, is not loss of memory, or abstraction; but mere lack of atten¬ 
tion. There is no reason why the mind should either remember or 
forget the letter. The man has not given the same degree of attention 
to that fact as he has to the debtor who owes him some money and 
who has promised to pay him that day. The latter fact claims his 
attention in sufficient strength to hold his mind to it; and he calls 
on the debtor for the money. Had he been the victim of failing 
memory, he would have forgotten one matter as readily as the other. 

You once knew the dates of all the great battles of the world if 
you studied history; now you can state the dates of less than a dozen; 


IN THE SILENCES 


337 


possibly not more than three. They have slipped away. Nearly 
every such fact fades in time; but the mind is not expected to recall 
them, and there are few persons among those who could once state 
such things with exactness, who to-day have them in mind. There¬ 
fore the tendency of the brain is to give up its details. 

Yet in spite of this tendency, it is true that the few great events 
that live in the mind have been recalled time and time again until 
they have been doubled on, and have been thereby given new strength. 
The things out of your past life that you most clearly remember 
have been thought over many times until they are fresh as the last 
thoughts given them; while all else has gone out forever, only to 
be found again in the Other Mind. That function never gives up 
anything for good. Its knowledge may touch the outer edge of the 
conscious mind and be thereby recognized, but it is not lost to 
the psychic realm. Nothing there fades. 

This brings us to the next silence. 

9. The ninth silence is that of inattention. It has just been said 
that the man who is given his wife ; s letter in the morning to mail 
when he goes down town, and who brings that selfsame letter back 
in his coat pocket, is not guilty of loss of memory, but of inattention. 
He may be asked if he mailed it, and he will possibly reply: 

“If you gave it to me I certainly mailed it.” 

He is not sure that she gave it to him. He might have been in 
a lapse of mind when he got it, and thus have taken it automatically, 
with no realization of receiving it; but this is not often the case. 
He simply was thinking of something else and did not fix his atten¬ 
tion on the episode in the morning. It was a dream to him. Had 
he placed the letter in his cigar pocket, and then found it there 
in the middle of the forenoon, he would have looked at the address, 
and surmised that the letter was intended to be mailed, as it was 
in his wife’s handwriting, and she had sometimes given him a letter 
to mail. 

Children have this habit of inattention; and the fact that they 
outgrow it and develop strong minds in some cases, shows that it is 
not a sign of decadence. Forgetful husbands will appreciate this 
explanation. 

How to overcome it in children in the shortest possible time is 
one of the problems of teachers in the public schools. Whipping 
does not seem to remedy the trouble. So the wife who scolds the 
husband does not better him very much. The best method is that 


338 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


which will set the double action of the mind at work. Wives have, 
by the use of sarcasm, brought their husbands to a proper degree of 
attention. In Harvard University, during a valuable but rather 
dry lecture, the students were in the habit of engaging in whispered 
conversation, which the lecturer had remarked upon several times 
without effect. On one occasion he stopped and said: 

“Young gentlemen, if my lecture should at any time interfere 
with your private conversation, I will gladly suspend it until you 
have finished.” 

This set them to thinking doubly; primarily of what he was saying; 
and secondarily of the effect his remarks would have on the students. 
Those who had been whispering, wondered what the others thought 
of their being made the butt of sarcasm; and those who had not been 
whispering at that time, wondered what effect the sarcasm would 
have on those who were suspected of the breach of good manners. 

A man who had twenty young women in his office, whose services 
he valued, but who had acquired the talking habit after a very flashy 
miss had come into the work and been discharged, cautioned them 
about their new made habit, but to very little effect. Then he 
put up the following sign: 

“All clerks who wish to remain in my employ and who are unable 
to resist the habit of talking while at work will be promoted by 
coming to me and frankly stating the fact. Those who do not 
wish to do this, will be assigned a special period after working hours 
each day in which they are to meet and remove the talking germs 
from their systems.” 

One of the young women thought she would seek the promotion, 
which involved the confession that she could not help talking. She 
was then given a vacation of six months without pay, a much needed 
rest; at the end of which time she came back older and wiser, but 
at the foot of the list. This promotion deterred the others, and 
the talking ceased; but only after the clerks had come to the em¬ 
ployer and asked to have the offensive notice taken down. He did 
this on receiving the written agreement of each clerk to take a 
reduction in wages if she indulged in unnecessary talk again during 
working hours. They stopped talking. 

The principle involved is an important one. 

The double working of the mind is appealed to in the familiar 
notice which almost every town and city has had placed up some¬ 
where in its limits: 


IN THE SILENCES 


339 


“Gentlemen will not spit here; all others are forbidden by law to 
do so.” 

The above notice, or something of similar import, which is so 
frequently seen, contains the double effort to arouse the mind. It 
has had the effect to compel the man who reads it to ask himself 
if he is a gentleman, and this is an idea back of an idea. It sets in 
motion the fundamental fact that a man who is of decent manners 
will not spit on the places where others are to walk, especially ladies. 
The real intent of the notice is to stop that filthy habit. As it is 
useless to ask a boor to stop it, something more must be done. Signs 
fail to attract attention if they have but one idea in them, or but 
one set of ideas; it is the thought within the thought that counts 
value in holding the attention of the reader. 

A master in a high school who was not able to arouse interest in 
a class in botany, resorted to this same method, by telling the students 
that there was a certain leaf which was the- only formation of its 
kind that had survived the great geological revolution hundreds of 
thousands of years ago. He had them hunting for it, and this one 
incident aroused an interest in the study. 

In like vein another teacher who found history a dull theme with 
his classes, assigned a very dry lesson and added: “In the statement 
of the recorded events, there is a hidden meaning of the author 
which has come to light under recent analysis of his writings. I wish 
to know to-morrow how many of you will be able to find this hidden 
meaning.” They all tried, and some found one thing, and some 
another. The mind, while making an effort to grasp the facts of 
history, was doing double thinking, and it paid. 

The attention is always fixed in a wholesome and healthful way 
by this double use; and it is the key to the development of a strong 
mind. It is also a tool in the hands of skilful speakers, teachers, 
lawyers, doctors, and all business and professional men; and is used 
to carry on the subtle and dangerous work known as wakeful hypno¬ 
tism, when combined with the least degree, or any degree, of magnet¬ 
ism. It serves to take the place of the higher forms of magnetic 
control. 

Through the silences we have thus worked our way up to this 
method of wakeful magnetism; and, without the present cycle, it 
would be difficult to understand the next. 


340 


TWENTY-THIRD CYCLE 


m 


WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 



E KNOW not when some mind 
May hold us in its power 
Though we ourselves believe 
The mastery is ours 
And what we yield we give 
Most willing away. 


S HAS been frequently stated, this is an age of hypno¬ 
tism. Moreover it is distinctly and decidedly an age 
of hypnotism. Men and women are learning the art; 
nearly all of them in a clumsy and half-efficient man¬ 
ner. A physician who nses this power for the purpose 
of curing disease, and who has been very successful, states that he 
has seen more than a hundred men and many women attempt hypno¬ 
tism; that on an average they had no less than a dozen subjects each; 
and that not one of them was able to use the power either safely or 
judiciously. From other sources has come the information that the 
beginner in this kind of practice does much harm; and that there 
are experimenters who are seeking experience without fit preparation 
for it. The fault to be found is in two particulars: 

1. These operators have not equipped themselves with the necessary 
knowledge of the best and most direct methods to be employed. 

2. They are not cognizant of the dangers attending careless control 
of the will power of others. They even ridicule the suggestion of 
danger. 

In addition to the injuries that follow such carelessness, there is 
the fact that the Tapid increase in the public use of hypnotism is 
resulting in the half-degree of influence that is more widespread to¬ 
day than ever before in the history of humanity. 

By referring back to the cycle that taught hypnotism it will be 
seen that the First Degree is one that is attended by full conscious- 









WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 


341 


ness and full wakefulness, except that the subject feels a little drowsy, 
or has an inclination to sleep. In the First Degree there are some 
characteristics that are peculiar: 

1. The subject is fully conscious. 

2 . He has not the slightest idea that he is under hypnotic in¬ 
fluence, and stoutly denies it when so informed. 

3. The operator is not always sure of his control or that he has 
even brought the subject to the First Degree. This fact has been 
demonstrated in hundreds of cases among operators with their early 
attempts. They have abandoned the efforts as useless, in the belief 
that they could not induce as much as the First Degree; while, as a 
matter of fact, their subjects are already under that stage of control. 
The result has been that thousands of men and women have gone 
out in that state and have been a long time, in some instances, in 
reaching a normal state again. 

4. Many persons in a mood of playfulness have sought to hypnotize. 
Only a short time ago, a young woman said to several young men, 
“I can hypnotize all of you. May I try it?” She was joking, and 
did not know that some persons are exceedingly susceptible; the 
result being that the third young man she tried to put to sleep, fell 
into the First Degree. 

“He is fooling,” said one of the others. 

The young woman thought it true that he was pretending; but 
he seemed very serious, so she tried to carry the joke farther, and 
soon he was in the Third Degree. When she found that she could 
not awaken him, she screamed and ran for a doctor. It was hours 
before he was restored to normal wakefulness. 

In a group of a hundred men, a novice would find several who could 
be put into hypnotic sleep; while an expert would find over ninety 
who would be controlled sooner or later, and made to pass beyond the 
First Degree. Women would yield a larger percentage, possibly 
ninety-eight out of a hundred being susceptible. 

When one person in a group is hypnotized, others are more easily 
subjected to the same influence. We can cite case after case where 
an expert physician allows his patients, especially those who have 
never been hypnotized, to sit where they can see the process and the 
ease with which others are subjected to this influence. The result is 
that he finds several in each group already in the First Degree, al¬ 
though they do not realize it. 

This fact is of the highest importance. 


342 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


It can be verified by asking any doctor who makes use of the 
art, unless, for reasons that may be deemed politic, he may not like 
to have the fact known. But it is published broadcast in works, 
magazines and other forms; and is known to be one of the most po¬ 
tent factors in the practice. 

It has been said by one of the most capable experts in this practice 
that a mass of people can easily be thrown into a half-degree by the 
application of the same principle. 

EASE OF THE HALF-DEGREE INFLUENCE. 

1. It does not require manipulation. 

2. It does not require the dulling of the eyes by the use of any 
bright object. The intense fire of the magnetic eye is not needed in 
this work, nor any method which will cause drowsiness. In the 
ordinary uses of hypnotism, it is always necessary to produce some 
feeling of heaviness at the eyes. 

3. It does not impress the subject as an attempt to hypnotize. 

4. The user of this subtle power may be heard only; or he may 
depend on ideas that are conveyed by letter or in writing, although 
the latter methods are much more difficult than words spoken to 
the ears, and assisted in some way by holding the gaze of the listen¬ 
ers. 

5. We have found that whole juries, whole congregations, whole 
audiences, whole groups large and small, have been controlled by this 
power known as wakeful hypnotism; and in addition to this fact, 
it has also been proved that individuals are to-day being swayed 
by it to a greater extent than ever before. 

Since the will of human beings ceased to be swayed by the use 
of force, it has been the custom of people to take advantage of 
their liberty and seek mastery, fair or unfair, by mental efforts 
alone. We have just stepped, as a people in entirety, into this use 
of the freedom of the mind with which to obtain control over others; 
land hence this has become an age of influence, the latest phase of 
which is to employ the new powers in an open encounter. 

While this deals with what may be called the half-degree of hypno¬ 
tism, and should properly be classed among the earlier cycles of this 
work, it is founded on the silences which could not be described 
until they had been approached through a certain range of cycles in 
order that their principles might be understood; so that the logical 
position in this study is after the account of the silences. 


WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 


343 


We must start with a realization of the seriousness of the situation 
that faces the civilized world to-day. When might made right, 
the weaker physically were compelled to succumb to the stronger. 
To-day if the man with the gun is able to hold up the man with the 
money, the latter must pay; and this is about all that is left of the 
old law of might compelling right. 

The shifting of the means of preying on the property and liberty 
of others has led to the skilful invention of the use of the mind as 
the weapon of warfare. In this use there is one word that conveys 
a world of meaning and power, the strongest word in the language 
to-day, and the one word that is almost resistless. It is: 

SUGGESTION. 

This is employed in all the degrees of control. 

1. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the First Degree. 

2. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the Second Degree. 

3. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the Third Degree. 

4. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the Fourth Degree. 

5. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the Fifth Degree. 

6. Suggestion is used when the subject is in the Sixth Degree. 

7 . Suggestion is used when the subject is being influenced before 
passing into any degree, as a means of bringing him under control. 

8. Suggestion is used when the subject, having been put by it into 
a hypnotic sleep, is awakened in that sleep and controlled in thought 
and action. 

9. Suggestion is used during sleep that is natural, and at the time 
when sleep is coming on. 

10. Suggestion is used by the person who seeks to bring on a state 
of conscious emptying of the mind, and to cause the Other Mind to 
take up ideas for the advantage of the individual. 

11. Suggestion is used in full wakefulness when one person wishes 
to control the will or the inclinations of another. 

12. Suggestion is used by any person who is brought under some 
belief or expectation to such an extent that the mind’s attention is 
absolutely held by it. This is known as auto-suggestion, and is very 
common to-day, as it has always been in the past. 

The last named form of suggestion is illustrated by the methods 
of the old healers who used to travel from one city to another in 
the past centuries; and who are now found only in remote countries. 
Their coming was heralded weeks ahead. How they would come was 



344 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


known by the elaborate preparations. Outriders, following advance 
couriers, excited the liveliest feelings of expectation. Stories of mar¬ 
velous cures, called miracles, were circulated. The growing power 
of the healer was not forgotten, if his agents could be trusted to tell 
the truth. The sick, always hopeful and susceptible, were quite as 
much under the sway of their own suggestion as that of the healer. 
The latter need only appear to complete the work. He could tell 
those who were subjects to hypnotic power, which of course was a 
part of his methods, and these he took in hand and actually accom¬ 
plished good; but those who, as he surveyed the masses, were not likely 
to become ready subjects, he let touch the garment he wore, or 
touched them with his hand; and many of them were benefited. 
In such cases the power of self-suggestion achieved the results. 
There is no doubt that cures are effected in such way, and are 
wholly due to auto-suggestion. There is no doubt that the medicines 
that are in fact worthless, accomplish cures in the cases of people 
who are thoroughly convinced in their efficacy; unless, as in the case 
of the patent medicines now on the market, there are alcohol, cocaine, 
and other deadly enslaving drugs that will turn the individual into a 
confirmed wreck in a short time. 

Every reputable physician can tell you of countless instances where 
harmless pills, mere-nothing-medicines and similar tricks have pro¬ 
duced remarkable cures by the same principle of auto-suggestion. 

To have a convincing and unshakable belief or faith in anything 
or any person will bring revolution into the body and into the mind. 
It all depends on the thoroughness of the belief or the faith. More 
than four thousand years ago it was asserted that faith in anything 
whether through religious channels or otherwise, if absolute, would 
accomplish any end desired. This has always been true, and it is 
true to-day. 

Suggestion, therefore, must inspire belief. 

But it is not easy to catch belief. The ignorant, having run up 
against the bitter experiences of their own recklessness, are on the 
lookout for more trickery. They are mastered by two influences only 
in large measure now, and that is in the use of nostrums and the 
claims of political demagogues. In nearly all else they refuse to 
believe unless it is inexpensive, like gossip that damages the repu¬ 
tation of their fellow beings, or yellow journalism that is only a 
muddier form of gossip; the sewerage being in greater volume, or 
spread out over more ground. 


WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 


345 


The wiser minds are still more difficult to sway by the mere 
agency or belief. Yet in all cases the belief must be caught before 
any control, hypnotic or open, can be exercised effectively. This may 
then be set down as the first point. 

Disbelief is a resistance of the mind. 

There can be no resistance as long as there is no definite thought. 
To-day the effort to capture belief that is against one’s inclinations, 
is met by the definite thought that there is a motive for the asser¬ 
tion, and here we have the function of double-ideas that was the 
climax of the cycle just preceding this. 

As long as a person is able to maintain this double process of 
thinking, so long will it be impossible to exercise any form of control 
over him. Take a few examples as instances: 

1. A man is asked to buy something he wants. If he can get it 
of one person at a lower price than is charged by another, he will buy 
it of the former, all other things being equal. If the latter is to 
secure the sale, he must instill a secondary idea in the mind of the 
buyer, and to-day that is the problem of merchants who seek good 
prices. The natural appeal is to a belief in better quality as a basis 
of the increased cost. 

2. A man is asked to buy something he does not know whether hu 
wants or not. The vendor must prove to him that he really wants it, 
and show the advantage of an immediate purchase. This is hard to 
do, but it is being done right along. 

3. A man is asked to buy something that he knows he does not 
want and will never need. The vendor has a still more difficult task, 
and must prove to the man that he can turn the ownership of the 
thing to a future advantage. Even this is being done every day some¬ 
where, and men are being bitten. 

4. A lawyer is called upon to defend a man who is charged with a 
crime. The proof is absolute. There is no defense. The lawyer, in 
order to secure a verdict of acquittal, must make the jury believe that 
the man had legal justification for his deed. Here is found the most 
difficult of all conditions; yet the juries are brought about through 
the skilful handling of the facts, and the substitution of other matters 
that are not facts. 

The peg called “reasonable doubt” is the one on which most 
cases are miscarried. Before the lawyer gets through he will make 
the jury wonder what is a reasonable doubt, and in the end they will 
entertain a reasonable doubt as to their ability to understand what is 


346 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


meant by it; and this is sufficient to bring about an acquittal. Most 
prosecutors have not yet learned that their strongest fight must be 
on this point. They say a few words on the subject and leave the 
rest to the court, the opposing counsel and the jury. But, in order 
to want to release the defendant on the point of reasonable doubt, 
the jurors must have a secondary motive. Skilful lawyers furnish 
this in many ways. If the case can be brought to near the close of a 
day preceding a holiday, especially Christmas, few juries want to 
make a man a present of a conviction. It is the mellow time of 
the year. One defendant had been released on bail, and sat close to 
his lawyer. His little boy, with innocent childish face, sat close to 
his father and his tiny hand was held in the defendant’s. What 
man on the jury wanted to send the father to jail or to a death 
sentence? So the presence of an aged father or mother, or wife, 
or daughter of the criminal, will serve to side-track justice. The 
men in the box think of the effect of their verdicts on others, and 
this double-action of the mind is a power which enables them to re¬ 
sist the appeal of the prosecuting attorney. 

In antagonism, where two or more persons seek the will-power of 
any one, it is the purpose to set up this resistance in the mind. But 
it requires the other process of completely diverting the attention in 
order to plant the seeds of mastery. 

If the attorney for the plaintiff seeks to sway the jury against the 
defendant, he must carry on two victories in one: 

He must bring the minds of the jurors into the ninth silence, 
which is inattention; and then must set up the double process in 
place of that condition, so that they will form a fixed resistance to 
the demands and appeals that will be made to their judgment by the 
attorney for the defense. 

Almost every human being to-day is looking for motive. If you 
want a favor, or seek to buy or sell something, or ask the attention 
of a person to any plan that you have, there will at once be set up in 
the mind of that person a demand for a motive. There will come 
in one way or another the inquiry, What is the use of it, or the reason 
for it, or the good of it? “I will sell you something for less than 
it cost me,” is a common offer, or its equivalent. “But why should 
it be sold for less than cost? How can I be made to know that fact? 
How can it be proved?” As long as the other party is allowed to 
busy his mind with these inquiries, he is in a state of resistance that 
cannot be overcome by the transaction itself; and the purpose is then 


WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 


347 


to throw the mind out of one of these double-ideas. When this is 
done, the control soon follows. 

Motive and proof are everywhere the two agencies of resistance 
to your efforts to master the minds of others; that is, there will be 
the seeking of the motive, and the wanting to know how much truth 
there is in the general offer or statement. These two inquiries 
were paramount in the last cycle, and they always will remain so in 
life, no matter what may be the exact wording of the questions. 

Until you are able to recognize the supremacy of these two de¬ 
mands on the part of others, you will never realize the steps that are 
necessary to break down their power. People automatically study 
what you say, ask themselves automatically why you say it, or what 
is the use of it, and then wonder how much of it is true. They thus 
become resistant without fixed purpose, unless they are in rapport 
with you. 

There seems to be no absolutely neutral ground. 

1. All persons are automatically resistant. 

2. Or are purposely resistant. 

3. Or are in rapport. 

A person who is in rapport is always controlled. To bring about 
this condition where it does not already exist, is the work of either 
hypnotism, by manipulation, hypnotism in wakefulness without ma¬ 
nipulation, or magnetism. 

It is this middle, or second, method that is claiming our attention 
now. Some persons become in rapport, or sympathetic harmony, on 
meeting. Two gentlemen often find themselves perfectly agreeable 
at the very first word, and neither has a selfish or ulterior motive. 
To presume upon such mutual liking by an attempt to become a 
master, either of the other would probably set up resistance, and 
the feeling of harmony would be dissipated before control was se¬ 
cured. Two persons of opposite sexes often meet and are in this 
sympathetic harmony at the very start of their acquaintance. In 
order to obtain control of it is necessary that one shall deal with the 
other so carefully that there is no mental resistance. 

It is only a stupid man who proposes and is rejected. The evidence 
of rapport is so plain that it requires no skill to read it. A woman 
who is distant in her treatment of the man who is wooing her, is not 
suited to become his wife. If both love each other in full sincerity, 
there is the natural course of events; the touch of hands, the rest¬ 
ing voluntarily of the smaller hand in the larger, the arm at the 


348 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


waist, the lips in exchange of the deeper feeling; and that is the 
most conclusive of answers. If she does not know whether she loves 
him or not, the first step should tell the story; withdraw the hand. 
If she is partly of the opinion that she will become his wife, and yet 
has her doubts on the subject, though not strong in resistance, she 
should make that fact clear before giving herself to his caresses, how¬ 
ever slight they may be. If she is shallow, then he would capture 
her to his liking and pass on to some new flirtation. 

The novelty at first of the close attentions of a man, takes away 
the ordinary resistance. If she has a fixed dislike for him, she will 
become purposely resistant. Some women outgrow such a start in 
friendship with a man; but it takes years, and she is then generally 
a left-over who will make the best marriage available. There are 
many women who have turned down good offers of marriage; then, 
having approached the age of thirty, or passed it, have looked over 
the men who were early proposers, and taken the one that seemed most 
available; generally a widower. Such cases are frequent. And most 
of these women settle down in the belief that they love their husbands, 
and are happy. They make excellent wives as a rule; but it seems 
that marriage is more of a business than a love affair. 

The reason why they rejected their first proposals is because they 
were resistant. They thought behind the friendship, and asked 
themselves mentally the questions. How much is he worth? Can he 
support a wife ? Can I hold him at a distance while making a bid for 
some one higher up in the financial scale, or one who is better look¬ 
ing, or one who has a brighter future ? They were not in rapport. 

A woman of great beauty quickly stops the ordinary type of man 
from double thinking. He has but one idea, and that is to win her 
favor. He ceases to be resistant. Such a woman is able to make a 
long line of conquests, and even to gather in financial assistance if 
she can preserve the fascination. It often happens that a man is 
awakened to double thinking and becomes resistant when there is an 
attempt to make use of beauty for gain, even with no immoral ends 
in view. 

A case in point is that of a club of wealthy bachelors who had 
resolved never to marry, but who were made the butt of a practical 
joke. An actress, young in her profession, but of the most delicious 
ways, was engaged under contract to make herself friendly with this 
club under a professional appearance in one of the club’s entertain¬ 
ments. Another actress, about fifteen years older, but very demure 


WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 


349 


and gentle in her ways, appeared as the mother and chaperon of 
the fair maiden, and never left her presence. They were cautioned 
to carry on the plans so as to excite the greatest admiration for their 
modesty. Both were married, and their husbands knew of the joke. 

'This young woman was as beautiful as a young woman could be. 
The instant the eyes rested on her, all thoughts flew to the four 
winds of the sky. She was gracious, demure, slightly alert, and full 
of a bright interest in all around her. The bachelors were completely 
swayed out of their senses for a while. Now came her finesse, for 
which she was employed and paid a large sum. Still in the pres¬ 
ence of her chaperon she showed special interest in each of the men 
who came to speak with her in the social chat which followed. They 
came singly and in groups, and on each she beamed in such a 
way as to make him say to himself, “I am the one.” Some asked 
who she was, directing their inquiries to the member who had been 
put in the secret; and he replied that she was a very young miss, 
not over seventeen, who had been to school and just graduated, wealthy 
in her own right, an orphan, and one totally unfamiliar with the 
world. The chaperon, her mother to all intents and purposes, re¬ 
ferred inadvertently to her wealth and standing; and this supposed 
mother smiled and beamed on all the men in turn, and made each 
think he was the one who would be favored. 

It is said to be a fact that every one of these bachelors would have 
proposed had the maiden not disappeared into total oblivion after that 
event. Thus many men, some married and some single, are carried 
away by beauty. We recall a meeting in a committee room where 
all the heaviest problems under grave consideration were sent out of 
mind by the appearance of a very sweet and pretty miss of eighteen. 
Not one of the men could give a coherent statement of what had been 
said in the session before she entered. 

It is said of a lawyer that he employed his daughter as his stenog¬ 
rapher because she was fond of the legal atmosphere. She was very 
beautiful and, during the trials in court when she was merely a vis¬ 
itor, she appeared dressed in the height of fashion and taste, sitting 
behind him, and unknown to the jury. In one case the title of a 
home was in dispute, and the lawyer on the other side continually re¬ 
ferred to an old man, his client, as having all his life savings involved 
in the issue. This attorney, whose daughter was a spectator at the 
trial, saw that sympathy was being used in the effort to win, so 
he suddenly, without the slightest premeditation in that part of his 


350 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


argument where he was seeking to undo the pressure brought to 
bear on the jury, turned to the beautiful maiden, who dropped her 
head in half fear as she saw the act, and said: “Gentlemen, I will 
not appeal to your sympathies. The facts are before you, and they 
alone must sway your mind. If I had a poor case with no hope of 
winning your verdict, I would tell you of the suffering that will 
come to this young girl if you take her home from her. But I disdain 
to make such a suggestion.” From that time to the end of the appeal, 
the men in the box had many eyes for the girl, and she was visibly 
pleased at the attention, the joke lighting up her face until it beamed 
on the twelve men. When they went out and returned, one of the 
jurors gave a very sly wink at the miss, and this told that beauty 
had won once more. Another of the jurors, after the court had ad¬ 
journed for the term, said that he “could not see that girl thrown out 
into the cold world.” 

Thus the psychic principle tells us that some specific atttraction 
either in thought, or person, or object, will overcome resistance and 
compel the mind to work in one thought only; and that thought is 
the fixed attention to the single idea. The idea, not being the one that 
is furnished by the mind itself, but by some outer influence or some 
other mind, absorbs the full powers of thought, and here is the state 
of wakeful hypnotism. There are two steps in this process: 

1. The absorption of the mind of another person. 

2. The filling of that mind by some suggestion strong enough to 
make resistance impossible. 

These two steps assume that the magnetism is not powerful enough 
to directly'win the will of the other party. The difference between 
magnetism and hypnotism is this: 

1. Magnetism wins by its compelling power which uplifts the per¬ 
son won and draws him to the plane of influence of the winner. It 
is a charm, an inspiration, a noble attraction. 

2. Hypnotism stills and depresses and then substitutes suggestion 
for the will of the subject. It seems to make a hole in the mind of 
the other party. It is opposite to magnetism. The latter is a fair 
fight for supremacy carried on in an open field, with the two parties 
moving onward and upward together. Hypnotism is dark and empty 
except as the suggestion of the controller becomes the will of the 
controlled. 

Never forget that hypnotism and magnetism are exactly opposite 
each other; both in method and in fairness. Magnetism never re- 


WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 


351 


sort to tricks or deception. Hypnotism cannot exist without some 
form of trickery and deception. 

We have shown a few of the ways in which the mind or attention of 
another person may be absorbed. Suggestion is the main theme of 
this entire volume, and what it means and is, can be seen by reading 
almost any of the cycles. 

To one skilled in absorbing the minds of listeners in all the pro¬ 
fessions and in all departments of life, there are certain stock ideas 
that are in use. These may be seen by attending court trials where 
great lawyers, or advocates, are at work over juries. Some of these 
attorneys win nine cases out of ten. We looked up the record of a 
certain lawyer and found that in the 200 cases he had tried before 
juries in the higher courts, he had won 192; a remarkable showing. 
He actually swayed jurymen by wakeful hypnotism, and when once 
his methods were understood, they were merely a stock in trade. We 
called the attention of the judge to this fact; and, at his request, we 
spent an evening of several hours going over the methods, having 
some of the stenographic reports of remarks and speeches to refer 
to in the conversation. The judge was amazed. In the next trial at 
which this lawyer appeared, the judge kept pace with his methods and 
made it impossible for them to succeed. Three years afterwards the 
same judge told us that he had successfully interfered with the subtle 
arts of a number of lawyers who had great power over the jury; and 
he said, "I am satisfied that wakeful hypnotism is used.” 

One has only to follow the courts in any part of the land to find 
this fact verified. 

Congregations in church are often swayed in this way. They do 
not seem to be under direct hypnotic control as has been charged 
in the cases of several of the most famous clergymen of America, but 
they are in the power of wakeful hypnotism. One preacher told us 
after a sermon, “I can tell when I am to draw a large contribution 
from the people. I have the collection taken after the sermon on 
this account. I generally succeed in controlling them, and when 
I have them well in hand, I feel it most distinctly in the pulpit. 
There is the stillness, the leaning forward of my listeners, the rapt 
attention, the open mouth, and the fixed gaze. Then, bringing my 
address quickly to a close, the collection is taken and is large.” On 
the other hand, a personal friend in the congregation, when asked 
if he realized this power, said: “I have often felt that our minister 
held us in his control; sometimes fixedly. Then the church seems 


352 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


dark to me, my mind is in a black hole, and I think only what he 
thinks. But I am free to say that I would not have observed my 
condition had I not been watchful of myself; and, in most of this 
influence, I lose my recollection of what is going on within me.” 

This is a common experience. 

A man of standing wrote us that there was a preacher in a great 
city who actually had his hearers in a hypnotic condition. We went 
on to the church and was present during two sermons. The clergy¬ 
man had startling facts that were of all-absorbing interest and that 
completely swamped the minds of his audience. He had evidently 
been hunting up these facts, and knew the kind that would overwhelm 
the attention of those who listened. And he succeeded. We had all 
we could do to keep up resistance by the method of double-thinking. 
We continually said to ourselves: This minister has hunted far and 
wide for his gigantic facts. He has led up to them in a masterly 
way in the arrangement of his ideas, and he knows he is using them 
to get hold of the minds of others. He knows it every minute. He 
realizes how far he is succeeding. He can measure his progress in 
this form of wakeful hypnotism. Is he honest to do so? 

These were our secondary thoughts while listening to the main ideas 
of his sermons. As long as we could keep up this double-thinking, 
we were safe. 

We have in the past fifteen years listened to no less than eight 
preachers who hold their congregations by the same influence, wak¬ 
ing hypnotism. There are others, probably a hundred or more in 
this coiflitry, who have the same power. The test is in the attitudes 
and faces of the listeners. A photograph would disclose the fact 
whether or not there is this control. 

The physicians of the highest grades of practice, as far as success 
is concerned, make use of the same power, and deem it necessary to 
do so for the good of their patients. 

Great generals send their soldiers to battle and victory under the 
spell of some all-powerful idea, which is infused into the officers and 
sometimes directly in the minds of the men themselves by the leader. 
At the turning point of the conflict a new idea is made to seize the 
men, and they rally as if by magic. 

But it is in the quieter walks of life that this power is most 
employed, and its rules are now well fixed. These will be stated here. 
They are based on the summary of what has been taught in this and 
the preceding cycle, and other essentials added to complete them: 


WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 


353 


RULES OE PROCEDURE IN' WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM. 

Rule One: —The subject has no way of detecting the effort to 
use wakeful hypnotism, unless he is familiar with its process; and 
this state of mind must be maintained. 

Rule Two :—If he is in single-thinking, the attention may be 
distracted by simple efforts; but if in double-thinking, or if he 
passes from single to double-thinking during the effort, it will re¬ 
quire a stronger attempt to dislodge his thoughts, and this is done 
by the skilful injection of an idea of all-absorbing interest, one 
capable of throwing him off his attention and emptying his mind 
of his own thoughts. The attempt to distract his own thoughts and 
to absorb his attention, must be wholly concealed by the reasonable¬ 
ness of the change of ideas; and the new attention must be based 
on a new idea having a degree of strength corresponding to the 
necessities of the case. 

Rule Three: —As the purpose of the subjected idea is only to 
absorb the attention, it must be followed by the suggestions required 
to command the will power of the subject. The strong idea, there¬ 
fore, is merely the stepping stone to the real process. 

Rule Four: —As there is generally a period of time available for 
the effort, as in conversation or address,, the voice of the speaker 
should be gradually shifted from the prevailing to the controlling 
tones; and this shift should occur between the injection of the strong 
idea and the beginning of the suggestion. 

All the rules except the last one have been in use from the be¬ 
ginning of time, and being a phase of human nature, have not been 
understood. But the users of them have had the purpose, cunning 
or otherwise, to control the subjects. The fourth rule adds a scien¬ 
tific value to what is clearly a natural and oft-used process. This 
will necessitate a complete course of training in the development of 
the Controlling Voice, which is sometimes called the hypnotic tone, 
but in fact is the voice of the Other Mind. As the training should 
be thorough and absolutely complete, the whole of the next cycle 
will be devoted to it. 

As an example of one use that may be made of this method, we 
will take only a typical case as a means of illustrating the process. 

The subject, we will say, is addicted to the use of cigarettes, and 
is not easily influenced to give up the habit. He will not listen to 
advice. When he is approached on the subject, he sets his mind 


354 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


against all suggestion. He naturally takes to double-thinking, never 
having been taught it. All persons do this kind of thinking if they 
think there is some motive in the other party. This young man, 
when talked to on the habit, would think to himself that the speaker 
was trying to pull the wool over his eyes and to preach to him, all 
the while listening respectfully. This is double-thinking and it re¬ 
sists all attempts to secure control. 

The effort must first be made to empty his mind of this double 
action. The ideas must be shifted by the injection of something that 
will be all-absorbing to him. If the fearful consequences of the 
habit are told, he will do still more double-thinking, as the scheme is 
too thin. But if he is known to have some great ambition, or some 
desire, or would be entranced by some prospect, as that of a trip to 
Europe with expenses paid, and a trifling salary added, then some 
stranger, employed for the purpose, might come upon him apparently 
by accident and ask him for the names of some young men about 
his age, who would like such an opportunity. This would com¬ 
pletely absorb the attention. All resistance would fly. The mind 
would think only of the one idea. Then the voice, shifting gradually 
to the controlling tones, would be able to carry the suggestions of 
wakeful hypnotism, in which a statement like the following would be 
completely veiled: 

“I will be back here in about a month. I presume that you can¬ 
not go on this trip; but you may hear of a young man who would 
like it. Pick out some one for me, a young man of good habits. 
We do not want one that swears, or drinks, or gambles, or is addicted 
to the cigarette habit, as that takes away the mind and the vitality 
of the fellow. We want a manly young man, such as you seem to 
be.” Etc. 

This is merely a case stated to show the steps of the process; but 
the experiments that have actually been made in this line of control 
have brought the results that are desired. It can be used with one 
person, with two, or with a group, as well as with a large number. 
There is no limit to the latter, as eight thousand people have fallen 
under its influence at one meeting. 

Mnny ingenious collections of strong ideas have been made, each 
suited to special conditions; and it is amazing how many may be 
formulated. 

In order to make the study of wakeful hypnotism a complete course, 
the next cycle will be joined to this and the preceding cycle. 


355 


TWENTY-FOURTH CYCLE 

THE CONTROLLING VOICE j| 


OME TONES there are that sway 
The mind as with a rod 
So deep and full they seem 
And wondrous in their sound, 

Charged with assertiveness 
Bespeaking royal power . 

F ALL the wonders of the age of discovery, that which 
will stand for centuries as the most astonishing is the 
production of the Controlling Voice. It has, in part 
usage, been employed in hypnotism, but by mere 
chance; and, where it has been recognized, it has been 
hypnotic voice. Even then it has not been a scientific 
acquisition, for the users of it have not had a clear idea of what it 
was, how it was produced, or its connection with the psychic realm. 
Before this cycle ends it will be seen that it is capable of being culti¬ 
vated or created by every person, and that it holds a direct relation¬ 
ship with the Other Mind. 

When these two great facts became known, steps at once were taken 
to put it to every kind of proof and test; and, the more the investiga¬ 
tion was developed, the greater were the results. 

There is now not the slightest doubt that the Controlling Voice is 
the voice of the Other Mind. As its basis is made up of the tones 
employed at haphazard by hypnotists of the greatest skill, and also 
involves the tones that have been called the soul's voice by expert 
trainers of vocal culture, it is seen at the beginning that it is a natural 
attribute. 

There are two steps in this work of development: 

1. The voice must be created. 

2. The voice must be applied. 

It is not possible to describe it except by the method that is em¬ 
ployed in creating it. All the way along this process the character 



termed the 





356 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


of the tones will be gradually made familiar until every one is 
able to recognize what it is. 

This includes a complete course of training for the purpose of de¬ 
veloping the Controlling Voice; as set forth in this cycle. 

It is called controlling because it actually does influence the per¬ 
sons who hear it. It influences them even when wakeful hypnotism 
is not used; hut its mission is to accompany that process, and to begin 
to operate when the strong idea has been injected, and to be con¬ 
tinued up to the time when suggestion becomes a supreme possibility. 
Let these steps be fixed in the mind, as laid down in the two pre¬ 
ceding cycles: 

WAKEFUL HYPNOTISM 

may be summed up as consisting of the following steps: 

1. The injection of the strong idea to absorb attention. 

2. The gradual shifting of the voice from the prevailing tones. 

3. The absolute sway of the mind by the controlling voice. 

4. The use of suggestion for any purpose whatever. 

It will be seen then that wakeful hypnotism has three powers at 
work: 

1. The strong idea. 

2. The voice from the Other Mind. 

3. The influence of suggestion. 

These occur in their order. Having a clear knowledge of the uses 
to be made of this created voice, the method of developing it will 
now be started. 

The first step is mechanical. 

It is the building of a round tone. This is an old and familiar 
exercise in vocal culture. In order to understand what is to be done, 
imagine that voice is a rope, starting at the cords in the throat, and 
projecting itself out in the air through the round position of the 
lips. 

First Requirement :— Make the voice round. 

Pronounce the words home and gold. Take them as key words of 
this step. Say them gently, and in as pure a tone as you can pro¬ 
duce. 

Then repeat them again and again, each time thinking of the letter 
0 in each word. Put the mind on the 0. Then repeat the words 
many times more, still thinking only of the letter 0, and giving 
length to the words, until they are each five seconds long. 


THE CONTROLLING VOICE 


357 


Second Requirement :—Begin cumulative prolongation of the 
two words, home and gold. This is done by taking a full breath 
into the lungs; then let it out without loss of air in the sounding of 
these two words, each five seconds; then let out all the breath; take 
in a new breath, and prolong each word seven seconds; then let out 
the breath, and take in a new breath, and prolong the word home 
ten seconds. Let out the breath, then inhale and prolong the word 
gold ten seconds. Let out the breath and take in a new breath; then 
prolong the word home twelve seconds. Let out the breath, take 
in a new breath, and prolong the word gold twelve seconds. Proceed 
slowly. 

This is to be continued until you are able to prolong each word 
forty seconds. It will take some time to learn to do this; but the 
tone of the voice has been carried to ninety seconds in one breath, al¬ 
though we know of but one person who has ever done this. It was 
accomplished regularly by Prof. William Guilmette of Boston. Among 
his pupils were such great actors as Edwin Booth, Lawrence Barrett 
and others of high rank; as well as clergymen afterwards famous, 
and some of the greatest American singers of the last generation. 

The steps must be cumulative. If you attempt to go at once to the 
greatest possible length of prolongation, you might as well give up 
the practice. By cumulative is meant that each time you start to 
practice, you must go five seconds; then seven seconds; then ten sec¬ 
onds; then twelve seconds; then fifteen seconds; then seventeen sec¬ 
onds; then twenty seconds; then twenty-two seconds; then twenty- 
five seconds; then twenty-seven seconds; then thirty seconds; then 
thirty-two seconds; then thirty-five seconds; then thirty-seven sec¬ 
onds; then forty seconds. 

The first day you will find that you can go to five or perhaps seven 
seconds. The next day, you must start all over again, and you may 
be able to reach ten seconds. If you start after you have reached the 
limit on the same day, begin all over. Never try to go to the point 
where you left off the day before, nor where you left off the same 
day, if it was your limit. If you do not strictly follow the cumula¬ 
tive order there will not be much gained by the practice. 

It is not loss of time. 

It builds up a rich and beautiful voice that will be of great value 
to you for any purpose, whether singing, conversation, or address. It 
is the greatest single line of practice known in voice development. 

o 


358 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


This you will soon ascertain, and your improvement of voice will be 
noticed by all your friends. 

It will also build up your lungs, as well as your general vitality. 

Third Requirement: —When you are able to prolong the words 
home and gold, each forty seconds in one breath, which ought not to 
take more than one month unless your lungs are very weak, then you 
are to drive all the aspiration out of the tones. Aspiration is not 
whisper; but it is a mixture of whisper with voice. 

A pure voice has no whisper in it. 

A pure whisper has no voice in it. 

Aspirated tones are made of whisper and voice mixed; and there 
are many degrees of these, depending on the proportion of voice in 
the whisper. The following is the scale of progression in securing a 
pure tone: 

1. Whisper the words home and gold. 

2. Repeat them with the least amount of voice in them; most all 
whisper. 

3. Repeat them with about one-fourth part of voice in them; and 
the other three-fourths whisper. 

4. Repeat them half-and-half. 

5. Repeat them with three-fourths voice in them; and one-fourth 
whisper. 

6. Repeat them with the least bit of whisper in them. In this 
step the voice will seem pure, 

7. Now be sure that ALL the whisper has been taken out. 

The last is very difficult. It cannot be accomplished until you have 
learned to prolong the words each forty seconds by the cumulative 
method. It will also be noted that the exercise to drive out the as¬ 
piration from the voice is progressive in the same cumulative line; 
beginning at the start on each new attempt at the practice. 

The departure of the aspirate timbre from the speaking and singing 
voice will be a pleasing accomplishment, as it will save your throat 
from being rasped by the unvibrated passage of air, and will lend a 
charm and purity to your tones. 

Three requirements have thus far been given, all of which are of 
immense value to the personality and health. They should be culti¬ 
vated by every person, whether engaged in psychic studies or not. 

Fourth Requirement : — -Put the mind on the idea of making the 
back of the mouth and throat round; and constantly increasing the 
diameter or size of the cavity at that place. Do this at all times. 


TEE CONTROLLING VOICE 


359 


not only in repeating the words given, but in conversation. The 
throat and back of the mouth are called the cavern of the voice. The 
larger this cavern is made, the sooner the results sought will be 
attained. 

Fifth Requirement: —Relax the cavern, or back of the mouth 
and throat. Do not make it fixed. It can be enlarged and held in a 
large position by the act of the will after the habit has been formed 
by repeated practice. Every great singer the world has produced has 
been compelled to learn this enlarged throat position and its complete 
relaxation. It is the old exercise of devitalization applied to the 
throat. In this connection re-read the Eleventh Cycle, and then the 
Twelfth and Fifteenth Cycle. 

Sixth Requirement: —Learn to pronounce the two words, home 
and gold , with the tone of distant, quiet thunder. This will send 
forth a cavernous and resonant voice. This should not be attempted 
until all the requirements thus far given have been met by constant 
practice. Take the time when you can. Do not hurry. Do not seek 
conclusions. But earn your way step by step exactly as directed. 
After you have satisfied yourself that you can prolong the words in 
a full imitation of distant thunder, which is a smooth, pure, almost 
still rumble of the voice; then change the words to: 

Toll, Roland, toll! 

These are liquids, and are easily taken up by the voice. 

Give them in the solemn tolling tones of distant bells of great size. 

Seventh Requirement: —This has to do with three pitches of 
the musical scale. There are three divisions, which for convenience 
will be called: 

High pitch, or register. 

Middle pitch, or register. 

Low pitch, or register. 

If you will go to the piano and try your voice to ascertain what is 
the highest note that you can sing or intone easily, and the lowest 
also; then count the notes, whole and half, and divide them by three, 
or in three equal parts, you will have your three registers. You 
cannot speak any higher than you can sing; nor any lower. Any 
note that you can sing in, you can speak in, if you cultivate the 
habit. 

Have made the three registers, then practice the line: 

“Toll, Roland, toll!” in each of the three registers, no matter 
what exact notes they may strike on. Do not sing them or chant 


360 


OPERATIONS OF, TEE OTHER MIND 


them, but give them a natural speaking voice except that it is in 
imitation of distant, large, solemn bells, tolling. 

Master them in the higher third of your voice. 

Then master them in the middle third of your voice. 

Then master them in the lower third of your voice. 

Eighth Requirement:— Take the last requirement and carry 
the tones in all degrees of force. Do not allow any aspiration to come 
in the voice when you attempt the mild degrees; nor any departure 
from the solemn, dark tones, when you attempt the strong degrees. 

The combinations are as follows: 

1. The mild degree of force in the upper register. 

2. The middle degree of force in the upper register. 

3. The -strong degree of force in the upper register. 

4. The mild degree of force in the middle register. 

5. The middle degree of force in the middle register. 

6. The strong degree of force in the middle register. 

7. The mild degree of force in the lower register. 

8. The middle degree of force in the lower register. 

9. The strong degree of force in the lower register. 

This practice will require work, so will anything else that is worth 
having. But the work will develop the voice along the lines em¬ 
ployed by the greatest teachers of singing or speaking in the world 
to-day. There is nothing better; nothing so good in such culture as 
the foregoing exercises. The fact that the voice is made dark by the 
process is to the great advantage of the tones for all purposes; as 
it is always easy to brighten the tones. They are often harsh and 
rasping, especially if they have any aspiration in them. 

Several names have been given for this timbre. By German ex¬ 
perts it has been called the dark voice. By Italian masters of the 
voice, than whom none greater have lived, it is called the soul tones. 
By hypnotists of the highest rank in scientific research, it has been 
called the hypnotic voice. By others who have studied it in its 
wonderful effects on audiences, it has been called the controlling 
voice. The fact is, however, as will be shown in this cycle, it is the 
Voice from the Other Mind. Quick proof is attainable. 

Ninth Requirement:— Transfer all the foregoing accomplish¬ 
ments as taught in the requirements, to the words and sentences that 
you use generally; that is, to your vocabulary of spoken words. The 
purpose of this rule is to make all words easy and natural in their 
utterance in the controlling voice. While the two words, home and 


THE CONTROLLING VOICE 


361 


gold, are the richest and most beautiful in the language for the 
employment of the voice in the advancement of culture of any kind, 
they are not the words most used in life. In shifting into a general 
vocabulary, it is best to first take a list of words having the long o 
sound in them. A few such words are old, cold, fold, roll, toll, soul, 
bold, roam, tome, foam, loaf, boast, coast, fore, tore, more, pore, lore, 
and a vast number of others. You can construct a list of your own, 
and it will be a good exercise for you. 

The next list should have words with the ah sound in them. A 
few such words are: Far, tar, dart, heart, father, hard, card, market, 
part, and others. You can construct this also, and bring in scores of 
others. 

The next list should contain the mystery sound of short o, which 
is too often caught by the ear as the ah sound. The words are like 
the following: Hot, stop, fall, all, call, awe, fawn, raw, job, doll, 
dog, and the like. Many persons make the mistake of pronouncing 
dog as if it were dahg; stop as if it were stahp, and the like. Many 
school teachers lack good training in this defect. Of course there 
is a difference between awe and for, call and cot; but, in the effort 
to get away from the longer form, the teacher has often made cot 
sound like cart, with the r out; and for sound exactly like far. There 
are thousands of teachers, and millions of others who cannot catch 
with the ear the difference between far and for. Fawn, for and fop 
all have the same vowel sound; but what is called the vanish into an 
oo sound makes fawn seem deeper and longer in effect. The initial 
sound of the vowel is exactly the same. Dictionaries do not make this 
difference clear; and the result is a general mixing of the people 
between the ah and the short o sounds. Vanishes in the American 
language are always misleading. Long oh vanishes in oo. Long 
a, as in fay, vanishes in ee. Long i does the same, as in my. Ore 
vanishes in uh. And so on. The brogue of Ireland can be quickly 
analyzed as a series of vanishes. So are many dialects. 

These vanishes are wonderful agencies of variation. 

In speech, whether conversation or address, the most careful enun¬ 
ciation is necessary in order to make the ideas strike home readily; 
for the man or woman who has the controlling power and lacks the 
agency of clear speaking, will be like the carpenter whose skill is 
great but whose tools are very deficient. In conversation many of 
the valuable syllables are lost by bad enunciation. The person who 
has an accurate coinage of words will start with a great advantage; 


362 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


and the person who combines with this accuracy the beautiful tones 
of the Other Mind, will add a double advantage. 

In other words, you cannot secure the confidence and acquiescence 
of other persons if your pronunciation is bad, your enunciation 
sloppy, or your voice harsh and rasping, even in its mild tones. This 
is sense on its face and needs no advocacy. 

Tenth Requirement: —Enter upon a series of private conversa¬ 
tions with imaginary persons in which you use arguments, persuasion, 
and suggestion, all in this controlling voice. All successful extem¬ 
pore speakers have built up their powers by these imaginary talks. 
All the great orators of the world have done their practicing in private 
to imaginary audiences; while the lesser orators have done their 
practicing before actual audiences and have bored them accordingly. 
This is a mistake, for development is very slow that way. You can 
get more than a thousand opportunities in private with imaginary 
listeners, for every one you secure in public. There is no branch of 
development so rapid and effective as this. It has only to be tried to 
be proved. 

Every requirement must he taken in its turn, and completely mas¬ 
tered before the next is undertaken. This will require time, but 
life is time, and it matters not how long one works if progress is 
coming every day. That is the test. 

Eleventh Requirement :—Make use of the comparative voices 
in conversation. This may be begun in imaginary conversation, as 
under the tenth requirement; then it can be transferred to actual 
persons with whom you speak. In conversation there are two voices 
to be used: 

1. The colloquial voice. 

2. The controlling voice. 

The colloquial is that voice which you use naturally, and by which 
you are recognized. It is made up of mixed timbres, having some 
defects, and some peculiarities. Even the telephone carries these 
qualities to your acquaintances, and your particular voice may be 
recognized out of a large number. This is one of the mysteries of 
that instrument that has never yet been satisfactorily explained. 

You should employ the colloquial voice at all times when not seek¬ 
ing control of the thoughts of any other person. 

When you wish to hold an easy control where there is rapport 
between you and another, you may use a part mixture of the con¬ 
trolling voice. 


THE CONTROLLING VOICE 


363 


In passing from that period when yon have successfully injected 
the strong idea, you must do so by gradations, not jump abruptly to 
the controlling voice, as it will not seem natural. 

This change implies, as in the case, that there are many degrees of 
mixture in the voice; one being close to the colloquial; the next hav¬ 
ing slightly more of the controlling timbre; the next having more 
still; and so on until the entire voice is of the latter alone. In con¬ 
versation, as in public speaking, this transfer is easy and does not 
attract attention. You should know when you are speaking in one or 
in the other. You should have an automatic consciousness of the 
fact, and suit each to the conditions prevailing at all times. It 
would not do to go about with the controlling voice, when other 
circumstances did not concur with its use. 

After you have mastered all of the requirements, each in turn 
and in the regular order, then you are to make the following ex¬ 
periments : 

1. Merely for the purpose of noting the effect of this voice on any 
of your ordinary acquaintances, use it in some easy transition from 
the colloquial timbre, if the matter under discussion is worthy of 
the attention. You may try it on one person if you wish; but there 
must always he a natural use of it. Do not trifle with it. Let the 
theme be of some importance, and the time and place suited to such 
uses; then gradually shift into the degrees of the controlling voice. 
You will become aware of a strange influence pervading the atmos¬ 
phere, and this will he felt both by yourself and the person to whom 
you are talking. It is not imagination, nor is it due to suggestion, 
expectation or mere belief. It is an absolute fact that cannot be 
avoided. 

2. Take any animal you have at hand; a dog, cat, horse or other 
pet. It is not necessary that the animal knows you or your voice. 
Step at once into the use of this psychic timbre, which is known as 
the controlling voice. The animal will instantly be all attention. 
Obedience may be secured very easily in this way. We recall a 
horse that was always nervous when excited by any object it was pass¬ 
ing; but that could be brought into speedy subjection by being talked 
to in this psychic voice. We have seen cats and dogs look up in the 
utmost amazement at the person who employed that timbre. These 
facts show that the psychic voice is not limited to psychic conditions, 
but that it controls all life that can be reached by the tones of speech. 

3. If you are at a gathering of people whom you wish to impress 
o 



364 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


with any idea of importance, shift to this tone. If your voice is not 
known it will not be necessary to begin with the colloquial timbre, 
if the theme is of sufficient weight to require or admit a serious 
handling. 

4. In business matters, try this voice, and note the difference it 
will make in your dealings, and the respect that will be paid you. 

5. A school teacher who had absolutely no control over her pupils, 
made use of this voice after passing through all the requirements. 
She had been under training in voice culture and easily acquired the 
psychic voice. One morning on entering the school, she seemed 
very serious, as she had seemed before, but to no effect. This morn- 
ing she addressed the school in the psychic voice, and as long as she 
spoke or taught, there was an air of extreme seriousness and a feel¬ 
ing that some important thing had happened or was about to happen. 
Trom that time on, she was always able to control the pupils. 
There was an awe about the room that could not be understood. We 
know of a large number of teachers who are studying this method; 
and all are making progress in obtaining mastery over the scholars 
to a degree never before deemed possible. One principal, a man who 
has never been successful in his hold over the pupils, says in a letter: 

“I find that I have both the respect and the attention of my school 
now.” 

6. If you are a clergyman, note the following experiment that 
was recently made in this art: A preacher who was dull, although 
learned,*suddenly shifted into the psychic voice, after he had de¬ 
veloped it by study and practice. It was one Sunday morning when 
he felt that his preaching was over the heads of his listeners. Many 
seemed to have a cold, for they coughed all through his address. 
At length, desiring to know by actual experiment of the real value 
of the psychic voice, he shifted to it, as he changed his line of 
thoughts. Instantly every person in the church who had been cough¬ 
ing, stopped short. It had the effect of choking them off, as he has 
since remarked. There was not one cough after that during the 
service. But the attention was as suddenly changed from the wan¬ 
dering of the minds of those present, to the closest listening as 
though not one word must be missed. All this was done in a second or 
two. It was so sudden that the minister could hardly believe it 
himself. Let any minister who wishes to make a trial of his power, 
acquire the process by faithful practice in all the work assigned in 
this cycle, and first be sure of having developed the psychic voice 


THE CONTROLLING VOICE 


365 


before making the experiment. Then let him, during some sermon, 
when the subject or theme is changed, pass into the use of the con¬ 
trolling or psychic voice, and note the sudden effect on all those 
present. We have seen this done hundreds of times, and know that 
it is a decided control, not one that is imaginary. 

7. We tried the following test fifty times over as many different 
classes, during a number of years: Some theme that was exceed¬ 
ingly dry and uninteresting was suddenly entered upon, but with 
the psychic force. A stenographer took down every word. It was 
purposely planned that the material was to be too technical and dull 
to be of any practical value; but the classes would be all attention. 
Not a word would be missed. Nothing could have enticed them away 
from the lecture hall. Yet, had the same discussion been carried on 
in the colloquial, or common voice, every pupil would have been 
bored, and yawns would have prevailed from all parts of the room. 
One of the pupils said, in explanation of the affair, “It seemed then 
as if the air was heavy with importance, and something awful was 
portending.” All this in the use of dry words on dull material for 
a lecture. 

8. At a director’s meeting of a great corporation a pupil of this 
series of studies who had mastered the psychic voice, which is an¬ 
other name for the controlling voice, finding the discussion very 
dull and nothing of importance on hand, made what he termed a 
chance experiment. He began to talk of a trivial matter in the 
psychic voice, and he talked and talked for an hour in a quiet 
manner. No one seemed to want him to stop; no one interrupted 
him; and on he went. Notes had been made by a stenographer. 
After a while a member entered who had been absent up to that 
point, and asked what was going on. The notes were read to him. 
“Time wasted, gentlemen,” was the reply. Then all the others said 
the same thing. The man who had been doing the talking was 
asked what he was driving at. One director said, “You were so 
profound that we thought you were saying something worth listening 
to.” 

This experiment, which was a wanton use of the power, serves 
to illustrate the all-reaching effects of the psychic voice. If it can 
hold the attention of men whose every minute is of value in the busi¬ 
ness world, and can do this for no real purpose, what must be its 
influence when wielded for some definite end with a fixed determina¬ 
tion to make it succeed is paramount in the mind? 


366 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


There is nothing that gives results so quickly as this voice. But 
it must be acquired, step by step, by following the requirements of 
this cycle. When secured it may be known by its peculiar depth, 
and cavernous character, smoothness, and solemn ringing tones. It 
moves as no other agency in life can move. It is within the reach 
of all persons. 

Having made the foregoing experiments, the next step is as fol¬ 
lows: 

Twelfth Requirement:— This calls for the monotone, which 
is the key to the hypnotic voice. We are not advocating the mono¬ 
tone; but, as it is a part of the complete system of training of this 
cycle, and as we wish to leave nothing omitted in this great system, 
we are including that phase herein. 

The monotone may be discovered by going to the piano and sing¬ 
ing a line all on one note; and keep on singing it until you are tired 
out or have gone to sleep. This is the monotone of pitch. Then 
transfer the voice from singing to speaking; then into the psychic 
timbre, all on one note of the musical scale. Those of the lower 
register are the most effective in hypnotism. 

There is also the monotone of force, which means that the same 
degree of strength is employed right along in the voice. This should 
be a quiet degree. Thus we have the following combination: 

1. A quiet degree of force, evenly maintained. 

2. One note of the lower register evenly maintained. 

3. The psychic timbre, which is the same as the controlling voice. 

These three will sometimes induce sleep of the hypnotic character 

without manipulation; and the person using the combination need not 
be seen. The voice is enough. But the effect is not speedy in some 
cases. Many operators hypnotize by the tones of the voice, and never 
take the trouble to look at their patients in the first stages. Very 
susceptible persons are so influenced. 

The effect of mixing the monotone with the psychic voice is to 
make the subject drowsy, although very attentive and interested. 
It is the opposite of the defiant inattention in which the listener 
yawns, squirms, looks at the clock or watch, and wishes he was some¬ 
where else. In such case there may be drowsiness, but it comes 
from physical sources, and not because of being drawn under the 
hypnotic influence of the speaker. 

If the desire is to win the will and approval of the listener, there 
is no use in producing hypnotic drowsiness. Merely employ the 


THE CONTROLLING VOICE 


367 


psychic voice is well-maintained modulation, which is a relief from 
all monotones: 

1. The pitch is constantly changed. 

2. The degrees of force are constantly varied. 

3. The psychic timbre, having once secured control, is relaxed 
slightly to vary the steadiness of its power. 

Thirteenth Requirement :—In proportion as the tendencies 
to hypnotic sleep are avoided, the monotones will he omitted or re¬ 
duced, and a new element will come into the timbre. This is the 
realization of the importance of the control, and a self-assurance 
that you have the ability to hold mastery over another human being. 
This is not magnetism, but close to it. The next step would be 
the introduction of the first steps in magnetism into the psychic- 
voice, and the whole effect is wonderfully altered. Hypnotism makes 
use of subterfuge to get control, and the psychic voice is then called 
in, during the presence of which there need be no deceit or subter¬ 
fuge. The more you get into the psychic realm, the less need you 
will have of the strategy that is a part of hypnotism, unless there 
is an ever-present willingness on the part of the subject to be con¬ 
trolled. But we are dealing now with those who are not to be 
consulted; with those who are to be mastered without their own 
knowledge, and who would resist if they knew it. 

Fourteenth Requirement: —This is the last. It brings into 
the mind the greatest thought that you are able to suggest. As 
the whole process is big with results the theme should rise to the 
level of the highest power. The thought that is big is not necessarily 
filled with a great achievement, but it must grow in size until it fills 
your mind. It must seem to absorb all your being. The psychic 
voice is so big that it has an all-embracing cavernous nature, as it 
is heard. Let the idea that you suggest likewise fill your mind. 
It may be the removal of some bad habit, or the encouragement that 
will uplift one who is depressed. A man who was bent on taking 
his own life, owing to his financial condition, was talked to for a 
few minutes and became resolute to live and to work with a will 
to retrieve his lost fortune. He said, at the end of the very few 
words, “Something in your voice seems to come from another world.” 
He is living to-day and is in good mental powers, with a rapidly 
improving material condition. He was saved by this psychic timbre, 
the voice from the Other Mind. 

It is a serious work that confronts humanity to-day. 

o 


368 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


If the world is on the threshold of the psychic age, let all men 
and women be awake to the fact, or be awakened, and join in the better 
influences that will sweep over all the globe. 

In many of the large cities there are associations devoted to the 
work of saving lives from self-destruction. Here is the agency that 
will drive the distracted minds of mortals into the higher channels 
of purpose; and away from the dregs of the animal nature. 

In the cure of disease by psycho-therapeutics, this voice from the 
Other Mind is far more effective than any other agency. 

Of course when magnetism, which is the opposite of hypnotism, 
comes into the psychic voice, a very different story is told. The 
power then becomes magnificent and wholly irresistible. But this 
work is along psychic lines alone, and it is neither fair nor possible 
to bring in magnetism; for that power is as broad as life itself 
and requires several great systems to make it clear. Being the real 
power behind intelligence, it is necessarily an all-embracing agency 
of the forces underlying existence. 

SUMMARY] OF THE REQUIREMENTS 

1. The round voice. 

2. Cumulative prolongation of key words. 

3. Removal of aspiration. 

4. Making the voice-cavern. 

5. Relaxation of the voice-cavern. 

6. The tone of far distant thunder. 

7. The three registers. 

8. The degrees of force. 

9. The natural vocabulary. 

10. Practice with imaginary listeners. 

11. The comparative use of the two timbres. 

12. The three monotones. 

13. Development of self-assurance. 

14. The all-filling thought. 

Here is an education complete in itself; wholly and absolutely 
entire from beginning to end. It is an education that is worth 
obtaining, and the only cost is effort. The results are equal to an 
investment paying ten thousand per cent, dividends. 

There are many uses to which it may be put. 

The possession of the psychic voice is a gift in itself, that is ever 
ready to serve the owner. Its only opportunity to display a fault 


TEE CONTROLLING VOICE 


369 


is in the unskilful handling of it. To jump from the colloquial 
timbre into the psychic would bo useless, as it brings no advantage; 
and the attempt to employ it in this way would seem clumsy. Like 
the diamond, it does its best service when not made too conspicuous 
on trivial occasions. 

All forms of suggestion may be made with it. 

The child about to fall asleep at night is easily swayed by such 
tones, and they should always carry weight to pleasing themes. 
There is no point in depressing the mind of the child with undue 
importance; certainly not with gloom. Young people have been 
held to a higher course of development in their characters by this 
voice. In the household it has its time and place, and there is no 
parent who need ever lack the respect of his family when thus en¬ 
dowed. 

In sleeping suggestion, when any person, young or adult, is in 
slumber, the psychic voice carried in fine tones, has more power than 
the colloquial tones. In fact, the tests show that the increase of 
effectiveness is very great. This shows that the voice has the way 
of reaching the Other Mind of the person asleep. At the present 
time many important experiments are being carried on to give further 
proof of the greater usefulness of the controlling voice; and there 
is already much reason to draw the conclusion that the results will 
be more than surprising. 

Thus it is shown that the voice from the Other Mind is an agency 
by which, in another person, it reaches the Other Mind. Some in¬ 
vestigators have made the attempt to set up the principle that the 
Other Mind is a general fund, and not identical with an individual. 
This is one of the most serious problems facing students of psychic 
forces to-day; for, if there is a general, all-knowing fund of mind, 
out of which one person draws by chance some fact, and another 
draws another fact, then there is an end to the individual at death. 

The physical mind is born in the flesh and with the flesh; and it 
fails when the flesh fails, and dies when that perishes. If you sleep 
in the physical body, your physical mind sleeps too. If you faint, 
that does likewise; if you are forced to sleep by a drug, the conscious 
mind goes off to sleep with it. If the dentist gives you gas to 
enable you to feel no pain while he extracts the tooth, that, as well 
as your mind, will be insensible to the suffering; and not till one 
wakes up will the other be alive to the pain. Of course they are 
one and the same. 


370 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


They die together. 

What would be the advantage of all the struggles of this life if 
death, in taking away the body and the conscious mind, were to 
send back the Other Mind to the general fund from which it is 
drawn; or if, as some would have us believe, the Other Mind is 
only a sieve through which we see and know things that come by 
accident into the chamber of intelligence and there are caught by 
the echo they leave behind? 

This study, as you perceive, deepens as it progresses, and the 
profoundest theme of all is now awaiting our attention in the next 
cycle. 


371 


TWENTY-FIFTH CYCLE 


WONDERS OF THE OTHER MIND £ 



ORLDS that are seen afar , 

Stars with their waning light, 

No more mysterious are 
Than the deep-chambered thought 
That rules our better self 
Through all vicissitudes . 


LL THINGS come to an end, and this stndy is now 
near its last stage. All things physical come to an end; 
and yet by end is meant mere change. Still this does 
not satisfy. No person takes pride in believing or 
knowing that his body, borrowed from earth, is to 
pay the debt, and be distributed among countless others. There is 
no consolation in the knowledge that the atoms that make life in 
the body are appropriated from a large number of ancestors. In 
the mixing that is inevitable, it must be true that you have some 
of the atoms that were in the body of Moses, of Alexander the Great, 
of Caesar, of Shakespeare, and a long line of noble ancestry. 

They have lived and died, have hoped and failed, have drawn from 
earth and have paid back the physical debt they owed; but what 
possessed they that was not taken from the earth? Whence came 
the mind, and whence the psychic nature? 

The physical mind is taken from the soil. But this has been 
denied because it does not seem physical. Some say it is only 
mental. The process of thought may be drawn from an origin 
higher than the physical earth. Yet if you take up a handful of 
dirt and look at it under the microscope you will note the presence 
of tiny cells. Each cell has a nucleus or nerve-future in embryo; 
and each nucleus has a nucleolus or intelligent-center. If these are 
physical, then human intelligence is physical. If the cell that is the 
basis of everything in the plant is physical, then man is physical 
as far as his conscious mind is concerned. If the ordinary mind 







372 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


of man is something beyond the physical, then the intelligence in 
the plant-cell that bids it construct the oak, or the rose, or the 
apple, is something beyond the physical; and this cannot he accepted 
as true. All the material of the earth that enters into life is first 
made to pass into cells, and these are all forced into plant construc¬ 
tion before they can enter into the body of animal or man. It 
is the cell with its nerve-center and its mind-center in embryo that 
makes all things that live in this world. 

The conscious mind, therefore, must be regarded as physical. 

It is born and it dies. 

But the Other Mind is not physical. 

It is not born and it does not die. 

The discussion of this subject belongs to a study immensely more 
weighty than the present, known as psychic telepathy. The proposi¬ 
tions of the First Cycle have presented the various divisions of psychic 
investigations. The whole of this book is devoted to the side known 
as physical telepathy. 

While the Other Mind is in the realm of psychic forces, it is the 
agency both of physical and psychic telepathy; and it is the first 
of these two divisions that is involved throughout this entire work. 
In the study, deep as it is, there are presented certain inquiries that 
will not down. One is the nature of the Other Mind. Is it part 
of a general fund, or is it an individual life belonging to the existence 
in which it appears to be at work? Almost the first claim made for 
it when*a man of great ability has been led to recognize its operations, 
is that it is a general mind; and the one reason given is that it 
possesses the characteristics of such a mind, being all-powerful, all- 
seeing, all-knowing, and always awake. It knows not the need of 
sleep. The question is asked. Why should any human being possess 
a mind that has all those attributes? Or, if possessing it, why 
should it be so difficult to secure its knowledge and its aid? If it 
is his, why does he not have it ? 

The first reply to he made is that the human mind has no need 
of all knowledge. If it did, there would he a desire to pass into the 
world beyond the grave; for all knowledge includes all that exists 
everywhere, not only in earth, but above it and beyond it. 

Then it may be said that, if the working mind, which is provided 
for the needs of the body, were to be burdened with the vastness of 
the knowledge of past, present and hereafter, it could not do the 
work of this physical life. 


WONDERS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


373 


But if man is immortal lie must have immortality in his being. 
It cannot be thrust upon him after he has lived and died. As it is 
not a part of this life, and as it must dwell in him, there is the 
conflict which is exactly the condition of the Other Mind. It is 
known to he in life, and yet is not in the way of physical existence. 
Its functions are so difficult to measure or recognize that they suit 
such a condition as that of an immortal man held in the prison of 
the flesh. 

This coincides with the statement that the Other Mind is in¬ 
dividual and not general. It might be true that there is a great fund 
of intelligence, which has been termed by ancient philosophers as 
well as modern thinkers, as the universal mind; and, if there is 
such, then it might he true that the breaking through into the con¬ 
scious mind of facts that could not be known in the ordinary ways, 
would be explained. But there are marvels of the Other Mind that 
furnish a complete denial to this suggestion. Let us see what they 
are: 

1. The Other Mind belongs to the individual as a separate form 
of life. It is not general. This is seen in many ways. There is 
not the slightest doubt that the Sixth Degree of hypnotism opens 
up the psychic life; and, as a leading investigator has said, “taps 
the subliminal consciousness.” Many experiments have been made 
in this realm. The societies of psychical research in Europe and 
America have carried on a number of these tests; and they are of 
the fixed opinion that this proposition is true. But the most thorough 
and most convincing of the experiments have never yet been pub¬ 
lished. We lay aside the beautiful theories of many cults, and cling 
to the dry results of straight scientific research as more reliable. 
The greatest facts have not yet reached the books. But they are 
so important that they will get there sooner or later, as the world 
has a right to know what they are and to what results they point. 

2. Nothing can be more wonderful than the readiness with which 
the Other Mind is approached through the process of sound sleep. 
It is true that a person just falling asleep is influenced either by 
himself or by the suggestions made by another person. This appeal 
is made to the conscious mind, but the Other Mind is on the threshold 
and takes up the idea and adopts it. This line of tests has been 
made with people who are not hypnotized, and who have never been 
subjected to that influence. Either there is a lack of inclination 
to be thus controlled, or there is no person at hand who knows how 


374 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


to operate. The same subjects who fail to respond to suggestions 
made in full wakefulness, are held by them when sleep is coming on. 
It is at that time that the conscious mind is departing. Here is 
evidence of the waiting of the Other Mind at the threshold. It 
proves that the conscious mind must depart before the psychic mind 
can enter. The following are departures of the conscious mind: 

When natural sleep comes on. 

When hypnotic sleep comes on. 

When death comes on. 

In all three of these departures the conscious mind steps out, and 
the Other Mind enters. What can be more helpless than the strong 
man in ordinary sleep? What can he more helpless than the body 
in hypnotic sleep? What can be more helpless than physical life 
in death? 

3. It makes no difference how deep the natural slumber may be. 
There are cases where the mind has been held so tightly bound that 
it required violent shaking to arouse the sleeper. Yet in such cases 
suggestions made by an operator were carried out to the letter and 
in the most remarkable manner. This power was markedly increased 
when aided by the psychic voice and magnetism. 

4. In one case a woman who had never been hypnotized and who 
had always resisted the influence, had been kept awake for four nights 
in succession and was so oppressed with sleep that she could not 
be awakened. Yet direct communication was had with her Other 
Mind during this heavy sleep, and the suggestions were carried out 
the next day as ordered. There is abundant proof that the Other 
Mind is awake when the ordinary mind sleeps. As sleep is the type 
of death, it would seem a fair conclusion that the Other Mind is 
fully awake at that event and remains so afterwards. 

5. When suggestions are made to the Other Mind they are accepted 
as though delivered to the same personality as that which possesses 
the conscious mind. The shifting of the two functions is always 
the shuttle between two contestants of the same individuality. Iden¬ 
tity remains unaltered, but the change is one of degree. There are 
countless proofs of this fact in this line of investigation; and, in 
the deeper study of psychic telepathy, the truth stands out with 
amazing clearness; leaving no doubt that the Other Mind is a sep¬ 
arate life. It is separated from any supposed general fund; and it 
is separated from the physical body. It cannot be carried down into 
the grave. It never came out of it, and is not a debt due to nature. 


WONDERS OF THE OTHER MIND 


375 


It is so much a part of the identity of the individual that it cannot 
be a portion of any universal mind; and it is so far independent of 
the physical body that the death of the latter cannot drag it down 
to the grave. 

6. Having disposed of these problems, let us look at more of the 
wonders of this psychic force. Its chief peculiarity is its waiting 
aside for the departure of the conscious mind before it will manifest 
itself; then, having entered, it cannot be caught and recognized 
because the only agency of recognition is the conscious mind. When 
the latter sleeps in natural slumber, or in faint, or in hypnosis, or 
otherwise, then the Other Mind comes forward; and receives com¬ 
mands or suggestions which it executes over the physical body at 
some time afterwards, showing that it has been reached and its power 
has been enlisted. This one statement is the key to the whole 
mystery. There is some reason why the psychic function will not 
remain in the same arena with the physical intelligence. 

7. The only way of securing in this world any knowledge of the 
Other Mind is by the echo or leavings that follow its coming and 
going; unless the reverie is able to furnish a means. To be visited 
in sleep or in unconsciousness by this remarkable force, is not satis¬ 
factory, although much good can be thus brought to the body. What 
is wanted is the ability to be awake and have recognition of its 
presence and its power. Tor some reason this is partly granted 
by nature; for there are flashes from the Other Mind constantly 
occurring in full wakefulness. Here is another opening. These 
flashes may be encouraged by noting down their messages in writing; 
putting them in concrete form in the very instant they occur. When 
this has been done, the written forms are used to stimulate the return 
of the same power. Several works in our past series have stated 
this process and the wonderful results from so doing. The advice 
is given as follows: Always have paper and pencil at hand, day 
and night. When some flash from the Other Mind occurs, write 
it down as exactly as possible. Never destroy any of them. They 
are sure to set up in time the habit of receiving these flashes, and 
of increasing them. It comes down to the question then of forming 
this habit. That is the whole story, and it is worth the while it 
takes. The trouble will be found in the start of recognizing what 
of the thoughts that come into the conscious mind are flashes from 
the Other Mind. Many come and are not thought of, and are lost. 
But the rule is a simple one: Every idea that seems to have im- 


376 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


portance above the ordinary run of your thoughts, is a flash from 
the psychic mind. By paying attention to such class of thoughts, 
you will soon have a very clear knowledge of the kind that so appear. 

8. Another wonder is the reverie and what can be developed from 
it. It seems to be the fact that this is not the full presence of the 
Other Mind, but that the two minds are each on the portals of 
entrance into the arena of intelligence. Just think of the latter as 
an open vault, and that on the right hand is the portal through 
which the psychic mind comes, and on the left side is another portal 
through which the conscious mind comes. Think also of the fact that 
these two functions are compelled to keep a fixed distance apart. 
When one mind is in the center of the arena of intelligence, the other 
is fully outside and not recognizable. Then the reverse would be true; 
the outer mind will come into the center of the arena when the mind 
that has been in is out on its own side. They thus work back and 
forth, always keeping the fixed distance apart. This is exactly true 
at all times. In natural sleep the working mind goes out at its 
portal, and the Other Mind enters and holds sway. In hypnotism, 
the same fact is true. In the flashes of full wakefulness, the con¬ 
scious mind probably leaps for a second to its portal and departs, 
giving the Other Mind the opportunity to leap in, and the conscious 
mind, then returning quickly, catches the echo of the message brought. 
This is exactly true also. But in the reverie the two minds are 
just as the portals, possibly just without, keeping the same distance 
apart as in the other operations, but now at hailing distance of each 
other. 

Why this is true is due to the fact that in reverie the arena is 
almost empty. 

The conscious mind is away and yet close by. 

The Other Mind is also away and yet is close by. 

It is a wonderful series of facts, and all are capable of being 
thoroughly verified. The illustration that we have taken is not new; 
we were shown a drawing of the idea many years ago made by an 
expert of the highest skill. We advise every student to make a 
careful drawing and submit a copy to us for inspection, showing 
the vault or arena of intelligence, the right and left portals, and 
an imaginary line to indicate the distance that keeps the two minds 
apart. Show one out when the other is in; and the other out when 
the first one is in. Then, while keeping them the same distance 
apart, as when one is out and the other in, show them both at the 


WONDERS OF THE OTHER MIND 


377 


portals. While this is merely a simile in illustration, it serves a 
powerful purpose in holding communication with the Other Mind. 

9. Thinking long and hard of the Other Mind will bring it to its 
portal. This habit can be formed in reverie. It seems to take some 
form of delight in being summoned or desired, and the more it is 
thus encouraged, the oftener it will come, especially in reverie. Many 
great advances have been made in discovery in this way. As we go 
to press in the year 1924 we are in receipt of reports of the achieve¬ 
ments made in this one practice, and it is open to every person to do 
the same thing. It means the giving up for a while of the luxurious 
habit of wasting time reading the gossip in papers and the cheap 
tales in novels; the dessert of the conscious mind, and the weakener 
of character. Men and women of progress have been devotees of 
the reverie. In that state of brown study have all the battles of the 
world been won; all the advancing steps of civilization been taken. 
Think it over, and see if it is not worth while to cultivate the charm 
of the reverie. 

10. The one desideratum is to bring the Other Mind into a state 
of contact with the waking, conscious mind, so that the wonderful 
scope of its wisdom and knowledge may be secured and made use of 
in this life. Progress is being made every day now in this direction. 
It is practical and of course highly useful. Nothing can be so great 
in all the range of human activities. Let us work for this same end. 

11. When the Other Mind is thus brought into contact with the 
working, wakeful intelligence, the advantages begin to pile mountain 
high. In a chance way it has always been known that knowledge 
passes from one mind to another. By developing the habits that 
invite the continual nearness of the Other Mind to its portal of 
entrance, it is certain that more of this knowledge will be secured; 
for experiments in the right direction, as set forth in the various 
cycles of this book, have always brought a marked increase of such 
information. The greater fact remains, that much knowledge is 
always coming into every mind that is not recognized. Nothing is 
easier than to form the habit of knowing and interpreting these many 
messages. Let that be tried and the results will be surprising. 

12. One of the wonders revealed in this way is the vocabulary of 
feelings; some of which, belonging solely to the physical nature, 
are more readily received by telepathy; while others, belonging to 
the psychic nature, are hardly recognized. In another world we 
will be brought face to face with a new alphabet, and a new language, 


378 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


based on psychic feelings. There has been found a way to under¬ 
stand them, but it opens up too great a field for study and would be 
out of place in this work. The present course is devoted to 

The science of all phenomena, and 

The practice of all forms of human control over others. 

Psychic telepathy, the origin of all knowledge, and magnetism 
the origin of all power, are systems that are by far too comprehensive 
to be attached to this study, and would only serve to weigh it down. 

13. A marvelous law is at work in the human body that challenges 
all other processes for its exhibition of power. It would almost seem 
as if there were present in life a supernatural force. But it is 
readily analyzed back to the simple functions of the cell. This 
cell is the basis of plant life, and plant life is the basis of animal 
life. The cell, as has been shown in the beginning of this cycle, 
is composed of material and contains a nerve-center in embryo, and 
in this a brain-center in embryo. That the cell is charged with a 
wonderful intelligence is seen from the fact that it builds as it is 
told by nature. It is the same protoplasm, the same material, the 
same mass of substance, and the same cell; but when nature whispers 
to it, “Grow in size, divide, and so keep on adding duplicates of 
yourself; and build the apple tree; nothing else but the apple tree,” 
this wonderful little cell, with its promise of a nerve-center and a 
brain-center, does as it is bidden; and from the same protoplasm, 
the same ^material, the same mass of substance, it proceeds to build 
the apple tree, trunk, roots, branch, leaf, blossom, fruit and all; 
while another cell, starting life next to it, and having no different 
material, but a different command, builds the rose, roots, trunk, 
branches, leaf, blossom, flower and exquisite fragrance. 

Where is the secret ? 

It is in that nerve-center and in that brain-center that every little 
cell possesses its promise. In plant life, these centers remain in 
their embryo forms. But when the structure of plant-cells has 
passed on to the moving forms of animal life, then the nerve-centers 
collect in masses, and the brain-centers collect in mind; greater 
because more. 

Nature whispers to the tiny cell, and it obeys. 

Wonder of wonders! The psychic nature is given the power to 
command that collected mass of brain-centers known as mind, and 
it passes the order on to the nerve-centers, from which emanate all 
control over the body; and lo, it is obeyed! The process is no more 


WONDERS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


379 


complicated than the building of the trees, plants, and species of 
the vegetable and animal kingdoms, each different, and each begin¬ 
ning in the same cell. On the other hand the process of the control 
of the psychic mind over the human body is mere child’s play com¬ 
pared with the building of life from the intelligence of the cell. It 
is true that the mind in a limited degree does control the body; but 
it is the psychic mind, and not the working mind. The method is 
as follows: 

The muscles, tissue and organs, as well as all the functions and 
faculties, are made to obey the nerve-centers. This is so well-known 
as a fact in life that it is a primary proposition. 

It represents the first forms of intelligence and power. 

The nerve-centers receive their impulses from an intelligent source, 
and their power from the storage of animal magnetism. The working 
mind has all it can do to think, plan, direct the duties of the day, 
and reason out its best lines of progress after having studied the 
many things that are called education for a life of usefulness. Its 
work is therefore not to control the nervous centers. Many investi¬ 
gators of these phenomena assume that the nerve-centers of the brain 
are the subconscious mind itself; but this is not true; they are 
merely the agents of that mind, and possibly are the tools of the 
psychic forces. The brain mass of the cerebrum is not the conscious 
mind, but its tool. Mind is not matter. 

As the latter has not the time or power to act as master of the 
mysterious control over the body, it cannot be charged with the duty. 
This fact has been well proved by attempts to cure disease by an 
appeal to the conscious mind. It has never succeeded and never will. 
It is only when the Other Mind is called upon that the power 
is manifested. Then it becomes great or less in proportion as that 
mind is reached. A slight approach brings slight control; and a 
strong approach brings strong control. 

Every effort made to master the body through the ordinary mind 
has failed. It is for this reason that hypnotism is being employed 
in the new school of universal medical practice known as psycho¬ 
therapeutics. If hypnotism were not necessary, it would not be 
employed. It serves merely to side-track the working mind and 
to invite into the arena of intelligence the psychic mind; which, when 
once in, may be reached. 

If this power could be asserted through the conscious mind, then 
the suggestions of natural sleep would not be necessary. That serves 






380 


OPERATIONS OF TIIE OTHER MIND 


likewise to side-track that same conscious mind, so as to let in the 
psychic mind. 

But you say that many persons have been controlled and cured 
of serious maladies in their hours of ordinary wakefulness. This is 
true, but the result has always come after a great idea has been 
driven home to the thoughts, injected therein, and made to drive 
away attention which is the direct and identical process of wakeful 
hypnotism. 

Again you say that auto-suggestion has effected wonderful cures; 
and again this is true; but auto-suggestion is nothing more or less 
than wakeful hypnotism, in which the operator is the conscious mind, 
and the subject is the same mind* leading to the departure of the 
latter long enough for the psychic mind to enter, receive the com¬ 
mand, and obey it. This is all wonderful, but it is true, and every 
test and experiment proves the fact. The deeper these studies go, 
and the more far-reaching the investigations become, the firmer is the 
fact and more fixedly is it established. 

In full wakefulness, auto-suggestion succeeds in side-tracking the 
conscious mind, even if for a few seconds only, and this brings 
the power of the thought home to the Other Mind. It is wakeful 
hypnotism. But as natural sleep is coming on at night, if you can 
send the final thought into the brain at the right moment, you can 
reach the Other Mind just as it is passing its portal to enter the 
arena of intelligence. This has been done by many persons, and 
they continue the habit night after night with constantly growing 
benefits. 

It is all wonderful. 

14. The conscious mind slips in very often and brings ruin to 
the efforts to reach the Other Mind. Here we have the great failures 
of Christian science and mental healing; and here we find the real 
reason why those systems are dangerous and why opinion often is 
against them. Because the Other Mind has been reached and mar¬ 
velous cures produced, it is no true guide to the certainty of a system 
of healing. This is the turning point, and it may as well be made 
clear at this time. 

When persons who have suffered and been unable to find relief, 
take to some strikingly unique form of treatment, such as is found 
in mental healing and Christian science, they come with minds agape 
with expectation. They are told in advance of the miracles that 
have been effected; and sometimes those who have been cured and 


WONDERS OR THE OTHER MIND 


381 


snatched from the grave, give their added testimony to the same 
facts. No wonder that the mind is filled with a big idea, a new idea, 
a great expectation that is all-absorbing. This is wakeful hypnotism, 
just as has been described and taught in the twenty-second, twenty- 
third and twenty-fourth cycles of the present book. The great idea 
is injected, the conscious mind is sent away in brief or long trips 
of seconds or minutes or hours, and the psychic mind is called into 
the scene and given its work to do. 

Since the world began to be peopled, down through all the ages 
to this very moment, this method of controlling others by the big 
idea, the big expectation, and the big hope, has been in use and 
will so remain until the end of time. 

But now comes the danger. 

All the marvels of cure by mental healing, all the wonders of cure 
by Christian science, are first-comers. They expect more then than 
at any other time. The conditions are favorable then and are not 
so potent later on when the newness and the great expectancy have 
worn off. True it is that some who hold on to this large hope with 
enough of absorption to drive out the working consciousness, still 
have benefits; but the cry of the man who had been given a most 
marvelous release from disease by Christian science, will always be 
true in ninety-five cases out of every hundred: “I was surely bene¬ 
fited in a most gratifying degree. But when the malady recurred 
I took the treatment as a matter of course, and the result was a 
failure, a sad and hopeless failure.” The big expectation had been 
reduced. 

Look over the cures that are obtained by such methods, and you 
will find many that are remarkable; but they will all be first-comers. 
The same people, if they have further need of help, will find failure. 
Then the danger enters. 

Having been made to believe that the system will be always help¬ 
ful, the patients look upon it as a matter of course instead of a 
matter of wonder; and they die, or lapse into serious conditions 
from which recovery becomes more difficult. 

There is another way of stating it. The cures by mental science 
or mental healing or Christian science depend on the great idea of 
expectancy that fills the mind of the patient. As long as this idea 
is big enough to fill the mind and empty it of its working conscious¬ 
ness, it is possible to bring in the psychic function, which is what 
performs the cure. But when such a method is taken as a matter 


382 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


of course by the patient, then it fails. The psychic mind no longer 
does the work. 

This fact has been proved countless times. 

The use of prayer is the same process. 

It is not faith so much as belief, or expectancy. The latter is 
the true word. If the coming cure is being fully expected, it will 
come when the malady is within the range of possible cures. The 
system on which prayer cures were based, has of late been compelled 
to omit all diseases that cannot be cured by hypnotic suggestion. 
This is a remarkable coincidence. Once it was claimed that prayer 
would cure every malady, because some had been healed by it. Now 
it is freely admitted and confessed that prayer will cure only those 
maladies that are healed by suggestion to a person in the deep state 
of hypnotic sleep. Persons who are carried away by a blind en¬ 
thusiasm should study these great truths. 

Prayer made by the side, or for the help of an invalid, has some¬ 
times, but not regularly, brought recovery. This is nothing but the 
system that is taught in the Fourth Cycle of this book. Such prayers 
are much more effective when addressed directly to the invalid, as a 
method of suggestion in natural sleep, or to a mind that does not 
retain the power of conscious thought. 

The efficacy of prayer in religious devotion and in the private home 
life of those who employ it in full sincerity, cannot be denied. But 
prayer as a business, as a stock in trade, as a means of making 
money, as a barter and exchange, is disastrous to the true religious 
life of the individual who indulges in it; and, in fact, is merely a 
form of hypnotic suggestion made either during the sleep or un¬ 
consciousness of the patient, or in the period of wakefulness; and 
comes under the various cycles of this book. 

The public have not yet learned the truth. When they do, then 
they will relegate all such vagaries to the refuse heap where lie the 
ashes of other misconceptions, the accumulations of centuries. 

15. Another danger that is growing in this era more than any 
other in the history of civilization, is the parading of false evidence 
of the communicating of the spirits of the dead with living persons. 
Magazines are to-day taking up the work of publishing stories of 
spirits, and often do so under some other guise. They are merely 
trying to attract the attention of the reading public, in the hope to 
increase their circulation. One of our own members, who is con¬ 
nected with a great periodical, sends in this report: “Our editors 


WONDERS OF THE OTHER MIND 


383 


have agreed that the people demand something exciting and bordering 
on the supernatural. They think that ghost stories will create a 
new interest. But they want to print them as true, and as experi¬ 
ences, all faked, but having on their face every evidence of being 
facts.” Then came the accounts, well disguised and calculated to 
thoroughly interest the reader and possibly to frighten him. We 
know where some of these stories were made up out of the pure 
imagination of a novelist of note, who laughed at the gullible public; 
and, in a short time, we received from a man of scientific standing 
the statement in a letter: “It seems that the account is well verified 
and it strikes me as the truth, although I must confess to being 
dazed by it.”—Thousands of other readers of the faked articles have 
believed them true. 

If the spirits of the dead do talk with those living, why not 
let the true proofs be set forth? Why add the sensational stories to 
the already over-burdened mind, and clothe them with the false garb 
of corroboration? 

The spirits of the dead have not been given a fair show, and are 
at a serious disadvantage. 

They are faked by false mediums. 

They are faked by false clairvoyants. 

They are faked by magicians and prestidigitators. 

They are faked by societies of spiritualists for the purpose of 
astounding the public and bringing in new followers. 

They are faked in the daily newspapers which make a business 
of concocting stories to help sell their sheets; even keeping standing 
orders in their editorial rooms that, when short of copy on any page, 
“fill in with some made-up story of ghosts, or presentiments that 
came true, or dreams of death, etc.” These accounts can be long 
or short as the editor or reporter finds space waiting. And they 
are faked in the magazines and monthlies until one finds them the 
most ubiquitous of reading articles. Not one in a thousand has any 
basis of truth; and the rare one that is founded on some fact is 
very distantly related to it. 

The sensible part of the public owes it as a duty to the others to 
disabuse their minds of this trickery and to expose it. 

The psychic mind is all-seeing, all-knowing. If the spirit of 
the dead come back, this could be proved as a fact. There are and 
have been going on for some time, many tests of the power of this 
agency in this direction; and the deeper that mind goes into the 


384 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


subject, the more abundant comes the proof that there are no spirits 
of the dead in the midst of human beings. They do not communicate 
with the living. 

Knowledge is in the form of seeing, hearing, as well as touching 
and the use of all the senses. These affect the conscious mind. 
When the psychic mind reveals any of its knowledge, it leaves in 
the conscious mind the echo of its presence and of its message, and 
this echo cannot be interpreted except as it is reflected from the 
nerve-centers of the brain that reflect the natural senses of hearing, 
seeing, touch and the like. 

All that so appears in the nerve-centers of the conscious mind 
must take the usual forms. As sounds they are heard. As sights 
they are seen. As touches they are felt. What is seen in the brain 
is projected outward. The flash of the ghost, the movements and 
doings of visible spirits, the statements in the form of spoken mes¬ 
sages, and the other evidences that have come to humanity, have 
transpired in a flash, and to one individual alone; except when purely 
telepathic. On January 17, on page one of the Washington Post 
(D. C.), appeared an article with the largest heads used by that 
paper, and described at the start as a “Special Cable to the Wash- 
inton Post.” The title of the cabled article was “SPIRIT WRITES 
HIM.” It purported to be the experience of editor William T. 
Stead, whose son, William Stead, died in December, and the father 
is made to say: “Hew and wonderful letters are reaching me almost 
daily from my boy Willie.” The large part of a column is devoted 
to this account. Its thinness is so diluted that the assertions, even 
if actually made by the editor, need no analysis. But this is an 
example of the kind of news that is being given front pages in 
papers at the present day. 

Let us assume that the article did in fact come from London 
by cable and that Editor Stead did actually receive, as he supposed, 
letters from his son. The article says that the father does the writ¬ 
ing. This much is disposed of at the start. The information in 
the writing may have been the hopes, the wishes, the reveries, or 
any of the thoughts and beliefs that had been stored up in the mind 
of the old man; and thus have found escape in the letters which 
the editor wrote to himself. 

But there are two typical cases of greater mystery. 

One is that of the man who, on falling into a sound sleep, has 
written messages from the departed to himself; all without any 


WONDERS OF THE OTHER MIND 


385 


intention or knowledge of doing so. Here the spiritists will rise 
to claim absolute proof of communications from the dead; but the 
emptying of the conscious mind by sleep allows the Other Mind 
to employ the body, and to outpour its contents which may have been 
stored away years before in the form of hopes or wishes or beliefs. 
This is not as strange as the revelations made in some cases of 
hypnotic sleep, and to which no such importance is attached. 

The other typical case is that of the communication which comes 
through a genuine medium, of whom there are a few, and a very few 
indeed on earth to-day; the messages from the supposed spirits of 
the dead, telling some secrets that have been hidden during the 
lifetime of the departed, and which could not have been known had 
they not come actually and truly from the dead. This is what is 
called stored telepathy; the psychic minds of the living having been 
charged with the secrets while the departed was yet alive, and those 
minds, surviving and not knowing what they carried, gave up the 
contents under the inducement of the conditions surrounding the 
seance. A splendid case illustrating stored telepathy is given in 
the Seventeenth Cycle of this book. 

All mediums seem to deal with the spirits of the dead. The few 
that are genuine mediums seem to have no other vocation when in 
their trances. The reason for this is found in the law that, 

What you expect is likely to happen; or you will find what you 
are looking for. 

There never lived a man or woman who had some touch of the 
psychic forces, but at once ascribed the occurrence to the spirits 
of the dead; and forthwith and ever after there was the expectation 
of the statement that the messages were from the dead. As it was 
not the dead that seemed to speak directly in the beginning of this 
profession, it must be someone selected by the spirit through whom 
the dead would do the talking; and so there was the other spirit 
who managed the transmission of the messages. 

All these things are pure activities of the Other Mind. 

When you come to proof of the existence of the spirit of a de¬ 
parted person analyze it, if deep and puzzling, under the searchlight 
of stored telepathy. You will find the answer there. 

If the proof is so overwhelming that it cannot admit of doubt, 
then find out what you know of stored telepathy, and carry on the 
analysis to the end; and, our word for it, you will find the answer 
written as plainly as the light of the morning is impressed on the 


386 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


clear sky in the east. Do not be deceived. Study these great prob¬ 
lems for yourself, and let no weak sophistry he thrust upon you by 
other minds. 

The dead leave the earth and go beyond, if they survive. If 
they fail in this, then they are refunded in the manner so amply 
described in the first book of the Psychic Society, which enters very 
extensively and thoroughly into the presentation of proofs. 

In bringing to a close this summary of the Other Mind we find 
two phases confronting us. One is disappointing, and the other is 
encouraging. 

It is disappointing to find the Other Mind an intelligence-sieve 
through which every kind of knowledge comes, no matter how un¬ 
important and trifling. There is nothing too small or insignificant 
for it to let through. It seems to be an obedient function, as willing 
to execute one kind of a command as another. 

On the other hand, it is encouraging to know that the Other Mind, 
when left to its own initiative, will always tend upward in its 
influence. Unless given orders for some different kind of work, it 
will take but one direction, and that towards the better and nobler 
impulses that spring out of a realm that does not exist on earth. 
These influences are constantly reaching out of the sky, and wherever 
they have touched life it has blossomed into a beautiful flower. Thus 
we find a key to the character of the psychic mind. 

Be it a sieve or a mirror, an agent or a power, it is the one marvel 
of existence. And humanity’s acquaintance with it is new, is just 
begun. Enough is known to make it certain that this wonderful 
mind of the psychic realm touches human life only at its outer edge; 
while within remains all the wealth of knowledge that centuries have 
stored away for the historian of eternity. 

Come to the portal of that mind. Stand just at the entrance, 
where the view is barred from the mysteries contained in its limitless 
vault, but where the veil is lifting from the splendors that are 
spread out through the avenues of an endless city. Read its wisdom 
in the bannered sentences that are engrossed on the outer walls: 

"All that ever was, exists.” 

"All that is, exists.” 

"All that will be, lives in the germs of thought.” 


387 


TWENTY-SIXTH CYCLE 

|| THE UNSEEN POWERS 1 

UR HUMAN brains and bodies 
Are but instruments 
Through which flow 
Vast forces. Mysteries 
From some hidden source; 

Unseen, unending, unknown. 

EEORE entering the final cycle of this study, we will 
introduce a complete section never before put into 
an edition of Other Mind. The lessons in this cycle 
are so closely linked up with the whole trend of this 
volume that students will be delighted with its inser¬ 
tion here. Unseen Powers That Control Human Life, is the theme 
of this cycle. 

As this brings us to the shores of a newly discovered world, we 
find it necessary to understand what powers are unseen and what 
influences are holding sway in the sightless air about us. An un¬ 
healthy mind conjures up all sorts of goblins and fearful spirits; and 
the brain can create almost everything it fears. A wholesome, sane, 
normal mind, has no fancies that are morbid. To it all things are 
clean and free from apprehension. It is the purpose of this book 
to destroy fear and superstition. 

Let us start by studying the following group of the unseen powers 
and influences that surround life or exist about us somewhere; begin¬ 
ning at the Supreme Being, and dropping step by step from Him, as 
we descend. 

1. GOD. 

2. HEAVEN - . 

3. RELIGION. 

4. INSPIRATION. 

5. GENIUS. 

6. UNIVERSAL MAGNETISM. 

7. INTUITION. 

8. INSTINCT. 








388 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MINE 


9. SUPERSTITION. 

10. DEMONS. QOD 

There is a living God whose presence fills the universe. Of this fact 
there is no doubt. No person can study psychic telepathy or uni¬ 
versal magnetism and have any misgivings as to the existence of a 
living, ever-present Supreme Being. It is not our purpose to enter 
into the discussion of this assertion. There has not been a nation 
or people since first the world began, who has not been reaching out 
after the Divine in response to the psychic longings within the human 
breast; and that which is longed for or hoped for, exists somewhere. 

But this line of argument is speculative, and does not suit the 
methods of this book. The point we make is that the existence of 
God is a generally accepted fact. Further than this, it is also a 
proved fact. 

LAW .—God is a multiple being. 

He is not a giant of undue and inharmonious proportions with the 
rest of creation; but is omnipresent by reason of the fact that His 
personality is multiple. It may occupy every one of the countless 
worlds in space. It may be present in many parts of the same world, 
and so exist without limitation. 

There is no doubt that God is seen and known in all the worlds 
of the universe except the earth. 

The best conception of Him that is obtainable from any source, 
whether religious or psychic, may be had by a careful analysis of 
the Bible, as far as it shows His character and purposes. It also dis¬ 
closes in wonderful review the many-sided nature of humanity in 
the midst of temptations, doubts and struggles that were titanic. 

It is not possible to obtain a knowledge of God by the mere use 
of the reasoning faculties. They are born of physical parentage, and 
God is wholly apart from that realm, both as to His being and His 
mode of dealing with humanity. Yet it is true that, as we catch 
glimpses of the psychic through the material realm, so we see the 
plan of God at times in the creation about us. 

In the study of the idea of sex nature, it is shown that all the uni¬ 
verse and all life of every kind is sexed. God is the Father, and is so 
known. Nature is the Mother, and she has always been referred to 
by that term. The physical construction of the universe is the prod¬ 
uct of the union between God and Nature. This Mother of us all is 
physical life in all its processes. 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


389 


LAW.— Nature is a conscious personality knowing humanity in 
its smallest and its greatest needs. 

LAW.— The product of Nature is humanity with its physical and 
psychic possibilities. 

HEAVEN 

From the remotest era all peoples have believed in a place of abode 
after death; and it is not surprising that their belief was colored 
by their grades of civilization. The higher the scale of intelligence 
rose, the nobler became their conception of heaven. Nothing reflects 
better the character of a people than their views of the hereafter. As 
reason grew apace, some minds thought that the will should be un¬ 
chained, and its flights given free wing. This plunged us into an 
era of skepticism, using the term in its sense of relationship to the 
prevailing religion. 

Laying aside all influences that come from such sources, whether 
for or against a belief in heaven, we come to the direct proofs fur¬ 
nished by psychic telepathy, universal magnetism, and the efforts of 
the psychic world to break through the ordinary senses. 

LAW.— Nothing is lost, wasted, or in vain. 

The sky is full of worlds. They are called suns because they give out 
original light, or light of their own. Each sun has planets, as our 
own sun has; and each planet has satellites, as our earth has. Some 
scientists regard space as having no limit. Some think that all the 
sky is inhabited with stars which are parts of a great mass of matter; 
and that we are insects crawling on grains of sand, of which the 
earth is a very small individual. 

This view is incorrect. 

In the use of the microscope we get very close to the atoms which 
compose the sunlight, showing the limit of creation in that direction. 
From the atom everything begins. 

LAW.— Ether fills all occupied space in the sky. 

This atmosphere which is now known everywhere as ether, is 
the sunlight that has gone forth as rays, in lines of atoms. The sky 
is filled with it, as far as the sky is occupied. There is a limited 
number of worlds, even though they are seemingly countless and 
amaze the mathematician by their vastness of size and endless proces¬ 
sion. Where the worlds end, there the ether ends. All else is nothing. 

LAW.— Light is an impulse that vibrates the ether throughout 
all the occupied realms of the sky. 


390 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


In the beginning the suns went forth. Then they sent out their 
flaming light. This light, finding space unoccupied, took possession 
of it, until all was filled with ether. Since then the impulses of light 
vibrate the ether that occupies space, taking the place of all is woven 
into worlds. The process of world-building is part of our higher 
system of training, known as philosophy. 

LAW.— A psychic impulse travels faster them a wave of light. 

It requires but a few minutes for an impulse of light to journey 
from the sun to the earth, more than ninety millions of miles. 

LAW.— Light is material. 

In fact the ether is material, and really physical, but we fall partly 
into line with others who assert that it is supernatural, for we take 
the word itself as the key to the proper term to be applied. 

We call light material, and yet it furnishes the medium whereby 
all ethereal life travels or exists. There is nothing smaller than an 
atom of light. A body of air is material, yet sound travels on it 
by using the mass for the purposes of vibration. Sound is not air, 
and air need not have any motion whatever, yet sound moves along its 
mass at a rate of speed that is inconceivable when compared with any 
form of physical motion. 

Light occupies several minutes of time in coming a distance of 
ninety millions of miles. Air may move at the rate of a hundred miles 
an hour or even faster than that, although it keeps within a more 
reasonable rate of speed most of the time. Sound which is the vibra¬ 
tion of a body of air, travels so much faster than the gale, or air- 
body itself, that it cannot be compared to it. Yet sound is not air. 

We now see that the occupied space of the sky is filled with worlds 
sailing in a sea of ether, and that this ether is the medium of com¬ 
munication from world to world, just as the ocean enables man to 
have converse with the continents and islands of earth, and air gives 
him the promise of other triumphs. 

The law tells us that nothing is lost, nothing is wasted, and 
nothing is in vain. In fact there is no way of losing anything. The 
substance of the sun goes forth as atomic matter, but it cannot get 
lost, not even if it strays billions of miles off. Magnetism holds it 
in leash. Every atom must be accounted for, and there are more 
billions of atoms in a drop of water than you could count in ten 
billion centuries, if you counted a billion every second of the time. 
Here we have an example of infinitude. 

LAW.— Every world in the shy is the abode of created beings. 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


391 


Nothing is lost. Nothing is in vain. Nothing is useless. 

Every atom has its use. 

As out of the abundance of earth each and every particle is 
made to serve some useful purpose, so all the worlds in the sky con¬ 
tribute to the service of the Creator and the beings that are subject to 
His rule. The idea of orbs that are dead and dried up, or that have 
cooled off and are no longer useful, is erroneous, as it is contradicted 
by every known principle of creation. 

LAW.— Beautiful worlds are the abodes and visiting places of the 
psychic body. 

What earth is, will be seen later in this book. 

It was once supposed that our planet was the center of the sky, that 
the sun revolved around it, that the stars were made for no other 
purpose than to give light on nights when the moon was away, and 
that heaven was above the earth. 

The fact is that we are some distance away from the center of 
the universe, but not relatively far off. What is called the milky way 
holds the central orbs. But the best telescope ever made cannot 
peer within its courts. 

As the microscope becomes a confused mass when it reaches its 
utmost power of magnifying, so the telescope gives nothing but a 
blur just when we think that we can look in upon Mars, the most 
favored of all the heavenly bodies for our study. To combat this 
difficulty the ingenuity of inventive man has conceived the idea of 
taking photographic views of that planet, and then magnifying those 
views, again photographing, until at last we can see an object on 
Mars as big as the head of a pin, and read the facial expression on the 
nearest inhabitant. But the barrier is purposely placed against 
such a discovery. 

No physical invention will look upon any star or orb and reveal 
the life that dwells there. 

It is a psychic existence. 

The study of the planet Mars discloses canals that change their 
shape and conditions twice a year, as though beings were working 
on them. A plausible account of the purpose involved in such opera¬ 
tions makes it look as if there might be people there who take ad¬ 
vantage of the peculiar seasons in order to raise vegetation, which 
it is claimed appears every summer in the warm portions of the orb. 
But the best astronomers refuse to advance such theory and merely 


392 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


say that not enough is known to warrant the suggestion that there 
is any life on Mars. 

Other planets are given special seasons and habits, owing to their 
varying relationship to the sun. One has eternal summer throughout 
one great zone, with eternal winter on the extremes. It is as though 
we lived in Canada in an endless January, and others lived in 
New York in an endless June, while others lived in Florida in an 
endless August. 

Another planet gives one-half of itself to constant winter and 
another half to constant summer. So they change to set up variety. 
ISTo two are alike, and each has some distinct characteristic that marks 
it as specially arranged for life on its surface. 

The one law of variety alone gives certainty that a purpose is 
involved in the plan of creation. What is true of one orb is true of all 
the suns and all their planets and attendant globes. Each world is 
different from all others. 

This variation is intended to bring an endless succession of glories 
to the psychic body when once it is set free from the bondage of earth. 

LAW.— Heaven includes all the universe beyond the earth. 

God is an unseen power. There may have been good men who have 
looked upon Him or some one of His multiple personality, but they 
are not living to-day. 

Heaven is an unseen power. It is not only the places of abode and 
visitation, but the peoples that are there. They exert in some way an 
influence over the better part of human nature on earth. 

RELIGION 

With the first coming of human families on earth, there arose the 
question, What becomes of our loved ones when they die? That in¬ 
quiry of itself is enough to give rise to every religion on the face of 
the globe. The desire to live, the dread of death, and the hope of 
continued existence, make it easy for any leader among a people to 
frame the tenets of a religion and find followers until something 
better is offered. 

Death is both mysterious and alarming. 

Sadness, grief, the fear of dark agencies, the high tension of the 
nervous system among the ignorant classes, all make religion a natural 
offering from those who are able to take the leadership. Strong men 
and all women lean to the hope that religion gives. So pleasing is it 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


393 


in the minds of certain peoples that death is welcomed rather than 
feared because of the prospect of greater happiness forthwith. Any 
motive that will urge one to court death on the promise of happiness 
in another world, is a religious disease; for it invites suicide, and 
suicide is death to the psychic body, and to hope hereafter. 

Instinct is one of the unseen powers. 

It cannot tell a lie. When its meaning is fully understood, what 
it has to say in its way is the truth. 

There are grades of instinct running the gamut from the realm 
of the lower animals to that of the highest genius in man. In all 
normal hearts there is the instinct for a true religion. It is not only 
inborn but is a part of the existence of the psychic nature in the 
human body. Death excites and inspires it among those who survive 
and is made an agency for just such purposes; in the same way that 
love inspires and excites the function that reproduces the race. 

The one purpose of any religion is to set the soul free from the 
bondage of earth. The method by which it sets the soul free is in 
making it worthy to pass on to other worlds in the sky, and thus to 
enter heaven. 

Hope is a form of religious instinct. So is faith. So is the long¬ 
ing for a life hereafter. So are all the teachings and doctrines that 
actually make man stop before he commits crime and realize that 
there is a God that sees him and that will leave him to a dreaded 
fate if he goes wrong. 

The function of religion is to destroy the feeling of security in 
wrong doing. When any man or woman feels safe in such acts as 
are prohibited in the code of an upright life, then religion is lacking. 
When the sense of security is present because no one is looking, then 
there is no religion. 

From a scientific standpoint the definition of religion is that it is 
the highest ethical instinct in the human heart seeking a code that will 
compel each individual to stop before he commits crime, that will 
show him the ever-present Eye of the Creator looking down into his 
heart, that will rescue him from the sway of temptation and give him 
clear passage to another world if death were to come unannounced. 

INSPIRATION 

However humble the mind or heart may be, no person is denied the 
power that comes.from inspiration. There are several grades of this 

o 


394 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


faculty. Like instinct it appears in the lowly and in the highborn, 
in the lesser scale of life and in the greatest ranks of intelligence. 
It often takes the place of education, as in the case of Shakespeare. 
How any lad who had not been taught enough to have given him 
qualification to enter the first schools of our day could become master 
of the English language and set the pace for the grandest geniuses 
to follow through endless generations, is hard to understand. 

A person is inspired when he receives help from the psychic world, 
no matter whether or not he hears any voice, or sees any visions or 
comes in contact with any other being; it is enough if he is given 
knowledge or power. 

Like instinct, inspiration will not mislead or falsify. 

Were it not for the facts that are breathed into the minds of the 
lower animals, all would perish. Birds know when to go south and 
when to come north, when to build and where to make their stay. 
Many of the smaller quadrupeds lay by their stock of food for the 
winter, and perform deeds that excite the admiration of human 
beings; acts that are not told them by their parents, for there are 
countless cases where the young have been orphaned at birth, and yet 
have taken up instinctively the methods that are necessary to sustain 
life. A person who has not studied the habits of the animals will 
be surprised at the many acts of a superior intelligence they perform, 
outwitting man both in skill and cunning. As they have had no one 
to teach them, it must follow that they are given knowledge by a 
psychic power which for convenience is called instinct. 

This power does not lie. 

It is keener than most persons believe. The more it is studied the 
greater becomes its wonders, and the more respect one has for it. 
To the unobservant mind it is almost nothing. We recall the case 
of a man of great intelligence who asked to be advised how to culti¬ 
vate a belief in some unseen power, no matter what it was, so that 
it was genuine; and we asked him to make a persistent and exhaus¬ 
tive study of instinct in all the uses that he could ascertain. In 
other words, to make a long and thorough investigation into its 
operations from its humblest acts to its greatest. 

At first he hesitated on the ground that the scope was too limited 
to afford deep study. But he started in, and soon was absorbed 
in the unfolding fields of labor before him. Acts, deeds, transactions, 
wonderful habits and traits, all held him spellbound for months. 
At last he wrote us as follows: “I find that instinct is indeed an 


TEE UNSEEN POWERS 


395 


unseen power, and I lift my hat to it with the deepest worship. 
No law of nature can account for the specific acts of high intelligence 
that I have met in my researches. At times I have felt sure that 
I am putting my hand in God’s own hand and being led into a 
belief in His personal presence; but I have decided that He consigns 
to other powers each department of His government. I would like to 
publish a book of instinct by which I might tell the world the miracles 
that it knows nothing about. In closing I wish to say that this power 
is not a thing to be theorized over. It is a fact all the way along. 
It is as plain as the sun in the heavens. Its methods are convincing. 
They prove that we exist in the midst of an unseen government, to 
deny which is the highest evidence of an unfolded mind. I did 
deny it once, and I deserve censure for it.” 

The knowledge that instinct furnishes is most amazing in its 
volume and power. The things that it tells are draughts from 
the psychic world. 

Rising to higher gifts, a new power dawns on the horizon. It is 
inspiration. It is all the time knocking at the door of every life 
where it is likely to receive the slightest welcome. 

All the worthy battles of the world have been planned and won 
by the aid of inspiration. 

All the deeds that have set on the tide of progress have had their 
origin in this unseen power. 

Without inspiration everything is ordinary. It follows the hum¬ 
drum of a daily physical existence. It is work without reward, when 
it is work without inspiration. 

The inventions of the world were born in inspiration. The good 
deeds, the gifts of art, of sculpture, of painting, of literature, of 
poetry, of music, of architecture, and of all that draws the heart of 
man up nearer to heaven, are conceived in this power known as 
inspiration. 

As life in the body is both physical and psychic, it follows that 
the predominance of one subdues the other, and the subjection of 
one permits the other to have greater sway. It also follows that, 
when one is neglected, the other will seek to take its place. 

Examples of this tendency are found in the lives of those men 
who have had frail physical bodies and whose psychic natures have 
been more active in consequence. Hundreds of cases of the kind 
may be summoned at once from the pages of history. This shows 


396 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


a conformance with the general principle stated, and confirms the 
psychic law. 

The power known as inspiration can be cultivated to a very high 
degree by any person. No matter how long you have denied admis¬ 
sion to your mind of this agency from the psychic world, it still 
stands at the outer door waiting for recognition. Its knocks will 
be faint or loud in proportion as you have given it entrance in the 
past. Whether you are in business, or in society, or in a profession, 
or at work for another person, there is opportunity to find aid from 
this power. 

The psychic world is seeking all the while to break through into 
your physical life. This is one of its well known and certain channels. 
It may come in the form of a valuable idea. Seize that at once. 
Go to some book and write it down. Do not wait one minute. 
Stop wherever you are, and secure the idea just as you received it. 
This has been the practice of the greatest men in the world. Whether 
poet, or prose writer, orator, painter, sculptor, painter, architect, 
lawyer, doctor, inventor, business man, no matter in what walk 
of life, when an idea of value comes to you, secure it in black and 
white. Longfellow, the poet, used to leap from his bed and note down 
his ideas. The same fact has been related of others so many times 
as to be a by-word in the class of great men. 

A strange arrangement of words, a beautifully framed thought, 
an epigram, a plan for important achievement, or other visit of this 
power should be recognized by being placed on paper where it may 
be reviewed from time to time. The thought of it, the seeing of it, 
and the repeating of it become stimulants to the very faculty that 
gave birth to the inspiration. The power comes more readily the next 
time, if so encouraged. There is but one way to encourage it, and 
that is by putting the facts on paper at once, and then keeping them 
in mind from time to time. 

This method has been advised in our books for more than a quarter 
of a century, and a few persons have followed it with stupendous 
success. The result is that the power of inspiration opens up 
the pages of the books of knowledge that are closed to all other 
human beings. All may be admitted to the class of favored people 
who receive the rewards of such knowledge. You can make the 
effort in your own life, and you will soon witness the presence of 
the power. 

For fear that some reader may deem the task too difficult, we 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 397 

wish to repeat the advice to have pencil and paper at hand at all 
times, and when any idea that seems valuable occurs to the mind, 
note it at once. Do not depend on the memory. 

The purpose of this habit is to set in motion the process of this 
unseen power. It will do it. At first the ideas may not seem strong 
or useful. No matter. Keep up the practice. Read over from time 
to time what you have written down. Keep them all in one book, 
and get them as near like the first impression as possible, using 
the same words that you first - employed in thinking of the idea. 
These are nearest to the power itself. 

In a few months you should have hundreds of ideas that seemed 
to leap into your life. You will enjoy reviewing them, and will 
never tire of this practice, when once you have got it well started. 

Day by day if you persevere, the power will grow stronger, espe¬ 
cially if you have persisted in it for some months. Nothing can be 
accomplished in a day. 

We wish you to see for yourself what can be achieved in your 
life by developing this psychic power. Just for the sake of making 
the test and pursuing one line of worthy ambition, follow this to 
the greatest end possible. We know what will be the outcome if you 
stick to it with a dogged will. The power will grow and your ideas 
will become greater and greater until one of them brings you success 
in a degree beyond your fondest dreams. This fact is so easily 
proved that you should give it a fair trial. The test is within your 
grasp. It will cost you nothing. 

It may be as an inventor that you will obtain an enormous fortune. 
It may be in some profession that you will achieve success. It may 
be in art or literature that fame will be won. It may be in business 
ventures, and they require the aid of inspiration and inspired ideas 
to bring gigantic results. No matter how humble you are in life 
at the present day, you will rise, rise, rise, until you hold the reins 
instead of being driven. 

This fact is as certain as that the morrow’s sun will rise. 

A writer began nearly forty years ago to pursue the course advised 
in this chapter, and he was given the suggestion in private by one 
of the most famous and most successful men that have ever lived 
in America who took an interest in him then. He has not always 
obeyed the appeal of the power when it seemed to knock at the 
door of his life, but to a great extent he followed that advice. The 
result has been this: There are times when great facts will leap 


398 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


out of the universe upon his pen, and he will sit amazed by them, 
unwilling to give them place for fear he is drawing too boldly on 
the unseen fund. But analysis and study and investigation have 
always found these truths to be invincible. His works are the prod¬ 
uct of just such help, and they have become more and more proved 
as the years have advanced. He knows that the laws and statements 
made in this book are true. Yet many of them are ahead of the 
times. Proofs abundant have hemmed them all in on every side 
until thinkers accept them as established facts. 

GENIUS 

Lesser in degree, but none the less true are the evidences of power 
known as genius. Men and women, some uneducated and others fav¬ 
ored with book learning, have been found to be geniuses. The in¬ 
spired writer may reveal the story of heaven told to him by angels, 
as occurred in the olden times. Or he may arise to heights of 
achievement in any line of life, seizing the thunderbolt and arresting 
its course on the mount of glory, to send it forth in the name of 
progress for the earth. 

A genius would not write a great poem, but he might plan and 
execute some piece of workmanship, or lead the way into new fields 
of discovery. 

The main difference between the unseen power of inspiration and 
the unseen power of genius is this: 

Inspiration secures knowledge, while genius executes the work 
of humanity in a better way than it has ever been done before. 

It may be courted or cultivated by following the suggestions 
and practice of the preceding chapter. 

But such suggestions belong rather to the work to be done than 
to the ideas or principles that underlie that work. The ability to 
make a perfect circle in one sweep of the brush shows remarkable 
genius in an artist, as does the playing of the piano in such a way 
as to cause the notes to sing. The same kind of power makes the 
actor a genius, for he does not originate the thoughts he utters. 
Yet he may achieve greatness by his interpretation. 

UNIVERSAL MAGNETISM 

Held together by chains of unseen power all the worlds of the 
sky are drawn into a common family of relationship. Looking at 


TEE UNSEEN POWERS 


399 


the sun, the mind that had not studied the subject would say at 
once that it had no control over the earth; but, when he learned 
that it was more than ninety millions of miles away, he would feel 
sure that it could not be subjected to any influence that came from 
so great a distance. 

Again, when he was shown a planet that seemed so small an 
object as to have no claim whatever on his attention, and was told 
that it was more than a billion miles away from the sun, he would 
ridicule the idea of its being held tightly within the control of the 
great star that centers our system. Swinging out through space, 
retracing in their years the same pathway all the while, yet flying 
rapidly away from the power that binds them to their orbit, they 
find themselves all the time coming back into subjection. 

How can this happen? 

Gravity is an unseen power. It is not a substance, any more than 
sound is a substance. By gravity the body of man is chained to 
the earth much more securely than cords or irons could hold him. 
He cannot defeat gravity, and he might cut the chains and ropes. 

But what is gravity ? 

It has no existence except in the will of the Creator. It actually 
takes hold of nothing. The planets that are more than a billion 
miles away are tied to the sun; yet they are thrown from the sun 
by the opposite power. What is there in a planet that can exert 
an influence through a distance of a billion miles, with nothing 
but ether between? This unseen power must act on the ether and 
through it, as that medium must carry the message and execute the 
will of the power ordained. 

In ether, which penetrates every solid as easily as it permeates 
space, there is the element that holds molecules together in such 
a way that some make iron, some gold, some diamonds, some wood, 
some water, some air, and others every conceivable shape and sub¬ 
stance. In ether is the element that generates electricity. In ether 
is the element that executes the law of gravity. In ether is the 
element that executes the law of magnetism. In ether is the element 
that reaches out through infinite space and holds worlds together. 
Neptune is as closely bound to the sun as is Venus or Mercury. 

This is the power of magnetism. 

As far as ether extends through space, so far does it carry the 
influences known as magnetism and telepathy; and it reaches to 

all worlds that exist in the sky. No one can deny that there is 

" 


400 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


such a power as gravity or attraction that is exerted for more than 
a billion miles in our solar system. This fact is elementary. It 
shows in the simplest form one of the unseen powers that are at 
work. Yet gravity is a division of magnetism. The following prin¬ 
ciples will help to give a clear understanding of this quality of the 
psychic world: 

1. What is known as magnetism is power. 

2. Magnetism is the opposite of hypnotism. 

3. There are two classes of magnetism: the physical and the psychic. 

4. Physical magnetism includes the power of action, thought 
and feeling. 

5. Psychic magnetism is the power that rules all subconscious 
existence. 

6. It is by magnetism that growth of every kind takes place. 

7. It is by magnetism that gravity, cohesion, adhesion, and other 
forces operate. 

8. It is by magnetism that the earth is held in the solar system, 
and yet is kept from rushing to the sun. 

9. It is by magnetism that distant influences extend throughout 
all the realms of the sky. 

10. Universal magnetism throws its lines to every world in space, 
unites the most distant orbs with all others, connects every form 
of power with every other, reaches the smallest forms of life in our 
planet and opens to them the powers of communication with the 
whole universe. 

These conditions have always existed. The ability to know them, 
to recognize them, to take up the thread of connection with them, 
and to use them, is open to every human being. 

Personal magnetism is one of the divisions of physical power. 
It deals with the influences that are exerted by animal electricity 
and its charms over others who come directly under such processes. 
It is the first great training school of self-control, without which no 
person can hope to control others. 

No power can be exerted without some medium through which 
to act. In universal magnetism the medium is ether, which has 
already been described. Of its existence there is ample proof, and 
it is accepted as the one great sea in space through which all influences 
travel. All writers on psychic subjects to-day, whose works are given 
standing as reliable, refer to the spiritual body as the psychic body 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


401 


or the ethereal body. It is not made of ether, but employs that agency 
as the medium through which it passes on to other worlds. 

It is thus seen that some kind of substance is everywhere present. 
Water is more unstable than land, as land is more stable than sand, 
and sand than mud, or mud than water, or water than air, or air 
than gases, and so ether is lighter than gases. Under this theory, 
the whole universe is physical; but science still regards the ethereal 
as psychic, and the distinction should be maintained for convenience, 
if for no other reason. 

Personal magnetism is the power of control between minds and 
bodies in their physical relations. 

Universal magnetism is the power of control between psychic 
minds in psychic life, in their psychic relations. 

Thus it will be seen that:—* 

Telepathy is knowledge. 

Magnetism is power. 

In the functions of the physical mind and the physical body, 
telepathy has always been more or less active; but it has been found 
that personal magnetism, under the highest cultivation, will increase 
the activity of the telepathic functions to a degree that borders on 
the wonderful. The results are so remarkable and startling that 
they amaze the student at every step of progress in these twin 
studies. 

Every intelligent person knows that there is a physical mind 
and a physical body; a psychic mind and a psychic life. These pri¬ 
mary facts being true, it must needs follow that, inasmuch as mag¬ 
netism is power and telepathy knowledge, there should be both power 
and knowledge within reach of the student of psychic phenomena, 
as well as on the physical side. Psychic telepathy is not only a new 
science, but is the direct result of the study of universal magnetism, 
and has been made possible only by that system. In fact it was 
discovered through that channel only; and this accounts for the 
absence hitherto of any work on psychic telepathy. 

Magnetism develops telepathy. 

Universal magnetism, being psychic power, develops psychic telep¬ 
athy. 

INTUITION 

Little by little the powers come down the scale into the busy scenes 
of physical life. Their duties seem now to be confined to the pur- 


402 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


pose of helping struggling humanity. What is called an education 
is supposed to be book learning. The use of words, the correct way 
of spelling them, the ability to do mathematical work enough to 
secure an understanding of the values of things, and a few other 
branches, more or less useful, make up necessary book learning. 

But wisdom does not come in that way. Nor is any part of the 
book learning of earth useful in the life beyond. In other words, the 
psychic world has no occasion to employ grammar, spelling, reading, 
arithmetic, or languages. The best examples of college training 
have gone down to the grave carrying in the dead brain all the acquisi¬ 
tions of the university, every part of which dissolves and molders 
back to the soil. 

There is but one genuine education, and that tells us what 
man is, whence he came, where he goes, and what duties and lines 
of usefulness in this life are best adapted to his happiness and suc¬ 
cess both here and hereafter. 

He should know what his needs here are, what he can best do 
and do at his best, what he can accomplish here to make him a 
credit to this world; for as he fits himself to live here most nobly, 
he at the same time secures citizenship in the universe. 

To lead such a life as that, he must make his earthly existence 
a success. He must meet the counter-efforts of the thousands whose 
interests are ever encroaching on his field of labor, and on the results 
of his struggles. He ought to know the motives, the purposes and 
the plans of all men and women who can do him a wrong or wrest 
from him the fruits of his work. 

There comes into his life a power called intuition, which performs 
the service of taking him as far as the outskirts of the motives of 
others. He can cultivate this faculty by listening to it, or he may 
allow it to hover all the while about him without recognition. It 
never speaks so plainly that its voice is absolutely certain. If it 
did, no man would be called upon to exercise his judgment and to 
weigh both sides of the important questions of life. 

But it comes to all men and women. 

It is increased when it is given attention and acted on. It is 
decreased when passion or prejudice holds sway. In successful 
lives it becomes a second nature. Human nature is read like an 
open book, and the plans of others are all discounted long before 
they are acted upon. It is said that women have intuition in greater 
degree than men because they are not capable of reasoning. The 


TEE UNSEEN, POWERS 


403 


average woman runs to the following chain of argument: "It must 
be so, for there cannot be so much smoke without some fire;” re¬ 
ferring to the usual subject of conversation, the misdeeds of others. 
Another feminine argument is this: A Bishop acknowledged paying 
money to keep from the newspapers a bit of scandal that reflected 
on his chastity. A woman claimed to have knowledge of his mis¬ 
conduct, and he paid her money to keep the affair from the press. 
When this fact was known, every feminine mind said: "If he was 
innocent he never would have paid that money. Do you think that I 
would ever pay hush money unless I was guilty. No, a thousand 
times no!” To test this principle a society with the consent of the 
police in a large city selected at random twenty families who were 
approached with absurd charges. All were wealthy. All were given 
the opportunity to buy silence on payment of a certain sum of money, 
and to the surprise of the society, every family decided to pay the 
money. Yet not one was guilty. On hearing of this, the feminine 
mind will reason as follows: They must have all been guilty of some¬ 
thing, or they would not have paid hush money so readily.” And to 
such minds as have weak reasoning powers, conclusions are jumped at 
with bounds. 

Intuition therefore is a keener faculty with women than with 
ordinary men. But it is a more dangerous weapon; for men who 
have acquired experience in dealing with human nature are far more 
able to estimate the reliability of intuition and possibly to avert 
error. A woman of large experience in the world, coupling intui¬ 
tion with that acquisition, is a formidable individual. Some wives are 
better managers than their husbands and bring financial success 
into the family because of their combination of experience and in¬ 
tuition. 

We have just met a case where a man of active habits and great 
willingness to work, was made a widower when he was forty years 
of age. He had lost his farm by bad management. In a year he 
re-married. The farm was re-bought without any money, as neither 
had any; the same routine was re-established; dairy; crops; trading; 
and the humdrum details of the life in the country. But the new wife 
managed the husband. She stopped buying fertilizers. Crimson 
clover and lime were substituted, and the compost from the barn¬ 
yard was mixed with old sod and made into a rich natural loam 
by the aid of deep plowing. She compelled her husband to culti¬ 
vate the soil more deeply and oftener, on the principle that such 


404 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


manipulation took the place of expensive fertilizers which plaster 
mortgages all over farms. In three years their farm produced twice 
the crops per acre of any land in the county. 

Her intuition told her when to sell and not to sell the products. 
Her neighbors got eighteen cents a pound for butter; she put it in 
molds nicely stamped, and got ten cents more a pound for it. They 
sold milk for one and a half cents a quart. She got five cents a 
quart. Nothing was wasted. It required no more work to do things 
right than in the old ways. Eggs were sold for thirty-six cents a 
dozen on an average the year round; while her neighbors received 
less than twenty-four cents on an average. Hay was marketed at 
opportune times, and so were all the crops. 

In the fourth year, after the interest and taxes had been kept 
paid promptly, they began to reduce the mortgage which had been 
assumed owing to the fact that the holder of the security was a deacon 
in the church to which the man belonged, and he desired to help 
him all he could. In three more years the whole debt had been paid, 
and they are now saving money, with every prospect of being well- 
to-do some day. It is all the result of the intuitive powers of the 
wife. She is known as smart. Many business men and agents have 
tried to pull the wool over her eyes, but she knows them better than 
they know her. 

Many times we have been asked the question. What is the difference 
between inspiration and intuition? The answer may be given as 
follows: Inspiration is the power of revealing to great men and 
women and to geniuses, the knowledge of higher realms by which 
they are led to fame and lofty success. Intuition is the practical 
power that gives help to those who are engaged in the commonplace 
duties of life. 

But it has a broader scope under elevating conditions. It has 
been the good right hand of many a person in danger. In detective 
life it is the sole source of success at crucial moments. We have 
volumes of letters and reports on this subject, and have learned 
from the lips of the world’s best detectives of their constant use of 
the intuitive faculty. Pinkerton said that no man can hope to become 
a successful detective unless he possesses this gift. Impossible clews 
are run down and criminals caught by the quick leaps of thought 
from the mind of the intuitive realm. Could we devote here five 
hundred pages to this one subject we could place before the reader 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


405 


the most wonderful cases of that kind that have ever claimed at¬ 
tention. 

No person denies that there is such a power as intuition. 

Some have had the direct help of this psychic agency and have 
been saved from misfortune or disaster by its aid. Being psychic 
it is closely allied to the class of warnings known as premonitions; 
but the latter are suggestive of actual beings at work to help humanity, 
while intuition is a power rather than a personality. 

Here is a man about to pass a tree as he goes home in the early 
evening. Just before he reaches the tree, a form comes to him and 
a hand points to the other side of the street. That actually occurred. 
It was a premonition. In another case that actually occurred, 
a man was approaching a tree under similar circumstances, and some¬ 
thing seemed to tell him that there was a man concealed behind it. 
He crossed the road. In both cases a highwayman stood ready to 
strike down the approaching man, and in both cases he was foiled. 
But the latter case was an example of intuition. The close associa¬ 
tion of the two powers only serves to show their genuineness. 

We have had communications with people for many years and have 
never yet found one man or woman who did not believe in intuition; 
while more than ninety-five per cent, now believe in premonitions; 
but comparatively few believe in spiritualism. 

INSTINCT 

Down still lower in the scale of everyday, practical life, comes the 
power known as instinct. It serves the purpose of directing the action 
of the lower forms of creation. Birds and beasts are all led by its 
aid. The new born child is also assisted in some of its early habits. 
Were it not for instinct, the lips of the babe would not suck its 
food, and it would starve. This action is as complete in all its 
details as if it had months of experience back of it. Yet without 
so much as a first lesson, the child as soon as it is born will begin 
to take its food like a veteran. 

The swallowing action is also taught by instinct. Without it 
the taking of food into the stomach would be impossible. 

As the child grows older it does not need the aid of instinct; and 
this trait is abandoned in its operations, as fast as the imitation 
that comes from education or experience is employed. 

If it were true that only the simplest habits in the lower animals 


o 


406 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


were adopted without training, they might be attributed to heredity; 
although heredity is so great a mystery that it may be ascribed to 
a power akin to instinct. But animals, birds and all forms of lower 
life are constantly giving fresh evidence of a source of knowledge 
that cannot be accounted for on the theory of heredity. Nor is it a 
blind impulse. There is a power that speaks to the mind of the beast 
or bird and conveys specific information in some peculiar way. 

How does the bee know that the six-sided cell is the most eco¬ 
nomical shape for saving room and holding the greatest quantity of 
honey? It is not reasoning, for there is nothing on which to base 
the logical process of thought. It is not imitation, for there is no 
difference in the habits between bees that are orphaned without hav¬ 
ing gathered honey, and those that have been led by older compan¬ 
ions. 

How do birds know when an early spring or a late spring is coming? 

The educated weatherman does not know that. But many birds 
will delay their flight to the north in order to await the coming of a 
belated season; while others will start earlier than usual when the 
spring is to be premature. Surely this cannot be heredity, nor is it 
taught by imitation. There is nothing in the sky or air to lead them 
on, for the freaks of the weather rarely deceive the feathered hosts. 

There are many reliable works on this subject; and they are 
worth reading if any person wishes to study this problem for him¬ 
self, and form an opinion as to what kind of power conveys informa¬ 
tion to the lower species of life. 

SUPERSTITION 

Still lower we descend into the operations of life, and come now 
to a study of the influence that enslaves more than ninety-nine 
per cent, of all the inhabitants of the world. There is no one so 
ignorant or so educated that superstition does not taint their daily 
existence. In this age of advanced thought more recruits to the 
ranks of the free are being made and we often hear the remark: 
“I am not superstitious in the least, but I would not sit down to 
a table of thirteen, nor would I begin anything on a Friday.” 

Yet such person is sure that superstition is a mere mental fear. 

Not long ago we heard a very refined and highly sensible woman 
decry against the belief in superstition; but at the dining table she 
would not pass a dish of salt from her hand to another person’s 
hand. Why not ? It would be a sure sign of a quarrel. 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


407 


This fear may not be regarded as a power, but it exerts the full 
influence of a power, and that it stamps it as an evil ruler of hu¬ 
manity. 

A man who had built up a large fortune by his ability and who 
repudiated all opinions that leaned toward this power, afterwards 
became the most superstitious individual we have ever met, and for 
the following reason: One Christmas day he sat at the table where 
thirteen persons were present. hPext Christmas all of them had died 
but himself. He knew this to be the fact, because they were his 
personal friends and he was present at their funerals. After that 
he lived in dread and died in the course of a few years. It was 
the fear that depressed him; and, whether there is any real power in 
superstition, it does incalculable harm by instilling fear into the mind. 

Many ocean vessels will not start on Friday for their voyages; 
their officers may not be superstitious, but they say the injury is done 
to the service by the dread which sailors would have of setting sail 
on that day. One captain remarked to us: “Why if we had a storm 
or danger arose in any form, the sailors who had left port on a 
Friday would be useless. They would feel sure of the coming disas¬ 
ter and would become cowards.” 

Without exception it is true that the lower the grade of intelli¬ 
gence in the human mind the more it is swayed by superstition. 
In the African families there is constant fear of this power, and 
it does more than anything else to keep them ignorant and debased. 
Among negro servants this same slavery of the mind is many times 
more abject than among the educated classes of the same race. Their 
employers have found it necessary to yield to their superstitious 
dread when they would not take one word or look of impudence 
from them. 

A book would be required to contain all the catalogue of supersti¬ 
tions that prevail among the educated white classes. Young women 
have the most abundant vocabulary in this respect. When they 
(are grown up and get some hard knocks in the world of experience, 
they drop a few score signs from the list. It is beautiful phase 
of human nature to hear the mature woman of sense describe the 
follies of believing in this power, and then give her friends a con¬ 
stant stream of evidence to the contrary, explaining each exception 
by saying: “It is a pet idea of mine not to do this or that, but 
it has nothing to do with superstition.” 

The full measure of this power is seen only when the nervous 
o 


408 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


system is thrown into a cataleptic fear by which self-hypnotism is 
induced. If you are weighted down by dread of any kind, you 
will do a great injury to your nerves and mind. Out of this fear 
came the influences known as witchcraft. If a shrewd man or woman 
knew of any person who had become a slave to superstitious fear, 
a control of a very serious nature could be secured, and thus it 
opened up a special kind of hypnotism. 

Physicians who have made investigations along this line have 
come to the conclusion that witchcraft did in fact exist. The age 
in which history charges it with most offenses was peculiarly an 
age of great superstitious fear. Some persons had over one thou¬ 
sand signs of evil, so many in fact that it was impossible to turn 
to the right or the left without invoking the spirits of demons, as 
they thought. 

Added to this was the mental darkness of the age in which they 
lived, and the criminal tendencies of the masses in Europe or the 
heavy religious melancholy of the Puritans in America, all of which 
destroyed the normal power of the nervous system. 

If you will note the effect of a nervous person alone in an old 
house at midnight, with strange noises in the room above and the 
cellar below, you have a condition that gives rise to the presence 
of spirits, so-called. Self-hypnotism enters into the scene and creates 
sights and sounds at the will of the frightened mind. If in that 
lonely house where you are sitting in the dark at midnight, you have 
the corpse of a dead man in the adjoining room, you can get an 
idea of the age which gave birth to witchcraft. 

The demon-world is pregnant with such progeny. 

Superstition is the basis of ignorance. Hot the kind of igno¬ 
rance that is indicated by the inability to read and write, but the 
denser kind that has an incoherent idea of the duties and needs of 
life on this earth. Educated people are superstitious. Geniuses 
are enslaved by this power. Every actor is likewise weighted down. 
Nearly all business men are superstitious. Bankers have the same 
weakness, showing that a keen money-making mind is not free from 
ignorance. 

Whoever allows this power to influence them is sure to be hindered 
in their duties, for the latter must of necessity give way to the inter¬ 
ference of this agency. When a boat is ready to sail on Friday, 
it should leave port, and not lose a day. When there are thirteen 
at a table, whether to dine or do business, there is some loss some- 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


409 


where if the function is delayed or broken np. These are but ex¬ 
amples. The grand total of notions or signs embraced in the whole 
category of the superstitious realm is so large that it would take a 
book to properly classify and describe them. 

THE DEMONS 

One more descent in the scale of the unseen powers and we come 
to the lowest realm of all. Here are the demons. In the making of 
the many wonderful and beautiful worlds in the universe, with 
freedom of will in every created being, some must fall, and there 
must be some place to which they fall. It is the opinion among 
the best minds of to-day that writers who are not directly inspired 
by the Supreme Being may nevertheless receive inspired thoughts 
as stated in an earlier chapter of this division. 

Among such writers are men like Milton. 

In his Paradise Lost he depicts the fall of the lost angels or beings, 
giving vivid accounts of their long descent through space, and their 
apparent endless falling headlong to the nether regions. So much 
potency of description cannot he the imagination of a mere physical 
mind. The very essence of a motive in that sublime poem is the 
dropping out of heaven of beings that might have inherited eternal 
bliss but for the fact that they have been allowed to choose their 
fates for themselves, just as you and all others have been given free¬ 
dom of choice. 

In the same character of description the Bible confirms the story 
of the falling of the beings out of heaven. In fact that hook of 
books cannot be interpreted in any other meaning. It will not do 
to ascribe to everything sacred an allegorical meaning, although that 
is an easy way in which to dispose of the otherwise unsolvable prob¬ 
lems of the Scriptures. Where the trope is, in the accounts of the 
fall of man and the fallen angels we have never yet been able to 
discover. 

Such a work as the Inferno of Dante has more or less of the 
semi-inspiration of Milton in it. It reflects some degree of psychic 
power. In it we are taught that there was a fall, and the nether 
regions are crudely depicted in the midst of a chaos of description 
that is more poetical than coherent. But there is the central idea 
in it that cannot be shaken by all these shortcomings. 

No person can go very far in the study of psychic telepathy with- 


410 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


out finding out the facts and laws that are set forth in the pages 
of this work that follow. 

LAW.— Earth is hell. 

To what extent this statement may shock the mind of the reader 
it is not possible to conceive. No one has ever pretended that earth 
is heaven. Most students of criminology have already come to the 
conclusion that earth is hell. But crimes and criminals alone cannot 
make a hell of any planet. 

LAW.— All created beings have been endowed with the freedom 
to choose their own fates and destined careers. 

This law is so well recognized that it need not be discussed. 

The Creator could not associate with Himself any form of life 
that was not free. If one being in a million were to become rebellious, 
the percentage would be hardly a marring influence on the state 
of absolute perfection; yet one in a million would, in the aggregate, 
produce a total of hundreds of millions or billions perhaps in the 
entire universe. 

Whether the fall was completed in one era, or is now in progress, 
cannot affect the principle involved; although it is supposed that 
it occurred at one period only. Scientists agree that humanity 
is the acme of imperfection, judged by any standard; that it is as 
diabolical in nature as any creatures can be and not totally annihi¬ 
late each other. In fact, from the beginning of time, the chief aim 
of man seems to have been to slay his fellow beings, and to add to 
the doom of death all the torture that can be invented in the dia¬ 
bolical genius of the human heart. 

There has never been an age of honesty or peace. 

The present time seems to us the best in all the history of the 
world, and it is full to the brim and running over with dishonesty, 
cruelty and evil. In all parts of the world, but more especially in 
the civilized countries, crime and wickedness of every description 
are on the rapid increase. Reports of investigators, including heads 
of police, say that in the past fifteen years there has been an alarm¬ 
ing increase in the number of all grades of crime and all kinds of 
penal offenses. 

The tortures that were practiced in all ages down to the most 
recent date in the leading countries, and that are practiced now 
in ninety per cent, of the world, have put Satan to the blush if 
the sacred accounts are to be taken for their face value. Diabolical, 
cruel, barbarous, fiendish and terribly demoniacal are the inventions 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


411 


that man has put into practice with the one idea of making his 
fellow beings suffer the most excruciating agony prolonged through 
as great a period of time as possible. No government has been ex¬ 
empt from this condition. No creed has not been stained by its 
guilt. In fact more people, more brave men, more helpless women 
and innocent children have been burned alive, or racked, or broken 
on the wheel, or pinched day after day with red hot irons, or other¬ 
wise mutilated by orders of the church than by the state in the coun¬ 
tries that boast of the greatest civilization. To murder met the 
penalty of hanging, a painless death. But to have an opinion, a 
mere breath of the mind, was met by the most devilish tortures 
that human ingenuity could conjure up. 

It has been said that the age of such conditions has passed for¬ 
ever. This is not true. Men have been burned alive in the United 
States; some at the stake, some in houses for purposes of robbery, and 
some for revenge. Only recently a band of men forced three men, 
two women, and five children into a house, piled up faggots about it, 
and set it on fire. In the old times the victim at the stake was 
quickly relieved from consciousness by the smoke and flames; but 
in a house where the inmates must fly from room to room as the hot 
flames creep upon them, the death is slow and torturing. The hu¬ 
man heart is as hard now as ever, but the power of police suppres¬ 
sion is greater. 

At a military college a young man was taken from his room at 
midnight, stripped of all his clothing, and carried to a river, the 
ice broken, and the poor fellow forced to stay under water until un¬ 
conscious and nearly dead from the flooding of his lungs. On being 
taken out, he was revived, and the same treatment given him again 
and again. From a rugged and vigorous constitution, he was made 
so ill that he fell away and in a short time died. His name was 
William Jarvis and the hazing took place at West Point, the na¬ 
tional military school. This young man was the personal friend 
and associate of the author in his young manhood, and he related 
these experiences in person. 

In one of the Western States, a young man was hazed by being 
tied to a tree and then burned slowly. The fire made more rapid 
progress than was expected; and the boy, after suffering the most 
excruciating tortures by slow burning, died. 

These are merely sample cases. They are equalled on every hand 
by the disposition to torture with the most fiendish cruelty the pupils 


412 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


who attend institutions of learning. A college president said: “I 
do not like to say it, but I think that more good will come from 
letting the public know the opinion of a man in my position than to 
keep silence, when I assert that there are many students who, if 
given freedom to haze their fellows, would revive all the tortures of 
the dark ages. The demon spirit is only dormant in the human breast 
in this age of advanced morality.” 

In a leading magazine, a very able article on Chicago stated that 
the immense numbers of diabolical criminals of every grade from 
cutthroats up to runners and managers of houses of prostitution and 
politically supported saloons, where crimes were nightly enacted with¬ 
out fear of punishment, proved beyond all doubt that humanity to¬ 
day is just as savage and just as fiendish as in the blackest period 
of Roman history when women and children were fed to famished 
wild beasts in the arena for the amusement of the assembled thousands. 

Surely a just God never made such beings as these. Either the 
inhabitants of this planet are freshly created at birth by the hand 
of the God of Love, or they are the product of the demons. As 
the earth is seeking always to blossom into beauty and kindliness, 
through its flowers, its adornment, its color, its exquisite dress and 
rich emblems of peace and sweetest tenderness, and through the 
noble characters that rise from the debris of its wickedness, there 
can be no doubt that God lives. 

This being true, there can be no reason to believe that the devilish 
beings that infest this globe are His direct work. In fact they are 
the product of their own past. 

LAW.— The earth is the dumping ground of the universe. 

If the beings that dwell on this planet were created by the Supreme 
Being in just the moral condition in which they now exist, then that 
Creator is not God. If they were once brought into life pure and 
perfect, endowed with the power to choose their own fate, and have 
rebelled against the government of heaven, they are no longer fit 
to remain in an abode of peace and love. They must of necessity fall. 
If they are allowed to remain where they fall, their presence must 
always be a source of pain and suffering to those who see them. It 
is not right that any part of a happy world should be devoted to the 
incarceration of demons, as fallen beings are called. It certainly 
would be a wrong to set off in each orb in the sky, a place where 
these demons could dwell. 

LAW.— A soul once created is immortal . 


THE UNSEEN POWERS 


413 


As these demon souls must live on forever, it would be an injustice 
to inflict them on other beings who had been loyal to God. As 
they are immortal, they would then remain in those world-prisons 
forever. In such prisons they would be deprived of the power to 
free themselves. As they are all psychic beings the question of 
transit to one specific world is of no importance. 

The whole universe may be traversed. 

It was decreed that one orb alone should hold all the demon spirits 
of the universe, and they were sent to this earth. 

In order to maintain their own independence they were allowed 
to run as wild as they chose, and given food and drink with oppor¬ 
tunities to clothe and shelter themselves as best they could. 

LAW.— The earth began as a rejected rock world, and has evolved 
its own progress until it was fit for the physical existence of the 
demons. 

Hardship after hardship has been placed in the path of man from, 
the beginning of time. The rock has been cold on this globe for 
about one hundred million years. Man began life here about one 
hundred thousand years ago, and it is probable that the beings fell 
from their rank in the universe at that time. 

Days and nights, weeks, months and years are nothing in the 
psychic world. Whether it requires an aeon or a million centuries, 
is of no importance. Humanity might occupy a hundred thousand 
years in evolving from rock to physical life, and it would pass as 
instantaneous creation. Therefore it is immaterial whether man 
was directly given life on earth, or came to his present stage by the 
processes of improvement. 

LAW.— Physical life is the union of matter with the soul. 

When the beings fell out of heaven they could not appear as physi¬ 
cal beings until the rock of this planet had been molded into shape 
to receive them. Many changes were required. There must be 
pliable matter capable of living, of which the plant was the first 
type, containing sap which was the forerunner of blood, leaves which 
were the forerunner of the lungs, and roots which were the fore¬ 
runner of the stomach having digestive powers. 

Then food was essential before man took bodily shape, and this 
was brought about by the operations of nature such as rain, frost 
and the flow of waters, to wear away the rock, reduce it to sand 
and afterward mingle it with decay in order to produce loam, out 
of which man would be able to secure his food. All that he eats of 
o 


414 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


whatever nature, comes from such loam, even if he takes the flesh 
of animal life as part of his diet. 

To accomplish all these changes required many thousands of years. 
In time the material of the earth was fit to be united with the soul 
of a demon, and man appeared. The proofs furnished by geology 
and other sources, show conclusively that every grade of prehistoric 
man was a demon; and there could have been no exception to that 
rule. After humanity had occupied this globe for many centuries, 
all the, while in the form of savages, which are the basest of the 
human demons, the better spirits of peace and love sought to find 
scope in which to develop, and religion, inspiration and hope of 
immortality began to find room in the breast of mankind. 

Every statement in this chapter is a fact. 

It is an absolute, provable fact. It is verified beyond all doubt 
by the uses and practice of psychic telepathy; but, in addition thereto, 
it is proved by every writing on the subject that has ever been issued. 
It is proved by every, science that touches the subject, by every 
form of religion, by every substantiated belief, and by the conditions 
of the earth and its people, past and present. It is being proved 
here and now day and night, year in and year out. It is in harmony 
with all the problems that stand before the mind. It explains 
every phenomena of every kind. Without it there is a hopeless 
tangle in the philosophies of the world. 

The laws and statements, therefore, that have thus far been made 
must be accepted as the only truths that bear on this great theme. 

They are proved with absolute certainty up to the present moment. 


415 


TWENTY-SEVENTH CYCLE 




OME MEN there are who read 
With interest the words 
Upon the printed page 
But never penetrate 
The outer shell and find 
The thoughts within the lines. 


VERY CYCLE in this work is made a special study and 
contains one leading theme. Under such theme in 
each cycle may be found secondary ideas that hold an 
important place in the work. Indexes are for non¬ 
students, for they know very little of the harmony of 
the structure that composes the system as an entirety. To be able to 
turn to a subject in an index and there find the page where it is 
given consideration, merely tells the reader what is said in one place 
of the subject; but does not disclose its relationship to the work as a 
whole. In a study of this kind, such a method will never bring 
success. 

But as many persons who are disinclined to avoid studying an intri¬ 
cate science seek aid in collecting their knowledge of it even in piece¬ 
meal, it has been thought advisable to add an extra cycle, the purpose 
of which is to make the harmony of the work apparent and the rela¬ 
tion of each part to all other parts easily perceptible. 

There are twenty-six actual cycles of knowledge; but this cycle of 
study is a means of help to the understanding of the whole system. 

It plays the part of an index while not being one; and of reference 
as well as a summary of the themes and secondary subjects, with hints 
and suggestions made wherever they may be of aid to the reader. 

The Theme of the FIRST CYCLE is 



PSYCHIC PHILOSOPHY 

The subjects that are given attention in that cycle are discussed or 
summarized in the following manner: 


o 









416 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


The world is making progress. 

It has never stood still. 

Something is going on all the time that is working out for this 
earth a greater era to take the place of each era that has gone before; 
and this advance will continue until the purposes of creation are 
fulfilled. 

While there is once in a while in the development of changes on 
this globe and among its peoples, a depression or relapse toward a 
lower plane, the average of events is always higher. As we look back¬ 
ward we find the average steadily becoming lower and it is lost in the 
oblivion of the first stage of planetary existence. 

What has been constantly growing better from the remote past, 
cannot be regarded as having reached its end in this age of imper¬ 
fections. Therefore something higher is ahead of us. 

There was once the age of iron. Might made right. 

After that there was the age of mental keenness. Cunning was the 
chief weapon of conquest. 

To-day we live in the age of so-called civilization. Invention and 
luxury are its products; marred by remnants from the age of might 
and also from the age of cunning. 

To-morrow we will live in the psychic age. The sky of the east is 
flushed with the dawn of this new era, and you and all of us will live to 
witness and to enjoy the coming change. 

All humanity is now turning toward this eastern sky. 

On every hand there is a rapidly growing interest in psychic sub¬ 
jects and psychic studies. 

But false teachings have been spread world wide and have weakened 
the mind to such an extent that there should be some anchorage for 
the soul that is eager for the truth. 

The mental weakness of mankind makes it difficult for it to under¬ 
stand why strange phenomena are not evidences of the presence of the 
spirits of the dead on this earth. This is the most serious mistake 
that is made to-day or that ever has been made since the dawn of life. 
Even a society of great scientific men offer five thousand dollars as a 
reward to any person who can, either as a telepathist or a medium, 
count a heap of oranges; and the society is willing to accept this 
ability as absolute proof of the presence of spirits. Mental powers 
are far gone when they are moved by such tests. 

The absence of the consciousness of the working mind is also re¬ 
garded as the criterion of the final state of physical existence. This, 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


417 


too, is a serious error. The immortal part of man is not his physical 
mind. 

False deductions are constantly made from accepted and proved 
facts. The announcement that Brown says he is Brown is taken 
as proof of the fact that Brown said it; or if that be true, then it is 
regarded as proof of Brown’s ability to know what he is talking about 
or that he is telling the truth. The real fact is that ideas that have 
been lodged in minds years before and stored away in its psychic realm, 
may be called forth by after activity of some mind strong enough to 
uncover the hidden impressions. Many a personality has been made 
to talk that is merely echoing some long-stored ideas. 

Life is the product of the earth. 

It did not begin in the earth, because the earth is itself the product 
of a life beyond itself. It is so dependent on some other life that the 
absence of the sun for a day would end all existence here. What 
comes to this earth is psychic. 

Intelligence of a kind that is not physical is everywhere proved. 
It is all-abundant. This is psychic life. 

If this earth were the originator, the mother, the womb, the pro¬ 
genitor, the father of humanity and all other life hereon, then what 
we are would end when we die and return to earth. But there is the 
physical and the psychic mixed together in the formation of man. 

What is physical comes from the earth and returns to it. 

What is psychic does not come from the earth, never originated in 
the earth, never dwelt in the lap of the earth, and cannot be chained 
to it. That man is both physical and psychic is easily proved and 
needs no argument here. 

It is therefore apparent that man returns only his physical mind 
and physical body to the earth from which it was taken; and he 
emerges from death and the wreck of time with his psychic mind and 
his psychic body. These facts are so absolute that they have long ago 
passed the stage of discussion. 

Knowledge is of two classes: 

That which the physical mind employs or acquires is consciousness. 

That which the psychic mind includes is the past and the present, 
with the germs of thought holding the future. This is psychic telep¬ 
athy or the revelation of all things here, elsewhere and forever. 

Magnetism is power. 

In the building of the universe the Creator needed but two en¬ 
dowments : 



418 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


He must know all. 

He must be able to achieve all. 

Psychic telepathy knows all. 

Magnetism achieves all. 

Life here is a penalty. 

Oil the verge of every pleasure there is the sting of disappointment. 

The climax of civilization is a turning point downward. 

The highest human ideals hide the thorns of selfishness and dis¬ 
honesty. 

Ail these evils are physical. 

Arrayed against them is the psychic realm where there is no thorn, 
and no disappointment. 

The Theme of the SECOND CYCLE is 

THOUGHT TRANSFERENCE 

This was once considered a wonderful gift. 

To-day it is known to be a common occurrence. 

There are two divisions of this action; one is the transmission of 
thoughts that pertain to physical life; and the other is the leaking 
through into the conscious mind of some of the knowledge that lies 
beyond the threshold of human ken. 

To be able to repeat words, figures or physical data is not the true 
gift of physical telepathy, as this gift deals with facts, events, transac¬ 
tions, happenings, feelings and knowledge. 

A person may receive a hundred transmissions in a day, and not one 
of them may relate to words or figures. A citizen of the United States 
may learn what is in the mind of a citizen of a foreign country of 
whose language he knows nothing; showing that words are of no con¬ 
sequence as compared with the knowledge of events, or the ability to 
read the purpose and intentions of others. 

STORED TELEPATHY is shown to be in use in one of the inci¬ 
dents mentioned in the Second Cycle. The principles of stored telep¬ 
athy are being for the first time understood by students. They are 
the most important of all the subjects connected with this study. 

Even messages that purport on their face to be the direct com¬ 
munications of the dead, may be shown to result solely from stored 
telepathy. Here is a conversation that actually took place between the 
living and the supposed dead; assisted by the usual medium who was 
undoubtedly genuine as far as being free from sham is concerned: 

“Who is talking?” 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


419 


“Your brother ” 

“Where are you?” 

“In the spirit world.” 

“What are you doing there ?” 

“Held here until it is time for me to go hence.” 

“Where are you with relation to the earth ?” 

“Just above the clouds.” 

“How far above the clouds ?” 

“A few miles, it seems. I do not know.” 

tfr What have you been doing since you died ?” 

“Waiting.” 

“Waiting for what?” 

“I do not know.” 

“Do you know those who remain here on the earth ?” 

“Yes.” 

“Do you know what they are doing all the time ?” 

“Yes.” 

“Do their activities interest you?” 

“Ho. They are of no importance.” 

“Are you happy? 

“Neither happy nor unhappy.” 

“Is there such a place as hell?” 

“Yes.” 

“Where is it?” 

“Earth is hell.” 

These replies, coming after many broken efforts, and generally in 
fragments, have been mended and put into tangible form so that 
they may be more readily understood. The medium was honest. 
She was not aware of what was asked by those present in the body, nor 
did she know what replies came through her lips or writings. So far 
she was genuine. But was the record genuine? 

It is the characteristic of the mind to act as a sieve. What she 
herself had stored away in her mind during the many years that had 
preceded her adoption of the profession had made her take it up; and 
what had come into her mind during the time she had practiced her 
calling was still there. To start with, the medium brings the business 
of dealing with hoped-for spirits into the atmosphere where she en¬ 
gages in her seances. From these she is never separated. Every reply 
made in the dialogue just given may be ascribed and accounted for 
most easily on this assumption. But in addition to her state of mind, 


420 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


think of the patrons who have come in the hope and wish that there 
may be some communication with the dead. 

If during life there was ever any friendship or affiliation with the 
dead; and, when the latter was alive, there had been wishes or secrets 
unspoken, and of which they knew nothing from each other, those very 
wishes or secrets may have passed from mind to mind and have been 
stored away. The one who died carried his knowledge to the grave; 
but the records made by telepathy on the psychic brain of the survivor 
was not buried in the grave. Thoughts go on forever. 

There are being spoken to-day, and being thought out to-day, 
and being hidden to-day, ideas that will survive the possessors, and 
come to life in other minds years after their progenitors are for¬ 
gotten. 

A wish or hope is often written in the psychic mind. It may come 
to light at any unexpected moment. So the replies of the supposed 
spirit are nothing more than beliefs, hopes, wishes or imaginations that 
once lived and were recorded on the psychic brains of others. No 
wonder that mediums let through their minds all sorts of replies. 

The supposed spirit is often asked: 

“Where are you?” 

The answer may be a very positive assertion that the spirit is in the 
spirit world. But that reply is but the reflection of some hope or 
wish or previous assumption made by the medium or some one of her 
patrons. Every reply can be so accounted for. Stored telepathy has 
been recently proved by absolute evidence. 

It often happens in the common transmission of daily life that a 
third person may make two minds very readily telepathic. This leads 
sometimes to dangers, to wrong accusations of guilt, to loss of friend¬ 
ship, and other evils. It should be carefully studied. Many of the 
most astonishing troubles in some lives are explained on this prin¬ 
ciple of intermediary telepathy. 

Things are going on now, and have been going on for years, that 
you do not understand, nor know how to explain or to account for. 
The reason lurks often in some phase of telepathy. 

It is claimed by certain investigators that over seventy-five 
per cent, of all the facts of daily existence are carried into every 
brain by unconscious telepathy. That is, the knowledge is coming 
in all the time and is not recognized. There is much truth in the 
claim. 

The Theme of the THIRD CYCLE is 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


421 


THE OTHER MIND IN HYPNOSIS 

Here is seen abundant proof of the existence of two minds. 

The conscious mind is that which works and attends to the duties 
of the physical body. 

Until hypnotism had learned to put it away, it departed only in 
periods of natural sleep, or at the time of death. 

The only purpose of hypnotism is to set the conscious mind aside. 

In natural sleep the conscious mind is not wholly aside; for it is 
easily awakened. A remark made to a sleeping person will often be 
replied to and the sleeper not awake. Others will instantly become 
wide awake on the slightest noise. A key put quietly in the lock will 
often wake up light sleepers. The touch of a hand on the doorknob 
has been known to do the same thing. 

There are many cases reported where conversations have been car¬ 
ried on with sleeping persons; and the latter, on waking up later on, 
have had no recollection whatever of the things said; and some do not 
recall the fact of having conversed. 

One case in common in this line; at least as a type of the peculiar 
frame of mind of the sleeper. A man who had retired was asked to 
sharpen a pencil for his boy who had not yet gone to bed. The father 
was sound asleep and snoring. On being asked to sharpen the pencil 
he sat up in bed, took the knife that was brought to him and used it 
with good effect in making a nice point on the pencil; his eyes all the 
while being open. As he got through he looked at the boy, handed 
back the knife and the pencil, smiled as he was thanked, and was 
snoring when his head touched the pillow. The next morning he re¬ 
called nothing of the occurrence. This kind of a case is not uncom¬ 
mon. It represents a large number of similar cases. It shows that 
sleep is a condition that is akin to the slumber induced by hypnotism. 

In the lightest forms of natural sleep it is possible to communicate 
with the psychic mind and thus impart mandates that will be fulfilled 
in after periods of full consciousness. 

This very process is the most common phase of hypnosis. 

When natural sleep is intensely and profoundly deep, then the state 
of somnambulism ensues; and this is likewise true of hypnosis when in 
its most profound stage. Thus we see the similarity between natural 
and hypnotic sleep. 

It must not be forgotten that hypnosis is intended by the Creator 
to be used to set aside the conscious mind in waking hours. 


422 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


As all the ills of life arise through the conscious mind, and as all 
the blessings of life come through the psychic mind, it is necessary that 
the latter should be thoroughly understood, encouraged and brought 
into the horizon of every human existence. 

Another lesson taught us by hypnosis is the nature of the psychic 
mind. This would have been wholly buried were it not for the service 
that has been performed by hypnosis in this direction. 

Like stepping stones that enable one to progress, so hypnosis may 
be discarded after its lessons have been learned. It shows a process, 
which we never could have ascertained in any other way; and, having 
made ourselves acquainted with it, we may build on what we have 
learned and let the agency drift out of use. 

Another point of advantage is the fact that hypnosis may be largely 
imitated in full wakefulness. It teaches many methods of doing 
things that belong to the psychic science, but that could not have been 
learned without the aid of hypnotism. 

Being fraught with crudities and evils, it nevertheless has borne 
fruit in its many ways of usefulness to mankind in unfolding the 
psychic mind; and so may be dropped with readiness after having 
served its part in the progress of the human race. 

Many strange things have been accomplished through hypnotism; 
but every one of them can be reproduced in natural wakefulness. 
The inconvenient part of the latter process is its slowness. Thus a 
person may be cured of intemperance through a few trials of hypnotic 
suggestion, when it would require months and almost years to bring 
one-tenth of the same result without the aid of hypnotism. The fault 
is with the present defective condition of human energy. Magnetism 
will eventually supply the power and hasten the fruits of wakeful 
suggestion. 

It is fair to assume that the real purpose of hypnosis is to teach 
man the way. 

One of the strangest things that occur through the use of this 
power is the making of suggestions in hypnotic sleep that are to be 
put into execution in after periods of wakefulness. The same sugges¬ 
tions, if made with ten times the force in natural wakefulness, would 
invite scorn and refusal; yet when made in an ordinary manner dur¬ 
ing hypnotic sleep, they are obeyed implicitly. 

This proves the existence of the two minds. 

If you ask a drunkard to reform, he will laugh at you; for your 
appeal is to his physical mind. 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


423 


If you ask the same drunkard to reform, and the request is made 
in a state of hypnotism, he will obey you. Yet he may be wholly 
unconscious of your request. His conscious mind may know nothing 
of it. The desire is made when he is under hypnotic influence. He 
wakes up and finds himself led by a power he cannot understand to let 
liquor alone. When he was in his natural wakefulness, he would re¬ 
pudiate the request or command, for it would be directed to his con¬ 
scious or physical mind. When he is hypnotized, his conscious mind 
is removed; and the appeal or command is made to his Other Mind. 
He wakes up and is again in his natural state. He recollects nothing 
of the request or command. But something moves him to obey it. 

That such a power for the uplifting of humanity exists, even in the 
form of hypnosis, is cause for rejoicing, for herein is seen the only 
hope of humanity. 

Having ascertained this much, the next great step in progress is 
that which will show the way to accomplish all these blessings without 
the employment of hypnotism. 

Many persons are opposed to hypnotism and it is right that they 
should be; and we may be asked why we teach its uses in this work. 
The reply has just been given. Hypnotism has done the world a ben¬ 
efit that could not have been achieved in the next ten thousand years 
in any other way. It has disclosed many wonderful secrets, shown 
processes that were never dreamed of before, and effected cures both 
physically and morally that were beyond the reach of any other agency. 

To ignore such a power would be folly. 

But it is our hope and belief that it is merely a stepping stone to 
something grander. Having given up its secrets, the way is now 
opened to unlimited advancement along broader lines, gradually elim¬ 
inating all uses of hypnotism. 

For a long time invention stood at the threshold of bringing elec¬ 
tricity into use as the producer of great motive power. It seemed 
impossible to harness it to the traction engine. But that has been 
done; and likewise the use of hypnotism-methods without the hyp¬ 
notism itself is awaiting the touch of a hand of discovery that will 
solve the most important question of the age. 

The Theme of the FOURTH CYCLE is 

NATURAL SLEEP SUGGESTION 

This is absolutely a new and recent discovery. 

By this it is not meant to say that such a form of suggestion has not 


424 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


been used until recent times. It has always been used, but in igno¬ 
rance of its power and the process of best employing it. America was 
discovered by Columbus, but he did not create America. It was there 
all the time. 

Natural sleep suggestion has come into scientific use only in the 
most recent years. It has already worked wonders, although it is a 
young science. There are many men and women at work on it to¬ 
day. It is bearing the most remarkable fruit. In careless or indif¬ 
ferent hands, it amounts to nothing; but when practiced in the manner 
described in the Fourth Cycle, it brings fruit that will amaze the 
operator. As hypnosis is used to set aside the conscious mind, so 
natural sleep does the same thing. 

What can be more convincing of the existence of two minds than 
these experiments ? 

For thousands of years mothers have held mastery over their young 
when they have indulged in this practice. 

While it takes a much longer period of time to produce marked re¬ 
sults in this way, they have taken rank in some instances with the 
victories of hypnotism. 

Magnetism is the most effective power for driving home the sug¬ 
gestions made in natural sleep. 

The psychic voice, as taught in the Twenty-fourth Cycle, should be 
used in connection with magnetism, if the marvelous results of natu¬ 
ral sleep suggestions are to be seen in their greatest effectiveness. 

Young persons are most easily controlled. 

Those who are weak from sickness or other cause are likewise led 
easily by this method. 

Those who are older, and the mature, are not so readily mastered in 
this way as by hypnotism; but long continued effort always brings its 
reward, and it pays to be persistent. Early failure discourages a man 
or woman who lacks a strong character. 

It is well known that many persons refuse to be hypnotized, and 
others preferred not to be. If they can be reached in natural sleep 
they can be made to change their lives at the will of the operator. 

There have been some persons who wanted to be hypnotized, but who 
belonged to a class who were incapable of being hypnotized, as in cer¬ 
tain cases of insanity; and many of these have been reached and greatly 
benefited by natural sleep suggestion. 

Neurasthenia is regarded as almost incurable by the medical pro¬ 
fession. Hypnotism is the only process that will effect a genuine cure; 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


425 


and it is gratifying to know that this malady can also be successfully 
treated by natural sleep suggestion. 

This is but one of the many great victories possible in this process. 
Bad habits yield quickly to its master force when wielded by magnet¬ 
ism aided by the psychic voice. The Theme of the FIFTH CYCLE is 

SELF SUGGESTION 

Here the person controlled is the operator. 

In hypnotism there must be a separate operator. 

Likewise in natural sleep suggestion. 

Self-suggestion is commonly known as auto-suggestion. 

Success depends on the ability to set aside the working mind. 

Some people who have heard and read much about auto-suggestion 
have talked to themselves by the hour and have accomplished nothing 
hut a little mumbling, like the empty prayers of the Russians. 

A person who prays with the physical mind will not reach heaven, 
no matter how close it is. 

The same law holds true of auto-suggestion, which is based on the 
ability to side-track the working mind. Prayer when effective must 
he made with the psychic mind. The ordinary mind must be set apart 
for the time being; then the better self is present. 

In auto-suggestion results follow the absolute mastery of the work¬ 
ing mind and its control by the presence of the psychic mind. 

The principles involved are somewhat intricate and may be found 
running through the Twenty-second and Twenty-third Cycles. 

These should be studied in connection with the Fifth Cycle; as all 
three are helpful to each other. 

It is important, to begin with, to lay aside the belief that merely 
talking to oneself is auto-suggestion. It is generally nothing. 

One of the most common effects of auto-suggestion is in the form of 
a fixed belief. If you make up your mind that something is going to 
happen, and your working mind is overcome by the steadfastness and 
fixedness of that belief, it will happen as surely as you breathe. Only 
recently a man died because something had seemed to impress him 
with the idea that he would not survive his next birthday. Doctors 
examined him and found him to be in perfect health. Yet when the 
time came, a few weeks later, he was weak and prostrated with his 
belief, until his heart ceased its action. This is a common form of 
auto-suggestion, although death does not follow in many cases, as the 
belief does not take that direction. 


426 


OPERATIONS OF, THE OTHER MIND 


But there are millions of well people on earth to-day who are weak 
and nervous, and in seeming ill health, all on account of their belief in 
their sickness. 

Here we see the effects of auto-suggestion. 

It is the predominance of the psychic mind holding sway over the 
functions of the body. 

It is an all-absorbing belief mastering the nervous centers. 

Strict self-suggestion is employed in the use of words or ideas from 
the person to himself. 

Auto-suggestion is the effect that some belief has on the person. 

It is called auto because it works itself without the aid of any 
operator. 

While superstitions are mere barbaric relics of the mind, when a 
person is convinced by their weight, no matter how silly they are, the 
process of auto-suggestion takes place, and the results are often as 
bad as if they were true in principle. 

This is seen in the time of starting the great steamships. Many 
passengers are afraid to set out for an ocean trip on a Friday. But 
sailors are even more superstitious. If a voyage begins on Friday 
and something unusual, but not dangerous, occurs, the sailors would 
be almost useless on account of the law of auto-suggestion at work in 
their minds. A firm belief is the greatest of all agencies in life. 

A steamship line, desiring to send out its boats on Friday, employed 
the most trustworthy crew and officers. They had no mishap. The 
time of the year was favorable to good weather. The sailors, how¬ 
ever, were nervous all the way across the ocean. The second trip was 
free from mishap, and the crew did not mind the third. They were 
made to see the folly of the superstition. 

While there is no such thing as luck and chance in the usual ac¬ 
ceptation of these terms, yet certain things will happen a certain num¬ 
ber of times in every thousand according to the law of averages. 
Gamblers have come to see this law; and, instead of courting the favor 
of the goddess of luck, they now seek to understand the law of av¬ 
erages. The owners of gambling houses follow the law of averages. 
By so doing, they win eventually, no matter how the happenings may 
fall in any part of a procession of events. 

Again while there is no such thing as luck as understood, it is true 
that the mind that is convinced that there is luck abroad, good or bad, 
will be made more or less useful or useless by such belief. 

The world must not fly in the face of this rule of human conduct. 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


427 


Here is a man who thinks the whole public and all the gods of 
chance are against him; he is of very little value to himself or any 
one else. 

Here is another man who believes without cause that the world is in 
his favor, that his lucky star is in the ascendency, that all he does 
will turn out well, and that nothing can harm him ; he will succeed 
all the more for such belief if he does not become careless and grow 
indifferent to the necessities of hard detail-work. 

Good judgment in planning and in executing, coupled with a belief 
in a lucky star, wins most of the battles of life. 

It is a form of auto-suggestion. 

The same judgment in planning and in executing, coupled with a 
belief that everything will turn out bad, leads to a life of the most 
commonplace results. 

The power of auto-suggestion overcomes the good of the plans and 
the power of judgment and execution. 

This story has been told many times, and will be told forever, as 
long as humanity dwells on this globe. 

Bad judgment in planning and in executing, coupled with a belief 
that everything will turn out well, hits success sometimes under the 
law of averages. 

But bad judgment and execution, coupled with a belief that every¬ 
thing will turn out bad, leads to the morass of failure, and a cursing 
hatred of life and all humanity. 

Auto-suggestion is therefore a real force. 

In order to get free from the evils of pessimism, the mind should 
train itself to couple optimism with good judgment and capable exe¬ 
cution. 

This is the result of training and development. 

A person who loves philosophy could build an analysis of all the 
religions of the world on the basis of auto-suggestion. All that faith 
can accomplish is contained in this simple law. All that has been 
held up as the best standard in the foremost religion of humanity, can 
be found in this same law. 

These facts do not belittle the power of religion. 

As has been said of hypnotism, that it was useful in discovering for 
man the presence and the possibilities of the psychic mind, so it may 
be said of the law of auto-suggestion, that it tells us the truth about 
religion, and thereby enables us to find the true religion. Thus there 
is opened to the philosopher the grandest field of future labor and 


428 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


discovery that has ever been the lot of man to find. And that future 
is close at hand. 

Now is the time to begin anew and build all over again, all the 
ethical systems of the world. 

As medical science and practice are fast yielding to the uses of the 
psychic mind, so all moral codes will soon shape themselves to the new 
realms of knowledge. 

All the past, vile and degrading as it is, even when pictured in 
the fairest pages of history, will now be sloughed off by the laws of 
truth. Men and women are just being introduced to the truth. 

To-day is the line of demarcation between the terrible past and the 
inviting future. 

Sickness, premature death, error of mind, and crime, all will 
crumble before the onward march of these new psychic forces. 

In the past all things have been judged by the physical mind, 
which is the source of every ill that has befallen the race. It carries 
the seeds of crime, of false cravings, of temptations, of failure and 
disaster in its folds; and, as long as the world is governed by the 
physical mind, these evils will remain on earth. It is well known 
that the highest civilization in the past, as to-day, does not lessen 
any of these degrading tendencies. 

On the other hand, the psychic mind, swayed by auto-suggestion 
under the inspiring impulses of optimism, is sure to lift humanity 
out of its mire and turn its face onward and upward. Under such 
sway, when the psychic forces are in full control, there will be no 
crime, no sickness, no false cravings, no temptations, no failure, and 
no premature death. 

Three men who were over eighty years old, one in Europe and two 
in America, recently passed out of earth. Not one of them died. 
This assertion may seem strange; but it is a provable fact that they 
lived in their last years in their psychic selves, and knew no death. 
Their sleep was like any perfectly natural slumber. When the time 
came, they knew that, instead of waking up to this life, they would 
awaken in another sphere. Some day all persons will “die” in that 
way. It is only a last, gentle sleep. 

Here is seen the psychic tendency. 

It is the power of self-belief or auto-suggestion, made a habit in 
perpetuity. 

These are after-thoughts too great in their scope to be made a part 
of the Cycle out of which they arise; but yet belonging to the study. 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


429 


Do not think that the optimism of the physical mind will set up this 
class of auto-suggestion. The physical mind cannot long adhere to 
any upward tendency in the line of betterment. It is full of good 
resolutions that die in their evanescent sunsets. But it keeps none 
of them. There has never been a good resolve bom in the physical 
mind, or a fair hope that was not blighted. 

All the better things of human life must be born in the psychic 
mind and through auto-suggestion, whether it is in religion, in moral 
improvement, in nobler methods of living, or in the inventions and 
inspirations that reveal more and more of the universe to man. 

What is born in the physical mind cannot be auto-suggestion. 

It is sure to fade away. 

What is born in the psychic mind is alone auto-suggestion; and 
this whole book is full to overflowing with the wonderful facts that 
prove the control and supreme mastery of that mind over the destinies 
of human existence. 

The Theme of the SIXTH CYCLE is 

POWER OYER THE BODY 

This is a still further use of the laws of auto-suggestion, and what 
has been said in the remarks just preceding will apply as well to this 
theme. 

The discussion now going on in the medical and mental healing 
clash makes the point that certain diseases cannot be reached by auto¬ 
suggestion or by hypnotic suggestion. 

What is known as organic lesions are supposed to be beyond the 
means of all curative systems. 

But it is well proved that in some respects the organs of the body 
may be affected by suggestion, both in and out of hypnotism. The 
study is interesting because it opens up greater possibilities in the 
immediate future. 

What has already been accomplished should be understood at this 
stage of discovery. 

The difference between a method depends on faith, and one that 
compels belief is also of the highest importance. Faith may cool, 
or belief may be overcome; and this means that they are relegated 
hack to the physical realm of the mind where there is no security of 
control. 

After all, it comes down to the one great question of reaching the 
psychic mind, for there the mastery is always supreme. 

The Theme of the SEVENTH CYCLE is 

o 




430 


OPERATIONS OF t THE OTHER MIND 
MIND OYER MATTER 


It follows along the lines just stated, and is merely another phase 
or department of the same study. 

More and more it is shown that the conscious or working mind 
must step aside long enough to permit the Other Mind to enter the 
arena. 

In the preceding Cycles the ways of accomplishing this necessary 
step are fully explained. The gratifying principle remains that the 
two minds do not occupy the arena at the same time. One must 
be set aside; but the other must be induced to enter. Herein 
is found the whole scope of the present study, condensed in the one 
fact. 

The body possesses two grand divisions on its physical side: 

1. The functions. 

2. The faculties. 

These should be made clear in their operations and place in the 
life of man. 

The faculties are supposed to be obedient to the will of the physical 
mind. 

The will of the physical mind may be wholly controlled by the 
power of the psychic mind. 

Thus the faculties are readily mastered by the latter force in its 
control and direction of the physical mind. 

The functions are not subject to the will of the physical mind; 
but are reached directly by the psychic power. 

This has led some authors and teachers to assume that the psychic 
mind is the same agency as the medulla oblongata, which is the nerv¬ 
ous center of the functions. But the conclusion is wrong. 

The medulla is a storehouse of directing energy which supplies life 
and action to the vegetable functions of respiration, circulation and 
digestion, all of which have been inherited from the vegetable king¬ 
dom by all forms of animal life. The medulla therefore is the first 
step out of the vegetable kingdom, and not the last step in the building 
up of animal life. 

It has been also claimed that instinct is a part of the powers of 
the psychic mind; and that, for this reason, the lower animals are 
endowed with psychic existence. This is not true. 

Instinct is an agency, and may be brought under the control of the 
psychic mind of man, just as the physical will and brain of man and 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


431 


beast may be brought under the psychic mind of man. Agencies are 
no parts of the inherent life that employs them. 

Instinct in animals is the contact with the law of necessity which 
is made clear to each species as far as it is serviceable to them. It 
knows of itself. 

Telepathy is the knowledge of events and mental operations in 
others; not one of which can be transmitted by instinct. 

But it has been proved that, while the psychic mind is not able to 
increase the instinct in the lower forms of life, it is able to set up 
and to wonderfully increase the powers of instinct in human beings. 
It does not follow, even then, that the two kinds of instinct are the 
same, or that they have any relation to each other. 

As the mind when made to completely absorb an idea to the ex¬ 
clusion of ordinary consciousness, is able to yield absolute control of 
the functions and faculties to psychic mastery, it follows that many 
claims of cures that originate in fraud are found to be true in effect 
because of the faith and belief which have been secured in the people 
who use such curatives. 

For this reason molasses and water will completely cure the most 
distressing maladies, if the patient can be made to absolutely believe 
that claim in advance of taking the mixture. 

Bread pills will work wonders on the same conditions. 

So will anything else, no matter how worthless it is as a real medi¬ 
cine. 

A doctor gave a harmless and wholly inert mixture to seven dif¬ 
ferent patients, telling each one that it would cure the complaint; and 
there were no two maladies alike. One person needed a purgative, 
and another needed the opposite; yet the same harmless liquid, being 
announced as a sure cure, brought about entirely opposite results. 

The mind is thus seen at work over matter. 

There are belts, breast-pads, foot-pads, and appliances of every 
kind that actually cure when the belief is wholly controlled and the 
resistance of the conscious mind is fully absorbed. 

A gas doctor, who was all out of oxygen, had a caller who wanted 
to be given a lung tonic. Having nothing but ordinary air on hand, 
and the patient being unfamiliar with oxygen, the desired results were 
obtained, and the doctor said he had never seen a more marked benefit 
come to any patient than that which followed. In several subsequent 
visits the same patient received the same kind of air, and grew better 
week by week, until he was a different physical being from the stand- 



432 


OPERATIONS OE THE OTHER MIND 


point of health. Yet the doctor said that he gave him no advice aa 
to diet, and nothing but the same air that he could have got had he 
stayed at home. 

Thus the mind is building or breaking down the body, in proportion 
as its power becomes absolutely in one direction or the other. 

The Theme of the EIGHTH CYCLE is 

HOW TO HYPNOTIZE 

Let it be known that we do not believe in the use of hypnotism as a 
general practice, nor under any circumstances except where there is 
nothing else to do its work. 

It has been useful in showing the psychic mind. 

Had there been no such power as hypnotism, nothing would ever 
have been learned of the great secrets of nature and of the psychic 
life that exists on the other side of humanity. 

It has also shown the way to drive out the evil habits that weigh 
down the race of men at this era. It can accomplish results that are 
not attainable in any other way. 

For these things we are all thankful. 

The next era will owe its great and marvelous advance to the dis¬ 
coveries that have been made through this one agency, or that have 
been started by it. 

Let us be fair and render to it the homage that is due, and then 
discard it from our lives. 

Because hypnotism is full of dangers, it must be understood; and 
in order to be understood, it must be explained and taught. Had we 
left it out of this work, we would have been guilty of unfairness to 
our patrons. 

But it is dangerous. 

It is like the bolt of lightning that leaps out of the clouds. 

It is capable of great harm, like the lightning; yet had not Franklin 
used the latter he would never have paved the way for the electrical 
revolution that has since come over the civilized world. Thus we see 
that dangerous powers are absolutely necessary in channels of control 
and limitation. 

In the use of hypnotism, it is generally true that when a person has 
once been placed under this influence, it is not easy to repel it in 
further attempts. 

Yet, on the other hand, there are cases where men and women who 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


m 


have been many times hypnotized, have learned how to throw off all 
further attempts. 

But, ordinarily speaking, the first success in gaining control over 
another leads to other successes that are more marked as they increase 
in number. 

People who are quickly aroused, who are made angry or excited 
very easily, are naturally the soonest controlled; for those who are not 
able to control themselves are mastered by the will of others. 

Emotional and sympathetic persons are readily hypnotized. 

An incurable form of insanity is a complete bar to this influence. 

While animals are sometimes put into a state that resembles hyp¬ 
notic sleep, it is rarely ever a genuine instance of this power; and 
but few animals can be controlled in this way. We doubt if hypnotism 
in its real phases can be brought into the minds of the lower species. 
Bright minds are readily put into the hypnotic sleep, unless they set 
themselves against it. The higher the mental powers, the more satis¬ 
factory is the condition, and from the brilliant minds have come some 
of the greatest discoveries of genius through this channel. But there 
must be the co-operation of such minds with the operators. 

Am ong those that make the most ready unwilling subjects are 
stupid and dull minds; but they yield very poor results. 

If any person who wishes to peer into the deeper psychic realm 
will obtain the aid of some brilliant mind, and will acquire the power 
to throw that mind into the Sixth Degree, the rewards will be of the 
highest value when they are reached. It is not an easy task. The 
requirements are numerous, and all must form a combination that 
works together in the most perfect harmony. 

Societies for psychical research have experimented with the Sixth 
Degree, which is supposed to open up the subliminal realm, and have 
reported that, while there is great promise of gigantic results, the 
actual rewards have been meager. Investigation has shown that they 
have employed only weak or ordinary minds. 

There is to-day in America a society of the miost secret character 
that contains only men of the highest mental attainments and intel¬ 
lectual development; and they are making progress along this line 
with results that are fully up to their expectations. The Sixth De¬ 
gree no doubt opens up a realm that has never before been known. 

In the study of the Cycle which teaches all the methods of hyp¬ 
notizing, it will be noticed that subterfuge is employed in securing 
the belief of the subject. Erom this fact it must not be inferred 


434 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


that all efforts to hypnotize are tricky. Some are direct and straight¬ 
forward ; but they depend on magnetism as the basis of success. 

Just as the patent medicine vendors, or the advertisers of electric 
apparatus with claims of cures, make their patrons believe in them 
by false assertions and all kinds of schemes to win the mind, so hyp¬ 
notism likewise by strategy puts aside the reasoning consciousness and 
makes its success certain in some instances. 

The effort is based on the one desire to set aside the working mind 
and not allow it to stand in the way of the power of the suggestion 
that is forced forward through one process or another. 

One peculiarity of the hypnotic condition is the fact that the 
subject may be awakened in the state of hypnosis. 

This is not the case usually with a person who is in natural sleep, 
but it does occur sometimes. 

In nearly all oases of hypnotism, the subject is made to wake up 
while yet hypnotized; and he is not conscious of what is going on; 
although his mind is made to receive and afterwards to obey sug¬ 
gestions given in that state. 

Then he is brought out of the wakefulness of hypnotism into the 
wakefulness of naturalness. When entering this last condition he 
seems to be dazed as he passes out of the power of the hypnotist. 

It is all very wonderful; especially the wakefulness within the 
sleep. 

The Theme of the NINTH CYCLE is 

DANGERS OF HYPNOTISM 

These may be summed up as follows: 

The first success generally makes the subject more readily controlled 
at all times afterward. 

The success of one operator over a subject renders that subject 
prone to the influence of others. 

Many persons have hypnotic control over a certain number of others 
and do not know it. By this we mean to say that men and women 
who have never studied the science and art of hypnotism, at times 
throw over others, but only a rare few, the hypnotic power; neither 
they nor their subjects knowing anything about it. 

The safeguard against this kind of influence is in making the body 
immune against all such influence, whether accidental or intended. 

Constant use of the agency to master the will of another person will 
render the latter weak in mind and very weak in purpose. 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


435 


Some persons are always partly under hypnotic influence of others 
who do not know they possess the power; and they are swayed at will 
until they at length have no will of their own. 

In the crowds that pass yon day after day, there are some persons 
over whom yon may or do exercise some slight or strong mastery, 
who may not know yon, and of this power yon yonrself may have 
neither knowledge nor belief. 

To prove this assertion the following experiment was made: 

Twelve men and twelve women were selected who had never heard 
of hypnotism except in the most vagne way, and some of them did not 
believe snch a power existed. At a county fair these men and women 
were purposely appointed a committee to receive all callers and to im¬ 
part to them certain information. This induced thousands of people 
to file in lines past the members of the committee, who were scattered. 
By previous instructions the committee were told to inform the men 
that they had on a hat that belonged to someone else. This was done 
so that no other person would hear, and generally there were certain 
kinds of faces selected under the directions of the party in charge of 
the experiment. The result was that one member of the committee 
found that, without knowing anything about hypnotism, he could con¬ 
trol eight men in the crowd, and these eight were afterwards detained 
and made to obey the will of the amateur operator. All the twenty- 
four members of the committee found subjects likewise. 

This proves the fact that every person is able to hypnotize some one 
or more. But the subjects must be those who by mere accident of 
response are suited to be swayed by those who master them in this way. 

Occasionally a man of great ability becomes the willing tool of 
one who is inferior in intellect. 

Nature has made the full grown man the easy slave of the beautiful 
woman, especially one who is young and fascinating. 

Likewise nature has made the young girl the willing slave of the 
man. Take a girl of fifteen to seventeen who is emotional and who 
has built her castles in the air, and let her meet the handsome man 
in the thirties, and she will, in a majority of cases, become his subject. 
Jt is nature. 

In marriage the strongest combination is the man who is older than 
his wife, wedded to the girl in her teens. If they can find perpetual 
happiness with each other, there is no world so beautiful as that which 
they may set up. 

But this same girl in her teens is the prey of the rake and the roue. 

o 


436 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 


There are men of thirty and forty who have made it a business to 
have as their intimate mends the youngest girls that are available, 
and the power wielded over them is very disastrous to maidens. 

The chaperon is necessary as long as the girls are in their teens. 
Fond mothers do not think so; but they know little of what is going 
on. Ninety girls in every hundred who are without chaperons, are 
mistresses before they are wives. And their mothers know nothing of 
it. 

The Theme of the TENTH CYCLE is 

THE PREVENTION OF HYPNOTISM 

There are several classes of defenses: 

1. The physical defenses. 

2. The nervous defenses. 

3. The mental defenses. 

These means of escape from the attempted influence of others will 
be found to apply as well to magnetism as to hypnotism, and to all 
kinds of interference with the power of the will. 

A reverse law is made to apply in each of these divisions. 

If there are certain physical positions of the body that are favorable 
to the operator, it must be true that a refusal to adopt such positions 
will thwart the operator to that extent. 

A person who is not well poised in body is much more readily over¬ 
come in this art than one who is well set in every section of the 
frame. 

When the balance is easily interfered with, the operator has 6ome 
advantage. 

When the balance is solid, the advantage is with the subject. The 
reason for this is found in the Cycle that teaches the ways of hyp¬ 
notizing. 

So when the nervous system is in its extremes, as of eccentricities or 
of depression, the operator has the advantage. The poise between the 
extremes gives the power to the subject. 

Likewise the mind may be out of poise. 

Bad judgment, but especially a readiness to believe what is read 
and heard from gossipy sources, will throvr the mind out of poise and 
give the advantage to the operator. 

These facts should be thoroughly studied and understood. 

The Theme of the ELEVENTH CYCLE is 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 

DEVITALIZING THE BODY 


437 


Here is taken the first step toward the nobler form of mental con¬ 
trol. Yon are now being introduced to your two minds: 

You have a conscious mind. You have a psychic mind. 

The two are held apart by the same law of magnetism that holds the 
sun from the earth, and each planet from the sun, or one sun from 
another. It is not centrifugal force, but magnetism. 

Your psychic mind is just so far at all times from your conscious 
mind. You cannot tell what your psychic mind is doing or thinking, 
unless you secure the information from your conscious mind. 

You can tell your psychic mind anything you wish if you can get at 
it; but you are not able to get at it as long as your conscious mind is 
in the arena. You cannot bring the two minds together into the 
arena <any more than you can bring the earth any nearer the sun. 
They are held apart and yet held together within a certain distance. 
They cannot get much farther from each other, nor much nearer to 
each other. 

If you are able to hold your powers of control during the absence 
for a second of your conscious mind, you will reach your psychic mind. 

As the conscious mind is the master of the physical body, so the 
energized condition of the physical body will keep alert and present 
the conscious mind; therefore it is of the highest importance to throw 
the nerve forces in upon their centers, and this tends to send the 
conscious mind out of the arena. This seems a strange law, but it is 
a well-known fact. 

It is proved in all attempts to secure hypnotic control. 

The first thing the body does in that form of control is to send its 
nervous forces to their centers, and this causes devitalization. 

By the common law of reverse causes, the devitalization of the phys¬ 
ical body will send the nervous forces to their centers and tend to 
drive the conscious mind out of the arena. 

It may be stated as a certain fact that devitalization when properly 
mastered is the most powerful of the negative agencies in human life. 
There is no limit to what it may accomplish in its line. 

The Theme of the Twelfth Cycle is 

EMPTYING THE MIND 

This is the second step necessary in preparing the way for the direct 
association with the psychic mind. 


438 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


The contents of the conscious mind must be emptied out and kept 
away long enough to admit the psychic mind to enter the arena. 

While we admit the difficulty of the process, it is nevertheless pos¬ 
sible with every man and woman. The first results are slow and 
discouraging, but the final rewards are so great they should be 
sought. 

How many men and women, when they retire for the night, would 
like to possess the power to throw all thoughts out of the conscious 
mind, and bring on sweet sleep the moment their heads touch the 
pillows ? 

This power has been acquired wherever there has been a genuine 
attempt to secure it. 

The devitalized body tends always to empty the conscious mind. 

The latter cannot be accomplished without the previous development 
of the power of devitalization. This has been amply proved in count¬ 
less cases. 

The Theme of the THIRTEENTH CYCLE is 
THE TURNING POINTS 

The line of study now reached deals with the habits of the mind 
in thinking. It proceeds either along trains of thought, or else by 
disconnected subjects. 

In most instances one idea leads to another until the mind has 
wandered almost over the whole globe, and from one age to another. 

But trains come to an end after a while, and thoughts break from 
one idea to another, leaving a brief lapse between. 

In this lapse, no matter how small it may seem, there comes the 
turning point. 

It is impossible to pass from one subject to another, or from one 
idea to another, without an interval in the mind. If there is no con¬ 
nection between Sunday and the toothache, or between the book you 
last read and a pair of new shoes, there must be an interval when one 
idea breaks off, even if it is not one-tenth of a second in length of time. 
In fact, time has nothing to do with thinking. Under some cir¬ 
cumstances you can think twenty-four hours of activities in a second 
of time. 

If you are alert in the control you hold over yourself, the interval 
which marks the turning point is yours to do the most wonderful 
things in; for in this interval comes the leaping thought from the 
Other Mind. 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


439 


In this interval comes the knowledge that telepathy brings. 

In this interval comes the impression. 

In this interval comes the presentiment. 

In this interval comes the power of intuition. 

In this interval is born the genius of inspiration. 

It can be cultivated. 

Never before has the exact science of the process of all these powers 
been taught; and for this reason it is important that the Cycle should 
be read a hundred times, and all its suggestions mastered. 

The interval is the keystone in the study of everything that is 
psychic. 

The Theme of the FOURTEENTH CYCLE is 

THE PITFALLS OF THE MIND 

As you hope to master the intervals in your own mind, so you must 
be on guard against the influences that are poured out toward you 
by the minds of other persons. 

In the interval you will be caught if at all, provided you already 
possess a fairly strong mind. Only the weak are mastered all the 
time. Strong men and women give way in the intervals, and never at 
other times. Let this fact be remembered. 

In the turning points are found the openings for the power that 
you or that some one else wdll drive home. If your own control is the 
master, then some other person cannot be the tenant at the same time. 

The Theme of the FIFTEENTH CYCLE is 

IN NO-MAN'S-LAND 

This is a condition of absolute emptiness of the mind. It prepares 
now the way for the reverie. 

All the steps have been taken with an ever-increasing degree of 
importance in each. 

When we left the realm of hypnotism we came out upon higher and 
much grander ground; and several steps have been necessary for the 
work that is ahead. 

The purpose has been expressed to make this study independent of 
the power of hypnotism; retaining all the advantages and losing all 
the evils of that art. 

For this reason it has been sought to secure control of the nervous 
forces that control the conscious mind, by devitalizing the physical 
b t ody, and thereby sending those forces to their centers. 


440 


OPERATIONS OR 1 TEE OTHER MIND 


Having done this, the next step is so closely allied to it that it is 
known as a sister habit; and this is the emptying of the mind at 
will. 

The turning points are then seen. 

The pitfalls of these turning points are recognized and avoided. 

The interval is built and enlarged until no-manVland is reached. 
Here the road is now open to the grandest of all human experiences, 
the reverie. 

The Theme of the SIXTEENTH CYCLE is 
THE REVERIE 

Here the two minds are made to stand on the thresholds of the 
arena; one at one portal, and the other at the other portal. 

What can be more beautiful ? 

The true reverie is the camping ground between earth and heaven. 
In it have come all the revelations of the past, and all the sublime 
knowledge that has made man move onward and upward from the 
abject serf to the embowered angel. 

It is not the idle dream of the wandering conscious mind; but the 
standing apart of the conscious mind taking in the knowledge that is 
brought only to the edge of the arena of human existence. 

The true reverie is so marked with wonders that it cannot fail to be 
recognized when it has been created. 

The Theme of the SEVENTEENTH CYCLE is 

TRANSFERENCE OF FEELING 

Thoughts are concrete ideas. 

Feelings are moods and conditions of the mind and heart. 

These are much more powerful in their transmission than thoughts, 
for the latter must be translated into words in addition to being car¬ 
ried from one person to another; while feelings are caught just as 
they escape the individual who expresses them. The realm of study 
is a broad one, and well worth full attention. 

STORED TELEPATHY, the new phase of the psychic mind as 
far as its scientific study is concerned, is found in the transmission of 
feelings as well as in the passing of thoughts. In this connection 
see the first pages of this Twenty-sixth Cycle. 

One of the peculiar facts in the analysis of the transference of 
feeling is the resuming of words. Certain moods that have no 
tangible words in which to live, will pass from one person to another. 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


441 


and will often arrive as feelings and take on the condition of words. 
This is something like the telegram that leaves in the form of dots 
and dashes and arrives on the tape as readable sentences. 

The Theme of the EIGHTEENTH CYCLE is 

PEACTICE IN THE PAUSES 

We have stated under the head of the pitfalls of the mind that the 
interval which you may use for catching knowledge from the psychic 
mind, may also be used by some other person for controlling your 
mind. 

In the interval you may, at turning points, catch knowledge from 
your own psychic mind. 

In the interval, if you do not seek to obtain such knowledge, you 
may be made the subject of the influence from some other mind. This 
is a pitfall. If you do not delve into your own mind, you may be 
compelled against your consent, and generally against your realization 
of the fact, to take powerful suggestions from some other mind. 

But there are others who will have their minds in the intervals; and 
what some persons might do to you, you may do to others. 

This Cycle opens up one way of training your mind to this great 
work. 

The Theme of the NINETEENTH CYCLE is 

PEACTICE IN ANTICIPATIONS 

This again applies to your use of the minds of other persons. 

But you can make it a benefit to them as well as to yourself. 

It is one of the ways that you may help others. 

The art of guessing is one of the best parts of this study, if only 
an easy path is sought. 

Puzzles and all kinds of problems are published in the periodicals 
to amuse the minds of people who like to guess something. Why 
not put this pleasure to a good use? 

You may learn how to guess what is in the minds of other persons, 
and what they are about to say. This is both useful and highly bene- 
. ficial from every standpoint. 

Business men have learned by years of unconscious practice to guess 
what others are in need of, what they want, what they are about to 
say, and what they intend to do. In time this habit, if persisted in as 
a science, will make the mind acute to the highest degree. It brings 

on common and practical telepathy. 

" 


442 


OPERATIONS OF THE OTHER MIND 


You can become a good guesser. 

The Theme of the TWENTIETH CYCLE is 

ONE-SENSE TELEPATHY 

This is interesting. It starts with the idea that the five senses 
need not all be used at one time. There is much nervous energy to 
support the senses; and if part of it is taken from one sense, the others 
in use will receive its benefits. But if this energy is taken from all 
the senses but one, that wfill receive a much greater degree of power 
than it otherwise would have, and when this is applied to telepathy 
the sense thus employed is made very acute. 

Great achievements have been attained as the result of this con¬ 
centration of attention. 

All capable men and women are naturally telepathic. They are all 
the time having advantages come to them by the aid of the psychic 
mind. When this gift is brought to a focus in one sense at a time, 
it is very easy to understand the added power that it thus imparted. 

The Theme of the TWENTY-FIRST CYCLE is 

MEMORY IN TELEPATHY 

As the identity of every man and women depends on the power of 
memory, it is important that full attention should be given to this 
faculty. 

There are two kinds of memory. One recalls the superficial details 
of facts, and the other lives in the knowledge of things. The latter 
is the memory that will carry us from this world to the next. 

No person wishes to forget himself. 

To reach the next world without any knowledge whatever of the 
existence in this world, is like waking up to-morrow in total ignorance 
of yourself as the being of to-day. 

The only memory that outlives this earth is that which is allied to 
the psychic mind. 

The physical mind cannot survive the ravages of time or the wreck 
of death. It will carry all it holds down to the lap of earth and 
there be dissolved into the general fund. 

The Theme of the TWENTY-SECOND CYCLE is 

THE SILENCES 

There are many silences in this world, and some of them are in¬ 
cluded in the following table: 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


443 


There is the silence of the voice, in which nothing is spoken. 

There is the silence of the pen, in which nothing is written. 

There is the silence of the conscious mind, in which no thought 
takes place. 

There is the silence of the nerves, which feel no pain and suffer no 
emotion or excitement. 

There is the silence of the body, as in the France. 

There is the silence of death, which gives back nothing to earth. 

All these are the outward forms of silence, and are apart from those 
which are technically considered in the Cycle. 

The Theme of the TWENTY-THIRD CYCLE is 

WAXEFUL HYPNOTISM 

Here is presented a new science. 

Nothing is really new, but something that has been hidden for all 
the centuries may be brought to light for the first time in the history 
of the world. 

There has always been a suspicion that somehow men and women 
were able to exercise control over others whom they could not reach 
for the purpose of manipulation. 

The man on the platform a hundred feet away from another man 
in the audience is unable to reach him by any of the methods em¬ 
ployed in hypnotism; but he gets to him through the subtle and 
strange power now known as wakeful hypnotism. 

Since humanity first came on the earth, this kind of influence has 
been employed, but has not been recognized; nor has any definite 
science been hitherto produced for its development until the present 
study was completed; and thanks are due to others of higher rank than 
the author for the system herein presented. 

It will not be long before the motto will be universally understood 
that the “Man who thinks in a single idea is lost.” 

The skilful master of other minds knows the power that can be 
brought to bear on an individual who can be thrown into a single 
idea. Then it is that the mind is absorbed. In that condition of 
absorption the controlling belief is injected, and the work is done. 

But there are still more powerful agencies that can be brought to 
bear their guns on the helpless mind, and these are magnetism and 
the controlling voice. These are living, common powers, not theo¬ 
retical influences. 

The Theme of the TWENTY-EOURTH CYCLE is 


444 


OPERATIONS OF TEE OTHER MIND 

THE CONTROLLING- VOICE 


Here we again find one of the greatest powers, and it has never be¬ 
fore in any work been given consideration. It has always existed, 
but has not been recognized. 

Let this voice be made to act as an aid to wakeful hypnotism, which 
does not in any way seem to resemble ordinary hypnosis, and the 
combined powers will almost sway humanity out of its defenses, unless 
they are marshalled under the plan set forth in the Tenth Cycle. 

Readers of the announcements of the study of the psychic or con¬ 
trolling voice have the erroneous belief that such a voice is from 
the psychic world; that it speaks to human beings from some mys¬ 
terious realm. 

The opposite is the fact. 

The psychic voice is the voice of the Other Mind, but is so in its 
tones, and not as a message. When you speak to your friends, the 
tones you use are yours, and they are recognized by all who know you. 
But they are the tones that are impelled by your conscious mind. 
They reflect and carry your thoughts and your feelings. If your body 
is well, your voice will be an indication of that fact. If you are 
sick, your voice will be sick. If back of your tones there is the 
power that may be impelled from the psychic mind, then your voice 
would, in time, take up a peculiar color, and be transformed; but 
it would require many years to bring about a result that a few weeks 
or months may accomplish by direct practice. 

By a reverse law which is common in all nature, the effect may 
aid the cause; and the acquired psychic voice is certain to inspire the 
use of the psychic mind itself in speech. 

It is a part of wakeful hypnotism. 

If you have begun to employ the system of wakeful hypnotism, you 
will find it speedily enhanced by the use of the acquired psychic 
voice; for the tones are so peculiar and impressive that they of them¬ 
selves serve to absorb the attention of all who hear them. 

They are worth all the time it may take to create them, and many 
thousand times more. 

The Theme of the TWENTY-FIFTH CYCLE is 

WONDERS OF THE OTHER MIND 

We see at the start the manner in which the conscious mind is 
built, coming as it does from the mass of cells taken from the 


STUDIES OF THE OTHER MIND 


445 


common protoplasm of the earth. These, by their union, make the 
gray cells of the nervous system where the mind of physical man lives. 

All that is physical comes from the earth. 

The vegetable cell is the basis of everything that exists in the 
vegetable kingdom and in the animal kingdom. 

Every cell is a life in and to itself. 

It knows what it is created for, and no agency can make it build a 
vine if it has been given the mandate to construct a blade of grass. 

What is so great a power of intelligence in the single cell, certainly 
ought to amass such an engine of thought and purpose when it is 
brought into a collection of its own kind, the count of which would 
reach millions in every drop of gray matter so small that the naked 
eye could hardly detect it on the point of a needle. 

This is the gift of earth. It lives as the product of the ground, and 
on the product of the ground, and dies to supply its equivalent to 
the soil from which it sprang. 

This is the conscious mind. But it is separated from the psychic 
mind, and there has been a decree sometime in the dim past that the 
two minds shall not mingle. It may have been the penalty that was 
imposed on humanity when man was compelled to take on the garb 
and guise of earth. 

Why the Other Mind is not allowed to be ever-present in the opera¬ 
tions of the physical body has been fully explained in the pages of 
this volume. Together with the penalty of life in the flesh there 
is the penalty of separation from the knowledge of the long past and 
from the worlds of existence beyond this earth. 

But to-day this penalty is lessening. 

We see more now than any other age has ever been privileged to 
witness; and to-morrow the curtain will be lifted still higher. 

As the physical mind with its processes of reasoning is held in 
strict limitations, we are forced to turn to the Other Mind, from which 
nothing can be hidden. 

To-day is ushered in the psychic age. 


( 





























































































































































































































































































































































_ 






































































































































































































































- 




































































































































. 





















































































































































> 








































































































































































































































I* 




















































0 







































V 










Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Nov. 2004 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

111 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724) 779-2111 






































































































































